Skip to main content

Full text of "Official gazette of the United States Patent and Trademark Office: [microform]"

See other formats


^^^Hf ^^^^^^ ^^^^^H ^^^^H 


493E 




^^ ^^H ^^^^H ^^^1 






Vm 1 3 


mfli]i 


^^^B^^^^^^^H ^^^H ^^^^^^^^^^^^^H t^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^H 


8 


|39Q 


i|cM 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the 
UNITED STATES PATElSjT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE 

July 5, 1983 , Volume 1032 Number 1 



CONTENTS 



Page 



Pktent and Trademark Office Notices I 

Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) Information 1032 OG 

Reissue Applications Filed . . : 1032 OG 

Erratum ' 1032 OG 

Request for Reexamination Filed 1032 OG 

I 

Commissioner Ordered Reexamination 1032 OG 

Services by Publication 1032 OG 

Notice of Availability for Licensing 1032 OG 

Patent Certificates of Correction 1032 OG 

Disclaimers 1032 OG 

Dedication 1032 OG 

Disclaimer and Dedication 1032 OG 

Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in | 

Patent Depository Libraries '032 OG; 

Condition of Patent Applications '032 OG 

Reexaminations '032 OG 

Defensive Patent Publication: 103,201 

Reissue Patents Granted (31,296) * 

Plant Patents Granted (5,065) 

Patents Granted 

General and Mechanical (4,390,995) . • 

Chemical (4,391,601) ". 

Electrical (4,392,005) 

design Patents Granted (269,559) 

Index of Patentees . . .i 

Indices of Reissue. Reexamination, Design and Plant Patentees 

Index of Applicants of Defensive Publications 

Classification of 

Patents (Including Reissues, and Reexaminations) 

Designs, Plants and Defensive Publications 

Geographical Index of Residence of Inventors 

Patents (Including Reissues) 

Designs, Plants and Applicants of Defensive Publications 

$hange of Address Form and Subscription Order Form 



2 
2 
2 
3 
3 
3 
4 
5 
5 
5 
5 

6 

7 
9 
1 

< 3 
7 

9 
221 
331 

417 
PI 1 
PI 44 
PI 46 

PI 47 
PI 50 



PI 51 

PI 52 

Back Page 



The following are mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Documents, Government 
Printing Oflice, Washington. D.C., 20402, to whom all subscriptions should be made payable and all 
::pmmunications addressed: 

THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENT SECTION), issued weekly, 

THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly. 

GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS. 

GENERAL INFORMATION concerning TRADEMARKS. 



PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent and Trademark Office at $1.00 
each; PLANT PATENTS in color, $8.00 each; copies of TRADEMARKS at $1.00 each. Address 
<>rders to the Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks, Washington, D.C., 20231. 

Printing authorized by Section ll(a)3 of Title 35, U.S. Code P.T.O. 



PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE NOTICES 



Patent Cooperation Treaty Information 

For information concerning the PCT member 
countries see the notice appearing in the Official Gazette 
at 1017 O.G. 10 on Apr. 13, 1982. For use of the Euro- 
pean Patent Office as a Searching Authority for PCT 
applications filed in the United States, see the notice in 
the Official Gazette of Sept. 28. 1982 at 1022 O.G. 52. 

Note that the domestic PCT fees have been increased 
as of Oct. 1, 1982 by a rule change to 37 CFR 1.445 that 
was published at 1021 O.G. 11 on Aug. 10, 1982. Also 
note that the international PCT fees have changed as of 
Jan. 1, 1983 and the Search Fee for the European Patent 
Office as Searching Authority changed as of Jan. 22, 
1983. The notice regarding the change in international 
fees and the Search Fee for the European Patent Office 
appeared at 1025 O.G. 27, on 28 Dec. 1982. The current 
schedule of fees is as follows: 

Transmittal fee $ 125.00 

Starch fee 

U.S. Patent and Trademark Office as 
Searching Authority 

• No correspxDnding prior U.S. national 
application filed 500.00 

'^ • Corresponding prior U.S. national 

application filed 250.00 

European Patent Office as 
Searching Authority 

• All cases 670.00 

International Fees 

Basic Fees (first 30 pages) 265.00 

Basic Supplemental Fee (for each 

page over 30) 5.00 

Designation fee (for each national 

or regional office) 65.00 

GERALD J. MOSSINGHOFF, 
Dec. 3, 1982. Commissioner of Patents 

and Trademarks. 



REISSUE APPLICATIONS nLED 

Notice under 37 CFR l.n(b). The reissue applications list- 
ed below are open to inspection by the general public in the 
indicated Examining Groups and copies may be obtained by 
paying the fee therefor (37 CFR 1.21(b)). 

3,588,917, Re. S.N. 491,552, Filed May 4, 1983, CI. 
2/161, GOLF GLOVE, Anthony John Antonious, 
Owner of Record: Inventor, Attorney or Agent: Eugene 
L. Bernard, et al., Ex. Gp.: 353 

3,645,835, Re. S.N. 494,013, Filed May 12, 1983, CI. 
428/146, MOISTURE-VAPOR-PERMEABLE PRES- 
SURE SENSITIVE ADHESIVE MATERIALS, Mar- 
tin E. Hodgson, Owner of Record: T. J. Smith & Neph- 
ew Ltd.. Yorkshire, England, Attorney or Agent: Albert 
L. Jacobs, Jr., Ex. Gp.: 164 

3,878,876, Re. S.N. 486,027, Filed Apr. 18, 1983, CI. 
145/32R, MULTI-PURPOSE SAW BLADE SUSPEN- 
SION ARRANGEMENT FOR RECIPROCATING 
SAWS, Helmut Abel, Owner of Record: Inventor, At- 
torney or Agent: Costas S. Krikelis, Ex. Gp.: 323 

3,975,761, Re. S.N. 487,089, Filed Apr. 21, 1983, CI. 
358/78, METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR 
THE AVOIDANCE OF ERRORS DURING THE 
REPRODUCTION OF AN IMAGE PATTERN, 
Heinz Taudt, et al.. Owner of Record: Ing. Rudolf Hell 
GmbH.. Kiel, Germany, Attorney or Agent: James Van 
Santen, et al., Ex. Gp.: 233 



4,119,754 Re. S.N. 485,508, Filed Apr. 15, 1983, CI. 
162/000.000, PAPERMAKERS FABRICS, Bryan J. 
Gisbourne, Owner of Record: Scapa-Porritt Ltd., Lanca- 
shire, England, Attorney or Agent: Martin Fleit, et al., 
Ex. Gp.: 173 

4,135,213, Re. S.N. 492,037, Filed May 5, 1983, CI. 
358/142, ROW GRABBING VIDEO DISPLAY TER- 
MINAL HAVING LOCAL PROGRAMMABLE 
CONTROL THEREOF, Leonard Wintfeld, et al.. 
Owner of Record: IDR, Inc., Farmingdale, N. Y., Attor- 
ney or Agent: Lawrence G. Kurland, et al., Ex. Gp.: 
233 

4,256,945, Re. S.N. 474,096, Filed Mar. 10, 1983, CI. 
219/10.75. ALTERNATING CURRENT ELECTRI- 
CALLY RESISTIVE HEATING ELEMENT HAV- 
ING INTRINSIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL, Phil- 
ip S. Carter, et al.. Owner of Record: Oximetrix, Inc., 
Mountain View, Calif, Attorney or Agent: William D. 
Hall, et al., Ex. Gp.: 213 

4,265,193, Re. S.N. 491,937, Filed May 5, 1983, CI. 
114/267, CONCRETE MARINE FLOAT AND 
METHOD OF FABRICATING, Wesley W. Sluys, 
Owner of Record: Builders Concrete, Inc., Billingham, 
Wash., Attorney or Agent: Richard W. Seed, et al., Ex. 
Gp.: 315 

4,266,668, Re. S.N. 493,564, Filed May 11, 1983, CI. 
206/557, TELESCOPING SLICED BREAD DIS- 
PENSER. Yong K. Paek, Owner of Record: Inventor, 
Attorney or Agent: Harold L. Stowell, et al., Ex. Gp.: 
241 

4,290,304, Re. S.N. 493,976, Filed May 12, 1983, CI. 
73/862.25, BACK-UP POWER TONGS AND METH- 
OD, Emery L. Eckel, Owner of Record: Eckel Manu- 
facturing Co., Odessa. Tex.. Attorney or Agent: Robert 
M. Carwell, et al., Ex. Gp.: 244 

4,290,816, Re. S.N. 492,183, Filed May 6. 1983. CI. 
106/287.32, SULFUR COMPOUNDS AND METHOD 
OF MAKING SAME, Allen C. Ludwig, et al.. Owner 
of Record: Southwest Research Institute, San Antonio, 
Tex.. Attorney or Agent: W. F.Hyer, Ex. Gp.: 142 

4,306,034, Re. S.N. 487,365, Filed Apr. 21, 1983, CI. 
521/139.000, COMPOSITION FOR PRODUCING 
ARTICLE SIMULATING PLANTATION CREPE 
RUBBER, Agmund K. Thorsrud, Owner of Record: 
Phillips Petroleum Co.. Bartlesville. Okla., Attorney or 
Agent: Louis N. French, et al., Ex. Gp.: 143 

4,319,214, Re. S.N. 485,261, Filed Apr. 15, 1983, CI. 
337/343, CREEPLESS, SNAP ACTION THERMO- 
STAT, Omar Givler, Owner of Record: Portage Electric 
Products. Inc., North Can toft, Ohio, Attorney or Agent: 
Lloyd McAulay, et al., Ex. Gp.: 212 

4,364,292, Re. S.N. 491.758, Filed May 5. 1983, CI. 
83/605, FLOOR OR BENCH MOUNTED CONDUIT 
CUTTING DEVICE, Glenn A. Wozniak. et al., Owner 
of Record: Indian Head Inc., New York, N. Y, Attorney 
or Agent: William R. Laney, et al., Ex. Gp.: 324 



Erratum 

In the Official Gazette of Feb. 15, 1983, an incorrect 
patent number, 4,306,624, appears in the following list- 
ing under "REISSUE APPLICATIONS FILED": 

4,306,624, Re. S.N. 442,9 1^ Filed Nov. 19, 1982. CI. 
198/341, CONVEYOR APPARATUS, Antonio 



1032OG 2 



\/ 



July 5, 1983 



U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE 



1032 OG 3 



Magni, Owner of Record: AXIS, S.p.A., Firenze, It- 
aly. Attorney or Agent: Lawrence I. Lemer, Ex. 
Gp.: 313. 
The listing should read as follows: 

4,306,646, Re. S.N. 442,913, Filed Nov. 19, 1982, CI. 
198/341, CONVEYOR APPARATUS, Antonio 
Magni. Owner of Record: AXIS. S.p.A.. Firenze, It- 
aly, Attorney or Agent: Lawrence I. Lerner, " 
Gp.: 313. 



Ex. 



REQUESTS FOR REEXAMINATION nLED 



Notice under 37 CFR l.n(c). The requests for re- 
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen- . 
eral public in the indicated Examining Groups. Copies of the 
requests and related papers may be obtained by paying the 
fee therefor established in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)). 

In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re- 
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no- 
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed (37 
CFR l.248(aX5)and 1.525(b)). 

3,732,068, Reexam. No. 90/000,382, Requested: May 
16, 1983, CI. 432/120, CYLINDRICAL ELONGATED 
FURNACE FOR TREATING MATERIAL AT 
HIGH TEMPERATURE AND UNDER HIGH 
PRESSURE, Hans Larker. Owner of Record: Alimanna 
Svenska Flektriska Aktiebolaget, Vasteras, Sweden. Attor- 
ney or Agent: None. Ex. Gp.: 344, Requester: Stanley P. 
Fisher, et al.. Arlington. Va. 

3,932,044, Reexam. No. 90/000.385, Requested: June 1, 
1983, CI. 401/265, PEN POINT FOR WRITING IN- 
STRUMENTS, Nobuyuki Otake, et al.. Owner of Rec- 
ord: Requester, Attorney or Agent: Parkhurst & Oliff, Ex. 
Gp.: 336, Requester: Tokyo Boski K. K., Tokyo, Japan 

4,038,498, Reexam. No. 90/000,384, Requested: May 

26. 1983. CI. 179/18PC, CENTRAL OFFICE 
SWITCHING SYSTEM WITH REMOTE LINE 
SWITCH, Frank S. Boxall, Owner of Record: Inventor. 
Attorney or Agent: Flehr, Hohbach. et al.. Ex. Gp.: 214 
Requester: Inventor 

4,379,168, Reexam. No. 90/000.387. Requested: May 

27, 1983. CI. 424/356. PESTICIDES CONTAINING 
D-LIMONENE, Vincent Dotolo, Owner of Record: In- 
ventor, Attorney or Agent: James C. Wray, Ex. Gp.: 125 
Requester: Roger L. Browdy, Washington. DC. 



Sendee by Publication 



COMMISSIONER ORDERED REEXAMINATIONS 

Notice under 37 CFR I.I 1(c). The orders for re- 
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen- 
eral public in the indicated Examining Group. Copies of the 
Orders and other related papers may be obtained by paying 
the fee therefor established in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)). 

In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re- 
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no- 
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed. 37 
CFR 1.248(aK5) and 1.525(b). 

4,338,751, Reexam. No. 90/000,394, Ordered: June 10, 
198'3, CI. 52/187 KNOCKDOWN SPIRAL STAIR- 
WAY, Forest E. Sanders, Owner of Record: Inventor, 
Attorney or Agent: Morton S. Adler, Ex. Gp.: 354. 

4,338,757, Reexam. No. 90/000,393, Ordered: June 10, 
1983, CI. 52/699, DEVICE FOR CONNECTING A 
STRUCTURE WITH A WALL TO BE POURED 
WITH CONCRETE, Heinz Witschi, et al., Owner of 
Record: Inventors. Attorney or Agent: Wigman & Co- 
hen, Ex. Gp.: 354. 

4,343,124, Reexam. No. 90/000,392, Ordered: June 10. 
1983. CI. 52/226. STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS. Fried- 
rich C. Math, Owner of Record: British Petroleum Co.. 
Ltd.. London. England. Attorney or Agent: Morgan, 
Finnegan, et al., Ex. Gp.: 354. 



A petition to cancel each of the registrations identified 
below having been filed, and the notice of such proceed- 
ings sent by certified mail to registrant at the last known 
address having been returned by the Postal Service as 
undeliverable, notice is hereby given that unless the reg- 
istrants listed herein, their legal assigns or legal represen- 
tatives, shall enter an appearance within thirty days 
from the date of this publication, the cancellation will be 
proceeded with as in the case of default. 

New World Communications, Inc., Indianapolis. Ind., 
Reg. No. 1,060,995. for the mark "NEW WORLD", 
Cane. No. 13,459. 

Insight Dynamics Corp., New York, N.Y., Reg. No. 
1,136,437, for the mark "INSIGHT DYNAMICS", 
Cane. No. 13,471. 

Topper Corp., assignee, by assignment and change of 
name, of De Luxe Reading Corp., Elizabeth, N.J., Reg. 
No. 766,656, for the mark "CANDY FASHION", Cane. 
No. 13,490. 

The Thomas Holmes Corp., assignee by mesne assign- 
ment of Sulray, Inc., Philadelphia, Pa., Reg. No. 
770,851, for the mark "SPANETTE", Cane. No. 13,548. 
Pro-Am Skateboard Products. Inc., Downey. Calif., 
Reg. No. 1,100,891, for the mark "PURE GOLD", 
Cane. No. 13,603. 

Mid-Tec, Inc., St. Charles, Mo., Reg. No. 923,403, for 
the mark "CELL-TEC", Cane. No. 13,611. 

Tri-R Chemicals, Inc.. Boca Raton, Fla., Reg. No. 
1,066,008. for the mark "BOND-CRAFT", Cane. No. 
13,623. 

Newporter Industries, Inc., Irvine, Calif., Reg. No. 

1,100,281, for the mark "PIPELINE", Cane. No. 13,629. 

Dent-U-Sonic Corp., North Miami Beach, Fla., Reg. 

No. 887,562, for the mark "DENT U SONIC", Cane. 

No. 13,658. 

Don Heyer, Anaheim. Calif, Reg. No. 404,741, for 
the mark "VARIGEAR", Cane. No. 13,674. 

Legi Electronics Corp., assignee of Ishimoto Trading 
Co., Gardena, Calif, Reg. No. 865,664, for the mark 
"ITRON", Cane. No. 13,675. 

Joseph A. McCoirum, Inc., assignee of R. M. Hol- 
lingshead Corp., Marlton, N.J., Reg. No. 443,509, for 
the mark "COCOON", Cane. No. 13,700. 

Whitney Paige Cosmetics, Ltd., Mount Vernon, N.Y., 
Reg. No. 1.106,954. for the mark "EMOLLIENCE 
P.M.". Cane. No. 13,723. 

ERMA S. BROWN, 

Deputy Clerk of the 
Trademark Trial and 
Appeal Board. 
For MARGARET M. LAURENCE, 

Assistant Commissioner 
for Trademarks. 



Service by Publication 



A petition to cancel the registration identified below 
having been filed, and the notice of default of such pro- 
ceedings sent to registrant at the last known address 
having been returned by the Postal Service as un- 
deliverable, notice is hereby given that unless the regis- 
4rant listed herein, its legal assign or legal representative, 
shall enter an appearance within thirty days from the 
date of this publication, judgment will be entered against 
registrant and said registration will be cancelled. 

Drossier and Associates, Inc., assignee of Ceco Mar- 
keting Consulting & Research, Inc., San Francisco, 
Calif., Reg. No. 853,394, for the mark "COMPASS", 
Cane. No. 13,469. 

ERMA S. BROWN, 

Deputy Clerk of the 
Trademark Trial and 
Appeal Board. 
For MARGARET M. LAURENCE, 

Assistant Commissioner 
for Trademarks. 



1032 CXj 4 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



National Technical Information Service 

U.S. Government-Owned Inventions 

Notice of Availability for Licensing 

The inventions listed below are owned by agencies of 
the U.S. Government and are available for licensing in 
the U.S. in accordance with 35 U.S.C. 207 to achieve ex- 
peditious commercialization of results of federally funded 
research and development. Foreign patents are filed on 
selected inventions to extend market coverage for U.S. 
companies and may also be available for licensing. 

Technical and licensing information on specific inven- 
tions may be obtained by writing to: 

Office of Government Inventions and Patents 
U.S. Department of Commerce 
P.O. Box 1423 
Springfield, Va. 22151 



Please cite the number and title of inventions of inter- 
est. 

GEORGE KUDRAVETZ, 

• I Program Manager, 

' Office of Government Inventions and Patents 

National Technical Information Service 
U.S. Department of Commerce. 

Department of the Air Force 

SN 6-169,231 (4,377,755). SIGNAL COMPRESSOR 

APPARATUS 
SN 6-191,044 (4,375,597). METHOD OF IMPLE- 
MENTING UNIFORM BACKGROUND 
CHARGE SUBTRACTION IN A RADIATION 
SENSING ARRAY. 
SN 6-222,845 (4,380,763). CORROSION MONITOR- 
ING SYSTEM. 
SN 6-227,558 (4,381,450). PULSED RADIATION DO- 
SIMETRY APPARATUS. 
SN 6-237,020 (4,381,509). CYLINDRICAL MICRO- 
WAVE LENS ANTENNA FOR WIDEBAND 
SCANNING APPLICATIONS. 
SN 6-242,816 (4,377,341). SYSTEM FOR MEASUR- 
ING ANGULAR DEVIATION IN A TRANSPAR- 
ENCY. 
SN 6-251,696 (4,377,824). MULTI-CHANNEL LON- 
GITUDINAL VIDEO TAPE RECORDING. 
SN 6-291,891 (4,377,546). PROCESS FOR PRO- 
DUCING AROMATIC HETEROCYCLIC POL- 
YMER ALLOYS. 
SN 6-313,859 (4,377,641). METHOD AND AP- 
PARATUS FOR THE CONTINUOUS 
EXTRACTION OF INGREDIENTS FROM SAM- 
PLES 
SN 6-366,744 (4,380,619). OXY-AND THIOARYL- 
PHENYLATED AROMATIC HETEROCYCLIC 
POLYMERS. 
SN 6-368,784 (4,377,291). SEALING ASSEMBLY. 
SN 6-435,522. IMAGING APPARATUS FOR 
TRANSVERSE ELECTRODE ELECTRO-OPTIC 
TUNABLE FILTER. 
SN 6-441,815. OPTICAL ALIGNMENT DEVICE 

FOR BINOCULAR DISPLAYS. 
SN 6-444,004. LIFTOFF SUPPRESSION APPARA- 
TUS FOR THE FERROMAGNETIC RESO- 
NANCE PROBE. 



SN 6-447,599. SCHOTTKY BARRIER INFRARED 
DETECTOR AND PROCESS. 

SN 6-468,781. A METHOD FOR THE PREPARA- 
TION OF EPITAXIAL FILMS OF MERCURY 
CADMIUM TELLURIDE. 

SN 6-470,749. VERTICAL LAUNCH ALIGNMENT 
TRANSFER APPARATUS. 

SN 6-471,078. ECCENTRICALLY TIGHTENED 
LATCH DEVICE. 

SN 6-475,417. STORAGE CABINET TRAVEL 
LOCK. 

SN 6-475,436. A SCANNING SYSTEM FOR MAP- 
PING GAS FLOW UNIFORMITY IN A LAZER. 

SN 6-475,664. PNEUMATIC CLAMPING DEVICE. 

SN 6-475,665. LATERAL SUPPORT SYSTEM FOR 
CANISTER-LAUNCHED MISSILE. 

SN 6-475,669. AUGMENTOR FUEL SPRAYING 
WITH DRAIN VENT. 

SN 6-477,793. IMPROVED TITANIUM METAL- 
MATRIX COMPOSITES. 

SN 6-477,998. MULTI-MICROPROCESSOR APPA- 
RATUS. 

SN 6-478,581. SYNTHESIS OF PENTAFLUORO- 
TELLURIUM HYPOFLUORITE. 

SN 6-479,221. HYPERPRODUCING CELLULASE 
MICROORGANISM. 

SN 6-480,156. INTERFACE ALIGNMENT SYSTEM. 

SN 6-480,170. TWO FAULT TOLERANT TRANS- 
MITTER ACTIVATOR. 

SN 6-484,329. FLAMEHOLDER WITH INTEGRAT- 
ED AIR MIXER. 

SN 6^84,390. STRUTLESS DIFFUSER FOR GAS 
TURBINE ENGINE. 

SN 6-488,887 (4,376,716). PREPARATION OF STA- 
BLE SODIUM CARBONATE DISPERSIONS. 

Enivronmental Protection Agency 

SN 6-213,799 (4,381,681). 
COLLECTOR. 



PARTICULATE SAMPLt 



Department of Health and Human Services 

SN 6-476,830. A PRACTICAL TOTAL SYNTHESIS 
UNNATURAL ENANTIOMERS OF OPIUM-DE- 
RIVED MORPHINANS. 

Department of the Interior 

SN 6-363,367 (4,381,287). SEPARATION OF ZIRCO- 
NIUM AND URANIUM. 

SN 6-460,102. RECOVERY OF METALS FROM 
GRINDING SLUDGES. 

Tennessee Valley Authority 

SN 6-164,418 (4,379,939). PREPARATION OF NI- 
TROGEN ERTILIZERS FROM OXALATE ES- 
TERS PREPARED BY THE OXIDATIVE CAR- 
BONYLATION OF ALCOHOLS OVER NOBEL 
METAL CATALYSTS UTILIZING REGENERA- 
BLE 2,5-CYCLOHEXADIENE-l,4-DIONE OXI- 
DANTS. 

SN 6-336,662 (4,377,406). AMMONIUM POLYPHOS- 
PHATE SULFATE FERTILIZERS FROM WET- 
PROCESS PHOSPHORIC ACID. 



< 



PATENT NOTICES 



Certificates of Correction for the Week of July 5, 1983 



Re. 31.177 

3,920,278 

4,012,326 

4,045,563 

4,108,366 

4,150,779 

4,151,645 

4,184,203 

4,192,935 

4,213,987 

4,233,080 

4,234,493 

4,236,365 

4,249,451 

4,254,793 

4,273,898 

4,276,122 

4,282,867 

4,283,249 

4,287,338 

4,294,309 

4,296,889 

4,298,927 

4,301,052 

4,303,098 

4,304,267 

4,309,304 

4,315,699 

4,322,816 

4,328,013 



4,331,175 
4,342,161 
4,343,902 
4,344,356 
4,344,539 
4,345,302 
4,345,855 
4,347,678 
4,349,848 
4,350,975 
4,351,977 
4,353,997 
4,354,497 
4,355,151 
4,359,273 
4,359,304. 
4,360,702 
I 4,362,578 
! 4,363,835 
4,363,879 
4,365,468 
4,365,546 
4,365,994 
4,366,092 
4,366,162 
4,366.307 
4,367,022 
4,367,444 
4,367,511 
4,367,921 



4,368,199 

4,368,233 

4,368,247 

4,368,533 

4,369,105 

4,369,280 

4,369,444 

4.369,522 

4.370,114 

4,370,193 

4,370,328 

4,370,335 

4,370,599 

4,370,614 

4,371,446 

4,371,519 

4,371,823 

4,371,843 

4,371,844 

4,372,143 

4,372,384 

4,372,480 

4,373,208 

4,373,416 

4,374,256 

4,374,296 

4,374,427 

4,374,428 

4,374,490 

4,374,675 



4,374,992 

4,375,057 

4,375,136 

4,375,256 

4,376,030 

4,376,100 

4,376,250 

4,376,322 

4,376,769 

4,376,800 

4,376,834 

4,377,072 

4,377,435 

4,377,498 

4,377,572 

4,378,204 

4,378,911 

4,379,607 

4,379,638 

4,380,304 

4,380,625 

4,380,882 

4,381,101 

4,381,255 

4,381,303 

4,381,699 

4,382,244 

4,382,722 

4,383,213 

4,383,219 



Disclaimers 



4,i20,222.— John A. Lopez, Houston, Tex. STORAGE- 
STABLE PRECATALYZED POLYEPOXIDE 
COMPOSITIONS. Patent dated Mar. 16, 1982. Dis- 
claimer filed Aug. 23, 1982, by the assignee. Shell Oil 
Co. 

Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1 to 10, inclu- 
sive of said patent. 

4,332,320.— ^y^^rey A. Feibelman, Cranston, R.I. PEN- 
DANT DISPLAY CARD. Patent dated June 1, 
1982. Disclaimer filed Apr. 28, 1983, by the assignee, 
A&H Mfg Co. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to the entire remaining 

^term of said patent. 

4,366,761.— /Joy T. Card, Chattanooga, Tenn. DUAL 

SHIFTABLE NEEDLE BARS FOR TUFTING 

MACHINE. Patent dated Jan. 4, 1983. Disclaimer 

filed Apr. 28, 1983, by the asignee, Tuftco Corp. 

Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1-5 and 11 of 

said patent. 

4,376,916.— yo/j« B. Glaberson, Stamford, Conn. SIG- 
NAL COMPRESSION AND EXPANSION SYS- 
TEM. Patent dated Mar. 15, 1983. Disclaimer filed 
May 5, 1983, by the assignee, CBS. Inc. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 16 and 17 of 

said patent. 

4 383,199.— SAo/cA/ Washino, Hyogo. and Eisho Nosaka, 

Kyoto, Japan. ELECTRON GUN. Patent dated 

May 10, 1983. Disclaimer filed Feb. 25. 1983. by the 

assignee. Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. 

The term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 20, 1998, 

has been disclaimed. 



3,898,566.— 7s>-fle/ Switzer, North York, Ontario, Canada; 
Arie Zimmerman, Santa Monica; Lucius T. La Fleur, 
Torrance and Patrick A. Segrave, Santa Monica, 
Calif METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RE- 
DUCING DISTORTION IN MULTICARRIER 
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS. Patent dated July 
29, 1975. Disclaimer filed May 9, 1983, by the assign- 
ee, Phasecom Corp. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1 through 17 

and 20 through 27 of said patent. 

4,124,834.— fi/wcrrf J. Walsh, Hermitage, Pa. ELEC- 
TRICAL INDUCTIVE APPARATUS. Patent dat- 
ed Nov. 7, 1978. Disclaimer filed Apr. 29, 1983, by 
the assignee, Westinghouse Electric Corp. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa- 
tent. 

4,162,693.— yoA/i Heller Beckman, Downers Grove, 111. 
REVERSIBLE SHIRRED CASING AND METH- 
OD FOR PRODUCING IT. Patent dated Jifly 31, 
1979. Disclaimer filed May 9, 1983, by the assignee. 
Union Carbide Corp. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to the entire term of said 
patent. 



Dedication 

3,929,191.— yo/jrt Wayne Graham; Thomas Wayne Muecke 
and Claude Everett Cooke, Jr. Houston, Tex. METH- 
OD FOR TREATING SUBTERRANEAN FOR- 
MATIONS. Patent dated Dec. 30, 1975. Dedication 
filed Mar. 25, 1983, by the assignee, Exxon Produc- 
tion Research Co. 
Hereby dedicates to the Public the entire remaining 

term of said patent. 



Disclaimer and Dedication 



3 265.902.— S/^nev A. Wingate. Concord, Mass. PHOTO- 

' ELECTRIC SHAFT ANGLE ENCODER. Patent 

dated Aug. 9, 1966. Disclaimer and Dedication filed 

May 2. 1983. by the assignee, Itek Corp. 

Hereby disclaims and dedicates to the Public the term 

of the patent subsequent to Mar. 15, 1983. 

1032 OG 5 



Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in 

Patent Depository Libraries 



The libraries listed herein, designated as patent def>osi- 
tory libraries, receive current issues of U.S. Patents and 
maintain collections of earlier issued patents. The scope 
of these collections varies from library to library, rang- 
ing from patents of only recent months or years in some 
libraries to all or most of the patents issued since 1870, 
or earlier, in other libraries. 

These patent collections are open to public use and 
each of the patent depository libraries, in addition, offers 
the publications of the patent classification system (e.g. 
The Manual of Classification, Index to the U.S. Patent 
Classification, Classification Definitions, etc.) and pro- 
vides technical staff assistance in their use to aid the 
public in gaining effective access to .information con- 
tained in patents. With one exception, as noted in the 



State 



Name of Library 



table following, the collections are organized in patent 
number sequence. 

Depending upon the library, the patents may be avail- 
able in microfilm, in bound volumes of paper copies, or 
in sotne combination of both. Facilities for making paper 
copies from either microfilm in reader-printers or from 
the bound volumes in paper-to-paper copies are general- 
ly provided for a fee. 

Owing to variations in the scope of patent collections 
among the patent depository libraries and in their hours 
of service to the public, anyone contemplating use of the 
patents at a pariicular library is advised to contact that 
library, in advance, about its collection and hours, so as 
to avert possible inconvenience. 

Telephone Contact 



Alabama Birmingham Public Library (205) 254-2555 

Arizona " Tempe: Science Library, Arizona State University (602) 965-7607 

California Los Angeles Public Library (213) 626-7555 Ext. 273 

Sacramento: California State Library (916) 322-4572 

Sunnyvale: Patent Information Clearinghouse* (408) 738-5580 

Colorado Denver Public Library (303) 571-2122 

Delaware Newark: University of Delaware (302) 738-2238 

Georgia Atlanta: Price Gilbert Memorial Library, Georgia Institute of 

Technology (404) 894-4508 

Illinois Chicago Public Library (312) 269-2865 

Louisiana Baton Rouge: Troy H. Middleton Library, Louisiana State 

University (504) 388-2570 

Massachusetts Boston Public Library (617) 536-5400 Ext. 265 

Michigan Detroit Public Library (313) 833-1450 

Minnesota Minneapolis Public Library &. Information Center (612) 372-6552 

Missouri Kansas City: Linda Hall Library (816) 363-4600 

St. Louis Public Library (314) 241-2288 Ext. 214, 

Ext. 215 

Nebraska Lincoln: University of Nebraska- Lincoln, Engineering Library .. (402)472-3411 

New Hampshire Durham: University of New Hampshire Library (603) 862-1777 

New Jersey Newark Public Library (201) 733-7814 

New York Albany: New York Suic library (518) 474-5125 

Buffalo and Erie Coun» , i' hlic Library (716) 856-7525 Ext. 267 

New York Public Libr«. The Research Libraries) (212) 930-0850 

North Carolina Raleigh: D. H. Hill Library. N.C State University (919) 737-3280 

Ohio Cincinnati & Hamilton Count y. Public Library of (513) 369-6936 

Cleveland Public Library (216) 623-2870 

Columbus: Ohio State University Libraries (614) 422-6286 

Toledo/Lucas County Public Library (419) 255-7055 Ext. 212 

Oklahoma Stillwater: Oklahoma State University Library (405) 624-6546 

Pennsylvania Philadelphia: Franklin Institute Library (215) 448-1321** 

Pittsburgh: Carnegie Library of Pittsburgh (412) 622-3138 

University Park: Pattee Library, Pennsylvania State University . . (814) 865-4861 

Rhode Island Providence Public Library (401) 521-7722 Ext. 226 

South Carolina Charleston: Medical University of South Carolina (803) 792-2372 

Tennessee Memphis & Shelby County Public Library and Information 

Center (901) 528-2957 

Texas Dallas Public Library (214) 749-4176 

Houston: The Fondren Library, Rice University (713) 527-8101 Ext. 2587 

Washington Seattle: Engineering Library, University of Washington (206) 543-0740 

Wisconsin Madison: Kurt F. Wendt Engineering Library, University of 

Wisconsin (608) 262-6845 

Milwaukee Public Library (414) 278-3043 

All of the above-listed libraries offer CASSIS (Classification And Search Support Information System), which 
provides direct, on-line access to Patent and Trademark Office data. 

'Collection organized by subject matter. 
' ••Call only between the hours of 10:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. 



1032 OG 6 



PATENT EXAMINING CORPS 

RENE D. TEGTMEYER, Assistant Commissioner 

WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Assistant Commissioner 

CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF April 2, 1983 



PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS 



Actual 

Filing Date 

of Oldest 

New Case 

Awaiting 

Action 



CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS 

GENERAL CHEMISTRY AND PETROLEUM CHEN^ISTRY, GROUP 1 10-D. E TALBERT, Director ^ 

Inorganic Compounds; Inorganic Compositions; Organo-Metal and Organo-Metalloid Chemistry; Metallurgy; Metal- 
lurgical Apparatus; Metal Stock; Electro Chemistry; Batteries; Hydrocarbons; Mineral Oil Technology; Lubricating 
Compositions; Gaseous Compositions; Fuel and Igniting Devices. 
GENERAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, GROUP 120-C E. VAN HORN, Director . . . .^ . • , . . • 

Heterocyclic Amides; Alkaloids; Azo; Sulfur; Misc. Esters; Carbohydrates; Herbicides; Poisons; Medicines; Cosmetics; 
Steroids Oxo and Oxy: Quinones; Acids; Carboxylic Acid Esters; Acid Anhydrides; Acid Halides 
HIGH POLYMER CHEMISTRY, PLASTICS AND MOLDING, GROUP 140-J O. THOMAS, JR., Director . . 
Synthetic Resins Rubber; Proteins; Macromolecular Carbohydrates; Mixed Synthetic Resin Compositions; Synthetic 
Resins With Natural Polymers and Resins; Reclaiming; Pore-Forming; Compositions (Pari) e.g.. Coating; Molding; 
Ink- Prosthdontics; Adhesive and Abrading Compositions; Molding, Shaping, Treating Process, and Apparatus 
Therefor; Irradiation (Part); Bleaching; Dyeing; Leather, Fur and Textile Treating Compositions. 
COATING, LAMINATING AND PHOTOGRAPHY, GROUP 160-S N. ZAHARNA, Director . . ... • ;^ • • 
Coating- Processes, Apparatus and Misc. Products; Laminating Methods and Apparatus; Stock Materials; Adhesive 
Bonding Special Chemical Manufactures; Special Utility Compositions; and Photography. 
SPECIALIZED CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING, GROUP 170- 

R. F. WHITE, Director ^ ^ \^ - ,. r,' x. y.^ ' ' 'r^^ ' xa ' ' r '^ 

Fertilizers- Foods- Fermentation; Analytical Chemistry; Reactors; Sugar and Starch; Paper Making; Glass Manufac- 
ture- GaV Heating and Illuminating; Cleaning Processes; Liquid Purification; Distillation; Preserving; Liquid, Gas, 
and 'solid Separation; Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus; Refrigeration; Concentrative Evaporators; Mineral Oils 
Apparatus; Misc. Physical Processes. 

ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS 

INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS, PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS, GROUP 210-S. W. ENGLE Director 
Generation and Utilization; General Applications; Conversion and Distributioh; Heating and Related Art Conductors; 
Switches Photography; Motion Pictures; Horology; Acoustics; Recorders; Weighing Scales. 

SPECIAL LAWS ADMINISTRATION, GROUP 220-KENNETH L. CAGE, Director • • • • " ' vL 

Ordnance, Firearms and Ammunition; Lubrication; Illumination; Nuclear Reactors; Acoustics, Communications Op- 
tics- Radar Directional Radio; Torpedoes; Seismic Exploring; Cathode Ray Tube Circuitry; Cryptography; Laser 
Devices; Radioactive Materials; Powder Metallurgy, Rocket Fuels; Special. Fuel, Explosive and Thermic Composi- 
tions; Thermal and Photoelectric Batteries. ^.„. , r-»,v/ T^ . 

INFORMATION TRANSMISSION, STORAGE, AND RETRIEVAL, GROUP 230-EARL LEVY, Director 

Communications; Multiplexing Techniques; Television; Facsimile; DaU Processing, Computation and Conversion; 
Storage Devices and Related Arts. „_.,„ ,.„ 

RECEPTACLES, CLEANING, WINDING. AND MEASURING, GROUP 240- 

G. M. FDRLENZA, Director • • ' . • V ■ ' ' ' '^i ' -' ' 

Receptacles; Bearings; Joint Packing; Conduits; Switches; Presses; Plumbing Fixtures, Textile Spinning; Cleaning; 
Food Treating; Agitating; Centrifugal Separating; Geometrical Instruments; Sound Recording; Image Projecors; 
Web Feedingf Winding and. Reeling; Cable Hoists; Measunng and Testing; Indicating; Fluent Matenal Handling; 
Shaft; Impellers; Rotary Fluid Motors. .. . .T-T-..r-«,c. r^ . 

ELECTRONIC COMPONENT SYSTEMS AND DEVICES, GROUP 250-S. S. MATTHEWS, Director 

Semi-Conductor and Space Discharge Systems and Devices; Electronic Component Circuits; Wave Transmission 
Lines and Networks; Optics; Radiant Energy; Measunng. 

DESIGN, GROUP 290— KENNETH L CAGE, Director ^ 

Industrial Arts; Household, Personal and Fine Arts. . 

^ MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS 

HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA. GROUP 310-B. R. GRAY, Director ... _ . ' _ ; 

Conveyors; Hoists; Elevators; Article Handling Implements; Store Service; Sheet Feeding; Dispensing; Pluid Sprin- 
kline Fire Extinguishers; Coin Handling; Check Controlled Apparatus; Classifying and Assorting Solids; Boats; 
Shins- Aeronautics Motor and Land Vehicles and Appurtenances; Brakes; Railways and Railway Equipment. 
MATErKl SHAPING. ARTICLE MANUFACTURING. TOOLS, GROUP 320-STEPHEN G^ K UNI N Director 
Manufacturing Processes, Assembling. Combined Machines, Special Article Making, Metal Deforming; Sheft Metal 
and Wire Workwig; Metal Fusion-Bonding, Metal Founding; Machine Tools for Shaping or Dividing; Work and 
Tool Holders. Woodworking; Tools; Cutlery; Jacks; Fishing, Etc.; Butchenng; and Books and Pnnted Matter. 
AMUSEMENT, HUSBANDRY. PERSONAL TREATMENT. INFORMATION. GROUP 330- ^ 

Amusement and Exercisiig'li'evices;' Projectors;' Animal and' Plant Husbandry; Plants; Harvesting; Earth Working and 
Excavating; Tobacco; Artificial Body Members; Dentistry; Jewelry; Surgery; Toiletry; Printing; Typewriters; Infor- 

HEATTOWEr'^AND FLUID ENGINEERING. GROUP 340-D. J. STOCKING, Director . . ^ •,>;-, 

Power Plants; Combustion Engines; Fluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engines and Pumps; Heat Gener- 
ation and Exchange; Refrigeration; Ventilation; Drying; Temperature and Humidity Regulation; Couplings; Geanng; 
Fluid Handling and Control; Lubrication. ,,^ 

GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS, TEXTILES. MINING AND GEARING. GROUP 350- 

B,iild^ng^s!/Sr2Xcks; Cabinets; Closures; Supports; Furniture; Fasteners; Locks; Pipe Couplings; Joints; Miscel- 
laneous Hardware; Textiles; Sewing Machines; Apparel; Footwear; Earth Engineenng; Earth Dnllmg, Mining, 
Wells; Roads; Bridges; Tool Driving; Gearing; Machine Elements; Clutches. ^ 



1-16-81 

11-20-81 

3-1-82 

3-09-82 
1-12-82 



5-22-81 
3-30-81 

1-05-81 
5-12-81 

8-25-80 
1-30-81 

5-18-81 
7-27-81 

8-27-82 
11-17-80 

9-17-80 



Expiratioii of patents: 



The patenu within the range of numbers indicated below expire during April 1983 except those which may 
have" had thar temis curtailed by disclaimer under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 253. Other patents, issued after the dates of the range 
of numSi SdiSd Slow, may have expired before the full term of 17 years for the same reasons, or have lapsed under the provi- 
sions of 35 U.S.C. 151. Numbers 3.243.822 to 3,248.737, inclusive 

Pf'«"^^ • Numbers 2.616 to 2.627 inclusive 

Plant Patents 

1032 OG 7 



i 



REEXAMINATIONS 

JULY 5, 1983 

Matter enclosed in heavy brackets [ ] appears in the patent but forms no part of this reexamination specification; matter printed in 

italics indicates additions made by reexamination. 



Bl Re. 29,285 (101st) 
METHOD FOR CONCOMITANT PARTICULATE 
DIAMOND DEPOSITION IN ELECTROLESS 
PLATING, AND THE PRODUCT THEREOF 
Theodore Peter Christini, Dushore, Pa.; Albert Lawrence 
Eustice, Lewiston, N.Y.; Arthur Hughes Graham, Wil- 
mington, Del., assignors to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours 
and Company, Wilmington, Del. 
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 208,233, Dec. 15, 1971, 

abandoned. 

Reexamination Request No. 90/100,120, Dec. 3, 1981. 

Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. Re. 29,285, 

issued Jun. 28, 1977, Ser. No. 694,047, Jun. 7, 1976. 

U.S. a. 428/544 Int. Cl.^' C23C 3/02 

AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS 
BEEN DETERMINED THAT: 

The patentability of claims 4 and 6 is confirmed. 

Claims 1-3 are determined to be j»patentable as 
amended: 

Claim 5, dependent on an amended claim, is deter- 
mined to be patentable. 



FIG. I 



New claims 7-14 are added and determined to be pa- 
tentable. 

1. A coated article formed by electroless plating com- 
prising a co-deposited uniform, dispersion of polycrystal- 
line diamond particles secured by substantial nucleation 
within a metallic matrix comprising one of the group 
consisting of: (1) an alloy including a metal of the sub- 
group made up of nickel, cobalt and mixtures thereof 
with one of the elements phosphorus, boron and mixtures 
thereof and (2) elemental copper, deposited on a support- 
ing substrate consisting of polymer, metal, ceramic or 
glass. 

2. A method of forming a composite structure on an 
article by electroless plating comprising immersing said 
article in a stable electroless plating bath having a com- 
position effecting concurrent deposition of particulate pol- 
ycrystalline diamond having a particle size in the range of 
0. l\i to 75\i dispersed in a metallic matrix comprising one 
of the group consisting of: (1) an alloy including a metal 
of the sub-group made up of nickel, cobalt and mixtures 
thereof with one of -the elements phosphorus, boron and 
mixtures thereof and (2) elemental [elemental] copper, 
while maintaining agitation of said bath retaining said 
particulate diamond in suspension, and removing said ar- 
ticle carrying said composite structure from said bath 
[whenj ajfter said composite structure has been plated 
out on said article in preselected amount. 



ELECTROLESS Ni-B/12/^ SYNTHETIC DIAMOND "A", 63^0X 



N 




(1) RECESSED GROWTH LEDGE 

(2) CRATER 

(5) UPSTANDING GROWTH PROJECTION 
(4) Ni-B ALLOY GRAINS NUCLEATED 

ON DIAMOND "A" SURFACE 
Ni-B ALLOY GRAINS NUCLEATED 

ON DIAMOND "A" EDGES 
Ni-B ALLOY GRAIN MATRIX 
(7) DIAMOND SURFACE 



1032 OG 9 



1032 OG 10 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



Bl 3,892,984 (102nd) 

REGENERATING CIRCUIT IN THE FORM OF A 

KEYED FLIP-FLOP 

Karl-Ulrich Stein, Munich. Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor 

to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed. 

Rep. of Germany. 

Reexamination Request No. 90/000,124, Dec. 14, 1981. 
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3,892,984, issued 

Jul. 1, 1975, Ser. No. 442,084, Feb. 13, 1974. ' 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 23, 

1973, 2309192. 
U.S. CI. 307/530 Int. Cl.^ H03K 5/24. 3/356: 

GllC 7/06 



node self-capacitance from the assoicated bit line self-capaci- 
tance, and so as to permit the flip-flop to assurhe a stable 
state corresponding to the binary signal being read when 
substantial feedback is initiated, said flip-flop option being 
used to refresh one of the logic level binary signals stored 
prior to readout over said same respective barrier transistor, 
a refresh path for said logic level binary signal being formed 
to extend from said associated node of the flip-flop over said 
barrier transistor to the readout storage element. 



■ 9 



Bl 4,295,096 (103rd) 

ELECTRODE PROSPECTING METHOD PROVID- 
ING CALCULABLE ELECTROMAGNETIC COU- 
PLING FOR THE INDIRECT DETECTION OF HY- 
DROCARBON RESERVOIRS 

Ben K. Sternberg; Dale E. Miller; Dhari S. Bahjat, all of 
Ponca City, Okla., assignors to Conoco, Inc., Ponca 
City, Okla. 
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,238, Aug. 5, 1982. 

Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,295,096, issued 
Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 971,177, Dec. 30, 1978. 

U.S. a. 324/357 Int. Cl.^ GOIV 3/06 



fO'a 











AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION IT HAS 
BEEN DETERMINED THAT: 

Claims I to 7 are determined to be patentable as 
amended: ^ 

New claims 8-10 are added and determmed to be pa- 
tentable. 

1. A regenerating circuit system in the form of a keyed 
field-effect transistor flip-flop for "0" and "/" logic level 
binary signals, in particular for the readout of such binary 
logic signals of integrated single-transistor storage ele- 
ments forming a storage field in which the si4^-transis- 
tor storage elements are connected over a digit^line to 
the flip-flop, characterized in that first and second digit 
lines each with an associated digit line self-capacitance are 
provided and with each connecting to a group of storage 
elements and a respective dummy element; and wherein the 
regenerating circuit comprises at least two inverting am- 
plifier stages with feedback connected between first and 
second nodes: [, at least one barrier transistor disposed at 
the signal imput between the associated digit line and the 
corresponding amplifier stage] first and second barrier 
field effect transistors respectively connected at the first and 
second nodes so as to connect the respective first or second 
node with the respective associated first or second digit line 
[,].■ means for selectively effecting a discontinuance of 
the feedback function [and means for selectively adjust- 
ing bias potentials at the inputs of the regenerating cir- 
cuit. J of the flip-fiop: first potential means connected for 
selectively setting a bias potential on the respective gates of 
the first and second barrier transistors: second potential 
means connected for precharging the digit lines and a node 
self-capacitance of the fiip-fiop first and second nodes: and 
the first and second barrier transistors, the first and second 
potential means, and the means for discontinuance of the 
feedback function being provided such that after a selection 
of a storage element for reading of the stored binary signal 
therein the respective barrier transistor associated with the 
storage element signal level being readout forms a barrier 
for a portion of time thereby isolating the associated flip-fiop 



AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS 
BEEN DETERMINED THAT: 

Claim 4 having been finally determined to be unpatent- 
able, is cancelled. 

Claims 1, 5, 6, 9, 11 are determined to be patentable as 
amended: 

Claims 2, 3, 7, 8, and 10, dependent on amended 
claims, are determined to be patentable. 

9. A method of electrical hydrocarbon prospecting, 
using an electrode array in which a portion of its conductor 
means is closely spaced, to investigate a subsurface polariz- 
able stratum which is indicative of the presence of a 
hydrocarbon deposit lower than the stratum wherein a 
first set of space electrode means is placed in the surface 
of the ground in electrical communication with said stra- 
tum, a second set of space electrode means is placed in 
the surface of the ground in electrical communication 
with said stratum, with generating means coupled 
through second conductor means to said second set of 
electrode means, and a voltage measuring means coupled 
through a first conductor means to said first set of spaced 
electrode means, an improvement comprising: 

(a) maintaining a calculable electromagnetic coupling 
between said first and second conductor means where 
said means are closely spaced: 

(b) measuring the current through said second conduc- 
tor means to said second set of spaced electrical 
means; and 

(c) recording in time synchronism voltage that is meas- 
ured through said first conductor means from said 
first set of spaced electrical means by said voltage 
measuring means, and said measured current, where- 
by an anomaly indication of a hydrocarbon deposit 
can be ascertained by processing from the measured 
current and voltage and said calculable [electro- 
magnetic] electromagnetic coupling [.], said process- 
ing including the step of ascertaining a decoupled phase 
angle by subtracting the electromagnetic coupling phase 
angle from a measured phase angle. 



DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS 

PUBLISHED JULY 5, 1983 

Published at the request of the applicant or owner in accordance with the Notice of Dec. 16. 1969. 869 O.G. 687. The abstracts of Defensive 
Publication applications are identified by distinctly numbered series and are arranged chronologically. The heading of each abstract indicates the 
number of pages of specification, including claims and sheets of drawings contained in the application as onginally filed. The files of these 
applications are available to the public for inspection and reproduction may be purchased for 30 cents a sheet. 

Defensive Publication applications have not been examined as to the merits of alleged invention. The Patent and Trademark Office makes no 
assertion as to the novelty of the disclosed subject matter. 



T103,201 

ADJUSTABLE RECLINE-CONTROL MECHANISM FOR 
FURNITURE AND FURNITURE COMPRISING THE 
MECHANISM 
James D. Robinson, 3 The Jinnings, Welwyn Garden City, Hert- 
fordshire, England 

Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,391 
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 31, 1980, 
8041570 

Int. a.3 A47C 1/025 

U.S. CI. 297—367 

4 Sheets Drawing. 13 Pages Specification 




to less than 0.1 percent in the acid product by the precipitation 
of (Ca,Mg)Al2F8-2H20, which is acid insoluble and suitable 
for storage with the byproduct calcium sulfate. Ferric iron also 
serves as a catalyst for the simultaneous precipitation of 
(Na,K)2SiF6. Subsequent additions of potassium as. for exam- 
ple, in the teachings of Gilbert (U.S. Pat. No. 3,338,675), can 
then be applied to obtain a purified phosphoric acid product 
suitable for most commercial applications. The added potas- 
sium serves two purposes in the 40 to 55 percent P2O5 acid 
since ferric iron is reduced to 0.25 percent Fe203by the precip- 
itation of Fe3KHi4(P04)8 4H2O and the SiF6= is reduced to 
about 0.2 percent by the precipitation of K2SiF6. This subse- 
quent precipitate contains about 50 percent P2O5 and is as 
effective as superphosphate [Ca(H2P04)2H20] in supporting 
plant growth. 



An adjustable recline-control mechanism for furniture of the 
type comprising a carrier for an occupant, e.g. a seat-pan and 
a support e.g. a back-rest, reclinable relative to the carrier 
wherein the angle of recline is controlled by the mechanism 
which comprises a link one end of which is pivotally con- 
nected to the support while the other end is latchable by at 
least two co-operating latching portions which respectively 
prevent travel of the link in opposite directions, the respective 
latching portions being spaced apart relative to the pivot axis 
of the link such that a jolt to the front or back of the support 
exerts on the link a moment which biasses the link towards 
latching irrespective of the direction of the jolt. Each latching . 
portion suitably comprises a fixed toothed array and a cooper- 
able displaceable tooth array, at least one tooth in each array 
comprising a thrust face and the teeth being arranged so that 
projections normal to a thrust face in each of the latching 
portions pass respectively on opposite sides of the pivot axis of 
the link. The mechanism is suitably incorporated into furniture, 
especially a motor vehicle seat, and is of utility in household 
and garden furniture. 

T103,202 
PRODUCTION OF PURIFIED STRONG WET-PROCESS 

PHOSPHORIC ACID 
Alva W. Frazier, 2219 Randolph, and Ewell F. Dillard, Rte. 10, 
Box 1%, both of Florence, Ala. 35630 

Filed Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 417,804 
Int. C\? COIB 25/16 
U.S. a. 423—321 R 
I No Drawing. 41 Pages Specification 
The concentration of impurities in wet-process phosphoric 
acid limits the usefulness of the acid for the production of 
fertilizers, feed-grade phosphate and detergents. The alumi- 
num, magnesium, and fluoride impurities are removed with the 
calcium sulfate hemihydrate filter cake by hydrolyzing and 
recycling the off-gas scrubber solutions in the presence of a 
ferric iron catalyst. The aluminum and magnesium are reduced 



T103,203 
THIN LAYER DEPOSITION PROCESS 
Timothy W. Carr, 22 Kimball Dr.. Poughkeepsie, N.Y. 12603; 
Charles D. Needham, Thornacre Rd., Wappingers Falls, N.Y. 
12590, and Robert T. Villetto, Jr., 12 Hasbrouck Dr., Pough- 
keepsie, N.Y. 12601 

Continuation of Ser. No. 106,608. Dec. 26, 1979, abandoned. 

This application Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,332 

Int. Cl.J HOIL 21/443 

U.S. a. 427—91 

1 Sheets Drawing. 16 Pages Specification 



i -Mr , iinii ;Tai;:iu»f 
1 



ijffJS'' UTTIAuC M» 



ir 



A method of preventing out-gassing from lift-off structures 
formed of positive resists (as for example, o-quinone diazide/- 
phenol formaldehyde novolak resins) during vacuum evapora- 
tion of metals in the fabrication of semiconductor devices. 
Such outgassing is avoided by compositional control of the 
photosensitive resist lift-off layer and by providing an addi- 
tional baking step after the lift-off mask has been formed. Both 
conditions are required and critical to avoid the volatile resin 
decomposition products which not only tend to contaminate 
the device substrate surface, but also the deposited metal film. 
The method employs a photosensitive polymer which contains 
about 10 to 20 wt. % of the sensitizer (e.g. o-quinone diazi^de) 
in conjunction with a secondary baking step at about 160° to 
about 200° C. after the lift-off mask has been formed and prior 
to metal film deposition. As a result the method provides an 
improved metal film as well as increased through-put, particu- 
larly when forming Schottky barrier diode contacts. 

I 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



7103,204 
PROCESS CONTROL DISPLAY PANEL 
Carter E. Dorrell, 1113 10th St., Boulder, Colo. 80302; Donald 
E. Gutscher, 412 Sumner St., Longmont, Colo. 80501, and 
Carol J. Huffman, 2224-B Mapleton Ave., Boulder, Colo. 
80302 

FUed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,577 

Int. a.5 H05K 1/00, 1/18 

U.S. a. 428—42 

5 Sheets Drawing. 7 Pages Specification 




-continued 



F3C— C(C1)2CH2- 



A 



IV 



-CO2 




" "^ 



C6H5 



are useful intermediates for preparation of an insecticidal com- 
pound of formula (I): 



Y 

— CfCn=CH — L. — 1. 



I 



F3C— C(C1)=CH 



■C02 




"N, 



C6H5 



The intermediate II is prepared by reacting the acid halide, 
alkali metal salt, or lower alkyl ester of 3,3-dimethyl-4-r>en- 
tenoic acid with a compound of the formula 



An easily modified, brilliantly backlit, switch controlled panel 
graphically represents a process. An operator panel includes a 
frame holding a light-transmitting screen in front of circuit 
boards connected to a computer and to the controlled process. 
The screen displays symbols, placed on the screen with self- 
sticking tape, representing process steps and controls, transpar- 
ent touch-sensitive switches, lights, illuminated digital dis- 
plays, and the like. The switches, lights and displays connect to 
the circuit boards. 



T103,205 
INTERMEDIATES AND PROCESS FOR INSECTIODAL 

4-PHENYL-2-INDANYL ESTERS 

Philip A. Cniickshank, 211 Dodds La., Princeton, N.J. 08540 

Continuation of Ser. No. 286^9, Jul. 24, 1981, abandoned. This 

application Aug. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 407,230 

Int. a.3 C07C 6 7/i/ 7 

U.S. a. 560—124 

No Drawing. 21 Pages Specification 

Compounds of formulae II, III and IV: 



H2C=CHC(CH3hCH2C02 




•' "^ 



C6H5 



F3C— C(C1)2CH2CH(C1)C(CH3)2CH2C02 




"N 



II 



III 




o 



C6H5 



in which X is a hydroxy group or a leaving group. 
Intermediate III is prepared by reacting II with 
l,l,l-trichloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane in the presence of a 
solvent, a solvating agent, and a catalyst. Intermediate 
III is then di-dehydrochlorinated in the presence of 
base, in one or two steps, to produce I. 



C6H5 



T103,206 
PRODUCnON OF UREA PHOSPHATE 
Harry T. Lewis, 802 Meadow La., and Ewell F. Dillard, Rte. 10, 
Box 196, both of Florence, Ala. 35630 

Filed Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,515 
Int. a.3 C07C 727/0/, 126/08 
U.S. a. 564—363 
4 Sheets Drawing. 36 Pages Specification 
A two-stage continuous crystallization process for production 
of urea phosphate by reaction of impure wet-process ortho- 
phosphoric acid (about 54 percent P2O5) and urea with simul- 
taneous addition of a selected acidifying agent (sulfuric acid, 
hydrochloric acid, or phosphoric acid) to clarified mother 
liquor used as recycle in the process. Addition of the acidifying 
agent decreases pH in the crystallization process whereby the 
solubility of a contaminating water-insoluble iron phosphate- 
urea salt [FeH3(P04)2.2CO(NH2)2] is increased, purity of the 
crystalline urea phosphate product is improved significantly, 
and the useful storage life of the recycle mother liquor is pro- 
longed. 



REISSUES 

JULY 5, 1983 



1 



Matter enclosed in heavy brackets C 1 appears in the original patent but forms no part of this reissue specification; matter printed in italics 

indicates additions made by reissue. 



Re. 31,296 

TRANSMISSION WITH RESILIENTLY LOADED 
MAINSHAFT GEARS 
Elmer A. Richards, Kalamazoo, Mich., assignor to Eaton Corpo- 
ration, Cleveland, Ohio 
Reissued No. Re. 29,601, dated Apr. 4, 1978, Ser. No. 750,299, 

Dec. 13, 1976. 
Original No. 3,921,469, dated Nov. 25, 1975, Ser. No. 452,825, 
Mar, 20, 1974. Division of Ser. No. 276,376, Jul. 31, 1972, 
Pat. No. 3,799,002. Application for reissue Oct. 12, 1979, Ser. 

No. 84,261 

Int. C1.3 F16H 2/38; F16D 13/00. 21/02 
U.S. a. 74— 339 SOaims 




teeth when said jaw clutch portions are disengaged, one of 
said trailing portions of said blocking teeth and said block- 
ing portion defining an array of spaces in cross section, said 
spaces capable of receiving therein the other of said trailing 
portions of said blocking teeth and said blocking portions 
when said spaces and said other of said trailing portions and 
said blocking portions are aligned to permit said blocking 
portions to relatively move axially past said trailing por- 
tions of said blocking teeth so that said jaw clutch portions 
can be engaged with one another; and 
a surface on said blocker frictionally cooperating with a sur- 
face on said second jaw clutch portion for causing said 
blocker to tend to rotate relative to said first jaw clutch 
portion to the extent permitted by said drive teeth wherever 
and for so long as a substantial difference in relative roU- 
tive speeds exist between said respective jaw clutch por- 
tions, said blocking portions interferring with said trailing 
portions of said blocking teeth when said blocker is rotated 
relative to said first jaw clutch portion to the extent permit- 
ted by said drive teeth so as to prevent engagement of said 
jaw clutch portions. / 



10. In an interengageable jaw clutch system, the combination 
comprising: 
a rotatable shaft and a first jaw clutch portion mounted 
thereon for axial sliding movement relative to said shaft and 
positive rotation therewith about an axis, said first jaw 
clutch portion defining a plurality of radially outwardly 
extending external drive teeth thereon; 
a gear coaxially related to said shaft and a second jaw clutch 
portion fixed to said gear, said second jaw clutch portion 
defining a plurality of radially inwardly extending internal 
drive teeth thereon for interengagement with said external 
drive teeth of first jaw clutch portion upon relative axial 
movement of said jaw clutch portions toward one another; 
said first jaw clutch portion drive teeth at a radius suitable 
for engaging with drive teeth on said second jaw clutch 
portion, said drive teeth having leading edges for engage- 
ment with the clutch teeth of the other jaw clutch portion 
and defining the effective drive portions of said drive teeth, 
said first jaw clutch portion having also blocking teeth, said 
blocking teeth having leading portions generally axially 
aligned with the effective drive portions of said external 
drive teeth and trailing portions generally axially offset the 
effective drive portions of said external drive teeth, said 
trailing portions extending radially beyond the outer radial 
surfaces of said leading portions; 
means to selectively axially move said gear relative to said 
shaft from a first position wherein said second clutch mem- 
ber is axially spaced from said first clutch member to a 
second position for engagement of said clutch members; 
means resiliently biasing said first clutch portion toward said 
second portion and a stop member limiting axial movement 
of said first clutch portion to a positi«n axially spaced from 
said second clutch portion when said gear is in said first 
position; 
blocker means coacting between said first and second jaw 
clutch portions for positively preventing engagement of said 
jaw clutch portions so long as a substantial difference in 
relative speed exists therebetween, said blocker means 
including an annular blocker having blocking portions ar- 
ranged on and supported by said drive teeth for limited 
rotation with respect thereto and positioned axially between 
the trailing portion of said blocking teeth and said clutch 



Re. 31,297 
FULL COVERAGE RECIRCULATING SPRAYER 
John O. Moore, West Helena, and Ray H. Dawson, Lexa, both 
of Ark., assignors to Sprayrite Manufacturing Co., West 
Helena, Ark. 
Original No. 4,168,798, dated Sep. 25, 1979, Ser. No. 874,396, 
Feb. 2, 1978. Application for reissue Jul. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 
165,132 

Int. a.3 B05B 1/28 
U.S. a. 239—121 31 aaims 




1. A full-coverage recirculating sprayer assembly for appli- 
cation of herbicidal and other liquids via [solid] spray streams 
selectively to standing vegetation with recapture of liquid not 
contacting the vegetation, the sprayer assembly being carried 
on a vehicle for traversing an agricultural area in a direction; 
the assembly comprising a source of pressurized liquid carried 
on said vehicle, a horizontal bar carried on said vehicle and 
extending laterally of said direction; and a plurality of [solid- 
stream] spray-stream spray nozzles communicating to said 
source of pressurized liquid, a collector means placed to inter- 
cept said streams, and at least one reservoir located below said 
collector, all carried by said bar, and wherein: 
the spray nozzles direct said streams at an angle to the direc- 
tion of travel of at least 15°; 
the spray nozzles are arranged in opposed pairs to provide 
[complete, criss-cross coverage to] criss<ross spray pat- 
terns covering all parts of the area traversed; 
said collector means comprising vertically disposed support 
means and collector mat means formed of a [mat] fibrous 
material and having a vertical orientation with a connection 

3 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



at the upper end with said support means and a lower edge; 
[and] 
said reservoir being disposed enclosing said lower edge of the 
collector mat and adapted -to collect liquid flowing from 
the collector [, whereby to reduce wind and travel speed 
effects on the solid streams of liquid and splashing of said 
streams as they strike said weeds J and said reservoir having 
an abutment surface projecting fonvardly in the direction of 
travel of the vehicle to impact against vegetation and bend it 
over towards and into said spray patterns. 



outside space, the closure membrane being permeable to 
oxygen and impermeable to water, and an aqueous elec- 



Re. 31,298 

SPRING SHACKLE ASSEMBLY 

Edward J. Herbenar, Birmingham, Mich., assignor to TRW Inc., 

Cleveland, Ohio 
Original No. 4,083,545, dated Apr. 11, 1978, Ser. No. 719,190, 
Aug. 31, 1976. Application for reissue Jul. 31, 1979, Ser. No. 
62,536 

Int. a.3 B60G 11/12 
U.S. a. 267—54 A 15 Oaims 




trolyte containing the ligand cation of the said ligand 
membrane, the said electrolyte being disposed between 
said ligand membrane and said closure membrane. 




Re. 31,300 
PROCESS FOR PREPARING ALKYL- OR 
ARYLPHOSPHONOTHIOIC DIHALIDES 
Eugene H. Uhing, Pleasantville, N.Y., and Arthur D. f! Toy, 
Stamford, Conn., assignors to Stauffer Chemical Company, 
Westport, Conn. 
Original No. 3,968,156, dated Jul. 6, 1976, Ser. No. 534,942, 
Dec. 20, 1974. Application for reissue Jan. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 
1,633 

The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 29, 

1992, has been disclaimed. 

Int. a.3 C07F 9/42 

U.S. a. 260—543 P 6 Claims 

1. A method of preparing compounds of the formula: 



11. A pivot means constructed to interconnect first and second 
members for angular displacement of one of said members relative 
to the other of said members about a fixed pivot axis: 
said pivot means comprising a pair of ball studs; 
each of said ball studs having a shank portion and a head 

portion; 
said shank portions being in axial alignment with the ends of 

said shank portions being in juxtaposed relationship; 
a sleeve surrounding said shank portions supported by one of 

said members; 
a pair of socket means enclosing said head portions of said pair 

of ball studs; 
each of said socket means being secured to the other of said 

members. 



R— P 



t/" , 



(1) 



Re. 31,299 

ION-SELECTIVE ELECTRODE DEVICE FOR 

POLAROGRAPHIC MEASUREMENT OF OXYGEN 

Manfred Kessler, and Jens Hoper, both of Dortmund, Fed. Rep. 
of Germany, assignors to Max Planck Gesellschaft zur Foer- 
derung der Wissenschaften, Goettingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany 
Original No. 4,263,115, dated Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 921,259, 
Jul. 3, 1978. Application for reissue Mar. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 
357,563 

Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 4, 
1977, 2730143 

Int. a.J GOIN 27/30 
U.S. a. 204—415 12 Qaims 

1. An ion-sensitive electrode device for measuring oxygen 
concentrations comprising 
a source of potential voltage; 
a reduction electrode for the oxygen com]X)sed of a noble 

metal and connected to said voltage source; 
a reference electrode annularly disposed about said reduc- 
tion electrode; 
a ligand membrane provided in front of the reduction elec- 
trode, the said ligand membrane containing a cation-selec- 
tive carrier and being permeable to hydrogen ions; 
a closure membrane to seal the said electrodes against the 



\ 



wherein R is a hydrocarbyl group consisting essentially of 
hydrogen and carbon including C\ to Caoalkyl; the aryl substi- 
tuted derivatives thereof, said aryl having 1 or 2 fused rings, 
cycloalkyi of 5-6 carbons in the ring, aryl of up to 3 fused 
rings, biphenyl and the C1-C4 alkyl substituted derivatives of 
said cycloalkyi, aryl or biphenyl and X is chlorine or bromine, 
comprising contacting under at least an autogenous pressure in 
a reaction zone capable of withstanding elevated pressure at a 
temperature of from about 175° C. to about 400° C. in the 
presence of combinations o/phosphorus sulfides an alkyl or aryl 
halide of the formula: 



RX 



(II) 



wherein R and X are as deflned above with a trivalent phos- 
phorus trihalide of the formula: 

PX3 (HI) 

or a pentavalent thiophosphoryl halide of the formula: 

P(S)X3 (IV) 

or mixtures thereof wherein X is as defined above [.J said 
reactants being contacted approximately according to the follow- 
ing general scheme; 

3RX + aPX^ + bp(S)X-i + ^^ ^ 3RP(S)X2 

wherein R and X are as defined above and a plus b equals 1. 



July 5, 198; 



U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE 



Re. 31,301 

in¥ramammary compositions 

John S. Dowrick, Littlehampton, England, assignor to Beecham 

Group P.I.C., England 
Original No. 4,282,202, dated Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 88,859, Oct. 

29, 1979. Application for reissue Feb. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 

345,474 

Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 27, 1978, 
42336/78 

Int. C1.3 A61K 9/06. 9/08. 9/10. 9/18 
U.S. a. 424—23 *3 Qaims 

1. A liquid veterinary composition adapted for intramam- 
mary administration comprising a suspension of a powered 
solid pharmaceutically acceptable alkali metal, alkaline earth 
metal or amine salt of clavulanic acid in an amount of from 
£1] 0.1 to 40% by weight of said composition calculated on 
the basis of the equivalent weight of free clavulanic acid, and 
from 5 to 20% by weight of a powdered solid molecular sieve 
in a pharmaceutically acceptable oil carrier. 



X 



Re. 31,302 
VALIDATION SYSTEMS FOR CREDIT CARD OR THE 

LIKE 
Leon Stambler, 534 Longacre Ave., Woodhaven, N.Y. 11598 
Original No. 3,786,420, dated Jan. 15, 1974, Ser. No. 227,146, 

Feb. 17, 1972. Continuation of Ser. No. 648,522, Jan. 12, 1976, 

Pat. No. 3,786,420. Applicafion for reissue Jul. 23, 1979, Ser. 

No. 59,784 

Int. CI.' H04Q 9/00; G06K 9/00 
U.S. a. 340—825.34 19 Cla'ms 

1. In a system where the owner of an information bearing 
card such as a credit card or the like is m the sole possession of 
a predetermined memorized number of a given number of 
significant digits, said credit card having on a surface thereof a 
plurality of first indicia corresponding to said predetermined 
number and a plurality of second indicia corresponding to a 
code determining how said first indicia is manifested on said 
information bearing card, in combination therewith apparatus 
for verifying that said number and said first indicia correspond, 
comprising: 

a. first means including a keyboard for storing said number 
after insertion thereby by an owner, 

b. second means responsive to both said first and second 
indicia on said credit card for providing at an output 
thereof an electrical signal according to said indicia, 

c. third means responsive to a digit of said number as stored 
to provide a first control signal and then responsive to 



only said second indicia for providing any one of a plural- 
ity of control signals each one operative to determine how 
sai^ first indicia is to be translated, 

d. a plurality of translating means coupled to said second 
means, each one capable of responding to said electrical 
signal output representative of said first indicia to provide 
a decoded signal therefrom according to the particular 
format of said translator, each of said decoded signals 
representative of a digit contained in said predetermined 
number when translated according to said second indicia, 

e. translating selector means responsive to said control sig- 
nals and coupled to said translating means to cause a first 



//-^ 









err 



'-\-^Ak 






^^2 



7VAIVSIATM 






^/^jt 



^3 



2f, 



1IA.D 



^v - 



30- 



■'« 



20 



SuBscKieeit 
xefgcueo 

AND 
STORtOB^ 

~o J o o c 



VAUOiiTi^ 



one, of said, translating means to be selected according to 
said first control signal and thereafter others of said trans- 
lating means to be selected according to said plurality of 
control signals, whereby different selected ones of said 
translating means provide different digits of said number 
according to said second indicia on said credit card, and 
f. comparison means responsive to said decoded signals and 
said stroed number to provide an output when said decode 
signals correspond to said stored number, said output 
verifying that said memorized number and said first indi- 
cia on said card correspond. 



Re. 31.303 
Patent Not Issued For this Number 



^ 



PLANT PATENTS 

_ GRANTED JULY 5, 1983 

Illustrations for plant patents are usually in colbr and therefore it .s not pract.cable to reproduce the drawing. 



5,065 

African violet named pink lady 

Arnold W. Fischer, Hanover, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to 
Pan-American Plant Company, Parrish, Fla. 

1 , Filed Apr. 10, 1981, S^r. No. 252,894 
1 1 Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00 

U.S. a. Pit.— 69 „ laaim 

1. A new African Violet cultivar, substantially as herein 
shown and described, characterized by the large, star-shaped 
flowers and the phlox pink coloring of its profusely produced 
flowers. 



5,066 
AFRICAN VIOLET NAMED BIG STAR 
Arnold W. Fischer, Hanover, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to 
Pan-American Plant Company, Parrish, Fla. 

Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,895 
Int. Cl.^ AOIH 5/00 
U.S. CI. Ph.— 69 * Claim 

1. A new and distinct African Violet cultivar. substantially 
as herein shown and described, distinguished by its vigorous 
growth habit and its profuse production of very large, dark 
blue, star-shaped flowers atop a plant of generally rosette 
shape. _ 



PATENTS 

GRANTED JUL. 5, 1983 



ERRATA 



For I See 
CLASS PATENT NO. 

604-1 10 ; 4,391 .272 

604-1 10 4.391 ,273 

604-190 4.391 ,274 

604-266 4.39 1 .276 

lh-210 4.391.338 

/82-141 4.391.345 

A39-075 : 4.391,408 

/273-142 4.391.442 

384-152 4,391 .474 

384-226 4,391 ,475 

549-525 4.39 1 .753 

423-659 4.39 1 .880 

435-042 4,39 1 ,887 

236-036 4,39 1 ,9 1 3 

215-307 4,392,055 

382-022..... 4.392.120 

366-129 4,392,168 

346-154 4,392,194 



PATENTS 

GRANTED JULY 5, 1983 
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



SHOCK I 



4 390 995 

DAMPING FACE GUARD STRAP FOR 

FOOTBALL HELMETS 

Vernon R. Walck, 267 Bonita Dr., Bakersfield, Calif. 93305 

Filed Mar. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 354,169 

Int. a.3 A41D 13/00; A42B 3/00 

U.S.a. 2— 9 13aaims 




part comprising two legs, part of the upper edge of each leg 
being permanently attached to the lower edge of the body and 
the remainder of the upper edge being releasably attached to 
the lower edge of the body by fastening means thereby to 
provide a one piece suit, the jacket and trouser part each hav- 
ing co-operable retaining means whereby, when the fastening 
means are released and the trouser part folded relative to the 
jacket, the trouser part may be retained between the upper and 
lower edges of the body by said retaining means, whereby the 
garment may be worn as a jacket only. 



1. Shock damping anchor straps for a face guard mounted on 
a transverse horizontal axis to a brow portion of a protective 
helmet, the face guard having a. mounting bar rotatably 
mounted to the helmet on said axis and extending rearward at 
opposite sides of the helmet, and the face guard having oppo- 
site side anchor bars depending from the mounting bar at the 
front edges of opposite side ear portions of the helmet, there 
being an ear hole through each side ear portion of the helmet, 
and each anchor strap including a flexible body with inner and 
outer loop portions continuing one into the other from one end 
provided with a hole therethrough and to a terminal end, the 
hole at said one end being engaged over a fastener means and 
the inner loop portion formed into an inner loop wrapped 
around the front edge of the ear portion and passing through 
the ear hole of the helmet and secured by a second hole there- 
through engaged over the fastener means, and the outer loop 
portion formed into an outer loop wrapped over the anchor 
bar and the said terminal end secured by a third hole there- 
through engaged over and held by said fastener means. 



4,390,997 
HEAT PROTECTION GARMENT 
Qaus-Dieter Hinz, Liibeck, and Adalbert Pasternack, Bad 
Schwartau, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Dra 
gerwerk Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,656 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 2, 
1980, 3004593 

Int. a.3 A41D 13/00 
U.S. a. 2—81 « Claims 



4,390,996 
GARMENT 

Stuart W. Read, 87 Malvern Rd., St. Johns, Worcester, England 
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,673 
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 2, 1980, 
8028302 

Int. a? A41B 1/12 
U.S.a.2-70 10 Claims 





M'y'iiyyyyiiyiiyiiyi 





1. A garment comprises a jacket and a trouser part, the 
jacket comprising a body having a lower edge at or above 
crotch level, two arms extending from the body, the trouser 



6 1 



1. A heat protection garment comprising: 

at least one manifold having opposite parallel end walls 
defining a mixing chamber; 

at least one header having opposite parallel end w^lls defin- 
ing a mixing chamber; 

a plurality of coolant tubes connecting the manifold and 
header mixing chambers, the tubes connected to one end 
wall of each of the manifold and header; 

at least one coolant supply conduit connected to the mani- 
fold mixing chamber at a location spaced from the coolant 
tubes connected thereto; 

at least one coolant discharge conduit connected to the 
header mixing chamber at a location spaced from the 
coolant tubes connected thereto; and 

a plurality of parallel rows of connecting pieces extending 
across the manifold and header mixing chambers respec- 
tively, between the conduits and the coolant tubes and 
parallel to the end walls of the manifold and header re- 
spectively; 

the ratio, in each of the manifold and header cf the number 
of coolant tubes to the number of parallel rows of connect- 
ing pieces to the number of coolant conduits being approx- 
imately equal to or smaller than 12:3:1; and 
the ratio in each of the manifold and header of the spacing 
between the parallel rows of connecting pieces to the 



10 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



length of each connecting piece in each row to the spacing 4,391,000 

between each connecting piece ineach row being approxi- EAR MUFF MOUNTING DEVICE 

mately equal to or less than 1:3:1. Bo G. Lonnstedt, Kvambergsvagen 23, S-141 45 Huddinge, 

i _ Sweden 

Filed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,397 

4,390,998 Int. Q.^ A42B 3/00. 1/06 

PREFABRICATED CAP FRAME U.S. CI. 2—423 



Paul G. Gallin, Bronxville, N.Y., assignor to Art Cap Company, 
Inc. 

Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,227 

Int. C\? A41C 5/00 

U.S. a. 2—180 12 Qaims 



3 U-*005 4(;^'5 




o o ""o oco''ooc6 



TT 



16 17, 



23 ^ 


1 


^<19 
7 20 
.27 


1 


..M.. 




29 .. 


26,8 2^ 


n 




1. A prefabricated cap frame for a uniform cap of the type 
having a visor and a grommet for supporting and stretching the 
top of the cap comprising a one piece structure molded from a 
flexible synthetic resin and including a perforated band portion 
in the form of a substantially flat open strip adapted to be 
curved and joined at the ends to form the hat band, 

said band portion including a thickened portion at the upper 
edge thereof for reinforcement, 

and an integral vertical stay portion extending from the 
upper edge of said band portion. 



4,390,999 
PANTY HOSE WITH BODY BULGE CONTROL 
J. William Lawson, Siler City, and Robert M. Matthews, Pitts- 
boro, both of N.C., assignors to Kellwood Company, St. Louis, 
Mo. 

Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,380 

Int. CI.' A41B 11/04: D04B 9/46; A41B 9/10; D04B 7/12 

U.S. a. 2—409 7 Qaims 



1. A device for removably mounting an ear muff holder arm 
at a hard hat having a narrow pocket defmed by substantially 
parallel side walls and having an open bottom, said device 
comprising a main body for rotatably receiving said holder 
arm and defmed by a face adapted to rest against said hat, as 
well as a plate member having a shape suitable for fitting into 
said pocket, said plate member having an inward face to be 
directed towards said hat and being arranged at an angle less 
than 1 80° in relation to said face of said main body, as well as 
by substantially parallel side edges and a transverse lower 
edge, there being provided at said lower edge a ledge extend- 
ing between said side edges and facing the same way as said 
inward face, there also being provided a ledge means, being 
narrower and shorter than said ledge, and being located above 
and parallel to the latter. 




1. In a panty hose type garment including certain portions 
with elastic yarn in an amount sufficient to provide a relatively 
great amount of compressive force against the underlying 
portion of the body of the wearer, and other portions normally 
joined directly to said certain portions and being knit solely of 
stretchable yam to provide a relatively small amount of com- 
pressive force against the underlying portion of the body of the 
wearer, the combination therewith of a body bulge controlling 
intermediate portion positioned between and interconnecting 
said certain and said other portions, said intermediate portion 
being knit of stretchable yam with elastic yam incorporated in 
spaced-apart courses and providing a lesser amount of elastic 
yam in said intermediate portion than the amount of elastic 
yam provided in said certain portions to provide a medium 
amount of compressive force against the portion of the body of 
the wearer underlying said intermediate p>ortion, said succes- 
sive great, medium, and small amounts of compressive forces 
applied by said corresponding certain, intermediate, and other 
portions of said garment thereby applying a gradually varying 
amount of compressive force against the underlying portion of 
the body to prevent an abrupt outward bulging of the corre- 
sponding portion of the body of the wearer. 



4,391,001 
SOFT TOILET SEAT AND HINGE CONNECTOR 
David E. Harrison, Columbus, Miss., assignor to Beatrice Foods 
Co., Chicago, III. 

Filed Sep. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 418,388 I 

Int. a.3 A47K 13/12 
U.S. a. 4—236 25 Qaims 

1. A toilet seat component and hinge combination compris- 
ing: 
a hinge member including an elongated connector spike 
having an upper sawtooth-shaped surface and a lower 
sawtooth-shaped surface; and 
a toilet seat component including a female coupling means 
provided adjacent the rear edge of the toilet seat compo- 
nent for receiving and retaining said elongated connector 
spike to provide a permanent and secure attachment 
thereto, said female coupling means including: 
a plurality of horizontally aligned upper lock lugs; 
a plurality of horizontally aligned lower lock lugs posi- 
tioned below and spaced from said upper lock logs; and 
said upper lock lugs and said lower lock lugs defining the 
upper extent and the lower extent of a coupling opening 
extending inwardly from the rear extent of said female 
coupling means, said coupling opening being dimen- 
sioned to matingly receive said elongated connector 
spike with the sawtoothed-shaped upper surface of the 
elongated connector spike lockingly engaging the 
upper lock lugs and the sawtooth-shaped lower surface 
of the elongated connector spike lockingly engaging the 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



11 



lower lock lugs for effecting automatic locked retention sure in the pressure tank, and a bypass duct connected to the 
of the elongated connector spike in the female coupling regulator for exhausting excess air from the system when the 

pressure tank is at its operating pressure, the improvement 
comprising a tube extending into the container to a point close 
to the bottom of the container and connected to the bypass 
duct of the pressurized air supply system to continuously sup- 
ply aerating air to said container during operation of the vehi- 
,-fv j^- cle engine and when the pressure tank is at its operating pres- 

sure and to substantially continuously aerate faecal matter in 
said container during vehicle engine operation. 





M--^ 



■za 



<b4. 




_54 



4,391,003 
WATER-SAVING DEVICE FOR USE WITH TOILETS 
Joseph M. Talerico, 103 W. (ireenbrook Rd., and Henry 
Fleischer, 15 Wind Ridge Dr., both of North Caldwell, N.J. 
07006 

Filed Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351,666 

Int. CI.' E03D 1/00. 1/14. 3/12 

U.S. Q. 4—415 16 Qaims 






^•Vr 



19 -j 


^'^^'^ 


32 J 


may.. 


5o 

ZO ^ 


W^^^ 



n 



1 



'"^'^1. 



! ( 



i^ 



in response to the insertion of the elongated connector 
spike into the female coupling opening. 



s^ 



4,391,002 

WATER-CLOSET FOR VEHICLES, PARTICULARLY 
MOTOR COACHES 
Ernst Marti, Kallnach, Switzerland, assignor to Karl Kassbohrer 
Fahrzeugwerke GmbH, Ulm, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 172,197 
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 26, 
1979, 2930403 

Int. Q.' E03D 1/00 
U.S. Q. 4—321 * Claims 



t 






* 



? 



'V 




'\ 



'U^'^~ 



yT:r/2A 



M^f 



W •» ' • '<» 




1. In a water-closet for a vehicle including a completely 
closed sewage container for receiving faecal matter and sew- 
age therein, said vehicle having a pressurized air supply system 
for operating brakes, doors, ventilation flaps and the like, said 
system including a compressor operable continuously during 
operation of the vehicle engine to supply pressurized air to a 
pressure tank, a pressure regulator for controlling the air pres- 



1. A water-saving device for use in conjunction with a toilet 
bowl-tank assembly, which includes a tank having an outlet 
opening in the bottom thereof and means for replenishing 
water in the tank, comprising, in combination: 
lower float means adapted to removably seat over the open- 
ing in the bottom of a toilet tank; 
upper float means actuated upon flushing and adapted to 
float with the level of water in the toilet tank and contact 
the lower float means as the water level drops to a prede- 
termined level in the toilet tank and thence force the 



12 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



lower float means to seat over the opening in the bottom 
of the toilet tank; 

locking means adapted to lock the upper float means in an 
immobile position out of contact with the lower float 
means when the toilet tank is filled with water; 

float control means in communication with the locking 
means and connected to the lower float means which, 
uf)on flushing the toilet, is adapted to unseat the lower 
float means from the outlet opening in the toilet tank to 
allow water to drain out, while causing the locking means 
to unlock the upper float means to thereby allow the 
upper float means to fall with the falling level of water in 
the toilet tank whereby when the water level has fallen to 
a predetermined level, the upper float means contacts and 
weighs against the lower float means forcing it down- 
wardly and seat over the outlet opening in the toilet tank 
and thereby preventing the water level in the tank from 
dropping any further, and as the water level rises in the 
tank the upper float means floats upwardly with the rising 
water level until it contacts the locking means and is 
locked into its immobile position while the lower float 
means, through the force of water bearing against it and 
suction, remains seated over the outlet opening in the 
toilet tank. 



toilet bowl and toilet seat, which rectal spraying device com- 
prises: 

a spraying head for spraying water; 

means mounting said spraying head in the toilet bowl for 
moving said spraying head between a first spraying posi- 
tion underlying the anal or rectal area of an individual 
seated on the toilet seat, and a second spraying position 
located at the side of the toilet bowl; and 

a spray deflecting member mounted on the toilet bowl at 
said second spraying position for confronting said spray- 
ing head when said spraying head is moved to said second 
spraying position; 

water ejected from said spraying head at said second spray- 
ing position being deflected back toward said spraying 
head. 







f 


\. 


12 

13 


{ 






l^ 


\- l3o 




, 1 


I .'^— — 


^ 


■ . A 




\ 




^ -, I ,4 
- - i A 





4,391,005 
APPARATUS FOR CLEANING SWIMMING POOLS 
John M. Goettl, Phoenix, Ariz., assignor to George J. Ghiz, 
Phoenix, Ariz. 

Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,686 

Int. a.3 E04H 3/20; B08B 3/02; B05B 15/W 

U.S. a. 4—490 6 Claims 



431,004 
SPRAYING DEVICE FOR USE IN TOILET BOWLS 
Shinji Kawai, Toyota; Koichi Suzuki, Chiryu, and Yuji Yamagu- 
chi, Anjyo, all of Japan, assignors to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki 
Kaisha, Kariya, Japan 

Filed May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 376,219 

Qaims priority, application Japan, May 9, 1981, 56-070021 

Int. a.' A61H 35/00; A47K 3/22 

U.S. a. 4—443 5 Qaims 



19 




1. A spraying device for use in toilets of the type having a 



1. In an intermittently activated water delivery assembly for 
cleaning a swimming pool, comprising: 

a generally cylindrical housing in communication with a 
source of water under pressure, said housing being in open 
communication with the interior of said pool at a surface 
of the pool structure, and 

a generally cylindrical hollow nozzle head rot^tably 
mounted in said housing and being axially movable from 
an inactive, retracted position therein to an active position 
in which a portion of said head projects outside said hous- 
ing within said pool when water under pressure is supplied 
to said housing; 
the improvement comprising: 

thickened wall regions diametrically and symmetrically 
disposed interiorly of the portion of said nozzle head 
projecting outside said housing, each of said wall regions 
having at least one nozzle passage formed therein, said 
nozzle passages being symmetrically disposed in said 
nozzle head and being constructed to deliver streams of 
water non-radially from said nozzle head across said sur- 
face of the pool structure for cleaning said surface. 

6. In an intermittently activated water delivery assembly for 
cleaning a swimming pool, comprising: 

a generally cylindrical housing in communication with a 
source of water under pressure, said housing being in open 
communication with the interior of said pool at a surface 
of the pool structure, and 

a generally cylindrical hollow nozzle head rotatably 



July 5, 



^83 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



13 



mounted in said housing and being axially movable from 
an inactive, retracted position therein to an active position 
in which a portion of said head projects outside said hous- 
ing within said pool when water under pressure is supplied 
to said housing; 
the improvement comprising: 
a retainer ring threadably received in said housing for deter- 
mining the active position of said housing, and means are 
provided for releasable connecting said nozzle head and 
said retainer ring for joint removal from said housing, said 
last named means comprising a stop collar carried by said 
nozzle head and engageable with said retainer ring for 
limiting movement of said nozzle head to its active posi- 
tion and a holding ring formed on said nozzle head, said 
holding ring having a diameter slightly greater than the 
inside diameter of said retainer ring whereby said retainer 
ring may be forced over said holding ring to assemble said 
retainer ring and said nozzle head but interference be- 
tween the holding ring and said retainer ring prevents 
accidental separation of the nozzle head and the retainer 
ring when the retainer ring is removed from the housing. 



4,391,006 
TRANSFER BENCH 
Alfred A. Smith, 13114 Margate St., Van Nuys, Calif. 91401 

I Filed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 379,077 

I I Int. a.3 A47K 3/00. 3/02. 3/022. 3/22 

U.S. a. 4—559 6 Qaims 



/ 




tion to the corresponding end portion of the other bar 
member by a frame securable to and extending up- 
wardly from each of said second end portions, said 
frame being spaced from said rigid cushion element by 
at least the width of a seat; 
B. clamping means whereby the bench may be clamped to 
said tub side wall, said means comprising an element ad- 
justably securable to, and extending downwardly from, 
the horizontal support section of each of said parallel bar 
members in proximity to its first end portion, the lower 
end of said adjustably securable element carrying a 
threaded member extending through said lower end with 
a first end directed toward the terminus of the first end 
portion of the bar member which abuts the outside of said 
tub side wall, said threaded member having knob means 
on its other end to enable the said first end of the threaded 
member^o be adjustably moved toward or away from the 
inside of the tub side wall, and means disposed on said first 
end to distribute force, applied by the torquing of said 
threaded element by the knob means, over a broad area of 
the inner wall of the tub when said tub wall is clamped 
between the said means disposed on the first end of the 
threaded member and the terminus of the first end portion 
of horizontal support section of the parallel bar member, 
in abutment with the outside of the tub wall; and 
C. cushioned seating means, the last said means extending 
across and fixedly secured to the horizontal support sec- 
tion of each of said parallel bar members intermediate said 
frame and said rigid cushioning element. 



4,391,007 
MULTI-POSITION WALL SPACER 
Larry D. Mitchell, and Charles W. Keith, Jr., both of Manches- 
ter, Mo., assignors to B-W Health Products, Inc., Maryland 
Heights, Mo. 

Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,415 

Int. Q.' A61G 7/00 

U.S. CI. 5—60 »3 Qaims 



1. A transfer bench to facilitate the movement of an infirm 

person or invalid from outside of a bathtub to a position at least 

partially within the bathtub, said bathtub being defined by a 

transverse floor and a wall extending upwardly from said floor 

to terminate in a rim, said transfer bench comprising: 

A. a pair of parallel bar members spaced from each other, 

each of said bar members including a horizontal support 

section, having 

(i) a first end portion to be disposed transversely upon the 
rim of the tub side wall and to extend outside of the tub 
and downwardly and back to terminate in abutment 
against the outside of the tub side wall, the horizontal 
support section adjacent said first end portion of one of 
said bar members being held in spaced parallel relation- 
ship with the corresponding horizontal support section 
of the other bar member by a rigid cushioning element 
secured to and extending over both said horizontal 
support sections; and 
(ii) a second opposite end portion curved downwardly 
and extending vertically as a leg to terminate upon the 
transverse floor of the tub, the last said end portion of 
each of said bar members being secured in spaced rela- 




1. An adjustable hospital bed having a relatively fixed frame 
having side rails and head and foot portions, a movable frame 
having a headboard mounted thereon, and having head and 
foot portions, said bed having a normal position wherein said 
headboard is substantially parallel with an adjacent wall of a 
hospital room, elevation linkage interconnecting said movable 
frame with said fixed frame to elevate said movable frame, said 
linkage also being adapted to elevate the head portion of said 
movable frame into a reverse Trendelenberg tilt position, and 
operable to elevate the foot portion of the movable frame into 
a Trendelenberg tilt position, and an adjustable wall spacer 
attached through pivot means to said adjustable frame, said 
wall spacer comprising: 

pivot means; 

two tubes having guide bushings provided therein, each of 



14 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



said tubes attached through said pivot means to one of said 
side rails; 

a U-shaped tube having two legs, each of said legs slidably 
received by said guide bushings; 

two tenons, each attached to one leg of said U-shaped tube; 
and 

two U-shaped strike members, each attached to one of said 
side rails and each having an aperture in the top thereof 
and an aperture and an elongated notch in the bottom 
thereof, said strike members each positioned to receive a 
tenon selectively within either of said apertures. 



second set of aligned bubblelike cells for giving sole sup- 
port to said living body; and 



4,391,008 
ELEMENTS FOR ASSEMBLY OF KNOCKED-DOWN 
WATERBED PEDESTAL 
Don N. Yamaoka, and David L. Yamaoka, both of 13599 De- 
smond, Pacoima, Calif. 91331 
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 173,666, Jul. 29, 1980, 
abandoned. This application Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,844 

Int. Cl.^ A47C 19/00 
U.S. a. 5—200 R 3 Qaims 




1. A drawer usable in a waterbed pedestal, comprising in 
combination: 

(a) a front section, having dovetailed slots at its respective 
ends and a groove extending continuously horizontal 
along its lower portion; 

(b) side sections, the front ends of which dovetails, fitting 
tightly into the slots of the front section, and grooves 
extending continuously horizontal along the lower por- 
tions thereof, the rear ends of the side sections being 
provided, respectively, with dovetail slots; 

(c) a bottom section fitting slidingly into the grooves of the 
front and side sections; 

(d) a back section, the ends of which have undersized dove- 
tails fitting loosely within the dovetail slots of the rear end 
portions of the side sections, respectively, so as to create 
an elongated tapered cavity therewithin; 

(e) elongated insert means adapted, respectively to be pres- 
sure fitted within the cavity in the dovetail joints of the 
end portions of the back and side sections, so as to estab- 
lish rigid joining of the back and side section of the draw- 
ers, respeptively. 



■^ 




second pump means coupled to said alternating inflatable 
support means for alternately inflating at a relatively high 
pressure said first and second interdigitated sets of aligned 
bubblelike cells. 



4,391,010 
DISPOSABLE DRAW SHEET 
Albert F. Kronman, Locust Valley, N.Y., assignor to Hosposable 
Products Inc., Bound Brook, N.J. 

Filed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293,864 

Int. aj A47G 9/00; A61G 72/00 

U.S. a. 5—484 8 Qaims 



^^'-' 

^'T^ 




1. A disposable draw sheet for application to the mattress of 
a bed comprising a thin sheet of liquid impervious material, a 
top surface, a bottom surface, longitudinal margins on said 
sheet and a sheet width substantially greater than that of the 
mattress to which it is to be applied so that said sheet margins 
may be tucked under said mattress on opposite sides thereof, a 
layer of liquid absorbent material carried by the top surface of 
the sheet across the midregion of said sheet, said absorbent 
material being of a width less than the top of the mattress, a 
doubled back portion on the longitudinal margins of the sheet, 
and means to secure the doubled back portion of the said 
margins to the top surface of the said sheet in at least two 
spaced discrete areas to form at least one pocket in each of the 
doubled back portions. 



4,391,009 
VENTILATED BODY SUPPORT 
Rolf Schild; Denis G. Melrose, both of London, and Brian M. 
Hawkins, Luton, all of England, assignors to Huntleigh Medi- 
cal Ltd., Bedfordshire, England 

FUed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 198,111 
Int. a.3 A61G 7/04: A47C 27/10 
U.S. a. 5—453 A 13 Oalms 

1. A ventilated support for living bodies comprising: 
a plenum chamber having a plurality of apertures for com- 
munication with the environment; 
first pump means coupled to said plenum chamber for pro- 
viding passage of air through said plenum chamber at a 
relatively low pressure; 
alternating inflatable support means disposed in operative 
relationship to said plenum chamber and having a first set 
of aligned bubblelike cells which are interdigitated with a 



4,391,011 

MACHINE ADAPTED FOR USE IN THE 

MANUFACTURE OF SHOES 

Alan M. Peck, Beverly, Mass.; Kingsley J. Tutt, Birstall, and 

Andrew G. N. Walter, Quom, both of England, assignors to 

USM Corporation, Farmington, Conn. 

Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,585 
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 10, 1980, 
8019008 

Int. a.3 C14B 1/44 
U.S. a. 12—1 B 11 Qaims 

1. A machine suitable for performing a roughing operation 
progressively along marginal portions of shoe bottoms com- 
prising a shoe support, tool supporting means, means for effect- 
ing relative movement, lengthwise of the bottom of a shoe 
supported by the shoe support, between said shoe support and 



July 5, 1^83 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



15 



1 the tool supporting means first in one direction and then in an 
opposite direction, and means, operable as relative lengthwise 
movement takes place as aforesaid, for effecting relative move- 
ment, widthwise of the bottom of a shoe supported by the shoe 
support, between said shoe support and the tool supporting 
means, whereby, in the operation of the machine, a roughing 
operation can be progressively performed along marginal 
portions of such shoe bottom, wherein the tool supporting 
means is arranged to support two roughing tools side-by-side 
for operating along opposite marginal portions of the shoe 




bottom, the arrangement being such that each tool is caused to 
effect an in-wiping action on the marginal portion on which it 
is caused to operate, and further wherein, in a cycle of opera- 
tion of the machine, a left-hand one of said tools is caused to 
operate along the marginal portion of the shoe bottom at the 
right-hand side thereof during relative lengthwise movement 
as aforesaid in said one direction, and the right-hand one of said 
tools is caused to operate along the marginal portion of such 
shoe bottom at the left-hand side thereof during said relative 
lengthwise movement in said opposite direction. 



tween a lower position and an upper position; a plurality of 
pincers extending about the insole rest, each pincers having a 
pair of jaws movable between open and closed positions; wip- 
ing means, mounted for forward and inward movement, ex- 
tending outwardly about the insole rest; means for initially 
maintaining the insole rest in its lower position wherein the top 
of the insole rest is below the top of the wiping means with the 
shoe assembly so supported on the insole rest that the toe end 
of the shoe assembly faces rearwardly; means for initially 
maintaining all of the pincers jaws in their open positions; 
means for thereafter causing all of the pincers jaws to move to 
their closed positions to thereby grip the vamp of the upper 
margin; means for thereafter effecting rising movement to the 
insole rest to its upper position wherein the top of the insole 
rest is substantially at the level of the top of the wiping means 
to thereby enable the vamp of the upper to be stretched about 
the vamp of the last; means for thereafter imparting forward 
and inward movement, in a wiping stroke, to the wiping means 
to cause the wiping means to wipe the vamp of the upper 
margin against the insole; and means for causing all of the 
pincers jaws to move to their open positions and release the 
gripped vamp of the upper margin prior to the completion of 
the wiping stroke; characterized in that the machine comprises: 
means mounting the insole rest for heightwise swinging move- 
ment, about a prone axis that is located rearwardly of the insole 
rest, between an inclined position wherein the insole rest top is 
inclined rearwardly and upwardly and a prone position 
wherein the insole rest top is substantially parallel to the top of 
the wiping means; means for initially maintaining the insole 
rest in its inclined position when the insole rest is in its lower 
position; and means to effect such swinging movement to the 
insole rest about said axis that the insole rest is in its prone 
position when the insole rest is in its upper position. 



4,391,012 , 

SWINGABLE INSOLE REST ' 

Michael M. Becka, Nashua, N.H., assignor to International 
Shoe Machine Corporation, Nashua, N.H. 

Filed Jun. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,447 

Int. a.3 A43D 21/00. 3/00 

U.S. a. il—W.S 4 Qaims 




! 4,391,013 
FINISHING TOOL FOR SMOOTHING WALLBOARD 
TAPE JOINTS 
Craig R. Janssen, Arden Hills, Minn., assignor to Padco, Inc., 
Minneapolis, Minn. 

Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,708 

Int. a.5 A46B 3/02. 11/00 

U.S. a. 15—210 R 14 aaims 




h— /rf 



1. A machine, operable on a shoe assembly formed of a last 
having an upper draped thereon and an insole located on its 
bottom, for stretching the vamp of the upper about the last and 
wiping the vamp of the upper margin against the insole com- 
prising: an insole rest mounted for heightwise movement be- 



1. A tool for smoothing joints between adjacent wallboards, 
the joints having been prepared with a tape joint compound, 
the tool comprising: 

a fluid retaining resilient foam pad having first and second 
major surfaces; 

an adhesive layer bonded to and covering substantially all of 
the first major surface; 

a wettable abrasive surface formed by a plurality of coarse, 
short, stiff synthetic polymer fibers oriented generally 
perpendiculariy to the first major surface and bonded to 
the first major surface by the adhesive layer at first ends 
and having second free ends wherein the fibers are of a 
thickness of about 100 Denier and a length of not more 
than about 0.100 inch so that when the free ends are 
placed in moving abrasive contact with the wetted Upe 



16 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



joint compound, the wetted compound is smoothed flush the other of said pivot pins (6,5), characterized in that the two 
with the adjacent wallboards as a resuh of moving abra- pivot pins (6) at the extremities of the first yoke (1) are formed 
sive action of the free ends. 



' 4,391,014 

CLEANING WIPER 

James F. Pitzen, Maplewood, Minn., assignor to Minnesota 

Mining and Manufacturing Company, Saint Paul, Minn. 

Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 311,055 

Int. aj A47L 13/46. 13/256 

U.S. CI. 15—231 8 Claims 



L 



U 46 ,10 





from a tongue (14) cut in the web (4) of said yoke (1) and rolled 
to form a tubular pivot. 



1. A cleaning wiper adapted to hold a roll of cleaning web, 
comprising: 

a body having a slot along one side thereof; 

a support member movably mounted within said body, a 

portion of which is accessible through said slot; 
a supply holder mounted in said body adapted to hold said 

roll of said cleaning web; 
a take-up holder mounted in said body adapted to hold a 

take-up roll for said cleaning web; 
said cleaning web when intermediate said supply roll and 

said take-up roll passing over said portion of said support 

member forming a cleaning surface; 
said support member being resiliently biased within said slot; 

and 
an advance linkage activated by movement of said support 

member within said slot and coupled to said take-up 

holder for advancing the rotation of said take-up holder a 

predetermined am.ount; 
whereby said cleaning surface maintains a fresh portion of 

said cleaning web by automatically advancing said clean- 
ing web as said cleaning wiper is utilized. 



4,391,015 
PIVOT CONNECnON FOR WIPER BLADES 

Johan H. van den Berg, Hasselt, Belgium, assignor to Champion 

Spark Plug Europe S.A., Binche, Belgium 

Filed Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,639 

Qaims priority, application France, Oct. 27, 1980, 80 22923 
Int. aj B60S 1/38 
U.S. a. 15—250.42 9 Qaims 

1. A pivot connection for two yokes (1,2,10) of a wiper blade 
wherein the cross-section of a first metallic yoke (1) has sub- 
stantially the form of an inverted U comprising a web and two 
flanges and further comprising at its two extremities, as well as 
in its central portion, a transverse pivot pin extending between 
said fianges (6,5) and wherein a second yoke (2,10) comprises 
attaching means (11,15,16) capable of cooperating with one or 



4,391,016 

DECREASING APPARATUS FOR ELONGATED 

MATERIALS 

Teruaki Kawamura; Nobuhiko Harada; Yukihiko Komatsu, and 

Masarii Sakai, all of Shimonoseki, Japan, assignors to Kabu- 

shiki Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho, Kobe, Japan 

Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,135 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 14, 1980, 55- 
146429[U] 

Int. Q.3 B21B 45/02 
U.S. Q. 15—302 11 Claims 




1. A degreasing apparatus for degreasing an elongated mem- 
ber comprising: 

a treatment room having a plurality of chambers sequentially 
divided in an isolated fashion along a feeding direction of 
the elongated member wherein said plurality of chambers 
comprise a degreasing chamber, a predrying chamber and 
a finish drying chamber; 

at least one pair of rotary brushes provided in the degreasing 
chamber such that said brushes are maintained in contact 
with an outer surface portion of the elongated member; 

means disposed in the degreasing chamber for jetting out a 
degreasing liquid in a direction toward the inlet side of a 
contact area between said brushes and said elongated 
member; 

a plurality of degreasing members provided, respectively, at 
the inlet and outlet sides of the degreasing chamber along 
an axis on which the elongated material is fed, wherein 
each of said degreasing members comprises an elastic 
material and defines an opening for permitting said elon- 
gated member to forceably pass therethrough; 

means disposed in said predrying chamber for jetting out 
water or steam against the elongated material; and 

means mounted in said finish drying chamber for jetting out 
a drying medium of hot air against the elongated member. 



July 5^ 



983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



17 



4,391,017 

DEVICE FOR REMOVING INCENDIARY MATTER 
FROM THE INTERIOR OF AN AIRCRAFT 
Wilhelm A. Bruensicke, Santa Monica, Calif., assignor to Lock- 
heed Corporation, Burbank, Calif. 

1 1 Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 335,178 
' ' Int. Q.3 A47L 5/18. 5/38 



U.S. Q. 15—313 



9 Qaims 




1. A device for disposing of flammable fluids and other 
incendiary material from the pressurized interior of an aircraft 
comprising: 
an intake nozzle; 

an intermediate wand portion having a longitudinal bore 
extending therethrough, said bore being in fluid communi- 
cation with said nozzle; 
a flexible hose connected at the end of said intermediate 

wand portion bore remote from said intake nozzle; 
a quick connect fitting at the other end of said flexible hose 

and in fluid communication therewith; 
an outlet fitting adapted for forming a flow path for fluid 
communication with said quick connect fitting, said outlet 
fitting comprising 

a plug which when removed results in said outlet fitting 
being in fluid communication with the external air- 
stream and 
means for removing said plug by ejecting it into said 
external airstream. 



rotatably supporting said rear set of wheels, front axle means 
including a central portion having a pintle shaft mounted 
therewith and with the chassis for enabling rocking movement 
of said front axle means relative said chassis, said front axle 
means including an actuating portion extending rearwardly 
from said pintle shaft and a pair of offset arms forwardly of and 
formed on an opposite side of said pintle shaft extending later- 
ally outwardly thereof for journalmg said front set of wheels, 
said offset arms being longitudinally spaced from said rear axle 
means, means for adjusting the position of said front wheels 
relative said chassis, said adjusting means including an adjust- 
ment lever journaled on said chassis adjacent said rear axle 
with a journaled portion thereof substantially parallel thereto 
and having one end angulated to engage said actuating portion 
so that rocking movement of said adjustment lever rocks said 
front axle means about said pintle shaft and thereby raises or 
lowers said front set of wheels relative said chassis, an operator 
engageable means for cooperating with a second end of said 
adjustment lever and extending upwardly through said chassis 
to a position accessible by an operator from an operating posi- 
tion for said suction cleaner for engagement by the foot of said 
operator to adjust nozzle height as said operator engageble 
means is rocked in a front to back direction thereby. 



4,391,019 
CORNER CONNECTOR FOR SLIDING DOORS 
Peter B. Downes, Oakville, Canada, assignor to DSH, Concord, 
Canada 

Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 239,147 

Int. Q.' A47H 75/00.- E05D 13/02 

U.S. Q. 16—105 7 Qaims 



4,391,018 

VACUUM CLEANER WITH WHEEL AND NOZZLE 

HEIGHT ADJUSTING MECHANISM 

Don W. Vermillion; Francis S. Gromek, both of Anderson, S.C, 

and Scott S. Bair, III, Atlanta, Ga., assignors to The Singer 

Company, Stamford, Conn. 

Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,413 

Int. Q.^ A47L 5/34 

U.S. Q. 15—339 5 Claims 





1. In a suction cleaner having a chassis including a front 
suction nozzle inlet at the bottom thereof and rear and front 
sets of wheels supporting such chassis for movement on a floor 
surface, a nozzle height adjusting mechanism comprising rear 
axle means including a rear axle carried by said chassis for 



1. In a comer connector for a sliding door slidable along top 
and bottom tracks, said connector comprising a rigid connec- 
tor member for locking engagement with a vertical stile and a 
horizontal rail of such a door whereby to hold them together, 
and an elongated arm movable vertically within said connector 
member whereby to control the extension of the distal end of 
said arm beyond the connector member, said distal end having 
a track engaging guide member, the connector member being 
a one-piece stamping formed from metal sheet, the general 
plane of which is located when in use in a vertical plane behind 
and parallel to a panel of the door, said connector member 
including a portion at one vertical margin bent rearwardly out 
of the general plane of the sheet and configured for locking 
engagement with the stile and a portion at an opposite vertical 
margin configured for engagement with a slot in the rail, the 
arm being supported for vertical sliding movement in contact 
with the rear surface of the sheet, the improvement wherein 
the arm is separable from the connector member, and is nor- 
mally guided longitudinally and retained in contact with the 
rear surface of the sheet solely by a plurality of portions of the 
sheet struck rearwardly out of the plane of the sheet and pres- 
enting guiding and retaining surfaces to the arm which restrict 
it to vertical sliding movement in contact with the rear surface 
of the connector throughout its normal range of movement, 
the rearwardly struck portions being so located and configured 
relative to the location and configuration of the arm that the 
latter can be disengaged therefrom but only when moved 



18 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



vertically to a position beyond one end of its normal range of whereby said top and bottom aprons extend in confronting 
movement. ^ relationship from said back apron pins through the nip between 



4^91,020 
GRAVITY RETURN HINGE HAVING AN AXLE ROD IN 

AN AXLE SLEEVE 
Yun-Tung Hsu, Taipei, Taiwan, assignor to Pei-Liang Chiu, 
Taipei, Taiwan 

Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,213 

Int. aj E05F 1/04 

U.S. a. 16—314 5 Qaims 





said middle rolls and to said front apron pins to control the 
textile fibers in abutting contact in both the back and front 
drafting zones. 



1. An automatic return hinge comprising one primary hinge 
and one secondary hinge, and said primary hinge including a 
left side primary hinge piece to be attached to a suitable upper 
portion of the jamb, and a right side primary hinge piece to be 
attached to a suitable upper portion of the door, and a locating 
piece of said right side primary hinge piece being furnished 
with a sleeve in which an axle sleeve being fitted, and around 
said axle sleeve, three locating balls being mounted at an equal 
distance of 120° angle, and in said axle sleeve fitting an axle rod 
with three slantingly upwards spiral grooves separated at an 
equal distance of 120° angle so as to match said three locating 
balls; and at one side of a locating piece of the left side primary 
hinge piece, having two axle seats with locating grooves in 
corresponding position; and when the sleeve of said right side 
primary hinge piece being placed in between the two axle seats 
of the left side primary hinge piece, the flat ends of the axle rod 
then being inserted into said locating grooves, and being fixed 
with screws; and when opening the door moving upwards 
slightly as a result of the matching function of said spiral 
grooves and said locating balls, and upon the door opening 
being over, the door automatically returning to shutting posi- 
tion as a result of door gravity effect. 



4,391,022 
AUTOMATIC LOCK SLIDER FOR SLIDE FASTENERS 
Kiyoshi Oda, Namerikawa, Japan, assignor to Yoshida Kogyo K. 
K., Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,573 
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 4, 1980, 55- 
28108[U]; Mar. 4, 1980, 55-28 I09[U] 

Int. a J A44B 79/00 
U.S. a. 24—205.14 R 8 Claims 



10 




4,391,021 
APRON DRAFTING SYSTEM 

Fouad A. Kamel, Pineville, N.C., assignor to Whitin Roberts 

Company, Charlotte, N.C. 

Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 313,318 

Int. q,3 DOIH 5/86 

U.S. a. 19—253 23 Qaims 

1. A drafting apparatus for textile fibers comprising a pair of 
back rolls, a pair of middle rolls, and a pair of front rolls, each 
of said pairs of rolls including a top roll and a bottom roll, a 
cradle supported on said middle rolls and including a pair of 
side plates, a top apron extending around said top middle roll 
between said side plates, a bottom apron extending around said 
bottom middle roll between said side plates, said cradle includ- 
ing a pair of front apron pins in the front drafting zone between 
said front and middle rolls, said cradle including a pair of back 
apron pins in the back drafting zone between said back and 
middle rolls, said top apron extending around the top ones of 
said front and back apron pins, said bottom apron extending 
around the bottom ones of said front and back apron pins. 



1. An automatically locking slider for a slide fastener having 
a pair of coupling element rows, said slider comprising: 

(a) a slider body including a pair of first and second wings 
joined at one end by a neck, there being defined a Y- 
shaped guide channel between said wings for the passage 
of the pair of coupling element rows of the slider fastener, 
said first wing having an aperture communicating with 
said guide channel, said neck having a projecting locking- 
member retaining nose adjacent to said second wing; 
' (b) a pair of laterally spaced lugs on said first wing, one on 
each side of said aperture; 

(c) a pull tab pivotably connected to said lugs and having a 
transverse spindle journalled thereby in a fixed axis; and 

(d) a locking member pivotably supported on said slider 
body and including a resilient strip having 

(1) a U-shaped base extending around said transverse 
spindle and normally urged thereagainst by the resil- 
ience of said strip, said base being angularly movable 
away from said first wing in response to the pivotal 
movement of said pull tab against the bias of said strip, 

(2) an anchor extending from one end of said base and 
terminating in a hook-shaped end hooked with said 
retaining nose, said hook-shaped end being urged 
against said nose by the resilience of said strip and 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



19 



\ 



thereby prevented from being unhooked from said nose, 
and 
(3) a locking prong extending from the other end of said 
base for normally projecting into said guide channel 
through said aperture to lockingly engage with the pair 
of coupling element rows, said locking prong being 
retractable, from said guide channel into said aperture, 
in response to the angular movement of said base away 
from said first wing. 



3as<l 



ally supported on said bas^ and having a first portion adapted 
to be engaged by said push button member when the push 
button member is manually operated, a second portion adapted 
to engage said latch member so as to bring said latch member 
into said engaged position and to hold said latch member in 
such position, a third portion adapted to engage said latch 
member when said push button member is manually operated 
to bring said latch member from said engaged position into said 
non-engaged position, the latch member being held loosely 



4,391,023 

BUCKLE ARRANGEMENT FOR SEAT BELTS 
Kobun Tanaka, Nagoya, and Takashi Kawaharazaki, Toyoake, 
both of Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai Rika 
Denki Seisakusho, Aichi, Japan 

Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,474 
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 23, 1980, 55-6788[U] 
Int. a.5 A44B 11/26 
U.S. a. 24—230 AL 4 Oaims 




4 10 17 21 24fl 24 
11 I 210 2b 



1. A buckle arrangement for a seat belt comprising: 

a frame member; 

a tongue portion having an inserting end, insertable into said 
frame member in an insertion direction and withdrawable 
from said frame member in a withdrawal direction; 

a locking member having contact portions, movably dis- 
posed on said frame member for movement into a locking 
position in which said tongue portion is locked in said 
frame member upon insertion of said tongue portion into 
said frame member, and for movement from said locking 
position in a direction of unlocking to unlock said tongue 
portion from said frame member; said tongue portion 
having engaging means, formed at said inserting end, for 
selective engagement of said tongue portion with and 
disengagement of said tongue portion form said locking 
member; 

means for moving said locking member form said locking 
position in said direction oi unlocking; and 

a retaining plate having a plate-like surface, provided on said 
frame member for retaining said locking member in said 
locking position, said retaining plate having portions in- 
clined to said plate-like surface for contact with said 
contact portions of said locking member, such that said 
retaining plate exerts a component force in said with- 
drawal direction on said tongue portion. 




between said second and third portions, and a spring portion 
for imparting a biasing force to the lever member in a direction 
in which said second portion is engaged with said latch mem- 
ber, said lever member being adapted, when said push button 
member is operated with said tongue and said latch member 
being engaged with each other, to receive a rotational force 
applied to said first portion and to transmit said rotational force 
to said latch member through said third portion to thereby 
bring said latch member from said engaged position into said 
non-engaged position. 



4,391,025 

PROCESS FOR LAYING DOWN CONTINUOUS 

MATERIAL 

Frank R. Mehdorn, Steppach, and Johann Seelig, Schwabmiinc- 

hen, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst 

Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Aug, 18, 1980. Ser. No. 178,740 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 22, 
1979, 2933963 

Int. Cl.^ B65H 54/80 
U.S. CI. 28—289 1 Qaim 




4,391,024 
BUCKLE DEVICE 
Masaru Morinaga, Yamato, Japan, assignor to NSK-Warner 
K.K., Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,148 
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 10, 1980, 55- 
47613[U] 

Int. CI.3 A44B 11/25 
U.S. a. 24—230 A 8 Qaims 

1. A buckle device for latching to a tongue, comprising a 
base, a latch member supported on said base so as to be mov- 
able between an engaged position with said tongue and a non- 
engaged position with said tongue, a push button member for 
releasing the engagement between said tongue and said latch 
member when manually operated, and a lever member pivot- 



1. An apparatus for forming meanders in a continuous spin- 
ning tow running in a plane comprising a single rotating wheel 
and meander-forming and -releasing means comprising: 

reversing elements (2) arranged generally in a circle on the 
surface and around the periphery of the wheel (1) and, 
between each pair of reversing elements (2), a guide 
groove (3) in wheeel (1) for guiding a catching device (5); 

movable catching devices (5), each catching device (5) 
arranged on a fork (4) sliding in a guide groove (3), and 
mechanical actuating means for the catching devices (5), 
each catching device (5) having an initial position, outside 
of the plane in which the continuous spinning tow is 
running and in closely spaced relation to the periphery of 



20 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



the wheel, and being movable from this initial position 
radially inwardly toward the axis of the wheel and into 
said plane; each fork (4) being fastened to the wheel (1) via 
a first joint (6), a connecting rod (7), and a pillow block 

(8); 
said mechanical actuating means including means for: 
sequentially moving the catching devices (5) to a rela- 
tively radially inward position from their initial position 
while also moving the catching devices into the plane in 
which the spinning tow is running thereby catching the 
spinning tow and forming a first meander of a sequential 
series of meanders in said spinning tow, each meander 
extending from a reversing element (2) to a catching 
device (5) which is in the relatively radially inward 
position, and 
moving each catching device (5) back toward its initial 
position after the catching device has rotated more than 
60° of the circumference of the wheel (1), thereby re- 
leasing the meander; 
the actuating means for each catching device (5) including a 
slide rod (10) for driving each fork (4) via a second joint 
(11); the slide rod (10) sliding in a corresponding track 
(14), and the motion cycle of the slide rod (10) being 
determined by a cam disk (13) via a cam roller (12). 



4,391,026 
MILL ROLL 
John A. Casey, San Francisco, and Joseph C. V. Ducasse, Marti- 
nez, both of Calif., assignors to Fabcon Incorporated, San 
Francisco, Calif. 

Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,689 

Int. CV B21B 27/02 

U.S. a. 29—121.6 6 Claims 



— ^ 



'^'^,'^1^•^.■^.•^."^' 



iy^pppi^iM^< 



'K'KIKV 






^^^^^il^^l^^jl^^j^^ 



1. A mill roll for use in grinding rnaterial such as sugar cane 
and for extracting juice therefrom, said mill roll comprising: 

a roll body; 

a plurality of circumferentially extending grooves formed in 
the periphery of said roll body, each said circumferen- 
tially extending groove comprising a substantially V- 
shaped groove defined by a pair of facing flank surfaces 
which converge radially of said roll body; 

a plurality of channels extending axially through said roll 
body at positions inwardly of said grooves; 

a plurality of radially extending recesses formed at locations 
spaced circumferentially around each said groove, each 
said recess being formed in at least portions of said facing 
fiank surfaces of the respective said groove, and each said 
recess extending inwardly of the bottom of said respective 
groove; 

a plurality of inserts, each said insert being fitted within a 
respective said recess, and each said insert being secured 
in the respective said recess by welds filling-in portions of 
said recess in said facing fiank surfaces and reforming said 
flank surfaces; 

each said insert having extending substantially radially 
therethrough an opening connecting the respective said 
groove with a respective said channel, each said opening 
having an elongated, substantially rectangular circumfer- 
ential cross-section with a longer dimension extending 
substantially circumferentially of said roll body and a 



narrower dimension extending axially of said roll body; 
and 
said welds covering substantially the entire radial outer 
surface of the respective said insert, except for said open- 
ing therethrough, such that said welds protect the radially 
outer edges of said opening. 



4,391,027 

METHOD OF MAKING A HEAT EXCHANGER 

ASSEMBLY 

James C. Fleury, Ora, Ind., assignor to Ex-Cell-O Corporation, 

Troy, Mich. 

Division of Ser. No. 104,588, Dec. 17, 1979, Pat. No. 4,296,805. 

This application Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,602 

Int. CV B23F 15/26 

U.S. a. 29—157.3 B 10 Qaims 





1. A method of making a heat exchanger assembly of the 
type having a core with front and rear faces with a plurality of 
tubes parallel to the faces and a plurality of fins extending 
transversely to the faces and tubes respectively and intercon- 
necting the tubes, comprising the steps of; assembling the fins 
and tubes together and with a peripheral wall extending be- 
tween the front and rear faces to define oppositely facing 
openings adjacent the faces and including perforated top and 
bottom walls interconnected by side walls inserting a first 
group of tubes through the perforations in the top and bottom 
walls so as to extend between the top and bottom walls, remov- 
ing the lengths of the first group of tubes extending between 
the top and bottom walls, and closing the oppositely facing 
openings of the peripheral wall with closure members. 

9. A method of making a heat exchanger assembly of the 
type having a core with front and rear faces with a plurality of 
fins extending transversely to the faces and tubes respectively 
and interconnecting the tubes comprising the steps of; provid- 
ing tube nesting members each having a notch extending along 
the longitudinal axis of said tube nesting member, arranging 
said tube nesting members so that said notches are oriented 
vertically and disposing said tube nesting members a horizontal 
distance apart approximately the distance between the top and 
bottom of the core, disposing a first group of vertically spaced 
horizontal tubes between the tube nesting members and within 
the notches, disposing horizontal lengths of serpentine fin 
extending between the tube nesting members and engaging 
adjacently spaced rows of tubes, disposing a peripheral wall 
extending between the front and rear faces of the core to define 



Julys, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



21 



oppositely facing openings adjacent the faces and including 
perforated top and bottom walls interconnected by side walls 
between the tube nesting members, disposing a second group 
of tubes to extend between and within each nesting member 
and the perforations in one of the top and bottom walls, closing 
the oppositely facing openings of the peripheral wall with 
closure members, removing the tube nesting members, and 
securing the tubes, fins and peripheral wall together to form 
the heat exchanger. i 



while not exposing the remainder of said catheter to heat, and 
thereafter pressing the end of said catheter at at least its soften- 



4,391,028 
SOLVENTLESS ASSEMBLY OF FLEXIBLE TUBING TO 

A COMPONENT 
Hrishikesh Choudhury, Gurnee, III., and Juergen H. Zaha, 
Moore, S.C., assignors to Abbott Laboratories, North Chi- 
cago, IIL 

I Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,076 



Int. a.3 B23P 19/00: B29C 17/00. 25/00 



U.S. a. 29—235 



10 Qaims 




1. An assembly apparatus for securing a length of flexible 
tubing having a predetermined internal diameter to a tubular 
portion having an external diameter larger than said predeter- 
mined internal diameter comprising: 

a multiplicity of jaw members each having a longitudinal 
port^'kn dimensioned to fit within said length of flexible 
tubing; 

means to radially guide said jaw members from a closed 
position to a position spaced therefrom while maintaining 
a parallel relationship with respect to the jaw members; 

means operatively associated with said jaw members to 
move said jaw members from said closed position to said 
spaced apart position; and 

means positioned adjacent said jaw members to introduce a 
cooling media having a temperature to temporarily freeze 
said length of tubing in an expanded state when contacted 
with said jaws in said spaced apart position. 




ing temperature against a flat surface to form a thickened 
annular lip about the catheter end. . 



4,391J)30 
METHOD OF PRODUCING A LOOPED STRAND t 
LACING MEMBER FOR USE IN TRANSPLANTING / 

TREES ^^^ I 

Barry Weidner, 153 E. Marion St., DoylestowiiiWaynr County, 

Ohio 44230 

Division of Ser. No. 131,208, Mar. 17, 1980, Pat. No. 4,287,840. 

This application Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,041 

Int. a.' B21D 39/00: B23P 11/02 

U.S. a. 29—509 4 Claims 




4,391,029 

CATHETER HUB ASSEMBLY 

Leonard F. Czuba, Lombard, and Dean G. Laurin, Lake Zurich, 

both of III., assignors to Baxter Travenol Laboratories Inc., 

Deerfield, III. 

Division of Ser. No. 970,609, Dec. 18, 1978, abandoned. This 

application Apr. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 143,072 

Int. a? B23P 11/02: B29C 13/00 

U.S. a. 29— 450 ^ 3 Qaims 

1. The method of forming an end having a plurality of areas 

of increasing wall thickness on a heat recoverable stressed 

thermoplastic tubular catheter, which comprises: heating the 

end of the tubular catheter to cause it to spontaneously reduce 

its length and increase its wall thickness and inner diameter as 

stresses are relieved in the heated portion of said catheter, 

1032 QC— 2 



1. A method of forming a looped-strand drum lacing mem- 
ber for use in transplanting trees, including the steps of: 

(a) providing a wheel-like member having a central hub with 
a plurality of posts arranged in a circular manner on the 
hub, and having a plurality of outwardly radially extend- 
ing legs with a peg mounted on each of the legs at a 
predetermined radial distance from the central hub posts; 

(b) looping a first piece of flexible strand material in a repeat- 
ing manner about one of the central hub posts and then 
outwardly along one ofthe legs and about the peg of said 
one leg and then inwardly and around a next post adjacent 
to said one post to form a closed end loop, and continuing 
said loop-forming procedure until a loop is formed along 
each of the legs; 

(c) securing the first piece of strand material after complet- 
ing the formation of the loops; 

(d) weaving a second piece flexible strand material into a 
circular arrangement about the central hub posts; and 

(e) securing together certain areas of the first and second 
pieces of stand material adjacent the central hub posts. 



22 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4,391,031 
METHOD OF ASSEMBLING TWO SHAPED SECTIONS 

WITH A COTTER 
Yves D. Laugier, Toulouse, France, assignor to Technal Interna- 
tional S.A., Toulouse, France 

Filed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,344 

Claims priority, application France, Jul. 21, 1980, 80 16083 

Int. a.3 B23P 79/00 

U.S. a. 29—526 R 9 Qaims 




1. A method for assembling first and second shaped sections 
at substantially perpendicular directions comprising: 

providing a first shaped section having a wall (la), two 
flanges {lb, Ic), two bends (Id, le) and a slot formed in 
said wall, said slot having a configuration such as to re- 
ceive said second shaped section therein, 

providing at least one cotter (3) comprising a rod (3a) having 
a thinned segment formed on a portion of its periphery, 

providing a second shaped section having a cross-sectional 
configuration complementary to said slot and at least one 
circular aperture for receiving a cotter, said aperture 
being positioned in said second shaped section such that 
when said second shaped section is inserted in said slot and 
abutted against said bends, said aperture extends beyond 
said first section a distance at least as great as the thickness 
of said cotter at said thinned segment and less than the 
thickness of said cotter at its unthinned segment, 

inserting said second shaped section (2) into said slot (4) until 
its end (2a) abuts the bends (Id, le) of said first shaped 
section, 

inserting said at least one cotter into said at least one aper- 
ture with said thinned segment against the wall of said first 
shaped section, and 

rotating said at least one cotter about the longitudinal axis 
thereof for urging the unthinned portion thereof in com- 
pression against said wall. 



ing of one field-effect transistor and one storage capacitor, 
which comprises 

(a) insulating areas of the semiconductor substrate for the 
one-transistor cells by thick oxide structures to insulate 
the cells from each other and covering the areas for the 
cells between the thick oxide structures with first thin 
oxide layers, 

(b) forming an electrode for the storage capacitors by apply- 
ing a first polycrystalline semiconductor layer over the 
entire surface of the thick oxide structures and the first 
thin oxide layers, and structuring by etching in the areas of 
the semiconductor substrate together with the first thin 
oxide layers, to leave remaining on the storage capacitor 
parts of the one-transistor cell areas of the semiconductor 
substrate a layer sequence of thin oxide as a capacitor 
dielectric and the polycrystalline layer as the capacitor 
electrode, 

(c) applying a second thin oxide layer over the entire surface 
to form a gate oxide for the transistors, 

(d) doping the transistor parts of the one-transistor cell areas 
of the semiconductor substrate by another ion implanta- 
tion to adjust the cut-ofT voltage of the transistors, 

(e) forming the gate electrodes of the transistors, by applying 
a second polycrystalline semiconductor layer over the 
entire surface and structuring by etching to leave parts of 
the second polycrystalline semiconductor on the transis- 
tor parts of the one-transistor cell areas, the combination 
therewith of 

(0 adjusting the storage capacitors to a predetermined stor- 
age capacity after the thick oxide structures and the first 
thin oxide layers are formed, and using the thick oxide 
structures as a mask, subjecting the cell areas to an ion 
implantation for preparing a doped layer which with the 
semiconductor substrate forms a pn-junction in the stor- 
age capacitor parts in the semiconductor substrate, and 

(g) performing said another ion implantation for adjusting 
the cut-off voltage of the transfer transistors utilizing as a 
mask the parts of the first polycrystalline semiconductor 
layer which form the electrode of the storage capacitors. 



4,391,032 

METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING INTEGRATED 

DYNAMIC RAM ONE-TRANSISTOR STORAGE CELLS 

Heinz Schulte, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to 

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin and Munich, Fed. Rep. of 

Germany 

Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,706 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 29, 
1980, 3032632 

Int. aj HOIL 21/20; BOIJ 77/00,- HOIL 27/04 
U.S. a. 29—571 3 Qaims 




1. Method for manufacturing dynamic RAM one-transistor 
cells integrated in a semiconductor substrate, each cell consist- 



4,391,033 

METHOD OF MAKING V-ISOLATION GROOVES BY 

OVER-FILLING WITH POLYCRYSTALLINE SILICON 

OF GRADED CONDUCTIVITY AND ETCHING 

Satoshi Shinozaki, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo 
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan 

Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,507 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 28, 1980, 55-103341; 

Dec. 12, 1980, 55-175292; Dec. 12, 1980, 55-175293; Mar. 5, 

1981, 56-31602 

Int. Q.^ HOIL 21/20, 21/306 

U.S. Q. 29—576 W 20 Qaims 

1. A method of manufacturing a semiconductor circuit, 

comprising the steps of: 

(a) forming a groove on one main surface of a semiconductor 
substrate such that an island region is defined by said 
groove; 

(b) oxidizing said main surface of the substrate including at 
least the surface of the groove; 

(c) depositing a semiconductor layer in said groove and on 
the substrate surface adjacent said groove, said semicon- 
ductor layer being deposited to a depth greater than the 
depth of said groove so that at the location of said groove 
said semiconductor layer fills said groove and extends 
above the main surface of said substrate; 

(d) introducing an impurity into said semiconductor layer 
whereby the impurity concentration of the semiconductor 
layer within the groove is substantially different than the 
impurity concentration of the semiconductor layer above 
and adjacent the groove; and 

(e) selectively removing the semiconductor layer above and 



July 5, 1^83 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



23 



adjaceht the groove by utilizing the difference in impurity 
concentration so as to follow the semiconductor layer to 



J 



,s. 




zr 23 zr zr - 




2^] 


» 36 36 37 » 
iX 340 3* yKSi2B 


j 


1 ^ 1 


) 


r 22 



remain only within the groove and, thus, to provide a 
region for separating two adjacent island regions. 



1 1 4,391,034 

THERMALLY COMPENSATED SHADOW MASK 
Kenneth P. Stuby, Catlett, Va., assignor to IBM Corporation, 
Armonk, N.Y. 

Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,910 

Int. Q.3 HOIL 5/00, 7/10 7/54 

tJ.S. Q. 29—579 3 Qaims 




3. A method for making an improved high temperature 
shadow mask assembly for a large diameter silicon wafer, 
comprising the steps of: 

forming a planar plate having a pattern of apertures misreg- 
istered at room temperature but registered at high temper- 
ature during a deposition process, each of those respective 
distances from the centroid of said plate at room tempera- 
ture is misregistered with respect to the corresponding 
desired distance from the centroid of said wafer of a corre- 
sponding shadow image on the silicon wafer at room 
temperature, by approximately the product of the differ- 
ence between said high temperature and said room tem- 
perature times said desired distance times the difference 
between the thermal coefficient of expansion of the plate 
material and the thermal coefficient of expansion of the 
silicon wafer; 

clamping said plate and said wafer with their said centroids 
mutually coincident, in a fixture which does not maintain 
their said centroids mutually coincident at said high tem- 
perature; 

raising the temperature of said plate and silicon wafer to said 
high temperature for processing; 

whereby the differential expansion of the plate material will 
bring the apertures therein into a minimum total misalign- 



ment with the intended deposition locations on the silicon 
wafer. 



431,035 
METHOD OF MOUNTING A MAGNETIC HEAD UNIT 

ON A MOVABLE CARRIER 
Oeike Van de Bult, The Hague, Netherlands, assignor to U.S. 
Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y. 

Filed Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,313 
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Apr. 14, 1981, 
8101824 

Int. Q.^ GllB 5/42 
U.S. Q. 29—603 4 Qaims 



i3 S8 




1. A method of mounting a magnetic head unit (6) on a 
carrying arm (3) of a movable carrier (2) of a magnetic disk 
storage device for digital data, which device comprises at least 
one rotating rigid magnetic disk (1) having a surface over 
which the magnetic head unit is moved for the storage and/or 
reproduction of the data in closely spaced tracks, and a bearing 
arrangement (29) which comprises bearing parts (31a, b; 32a, b) 
respectively connected to the movable carrier (2) and to a 
stationary frame (30) of the magnetic disk storage device, for 
accurately guiding the movements of the carrier (2) relative to 
the frame (30) and thereby guiding the movements of the 
magnetic head unit (6) over said surface of said magnetic disk 
(1) in an accurately defined plane, characterized in that the 
method comprises the following steps in the specified order: 

a. manufacturing a fixing part (9) for the magnetic head unit 
(6), the part being provided with locating faces, recesses, 
projections and openings for subsequent positioning and 
fixing of the magnetic head unit; 

b. arranging said carrying arm (3) and the fixing part (9) on 
a mounting aid (53) provided with first means (45) for 
positioning the carrying arm (3) relative to the mounting 
aid and second means (46, 47) for positioning the fixing 
part (9) relative to the mounting aid, the carrying arm 3 
and the fixing part (9) assuming a relative position on the 
mounting aid (53) which is within the required positional 
tolerances of the finished product, but leaving a certain 
space between the fixing part (9) and the carrying arm (3); 

c. filling said space, at least partly, with a bonding agent in 
liquid form, such as an adhesive or solder; 

d. allowing the bonding agent to cure; thereby securing said 
fixing part and said carrying arm in said relative position 
determined in step b, and 

e. securing the magnetic head unit to the fixing part. 



4,391,036 

PROCESS FOR PRODUQNG SEALED LEAD-AQD 

BATTERY 

Kenjiro Kishimoto; Hideaki Igarashi, and Migaki Kono, all of 
Osaka, Japan, assignors to Yuasa Battery Company Limited, 
Takatsuki, Japan 

FUed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,791 
Int. Q.^ HOIM 10/04 
U.S. Q. 29—623.2 8 Qaims 

1. A process for producing a sealed lead-acid battery com- 
prising the steps of 
positioning a plate group in a container, the plate group 
being formed of positive and negative plates with separa- 



,Li 



24 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



tors therebetween, the separators being formed mostly of 

glass fibers having diameters of not more than 1.0 micron, 
arranging a viscosity-increasing agent in the peripheral part 

of the plate group, 
pouring a first sulfuric acid electrolyte into the container in 

an amount which is less than the total pore volume of the 

plate group, 



8 n 7 




431,038 
METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PREPARING THE 
TERMINATED END OF FLAT CABLE FOR 
CONNECrORIZATION 
Richard A. Greene, Pickerington, and Robert P. Kennedy, Co- 
lumbus, both of Ohio, assignors to Western Electric Company, 
Inc., New York, N.Y. 

Filed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,981 

Int. a.3 H05K 3/00; B23P 23/00 

U.S. a. 29— 829 26Qaims 



pouring a second sulfuric acid electrolyte into the container 
in an amount such that thfe total amoi^nt of poured electro- 
lyte is at least equal to the total p<M^ volume of the plate 
group, and 

sealing the container to form the sealed lead-acid battery. 



4,391,037 

APPARATUS FOR JOINING THIN METAL STRIPS 

END-TO-END 

Giovanni Giasini, Via Vespucci 24, Grassobbio, Bergamo, Italy 

Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 207,079 

Qaims priority, application Italy, Nov. 16, 1979, 27349 A/79 

Int. C\? B23P 21/00; B23Q 15/00 

U.S. CI. 29—716 8 Qaims 




1. An apparatus for joining thin metal strips end-to-end, 
comprising: 

clamping means for relatively immobilizing two metal strips 
with extremities thereof overlapping but accessible from 
opposite sides; 

a plurality of four-sided-cross-section piercing tools on the 
side of one of said strips operable to form as many 
throughgoing perforations with two pairs of parallel sides 
in said overlapping extremities, with punched-out metal 
from both strips extending through each perforation to 
form a double burr projecting through the other strip, 
each of said tools having a tip substantially in the form of 
a four-sided pyramid with outlines conforming to said 
perforations adapted to split said double burr into four 
separate double tabs of substantially triangular shape; 

a support having a plurality of openings aligned with said 
piercing tools; and 

a plurality of pushers on the side of said other strip disposed 
opposite said tools and operable to spread said double tabs 
and flatten same against the perforated extremity of said 
other strip. 




1. A method of forming the terminated end of a flat cable of 
indefinite length with fold-back portions so as to facilitate the 
subsequent connectorization thereof, wherein the cable is of 
the type having two overlying/underlying arrays of laterally 
disposed conductors separated by a resilient insulative center 
film, with each array being secured directly to only the respec- 
tively adjacent one of two mutually disposed outer insulative 
films, and wherein the cable, as fabricated, further includes an 
aligned pair of insulative isolating members respectively posi- 
tioned on opposite sides of, and extending transversely across, 
the center film at each predetermined terminated end of the 
cable, said isolating members being of a material that will not 
adhere to the associated array of conductors and outer film, 
said method including the steps of: 
confining at least an end region of the fiat cable such that 
only an end portion thereof of predetermined length is 
exposed; 
applying a first force against the major surface of one outer 
film end section, in a first direction, to effect a sharp, 
retainable bend, at a predetermined angle, in both the 
other outer film end section, and the coextensive array of 
conductor end portions secured thereto; 
releasing the first force from the one outer film end section 
so as to allow the center film end portion and the opposite 
side isolating members positioned thereon, to snap back to 
at least approximately their original positions as a result of 
the selective inherent resiliency thereof, thereby, also 
forcing the one outer film end section, and the coextensive 
array of conductor end portions secured thereto, back to 
at least approximately their original positions; 
applying a second force against the major surface of the then 
one exposed isolating member previously positioned adja- 
cent the other then bent-out outer film end section, in a 
second direction, to effect a sharp, retainable bond, at a 
predetermined angle, in both the one outer film end sec- 
tion, and the array of conductor end portions secured 
thereto; 
releasing the second force from the one exposed isolating 
member so as to allow the center film end portion and the 
one and other side isolating members positioned thereon, 
to snap back to at least approximately their original posi- 
tions as a result of the selective inherent resiliency thereof, 
and 
applying a force against each of said bent-out outer film end 
sections, on the conductor-secured side thereof, and in a 
direction to effect the sharp fold-back thereof against the 
adjacent portion of the associated outer film that remains 
a part of the fabricated cable and, thereby, position the 
associated array of conductor end portions in the plane of 
the cable to facilitate the subsequent connectorization 
thereof. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



25 



15. An apparatus for forming the terminated end of a flat 
cable of indefinite length with fold-back portions so as to 
facilitate the subsequent connectorization thereof, wherein the 
cable is of the type having two overlying/underlying arrays of 
laterally disposed conductors separated by a resilient insulative 
center film, with each array being secured directly to only the 
respectively adjacent one of two mutually disposed outer 
insulative films, and wherein the cable, as fabricated, further 
includes an aligned pair of resilient insulative isolating mem- 
bers respectively positioned on opposite sides of, and extend- 
ing transversely across, the center film at each predetermined 
terminated end of the cable, said isolating members being of a 
material that will not adhere to the associated array of conduc- 
tors and outer film, said apparatus including: 
positioning means including upper and lower channel-form- 
ing means for confining and controllably transporting a 
cable back and forth between first and second work sta- 
tions, while an exposed end section of such a confined 
cable, of predetermined length, extends beyond two later- 
ally disposed face portions of said upper and lower chan- 
nel-forming means at the upstream end thereof; 
flare-out die means including a reciprocally driven die mem- 
ber located at said second work station, said die member 
having a laterally disposed cable end-receiving notch 
formed therein and a specially contoured outer cable 
wiping surface profile, said die member, in response to 
being reciprocally displaced in a direction perpendicular 
to the initial plane of an exposed end of a channel-confined 
cable, while being brought into periodic wiping contact 
therewith, cooperating with the forward face portions of 
said upper and lower channel-forming means to sequen- 
tially effect the bending of the two exposed end sections of 
the outer films, together with the coextensive arrays of 
conductor end portions respectively secured thereto, at 
sharp predetermined angles, and in different directions, 
relative to the initially coextensive center film end por- 
tion, and associated isolating members, which are also 
momentarily sequentially bent, in said different directions, 
but each time allowed to snap back to at least their approx- 
imate original positions, one time because of the presence 
of said die member notch, and 
reciprocally driven fold-back means located at said first 
work station for sharply folding back each previously 
outwardly bent outer film end section of a channel-con- 
fined cable, together with the array of exposed conductor 
end portions secured thereto, firmly against the adjacent 
portion of the outer film still remaining as part of the 
fabricated cable so as to facilitate the subsequent connec- 
torization of the cable. 



test energy with said retained conductive end portions of 
said wire leads; and 





;>=r 



assembling leaf-like battery contacts on said support member 
to be electrically joined with said wire lead conductive 
end portions after said pretesting step. 



4,391,040 
HAIR CUTTING DEVICE 
Yukio Kanazawa, No. 880 Sekishi-cho, Hamamastu-shi, Shizuo- 
ka-ken, Japan 

Filed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,817 

Int. a.3 B26B 19/20 19/44 

U.S. a. 30—201 % 15 Qaims 




4,391,039 

ELECTRlt WIRE TERMINAL CONNECTING METHOD 
Jonathan I. Kaplan, West Newton, Mass., assignor to Polaroid 

Corporation, Cambridge, Mass. 
Division of Ser. No. 67,029, Aug. 16, 1979, Pat. No. 4,281,886. 
This application Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 287,766 
Int. a.3 HOIR 43/00 
U.S. Q. 29—884 1 Qaim 

1. The method of assembling a photographic camera having 
an internal support member on which functioning electrical 
components are mounted to provide a functioning module for 
subsequent completion and assembly in an exterior housing, 
said method comprising the steps of: 
assembling wire leads on said module for connection of 

components with a source of electrical energy; 
fixing a conductive end portion of said wire leads to a non- 
conductive bracket formation; 
pretesting said module by connecting a source of electrical 



1. A hair cutting device comprising a unit consisting of a 
casing having an open end surface and an electrically operated 
clipper having fixed cutting blade end surface arranged adja- 
cent the open end surface of the casing when in a home posi- 
tion so that both end surfaces may be in the same plane, guide 
means supporting the clipper for guided controlled movement 
in the casing, a first rotary drum mounted in the casing, a first 
thread mounted on the first drum and having one end con- 
nected to a connector fixable to a fixedly positioned external 
object, power transmitting means connecting the rotary drum 
with the clipper to operatively effect displacement of the 
clipper from the home position relative to the casing in re- 
sponse to rotation of the rotary drum so that rotation of the 
rotary drum causes the relative position of the clipper with 
respect to the casing to vary in response to the spacing of the 
unit from the fixedly positioned external object, and resilient 
means connecting the casing with the clipper for urging the 
clipper toward said home position. 



26 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4,391,041 
POWERED GROUND CARE IMPLEMENT 
David E. Porter-Bennett, Willmar, Minn., assignor to The Toro 
Company, Minneapolis, Minn. 

Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,571 

Int. aj AOID 50/00 

U.S. a. 30—296 R 14 Qaims 



'0 ? 



/ 




1. A powered ground care implement, which comprises: 

(a) active means for performing a grooming or working 
action on the ground or ground growing vegetation; 

(b) an elongated upwardly extending handle assembly hav- 
ing a lower end on which the active means is carried, the 
handle assembly being sufficiently long so that a standing 
operator can hold the handle assembly while positioning 
the active means closely adjacent to or in contact with the 
ground; 

(c) engine means for driving the active means, wherein the 
engine means has a crankshaft configured to cause engine 
vibration substantially more in a first direction than in 
other directions; and 

(d) means for mounting the engine means on the handle 
assembly, wherein the mounting means includes means for 
vibrationally isolating the engine means from the handle 
assembly to help an operator hold the handle assembly 
when the engine means is operating, wherein the mount- 
ing means has means for damping out vibration primarily 
in the first direction, and wherein the mounting means 
comprises: 

(i) a backing plate fixedly secured to the engine means; 

(ii) an engine housing fixedly secured to the handle assem- 
bly for receiving the backing plate; 

(iii) flexible means for mounting the backing plate in the 
engine housing so that vibration of the engine means is 
not transmitted to the housing. 



4,391,042 

CUTTING APPARATUS FOR CUTTING A 

NON-ORCULAR OPENING 

Ned E. Sunderland, 209 Melbourne Way, Lexington, Ky. 40503 

Filed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,748 

Int. a.3 B26B 27/00 

U.S. a. 30—316 19 Qaims 









39 










38 




10 ^ 


f \ 


,- 14 


15- 


9^t\ 




. ^ 


m 


C 


H-' 3«' -35 
31 - 
30 - 

r ' 



1. A cutting apparatus for cutting a non-circular opening in 



a face plate for a non-circular stoma in which the face plate has 
an annular flange to support a bag of an ostomy appliance 
including: 

a body having a single recess in one surface thereof, said 
recess having a single continuous peripheral wall; 

a non-circular cutting element disposed within said recess 
and extending a selected distance beyond said one surface 
of said body; 

said body having a circular periphery to center said body 
relative to an annular flange of a face plate in which a 
non-circular opening is to be cut by said non-circular 
cutting element; 

said recess in said body having a non-circular shape substan- 
tially the same shape as said non-circular cutting element; 

said non-circular cutting element having a selected non-cir- 
cular shape in accordance with the shape of the non-circu- 
lar stoma with which the face plate is to be used; 

said non-circular cutting element having its outer surface 
straight and its inner surface beveled at its outer end to 
form the cutting surface of said non-circular cutting ele- 
ment; 

and retaining means to permanently retain said non-circular 
cutting element in its desired position within said recess. 

4,391,043 
KNIFE WITH REMOVABLE BLADES 
Howard Sizemore, 26384 Couzens Rd., Madison Heights, Mich. 
48071, and Robert Bniner, 1730 Peavey Rd., Howell, Mich. 
48843 

Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,589 

Int. a.^ B26B 1/00 

U.S. a. 30—330 9 Qaims 




1. A knife comprising: 

an elongated blade comprising a cutting end having a sharp- 
ened edge extending along at least one side and a tang 
formed with sides extending generally away from said 
cutting end, and also having a recess extending into one 
side thereof, said tang formed at the end thereof remote 
from said blade cutting end with an angled surface; 

said blade including a pair of inwardly and forwardly angled 
shoulders on either side of said tang; 

a handle including grip portions and a socket at a forward 
end adapted to slidably receive said tang, said socket 
including a fixed angled surface aligned with said tang and 
adapted to mate with said tang angled surface upon full 
insertion of said tang in said handle socket; 

and also including a pair of angled shoulders on said forward 
end of said handle adjacent said socket, and configured to 
be brought into mating engagement with said angled 
shoulders on said blade with said tang fully inserted in said 
socket; 

an elongated locking plate and a pivotal mount pivotally 
mounting said locking plate to said handle at a point inter- 
mediate the length of the locking plate to allow limited 
pivoting motion between locking and releasing positions; 
said locking plate including a forward locking end and a 
rear-end, said locking end on a side adjacent to said 
socket, and formed with a locking tab configured to be 
moved downward into mating relationship with said re- 
cess in said tang, with said tang fully inserted in said 
socket; 

spring bias means urging said locking plate to said locked 
position; 



r • 



July 5, im 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



27 



whereby said blade may be released by pivoting said locking 
plate rear-end to release position against the resistance of 
said spring bias means. 



4,391,044 

METROLOGY INSTRUMENT FOR MEASURING 

VERTICAL PROnLES OF INTEGRATED ORCUITS AND 

THE LIKE 
William R. Wheeler, Saratoga, Calif., assignor to Tencor Instru- 
ments, Mountain View, Calif. 

1 1 Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 305,986 
1 1 Int. a.3 GOIB 7/28 

U.S. a. 33—174 P 7 aaims 




2. A tilt compensated stylus scanner comprising, 

an elongated beam suspended in a frame, the beam support- 
ing a housing movable along the beam, 

a stylus mounted on a lower portion of said housing for 
contact with a generally flat article to be scanned linearly 
in the direction of said beam, 

a transducer connected to said stylus for generating an elec- 
trical signal representing a step height profile of said 
generally flat article, 

a bracket having spaced apart extensions with aligned pivots 
defining an axis for tilt compensation of the beam to be 
scanned relative to the article to be scanned, the tilt axis 
being perpendicular to said elongated beam, said bracket 
supported from a base at said pivots and having said frame 
mounted thereto, 

force means communicating with said bracket for compen- 
sating undesired tilt of the beam, and 

drive motor means for moving said movable housing on the 
beam. 



It 

— 1_ 



/.? JO \ . I -M 




'4 



first member having a first substantially circular multi-lobed 
cam-shaped surface formed with a first number of identical 
angularly spaced outwardly projecting lobes, a second mem- 
ber having a second substantially circular multi-lobed cam- 
shaped surface formed with a second number of identical 
angularly spaced inwardly projecting lobes having notches 
therebetween, said first number being one less than said second 
number and the size and shape of said first lobes being corre- 
lated with the size and shape of said notches so that said first 
lobes engage and interfit in said notches between said second 
lobes, means for joining said first and second members together 
so that contact can be produced between successive portions of 
said cam-shaped surfaces, said first and second members being 
movable relative to each other, the size of said surfaces with 
respect to each other being such that when one of said lobes on 
said first member is fully received or engaged in one notch 
between two adjacent lobes on said second member there is a 
slight clearance between the lobe on said first member located 
substantially opposite said one lobe, said slight clearance being 
less than the distance said first lobes project from said first 
member and only sufficient to permit angular movement of 
said opposite lobe relative to the nearest lobe on said second 
member while said one lobe is fully received or engaged in said 
one notch between said two adjacent lobes on said second 
member, said first member having at least one shaped opening 
therein, whereby a design can be formed on a surface by trac- 
ing the opening shape in said first member with a writing 
instrument by engaging the edge of said opening and moving 
said instrument within said opening in one direction while 
engaging said edge, said first member having indexed one part 
of one revolution in an opposite direction with respect to said 
second member each time that the opening in the first member 
is traced. 



4,391,046 

SOLAR HEATED GRAIN DRYING SYSTEM 

Roy Pietraschke, Rte. #1, Box 194, Cuba, Mo. 65453 

Continuation of Ser. No. 40,942, May 21, 1979, abandoned. This 

application Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,228 

Int. a.^ F26B 3/06. 3/28 

U.S. a. 34—93 4 Qaims 



4,391,045 
DRAWING INSTRUMENT OR APPARATUS 
Denys Fisher, Kirkconnel Lea, Glencaple, Dumfries DGl 4RG, 
Scotland 

Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,506 
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 18, 1980, 
8009084; Sep. 19, 1980, 8029079 

Int. a.3 B43L 11/00 
U.S. a. 33—27 L 11 Oaims 




1. A self-indexing design drawing apparatus comprising a 



1. A method of utilizing straight cylindrical irrigation line 
pipes for a solar collector system for drying grain, comprising / 
the steps of: / 

(a) dismantling the irrigation pipe line after the irrigation 
season to provide a plurality of pipe lengths, 

(b) arranging the pipe lengths separately in side-by-side 
relation to receive solar heat, 

(c) removably connecting one end of the pipe lengths to a 
manifold leaving the other end open, 

(d) drawing air through the pipes and the manifold, 

(e) directing warmed air from the manifold into a grain 
storage bin, and 

(0 dismantling the solar collector system to utilize the pipes 
for irrigation during the irrigation season. 



28 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4^91,047 
HAND-HELD HAIR DRYER 
Wilhelmus G. E. Janssens, Drachten, Netherlands, and Heinz 
Merges, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to U.S. 
Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y. 

Filed Mar. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 130,945 
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Mar. 20, 1979, 
7902158 

Int. a.3 F26B 19/00 
U.S. CI. 34—97 5 Qaims 



4,391,049 

COVERING ELEMENT OR TONGUE FOR 

ROCK-CLIMBING AND SIMILAR SPORT BOOTS 

Francesco Parisotto, Asolo, Italy, assignor to CALZATURIF- 

ICIO S.C.A.R.P.A. S.n.c. di Parisotto Francesco & C, Italy 

Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,949 
Qaims priority, application Italy, Feb. 12, 1980, 20768/80[U] 
Int. a.3 A43B 5/04. 23/26 
U.S. a. 36—114 5 Claims 



W'5 




1. An attachment formed of a substantially flexible material 
for use with a hair dryer having an air discharge nozzle, said 
attachment being expandable in use from a collapsed position 
to an expanded shape, which comprises an imperforate funnel- 
shaped wall portion open at both ends; means to connect the 
small end of said funnel-shaped wall portion to the air dis- 
charge nozzle; an outer end wall extending across the larger 
end of said funnel-shaped wall portion and being connected 
thereto, said outer end wall being provided with a plurality of 
outlet openings; and a plurality of flexible strips situated within 
.-the funnel-shaped wall portion and connecting the central 
portion of the outer end wall to the small end of the funnel- 
shapeti wall portion, said flexible strips serving to maintain the 
outer end wall in its expanded shape during use. 

4,391,048 
ELASTIC SOLE FOR A SHOE INCORPORATING A 
SPRING MEMBER 
Dieter Lutz, Schweinfurt, Fed, Rep. of Germany, assignor to 
Sachs- Systemtechnik GmbH, Schweinfurt, Fed. Rep. of Ger- 
many 

Filed Dec, 16, 1980, Ser, No. 217,037 
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 21, 
1979, 2951572 

Int. a.3 A43B 13/18. 21/26 
U.S. a. 36—28 30 Qaims 




1. A covering element or tongue for rock-climbing and 
similar sport boots, comprising: 

a single, shaped laminar element divided into first and sec- 
ond parts, one end of one part being connected to an 
opposite end of the other part by hinge means formed by 
a partly notched intermediate zone of the covering ele- 
ment, and wherein one end region of one part overlies and 
is superimposed over an end region of the other part so 
that said one end of one part is relatively slidable or longi- 
tudinally moveable with respect to said opposite end of 
the other part, whereby an improved flexibility is im- 
parted to the covering element. 



431,050 

TOOTH ASSEMBLY 

Wayne G. Smith, and Herman J. Maurer, both of Burlington, 

Iowa, assignors to J. I. Case Company, Racine, Wis. 

Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,347 

Int. a.3 E02F 9/28 

U.S. a. 37—142 A 1 Claim 




'\ ,6 '? / 




1. A shoe, particularly for use as a sport shoe, comprising an 
elastic sole, at least one chamber located in said sole, and a 
spring member formed of an elastomer material located within 
said chamber, wherein the improvement comprises at least one 
elongated tension rod located in and extending through said 
chamber and disposed generally parallel to said sole, at least 
two abutments spaced apart in the elongated direction of said 
tension rod, said spring member is located between said abut- 
ments, said spring members slidably displaceable within said 
chamber, and an adjusting device positioned on said tension 
rod and operable from the exterior of said sole for varying the 
distance between said abutments in the elongated direction of 
said tension rod for adjusting said spring member. 



1. A digging tooth assembly comprising: 

an elongated generally rectangular digging tooth of hard 
wear-resisting material having substantially parallel top 
and bottom surfaces and opposed side surfaces, said dig- 
ging tooth being substantially rectangular in transverse 
cross-section and tapered to a horizontal cutting edge at 
one end; 

a generally V-shaped support shank including top and bot- 
tom spaced apart portions which converge at one end to 
form a tip portion for the shank, said shank including flat 
top and bottom surfaces which converge to said tip por- 
tion, said top and bottom portions of said shank forming 
an undercut adaptable for mounting said shank on the 
cutting edge of an excavating machine; 

a resilient housing mounted to the top surface of said digging 
tooth, said housing having an open end and including 
opposed side walls which intersect the top surface of said 
digging tooth inwardly of the opposed side surfaces of 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



29 



said digging tooth, and said housing being mounted over 
the tip portion of said shank, said housing being substan- 
tially U-shaped in transverse cross-section having a top 
wall extending between and connecting said side walls, 
said side walls being flat and substantially parallel to lie 
closely against the tip portion of said shank and said side 
walls being substantially triangular in side elevation and 
including upper edges sloping downwardly and forwardly 
to engage against said tip portion of said shank; 

retaining means for releasably securing said digging tooth to 
said shank, said retaining means including a wedge-shaped 
projection mounted on the top surface of said shank, said 
projection being inclined relative to said shank top sur- 
face, said projection being received for locking engage- 
ment within an opening formed through the top wall of 
said housing for mounting said digging tooth to said 
shank, and said digging tooth being held on said shank tip 
portion by the locking coaction between said projection 
and said opening and the resiliency of said housing; and 

said top surface of said digging tooth abutting only against 
the flat bottom surface of said shank and said bottom 
surface of said digging tooth being spaced downwardly 
from the bottom surface of said shank with the top and 
bottcwn surfaces of said digging tooth being generally 
parallel to the bottom surface of said shank such that the 
impact force against said tooth is transmitted through said 
resilient housing to said support shank, and wherein the 
longitudinal axis of said support shank being on a vertical 
plane that is perpendicular to the horizontal digging tooth 
cutting edge, and the digging tooth cutting edge provid- 
ing a horizontal cutting action during excavation whereas 
said supporting shank providing a subsequent vertical 
cutting action. 



vertically relative to the driving vehicle to adjust their vertical 
position to the height of the snow cover. 



4,391,052 

SNOW BLOWER 

Burlin A, Guy, Jr„ P,0. Box 83, Caroga Uke, N.Y. 12032 

Filed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No, 333,727 

i Int, a,' EOIH 5/04, 5/09 

U.S. a. 37X236 7 Qaims 



4,391,051 

MACHINE ARRANGEMENT FOR FORMING TRACKS 
I AND/OR LEVELLING SURFACES RELATED TO 
CROSS-COUNTRY SKI TRAILS OR DOWNHILL SKI 

SLOPES 

Anton R, Bachler, Seeburgstrasse 10, 6006 Luzern, Swit/eriand 

Filed Jun, 29, 1981, Ser, No. 278,695 

Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jul, 4, 1980, 5149/80 

Int, Q.^ EOIH 4/00: EOlC 19/41 

U.S. Q. 37—223 17 Claims 





«^ ^^ 



1. A snow blower assembly including a horizontally elon- 
gated and laterally opening shroud having one open longitudi- 
nal front side and one closed longitudinal rear side as well as 
opposite end mounting structures at least substantially closing 
the opposite ends of said shroud, a pair of spiral bladed rotary 
conveyor members journalled in the opposite end portions of 
said shroud for simultaneous rotation about an axis extending 
longitudinally of said shroud, said closed side including a 
lateral outlet formed therein centrally intermediate said mount- 
ing structures and opening rearwardly outwardly -of said 
shroud, a horizontal axial inlet and upwardly opening tangen- 
tial outlet blower assembly supported relative to said closed 
side of said shroud and including a rotary impeller registered 
with said lateral outlet, first and second fluid motors drivingly 
coupled to said rotary conveyor members and said rotary 
impeller, each of said first and second fluid motors being of the 
variable speed type, a pair of opposite end laterally extending 
horizontal skids carried by opposite ends of said shroud and 
projecting slightly below the lower periphery of said shroud, 
rearwardly projecting arm means carried by said shroud, a 
prime mover including front and rear ends, means pivotally 
supporting the rear ends of said arm means from said prime 
mover for angular displacement about a horizontal axis gener- 
ally paralleling the first mentioned axis, first motor means 
operatively connected between said arm means and said prime 
mover for adjustably angularly displacing said arm means 
relative to said prime mover, said tangential outlet including a 
horizontally curving outlet head rotatably supported there- 
from for rotation about an upstanding axis concentric with said 
tangential outlet, and second motor means operatively con- 
nected between said outlet head and said tangential outlet for 
adjustably angularly displacing said head relative to said tan- 
gential outlet, support means supporting said skids from said 
shroud for vertical adjustment relative thereto, said support 
means including fluid motor means for adjustably shifting said 
skids relative to said shroud. 



1. Appiratus for treating a snow cover of varying height to 
make tracks for ski trails and/or to level surfaces for ski slopes 
and adapted to be attached to and positioned in front of a 
driving vehicle, comprising a frame, at least one front support, 
at least one rear support, said front and rear supports being 
adapted to contact the snow cover and support the apparatus 
thereon, pivot means for connecting said front and rear sup- 
ports to said frame, cutting means connected to said frame 
between said front and rear supports for treating the snow 
cover, and coupling means for attaching said frame to the 
driving vehicle, said coupling means being responsive to the 
height of the snow cover relative to the driving vehicle 
whereby said frame and thereby said cutting means may move 



4,391,053 
VISOR PICTURE FRAME 
Alfred Anthony, Westport, Conn., assignor to Yankee Metal 
Products, Inc., Norwalk, Conn. 

Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,773 
Int. Q.' A47G 1/06: G09F 1/12: B60J 3/00 
U.S. Q. 40—152 13 Qaims 

1. For displaying a plurality of pictures, a frame assembly 
adapted to be detachably secured to the sun visor of an auto- 
motive vehicle or the like comprising: 
a rigid frame member including a top, a bottom and a pair of 
side edges joining said top and bottom edges; 



30 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



a front panel affixed to said frame member, said panel having 
a plurality of viewing openings therein; 

a backing plate removably mounted within said frame mem- 
ber behind said front panel adapted to removably receive 
a plurality of pictures thereon behind said viewing open- 
ings in said front panel; and 

at least one resilient clip integrally attached to said frame 



edge walls joining said pair of side walls, said housing 
defining an opening; 

a bullet support plate located in said housing; 

a spring disposed in said housing and underneath said sup- 
port plate for urging bullets towards said opening, 

said opening being configured to provide means for reten- 
tion of bullets located in said housing; and 






m 


22 


40 cS 

53 

24— O 

A 18 1 





f-sz 



member and overlying the rear surface of said backing 
plate for mounting said assembly to another supporting 
surface, said clip including a substantially planar top por- 
tion extending rearwardly from and coplanar to the top 
edge of said frame member and a bottom portion extend- 
ing downwardly from said top portion having a pair of 
generally parallel spaced edges for contacting said sup- 
porting surface in gripping relation thereta 



4,391,054 
METHOD, APPARATUS AND ARTICLE FOR FORMING 

A PICTURE FRAME 

John R. Schovee, 10 Burr Oak Dr., Pittsford, N.Y. 14534 

Filed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,809 

Int. a.^ A47G 1/06; B32B 31/18 

U.S. a. 40—154 31 Oaims 




1. In a method of making frames from a plurality of frame 
sections comprising: 

(a) providing a length of frame section; 

(b) forming a groove in a surface of said length of frame 
section and inserting a fusible strip into said groove; 

(c) cutting said molding across said fusible strip into a plural- 
ity of sections that mate together at comers to form a 
frame; 

(d) abutting said sections at said comers of the frame; and 

(e) fusing the abutting ends of said fusible strip together at 
said comers, whereby said sections of molding are held 
together to form a frame. 



I 4,391,055 

AMMUNITION MAGAZINE 
Azriel Kadim, Tel Ayiv, Israel, assignor to Orlite Engineering 
Ltd^ Nes Ziona, Israel 

1 FUed Jul. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 170,087 

Int a.3 F41C 25/02 
VJS. a. 42—50 5 Qaims 

1. An ammunition magazine formed of plastic and compris- 
ing: 
a housing defming a pair of side walls and front and rear 



reinforcing means in the form of a reinforcing web moulded 
into said housing and spanning said rear edge wall and 
parts of said pair of side walls adjacent thereto in a region 
adjacent said opening for preventing fracture of said hous- 
ing upon impact. 



4,391,056 
RETAINING MEANS FOR REVOLVER CYLINDERS 
Jose C. M. Bornancini, Porto Alegre, Brazil, assignor to Forjas 
Taurus S/A, Porto Alegre, Brazil 

Filed Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 219,433 

Claims priority, application Brazil, Dec. 27, 1979, 7908530 

Int. a.3 F41C 1/00 

U.S. a. 42—62 5 Oaims 




1. In a firearm including a frame, a hammer mounted in the 
frame, a barrel, a cylinder opening between said hammer and 
said barrel, a bore in the wall of the cylinder opening beneath 
said hammer, a cylinder rotatably mounted in said opening and 
tiltably movable out of said opening for the loading and extrac- 
tion of cartridges therefrom, said cylinder having a centrally 
disposed bore, a hollow cylinder axle telescopically fitted 
within said cylinder bore, a cartridge extraction mechanism, 
said mechlbiism including an extractor rod having an inner end 
and an outer end, a star shaped member at the outer end of said 
rod, the improvement comprising a resilient bushing fitted in 
that end of the cylinder bore adjacent said hammer, said end of 
the cylinder bore having a recess therein, said recess being of 
lesser diameter than the diameter of the remainder of the bore, 
a projection extending into said recess, means on said bushing 
cooperating with said projection to fix said bushing against 
rotation, retaining means on the inner wall of said cylinder 
axle, retaining means on the outer wall of said bushing, 
whereby when said cylinder axle is moved axially in said cylin- 



JULY 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



31 



der bore from the barrel end of said frame toward said ham- 
mer, said cylinder axle retaining means and said bushing retain- 
ing means engage with each other and connect the bushing to 
said cylinder axle. 



Ih 



4,391,057 

ACTUATOR SYSTEM FOR THE RETURN OF THE 
TRIGGER IN DOUBLE-ACTION REVOLVERS 
Jose C. M. Bornancini, Porto Alegre, Brazil, assignor to Forjas 
Taurus S/A, Porto Alegre, Brazil 

Filed Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 219,432 
Oaims priority, application Brazil, Dec. 27, 1979, 7908531 [U] 
Int. O.^ F41C 1/00. 19/00 
U.S. O. 42—65 15 Oaims 




^ 



1. A trigger return actuator mechanism for a double-action 
revolver having a hammer and trigger pivotally supported 
within a frame, a hammer rod provided with a mainspring and 
engaging said hammer, said mechanism including an actuating 
rod provided with a forward end bearing against said trigger, 
an abutment member within said frame having a bore there- 
through, said actuating rod having a rear end slidably disposed 
through said bore, said abutment member mounted within said 
frame for rotary displacement about a fixed transverse axis, and 
spring means biasing said actuating rod forward end away 
from said abutment member and toward said trigger. 



I r 4,391,058 

TRIGGER AND HRING MECHANISM FOR BOLT 

ACTION RIFLE 

Richard J. Casull, P. O. Box 276, Freedom, Wyo. 83120 

Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,183 

Int. 0.3 F41C 79/00. 17/02 

U.S. CI. 42—69 A 5 Claims 




1. In a oolt action type firearm, in which the barrel of the 
firearm is attached to a receiver and a bolt is received in a bore 
in the receiver, an improved firing mechanism comprising 

a longitudinal bore within the bolt extending from the head 
end of the bolt; 

an elongate firing pin positioned in said longitudinal bore, 
with the forward end of the pin adapated to project from 
the forward end of the bolt to strike the end of a cartridge 
in the firing chamber of the firearm when the bolt is in its 
closed position, and with the rear end of the firing pin 



positioned near the innermost end of the longitudinal bore 
in said bolt; 

a cammed notch in the bolt extending inwardly from a 
longitudinal side of the bolt and intersecting the innermost 
end of the longitudinal bore in said bolt; 

an opening in the receiver adapted to be in alignment with 
the cammed notch in the bolt when the bolt is in its closed 
position; 

an elongate spring-biased puncher having a recess in its side 
surface, said puncher being adapted to move lengthwise 
within the opening from a cocked position in which the 
lead end of the puncher is substantially withdrawn from 
the cammed notch to a fired position in which the lead end 
of the puncher enters into the cammed notch in the bolt so 
as to strike the rear end of the firing pin, with said cammed 
surface on the cammed notch being adapted to push the 
puncher from the cammed notch in the bolt to the punch- 
er's cocked position during movement of the bolt to ex- 
tract a spent shell casing from the firearm; 

trigger means having a sear pin thereon adapted to engage 
the recess in the spring-loaded puncher when the puncher 
is moved into its cocked position, whereby the puncher is 
retained in its cocked position until the trigger is pulled so 
as to move the sear pin from the recess in said puncher, 
whereupon the puncher moves into the cammed notch in 
the bolt and strikes the firing pin and the firing pin is, in 
turn, forced forward so as to strike the end of the cartridge 
in the firing chamber of the firearm. 



4,391,059 
AUTOMATIC nSH HOOK SETTER 
Samuel Cordova, Denver, Colo., and Roberi J. Spitz, 1548 S. 
Gray, Lakewood, Colo. 80226, assignors to Roberi J. Spitz, 
Lakewood, Colo. 

Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 253,065 
Int. 0.3 AOIK 97/00 



U.S. O. 43—15 




4 Oaims 



V'- 



1. In an automatic fishing device having a base for securing 
to a rigid structure, and a pivoted pole holding tube spring 
biased to an upright position, the improvement of: 

(a) latch/release means arranged to temporarily hold the 
pole holding tube in downwardly pivoted position, 

(b) said latch/release means including: 

(1) a plate generally centrally mounted for limited pivotal 
movement on the base and an upright latch plate 
mounted on said plate and having an aperture therein, 

(2) spring means biasing said plate toward a latching direc- 
tion, 



32 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



(3) stop means limiting the biased pivotal movement of 
said plate in said latching direction, 

(4) a pin mounted on the pole holding tube positioned to 
mate with and be held in said aperture in said latch 
plate, 

(5) the top edge of said latch plate being beveled toward 
said pin so as to aid the latching of the pole holding 
tube, and 

(6) trigger means rigidly secured to said latch/release 
means and having a portion extending beyond said latch 
plate and generally aligned therewith, said portion 
extending beyond said latch plate including fish line 
holding means, whereby said latch/release means per- 
mits easy one hand latching of said pole holding tube in 
a down position under spring bias. 



4,391,060 
TOY ROBOT VEHICLE ASSEMBLY 

Shigeru Nakane, Yachiyo, Japan, assignor to Takara Co., Ltd., 
Osaka, Japan 

FUed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 294,894 

Int. a? A63H 33/00 

U.S. a. 46—22 11 Qaims 




1. A toy assembly simulating a robot of humanoid form with 
removable members reconfigurable into separate toy vehicles 
comprising: 

a first member configured to simulate a robotic humanoid 

head and trunk; 
a second member removably attached to the first member 

and configured to simulate a pair of robotic humanoid arm 

appendages; 
a third member removably attached to the first member and 

configured to simulate a pair of robotic humanoid leg 

appendages; 
means on the first member for removable connection to the 

second and third members, and 
means for providing locomotion on each of the first, second 

and third members to permit each member to operate 

independently as separate vehicles. 



fluid communication with said first outlet port of one of 
said air manifolds; 

(e) a plurality of tubes positioned essentially vertically in the 
interior of said housing, each of said tubes having its lower 
end in fluid communication with said second outlet port of 
one of said air manifolds and its upper end extending out 
of an opening through said housing; 

(0 a plurality of pistons moveably positioned in said tubes, 

23 .. ~ 




each of said pistons having a flexible seal on its lower end, 
a lower flange, an upper flange, a centering ring resting on 
said upper flange and its upper end extending out of said 
upper end of one of said tubes; 

(g) means for limiting the distance of travel of said pistons; 
and 

(h) a plurality of moveable ornaments exterior to said hous- 
ing, each of said moveable ornaments being connected to 
one of said pistons. 



4,391,062 
INFLATABLE ARTICLES 
Sidney H. Magid, 4th Fl., No. 10, Alley 5, La. 12, Section 4, Jen 
Ai Rd., Taipei, Taiwan 

Filed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,513 

Claims priority, application Taiwan, Jun. 1, 1981, 7011599 

Int. a.3 A63H 3/06 

U.S. a. 46—88 13 Claims 



19 65 16b |59 ,5 

-V- 



4,391,061 
MUSICAL TOY 
A. Edward Fogarty, and Bonnie R. Fogarty, both of 3513 School 
Ave., Sarasota, Fla. 33579 

Filed Dec. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 333,580 
Int. a.3 A63H 29/16 
LI.S. a. 46—44 3 aaims 

1. A musical toy, comprising: 

(a) a housing; 

(b) a plurality of air manifolds positioned in the interior of 
said housing, each of said air manifolds having an inlet 
port, a first outlet port and a second outlet port; 

, (c) a plurality of bellows operatively positioned in openings 
through said housing, each of said bellows having its open 
end in fluid communication with said inlet ix)rt of one of 
said air manifolds; 
(d) a plurality of whistles positioned in the interior of said 
housing, each of said whistles having one of its ends in 




1. An inflatable article comprising: 

an inflatable envelope made of a gas impervious material 
which is at least in part resilient and has at least one inflat- 
ing valve provided thereon; 

at least one flexible hollow protrusion attached to a wall of 
said envelope, said hollow protrusion having a closed end 
and an open end; 

at least one external control element connected with the 
closed end of said hollow protrusion and extending out- 



JULY 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



33 



wardly from said hollow protrusion so that said protru- 
sion can be flex'ed from a normally unflexed position by an 
external force, applied by a user, to activate said external 
control element; 

an internal supporting element attached to the wall of said 
envelope; 

an engaging member provided on said closed end of said 
hollow protrusion; 

at least one movement imparting element capable of being 
selectively engaged and disengaged with the closed end of 
said hollow protrusion by means of said engaging mem- 
ber; 

at least one internal movable object contained in said enve- 
lope, said movable object being movable by said move- 
ment imparting element; 

one or more returning elements associated with said hollow 
protrusion for returning said hollow protrusion to its 
unflexed position after said external force is released. 



II 4,391,063 

BALLOON WITH SEALING DEVICE THEREFOR AND 

METHOD 
H. Ross Gill, III, Ashland, Ohio, assignor to The National Latex 
Products Co., Ashland, Ohio 

Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,858 

Int. a.J A63H 3/06: B32B 15/14, 15/20; B65D 63/02 

U.S. a. 46—90 10 Claims 




of said strip as well as extending a predetermined amount of 
substantially greater length as compared to the length of said 
strip from an end of said strip, for providing for gripping of the 
line by the balloon user, said walls of said strip being secured 
to one another by an adhesive disposed between the same, with 
said adhesive also securing said line to said strip walls interme- 
diate thereof, the wall thickness of each of said strip walls 
being in the range of approximately 0.001 of an inch to 0.002 of 
an inch, said strip encircling the exterior of said neck portion 
and being readily wound or twisted about the neck portion of 
the inflated balloon by one's fingers, and being self-sustaining 
in said wound or twisted condition and preventing the escape 
of air through said neck portion, while securing said flexible 
retainer line to said balloon, said combined sealing device and 
retainer line being readily removable from said balloon by 
unwinding "or untwisting said strip from about said neck. 

8. A method of forming a combined sealing device and 
flexible retainer line for a toy balloon comprising, providing a 
relatively thin deformable but self-sustaining elongated section 
of foil having on one side thereof a coating of adhesive, the 
wall thickness of said foil being in the range of approximately 
0.001 of an inch to 0.002 of an inch, laying a non-self-sustaining 
retainer line such as a string or the like longitudinally of said 
foil section for substantially the full length of said section with 
the line extending a predetermined amount of substantially 
greater length as compared to the length of said section from 
an end of said section, and then folding said foil section upon 
itself to form an elongated foil strip of double wall thickness 
which clasps said retainer line therein, with said adhesive 
securing the double wall thickness of the foil together and to 
the intermediate retainer line, said strip being self-sustaining 
but being readily wound or twisted about the neck of an in- 
flated toy balloon for expeditiously sealing the latter against 
the escape of pressure from within the balloon and at the same 
time being operable to securely attach the retainer line to the 
balloon, with said combined sealing device and attached re- 
tainer line being readily removable from the balloon by un- 
winding or untwisting the strip from about the neck of the 
balloon. 



1. A combined sealing device and flexible retainer line for a 
toy balloon, comprising a double wall thickness strip of de- 
formable but self-sustaining foil with the retainer line being 
non-self-sustaining, as for example string, disposed intermedi- 
ate the walls of said double wall thickness foil strip, and ex- 
tending for substantially the full length of said strip as well as 
extending a predetermined amount of substantially greater 
length as compared to the length of said strip from an end of 
said strip, for providing for gripping of the line by the balloon 
user, said walls of said strip being secured to one another by an 
adhesive disposed between the same, said adhesive also secur- 
ing said line to said strip walls intermediate thereof, the wall 
thickness of said foil being in the range of approximately 0.001 
of an inch to 0.002 of an inch, said strip being readily wound or 
twisted about the neck of an inflated balloon by one's fingers 
and being self-sustaining in said wound or twisted condition for 
expeditiously sealing the balloon against the escape of pressure 
from within the balloon's interior while at the same securely 
attaching the retainer line to the balloon, said combined sealing 
device and attached retainer line being readily removable from 
the balloon neck by unwinding or untwisting said strip. 

5. In combination a toy balloon comprising an inflatable 
resilient body portion and a neck portion connected to said 
body portion, and a combined sealing device and flexible re- 
tainer line wound or twisted about the neck portion and car- 
ried thereby, said sealing device comprising a relatively thin 
deformable but self-sustaining strip of foil of double wall thick- 
ness with said flexible retainer line being non-self-sustaining, as 
for example string, attached to said strip intermediate the walls 
of said strip, said line extending for substantially the full length 



4,391,064 
ACROBATIC TOY 
Willis M. Lakin, 7879 Northway Dr., Hanover Park, III. 60103; 
Faith L, Goodman, North Bergen, N.J., and Diane L. Savoca, 
Howard Beach, N.Y., assignors to Willis Lakin, Hanover 
Park, III. 

Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,463 

Int. a.' A63H 13/12 

U.S. a. 46—130 3 aaims 




r\ 



1. A toy comprising: 

(a) supporting means comprising a cross bar and a pair of 
eyelets on the respective ends of said cross bar wherein a 



34 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



pair of spaced bearing sleeves is on and rotatable about 
said cross bar; 

(b) a hollow main shaft, disposed around, rotatably sup- 
ported by said supporting means at spaced locations along 
said main shaft; 

(c) a figure suspended on said main shaft, wherein said figure 
comprises a body and a pair of arms, said pair of arms 
being fixedly attached at their respective one ends to said 
main shaft and pivotally mounted to said body at their 
respective other ends; 

(d) driving means for rotating said main shaft about its axis, 
said means comprising a cord wound about a reel, a 
ratchet gear means arranged between said reel and said 
main shaft, wherein the gears of said ratchet gear means 
positively engage for driving said main shaft when said 
cord is pulled and thereby unwound from the reel, and 
wherein said gears slip as the cord is rewound onto the 
reel so as not to drive said main shaft; 

(e) biasing means for rewinding the cord onto the reel; 

(0 means for suspending said supporting means and hence 
the toy from a crib or the like for providing counterforce 
to pulling action on said cord; 

(g) a first and second housing supported at spaced locations 
by said supporting means and means for attaching said 
housings to said cross bar, wherein said first housing 
comprises a gear housing for containing said driving 
means; 

(h) a drive shaft mounted in said gear housing, wherein said 
driving means is contained on said drive shaft, wherein 
said reel is rotatably mounted on said drive shaft and 
axially displaceable along said drive shaft, and wherein 
said driving means comprises a first ratchet gear on said 
reel, a second ratchet gear fixed on said drive shaft for 
cooperating with said first ratchet gear, a spring fixed at 
one end on said gear housing and at the other end to said 
reel for urging said first ratchet gear into engagement with 
said second ratchet gear, and an output gear fixed on one 
of said drive shaft and said second ratchet gear for driving 
said main shaft when said cord is pulled and said ratchet 
gears are in positive engagement; 

(i) a drive gear coupled with said main shaft for rotation 
therewith and engaging said output gear wherein one of 
said bearing sleeves forms a part of said driving gear; and 

(j) a pivot shaft extending through aligned holes in said other 
ends of said arms and said body for rotatably mounting 
said body to said arms. 



4,391.065 
COVER PLATE FOR ACCESS OPENING 
Dennis A. Rice, Dubuque, Iowa, assignor to Deere & Company, 
Moline, III. 

Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,7% 

Int. a.3 E05C 21/02 

U.S. a. 49—465 8 Qaims 





s^LtrinT^^^^LJ^J- 




1. In combination, a plate structure forming part of a housing 
and having an access opening therein; a cover plate positioned 
in said opening having an enlarged portion closing the main 
part of the opening and a small portion, contiguous with and 
extending from the enlarged portion closing a matching part of 



the opening, said plate structure and said cover plate having 
internal and external surfaces extending from the respective 
edges of the opening and plate; a series of rigid stop elements 
fixed to the internal surface of the plate structure adjacent the 
edges of the opening and extending beyond the edges into said 
Ojjening and engaging the internal surface of the cover plate so 
as to limit movement of the cover to a position in which the 
internal and external surfaces of the plate structure and cover 
are co-extensive at their edges, and in which two of the ele- 
ments are on opposite sides of the opening in the areas where 
the edges forming said main part of the opening join the edges 
forming the aforesaid matching part of the opening; a rod fixed 
to the internal surface of and extending across the small portion 
of the cover plate and having opposite end sections that extend 
beyond the opposite edges of the small portion and engage the 
internal surface of the plate structure, said end sections being 
inclined in a direction toward the external surface and when in 
a free state, extending to ends beyond the internal surface; and 
means spaced from said rod and extending between the plate 
structure and cover plate for drawing the cover plate against 
the stop elements to thereby distort said rod end sections. 



4,391,066 
GRINDING MACHINE WITH DETECTION DEVICE FOR 

USEABLE LIMIT OR GRINDING WHEEL 
Kenichi Munekata; Kunihiko Unno, both of Kariya, and 
Norihiko Shimizu, Nagoya, all of Japan, assignors to Toyoda 
Koki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kariya, Japan 

Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,580 

Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 18, 1980, 55-82447 

Int. aj B24B 49/18 

Lf.S. a. 51—165.87 13 Qaims 




1. A grinding machine having a truing device of the type 
wherein a grinding wheel is trued by in-feeding a truing tool a 
predetermined truing in-feed amount against said grinding 
wheel at the time of each truing of>eration, comprising: 
truing tool wear detection means for detecting a total wear 
amount 2Ar of said truing tool after each truing operation, 
and 
arithmetic and judgement means coupled to said truing tool 
wear detection means for receiving said total wear amount 
2Ar and for judging whether or not said grinding wheel 
has been worn down to a predetermined size limit Rmin 
based upon at least said total wear amount 2Ar. 



4,391,067 
LOG WALL CONSTRUCTION FOR LOG HOME 
Dale A. Frady, and David C. Frady, both of Waynesville, N.C., 
assignors to Frontier Homes, Inc., Waynesville, N.C. 
Filed Apr. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 140,240 
Int. a.3 E04B 1/10. 1/78 
U.S. a. 52—97 24 Oaims 

1. A building wall comprising a plurality of logs arranged 
generally parallel, one above another, said logs having respec- 
tive inner and outer sides and respective upper and lower sides 
positioned in opposing relation to the adjacent upper and 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



35 



lower sides of other logs, the upper side of each of said logs 
including a longitudinally extending generally vertical abut- 
ment surface located between the inner and outer sides of the 
log and a longitudinally extending inclined surface portion 
adjoining said abutment surface and sloping continuously 
downwardly therefrom toward and adjoining the outer side of 
said log, respective longitudinally extending filler panels lo- 
cated between the upper side of each log and the lower side of 




the next higher log and positioned against said vertically ex- 
tending abutment surface on the upper side of the log for 
substantially filling any longitudinal spaces between adjacent 
logs, and a hardenable filler material located between the 
upper side of each log and the lower side of the next higher log 
and covering the outer side of said filler panel located therebe- 
tween to provide a seal between adjacent logs to prevent the 
passage of water and air through said wall. 



4,391,068 

WATER DEFLECTOR 

Walter F. Kosar, 103 Elmore Rd., Pittsburgh, Pa. 15221 

Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,394 

Int. a.3 E04D 13/00 

U.S. a. 52—97 7 Oaims 



,24 18 26 




5. A deflector adapted to be mounted between overlapping 
shingles along the edge of a roof, said deflector comprising: 

(a) a substantially flat base with a side edge and a front edge 
extending at an angle from said side edge, said base includ- 
ing at least one tab adapted to engage the lower surface of 
a shingle placed on top of said base and secure said base 
thereto, 

(b) a first upstanding lip integral with said base along said 
side edge and substantially perpendicular to said base, and 

(c) a second upstanding lip integral with said base along said 
front edge and integral with said first lip and substantially 
perpendicular to said base, said upstanding lips forming a 
continuous deflector lip adapted to deflect liquid. 



4,391,069 
FREE STANDING WALL 
Eugene F. Vermillion, Columbus, Ohio, assignor to The Colum- 
bus Show Case Company, Columbus, Ohio 

Filed 9ct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 200,026 

Int. a.3 E04D 15/00 

U.S. a. 52—126.4 4 Qaims 



n «4i^" 




1. A prefabricated, free standing wall comprising: 

(a) an elongated floor-mounted, substantially horizontally 
disposed sill member formed with upwardly opening, 
longitudinally coextensive, transversely spaced apart, 
medial and first and second lateral channels; 

(b) an elongated substantially horizontally disposed cap 
member formed with downwardly opening, longitudi- 
nally coextensive transversely spaced apart, medial and 
first and second lateral channels; 

(c) a plurality of substantially vertically disposed frame 
members extending between and connecting said sill and 
cap members in relatively spaced apart, coplanar relation, 
each of said frame members having laterally outwardly 
projecting, horizontally extended foot and head sections 
secured in the medial channels of said sill and cap mem- 
bers, respectively; 

(d) a plurality of substantially vertically disposed, horizon- 
tally spaced apart panel-positioning studs having opposite 
end portions positioned in each of the first and second 
lateral channels of said sill and cap members; and 

(e) at least two, coplanar wall panels removably carried in 
each of the first and second lateral channels of said sill and 
cap members and having adjacent edges thereof disposed 
in abutment with and separated by one of said studs. 



4,391,070 
CHIMNEY 
Manfred Bonnighausen, Bochum, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as- 
signor to Babcock-Bau GmbH, Oberhausen, Fed. Rep. of 
Germany 

Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 239,116 
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 29, 
1980, 3007719 

Int. Q.3 E04H 12/28; F23J 13/02: E04B 1/35 
U.S. Q. 52—127.2 5 Qaims 

1. Method for constructing a chimney having a loadbearing 
external trunk which is built in sliding or climbing shuttering 
and supports platforms for accommodating flue gas pipe or 
flue gas pipes, comprising the steps: forming support elements 
on the inner wall of the external trunk at planned levels of the 
platforms; constructing said support elements as individual 
brackets; providing the platforms with support arms; building 
the platforms with support arms completely within the exter- 
nal trunk at ground level; raising the platforms to respective 
levels with lifting equipment; passing each platform by the 
brackets when being raised to a respective level; turning the 



36 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



hanging platform by an amount so as to locate its support arms 
above the brackets; and then lowering the platform with sup- 




4,391,072 
WINDOW TRIM 
John W. Moore, Creve Coeur, Mo., assignor to The Swan Corpo- 
ration, St. Louis, Mo. 

Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,807 

Int. a.3 E06B 1/04 

U.S. a. 52—211 10 Qaims 



porting arms onto the brackets, said platforms and support 
elements being prefabricated. 



4,391,071 
BASEMENT WATER DRAIN COVE 
Socrates J. Schantz, Marine, 111., assignor to Schantz & Sons, 
Inc., Marine, 111. 

Filed Aug. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 181,986 

Int. a.3 E04B 7/70; E04F 17/00; E02D 31/02 

U.S. a. 52—169.5 3 Qaims 



^-^^^-^^^-^^^^^ 




1. A unitary integral plastic or rubber-like drain cove of 
uniform composition for draining water from a basement wall 
along a junction of the wall and floor which comprises a base 
member secured in sealed relation on the floor adjacent to and 
spaced from said wall to defme a drain channel bounded by the 
wall, the floor and said base member and a water directing 
cove member integrally connected to said base member ex- 
tending upwardly from and inwardly of said base and having a 
water directing portion at a top part of the cove member 
extending downwardly toward and bearing lightly against the 
wall and being free of any connection thereto to provide water 
drain means for moisture on said wall surfaces to said drain 
channel, said base member extending outwardly along the 
floor from a bottom portion of the cove member, said water 
directing portion being constructed of a plastic or rubber-like 
material having the capacity to conform to irregularities in the 
wall surface against which it bears and extending from a point 
above and inwardly from said base member and spaced from 
said wall downwardly toward and against said wall to provide 
a gutter defming said water drain means and said base member 
being spaced from said wall and secured to the floor outwardly 
of said water directing portion. 




1. A window trim assembly for use with a building window 
having a sill and jambs at opposite sides of said window, for the 
purpose of modifying the appearance of said window, said 
assembly comprising a sill trim component for covering dispo- 
sition of said sill including a main or body section of planar 
configuration and an apron depending from a horizontal edge 
of said main body portion for obscuring the adjacent edge 
portion of said sill, said apron having a planar configuration 
and being in substantially planar perpendicular relationship to 
said main or body section, and a pair of jamb trim components, 
each of said jamb trim components having a panel portion for 
covering disposition of corresponding portions of said jambs, 
each said panel portion being directed toward the opening of 
said window and being presented in upstanding relationship to 
the main or body section of said sill trim component, each said 
panel portion having a base extension projecting from said 
panel portion inwardly from the corresponding jamb member 
toward the opposite panel portion in overlying relation to the 
adjacent portion of the main or body section of said sill trim 
component, each base extension including a skirt integral with 
said base extension extending over the proximate portion of 
said apron of said sill trim component in covering disposition, 
and means securing together said sill trim component and jamb 
trim components. 



4,391,073 
MOVABLE PANEL ASSEMBLY 
Lloyd C. Mollenkopf, Akeley, and Daniel J. Branson, Prior 
Lake, both of Minn., assignors to Rosemount Office Systems, 
Inc., Lakeville, Minn. 

Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,692 
Int. C1.3 GOIK 11/04; E04B 2/82; E04H 5/00 
U.S. a. 52—241 6 aaims 

1. A movable panel assembly comprising a frame defining a 
perimeter and including generally vertical frame members and 
a generally horizontal lower frame member: 
support means operable to hold said frame members in an 

assembly defining an interior space; 
said vertical frame members comprising channel shaped 
members having a base and side walls, the sidewalls hav- 
ing intumed ends spaced from the base and defining an 
opening facing away from the space defined by the perim- 
eter frame; 
sheet means extending across said space to form a support 
resisting forces perpendicular to the plane of the perimeter 
frame; 
a layer of fabric over said sheet means; 
retainer means on each of the edges of the frame members 
comprising a plurality of teeth extending in direction 
relative to the frame so that edge portions of the fabric 
layer placed over the teeth under tension are retained by 
the teeth, and 
a pair of support feet mounted on the lower horizontal frame 
member, a raceway having a lower wall and hingedly 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



37 



attached side walls, means to mount the lower wall of the 
raceway to the support feet with the raceway side walls 
extending upwardly to position adjacent the lower frame 
member to form an enclosure in cooperation with the 
lower frame member, said raceway side walls having 




intumed side edges adjacent the lower frame member, and 
cooperating grooves and lip means acting between the 
intumed edges of the raceway sidewalls and the support 
feet to releasably retain the raceway sidewalls uprightly 
on the support feet. 



4,391,074 
WEEP SCREED 
Henrietta H. Holsman, 101 Ocean Ave., Apt. B7, Santa Monica, 
Calif. 90402 

Filed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,309 

Int. Cl.^ E04B 1/00 

U.S. a. 52—367 34 Qaims 




1. In combination in a weep screed for providing a reinforce- 
ment for stucco at or near the foundation plate line of a build- 



ing. 



a first lattice network disposable against the wall of the 
building before the addition of stucco to the building and 
including undulating wires disposed in overlapping rela- 
tionship for receiving and reinforcing the stucco and 
including line wires extending across the undulating wires 
to define overlapping relationships with the undulating 
wires, and 

a second lattice network extendable from the wall of tlie 
building in transverse relationship to the first lattice net- 
work before the addition of stucco to the building and 
disposed in a horizontal relationship and including undu- 
lating wires disposed in overlapping relationship for re- 



ceiving and reinforcing the stucco and including line 
wires extending across undulating wires lo define overlap- 
ping relationships with the undulating wires, and 
the second lattice network including undulating wires ex- 
tending into the first lattice network to provide u continu- 
ation between the first and second lattice networks 



4,391.075 
INSULATED ROOF STRUCTURE 
Dwight S. Musgrave, Granville, Ohio, assignor to Owens-Corn- 
ing Fiberglas Corporation, Toledo, Ohio 

Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No, 202,989 

Int. CI.' E04B 1/74. 5/57 

U.S. CI. 52—404 13 Qaims 




1. An insulated roof structure (10) comprising a plurality of 
parallel, spaced main support beams (18), a plurality of parallel, 
horizontally extending auxiliary support beams (12) spaced 
apart from each other and supported by and extending trans- 
versely of the main support beams (18), the auxiliary support 
beams (12) each having a lower upstanding fiange, a plurality 
of roof panels (14) mounted in covering relationship to the 
auxiliary support beams (12), a plurality of hangers (20) 
mounted in spaced relationship along each of the auxiliary 
support beams (12) between each pair of adjacent main supptiri 
beams (18), each hanger (20) including an upper hook portion 
(28) in cooperative engagement with the lower upstanding 
fiange of an auxiliary support beam (12), a plurality of elon- 
gated support members (22) hung on each of the auxiliary 
support beams (12) in alignment with each other and parallel to 
the auxiliary support beams (12), the support members (22) 
being cooperatively engaged with and suspended by the hang- 
ers (20), and insulation strips (36) strung over the support 
members (22) transversely of the auxiliary support beams (12). 



4,391,076 
' ROOF OR SIDEWALL CONSTRUCTION 
Stewart Ferguson, P.O. Box 12, Aloha, Wash. 98525 
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 59,998, Jul. 23. 1979. This 

application Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,495 
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 20, 
1998, has been disclaimed. 
Int. CI.' E04D 1/00 
U.S. CI. 52—553 24 Qaims 

1. In a covering for a surface of a building structure, such 
covering including separate generally rectangular covering 
elements having respective butt and tip ends and applied in 
generally coplanar, side adjacent relationship in each of several 
courses with the tip portions of the covering elements of one 
course being overlapped by the butt portions of the covering 
elements of a higher course, the improvement comprising a 
filler element having respective butt and tip ends, at least one 
side of said filler element having a shoulder extending trans- 
versely of such side and dividing said filler element into a wide 



38 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



tip portion and a narrower butt portion, said filler butt portion effectively provide shear resistance in the finished structure, 
being fitted between the adjacent sides of adjacent covering and continuing said process of assembling and connecting said 

components until said structure is completed. 




4,391,078 

LOADING BLADES FOR PACKAGING APPARATUS 

Biagio J. Nigrelli, Kiel, Wis., assignor to Nigrelli Corporation, 

Kiel, Wis. 

Division of Ser. No. 112,589, Jan. 16, 1980, Pat. No. 4,332,121. 

This application Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 325,066 

Int. a.3 B65B 5/04 

U.S. a. 53—251 2 Gaims 



elements in a course and said shoulder abutting the tip end of 
one of such adjacent covering elements. 



' 4,391,077 

METHOD OF CONSTRUCTING A BUILDING SYSTEM 

Hans J. Giess, Rotorua, New Zealand, assignor to Fletcher 

Timber Limited, Auckland, New Zealand 
Continuation of Ser. No. 100,976, Dec. 6, 1979, abandoned. This 
application Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,144 
Claims priority, application New Zealand, Dec. 8, 1978, 
189128 

Int. a.3 E04B 1/10 
U.S. a. 52—747 4 Qaims 




1. A method of constructing an essentially one component 
thick structure of substantially planar walls from contiguous 
lengths of plank-like building components comprising the steps 
of producing a plurality of equally spaced parallel holes 
through each said component, producing slots through each 
component parallel to said holes and extending from an outer 
surface of said component where a contiguous component is to 
be joined to the hole adjacent thereto, placing at least one of 
said components in position for construction, providing an 
elongated joining member having the cross-sectional shape of 
a straight shank with elongated bulbous ends, the dimensions 
of said shank and bulbous ends being such as to provide a snug 
sliding fit in said slot and holes respectively, inserting said 
joining member into at least one of said holes and slot with said 
shank and one bulbous end in said slot and hole resp>ectively, 
'said joining member also being dimensioned so that when 
inserted into said hole and slot substantially half of the cross- 
section of said joining member extends from said component 
and the length of said joining member extends substantially 
parallel to the central axis of said hole for a distance compara- 
ble to at least one-half the length of said hole, positioning 
another component with respect to said construction position 
with the hole and slot thereof in aligned engagement with the 
extending end of said joining member, sliding said another 
component into abutting engagement with said first positioned 
component using said joining member as a guide, inserting 
wooden dowels into said holes in said another component 
which are aligned with said holes in previously positioned 
adjacent components, said dowels having a diameter to pro- 
vide a snug fit with said holes and a length no greater than the 
length of a hole, driving said dowels into said aligned holes to 




1. In a case loader having an article conveyor for moving 
articles along support means having an upper surface defining 
a first plane, a case conveyor located beneath the article con- 
veyor and in which the case conveyor path merges upwardly 
into the conveying path of the article conveyor from below, 
the improvement wherein said case conveyor includes two 
spaced parallel conveyor runs separated by a gap and a case 
displacement lever, and means for supporting and operating 
said lever for pivotal movement between an advanced position 
extending in said gap between said conveyor runs to engage 
the under surface of a carton and raise a portion of the carton 
above said first plane and above the bottom of an article car- 
ried on said article conveyor to intercept the leading end of an 
article carried on said conveyor to insure engagement of the 
leading edge of said carton with the article being loaded and to 
minimize the distance the articles must fall into the case and 
said means for supporting and operating said lever affording 
movement of said lever to retracted position below said first 
plane to afford movement of the filled case from said case 
conveyor. 



4,391,079 
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR CYCLIC MACHINES 
Dale M. Cherney, Howards Grove, Wis., assignor to Hayssen 
Manufacturing Company, Sheboygan, Wis. 

Filed Aug. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 180,039 
Int. a.3 B65B 41/18: B31B 1/10; G05B 19/28; G06F 15/46 
U.S. a. 53—396 15 Qaims 

1. The method of controlling apparatus for sealing packages 
wherein a web of flexible packaging material having a series of 
registration marks is formed into tubing and fed past sealing 
means for sealing the tubing to form packages, comprising: 
presetting a predetermined delay length of tubing to be fed 

past the sealing means; 
initiating web feeding; 
detecting a registration mark; 

feeding said predetermined delay length past the sealing 
means in response to said detection of a registration mark 
before sealing of the tubing, said predetermined delay 
length being substantially independent of the rate at which 
packaging material is fed past the sealing means; 
determining when the predetermined delay length of tubing 
has passed the sealing means after detection of said regis- 
tration mark; 
stopping the feeding of material past the sealing means in 



July 5, 



1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



39 



response to said predetermined delay length's having 
passed the sealing means; 




actuating the sealing means; and reinitiating feeding of the 
web. 



4,391,080 

METHOD FOR PROVIDING AN INERT STERILE 

ATMOSPHERE IN AN ASEPTIC PACKAGING MACHINE 

Aaron L. Brody, Dunwoody; Joseph J. Embro, Atlanta, both of 

Ga., and William E. Young, Neptune, N.J., assignors to The 

Mead p)rporation, Dayton, Ohio 

1 1 Filed Sep. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 76,932 
Int. a.J B65B 55/10 
U.S. a. 53—426 6 Qaims 




1. In a method for providing a sterile inert atmosphere in an 
aseptic packaging machine whereby inert gas is supplied to the 
interior of the machine and wherein preformed Hanged con- 
tainers are introduced into said interior through a sterilant 
bath, then filled by a filler means and thereafter covered with 
a cover material which is supplied through another sterilant 
bath, the improvement whereby said inert gas is introduced 
into the interior of said machine by sparging said gas into and 
through said container sterilant bath, and a portion of said gas 
! is withdrawn from said interior, divided into three parts and 
delivered to (i) said containers for drying the flange areas 
thereof prior to filling and sealing, (ii) to said filler means to aid 
in the operation thereof and to provide a microbiological 
barrier therefor, and (iii) to said cover material as it emerges 
from said other sterilant bath for removing residual sterilant. 



4,391,081 

METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR FORMING, 

HLLING AND SEALING PACKAGES 

Lloyd Kovacs, Sheboygan, Wis., assignor to Hayssen Manufac- 
turing Company, Sheboygan, Wis. 

Filed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 185,209 

Int. a.5 B65B 1/24. 9/06 

U.S. a. 53—436 14 Qaims 




1. The method of forming, filling and sealing packages com- 
prising forming a flexible packaging material into tubing, the 
tubing extending downwardly, feeding the tubing down- 
wardly and transversely sealing it at package length intervals, 
and delivering a quantity of the product with which the pack- 
ages are to be filled into the tubing during an interval of time 
between successive sealing operations, the transverst seals 
being formed by a pair of sealing members movable relative to 
one another between an open position and a closed position in 
sealing engagement with the tubing, and, with the sealing 
members open and after the delivery of the product into the 
tubing and before the next seal is made, squeezing the tubing 
above the sealing members by positively moving a pair of 
stripper members relative to one another independently of the 
movement of the sealing members from an open position to a 
closed position wherein the stripper members are closely adja- 
cent one another on op|X)site sides of the tubing in engagement 
with the tubing above the sealing members, then holding the 
stripper members in their closed position while moving them 
generally straight down on the tubing between the sealing 
members from above to below the sealing members, thereby to 
compact the product in the tubing below the level of the next 
seal to be made, closing the sealing members on the tubing 
above the stripper members, and then opening the stripper 
members and the sealing members and moving the stripper 
members up between the sealing members returning them to 
their open position. 



4,391,082 
,^_34DE MOUNTER WITH HLM CURL 
ACCOMMODATOR 
Robert E. Diesch, Rogers, Minn., assignor to Pako Corporation, 
Minneapolis, Minn. 

Filed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,555 
Int. a.^ B65B 61/00. 63/00 
U.S. a. 53—520 16 Oaims 

1. Apparatus for mounting a film transparency in a slide 
mount, said slide mount having opposing portions defining a 
plane therebetween, the apparatus comprising: 
means for partially inserting a film transparency, while at- 
tached to a film web, into the slide mount; 
means for severing the transparency from the web at a posi- 
tion outside the slide mount; . 
means for engaging the transparency to fully insert the 

transparency into the slidemount; and 
means for bowing both portions of the slide mount in the 



40 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



same direction relative to said plane about an axis parallel 
to the direction of transparency insertion to match a curl 




in the transparency as the transparency is fully inserted 
into the slide mount. 



4,391,083 
PACKING MACHINE 
Austin L. Fox, London, England, assignor to Molins Limited, 
London, England 

Filed Jun. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 163,457 

Int. CI.3 B65B 19/24 

U.S. a. 53—575 9 Qaims 



V— »' ' 



JL 



'f-.-^'^ 









■"■/ ■ 



78 



other of said shafts having at least one corresponding slot, 
said tongue and slot being arrangedto engage each other 
to provide a drive connection therebetween when said 
driving and coupling shafts are in axial alignment. 



4^91,084 
TOBACCO DEFOLIATING UNITS WITH OVERLAPPING 

CUTTING EDGES 
Robert W. Wilson, Charlotte, N.C, assignor to Powell Manufac- 
turing Company, Inc., Bennettsville, S.C. 

Filed Jan. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 343,524 

Int. a.' AOID 45/16 

U.S. a. 56—27.5 4 Qaims 






1. A packing machine comprising: 

(a) a movable carrier; 

(b) a plurality of packet-forming assemblies mounted on said 
movable carrier, each assembly comprising a stationary 
member and at least one operating member mounted for 
movement toward>^nd away from said stationary mem- 
ber; y 

(c) means for mo^'ing said carrier intermittently along a path 
so that each of said assemblies stops successively at each 
of a plurality of stations; and 

(d) means for positively driving said at least one operating 
member of each of said assemblies to progressively move 
said operating member towards and away from said sta- 
tionary member, said driving means comprising at least 
one coupling shaft rotatably mounted on said movable 
carrier and operatively connected to said at least one 
operating member, said coupling shaft extending trans- 
verse to the directional movement of said assembly along 
said path between successive stations, and at least one 
rotatably mounted driving shaft at each of a selected 
plurality of said stations where at least one operating 
member of each of said assemblies is to be moved, said at 
least one driving shaft at each of said selected stations 
being so located that when each of said assemblies is 
stopped at each of said selected stations said at least one 
driving shaft is in axial alignment with said at least one 
coupling shaft on said movable carrier, the end of one of 
said shafts having at least one tongue and the end of the 




-30 



1. In an apparatus for priming tobacco plants having stalks 
and leaves extending outwardly therefrom comprising a vehi- 
cle frame movable along a row of tobacco plants, a pair of 
intermeshing defoliating units, means mounting said units on 
said frame in spaced side-by-side relation for vertical adjust- 
ment together with respect to said frame, each of said defoliat- 
ing units including a forward rotary element mounted on said 
frame for rotation about a first axis, a rearward rotary element 
mounted on said frame in a position spaced rearwardly and 
upwardly with respect to said forward rotary element for 
rotation about a second axis parallel to said first axis, a plurality 
of elongated members extending between said rotary elements, 
means mounting the forward ends of said elongated members 
on said forward rotary element for rotational movement about 
axes parallel to said first axis and spaced circumferentially 
thereabout, means mounting the rearward ends of said elon- 
gated members on said rearward rotary element for rotational 
movement about axes parallel with said second axis and spaced 
circumferentially thereabout, each of said elongated members 
including cutting blade means thereon having sharp upper 
cutting edges extending generally in directions both longitudi- 
nal and transverse with respect to the row of plants, the trans- 
verse extent of the cutting edges of each unit being in a direc- 
tion toward the other and in longitudinally intermeshing rela- 
tion therewith, and driven means operatively connected with 
at least one rotary element of each unit for rotating said ele- 
ment and effecting an orbital translational movement of the 
elongated members of each unit in a direction such that the 
cutting edges of each elongated member will be moved in- 
wardly toward the stalks, upwardly to sever the leaves from 
the stalks and then outwardly to carry the severed leaves away 
from the stalks, the improvement which comprises 
the longitudinal extent of the cutting edges associated with 
the elongated members of each unit during their move- 
ment inwardly toward the stalks passing into a common 
vertical plane disposed closely adjacent the associated side 
of the stalks of a row of tobacco plants along which the 
vehicle frame is moved so as to insure that leaves attached 
to stalks at positions adjacent opposite sides thereof with 
respect to the row will be severed, 
the distance between the aforesaid vertical planes associated 
with both units being less than the transverse extent of the 
cutting edges of said units so that the free ends of the 
transverse extent of the cutting edges of each elongated 
member associated with each unit during their movement 



JULY 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



41 



1 



mwafdly toward the stalk moves inwardly a distance 
beyond the vertical plane associated with the other unit so 
as to insure that leaves attached to stalks at positions other 
than at opposite sides thereof with respect to the row will 
be severed. 



4,391,085 

GRAPE HARVESTER 

Robert H. Harris, Indianapolis; Troy G. Humphrey, Beech 

Grove, and John J. Stimson, Jr., Indianapolis, all of Ind., 

assignors to Labeco Harvesters, Inc., Fresno, Calif. 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 120,542, Feb. 11, 1980, Pat. No. 

4,299,081. This application Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,698 

Int. CV AOID 46/26, 46/28 

U.S. a. 56—330 9 Claims 




1. A harvester comprising: 

frame means operable to move along in straddling fashion a 
row of plants having growing items thereon and including 
a receptacle to catch said items falling from said plants; 

a head pivotally mounted on said frame means to pulsate said 
plants to cause items growing thereon to fall therefrom 
into said receptacle, said head including: 

a frame pivotally mounted to said frame means and having a 
pair of downwardly extending spaced apart supports 
forming a channel through which said row of plants may 
pass; 

a pair of horizontally movable arms mountable to said sup- 
ports with spaced apart distal ends positionablc on oppo- 
site sides of said row of plants; 

driving means mounted on said frame and operatively asso- 
ciated with said arms to reciprocate said arms back and 
forth against said plants while limiting movement of one 
arm to approximately the same horizontal direction of 
movement as the other arm, said driving means including 
first and second crank shafts rotatably mounted about an 
axis of rotation on said frame, a source of energy having a 
rotatable output operatively driving said first and second 
crank shafts which arc connected to said arms maintaining 
a constant spacing between said distal ends as said arms 
are reciprocated by said driving means, said arms includ- 
ing at least a pair of links with top ends pivotally mounted 
to said frame and bottom ends pivotally connected to said 
arms suspending said arms therefrom and allowing a 
swinging arc movement of said arms in response to said 
driving means and independent of pivotal movement of 
said frame, said distal ends being rigid members extending 
in the direction of said row of plants; 

counterweight means including a first and a second off 
centered counterweights respectively on said first and 
second crank shaft rotatably mounted on said frame, said 
counterweight means being operable to provide a vibra- 



tion neutralizing force in a direction opposite of the direc- 
tion of movement of said arms; and 
timing means operatively associated with said first and sec- 
ond off centered counterweights along with said first and 
second crank shafts being operable to rotate said counter- 
weights about said axis of rotation but in a direction oppo- 
site of the crank shaft upon which each counterweight is 
mounted dampening vibration imparted to said frame by 
said arms. 



4,391,086 

APPARATUS FOR RESTRINGING MULTIPLE 

THREADLINES 

Charles H. Doherty, III, Nashville, Tenn., assignor to E. I. Du 

Pont de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, Del. 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 237,615, Feb. 24, 1981, 

abandoned. This application Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 357,856 

Int. CI.' B65H 69/U6: D02J 1/(J8 
U.S. CI. 57-22 4 Claims 










n ji 






'• / 



1. In a machine for processing multiple threadlines moving 
in a path from a supply source to a windup, an apparatus for 
stringing an unstrung threadline of said multiple threadlines 
that includes a jet adjacent said threadlines for interlacing the 
unstrung threadline with a moving threadline comprising: a 
forwarding jet located downstream of the interlacing jet, said 
forwarding jet having an inlet and an outlet through which 
said multiple threadlines pass in said path, said forwarding jet 
having a coanda surface located at its outlet; a suction device 
located below said coanda surface; a first elongated guide pin 
located across the threadline path contacting the moving mul- 
tiple threadlines adjacent the outlet of the forwarding jet; and 
a second elongated pin having a notch in its surface at its center 
pivotally mounted at the outlet of the forwarding jet for swing- 
ing movement from a location belosv said coanda surface and 
above said suction device past said suction device to a location 
between the outlet of the forwarding jet and said first guide pin 
and above and across the threadline path. 



4,391,087 
TWISTING APPARATUS 
Aloys Greive, Miinster; Aloys Horstmann, Greven, and Wilbelm 
Stupirak, Miinster, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to 
Volkmann GmbH & Co., Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,764 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 18, 
1980, 3015044 

Int. a.3 DOIH 1/10. 7/86 
U.S. a. 57—58.52 10 Qaims 

1. A twisting apparatus comprising: 

a spindle extending along an upright axis, having an upper 
end and a rotatable lower end, and formed with a passage 
opening axially upwardly at said upper end and radially 
outwardly at said lower end; 
means for rotating said spindle about said axis; 
a bobbin support rotatably carried on said spindle between 
said ends thereof and provided with a plurality of bobbin 



42 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



holders spaced about and radially offset from said axis and 
each adapted to support a respective bobbin carrying a 
respective yam, whereby said yams can be led down 
through said passage and up around said bobbin support 
while said spindle is rotating to wind said yams together 
and form a balloon around said support; and 



'^ 




ping device, a bobbin of said wrapping thread carried on said 
hollow spindle, a pair of delivery rolls for feeding said bundle 
of spinning fibers to said hollow spindle and a pair of takeup 
rolls for drawing off said wrap yam out of said hollow spindle, 
a housing concentrically surrounding said bobbin, a jacket 
forming part of said housing having openings for the passage of 
air, and a suction duct arranged between said pair of delivery 
rolls and said hollow spindle comprising: 
a closing element associated with said openings for selec- 
tively closing and opening during piecing-up of said yam; 
said closing element being a pot inverted over said housing, 
a fiber feed channel extending through said pot in axial 
alignment with said hollow spindle, said suction duct 
opening into said feed channel, and said pot being tele- 
scopically displaceable during piecing-up in the direction 
of said pair of takeoff rolls to an extent such that it covers 
said openings. 
2. A method for piecing-up a wrap yam being produced 
from a bundle of spinning fibers and a wrapping thread by 



means for preventing rotation of said support about said axis 
even while said spindle is rotating, said bobbin holders 
being angularly equispaced about and radially equispaced 
from said axis, said bobbin holders number four, including 
two for main bobbins and two for the reserve bobbins, the 
holders for said main bobbins being diametrally opposite 
each other and alternating with the holders for said re- 
serve bobbins. 



4,391,088 

STRING FOR SPORTS RACKETS 

Jerome Salsky, Emerson, N.J.; Patrick K. Janis, Oak Park, III., 

and Kenneth E. Branen, Nashua, N.H., assignors to United 

States Tennis Gut Association, Inc., Emerson, N.J. 

Filed Jan. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 339,082 

Int. a.3 D02G 3/04. 3/10. 3/38. 3/40 

U.S. a. 57—234 . 15 Qaims 




1. A string for sports rackets consisting of a gut core covered 
with filamentary aramid and impregnated with at least one 
coating of water-resistant, vapor-impermeable, wear-resistant, 
flexible smooth adhesive polymeric resin. 



4,391,089 
APPARATUS FOR PIEaNG-UP A WRAP YARN 
Werner Billner, and Erich Bock, both of Ingolstadt, Fed. Rep. of 
Germany, assignors to Schubert & Saizer, Ingolstadt, Fed. 
Rep. of Germany 

Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,588 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 31, 
1980, 3020726 

Int. a.3 DOIH 15/00: D02G 3/36 

U.S. a. 57—261 6 Qaims 

1. Apparatus for piecing-up a wrap yam being produced 

from a bundle of spmning fibers and a wrapping thread on a 

wrapping device, a hollow spindle forming part of said wrap- 




means of a wrapping device comprising a hollow spindle car- 
rying a bobbin of said wrapping thread and arranged between 
a pair of delivery rolls for feeding said bundle of spinning fibers 
to said hollow spindle and a pair of take-off rolls for drawing 
off said wrap yarn out of the hollow spindle, a housing concen- 
trically surrounding said bobbin, a jacket forming part of said 
housing having ojsenings for the passage of air, and a suction 
duct arranged between said pair of delivery rolls and said 
hollow spindle, comprising the following steps: 
stopping said wrapping device; 

producing an eddy of air in said housing by an airflow 
through said openings for seeking and exposure of a free 
end of said wrapping thread on said bobbin; 
introducing an end of said wrap yam withdrawn from a yam 

bobbin into said hollow spindle, and 
producing a concentrated suction air stream in said housing 
by closing said openings for delivering back said ends of 
said wrap yam and said wrapping thread into said suction 
duct. 



4,391,090 

DEVICE FOR PNEUMATICALLY THREADING A YARN 

IN A DOUBLE TWIST SPINDLE 

Simon Charbonnler, Lyons, France, assignor to Verdol S.A., 

Caluire, France 

Filed Oct. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 308,969 

Claims priority, application France, Nov. 3, 1980, 80 23666 

Int. a.3 DOIH 15/00. 7/86 

U.S. a. 57—279 5 Qaims 

1. A pneumatic yam threading device for a double twist 
spindle having a hollow central shaft with a yam brake therein, 
and having means operative when the shaft is pneumatically 
pressurized for introducing yam through its bore past the 
brake, wherein the device comprises: 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



43 



(a) a shaft comprising axially aligned mutually-spaced tubu- 
lar portions joined together by a central portion having an 
axial bore of diameter larger than the bores of said tubular 
portions, the tubular portions having opposed ends facing 
each other across the bore of the central portion, and the 
central portion having a transverse passage extending 
thereacross between the tubular portions; 

(b) a yam brake comprising an elongated capsule in the bore 
of the central portion and having opposed ends which are 
disposed in a first axially aligned position to abut said 
opposed ends of the tubular portions and close their bores, 
and the capsule in a second displaced position being ofTset 
from axial alignment to expose the bores at said opposed 
ends to permit yarn to be passed therethrough; and 




(c) means lor controlling the position of the capsule compris- 
ing piston means slidably mounted in said transverse pas- 
sage and having an opening therethrough receiving said 
capsule, the opening being larger in diameter than the 
capsule; yieldable spring means urging the capsule and the 
piston means normally to occupy a first position wherein 
the capsule is axially aligned with and closes the bores of 
the tubular portions; and one side of the piston means 
being pneumatically coupled to the bore of the central 
portion and operative when the hollow shaft is pressur- 
ized to displace the piston means and move the capsule to 
said second displaced position, whereby yam can pass 
through said bores and the opening of the piston means for 
threading the double twist spindle. 



1 1 4,391,091 

FALSE TWISTING APPARATUS AND METHOD 
Hellmut Lorenz, Remscheid-Lennep, Fed. Rep. of Germany, 
assignor to Barmag Barmer Maschinenfabrik AG, Remscheid, 
Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,196 
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 17, 
1981, 3110242; May 9, 1981, 3118410 

Int. Q.^ D02G 1/08 
U.S. Q. 57—340 20 Qaims 

1. A yam false twisting apparatus comprising 
a frame, 

a pair of twist imparting discs, with each disc being mounted 
to a supporting shaft and having a yam engaging friction 
surface on one face thereof, 
means mounting said discs to said frame and including a 
carrier plate mounting said shafts for rotation about essen- 
tially parallel, spaced apart axes and such that portions of 
the respective yam engaging friction surfaces are disposed 
in opposing relationship and define a twisting zone there- 
between; 
drive means for rotating each of said discs in opposite rota- 



tional directions, said drive means including a whori 
mounted to each of said shafts, and an endless drive belt 
rotatably mounted to said frame so as to have a run con- 
tacting opposite surfaces of said whorls and thereby rotate 
the same in opposite directions. 




whereby a yarn may be continuously moved through said 
twisting zone in a direction extending perpendicular to the 
plane defined by said axes of rotation and so as to have 
twist imparted thereto by frictional contact between the 
yarn and the respective opposed friction surfaces. 



4,391,092 
MULTIPLE POSITION DIGITAL ACTUATOR 
Samuel E. Arnett, South Bend, Ind., assignor to The Bendix 
Corporation, Southfield, Mich. 

Filed Jul. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 173,531 

Int. Q.3 F02C 9/18 

U.S. Q. 60-39.29 11 Qaims 




1. A multiposition actuator for changing a N-bit digital word 
into N physical positions of an actuator element comprising: 

N-1 telescoped open ended cylinders mounted in an open 
ended bore with the open ends of said cylinders disposed 
toward the closed end of said bore and an end cap closing 
the open end of said bore; 

said actuator element including an elongated body passing 
through an aperture in the closed end of said bore and 
having a flange being a double acting piston disposed 
within the innermost cylinder; 

said actuator element, cylinders and end cap forming N 
piston cylinder combinations wherein the piston area of 
each successive piston increases from the innermost com- 
bination to the outermost combination, and wherein the 
flange piston area disposed toward the closed end of the 
bore is less than the flange piston area for the innermost 
cylinder; 

each of said combinations operable to move said actuator 
element independently of the other combinations through 
a distance controlled by an expandable chamber disposed 
between the cylinder and piston of each combination, 
each distance being related to the other distances by pow- 
ers of the numeral 2; 

N pilot solenoids, each associated with an expandable cham- 
ber and opeirable to control means for communicating a 



44 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



source pressure to a corresponding chamber and the said striker device to the pressure of said precombustioncham- 



source pressure from a corresponding chamber to a refer- 
ence pressure and each associated with one of the bits of 
said digital input and actuated by one of the states of said 
bit; 

a bias chamber defined by the open ends of said cyhnders 
and the closed end of said bore; 

means for communicating said source pressure to said bias 
chamber such that movement of the expandable chambers 
is accomplished by the force difference between the pis- 
tons because of the source and reference pressures acting 
over the differing piston areas. 



ber so as to effect movement of said striker device to destroy 



4,391,093 
TEMPERATURE-RESPONSIVE ACTUATOR 
Williain K. Gulick, Glendale, OlHo, assignor to General Electric 
Company, Cincinnati, Ohio 

Filed Jun. 29. 1981, Scr. No. 278,922 

Int. a.5 F02C 7/042 

U.S. CI. 60—39.29 8 Qaims 



SJ 56 ' -'K 



;:fflS^^;^i 





I. A temperature-responsive actuator comprising: 
■i support member; 

a spaced pair of thermally expandable members extending 
longitudinally in parallel alignment, one of said expand- 
able members having one end fixedly connected to said 
support member and an opposite end connected to a cor- 
responding end of the other expandable member; 
means directing a flow of fluid into contact with both said 

expandable members; and 
means restricting the flow of said fluid into contact with one 
of said expandable members in a first mode of operation 
and enabling relatively unrestricted flow of said fluid in 
contact therewith in a second mode of operation; 
whereby said one expandable member expands longitudi- 
nally in one direction during said first mode and the 
other of said expandable members expands longitudi- 
nally in an opposite direction during said second mode 
for retracting said one expandable member. 




said cover and open said air inlet on the occurrence of a prede- 
termined pressure in said precombustion chamber. _ 



4.391,094 

DESTRUCTABLE AIR INLET COVER FOR ROCKET 

ENGINES 

Herbert Engel, Munich, and Horst Boettger, 2^rneding, both of 

Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Messerschmitt-Bolkow- 

Blohm Gesellschaft mit Beschranktcr Haftung, Fed. Rep. of 

Germany 

Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,607 

Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 29, 
1980, 3003004 

Int. Q\? F02K 7/10, 9/08 
U.S. a. 60—245 5 Oaims 

5. A movable air inlet control device for a ram jet engine 
which includes a precombustion chamber connected through a 
flow passage to a main combustion chamber which has an inlet 
having a breakable cover closing said inlet which may be 
broken to permit air to enter into said main combustion cham- 
ber for combustion, comprising a tubular connection between 
said air inlet passage and said precombustion chamber, a striker 
device movable in said tubular connection, means for exposing 



4,391,095 

INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE WITH EXHAUST 

FILTER REJUVENATION 

Kashmir S. Virk, Hopewell Junction, N.Y., assignor to Texaco 
Inc., White Plains, N.Y. 

Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,913 

Int. a.^ FOIN 3/02 

U.S. CI. 60—286 7 Oaims 







-•?C3^ 



-/^ JO 



I . In a multi-cylinder internal combustion engine 10 having 
a plurality of cylinders 12, and a primary fuel injection system 
including a fuel injector 11 communicated with each of said 
cylinders 12 to inject a primary liquid fuel charge thereto, 
intake 17 and exhaust valve 18 sets communicated with each 
of said cylinders 12, said valve sets being operable be- 
tween opened and closed positions when the engine is 
functioning, 
a valve override means 41 engaging the intake valve 17 in at 
least one of said cylinders 12 and being operable to main- 
tain said intake valve 17 in closed position whereby to 
immobilize said at least one cylinder during a period of 
engine operation, 
power control means communicated with said valve over- 
ride means and with said primary fuel system, and being 
operable to discontinue fuel flow to said at least one cylin- 
der when the latter is in immobilized mode, 
an exhaust gas filter 24 communicated with the respective 
engine exhaust valves 18 to receive a stream of hot exhaust 
gas therefrom, 
an exhaust gas filter rejuvenation system including: supple- 
mentary fluid fuel injector means communicated with a 
source of supplementary fuel and being operable to con- 
trollably inject an amount of said supplementary fluid fuel 
into an immobilized cylinder 12 when said cylinder is in 
immobilized mode. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



4S 



II 4,391,096 > 

HYDRODYNAMIC REVERSING TRANSMISSION 
Erich Polzer, Gottfried Ruetz, both of Heidenheim; Hubert 
Schmolz, Nattbeim, and Remy Pochon, Heidenheim, all of 
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Voith Getriebe KG, Hei- 
denheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,554 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 20, 
1980, 3010661 

Int. a.3 F16D 33/00 
U.S. a. 60— 335 Uaaims 



4,391,097 
• PUMPING UP HYDROELECTRIC POWER PLANT 
Sachio Tsunoda, Yokohama, and Kaneo Sugisita, Ayase, both of 
Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, 
Kanagawa, Japan 

Filed Nov. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 204,036 

Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 7, 1979, 54/143291 

Int. a.' F16D 31/02 

U.S. a. 60—398 4 Qaims 




^-^l-lp^ 







WJ 



1. A hydrodynamic reversing transmission, particularly for 
use in earth moving and like vehicles, comprising rotary input 
means; reversible rotary output means; forward and reverse 
drive trains connecting said input means with said output 
means and respectively including first and second hydrody- 
namic starting torque converters respectively comprising first 
and second working circuits which are respectively rendered 
operative and ineffective, also within the counterbraking 
range, in response to admission and evacuation of working 
fluid, each of said circuits including a stationary housing, a 
turbine wheel designed for substantially centrifugal flow of 
^fluid therethrough and means for influencing the torus stream 
in the respective circuit; a source of pressurized working fiuid; 
a sump; first and second filling lines connecting said source 
with the respective circuits; first and second draining lines 
having inlet portions connected with the respective housings 
and outlet portions discharging into said sump; and reversing 
means for regulating the flow of fluid in said lines so that said 
first filling line delivers fluid from said source to said first 
circuit and said first draining line is sealed when said second 
filling line is sealed from said source and said second draining 
line is open, and vice versa, said inlet portions having perma- 
nently open apertures for evacuation of some fluid from the 
respective housings, said apertures being arranged to admit 
working fluid into said sump and said inlet portions being 
disposed in the regions of outflow of fluid from the respective 
turbine wheels, the orientation of said inlet portions being such 
that the direction of fluid flow therein coincides, at least sub- 
stantially, with the direction of fluid flow toward said inlet 
portions within said counterbraking range. 




^.. 



3. A pumping up hydroelectric power plant structure com- 
prising a main pump/turbine having a draft tube, a booster 
pump provided in said draft tube, so that said booster pump is 
operated in series with said main pump/turbine during the 
pumping operation of the pump/turbine, and a power system 
for operating the main pump/turbine and booster pump, said 
main pump/turbine and said booster pump being constructed 
to satisfy relations 



and 



(Ki/K2)(y2/yi)=tO 



0.71 SK/K^ 1.42 



wherein 

Ki: time constant of the rotating part of the pump/turbine 
K2: time constant of the rotating part of the booster pump, 
yi: average torque exerted to the rotating part of the pump- 

/turbine, 
y2: average torque exerted to the rotating part of the booster 

pump, 
so that when the main pump/turbine and booster pump are 
simultaneously disconnected from the power system, the rotat- 
ing speeds of each pump are simultaneously reduced to zero. 



4,391,098 

TURBO-COMPOUND INTERNAL COMBUSTION 

ENGINE 

Hideaki Kosuge, Hayama, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor 

Company, Limited, Yokohama, Japan 

Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,115 

Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 17, 1980, 55-132519 
Int. a.3 F02B 37/00 
U.S. a. 60—602 4 Qaims 

1. In a engine system including a internal combustion engine 
equipped with a turbo-charger and an auxiliary turbine inte- 
grated with said engine, the combination comprising: 
an exhaust passage leading from a combustion chamber of said 

engine to a turbine of said turbo-charger; 
a transfer passage leading from the turbo-charger turbine to a 

scroll of said auxiliary turbine; 
a first by-pass passage leading from said exhaust passage to said 

scroll; 
a second by-pass passage leading from said transfer passage to 

an exhaust conduit of said engine; 



46 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



a first waste gate responsive to the discharge pressure of a 4,391,100 

compressor of said turbo-charger which controls the com- CLOSED LOOP HERMETICALLY SEALED SOLAR 

munication between said exhaust passage and said first by- POWER GENERATOR 

pass passage, said first waste gate being adapted to open Derrick A. Smith, 1180 S. Seabreeze Blvd., Fort Lauderdale, 

upon the discharge pressure of said turbo-charger compres- ^"^ 33316 

sor reaching a first predetermined value; Filed Aug. 27, 1979, Ser. No. 70,327 



a second waste gate responsive to the pressure prevailing in 



U.S. a. 60—641.11 



Int. Cl.^ F03G 7/02 



lOaim 



26 V- 



c^ki 




said transfer passage which controls the communication 
between said second by-pass passage and said transfer pas- 
sage, said second waste gate being adapted to open upon a 
second predetermined pressure prevailing in said transfer 
passage; and 
means defining first and second passages within said scroll 
which exclusively communicate with said first by-pass pas- 
sage and said transfer passage, respectively. 



4,391,099 

ATMOSPHERIC THERMAL ENERGY CONVERSION 

UTILIZING INFLATABLE PRESSURIZED RISING 

CONDUIT 

Jens O. Sorensen, P. O. Box 2274, Rancho Santa Fe, Calif. 

92067 

I Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,610 

Int. a.3 F03G 7/02, 7/04 

U.S. a. 60-641.6 32 Claims 




1. A method of atmospheric thermal energy conversion 
utilizing pressurized rising conduit comprising the steps of: 

(a) providing warm gas at a low elevation, 

(b) transporting the warm gas upwards from the low eleva- 
tion to a high elevation through a thin-walled, inflatable, 
rising conduit thereby providing gas within the conduit 
with a low density which causes the upward flow of the 
gas through the conduit, 

(c) converting the energy of the flowing gas by passing the 
gas through a transducer, 

(d) pressurizing the conduit from the inside with the trans- 
ported gas to thereby inflate and suppori the thin-walled, 
inflatable rising conduit. 




1. A closed loop sealed recirculatory water conservation 
solar power generator comprising: 

(a) a stationary hollow globular boiler, said boiler including 
water inlet means disposed adjacent said ugper portion of 
said globular boiler, an upwardly directed steam outlet 
conduit originating from the uppermost portion of said 
globular boiler, and a refractor lens window disposed 
within an upper portion of said globular boiler, said boiler 
being adapted to contain a body of water; 

(b) controllable means comprising a paraboloid reflector 
mounted on a post for directing the sun's rays towards 
said refractor lens window, thereby to generate heat to 
boil water in said globular boiler; 

(c) a primary steam-powered turbine for the generation of 
electricity, said turbine being disposed at a level above 
that of said boiler, said primary steam-powered turbine 
being connected to said steam outlet conduit and thus 
being driven by steam under pressure from said globular 
boiler; 

(d) steam condenser means comprising a radiator connected 
to the outlet from said primary steam-powered turbine for 
simultaneously recovering useful heat from said steam and 
for partially condensing said steam to a mixture of steam 
and water, and a condenser connected to the outlet from 
said radiator for substantially completely condensing said 
steam to substantially pure water; 

(e) a closed reservoir connected to an outlet from said con- 
denser, said reservoir being disposed at a level lower than 
the level of said primary steam-powered turbine but at a 
level higher than the level of said globular boiler, said 
reservoir being for receiving and storing said substantially 
pure water from said condenser; 

(0 a secondary water-powered turbine for the generation of 
electricity, said turbine being disposed at a level lower 
than that of said reservoir but at a level higher than that of 
said globular boiler, said turbine being connected to said 
reservoir, said secondary, water-powered turbine and 
being selectively driven by water from said reservoir; 

(g) a valve automatically sequenced for periodic opening, to 
permit flow of water from said reservoir to said secondary 
turbine to drive said turbine, for for periodic closing to 
cut-off said flow of water to permit said secondary turbine 
to remain at rest; 

(h) effluent means from said secondary turbine to conduct 
pure water to an inlet to said globular boiler, said inlet 
being disposed at an upper portion of said globular boiler; 
and 

(i) a check valve in said effluent means (h) to control the 
recirculating flow of water back to said globular boiler 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



47 



4,391,101 

ATTEMPERATOR-DEAERATOR CONDENSER 
Donald E. Labbe, Wobum, and Mayo E. Brown, Jr., Milton, 
both of Mass., assignors to General Electric Company, Lynn, 
Mass. 

I Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 250,967 
I Int. a.3 POIK 21/06 

U.S. a. 60—646 6 Claims 




1. In an improved power plant of the type having a steam 
generator providing steam to a steam turbine, said steam tur- 
bine exhausting into a condenser for condensing exhaust steam 
into feedwater for the steam generator; means for pumping 
feedwater from the condenser to the steam generator, said 
steam generator connected to said steam turbine and condenser 
through a main steam header and a bypass line respectively; 
and, wherein the improvement comprises: 

a recirculation loop for recirculating a portion of said feed- 
water into the condenser; 
means for heating said feedwater upstream from said con- 
denser whereby said feedwater is slightly above saturation 
temperature; and, 
nozzle means for delivering said heated feedwater into said 
condenser whereby flashing is effected for deaeration 
purposes. 



4,391,102 
FRESH WATER PRODUCTION FROM POWER PLANT 

WASTE HEAT 
Walter R. Studhalter, Woodland Hills; William E. Amend, Roll- 
ing Hills Estates, and Norman L. Helgeson, Pasadena, all of 
Calif., assignors to Biphase Energy Systems, Santa Monica, 

I I tiled Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,339 

Int. C1.J FOIK 25/04; F03G 7/00 
U.S. a. 60—649 18 Oaims 

1. In reaction turbine and pump apparatus, the combination 
comprising 

(a) first nozzle means to receive heated fluid for expansion 
therein to form a two-phase discharge of gas and liquid, 

(b) a separator rotor having an axis and a rotating surface 
located in the path of said discharge for supporting a layer 
of separated liquid on said surface, 

(c) the rotor having reaction nozzle means to communicate 
with said layer to receive liquid therefrom for discharge in 
a direction or directions developing torque acting to ro- 
tate the rotor, 



(d) and a pump associated with and driven by said rotor, the 
pump including an annular rim surface to receive impinge- 




ment of liquid to be pumped, the liquid collecting as a 
rotating ring on said rim surface. 



4,391,103 
FLUIDIC CRYOGENIC REFRIGERATOR 

Domenico S. Sarcia, Carlisle, Mass., assignor to CVI Incorpo- 
rated, Columbus, Ohio 

Filed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,865 

Int. C\? F25B 9/00 

U.S. a. 62—6 10 Qaims 



108', 







1. In a cryogenic refrigerator in which a movable displacer 
means defined within an enclosure first and second chambers 
of variable volume, and in which a refrigerant fluid is circu- 
lated in a fluid flow path between said first chamber and said 
second chamber by the movement of said displacer means 
controlled in part through the introduction of high-pressure 
fluid and the discharge of low-pressure fluid, chamber means 
for guiding a slide connected to the displacer means, said slide 
having an axial passage communicating with one end of said 
chamber means remote from the displacer means, a piston 
coupled to said slide for controlling movement of the displacer 
means, valve means for metering flow between opposite sides 
of said piston, the cross-section of said slide being smaller on 
one side of the piston than on the other side, said passage in said 
slide having a restriction, a valve having a spool valve member 
for controlling flow the high and low pressure fluid, means 



48 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



including a conduit communicating one end of said S]X)ol valve 
member with said one end of said chamber means for introduc- 
ing high fluid pressure into the conduit to shift the spool valve 
member when the displacer means is at one of the extremities 
of its movement. 



431,104 

CASCADE HEAT PUMP FOR HEATING WATER AND 

FOR COOLING OR HEATING A COMFORT ZONE 

James C. Wendschlag, Onalaska, Wis., assignor to The Trane 
Company, La Crosse, Wis. 

Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,540 

Int. CIJ F25B 27/02. 7/00 

U.S. a. 62—79 15 Oaims 



4,391,105 
YARN FEED UNIT IN A SINGLE-CYLINDER ORCULAR 

KNTTTING MACHINE 
Francesco Lonati, Brescia, Italy, assignor to Costnizioni Mec- 
caniche Lonati S.p.A., Brescia, Italy 

Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,472 
Claims priority, application Italy, Apr. 1, 1980, 21362/80[U] 
Int. a.3 D04B 15/58 
U.S. a. 66—138 5 Claims 




1. A heat pump system selectively operable in cascade fash- 
ion for heating water and in non-cascade fashion, for heating or 
cooling air, comprising 

a. a first compressor selectively operative to compress a first 
refrigerant fiuid, and including a first suction port and a 
first discharge port; 

b. a refrigerant-to-water heat exchanger connected in fluid 
communication with the first discharge port and operative 
to transfer heat from the first refrigerant fluid compressed 
in the first compressor, to water, thereby condensing the 
first refrigerant fluid and heating the water; 

c. first expansion means, in fluid communication with the 
refrigerant-to-water heat exchanger, for expanding and 
reducing the pressure of the condensed first refrigerant 
fluid; 

^ d. a tri-fluid heat exchanger including non-communicating 
first and second circuits and air passages arranged to 
provide heat transfer between the first refrigerant fluid, a 
second refrigerant fluid, and air, respectively; an inlet to 
said first circuit being connected in fluid communication 
to the first expansion means, and an outlet from said first 
circuit being connected in fluid communication with the 
first suction port for return of the first refrigerant fluid 
vapxjrized in said tri-fluid heat exchanger to the first com- 
pressor; 

e. a second compressor selectively operative to compress the 
second refrigerant fluid, including a second suction port, 
and a second discharge port connected in fluid communi- 
cation with an inlet to said second circuit in the tri-fluid 
heat exchanger; 

f second expansion means connected to an outlet from said 
second circuit, for expanding and reducing the pressure of 
the second refrigerant fluid condense^n the tri-fluid heat 
exchanger; and 

g. an evaporator heat exchanger, connected in fluid commu- 
nication between said second expansion means, and said 
second suction port, operative to provide heat transfer 
with a source of heat to vaporize the second refrigerant 
fluid prior to its return to the second compressor, said 
system being used in a first mode to heat the water and 
cool the air when only the first compressor is selectively 
energized, or in a second mode to heat the water when 
both the first and second compressors are selectively 
energized, in cascade relationship, or, in a third mode, to 
heat the air when only the second compressor is ener- 
gized. 




£4 



-e6 d3di 



as 



27 



^■ 



1. An improved yarn feed unit in a single-cylinder circular 
knitting machine, in particular a hose or the like knitting ma- 
chine, comprising a plurality of yam feeding fingers arranged 
side-by-side and independently joumalled about a common 
axis, said yarn feeding fingers being movable independently of 
one another between inoperative and operative positions, an 
arm joumalled to said common axis and having a small plate 
secured thereto and extending underneath all of said yam 
feeding fingers, means for raising said arm and along there- 
with, through the intermediary of said small plate, all of said 
yarn feeding fingers at once to a rest position substantially 
coincident with said inoperative position, a carrier body sup- 
porting said axis, means for substantially radially displacing 
said carrier body between a position close to said needle cylin- 
der and a position remote from said needle cylinder, said means 
for raising said arm being operative upon said carrier body 
being displaced to said position remote from said needle cylin- 
der. 



4,391,106 
WOUND DRESSING 
Ewald Schafer, Wolfstein, and Harald Jung, Kreimbach, both of 
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Karl Otto Braun K.G., 
Wolfstein, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Continuation of Ser. No. 880,150, Feb. 22, 1978, abandoned. 

This application Apr. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 141,812 

Int. C\? D04B 23/08 

U.S. a. 66—193 9 Qaims 




1. A warp knitted fabric for use as a surgical bandage and 
dressing comprising four yams arranged in a plurality of wales 
and causes including a first yam comprising a basic stitch 
construction (LI) and second, third, and fourth yams bound in 
as in-laid threads (L2, L3, L4), said fourth yam consisting of a 
thick, roughened binding yam of high volume bound in warp- 
wise, said second and third yams consisting of cross filling long 
looped, highly twisted yams of sinuous configuration having a 
twist of one of the Z-twisting direction and S-twisting direc- 
tion, one of said second and third yams being bound in be- 



JULY 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



49 



tween two adjacent wales and the other of said second and the drum shell, and a surface corresponding to a half helicoid 
third yarns being bound in between three adjacent wales. of the conveying screw, said half helicoid surface being 



4,391,107 
SPIRAL GYRATOR FOR WASHING MACHINES 
George M. Gibson, 322 Brookvale Rd., Kinnelon, N.J. 07405 
I Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,936 
I Int. a.3D06F7 7/;0 

U.S. CI. 68—133 2 Qaims 




{LN'DiHECTIONAL ATA fATE 
\WTHIN THE \OR\{Al eAI\l6E 

\fcr riRYi'VQ 8Y spm.vim 



1. A washing machine comprising: 

a tub having a bottom and a substantially vertical wall for 
enclosing a space to contain wash, 

a gyrator having a base and a driving post, said base subtend- 
ing a substantial portion of said bottom, said base having 
an outer circumferential portion and an inner upper por- 
tion shaped substantially as a frustum of a cone, the base of 
the cone being parallel with said bottom and said outer 
portion extending outwardly therefrom, said driving post 
extending coaxially upwardly from the truncated end of 
said inner portion of said base, 

a driving surface comprising a spiral ridge having one end 
positioned substantially circumferentially on the upper 
surface of said outer circumferential portion and extend- 
ing from said one end gradually inwardly and upwardly in 
one circumferential direction on the surface of said inner 
portion of said base to said truncated end thereof and 
continuing in said one circumferential direction like an 
expanded helical screw thread upwardly about said driv- 
ing post to an upper intermediate region of said post 
where said ridge gradually reverses in circumferential 
direction to form at least one helical turn of opposite 
direction near the upper end of said driving post, the ends 
of said driving surface having gradual and smooth con- 
tours, and 

unidirectional driving means connected to said driving post 
to rotate said gyrator about said axis thereof. 



4,391,108 
DRUM FOR A CONTINUOUSLY OPERATING LAUNDRY 

PROCESSING MACHINE 
Richard R. Albers, Warren, N.J., assignor to Passat-Maschinen- 

bau GmbH, Heilbronn, Fed. Rep. of Germany 
Filed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,659 

Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 7, 
1979 2944857 

Int. a.3 D06F 21/02. 37/08 
U.S. a. 68—143 8 Qaims 

1. A dmm for a continuously operating textile processing 
machine, comprising a drum shell, defining an interior space 
having a central longitudinal axis and a horizontal middle 
plane, a conveying screw composed of right helicoids which 
divide the interior space of the drum shell into individual 
Chambers, the drum being constructed from individual ele- 
ments joined to each other by weld seams, each element com- 
prising an upper portion and a lower poriion which are welded 
together in the horizontal middle plane of the drum interior 
space, each of said upper and lower portions consisting of a 
surface which follows the shape of a helix and forms a pari of 




welded to the said surface forming a part of the drum shell of 
the said portion. 



4,391,109 

APPLIANCE DESIGNED FOR THE TREATMENT, 

PARTICULARLY IN A LIQUID, OF A PRODUCT LIKE 

LEATHER AND PROCEDURE FOR APPLYING THIS 

APPLIANCE 

Yves Grenier, Le Verdin, France, assignor to R.I.A.T., Chara- 

vines, France 

Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,478 
Qaims priority, application France, Feb. 18, 1980, 80 03516 
Int. a.' C14C 1/00: D06F 21/00 
U.S. CI. 69—30 17 Qaims 




1. An appliance designed for the liquid treatment of a prod- 
uct like leather, comprising a tank which can be filled at least 
partly with the treatment liquid and which is provided with an 
opening made in its peripheral wall, a rotary drum placed 
inside the tank, said drum being mounted on a roughly hori- 
zontal shaft which runs from end to end of the said tank and 
which can be driven in rotation, said drum having a peripheral 
envelope and compartments separated by axial partitions ex- 
tending roughly radially from its shaft to said peripheral enve- 
lope, the product being loaded into each of the compartments 
in order to be treated by rotation of the drum and discharged 
through the said tank opening, each compartment having an 
opening and a lockable door in said peripheral envelope, said 
appliance being characterized by the fact that said tank is 
mounted to swing round the drum shaft, a fixing means for 
temporarily fixing together in rotation the drum and the tank 
when the opening of one of the compartments is placed oppo- 
site the tank Of>ening with the object of loading and discharg- 
ing the product in this compartment, a drive means for swing- 
ing the tank between a first position in which its opening is 
placed roughly in its top f>osition and a second position in 
which its opening is placed on the side, the product being 
treated by rotation of the drum when the opening of the said 
tank is in the said first position, loading of the product being 



50 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



|)erformed through the top when the opening of the tank is in 
the said first position and the opening of the compartment to be 
loaded is opposite the tank opening, and discharge of the prod- 
uct being carried out on thf side after the tank and the drum 
fixed together by the fixing means have been swung round by 
means of the said drive means to move the tank opening from 
the first position to said second position . 



4,391,110 
BARREL LOCK SLEEVE 
Anker J. Nielsen, Jr., Holden, Mass., assignor to Omco Inc., 
Holden, Mass. 

FUed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,189 

Int. a.3 E05B 17/14. 67/36 

U.S. a. 70—34 7 Oaims 



24 ^28 




1. A barrel lock sleeve adapted to be pushed into and resil- 
iently snap-mounted in a meter box door aperture, said sleeve 
adapted to be fixed in the door aperture by a barrel lock in- 
serted and locked within said sleeve, said sleeve comprising: 

(a) a hollow cylindrical sleeve having open leading and 
trailing ends; 

(b) said sleeve having four axially sequential portions includ- 
ing a tip portion and a locking ball retaining poriion both 
adapted to be inserted through the door aperture and 
positioned on the inside of the door, a neck portion 
adapted to be positioned within the door aperture, and a 
shoulder portion adapted to be positioned on the outside 
of the door; 

(c) said tip portion being located at the extreme leading end 
of said sleeve and having an uncompressed outside diame- 
ter smaller than the door aperture diameter; 

(d) said locking ball retaining portion being located to the 
rear of said tip portion and having at least a portion of its 
uncompressed outside diameter larger than the door aper- 
ture diameter, said locking ball retaining portion including 
means for permitting said larger outside diameter portion 
of said locking ball retaining portion to be resiliently and 
sufficiently reduced in diameter as said larger portion is 
pushed through the door aperture, and for permitting said 
larger outside diameter portion of said locking ball retain- 
ing portion to snap back to its original uncompressed 
outside diameter after said larger portion has passed to the 
inside of the meter box door; 

(e) said neck portion being located to the rear of said locking 
ball retaining portion, and having an outside diameter 
smaller than the door af)erture diameter; 

(0 said shoulder portion being located to the rear of said 
neck portion and having at least a portion of its outside 
diameter larger than the door aperture diameter and hav- 

I ing an inside diameter larger than the barrel lock head 
diameter; and 

(g) said sleeve having an interior length, shape and inside 
diameter selected to permit the insertion of an unlocked 
barrel lock entirely therein, and to accommodate the 
radial extension of the barrel lock locking balls within said 

j locking ball retaining portion when said barrel lock is 
locked, said sleeve being sized and shaped to remain fixed 
in the meter -box door aperture when the barrel lock is 
locked, and to be removed from the door aperture when 
the barrel lock is unlocked. 



4,391,111 

LATCHING MECHANISM FOR DISPENSER 

APPARATUS 

Russell A. Marcy, Watertown, Conn., assignor to Waterbury 

Companies, Inc., Waterbury, Conn. 

FUed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,137 

Int. a.3 B65D 55/14: E05B 15/06 

UJS. a. 70—162 10 Claims 




1. Dispenser apparatus for repeated use in dispensing a con- ' 
sumable through an outlet opening, said dispenser apparatus 
including a casing having a body member both for supporting 
a container for said consumable and enclosing said container 
within a space, and a closure member mounted on said body 
member to close said space preventing access to said consum- 
able; means mounting said closure member for movement 
between an open position to permit replenishment of said 
consumable and a closed position; latching means for latching 
said closure member in said closed position to prevent substan- 
tially unauthorized access to said space, said latching means 
including a stationary latching element carried by one of said 
body member and container, a movable latching element car- 
ried by said closure member, said movable latching element 
including a base, a hub extending from said base, a rim likewise 
extending from said base and spaced outwardly of said hub to 
define a recess therebetween, at least one projection within 
said recess at said base, an ear extending from said base, means 
for mounting said movable latching element to said closure 
member, means for biasing said movable latching element to a 
first position, means carried by said mounting means for sup- 
porting one end of said biasing means whose other end is 
supported by said ear, and a nose extending from said base to 
cooperatively interact with said stationary latching element for 
latching said closure member when said movable latching 
element is in said first position; said mounting means also sup- 
porting said movable latching element for movement from said 
first position; and a key having an operative portion to be 
received in said recess, said operative portion having a slot 
equal in number and spaced apart in accordance with the 
spacing of each said projection, each said projection being 
received in a slot to engage said key and movable latching 
element whereby movement of said movable latching element 
in opposition to said biasing means in following movement of 
said key results in movement of said movable latching element 
from said first position toward a second position for release of 
said cooperative interaction between latching elements. 



4,391,112 
PISTON-TYPE LOCKS 
Guy Neyret, OuUins, France, assignor to Sodex-Magister, So- 
ciete d'Exploitation, Croissy, France 

Filed Jul. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 167,283 

Claims priority, application France, Jul. 23, 1979, 79 18918 

Int. a.3 E05B 9/04. 27/04 

U.S. a. 70—364 A 7 Claims 

1. A piston-type lock comprising: 

(a) a stator, 

(b) a cylindrical rotor pivoting in a longitudinal bore of the 
stator, said rotor comprising a longitudinal key passage 
and a plurality of radial bores opening into the key passage 
and to the periphery of the rotor, said stator comprising a 
plurality of bores oi>ening into the longitudinal bore of the 



July 5, 198J 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



51 



stator and each continuing, in one angular position of the 
rotor, a radial bore of the rotor, 

(c) a sliding piston within each radial bore of the rotor, 

(d) a sliding piston within each radial bore of the stator 
spring-loaded towards the longitudinal bore of the stator, 
the pistons of the rotor each cooperating with a piston of 
the stator in the said angular position, the inner extremities 
of the pistons of the rotor cooperating with the notches of 
a coded key introduced into the key passage in such man- 
ner that the other extremities of the said rotor pistons are 
flush with the periphery of the rotor, said stator compris- 




ing an aperture opening at its periphery and into the said 
longitudinal bore, 
(e) an insert within said aperture having radial passages, and 
(0 a pair of pistons and a return spring located within each 
radial passage, said insert being in two parts sliding tele- 
scopically one in relation to the other to reduce the effec- 
tive length of said radial passages, 
(g) said insert comprising retractable stops for the inner 
radial extremity of each of the said pairs of pistons, the 
retraction of the said stops causing the liberation of the 
said pairs of pistons and the introduction of the lower 
pistons into the radial bores of the rotor. 




1. A key ring device adapted to be attached at one end to a 
piece of clothing and to hold a ring of keys at the other com- 
prising a tubular outer shell, a slot disposed within said outer 
portion, a U-shaped inner body, a spring disposed within said 
U-shaped inner body, a button fixedly attached to said U- 
shaped inner body which button passes through the slot in the 
outer shell, said inner body comprising a U-shaped key ring 
holder portion, means to attach the key ring device to a piece 
of clothing. 



4,391,114 
SHEAR FORMING APPARATUS FOR ELONGATED 
NON-ROTATING METAL TUBES 
Anthony C. Keathley, Xenia, Ohio; Howard F. Stanton, Lock- 
port, and Mahesh M. Wagle, Amherst, both of N.Y., assignors 
to Tubing Technology, Inc., Alpha, Ohio 

Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,708 

Int. a.3 B21B 19/12 

U.S. a. 72-78 28 Qaims 



V Jl ]l 



Hlf 



4,391,113 
ONE-HAND KEY RING 

Douglas M. Jorgens, 1527 Sitka Ave., Sun Valley, Calif. 93063 
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,507 

' Int. a.^ A47G 29/70 , 

U.S. a. 70—459 5 Oaims 



36 20 




1. Shear forming apparatus for reducing the diameter of an 
elongated cylindrical workpiece, comprising a tubular spindle 
supporting an annular forming head for rotation on an axis, a 
plurality of angularly disposed forming wheels supported by 
said head for orbital movement around the axis, an actuating 
tube disposed within said spindle for rotation therewith and 
supported for axial movement within said spindle, actuating 
means within said head and connected to said actuating tube, 
said actuating means being effective to move said forming 
wheels in corresponding generally radial directions in response 
to axial movement of said actuating tube within said spindle, 
means for pulling the workpiece axially through said spindle 
and said head and between said forming wheels, a fiuid cylin- 
der having a non-rotating piston, means including a non-rotat- 
ing connecting tube and a thrust bearing for connecting said 
piston to said actuating tube for moving said actuating tube 
axially while said spindle and head are rotating to effect radial 
inward deformation of the workpiece by said forming wheels, 
and means for precisely adjusting a limit of movement of said 
connecting tube to control the limit of generally radial inward 
movement of said forming wheels. 



4,391,115 
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BENDING METAL 

BEAMS 

William Slattery, Annbank Station; Thomas Brechany, Ayr, and 
Colin J. MacLeod, Glasgow, all of Scotland, assignors to 
Caledonian Mining Company Limited, Nottinghamshire, En- 
gland 

Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,594 
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 4, 1979, 
7941886 

Int. a.3 B21D 7/04, 43/28 
U.S. a. 72—131 21 Oaims 

1. A machine for forming a curved beam, said machine 
comprising 
a former having a convex arcuate edge bounded by opposed 

ends, 
a first clamp positioned to cooperate with one of said ends of 
said arcuate edge, said first clamp being adapted to hold 
one end of a beam in fixed position relative to said arcuate 
edge prior to and during the bending of that beam about 
said arcuate edge, 
a roller positioned adjacent to said arcuate edge but spaced 
therefrom a distance not significantly greater than the 
width of said beam, said roller being moveable relative to 
said former for bending said beam about said arcuate edge 
between a beam entry position at which said beam is 
initially clamped to said arcuate edge between said roller 



52 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



and said arcuate edge, and a curved beam position at 

which said beam is bent about said arcuate edge, 
motor means for moving said former relative to said roller 

for translating said beam between said entry and curved 

positions, and 
a second clamp positioned to cooperate with the opposite 



-M 



1^' 







m 



Qe. 



end of said arcuate edge, said second clamp being adapted 
to hold the other end of said beam in fixed position adja- 
cent said opposite end of said arcuate edge after said beam 
has been bent about said arcuate edge, said second clamp 
being operatively connectable with the other end of said 
beam only after said beam has been bent about said arcuate 
edge. 



I 4,391,116 

LACE BENDING APPARATUS 

Teruaki Yogo, Kabushikikaisha Cbuodenkiseisakusho 4423 
aza-Johnoh, Ohaza-Ohmori, Moriyama-ku, Nagoya-shi, 
Japan 

Filed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,184 
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 3, 1979, 54-157225; 
Sep. 1, 1980, 55-120944 

Int. a.3 B21B 15/00. 39/00 
U.S. a. 72—168 5 Qaims 




element for moving said movable element in said perpen- 
dicular directions, 

g. a means connected to said material feed device for detect- 
ing the amount of feed of said material by said material 
feed device, and 

h. a control device responsive to information from said 
feed-amount detecting means for controlling said driving 
means, including an input portion adapted to receive the 
feed amount information from said detecting means, a 
memory portion for storing in advance the relationship 
between the feed amount of said material and the moving 
amount of said movable element, and a command portion 
adapted to designate driving amounts of said driving 
means based on said relationship stored in said memory 
portion, in accordance with said information from said 
input portion, wherein said movable element includes a 
first slide provided movable in the horizontal direction 
perpendicular to the direction of supply of said material 
from said first guide roller element and a second slide 
provided movable in a vertical direction, said driving 
means includes a first-slide driving element connected to 
' said first slide for moving said first slide in said horizontal 
direction and a second-slide driving element connected to 
said second slide for moving said second slide in a vertical 
direction, and said memory portion of said control device 
includes a first memory means storing in advance the 
relationship between the amount of feed of said material 
and the moving amount of said first slide and a second 
memory means storing in advance the relationship be- 
tween the amount of feed of said material and the moving 
amount of said second slide and wherein said command 
portion of said control device includes a first command 
means responsive to information from said input portion 
for designating a moving amount to said first-slide driving 
element based on the relationship stored in advance into 
said first memory means and a second command means 
responsive to information from said input portion for 
designating a moving amount to said second-slide driving 
element based on the relationship stored in advance into 
said second memory means. 



4,391,117 
ROLLING MILLS AND METHODS OF ROLLING 
Werner Demny, Diisseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to 
Friedrich Kocks GmbH & Company, Ilden, Fed. Rep. of 
Germany 
Continuation of Ser. No. 42,812, May 29, 1979, abandoned. This 
application Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,325 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 2, 
1978, 2824143 

Int. C1.3 B21B 13/22. 1/46 
U.S. CI. 72—224 13 Qaims 



1. A lace bending apparatus comprising: 

a. a material feed device for supplying a material in the 
lengthwise direction thereof, 

b. a first guide roller element provided fixedly on the side to 
receive said material supplied from said material feed 
device and adapted to locate said material, 

c. a support mechanism including a plurality of frames pro- 
vided fixedly on the side to receive said material supplied 
from said first guide roller element and a movable element 
mounted to move in directions perpendicular to the direc- 
tion of supply of said material from said first guide roller 
element, 

d. a second guide roller element provided in said movable 
element and adapted to bend said material, 

e. means to maintain said second guide roller element sub- 
stantially at right angles to the direction of feed of said 
material, 

f. a plurality of driving means connected to said movable 




1. A rolling mill for rolling of bars and wire from stock 
having a rectangular, oval or similar elongate cross-sectional 
shape, the ratio of the lengths of the principal axes of the cross 
section of said stock being larger than approximately 1 :2, com- 
prising a plurality of roll stands arranged closely one behind 
the other to define a line of sizing passes, said roll stands having 
(a) a first entry sizing pass stand formed by two rolls whose roll 
axis is substantially transverse to the principal axis of the stock 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



53 



being rolled and receiving the stock to be rolled, (b) the cross- 
sectional shape of the said first sizing pass being one of an exact 
circle, a regular polygon having an even number of sides and a 
like but somewhat elongated geometrical figure, (c) the ratio of 
the lengths of whose principal axes does not exceed approxi- 
mately 1:2, and (d) at least one three roll stand immediately 
following said two roll stand receiving the rolled stock from 
said first stand, the first stand of said three roll stands adjacent 
the two roll stand having one roll axis extending parallel to the 
longer principal axis of the first sizing pass cross section, in the 
case wherein the latter is somewhat elongated, all roll stands 
following the first stand being three roll stands. 

9. A method of rolling bars and wire from stock having a 
rectangular, oval or similar elongate cross-sectional shape, the 
ratio of the lengths of the principal axes of the cross section of 
said stock being larger than about 1 :2, comprising the steps of: 

(a) passing said stock between two rolls forming a first roll 
pass opening having a cross-sectional shape in one of an 
exact circle, a regular polygon having an even number of 
sides and a like elongate geometric figure having principal 
cross-sectional axes whose ratio is less than 1 :2, and whose 
roll axes are substantially transverse to the principal axis 
of the stock being rolled; and 

(b) thereafter passing the sized product successively through 
at least one additional roll pass formed by three rolls, said 
roll pass immediately following the two roll pass having 
one roll axis extending parallel to the longer principal axis 
of said first roll pass section in the case where said section 
is elongate, and all passes thereafter being three roll 
passes. 



4,391,118 

MECHANISM FOR FORMING A HOLE THROUGH A 

FORGED WORKPIECE 

Wayne A. Martin, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to United States 

Steel Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa. 
Division of Ser. No. 45,529, Jun. 4, 1979, Pat. No. 4,299,110, 
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 892,715, Apr. 3, 1978, 
i abandoned. This application May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,071 

Int. a? B21D 28/00 
U.S. Q. 72—356 4 Qaims 




4,391,119 ~ 

APPARATUS FOR CUTTING SWIVEL-BENDING AND 
PRESS-BENDING SHEET METAL AND SIMILAR 
MATERIALS 
Peter Schmitz, Pietra Rossa-Renon, Prov. Bozen, Italy 
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,415 
Qaims priority, application Italy, Feb. 20, 1980, 4810 A/80 
Int. a.^ B21D 5/01 
U.S. G. 72—384 6 Qaims 




1. Apparatus for cutting, swivel-bending and press-bending 
of sheet material, comprising: a frame for receiving said sheet 
material; a cross-beam having a first press-bending element; an 
integral clamping beam having a second press-bending ele- 
ment; means providing a bearing surface, said frame supporting 
said cross-beam and said clamping beam for movement relative 
to one another to effect engagement of said first and second 
press-bending elements with said sheet materials for press- 
bending thereof, said frame further supporting said clamping 
beam and such bearing surface means for movement relative to 
one another to clamp said sheet material for cutting and swiv- 
el-bending thereof, and a shearing beam supported by said 
frame for movement independently of movement of said 
clamping beam. 



4,391,120 
RADIAL DEFORMATION MEANS FOR CYLINDRICAL 

OBJECTS SUCH AS WHEELS 

David Trevarrow, 119 Reiniche, Horton, Mich. 49246 

Filed Mar. 12, 1979, Ser. No. 19,683 

Int. Q.3 B21D 53/26 

U.S. Q. 72—403 20 Qaims 



1. In a forging press which includes cooperating sets of top 
and bottom dies for shaping a workpiece heated to a hot forg- 
ing temperature, the combination therewith of an improved 
mechanism for forming a hole through the workpiece, said 
mechanism comprising: 
a male die member in said set of top dies engageable with the 
upper surface of the workpiece for forming an indentation 
therein; and 
a tubular trepanning tool having at least one sloping face 

extending around its circumference at its lower end; 
said male die member having tapered circumferential edges 
matching the sloping face of said tool and being of a 
diameter substantially equal to the tool diameter, whereby 
the indentation formed in the workpiece receives the 
sloping face of said tool and serves to center it; 
said set of top dies being adapted to apply force to said tool 
to hot-trepan a hole in the workpiece at the indentation 
before the workpiece is removed from the press following 
the forging operation. 



1032 O.G.r— 3 







It- 



1. Truing apparatus for wheels having a rim with opposing 
bead seats and a web, said apparatus comprising: radially in- 
wardly moving concentric dies movable in a predetermined 
plane, a rigid support surface parallel to said predetermined 
plane, a plurality of rollers having the same diameter on said 
rigid support surface, an annular surface plate on said rollers 
free to move parallel to said rigid support surface, and a resil- 
ient surface on said annular surface plate, said resilient surface 
being arranged to support the rim of a wheel being worked 
open by said radially inwardly moving dies and being adapted 
to accommodate lateral deflection produced by said dies. 



54 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4,391,121 4,391,122 

ORBITAL TOOL ASSEMBLY FOR FORMING RIVET COMBINED HYDRAULIC CLAMPING AND ROTATING 

HEADS SADDLE DEVICE ON FORGING PRESSES 

V. Taruntaev, Davison, Mich., assignor to T. A. Systems, Inc., Fritz Priebe, Duisburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to SMS 
Troy, Micb. Schloemann-Siemag Aktiengesellschaft, Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. 

Filed May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,380 of Germany 

Int. C\J B21J 7/20 Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,681 

U.S. CI. 72^406 27 Claims Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 11, 

1980, 3026295 

Int. a.3 B21J 13/02 
U.S. a. 72—481 4 Qaims 





J' 



1. An orbital tool assembly for forming rivet heads compris- 
ing a housing adapted for an attachment to a driven member 
rotatable upon a first axis; 
said housing having a bore extending along a second axis 

inclined at an acute angle to said first axis; 
an elongated equalizing head having a longitudinal axis 

coincident with said second axis nested and retained 

within said housing; 
bearing means interposed between said head and housing for 

journalling said housing for rotation about said first axis 

relative to said head; 
said head having an axial bore defining a fluid pressure 

chamber open at one end; 
a cylindrical driver coaxial with and mounted upon said 

head projecting from said housing and having a plurality 

of longitudinal bores parallel to said second axis and com- 
municating with said pressure chamber; 
a longitudinally reciprocal peening tool holder having an 

elongated bore movably mounted in each of said driver 

bores; 
each holder having a piston movable in said driver head bore 

and normally biased outward by pressurized fluid filling 

said head and driver bores on one side of said piston; 
an elongated peening tool mounted within each peening tool 

holder, at its outer end having a transverse rivet working 

surface, adapted for registry and operative engagement 

with an unheaded rivet projecting through a pair of parts 

upon a support to be secured together; 
an elongated anti-rotation arm extending at right angles to 

said driver and at one end mounted upon and secured 

thereto; 
and a bracket means upon a support retainingly engaging 

said arm at its opposite end against rotation, said arm 

being free for rocking movements in a plane passing 

through said axes; 
continuous rotation of said housing oscillating said head and 

peening tools in said plane over the ends of said rivets 

forming heads thereon. 



1. In a forging press having a movable crosshead and an 
upper pf&ss saddle carried by said crosshead; the improvement 
comprising the combination of: 

(a) a plurality of vertical hammer-headed saddle-retaining 
rods mounted for rotation and longitudinal movement on 
the movable crosshead, for releasably clamping said upper 
saddle to said movable crosshead; 

(b) a centrally disposed vertical hammer-headed saddle- 
rotating rod mounted for rotation on the movable cross- 
head with the hammer head of said rod at the lower end 
thereof projecting downwardy from said crosshead; 

(c) a receptacle provided on said upper saddle for receiving 
said hammer head of said saddle-rotating rod, which re- 
ceptacle has a slot-like through aperture for vertical pas- 
sage therethrough of said hammer head and a down- 
wardly open slot-like seat transverse to said through aper- 
ture for receiving said hammer head and effecting rota- 
tional driving engagement of said hammer head with said 
upper saddle, a recess of a size corresponding to the length 
and height of the hammer head being provided directly 
below said seat and aperture whereby said hammer head is 
transferrable from said aperture to said seat and vice versa 
by rotation within said recess; 

(d) means for effecting rotation of said saddle-rotating rod 
and for effecting relative movement of said rod and said 
upper saddle in the longitudinal direction of said rod; and 

(e) means for effecting said rotation and longitudinal move- 
ment of said saddle-retaining rods. 



4,391J23 
AUTOMATIC PUNCHING MACHINE 

Guido Salvagnini, Arzignano, Italy, assignor to Salvagnini 
Transferica S.p.A., Italy 

Filed Aug. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 178,565 
Qaims priority, application Italy, Sep. 12, 1979, 25676 A/79 
Int. a.3 B26F 1/04 
U.S. O. 72—464 6 Oaims 

1. An automatic punching machine for p>erfonning punching 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



SS 



of a metal sheet in a programmed and programmable manner, 
comprising, in combination, a punching head provided with a 
plurality of independently operable punch and die pairs ar- 
ranged at respective operative positions of the punching head, 
a numerically controlled programmable manipulator equipped 
with gripping means for gripping the metal sheet and with first 
and second driving means for displacing said gripping means in 
first and second horizontal directions perpendicular to one 
another, and a rotator for rotating the metal sheet through 
desired angles about a vertical axis, said manipulator including 
a first horizontal arm movable in the first direction and a sec- 
ond horizontal arm mounted on said first arm and movable in 




' ' 4,391,124 

ELECTROACOUSTIC TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION 
METHOD AND APPARATUS 

Comelis J. Drost, and G. Jan Milanowski, both of Ithaca, N.Y., 
assignors to Cornell Research Foundation, Inc., Ithaca, N.Y. 
I Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,319 
Int. a.3 H04B 11/00; H04R 29/00 
U.S. CI. 73—1 DV 33 Qaims 




TRMS 

Mil 

5ICML 



measuring the ideal source value of said driving signal 

source; 
measuring said transducer output signal, said driving signal 

and said output signal being fed through substantially 

identical impedance values; and 
deriving from the measures of said driving signal and said 

output signal a measure of transducer performance in 

absolute terms under conditions of actual termination. 



4,391,125 

METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TESTING AND/OR 

ADJUSTING VIBRATION ABSORBER FOR SUSPENDED 

CABLES 
Olaf Nigol, Etobicoke, and Herbert J. Houston, Oakville, both 
of Canada, assignors to Slater Steel Industries Limited, Ham- 
ilton, Canada 

Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,163 

Int. Q.5 GOIM 79/00 

U.S. Q. 73—11 12 Qaims 



said second horizontal direction, said second arm being 
equipped with the said means for gripping the metal sheet, and 
motor means for rectilinear alternating displacements of the 
said arms independently from one another, a disappearing 
plane is provided for receiving and supporting the metal sheet 
to be punched, said plane being defined by a plurality of rods 
extending parallel to said second arm of the manipulator and 
eccentrically mounted on pivot pins so as to be normally held 
in raised position, said manipulator further including a rectilin- 
ear shaft fixed to and extending parallel to said first arm in such 
a position as to engage progressively said rods and to displace 
the same to a lowered position during the advancing move- 
ment of said first arm of the manipulator. 



ACOUSTIC TEST WTH 



1. A self-reciprocity calibration method for terminated ultra- 
sonic transducers, comprising: 

supplying a driving signal from a driving source to a trans- 
ducer in a transmit mode to cause said transducer to emit 
a burst of ultrasonic waves; 

switching said transducer to a receive mode to receive an 
echo of its emitted wave, said transducer responding to 
said echo wave to produce a transducer output signal; 




1. A method for testing and/or adjusting a vibration ab- 
sorber to be used to absorb vibration from a suspended cable, 
comprising the steps of: 

determining the desired damping of said absorber, the de- 
sired oscillation frequency at which the test is to be con- 
ducted, and the tension and mass per unit length of the 
cable from which vibration is to be absorbed; 

selecting a logarithmic decrement value to be utilized for 
test purposes; 

providing a pendulum to be used as a mechanical analog of 
the susp>ended cable-vibration absorber system; 

adjusting the weight and radius of gyration of said pendulum 
to cause said pendulum to oscillate at said frequency and 
with said logarithmic decrement when said damping fac- 
tor has said desired value; 

coupling said vibration absorber to said pendulum to damp 
the oscillation thereof; 

setting said adjusted pendulum into oscillation; and 

displaying information responsive to the sensed amplitude 
and indicative of the logarithmic decrement of said oscil- 
lation. 

6. Apparatus for testing and/or adjusting a vibration ab- 
sorber to be used to absorb vibration from a suspended cable, 
comprising: 

a pendulum; 

means for adjusting the weight and radius of gyration of said 
pendulum; 

means for coupling said vibration absorber to said pendulum 
so as to damp any oscillation of said pendulum; 

means for sensing the amplitude of oscillation of said pendu- 
lum; and 

display means coupled to said sensing means for displaying 
information indicative of the logarithmic decrement of 
said oscillation. 



56 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



, 431,126 
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING ENGINE 

KNOCK IN AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE 
Anton van Zanten, Ditzingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to 
Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,892 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 2, 
1980, 3020853 

Int. a.3 GOIL 2i/22 
U.S. a. 73—35 8 Qaims 



-f- 



'Xln 



■ 1 !30 ^'I 



-H 



KI}&EM}S©^^©&L 



Id^ SS>{fr 



i; 14 '6 : » ?b 22 k \ id 2t 



-4- 



U— 'J 



1. Method for detection of knocking in an internal combus- 
tion engine comprising the steps of: 

detecting the wave shape of mechanical vibrations by a 
sensor responsive to engine vibrations both in a first fre- 
quency range within which engine knock vibrations com- 
monly occur and in a second frequency range in which 
few, if any, components of engine vibrations commonly 
occur; 

separating the outputs of said sensor in said first and second 
frequency ranges to produce a main signal and a reference 
signal; 

initiating a comparison of said signals when both rise to a 
peak at approximately the same time; 

performing said comparison during an interval beginning 
substantially when the peaks of said signals have passed, in 
such a way as to provide an engine knock signal when said 
main signal falls off more slowly than said reference signal 
and thereby produces a comparison output exceeding a 
predetermined output value. ^ 



4,391,127 
PROXIMITY SENSOR 
William E. Hawkins, Circleville, Ohio, assignor to E. I. Du Pont 
de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del. 

Filed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 252,519 

Int. a.3 GOIB 13/00 

U.S. a. 73—37.7 3 Qaims 




|l. A proximity sensor comprising: 

a body having a plenum therein in communication with inlet 
and outlet passages; 

an elongated tube extending through the plenum and pro- 
jecting from the outlet passage, said tube having a lesser 
diameter than the outlet passage, presenting an annular 



discharge orifice, and a flared end located externally of 
said body and the discharge orifice; and 
a pressure switch having a sensing chamber in communica- 
tion with the tube. 



4,391,128 
BACK-DIFFUSION QUALITY CONTROL METHOD FOR 

BARRIER TREATED CONTAINERS 
Thomas E. McWhorter, Whitehall, Pa., assignor to Air Products 
and Chemicals, Inc., AUentown, Pa. 

Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,958 

Int. C\? GOIN 15/08 

U.S. a. 73—38 10 Qaims 




K) 12 M 16 la 20 22 24 2€ 26 30 
BACK OlFruSSIONTiMC. 
MINUTES 



1. A method for distinguishing between a solid material 
having at least one surface treated to impart a measurable 
degree of impermeability to a volatile fluid and an untreated 
material which comprises the steps of: 

(a) exposing the treated surface to a high concentration of 
said volatile fluid for a fixed period of time, 

(b) removing the excess fluid from said treated surface after 
said fixed period of time, 

(c) exposing said treated surface from step (b) to an environ- 
ment for causing volatile fluid to back-diffuse through said 
treated surface into the environment; and 

(d) measuring if the concentration of said volatile fluid back- 
diffusing into the environment from said treated surface 
after a fixed period of time is at least one order of magni- 
tude less than the concentration of such a fluid back-dif- 
fusing from said untreated material. 



4,391,129 
SYSTEM FOR MONITORING PHYSICAL 
CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS 
Eugene Trinh, Los Angeles, and Taylor G. Wang, Glendale, 
both of Calif., assignors to the United States of America as 
represented by the Administrator of the National Aeronau- 
tics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C. 
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,774 
Int. a.3 GOIN 13/02 
U.S. a. 73—64.4 14 Qaims 

1. Apparatus useful in oscillating a drop of a first fluid when 
surrounded by a bath fluid, comprising: 
a container for holding a bath fluid and for receiving a drop 

of the first fluid within the bath fluid; 
transducer means coupled to said container and energizable 
for generating acoustic energy and conducting it into bath 
fluid lying in said container; 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



57 



means for energizing said transducer means; and 
means for sensing oscillations of the drop of first fluid; 



22 24 



1« 25 23\ 



Mj St I !? I 






4^-t 



ose. I 



■ eoNT 



said energizing means being frequency controllable to alter 
the frequency to a value which produces resonant oscilla- 
tions of said drop of first fluid. 



II 4,391,130 

METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR 
COMMUNICATING THE OPERATING CONDITION OF 

AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE 
Jiro Nakano, Okazaki, and Hironobu Ono, Toyota, both of 
Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, 
Toyota, Japan 

Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,493 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 25, 1980, 55/132269 
Int. a.3 GOIM 15/00 
U.S. a. 73—117.3 14 Claims 




1. A method of communicating the operating conditions of 
an internal combustion engine havng a throttle valve, an infor- 
mation output terminal, an exhaust gas sensor for detecting the 
concentration of a predetermined component in the exhaust 
gas and producing an output signal which alternates in re- 
sponse to the change of the detected concentration, and a 
feedback control system for producing, depending upon the 
output signal from the exhaust gas sensor, a loop feedback 
signal and for correcting the air-fuel ratio of the air-fuel mix- 
ture supplied to the engine depending upon the produced loop 
feedback signal, said method comprising the steps of: 
detecting whether the throttle valve is in the idling position 
and producing an idling detection signal which indicates 
whether the throttle valve is in the idling position; 
in response to the idling detection signal, discriminating 
whether the loop feedback signal is within a predeter- 
mined range and supplying an electrical signal which 
indicates whether the loop feedback signal is within the 
predetermined range, to said information output terminal, 
only when the throttle valve is in the idling position; and 
in response to the idling detection signal, supplying an elec- 
trical signal which is synchronized with the output signal 



from the exhaust gas sensor to said information output 
terminal, when the throttle valve is not in the idling posi- 
tion. — 



4,391,131 
TRANSMISSION TESTING APPARATUS AND METHOD 
George Scourtes, Plymouth, Mich., assignor to The Allen Group 
Inc., Saginaw, Mich. 

Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,609 

Int. a.3 GOIM 13/02 

U.S. a. 73—118 12 Qaims 




1. A method of testing a front wheel drive vehicle transmis- 
sion having a rotary input and two rotary outputs, said method 
comprising coupling drive means to said input; coupling driven 
means to each of said outputs; coupling each of said driven 
means to a single rotary member so that neither output can 
rotate relatively to the other; and driving said drive means. 

8. Apparatus for testing an automotive transmission having a 
pair of drive outputs each of which may be driven in a selected 
one of two different directions from a single drive input, said 
apparatus comprising an input drive shaft for connection to the 
transmission drive input; a pair of output shafts for connection 
to the respective drive outputs of the transmission; a single 
driven shaft; non-slip, positive drive transmitting means cou- 
pling said driven shaft to each of said output shafts and pre- 
cluding any rotation of either one of sai^output shafts without 
corresponding rotation of the other in the same direction and 
at the same speed of rotation as said one of said output shafts; 
and means coupled to said driven shaft for imposing a load on 
the latter. 



4,391,132 
GAS FLOW MEASURING APPARATUS 

Tsuneyuki Egami, Aichi; Hisasi Kawai, Toyohashi; Tokio 
Kohama, Nishio, and Hideki Obayashi, Okazaki, all of Japan, 
assignors to Nippon Soken, Inc., Nishio, Japan 
Filed Sep. 11. 1981, Ser. No. 301,448 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 17, 1980, 55-130003 
Int. Q.3 GOIF 1/68: GOIM 15/00 
U.S. Q. 73—118 5 Qaims 




1. A gas flow measuring apparatus comprising: 

an electric heater disposed in a tube in which an object gas 

flows; 
a first temperature dependent resistor disposed downstream 

of said electric heater in said tube; 
a second temperature dependent resistor disposed at a point 



58 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



free from the heat effect of said electric heater in said tube, 
and 

a measuring circuit for measuring the flow rate of said object 
gas by use of output signals of said electric heater and said 
first and second temperature dependent resistors, 

said measuring circuit includes a reference resistor circuit 
making up a bridge together with said first and second 
temperature dependent resistors, 

an oscillator circuit for producing a pulse signal, 

a voltage generator circuit for generating a predetermined 
reference voltage, 

a chopper circuit driven by said pulse signal of said oscillator 
circuit for amplitude-modulating and converting a poten- 
tial difference between one pair of diagonal points of said 
bridge into an AC signal, 

a sample-hold circuit for sampling an amplified output volt- 
age of said chopper circuit only for a partial period syn- 
chronous with the pulse signal of said oscillator circuit 
and holding said sampling votage, 

a DC differential amplifier circuit for amplifying a difference 
voltage between a voltage based on the reference voltage 
produced from said voltage generator circuit and the 
output voltage of said sample hold circuit, and 

a power amplifier circuit for power amplifying the output 
voltage of said DC differential amplifier circuit and apply- 
ing the resulting voltage to said electric heater and said 
bridge, said potential difference between the pair of diago- 
nal points of said bridge being controlled at a constant 
level thereby to measure the flow rate of the object gas 
from the value of the current flowing in said electric 
heater. 



injection device on the basis ,of the relative displace- 
ment of said displacement member between said first 
and second positions, 
wherein said raising step is carried out before each injection of 
the liquid from said injection device, and said predetermined 
value is equal to or slightly higher than a pressure at which said 
displacement member starts displacing before said injection 
step. 



4 391 134 
MEASURING APPARATUS FOR RAIL HEAD RUNNING 

SURFACE IRREGULARITIES 
Josef Theurer, Vienna; Johann Hansmann, Klosterneuburg, and 
Klaus Riessberger, Vienna, all of Austria, assignors to Franz 
Plasser Bahnbaumaschinen-Industriegeselischaft m.b.H., Vi- 
enna, Austria 

Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,832 
Qaims priority, application Austria, Feb. 27, 1980, 1093/80 
Int. a.3 B61K 9/00 
U.S. a. 73-146 ,3 Qai^ 




4,391,133 

METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING AN 

INJECTION AMOUNT FROM AN INJECTION DEVICE 

FOR USE WITH AN ENGINE 
Shinzo Ito, Aichi, Japan, assignor to Nippondenso Co., Ltd., 
Kariya, Japan 

Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,607 
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 30, 1979, 54-38658 
Int. C\? GOIM 15/00 
U.S. a. 73-119 A 4 Qaims 



^ 


- 


1 


iMTMETlCUWT f- 

1 -^5 


™_d,™_ 


>«ESSUC RASIOC 

QCVKX 


■ 


MccnoK CHueoi 




tASUROCNT 








1 


h^ 










oeovwstp 

1 








h' 








pmic 


HOkEI) 





1. In an apparatus for measuring an injection amount from an 
injection device, said apparatus having, 

a body formed with a bore, 

a displacement member slidably disposed in said bore for 
defining an injection chamber into which a liquid is in- 
jected from said injection device, and 

a prime mover for driving said injection device, 

a measuring method for the injection amount comprising the 
steps of: 

(a) raising pressure of the liquid in said injection chamber 
to a predetermined value; 

(b) detecting a first position of said displacement member; 

(c) injecting a liquid into said injection chamber from said 
injection device under measurement so that said dis- 
placement member is displaced in accordance with the 
increased amount of the liquid within said injection 
chamber; 

(d) detecting a second position of said displacement mem- 
ber after said member is displaced; and 

(e) calculating the amount of the liquid injected from said 



1. A mobile apparatus mounted on a railroad track for move- 
ment in an operating direction, the track including two rails 
each having a rail head defining a gage side, a field side and a 
running surface, the apparatus being arranged for measuring 
and indicating such running surface irregularities as undula- 
tions and ripples, which comprises 

(a) a frame, 

(b) a measuring carriage linked to the frame, 

(c) drive means for vertically adjusting the measuring car- 
riage in relation to the frame and for pressing the carriage 
against the running surface of the rail head of a respective 
rail, 

(d) guide roller means for vertically and laterally guiding the 
measuring carriage along said rail head, the guide roller 
means including 

(1) a pair of guide rollers laterally guiding the measuring 
carriage along a portion of the gage side of said rail 
head \^hich is not worn and the guide rollers being 
spaced from each other in the operating direction, and 

(2) a plurality of additional guide rollers selectively en- 
gageable with the running surface of said rail head for 
vertically guiding the measuring carriage along the 
running surface of said rail head upon engagement 
therewith, the additional guide rollers each having an 
axis extending substantially parallel and transversely to 
the railroad track, the additional guide rollers including 
a pair of inner guide rollers, a pair of outer guide rollers 
and a pair of intermediately arranged guide rollers 
spaced from each other in the operating direction, the 
pair of outer guide rollers defining a rigid measuring 
reference in the wave length range of longer undula- 
tions and being spaced from each other a distance of 
about two meters, and a respective one of the pairs of 
the inner or intermediate guide rollers selectively en- 
gaged with the running surface defining a rigid measur- 
ing reference in the shorter wave length range of ripples 
and being spaced from each other a selected distance 
corresponding to at least about one sixth to one eighth 
of the distance between the outer guide rollers, and 

(e) a rail head running surface sensing element vertically 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



S9 



adjustably mounted on the measuring carriage substan- 
tially centered between the pairs of guide rollers. 



4,391,135 

AUTOMATIC LIQUID LEVEL MONITOR 
John K. Godbey, Dallas, and Billy G. Ballard, Garland, both 
of Tex., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New York, 

N.Y. 

Continuation of Ser. No. 140,410, .4pr. 14, 1980, Pat. No. 

4,318,298, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 822,507, Aug. 8, 

1977, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 

749,940, Dec. 13, 1976, abandoned, which is a continuation of 

Ser. No. 563,249, Mar. 28, 1975, abandoned. This application 

\^ \\ Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,641 

The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 9, 

1999, has been disclaimed. 
I ■ Int. a.3 GOIS 9/66 

tf-S. a. 73—155 4 Claims 









COHPUItlCII 



;iiouio 

-lOCPTM 
COUNTCK 



'nil- '" 



_ ll WHZ 

STW '^- SB Pxses 

OSCILLITDK 
CLOCK 

IMt «0J 'Si 

sec 



TIllE/OtPTH 

-1>IW«T/DISH.«»1- - 

J COMT«Ou.E» I 



0IG1TA1. 
IHOOUT 
'lllt/OCrTM 
r- -3"0'»'>| 



FAINC TINC ' 

-nvroDi or 



CLtPSED 

TIMf 
ACCUMULITOW 
2 J 
tUTO 



oieiTM. 

rue / MPTH 



Y 






r 
kit 




[acoustic tdmsoxciJ 



1. An apparatus for determining the location of the liquid 
surface in a well drilled through the substrata of the earth 
comprising: 

a source of acoustic pulses coupled to said well; 

a transducer coupled to said well producing an electric 
! signal in response to the occurrence of acoustic pulses in 
said well; 

a clock pulse source; 

digital counting means; 

gating means responsive to the output of said transducer for 
starting the counting of clock pulses by said digital count- 
ing means upon the occurrence of an acoustic pulse in said 
well and for stopping said counting upon detection of the 
acoustic pulse reflected from the liquid surface in said 
well, said reflected pulses including a component reflected 
from the liquid surface having a frequency content about 
5 Hz; 

a digital readout device responsive to said digital counting 
means for indicating the depth of said liquid surface; and 

means for gating out acoustic pulses for adjustable periods of 
time during and after the generation of each initiating 
acoustic pulse. 



fingers projecting upstream from said sensor assembly, 
said fingers being mounted on said sensor assembly, and 




said acoustic transducers defining three intersecting 
acoustic paths which form a skewed coordinate system. 



4,391,137 
GROUNDWATER FLOW METER 
William B. Kerfoot, Falmouth, and Stuart M. Skinner, Jr., 
Marion, both of Mass., assignors to K-V Associates, Inc., 
Falmouth, Mass. 

Filed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,787 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 28, 
1980, 3024417 

Int. CI.' GOIF 1/68 
U.S. a. 73—204 20 Claims 



O iO 



4,391,136 
THREE-AXIS CURRENT METER 
Henry T. k*erkins, Slidell, La.; Kim D. Saunders, Picayune, 
Miss., aad Albert W. Green, Slidell, La., assignors to The 
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of 
the Navy, Washington, D.C. 
, , Filed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,857 

I ' 1 1 Int. a.5 GOIP 5/18, 13/02 

U.S. a. 73—189 4 Qaims 

1. A three-axis current meter comprising: 
a sensor assembly; and 
a plurality of acoustic transducers mounted on the tips of 



,4> J. tj, 

.1 ■ 



1. The method of measuring a flow characteristic of a fluid, 
which comprises the steps of: 

(a) providing a heat conductive porous medium; 

(b) heating a localized region of said heat conductive porous 
medium through which fluid is flowing, the heat conduc- 
tivity of the porous medium being substantially greater 
than the heat conductivity of the fluid; and 

(c) measuring the temperature of the medium at at least two 
regions spaced from said localized region and determining 
a flow characteristic of the fluid therefrom. 



4,391,138 
COLLECTING VESSEL 
Anton Harle, Schelmenstiege 8, D-4400 Munster, Fed. Rep. of 
Germany 

Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,990 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 21, 
1980, 3023348 

Int. CI.3 GOIF 3/38 
U.S. a. 73—223 5 Claims 

1. A flexible collecting vessel having a main pouch part and 



60 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



a measuring pouch part, said measuring part, being tapered and 

having a narrow end and a wide end, said wide end of said 

measuring part in fluid communication with said main part; 

a graduated measurment scale positioned along said tapered 

part, said graduations starting at said narrow end of said 

measuring part; 

an inflow tube having a free end, said tube passing through 

said narrow end of said measuring part and extending in a 




direction toward- said main part for a distance and having 
a generally semicircular, U-shaped bend subtantially at 
said free end of said tube; and 
suspension means affixed to said main part between said 
measuring part and said main part, said suspension means 
for suspending said vessel in a folded-over fashion so that 
said narrow end of said measuring part hangs down- 
wardly from said affixment of said suspension means. 



4,391,139 
PLASTIC WATER METER MAIN CASE 
Ray Sutherland, Hopewood, and Mark S. Wood, Lemont Fur- 
nace, both of Pa., assignors to Rockwell International Corpo- 
ration, Pittsburgh, Pa. 
j Filed Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351,827 

I Int. aj GOIF 15/14 

U.S. a. 73—273 4 Qaims 




1. A water meter comprised of a main case enclosing an inlet 
chamber and a generally circular measuring chamber compart- 
ment, inlet and outlet passages in said main case communicat- 
ing respectively with said inlet chamber and said compartment, 
a continuous compartment seating surface circumscribing said 
compartment including a first portion which is circular and 
concentric with the axis of said compartment and a second 
portion at a radial distance, from said axis greater than the 
radius of said first portion, said portions of said seating surface 
being co-planar, a generally circular measuring chamber hav- 
ing a continuous downwardly facing seating surface circum- 
scribing said measuring chamber and seated on said compart- 
ment seating surface and comprised of a first measuring cham- 
ber seating surface portion which is circular and coextensive 
and co-axial with said first portion of said compartment seating 
surface, and a second measuring chamber seating surface por- 
tion which projects beyond the radius of said first measuring 
chamber seating surface portion and is seated on the second 
portion of said compartment seating surface. 



4,391,140 
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR METERING 
PARTICULATE MATERIAL 
Max Reinhard, and Horst Kommayer, both of Bad Homburg, 
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Colortronic Reinhard & 
Co. KG, Friedrichsdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany 
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 283,081 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 25, 
1980, 3038260 

Int. a.3 GOIM 79/00 
U.S. Q. 73—432 R 10 Qaims 





,21 


r" 






■^' u 


-R 




17^ 




1/ 


i'\' 


in 




&K^ 


12 W 

n 


^^'^yd 


1 


ir" 


t 



1. Apparatus for metering particulate material into a mixing 
vessel, comprising a vessel for containing a body of the partic- 
ulate material, the vessel having a bottom plate, a metering disc 
disposed directly above the bottom plate in the containing 
vessel, the disc being mounted for rotation in a given direction 
and having apertures for separating respective portions from 
the body of material, the containing vessel having first and 
second apertures positioned so that each disc aperture comes 
successively into alignment with them, the first, upstream 
aperture being intended for connection to a sampling receiver, 
the second, downstream aperture being intended for connec- 
tion to a mixing vessel, and covering means in the containing 
vessel arranged to cover the disc in the region above the first 
and second apertures in order to prevent the body of material 
from escaping through the aligned apertures. 



4,391,141 
APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING THE PROPERTIES 
OF A MATERIAL HAVING PLASTIC PROPERTIES BY 

DETERMINING ITS DENSITY 
Olfert H. Petersen, Lejre, Denmark, assignor to Slagteriernes 
Forskningsinstitut, Roskilde, Denmark 

Filed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,305 
Claims priority, application Denmark, Oct. 8, 1979, 4211/79 
Int. C1.3 GOIN 9/02, 7/00 
U.S. a. 73—433 4 Claims 

1. An apparatus for determining the properties of a material 
having plastic properties by determining its density on the basis 
of a measurement of weight and volume, which comprises: 
a chamber for receiving said material; 
a displacement member for contacting the material to 
thereby apply pressure to the material, which member is 
slidably movable through a wall of the chamber and has a 
cross sectional area perpendicular to the direction of 
movement smaller than the cross sectional area of the 
chamber in the cross section; 
drive means connected to said member for applying a prede- 
termined force on said displacement member towards the 
interior of the chamber, said drive means comprising 
means for applying a predetermined weight to said dis- 
placement member; and 



July 5, 19M 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



measuring means for measuring the penetration depth of the 
displacement member into the chamber to thereby deter- 




mine the volume of the material, the measured volume and 
weight bping used to determine density of the product. 



4,391,142 

FREQUENCY TRACKED GATED PULSE TECHNIQUE 
FOR ULTRASONIC FREQUENCY 

John H. Cantrell, Jr., Newport News, and Joseph S. Heyman, 
Gloucester, both of Va., assignors to The United States of 
America as represented by the Administrator of the National 
Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C. 
Filed Jun. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 158,183 
Int. a.3 GOIN 29/00; GOIH 9/24 I 

U.S. a. 73—610 3 Qaims 



IfflCKING 

gSnerator L 



4^: 

1 TR4MSMITTER 



a 



SWEEPINS 

LOCAL 
OSCILLATOR 



3 



SPtCTRUM 
ANALYZER 



CRO 



_|.-_ 



"TRANSDUCER]; 
DELAY 1- 

SAMPLE 1 



26 

27 



t 

RECEIVER 

SATE 

i 



MEDIUM 3 



,24 



L0GIC/TIMIN6 
GENERATOR 



TRIGGER 



1. A device for obtaining an ultrasonic frequency analysis 
comprising: 

a spectrum analyzer having a tuning frequency; 

a tracking generator means connected to said spectrum 
analyzer for producing an RF source locked to the tuning 
frequency of said spectrum analyzer; 

a transducer means suitable for attachment to the sample to 
be frequency analyzed; 

a transmitter on-off gate connected between said tracking 
generator means and said transducer means; 

a receiver on-off gate connected between said transducer 
means and said spectrum analyzer; and 

circuit means connected to said transmitter gate and said 
receiver gate for gating pulses of the RF signal from the 
tracking generator to the transducer means through the 
transmitter gate and for gating selected durations not 
coinciding with the durations of said pulses the resulting 



61 



echo signals from the transducer means to the spectrum 
analyzer through the receiver gate. 



4,391,143 
ULTRASONIC PROBE FOR INSPECTING 
DOUBLE-WALL TUBE 
Kenneth V. Cook, Clinton; Robert A. Cunningham, Jr., Powell, 
and Horace T. Murrin, Alcoa, all of Tenn., assignors to The 
United States of America as represented by the United States 
Department of Energy, Washington, D.C. 

Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,424 

Int. Q.' A61B 5/04: GOIN 29/00: GOIM 7/00 

U.S. Q. 73-623 2 Qaims 




1. An ultrasonic probe assembly for inspecting a double-wall 
structure, comprising: 

a body member having first and second cavities extending 
inwardly from its periphery and spaced apart from each 
other axially of one side thereof, the portion of said body 
member disposed between said first and second cavities 
constituting a baffle wall blocking direct transmission of 
ultrasonic energy therebetween; 

a first transducer mounted within said body member and 
operative to (1) transmit ultrasonic energy into said first 
cavity and (2) sense ultrasonic energy; 

a first reflector mounted within said first cavity and aligned 
with said first transducer so as to receive ultrasonic en- 
ergy therefrom and reflect it to said double-wall structure 
at a predetermined angle, said first reflector also receiving 
ultrasonic energy reflected back from said double-wall 
structure and reflecting it to said first transducer; 

a second transducer mounted within said body member and 
operative to sense ultrasonic energy, said second trans- 
ducer being spaced from said second cavity on the side 
thereof remote from said first cavity; 

an aperture in said body member extending from said second 
cavity to said second transducer; 

a tubular collimator insert mounted within said aperture; and 

a second reflector mounted within said second cavity and 
arranged to receive ultrasonic energy reflected from the 
end of said collimator insert adjacent thereto and reflect it 
through said collimator insert to said second transducer. 



4,391,144 
ULTRASONIC TEST PROBE 

Rolf Diederichs, Hiirth-Hermiilheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, 
assignor to Krautkramer-Branson, Inc., Stratford, Conn. 

Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,303 
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 12, 
1979, 2948552 

Int. Q.^ GOIN 29/04 
U.S. Q. 73—629 2 Qaims 

1. An ultrasonic test probe comprising a housing in which is 
disposed: 

(a) a piezoelectric transducer element adapted to transmit an 
ultrasonic seach pulse into a workpiece and to receive 
ultrasonic echo signals from such workpiece; 

(b) an electrical circuit coupled to said transducer element 



62 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



Julys, 1983 



for periodically energizing said transducer element with a 

high voltage pulse, said circuit including; 

(i) an electrical inductor coupled with one of its two 
terminals for receiving a trigger pulse; 

(ii) an electrical switching means coupled serially between 
the other terminal of said inductor and ground poten- 
tial; 

(iii) control means coupled to said switching means and 
controlled by said trigger pulse for periodically render- 
ing said switching means briefly non-conductive when 
said switching means is in its conductive state; 

(iv) a capacitor coupled with one of its two terminals to 



4,391,146 
PARALLEL T IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT CTRCUIT 

FOR USE WITH VARIABLE IMPEDANCE SENSOR 
Earl A. Grindheim, Richfield, Minn., assignor to Rosemount 
Inc., Minneapolis, Minn. 

Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,415 

Int. a.3 GOIL 9/12 

U.S. a. 73—718 34 Qaims 



TRIGGER 




y coMP 



coWCnsatiqn I n 

0SC1LL»T0« -- 



R ; ^ '^"'^ i OSCILLATOR 



LO I <■» LO 




TRANSMIT PULSE GENERATOR 




the junction between said inductor and said switching 

means, and 
(v) a resistor coupled with one of its two terminals to 

ground potential and with its other terminal to the other 

terminal of said capacitor, 
whereby responsive to the provision of a trigger pulse said 
control means renders said switching means non-conductive to 
cause a high voltage signal to form across said inductor which 
charges said capacitor with a potential, and responsive to said 
control means subsequently rendering said switching means 
conductive said capacitor discharges its potential to provide a 
high voltage pulse across said resistor which pulse is applied to 
said transducer element to energize said element. 



4,391,145 
FLUID-PRESSURE RESPONSIVE APPARATUS 
Sylvain Janssen, Neuilly, and Jean Sequies, Rueil Malmaison, 
both of France, assignors to Giers, Montrouge, France 

Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,620 
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 3, 1980, 
8011351 

Int. a.3 GOIL 11/00 
U.S. a. 73—704 12 Qaims 



I '-; 



LS^SS^^^ 




34. A circuit for providing an output signal having a fre- 
quency which is representative of a sensed parameter, the 
circuit comprising: 

sensing means for sensing the parameter, the sensing means 

exhibiting a variable impedance which is a function of the 

parameter; 
controllable impedance means for providing a controllable 

impedance which is a function of a direct current control 

signal; 
frequency determining means, connected to the sensing 

means and the controllable impedance means to form a 

parallel T circuit, for receiving the output signal and 

providing an oscillatory frequency signal which has a 

frequency which is a function of the variable impedance 

and the controllable impedance; 
signal amplification means for amplifying the oscillatory 

frequency signal to produce the output signal; and 
detection means for providing the direct current control 

signal to the controllable impedance means as a function 

of amplitude of the output signal. 



4,391,147 

TRANSDUCER DEVICE FOR MEASURING 

MECHANICAL VALUES ON HOLLOW BODIES 

Peter W. Krempl, Vienna; Peter Oaassen, and Rudolf Zeiringer, 

both of Graz, all of Austria, assignors to Hans List, Graz, 

Austria 

Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,456 
Claims priority, application Austria, Mar. 19, 1980, 1501/80 
Int. a.i GOIL 7/02: HOIL 41/18 
U.S. a. 73—730 17 Qaims 



1. Fluid-pressure responsive apparatus comprising: 

elongate means at least a portion of which is hollow and 
curved, and a resilient member interconnecting two points 
on said elongate means which are separated by said hol- 
low, curved portion, whereby application of fluid pres- 
sure within said portion causes a change in tension in said 
resilient member; and 

means arranged to induce oscillation of said resilient member 
and to generate a signal related to the frequency of said 
oscillation; and wherein 

at least the entirety of said hollow, curved portion of said 
elongate means is of unitary construction and said elon- 
gate means is placed under a predetermined amount of 
tension by said resilient member, whereby temperature 
sensitivity of said apparatus is reduced. 




f— J 



1. A transducer device for measuring mechanical values on 
hollow bodies, especially for measuring pressure distributions 
within a pipe by detecting deformations in the outer surface 
thereof, comprising a housing for detachably enclosing the 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



63 



pipe whose outer surface deformation is to be measured, and at 
least one elastic sensor element being mounted in said housing, 
said sensor element being capable to at least indirectly contact 
the surface of said enclosed pipe and having electrical connec- 
tions for taking off the measuring signals, said sensor element 
further being connected to at least two points of said housing 
and having a free length between said connecting points so as 
to be stretched over the surface of the pipe when the trans- 
ducer device is attached, and wherein at least one part of said 
sensor element is made in one piece with said housing. 



4,391,148 

METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING THE 
CROSS-SECnONAL AREA OF A DUCT AND THE 
VOLUME FLOW RATE OF FLUID IN THE DUCT 
Antonio J. Sainz, and Victor C. Roberts, both of London, En- 
gland, assignors to National Research Development Corpora- 
tion, London, England 

Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,952 
QaimS^priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 29, 1980, 
8007008; Jun. 11, 1980, 8019049 

Int. Q.3 A61B 5/10; GOIF 1/66 
U.S. Q. 73— 861 J5 9 Qaims 



-'//>' I '■ /r/AV otrtcroK \ 

M^ ' r- ' 



-,, i voiufic 




1. Apparatus for measuring the cross-sectional area of a duct 
containing a fluid, comprising 

means for deriving a plurality of velocity signals, each hav- 
ing a frequency which corresponds to a respective veloc- 
ity of fluid in a duct, the number of velocity signals de- 
pending on the number of different velocities currently 
present in the duct, 

a frequency-to-voltage converter coupled to receive the 
velocity signals, and 

means responsive to the varying output of the said converter 
to provide a signal representative of duct cross-sectional 
area. 



4,391,149 
DOPPLER-TYPE ULTRASONIC FLOWMETER 
Peter J. Herzl, Morrisville, Pa., assignor to Fischer & Porter 
Company, Warminster, Pa. 

I Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 263,473 
I ' Int. Q.3 GOIF 1/66 

U.S. Q. 73—861.25 7 Qaims 



-jyt 



1> 



1 



T 






fn.rwi 



OSC- 



fr-fR 












1. A Doppler-type ultrasonic flowmeter for measuring the 
mean flow velocity of a fluid stream carrying contaminants 
passing through a pipe, said stream having a changing velocity 
profile, said flowmeter comprising: 

A. a transmitting transducer mounted on the pipe to project 



in the upstream direction therein a diverging beam of 
ultrasonic energy; 

B. a stable oscillator coupled to the transmitting transducer 
to excite same at a predetermined ultrasonic frequency; 

C. a receiving transducer mounted on the pipe to pick up 
ultrasonic energy reflected by moving contaminants in the 
fluid which lie within the zone in which the projected 
beam intersects a converging reception beam leading 
downstream to the receiving transducer to produce a 
Doppler signal; 

D. means responsive to the transmitted frequency and the 
Doppler signal to produce a band of negative beat fre- 
quencies which are determined by the disparate flow 
velocities of the reflecting contaminants dictated by the 
prevailing velocity profile; and 

E. means responsive to the band of negative beat frequencies 
to determine the prevailing velocity profile and to derive 
therefrom the mean flow velocity, said means including 
spectral analyzer which sweeps through a frequency 
range that includes said band, the analyzer functioning to 
measure the amplitude output of each frequency in the 
band to provide a spectral analysis. 



4,391,150 

ELECTRO-ACOUSTIC FLOWMETER 

Thomas J. Rey, 319 Nashua Rd., Bedford, Mass. 01730 

Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,667 

Int. Q.^ GOIF 1/66 

U,S. Q. 73—861.29 7 Qaims 



,i9 




/ 


'', 


^fi, 




1 , 


— 1 i -;,.'.« 



r 



Con£rs//er 



1. A flowmeter for measuring the velocity of fluid flow in a 
conduit comprising a pair of transducers mounted in spaced 
apart relationship in the direction of fiuid flow on the exterior 
of the conduit, each of the transducers being tuned to its reso- 
nant frequency near that of the other, excitation means for 
causing both of the transducers to emit sonic energy intermit- 
tently and at the same time through the wall of the conduit and 
into the fiuid, amplifier means for processing upstream and 
downstream travelling signals received by the transducers 
including a differential amplifier to which both transducers are 
connected, whereby signals carried through the isotropic me- 
dium of the wall of the conduit simultaneously between the 
transducers produce zero differential signals at the input of the 
differential amplifier, counting means controlled by the down- 
stream signal and the upstream signal and means for converting 
the counts into fluid velocity. 



I 4,391,151 
QRCULAR TWO-STAGE AIR PARTICULATE AND GAS 

SAMPLER 
John W. Nelson, and Bruno Jensen, both of Tallahassee, Fla., 
assignors to PIXE International Corporation, Tallahassee, 
Fla. 

FUed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,833 

Int. a.3 BOID 50/00; COIN 1/22 

U.S.tl. 73—863.23 6 Qaims 

2. A sampling device for the particulate matter of air and 

gaseous fluids comprising: 

(a) a chamber (19) having an inlet (40) and an outlet (31); 



64 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



(b) a vacuum pump (30) for sucking said fluid through said 
inlet into said chamber and through said outlet; 

(c) a collector member (41) with an associated orifice mem- 
ber (44, 45) at said inlet and adapted to retain from said 
fluid the coarser particulates of a predetermined size and 
larger, and to transmit therefrom the finer particulates into 
said chamber, one of said members being disposed within 
said chamber and rotatable relative to the other member; 

(d) a second collector member (34) with an associated sec- 
ond orifice member (32, 39) disposed within said chamber 
and adapted to retain from said finer particulates transmit- 
ted to said chamber those particulates of a predetermined 




4,391,152 
SAMPLER 
James R. Ellett, Edmonton, Canada, assignor to Bralorne Re- 
sources Limited, Vancouver, Canada 

Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 257,856 

Claims priority, application Canada, Dec. 16, 1980, 366918 

Int. a.3 GOIN 1/14 

U.S. a. 73—863.84 29 Qaims 




tance and exit of said fluid, respectively, and a substantially 
uninterrupted passageway for said fluid extending through said 
housing and probe, said passageway being adapted to allow for 
the admission of cleaning means to clean said passageway 
without disassembly of said probe and housing. 



4,391,153 
SEGMENTED HBER SAMPLER 
Robert A. Taylor, Anderson, S.C., assignor to The United States 
of America as represented by the United States Department of 
Agriculture, Washington, D.C. 

Filed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 337,044 

Int. C1.3 GOIN 3/10 

U.S. a. 73—864.41 2 Qaims 



size and larger, and to transmit therefrom the remaining 
finer particulates to said outlet, said second collector 
member (34) being rotatable relative to said second orifice 
member (32, 39) and about an axis (46) common to the axis 
of rotation of said first rotatable member (44, 45), and 
(e) means (20, 63) for effecting rotary movement of said first 
rotatable member to chronologically form a circular arcu- 
ate deposit (41a) of said coarser particulates on said first 
collector member and, concurrently, for effecting rotary 
movement of said second collector member (34) to chro- 
nologically form a circular arcuate deposit (34<7) of said 
remaining finer particulates retained by said second col- 
lector member. 




1. An apparatus for sampling staple fibers comprising in 
combination: 

(a) a rigid lower jaw; 

(b) an upper jaw juxtaposed to said lower rigid jaw, one end 
of said upper jaw fabricated into a plurality of segments, 
said segments capable of deflecting in different amounts to 
accommodate local differences in fiber density and/or 
imbedded trash/foreign particles; 

(c) means for pivoting said upper jaw in relation to said rigid 
lower jaw; 

(d) a spring assembly located between said upper and lower 
jaws, said spring assembly also located on the opposite 
end from the segmented end of said upper jaw to provide 
clamping pressure during and after the taking of a sample. 



4,391,154 

VARIABLE SPEED DIGGING MACHINE PROVIDED 

WITH A GEARBOX HAVING AN ORIENTABLE DRIVE 

Michele Tortella, Zona Industrial, Madonna delle Grazie- 

Ortona (Chieti), Italy 

Filed May 6, 1980, Ser. No. 147,219 
Qaims priority, application Italy, May 11, 1979, 49033 A/79 
Int. a.3 F16H 37/00. 3/22. 57/02 
U.S. a. 74—15.4 12 Qaims 




1. A sampling device for taking fluid samples, said device 
comprising a probe adapted to extend into fluid and to act as an 
intake port, a housing connected to said probe, first valve 
means in said housing adapted to allow admittance of a portion 
of said fluid, second valve means adapted to allow exit of said 

admitted fluid to a storage container, sample holding means 1 In a digging machine including a longitudinal frame sup- 
adapted to hold a predetermined amount of said admitted fluid, porting at least one hoe-driving shaft driven by a main drive 
actuating means adapted to open and close said first and second shaft for coupling to the power takeoff of a tractor operating 
valve means at predetermined intervals to allow for said admit- the digging machine, the improvement comprising: 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



65 



(a) an elongate gearbox carried by the machine; 

(b) means for supporting the elongate gearbox for movable 
orientation in a vertical plane about the longitudinal axis 
of the machine; 

(c) the gearbox supporting the main drive shaft of the ma- 
chine and interposed between the main drive shaft and the 
hoe-driving shaft; 

(d) a first gear shaft connected to and driven by the main 
drive shaft; 

(e) a second gear shaft for driving the hoe-driving shaft; 
(0 the first and second gear shafts being journaled through 

the gearbox; 

(g) a first gear set including three gears mounted on the first 
gear shaft; 

(h) a second gear set including three gears mounted on the 
second gear shaft; and 

(i) each gear of the second gear set being engageable with 
and selectively driven by a corresponding gear of the first 
gear set, with the diameters of the corresponding gears 
being such that the second gear shaft may be driven by the 
first gear shaft at any one of three different speeds depend- 
ing upon which corresponding gears of the first and sec- 
ond gear shafts are in selected driving engagement with 
each other for transmitting the motion of the first gear 
shaft to the second gear shaft. 



means being arranged to move the limit switch to the third 
position when the counterweight is in its lowermost position 






4,391,155 

RECIPROCATING DRIVE AND REVERSING 

MECHANISM FOR LONG STROKE, WELL PUMPING 

UNIT 

Emil A. Bender, 6625 Kane Way, Bakersfield, Calif. 93309 
Filed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 393,100 
Int. C\? F16H 27/02, 29/02; F04B 47/06 
U.S. a. 74—89.2 5 Claims 

1. A long stroke, well pumping unit comprising: a base 
platform; a tower on the base platform; drive train means 
including rotatable, winding drum means on the base platform 
and power means to rotate the drum means; a flexible lift belt 
attached at one end to the drum means and at its other end to 
the polish rod of a pump; a freely rotatable spool mounted atop 
the tower, the belt being trained over the spool; a counter- 
weight attached to that portion of the lift belt between the 
spool and the rotatable drum; and means for reversing the 
power means, thus to cyclically wind and unwind the belt from 
the winding drum and thus impart reciprocating movement to 
the polish rod of a pump, said reversing means including: 
rotary motion transmission means responsive to rotation in the 
drive train means; control means responsive to said transmis-- 
sion means; and a three position limit switch operable from said 
control means, the switch being arranged to cause the power 
means to rotate the winding drum clockwise in a first position 
and counterclockwise in a second position, the third position of 
the switch being an off position and providing a dwell or rest 
period between reversals of said power means, the control 



1 . 

T 






66 ,^70 




and to maintain the limit switch in one of the first or second 
positions at all other times. 



4,391,156 

ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE WITH INHNITELY 

VARIABLE SPEED TRANSMISSION 

Edward C. Tibbals, Jr., Greensboro, N.C., assignor to William 

R. Loeffler, Denver, Colo. 

Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 207,190 

Int. CI.' F16H 5/44 

U.S. a. 74— 336.5 18 Oaims 







/ J W J Jy^' [ r* J/. 



"1 






m:. 



1. A variable speed drive for motor vehicles and the like 



66 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



V- 



characterized by having an output shaft with high torque 
requirements at low speeds of operation, the combination 
comprising: 

an electric motor drive; 

infmitely variable speed transmission means having an input 
driven by said motor drive and an output coupled to a 
vehicle to be driven, said infmitely variable speed trans- 
mission means including a movable control member shift- 
able to vary the speed ratio between the input and output 
' of said transmission means over a predetermined range of 

speed ratios; 
speed ratio control means operatively coupled to said mov- 
able cbntrol member, said control means movable in re- 
sponse to rotation of said motor drive to vary the ratio of 
the output speed and torque at the output side of said 
transmission with respect to the input speed and torque; 
and 
resistance compensator means for imposing a predetermined 
resistance to movement of said control means whereby to 
control the speed ratio between the input side and the 
output side of said infinitely variable speed transmission, 
the maximum output speed of said transmission means 
being matched to the most efficient operating speed of said 
electric motor drive. 



4^1,158 
BIASED TRANSMISSION CONTROL SHAFT 
Theodore A. Malott, and Robert W. Wolfe, both of Jackson, 
Mich., assignors to Clark Equipment Company, Buchanan, 
Mich. 

Filed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 230,781 

Int. a.3 G05G 9/12, 5/10 

U.S. a. 74—473 R 5 Qaims 



4,391,157 . 
BEVEL GEAR AND PINION DRIVE WITH BIASED 
THRUST BEARING 
Roger L. Jacklin, Waterloo, Iowa, assignor to Deere & Com- 
pany, Moline, III. 
I Filed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser, No. 198,076 

I Int. Ci.^ F16H 35/08, 1/14 

U.S. a. 74—402 3 Qaims 




1. Drive mechanism including a fore-and-aft shaft having a 
spiral bevel pinion fixed at its rear end, a spiral bevel gear 
meshing with the pinion, a combination radial-thrust bearing 
including an inner race ring fitting the shaft so as to receive 
forward thrust forces imparted thereto by the meshing pinion 
and gear, an outer race ring and rolling elements between the 
rings, and fixed support structure carrying the bearing, charac- 
terized in that the support structure has a stepped annular 
groove therein concentrically surrounding the shaft ahead of 
the bearing and including a first radial shoulder facing toward 
and axially abutting the outer race ring and a second radical 
shoulder of lesser diameter than the first shoulder and spaced 
ahead of and facing the inner race ring and biasing means is 
disposed in the groove and is interposed between the second 
shoulder and the inner race ring in opposition to the aforesaid 
thrust forces. 




1. A transmission having a plurality of speed ratios compris- 
ing: 

a housing; 

a shift lever pivotally connected with the housing, the shift 
lever having a lower end extending through the housing; 

a control shaft contained in the housing and operably associ- 
ated with the shift lever, the control shaft being shiftable 
in opposed directions in response to pivotal movement of 
the shift lever, the control shaft having two ends, one of 
the ends having an internal bore; 

a bias assembly operably associated with the control shaft 
for resisting the shifting of the control shaft in a selected 
direction past a predetermined point, the bias assembly 
being mounted in the internal bore and projecting there- 
from, whereby a first amount of resistance is provided to 
enable the operator to sense his position in the transmis- 
sion shift pattern. 



4,391,159 — 

PARKING BRAKE ACTUATING DEVICE 

Daniel J. Sellmeyer, Royal Oak, Mich., assignor to Gulf & 
Western Manufacturing Company, Southfield, Mich. 
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,270 
Int. a.3 G05G 1/04 
U.S. a. 74—516 23 Qaims 

1. In a parking brake operating mechanism for a vehicle, 
which mechanism includes a support structure; a pedal actu- 
ated lever; means for mounting said lever on said structure to 
pivot about a fixed axis; a movable force transmitting means for 
applying an actuating force to a brake actuating element upon 
movement of said force transmitting means along a preselected 
path between a brake release position and a brake actuating 
position; coupling means for connecting said force transmitting 
means to said pedal actuated lever to move said force transmit- 
ting means along said preselected path as said pedal actuated 
lever is pivoted about said fixed axis; and, means for releasably 
locking said force transmitting means in said brake actuating 
position on said path, the improvement comprising: said cou- 
pling means comprises a drag link having first and second 
spaced ends; means for pivotally connecting said first end to 
said pedal actuated lever on a second axis spaced from said 
fixed axis whereby said first end of said drag link is moved with 
said second axis in an arcuate path generally concentric with 
said fixed axis; means for connecting said force transmitting 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



67 



means onto said second end of said drag link; and, cam means 
for pivoting said drag link about said second axis on said pedal 




actuated lever as said first end of said drag link is moved in said 
arcuate path by pivotal movement of said pedal actuated lever. 



4,391,160 
SUPPORT ASSEMBLY HAVING RELEASABLE LEVER 

MOUNTING FOR HANDLE BAR 
John E. Myers, Star Rte., Echo, Oreg. 97826 

Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,316 

Int. a.3 B62K 21/12 

U.S. a. 74—551.8 3 Qaims 




1. A support assembly for securing a mechanical device on a 
bar comprising 

an annular sleeve for encompassing and fixable to such bar, 

a tubular base portion encompassing said sleeve, 

a post laterally projecting from and integral with said base 

portion adapted for attaching to such device, 
releasable means releasably locking said base portion to said 
sleeve, said base portion being movable relative to said 
sleeve with release of said releasable means, and 
a tubular bushing positioned between said sleeve and said 
base portion for facilitating movement of said base portion 
relative to said sleeve with release of said locking means. 



4,391,161 

CONNECTING ROD OF INTERNAL COMBUSTION 

ENGINE 

Keisuke Ban, Fujimi, and Takeo Arai, Higashimatsuyama, both 
of Japan, assignors to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, 
Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 181,227 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aue. 29, 1979, 54-109854 
Int. a.3 G05G 1/00 
U.S. a. 74—579 E 3 Claims 




1. A connecting rod of an internal combustion engine includ- 
ing a rod portion having longitudinal stiffening rib portions, a 
longitudinal axis and two ends, a big end portion connected to 
one end of said rod portion and being adapted to be connected 
to a crankshaft of the engine, and a small end portion con- 
nected to the other end of said rod portion having a hole bored 
therethrough for receiving a piston pin having an axis; said rod 
portion having a Y-axis perpendicular to said longitudinal axis 
and parallel to said axis of said piston pin and an X-axis perp>en- 
dicular to both said Y-axis and said longitudinal axis; said rod 
portion comprising at least one reinforced portion and a re- 
maining portion; said remaining portion being made of a light 
alloy material, said at least one reinforced portion being made 
of a bundle of inorganic fibers extending along said longitudi- 
nal axis formed into a metal matrix impregnated with said light 
alloy material; said fibers having a cross-sectional area; said rod 
portion having a cross-sectional area, a cross-sectional shape, a 
Y-axis second moment of inertia, and an X-axis second moment 
of inertia; said at least one reinforced portion having a cross- 
sectional area and a Y-axis second moment of inertia; said 
cross-sectional shape of said rod portion taken perpendicular 
to said longitudinal axis being such that said Y-axis second 
moment of inertia of said rod portion is smaller than said X-axis 
second moment of inertia of said rod portion; and said rein- 
forced portion being positioned and sized in said rod portion 
such that said Y-axis second moment of inertia of said rein- 
forced portion is equal to or greater than said X-axis second 
moment of inertia of said reinforced portion. 



4,391,162 
FLUID ASSISTED BOOSTER 
John P. Burke, Leamington Spa, England, assignor to Automo- 
tive Products Limited, Leamington Spa, England 

Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,579 
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 5, 1979, 79 
30723 

Int. C\? G05G 1/00 
U.S. a. 74—579 R 4 Qaims 

1. A fluid assisted brake booster having: 
an output rod with a piston head thereon having a load 

bearing face with an axial bore therein; 
an annular load transfer means located adjacent the load 

bearing face; 
an input rod located on the other side of the transfer means 
relative to the output rod and having a thrust member 
with an axial projection that extends through the centre of 
the transfer means into said axial bore; and a cap fitted to 
the load bearing face to provide anchorage means for the 



68 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



thrust member to the piston head, said anchorage means gear for rotation and for axial displacement in a fixed radial 
allowing the thrust member a forward stroke towards the position in said housing. 




t^^. 



4,391,164 
OVERDRIVE FOR MOTOR VEHICLES 
Stig H. A. Weiertz, Kungalv, and Grzegorz K. Janiszewski, 
Angered, both of Sweden, assignors to AB Volvo, Gothenburg, 
Sweden 

Filed Nov. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 204,082 
Claims priority, application Sweden, Nov. 22, 1979, 7909663 
Int. C1.3 F16H 57/10 
U.S. a. 74—781 R 7 Qaims 



output rod to apply a load to the load transfer means but 
limiting the relative displacement of the thrust member on 
the return stroke. 




1. A planetary gear assembly comprising a housing (9), an 
input shaft (1) rotatably mounted in said housing, an output 
shaft (23) mounted for rotation adjacent said input shaft, a pair 
of outer central internal gears (6a,6Z') fixed to said housing, an 
inner central gear (10) having two axially spaced opposite 
helical gear portions (10a,10^), first and second substantially 
parallel rotatable planetary gears (5<2,56) having opp>ositely 
helically geared portions disposed between said outer central 
internal gears and said inner central gear and in meshing en- 
gagement with said outer central internal gears and said axially 
spaced opposite helical gear portions of said inner central gear, 
first and second carriers (3<7,36) for supporting said first and 
second planetary gears for rotation respectively, and for re- 
volving movement around said inner central gear, a first gear 
coupling (2) connecting said first carrier (3a) to said input shaft 
for co-rotation and relative axial motion for transmitting all 
rotational power from said input shaft to said first carrier, a 
second gear coupling (4) connecting said first and second 
carriers (3a,36) for co-rotation and relative axial motion so that 
a portion of the rotational power from said first carrier is 
transmitted to said second carrier over said second gear cou- 
pling and a remainder of the power is transmitted directly to 
said central gear over one of said opposite helical gear por- 
tions, and bearing means (11,12) mounting said inner central 



4,391,163 
PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY 
Heinz Benthake, Kassel; Curt Kronert, Miilheim, and Josef 
Kunnen, Meerbusch, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to 
Thyssen Industrie AG, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed May 23, 1980, Ser. No. 152,607 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 14, 
1980, 3005463 

Int. a.J F16H i/44, 1/28 
\iS. a. 74—768 3 Qaims 




O 



H 



na 'J' 






;» 



-*■■'—) ' i.1 IS i^ , 



-.^:fi^-=^=Fi=^-_ .._»4^: 



Ji 



J 



1. In an overdrive for motor vehicles, comprising a housing 
for the overdrive, a planet carrier which is joined to an input 
shaft, a ring gear with internal teeth, which ring gear engages 
planet pinions carried on the planet carrier and is joined to an 
output shaft, a sun pinion engaging the planet pinions, a one- 
way brake coupled between the housing of the overdrive and 
the sun pinion, said one-way brake being arranged to lock the 
sun pinion to the housing when driving torque is transmitted 
from the input shaft to the output shaft, and a clutch which is 
disposed, when engaged, to establish non-rotatable connection 
between the sun pinion and the ring gear, and means to suspend 
the braking function of the one-way brake before the clutch is 
engaged; the improvement comprising brake means that brake 
the sun pinion after disengagement of the clutch and prior to 
the establishment of the braking function of the one-way brake. 



4,391,165 

KICK-DOWN SHIFTING MECHANISM FOR 

AUTOMATIC CHANGE-SPEED TRANSMISSIONS 

Hermann Gaus, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to 

Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany 
Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 169,521 

Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 21, 
1979, 2929729 

Int. Q\} B60K 41/10 
U.S. a. 74—869 8 Qaims 

1. A kick-down circuit for an automatic change-speed trans- 
mission, the circuit including a kick-down control means for 
transmitting a kick-down control signal when an accelerator 
pedal of a vehicle in which the transmission is installed is 
displaced to a predetermined position, at least one gearshift 
valve means including a valve body for controlling an operat- 
ing pressure of a shift-actuating means which participates in a 
shifting between a higher gear and a lower gear, means for 
setting a control pressure acting upon the valve body is depen- 
dence upon a driving speed of the vehicle for shifting from a 
lower gear to a higher gear, and means for setting a control 
pressure acting upon the valve body in dependence upon a 
positioning of the accelerator pedal for shifting from a higher 
gear to a lower gear, characterized in that means are provided 
for elevating the control pressure dependent upon the position 
of the accelerator upon the occurrence of a kick-down signal, 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



69 



and in that means are operatively connected with the control 
pressure elevating means for limiting a duration of the elevated 




control pressure acting upon the valve body independently of 
the position of the accelerator pedal. 



/( 4,391,166 

HYDRAULIC FLUID PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM 
TOR AN AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 
Seitoku Kubo, Toyota; Koujiro Kuramochi, Okazaki, and Yukio 
Terakura, Toyota, all of Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha 
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota, Japan 

Filed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,510 
Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 10, 1979, 54-116563 
Int. a.3 F16H 47/08; B60K 41/10 
U.S. a. 74—869 6 Claims 



Mi 1 ^Mt* 6 




1. In an automatic transmission, for a vehicle comprising a 
throttle, comprising: a fluid torque converter having input and 
output members, a lock-up clutch formed with a hydraulic 
pressure chamber which directly connects said input and out- 
put members when hydraulic fluid pressure is supplied to the 
hydraulic pressure chamber; and a gear transmission mecha- 
nism comprising a plurality of hydraulic fluid actuated friction 
engaging devices for providing a plurality of speed stages; 

a hydraulic fluid pressure control system which provides 
selective supply of hydraulic fluid pressures for actuating 
the plurality of friction engaging devices, comprising: 

(a) a throttle hydraulic fluid pressure control valve for 
producing a throttle hydraulic fluid pressure according 
to the amount of actuation of the throttle; 

(b) a governor hydraulic fluid pressure coatrol valve for 
producing a governor hydraulic fluid pressure accord- 
ing to the speed of the vehicle; 

(c) means for manually selecting any of a plurality of 
desired shift ranges; 

(d) a plurality of shift valves for selectively providing 
actuating hydraulic fluid pressures for the plurality of 
friction engaging devices, according to the shift range 



selected by the manual selecting means, and according 
to the values of the throttle hydraulic fluid pressure and 
the governor hydraulic fluid pressure; and 
(e) leading means for leading hydraulic fluid pressure to 
the hydraulic fluid pressure chamber of the torque 
converter, when any one of a plurality of shift ranges is 
selected by the manual selecting means, only when the 
highest speed stage available from the gear transmission 
mechanism, for that shift range, is being provided by the 
gear transmission mechanism; 
said leading means includes a hydraulic fluid pressure 
switching valve comprising an output port, leading to the 
hydraulic fluid pressure chamber of the torque converter, 
and a first, a second, and a third input port; 
in the hydraulic fluid pressure switching valve, the output 
port being connected to the third input port when and 
only when hydraulic fluid pressure is provided to either 
the first input port or the second input port; 
the first input port being provided with a hydraulic fluid 
pressure whenever the highest speed range available for 
the automatic transmission is not selected by the selecting 
means; 
thie second input port being provided with a hydraulic fluid 
pressure which is an actuating pressure for a one of the 
friction engaging devices which is engaged only for pro- 
ducing the highest speed stage available from the gear 
transmission mechanism and is otherwise disengaged; 
and the third input port being provided with a hydraulic 
fluid pressure which is an actuating pressure for a one of 
the friction engaging devices which is engaged for provid- 
ing the highest and also the next to highest speed stage 
available from the gear transmission mechanism, and is 
otherwise disengaged, during forward operation of the 
gear transmission mechanism. 



4,391,167 
LIFT-TOP CAN OPENER 

Josef J. Bergmeister, 620 Jones, San Francisco, Calif. 94102 
Filed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,726 
Int. Cl.^ B67B 7/40 
U.S. CI. 81—3.46 R 3 Claims 




1. A lift top can opener including an elongated lever member 
defining first and second ends, said first end defining an elon- 
gated handle and said second end including recess means defin- 
ing an endwise outwardly opening recess having a first narrow 
cross sectional dimension and a second wide cross sectional 
dimension several times the first narrow dimension, said recess 
being adapted to receive therein the lift tab of a top can with 
said lever member thereafter being usable as an operating lever 
to assist in lifting the lift tab, said elongated handle including at 
least one cylindrical end, said recess means including a cylin- 
drical sleeve having one partially flattened end and the other 
end of said sleeve being snugly telescoped over said one cylin- 
drical end of said handle for stationary support of said sleeve 
from said handle, said recess being defined within said pariially 
flattened end, one of the flattened sides of said pariially flat- 
tened end including an integral laterally outwardly struck 
portion defining a hook spaced laterally outward of said one 
flattened side and opening toward the other end of said sleeve. 



70 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4,391,168 
METHOD FOR CITTTING SHEET MATERIAL WITH A 

CUTTING WHEEL 
Heinz J. Gerber, and David R. Pearl, both of West Hartford, 
Conn., assignors to Gerber Garment Technology, Inc., South 
Windsor, Conn. 
Division of Ser. No. 168,312, Jul. 10, 1980. This application Dec. 
I 8, 1981, Ser. No. 328,788 

I Int. aJ D06H 7/00; B26D 1/18 

U.S. a. 83—34 3 Oaims 



said blades angled toward the same side of the perpendicular, 
thereby causing the fibers to undergo angular bodily swinging 
movement after cutting and while passing through the spaces 
between the blades. 




4,391,170 
APPARATUS FOR WORKING ON ADVANONG SHEET 

MATERIAL 

Bentsion Boverman, and Vilen Vodyanitsky, both of West Hart- 
ford, Conn., assignors to Gerber Garment Technology, Inc., 
South Windsor, Conn. 

Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,650 

Int. a? D06H 7/00 

U.S. a. 83—71 19 Claims 



r^3-« 



1. A method of cutting pattern pieces from a single ply of 
sheet material comprising: 

spreading a single ply of sheet material on a hard support 
surface in a smooth and flattened condition; 

translating a cutting wheel having a sharp peripheral cutting 
edge along straight and curved lines of cut defming the 
perimeter of a pattern piece with the cutting edge cutting 
through the material to the hard support surface; and 

at angles in the perimeter translating the cutting wheel along 
one side of the angle toward the apex of the angle, stop- 
ping the translating when the center of the wheel is di- 
rectly over the apex, then lifting the cutting wheel away 
from the support surface and rotating the wheel above the 
surface into alignment with the other side of the angle, 
then lowering the cutting wheel into engagement with the 
sheet material and the support surface with the center of 
the wheel directly over the apex of the angle, and thereaf- 
ter advancing the wheel along the other side of the angle 
away from the apex whereby the angle is cut without 
overcuts or excessive heel cuts. 



I 4,391,169 

CUTTER WITH ANGULAR BLADES AND METHOD FOR 

CUTTING ROPE THEREWITH 

William F. Laird, and Kenneth A. Wood, both of Kingston, 

Canada, assignors to Hartford Fibres, Ltd., Ontario, Canada 

Filed Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 176,917 

Int. a.^ DIOG 1/04 

U.S. a. 83—37 21 Qaims 





1. In an apparatus for working on sheet material and having 
conveying means for supporting and moving sheet material, a 
carriage assembly, means supporting the carriage assembly for 
movement relative to the conveyor means and in one and an 
opposite direction generally parallel to the direction of move- 
ment of the conveyor means, instrument means mounted on 
said carriage assembly for movement with the carriage assem- 
bly and in working relation to sheet material supported by the 
conveyor means, and drive means for moving the carriage 
assembly relative to the conveyor means to move the instru- 
ment in working relation to the sheet material supported by the 
conveyor means, the improvement wherein said drive means 
comprises coengaging drive elements including one drive 
element mounted on the conveyor means to move with the 
conveyor means and another drive element supported on the 
carriage assembly to move with the carriage assembly and 
relative to the conveyor means. 



11. In a method of cutting a rope wherein said rope is laid 
out lengthwise against a plurality of cutting blades which are 
spaced apart from one another, and which is cut into fibers by 
forcing the rope against the cutting edges of the blades and 
forcing the cut fibers through the spaces between the blades, 
the step which comprises cutting said rope while maintaining 
said blades at an angle to the lengthwise orientation of said 
rope at an angle to a line perpendicular thereto, and with all of 



4,391,171 
TRIM PRESS INCLUDING EJECTOR 

Michael Wendt, Hope, Mich., assignor to Lyie Development, 
Inc., Beaverton, Mich. 

Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,207 
Int. a.3 B26F 1/02 
U.S. CI. 83—82 4 Claims 

1. In a trim press for trimming articles, which have been 
differentially pressure formed in a plastic sheet, from the plas- 
tic sheet comprising: 
a frame; 
means for incrementally indexing said sheet of plastic to 

successively position articles at a trim station; 
first and second trim dies mounted on said frame for relative 
movement toward and away from each other between 
spaced apart positions and closed positions in which the 
trim dies engage opposite sides of said plastic sheet to 
sever the articles from the sheet at said trim station; 
means for reciprocally moving at least one of said trim dies 
toward and away from the other of said trim dies compris- 
ing: 
a flywheel rotaubly mounted about a first axis on said frame; 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



71 



a first eccentric drive pin having a second axis radially offset 
from said first axis, mounted on said flywheel for bodily 
movement about a third axis; 

first coupler means coupling said eccentric drive pin to said 
one trim die to reciprocally move said one trim die; and 

ejector means reciprocally mounted on said one trim die for 
movement relative thereto; and the improvement com- 
prising: 

means for moving said ejector means relative to said one 
trim die comprising: 

rocker arm means mounted on said first coupler means for 
to-and-fro swinging movement; 




a second eccentric pin, having a fourth axis, radially offset 
from said first, second and third axes, coupled to said 
first eccentric drive pin for bodily movement therewith; 
and 

connector means coupling said second eccentric drive pin 
to said rocker arm means to swing said rocker arm in 
said to-and-fro path; 
said coupler means coupled to said ejector means and to said 

rocker arm means for reciprocally moving said ejector 

means relative to said trim die to separate severed articles 

at said trim station from said one trim die. 



1 1 4,391,172 

ROTARY CUTTING MACHINE 

Lesley A. Galland, and Bruce W. Skiver, both of Caldwell, Id., 

assignors to J. R. Simplot Company, Boise, Id. 

Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 246,926 

Int. a.3 B26D 3/28 

U.S. CI. 83—403 30 Qaims 







1. A rotary cutting machine for cutting a product into a 
plurality of pieces, comprising: 

a generally cylindrical housing having a plurality of circum- 
ferentially spaced, axially open slots formed therein; 

a plurality of cutting knives each including an axially extend- 
ing cutting edge at one side of a respective one of said 
slots, said cutting edges being presented in a common 
circumferential direction; and 

a generally cylindrical impeller mounted for rotation within 
said housing, said impeller including a base plate closing 
'one axial end thereof, an annular cover plate at the oppo- 



site axial end defining a central opening for admission of a 
flow of the product into the impeller, means cooperating 
with said base plate and said cover plate to form a plural- 
ity of axially separated and radially open passages, said 
passages forming means including at least one annular 
divider plate disposed axially between said base and cover 
plates and generally in parallel therewith, and a plurality 
of circumferentially spaced axially extending paddles 
connected to said base, cover, and divider plates near their 
peripheries for securing said base, cover, and divider 
plates with respect to each other and for rotationally 
carrying the product flowing through said passages into 
cutting engagement with said cutting knives, and means 
for directing the flow of the product upon rotation of the 
impeller in a radially outward direction for flow in sub- 
stantially equal portions through said passages into cutting 
engagement with said cutting knives. 



4,391,173 

SHEARING CRADLE 

Colin C. Anderson, 6 Montrose PI., Beaumont, South Australia, 

Australia 

Continuation of Ser. No. 108,164, Dec. 28, 1979, abandoned. 

This application Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,449 
Claims priority, application Australia, Jan. 2, 1979, PD7250 
Int. Cl.^ B26D 7/06 
U.S. CI. 83—424 6 Claims 




1. Apparatus for shearing sheep, said apparatus comprising a 
frame supporting a plurality of propelled parallel rollers ex- 
tending longitudinally of the frame to support a sheep in a 
reclining position, an endless belt cutter positioned between an 
adjacent pair of said rollers, said rollers being positioned to 
have central and outermost rollers with the central rollers 
lower than the outermost rollers to allow the sheep to lie on 
the rollers, said cutter means being characterized by said end- 
less belt cutter having a course extending axially of said rollers 
intermediate said central rollers, and means to drive the rollers 
to move the sheep through an arc to present the unshorn wool 
to the endless belt cutter. 



4,391,174 
PUNCH PRESS MACHINE WITH ADJUSTABLE TOOL 

POSITIONING 
Gerard G. F. Smeets, 50 Inverlochy Blvd., Apt. 102, Thornhill, 
Ontario, Canada 

Filed Sep. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 72.668 
Oaims priority, application Canada, Aug. 30, 1978, 310359 
Int. a.3 B21D 28/26; B26F 1/04 
U.S. a. 83—552 8 Oaims 

1. In a turret type punch press machine, adjustable means for 
aligning tool elements of spaced rotors comprising, a support- 
ing member for at least one of the rotors, the supporting mem- 
ber being pivottably connected to a main frame of the machine, 
adjustable positioning and locking means for providing limited 



72 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



vernier adjustment of said supporting member about its pivot 
point on the machine, an indexing mechanism mounted on the 
supporting member providing for multi-position indexing of 
the rotor about its axis, and wherein the indexing mechanism is 
adjustable to provide limited angular positioning of the rotor 




for each indexed position thereof and to provide, in conjunc- 
tion with the adjustable positioning of the supporting member 
two limited and substantial orthogonal directions of adjust- 
ment of the position of a tool mounted in the rotor on the 
supporting member. 



4,391,175 
PERFORATING DEVICE ESPEQALLY ADAPTED FOR 

USE WITH PRINTING MACHINES 
Steve Christian, 43, me Rodin, 93290 Tremblay-les-Gonesse, 
France 

Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,996 
Oaims priority, application France, Mar. 27, 1980, 80 06862 
Int. Cl.^ B26D 3/00 
U.S. a. 83—678 3 Qaims 



r\T^\j), 




7\f))J\f\jr\.Pyf\J\pj\f\S''r 



'^^K' 



'^fXO:i'£^7IXtJTZ^ZrfTl 



. \ 

5 6 



1. Perforating device or similar means, especially adapted 
for use with printing machines such as offset machines which 
comprises: 

(a) a rigid, thin metallic plate in the form of a strip,, which 
presents, in protrusion, on one of its two faces, at least one 
cutting or perforating element; 

(b) a layer of adhesive material applied upon the side of thin 
metal plate opposite said cutting or perforating element, 
said adhesive layer capable of being protected by a protec- 
tive strip which is removed at the moment of use; and 

(c) a double faced self-adhesive tape adhering upon one of its 
faces, upon the side of said thin metal plate adjacent to 
said cutting or perforating element, the other face of the 
double faced self-adhesive tape capable of being protected 
by a protective strip which is removed at the moment of 
use. 



4,391,176 

ELECTRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENT WITH 

MUSICAL COMPOSITION FASHION SELECTORS 

Naoyuki Niinomi, and Kunihiko Watanabe, both of Hamamatsu, 

Japan, assignors to Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha, 

Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Aug. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 182,575 
Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 8, 1979, 54-115400 
Int. a.3 GIOH 1/12, 1/38. 1/46 
VJS. a. 84—1.17 18 Oaims 

1. An electronic musical instrument comprising: 
a first keyboard having a plurality of keys for performing a 
melody; 



a second keyboard having a plurality of keys for performing 
an accompaniment; 

a melody tone generator generating a melody tone in re- 
sponse to depression of a key of said melody performance 
keyboard; 

an accompaniment tone generator generating an accompani- 
ment tone in response to depression of a key of said ac- 
companiment performance keyboard; 

a plurality of melody musical composition fashion selection 
switches connected to a like plurality of first logic circuit 
means for designating a single one of a musical composi- 
tion fashion of a melody tone to be produced from among 
a plurality of predetermined kinds of musical composition 
fashions for melody; 

a plurality of accompaniment musical composition fashion 
selection switches connected to a like plurality of second 
logic circuit means for designating a single one of a musi- 
cal composition fashion of an accompaniment tone to be 
produced from among a plurality of predetermined kinds 
of musical composition fashions for accompaniment; 



snin 



A" 



^^ ' 













1 9v 



m 



[immm 



ii »■ 



^ 



»!» ni 



01 'Itt 



said second logic circuit means being connected to said first 
logic circuit means such that the musical composition 
fashion of an accompaniment tone is selected in corre- 
spondence with the selected musical composition fashion 
of a melody tone when none of said plurality of accompa- 
niment musical composition fashion selection switches are 
operated, and such that the musical composition fashion of 
a melody tone is selected in correspondence with the 
selected musical composition fashion of an accompani- 
ment tone when none of said plurality of melody musical 
composition fashion selection switches are operated; 

a modifying parameter generator which generates a modify- 
ing parameter corresponding to an operated one of said 
musical composition fashion selection switches; 

modifying means for modifying outputs of said melody and 
accompaniment tone generators in accordance with said 
modifying parameter generated from said modifying pa- 
rameter generator; and 

means for producing a musical tone signal in accordance 
with said output of said modifying means. 



4,391,177 
PIANO SOUNDBOARD AND METHOD OF MAKING 

SAME 
Stanley A. Grajek, DeKalb, III.; Robert S. Hill, Holly Springs, 
Miss., and George S. Klaiber, Tonawanda, N.Y., assignors to 
The Wurlitzer Company, DeKalb, III. 
Division of Ser. No. 234,360, Feb. 13, 1981, Pat. No. 4,361,458. 
This application Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,293 
Int. O.J GIOC 3/06 
U.S. O. 84—196 8 Oaims 

1. A soundboard for a piano comprising: three plies of wood 
bonded together, the front and back plies being of substantially 
equal thickness and the center ply being of a thickness greater 
than the sum of the thicknesses of the front and back plies, the 
center ply comprising a plurality of elongate boards each 
having a preselected curvature from side-to-side and bonded 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



73 



together edge-to-edge with the curvature of each board in the 
same direction to form a composite board having a substan- 




4,391,179 
COMBAT VEHICLE 
Erling Tidstrom, Karlskoga, Sweden, assignor to Aktiebolaget 
Bofors, Bofors, Sweden 

Filed May 1, 1980, Ser. No. 145,635 
Oaims priority, application Sweden, May 14, 1979, 7904188 
Int. O.^ F41H 7/06 
U.S. O. 89—46 6 Oaims 



tially contmuous curvature, concave on one side and convex 
on the other side, whereby the assembled, three-ply sound- 
board has a curvature imparied thereto by the center ply. 



4,391,178 

' LOGISTIC VEHICLE ARMOR 
Victor H. Pagano, Oakland, Mich., assignor to^The United 
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the 
Army, Washington, D.C. 

Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,287 

Int. 0.3 F41H 7/00 

U.S. O. 89—36 H 1 Oaim 




1. In a military vehicle that includes a cargo box having side 
walls (14 and 16): the improvement comprising an inverted 
U-frame structure having a number of elevated bow roof sec- 
tions (28) and downwardly extending leg sections (22 and 24) 
connected to the box side walls; a central ridge pole (30) ex- 
tending between and normal to the bow roof sections on the 
longitudinal axis of the cargo box; two fabric covers (32 and 
34) extending horizontally in opposite directions from the 
central ride pole and thence downwardly along the aforemen- 
tioned leg sections at least to the upper edges of the cargo box 
side walls; means defining a number of horizontal hollow 
fabric sleeves on the downwardly extending portions of the 
fabric covers; each of the individual fabric sleeves being the 
same length in the horizontal direction as the associated cover; 
said fabric sleeves being open at their ends for enabling ballistic 
armor slats to be inserted into said sleeves; adjacent sleeves 
being overlapped on one another and being sufficient in num- 
ber so that the sleeves collectively occupy the entire down- 
wardly extending portion of each fabric cover; an elongated 
ballistic armor slat (44) insertable lengthwise into each fabric 
sleeve to provide ballistic protection for personnel occupying 
the cargo box; the fabric sleeves for each cover being formed 
from a single length of fabric material that is periodically 
doubled back on itself, each doubled back area being stitched 
to the fabric cover whereby the zones between adjacent 
stitched areas define the fabric sleeves; the individual armor 
slats having flat parallel faces and interconnecting longitudinal 
edges, opposite edges on individual slats being beveled so that 
edges on adjacent slats overlap one another when the slats 
occupy a given plane within the fabric sleeves; said armor slats 
being removable from the fabric sleeves, said covers being 
capable of being rolled up to a non-use storage position adja- 
cent to the ridge pole when the slats are removed from the 
sleeves. 




ROnTWC JNIT 



DRIVE ''"C—.-i 
UNIT 




..4^<**^ 



1. A track driven combat vehicle comprising: 

a track driven mechanism supporting a lower chassis for 
movement in a longitudinal direction, 

said lower chassis including at a rear poriion thereof a maga- 
zine for holding explosive ammunition units, 

a conveyor for receiving ammunition units from said maga- 
zine and delivering said ammunition units to a forward 
position along said chassis to a rotary table for rotating 
said ammunition units; 

a turret mechanism centrally located for rotation about said 
chassis including a front portion narrower in width than in 
length for presenting a minimum target area; 

said front poriion including a breech loading firearm, and a 
rear portion of said turret including a compartment for 
supporting a crew member, a turret magazine located 
above said rotary table; 

means for positioning a vertically oriented projectile in said 
turret magazine to a lateral position; 

a hoist car vertically supported for movement in a vertically 
extending frame from a position for receiving an ammuni- 
tion unit from said table, and a projectile in said lateral 
position, to a breech loading position of said firearm, 
whereby the vulnerability of a hit to said vehicle is mini- 
mized by maintaining the bulk of explosive ammunition 
units at the rear of said vehicle, and the probability of a hit 
to said turret is minimized by said front portion presenting 
a minimum target area. 



74 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4,391,180 

METHOD AND MEANS FOR CONTROLLING THE 

FIRING RATE FROM A MACHINE GUN 

Richard Koine, Ratingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to 

Rheinmetall GmbH, Duesseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 147,291, May 6, 1980, 

abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 864,237, Dec. 27, 

1977, abandoned. This application Jul. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 

168,331 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 24, 
1976, 2658770 

Int. a.^ F41D 11/00 
U.S. a. 89—129 R 5 Qaims 



11 ]? » B 21 






S M 

i ' 



control devices (11, 11') for selectively connecting the feed and 
return lines to respective first (15) and second (16) working 
chambers of associated props (10) of which a first working 
chamber (15) serves to extend and set the prop when con- 
nected to the pressure line; the improvement comprising set- 
ting valve means (18) with opposed first (24) and second (23) 
pressure-fluid of>erated control pistons, the setting valve means 
being settable with the first piston (24) into a first state where 
connection between the pressure line and said first working 
chamber (15) is blocked and settable with the second piston 
(23) into a second state where connection between the pressure 
line and said first working chamber is established indepen- 
dently of the operating position of the manually operated 
control devices (11, 11') the first control piston (24) of the 
setting valve means being connected to said first working 
chamber (15) and biased with spring force (35) into the first 
state; and control valve means (25) provided with a control 
piston (29) connected to said first working chamber (15) and 
biased with opposed spring force (31) to block the pressure line 



1. An improved arrangement for controlling the rate of 
firing of fire bursts in a machine gun having a breech block, an 
ammunition feed device and a recoil and counter-recoil device 
for elastically coupling the gun to gun mount by means of a 
differential recoil system so as to enable the gun to oscillate 
with preselected oscillation characteristics during firing said 
gun emitting energy impulses during firing of a shell which are 
operatively conducted by conduit means to produce ignition of 
the following shell fed into the gun by the ammunition feed 
device, the improvement comprising: 

receiving means and storing means operatively mounted in 
said recoil and counter-recoil device said storing means 
being adapted to store the recoil energy of the gun during 
recoil thereof, control means -operatively connected to 
said storing and receiving means, said control means hav- 
ing a timing element and being adapted to selectively 
release a predetermined amount of energy for the counter- 
recoil motion; 
adjusting means operatively connected to said control means 

for adjusting said timing element; 
a primary transmitter operatively associated with said 
breech block to emit a first signal at a preselected position 
of said breech block; 
a secondary transmitter operatively associated with said 
recoil and counter-recoil device for emitting a second 
signal at a preselected position of said recoil and counter- 
recoil device; and 
a relay in said conduit means adapted to conduct an energy 
pulse emitted from the gun during firing of a shell to 
initiate ignition of the following shell in the breech block 
when said first and second signals have placed said relay 
in a conductive state; 
said primary and secondary energy transmitters being opera- 
tively coupled to said conduit means. 




4,391,181 
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR MININjG 
APPARATUS V 

Walter Weirich, Dortmund; Michael Dettmers, Kamen; Kunib 
ert Becker, Werl, and Harry Rosenberg, Liidinghausen, all of 
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte 
Westfalia, Lunen, Fed. Rep. of Germany 
Continuation of Ser. No. 948,458, Oct. 4, 1978, abandoned. This 
application Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,507 
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 4, 
1977, 2749312 

Int. a.3 F15B 13/04 
U.S. a. 91—29 4 Qaims 

1. In a hydraulic control system for controlling the operation 
of pressure-fluid operated support props of mining apparatus; 
said system comprising a common pressure fluid feed line (P), 
a common pressure fluid return line (R) and manually operated 



(P) from the second piston (23) of the setting valve means (18) 
unless a predetermined threshold pressure level prevails in said 
first working chamber (15) and to connect said second piston 
(23) of the setting valve means (18) to the pressure line (P) 
when said predetermined threshold pressure is exceeded in said 
first working chamber (15); whereby the control valve means 
(25) causes the setting valve means (18) to change from its first 
state to its second state to connect the first working chamber 
(15) to the pressure line (8) after an associated control device 
(11, 11') has connected the pressure line (P) to said first work- 
ing chamber (15) and the threshold pressure level thereafter is 
exceeded so that connection between said first working cham- 
ber (15) and said pressure line (P) is maintained independent of 
he operating position of said associated control device, and 
ereby the setting valve means (18) thereafter reverts to its 
fir^t state under the action of the first control piston (24) 
thereof once the pressure in the first working chamber (15) 
-Reaches a level in excess of the threshold level and signifying 
that prop setting has occurred. 



4,391,182 
FLUID ACTUATED POSITIONER 
Jacob Kobelt, 6110 Oak St., Vancouver, Britisb Columbia, 
Canada (V6M 2W2) 

Filed Jul. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 173,279 
Int. a.3 F15B 9/10. 15/17 
U.S. a. 91—378 10 Qaims 

1. A fluid actuated positioner adapted to receive a working 
fluid of constant pressure and to produce a mechanical output 
signal proportional to a fluid input signal from a signal fluid of 
varying pressure, the positioner having: 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



75 



(a) an input cylinder having input partition means dividing 
the cylinder into first and second input chambers, an input 
rod mounting the partition means for movement axially of 
the cylinder, the first input chamber receiving the signal 
fluid under varying pressure which generates a varying 
input signal on the input rod, and resilient means cooperat- 
ing with the input rod to oppose the input signal on the 
input rod, the input rod being essentially unaffected by 
contact with the working fluid, 

(b) an output cylinder having an output member with an 
output partition means and an output rod, the output 
partition means dividing the output cylinder into first and 
second output chambers, the output partition means hav- 
ing first and second faces within the respective output 
chambers, the output rod mounting the output partition 
means for movement axially of the output cylinder, the 
first output chamber receiving the working fluid under a 
constant pressure which generates a first force on the 
output partition means, the output rod extending from the 
output partition means through the first output chamber 
so that the first face has a smaller efl^ective area than the 



/" , '^. \ 











second face, and a fixed metering means disposed between 
exhaust and the second output chamber to control flow of 
working fluid therefrom prior to exhausting the working 
fluid, 
(c) a main control valve communicating with the first and 
second output chambers and having first and second valve 
portions, the first valve portion being a connecting bore 
within the output member, the connecting bore communi- 
cating with the first output chamber, and the second valve 
portion being a portion of the input rod which cooperates 
with the connecting bore to control fluid flow there- 
through, so that relative positions of the output member 
and the input rod control metering of a continuous flow of 
working fluid passing between the first and second valve 
portions so as to control flow of working fluid from the 
first output chamber into the second output chamber prior 
to exhausting the working fluid from the positioner, 
so that the working fluid in the second output chamber gener- 
ates a second force on the second face in opposition to the first 
force to produce on the output rod a resultant displacement 
proportional to the input signal. 



4,391,183 
HYDRAULIC BLOCKING VALVE 
Stig Broms, Tiiby, and Lennart Freese, Jarfalla, both of Sweden, 
assignors to Innovation Aktiebolag, Sundbyberg, Sweden 

Filed Feb. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 121,619 
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Feb. 22, 1979, 7809012 
Int. Q.3 F15B 13/042: F16K 31/122 
U.S. Q. 91—461 4 Qaims 

1. In a hydraulic blocking or holding valve including a valve 
housing having a hollow interior with an inlet and an outlet 
and a valve body shiftable-to close a main valve seat for inter- 
rupting the communication between the inlet and outlet and 
alternately to open said main valve seat for permitting said 
communication, the valve body being arranged between two 
chambers in said housing interior, namely one inlet chamber in 
communication with the inlet and located between the valve 



body and the valve seat, and one operating chamber located on 
the opposite side of the valve body from the valve seat, a 
throttling or constricting passage via which the inlet chamber 
and the operating chamber are in communication with each 
other for counteracting flow of hydraulic liquid between the 
chambers, and control valve means in normally unconstricted 
communication with the operating chamber and actuable for 
lowering the pressure in the operating chamber in relation to 
the pressure in the inlet chamber to thereby create a pressure 
difference between the two chambers causing the valve body 
to shift to an open position opening said main valve seat, 
wherein the improvement comprises a constriction means 
responsive to said shifting of said valve body to its open f>osi- 
tion for constricting but not stopping the outflow of hydraulic 
liquid from the operating chamber to said valve means, said 
valve body being a ball received in a movable sleeve communi- 
cating with said inlet chamber, said housing including a fixed 
internal spigot protruding into the housing interior and sepa- 







.2 



1.38 



rated from said main valve seat by said ball, spring means 
backed with respect to said housing for urging said ball against 
said valve seat and away from said spigot, said sleeve being 
slidable over said spigot and defining with the spigot said 
operating chamber, a sliding gap between said sleeve and 
spigot forming said throttling passage between the inlet cham- 
ber and operating chamber, an orifice in said spigot providing 
said normally unconstricted communication of said operating 
chamber with said valve means, said orifice being located in 
said operating chamber to face said ball, said spring means 
being dimensioned for causing said ball, in response to said 
shifting of said ball and sleeve away from said main valve seat 
by said pressure difference, to assume an almost abutting rela- 
tion with said spigot at said orifice forming said constriction 
means therebetween, for simultaneously constricting outflow 
into the orifice and maintaining the constricted outflow of 
hydraulic liquid from the operating chamber through the ori- 
fice to the open valve means. 



4,391,184 
DIAPHRAGM ACTUATOR 
Ken Yamane, Yokohama, Japan, and Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., 
Yokohama, Japan 

Filed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,164 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 6, 1979, 54-137938; 
Oct. 16, 1979, 54-132445 

Int. Q.3 F16J 15/16 
U.S. Q. 92—100 2 Qaims 

1. A diaphragm actuator comprising a pressure chamber 
supplied with positive or negative pressure, a negative pressure 
chamber supplied with negative pressure, a diaphragm defin- 
ing said pressure chamber and said negative pressure chamber, 
an operating shaft extending through a wall portion of the 
negative pressure chamber and connected at one end with the 
diaphragm, said diaphragm causing the operating shaft to 
axially slide, relative to said wall portion, in response to the 
pressure difference between the positive or negative pressure 
in said pressure chamber, and the negative pressure in said 



76 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



negative pressure chamber, wherein said wall portion is pro- 
vided with a sealing arrangement which includes a sealing 
diaphragm mounted on said wall portion and having an axially 
movable inner peripheral portion surrounding the operating 
shaft, a movable annular member supported by the inner pe- 
ripheral portion of the sealing diaphragm, a stationary annular 
member secured to the wall portion in the negative pressure 




chamber and opposing to the movable annular member, and a 
resilient O-ring inserted between said annular members and 
slidably receiving the operating shaft, at least one of the oppo- 
site surfaces of said annular members being tapered such that 
the O-ring is compressed by said opposite surfaces axially and 
radially inwardly as the negative pressure in the negative 
pressure chamber exceeds a predetermined value. 



4,391,185 
SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING A JUICE EXTRACTION 

FAOLITY 

\ 

Robert C. Stanley, Lakeland, Fla., assignor to FMC Corpora- 
tion, Chicago, III. 
Division of Ser. No. 171,917, Jul. 24, 1980, Pat. No. 4,335,145. 

This application Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 356,671 

Int. a.5 A23N 7/00; B02C 25/00; B23Q 15/00; GOlN 33/14 

U.S. a. 99—489 2 Qaims 




1. A system for controlling the flow of fruit and fruit juice 
through a juice extraction facility, said juice extraction facility 
including a fruit storage location for storing the fruit in bulk, a 
sizer for separating the fruit into at least two size categories, 
said sizer being adjustable to vary the size limits of each cate- 
gory, a feeder for feeding the fruit from the fruit storage loca- 
tion to the sizer, said feeder powered by a motor, a plurality of 
juice extractors, each of said extractors powered by a motor 
and said extractors being arranged in two or more groups with 
each group of extractors adapted to extract juice from fruit in 
one of said size categories, means for conveying the fruit from 
the sizer to the extractors according to size, means for recy- 
cling unused fruit from each group of extractors to a location 
upstream of said group, and a juice storage location adapted to 
receive juice collected from all extractors, said system com- 
prising: 
a central processing unit adapted to receive signals from 
sensors located at various remote locations, process said 
signals, and transmit control signals to various remote 



final control devices, said control signals calculated ac- 
cording to predetermined algorithms; 

means associated with each group of extractors for counting 
the number of fruit recycled from that group and for 
transmitting a signal indicative of said number of fruit to 
the central processing unit; 

sensing means mounted at the juice storage location for 
measuring the amount of juice therein and for transmitting 
a signal indicative of said amount to the central processing 
unit; 

a sizer motor adapted to receive a control signal from the 
central processing unit and to vary the limits of each size 
category accordingly; 

a plurality of motor control centers, each of said centers 
associated with one extractor, adapted to start and stop 
the associated extractor motors in accordance with signals 
received from the central processing unit; and 

a motor speed control unit associated with the feeder motor 
and adapted to vary the feed rate of fruit to the extractors 
in accordance with a signal received from the central 
processing unit; 

said control signals to the sizer motor, to the motor control 
centers, and to the motor speed control unit calculated to 
maintain a preselected amount of juice at the juice storage 
facility, to equalize the number of fruit recycled from each 
group of extractors, and to minimize the total number of 
fruit recycled. 



4,391,186 

COTTON PRESS 

William R. Davis, P.O. Box 131, Charleston, Mo. 63834 

Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,629 

Int. a.3 B65B 13/18 

U.S. a. 100—7 18 Claims 




1. A cotton press adapted to receive a debanded bale for 
compressing the same to a configuration to receive bands 
therearound, the press being of the Webb type incorporating a 
frame having a pair of aligned spaced inverted U-shaped mem-- 
bers; a movable platen mounted for upward movement toward 
a stationary platen; and means for forcing the movable platen 
upwardly toward the stationary platen including a vertically 
mounted piston-cylinder arrangement and a linkage mecha- 
nism interconnecting the piston-cylinder arrangement and the 
movable platen, the linkage mechanism comprising first and 
second pairs of links on opposite ends of the U-shaped mem- 
bers, each of the links being generally aligned with one of the 
U-shaped members, the improvement comprising 
means providing cotton movement through the press in a 
path between the spaced inverted U-shaped members 
including means for feeding a debanded cotton bale be- 
tween the links of the first link pair toward a pressing 
location between the platens and for moving a banded 
cotton bale between the links of the second link pair away 
from the pressing location. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



77 



4 391 187 
BELT-TENSIONING SYSTEM FOR ROUND BALERS 
Richard W. Koning; Gerald F. Meiers, and Henry D. Anstey, all 
of Ottunwa, Iowa, assignors to Deere & Company, Moline, 
111* 
I 1 1 Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,223 

Int. a.i B30B 5/06; AOID 39/00 
U.S. a lOQ-88 10 Qaims 



"l at '^ 




1. A round baler having a main frame and including an 
endless belt and roll system providing first and second oppo- 
sitely moving belt stretches to at least partly define a bale 
chamber, said system further including means for holding the 
stretches apart to define a crop inlet, first and second rolls 
spaced above the inlet and closesly spaced apart to substan- 
tially close the upper part of the chamber and carrier means 
journalling the first and second rolls and mounted on the main 
frame for upward movement as the bale chamber grows and 
belt-tensioning mechanism characterized in that the belt-ten- 
sioning mechanism includes a third roll spaced above the first 
and second rolls and supporting a third belt stretch, means 
mounting the third roll on the main frame for movement 
toward and away from the carrier means, and means intercon- 
necting the carrier means and the third roll mounting means 
for causing the third roll to move upwardly as the carrier 
means moves upwardly. 



' 1 1 4,391,188 

PIN-OFF AND DOOR CLOSURE ASSEMBLY FOR A 
STATIONARY REFUSE COMPACTOR 
Kenneth W. Gwathney, Vernon; David L. Gann, Guin; Steven G. 
Seagraves, Sr., Millport, all of Ala.; Gary R. Fenner, Green- 
ville, and Gordon H. Fenner, Columbus, both of Miss., assign- 
ors to Mjarathon Equipment Company, Vernon, Ala. 
I Filed Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,021 
Int. a.3 B30B 15/06 
V.S. a. lOp— 229 A 20 Oaims 




bly including a refuse container having a load opening, and a 
packer unit having a reciprocating ram detachably engaged 
with said container for forcing refuse through the load opening 
into the refuse container, a pin-off assembly for positioning 
across the load opening of the refuse container, said pin-off 
assembly including 

(a) an elongated member adapted to be positioned across the 
load opening, the ends of said elongated member being 
provided with pin-receiving recesses 

(b) said refuse container being provided with opposed open- 
ings adjacent the load opening 

(c) pin support means carried by said container and aligned- 
with the opposed openings adjacent the load opening 

(d) retaining pins positioned in said pin support means and 
inserted through the opposed openings of the refuse con- 
tainer into the pin-receiving recesses in said elongated 
member 

(e) said retaining pins being removable to withdraw said 
elongated member from the load opening, and 

(0 stop means for limiting the extent of entry of each of said 
retaining pins into the pin-receiving recesses of said elon- 
gated member. 



4,391,189 
CODE DATER FOR TRAY FORMING APPARATUS 
David Anenson, River Falls, Wis., assignor to Champion Inter- 
national Corporation, Stamford, Conn. 
Continuation of Ser. No. 85,788, Oct. 17, 1979, abandoned. This 
application Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,150 
Int. a.3 B41F 17/22 
U.S. a. 101-36 2 Qaims 




8. In combination with a stationary refuse compactor assem- 



.-J 



1. A code dater for coding tray blanks being formed into 
trays in a tray forming machine comprising; 

(a) means attached to said machine for maintaining each of 
said tray blanks in a semi-rigid condition as said blanks 
move through said machine, said means including a drive 
wheel mounted on a driven shaft, said drive wheel being 
rotated in one direction only, said drive wheel being dis- 
posed in contact with one side of said blanks thereby 
aiding in drawing said blanks through said tray forming 
machine, said means further including a freely rotatable 
idler wheel disposed on the opposite side of said tray 
blanks and aligned with said drive wheel, said means 
further including a pair of side plates for supporting the 
opposed ends of said tray blanks as they pass through said 
machine, said drive and idler wheels cooperating with said 
plates to deform said tray blank into a bow-like configura- 
tion to maintain said tray blanks in a semi-rigid condition, 
said drive and idler wheels being in contact with said 
blanks at approximately the apex of said bow-like configu- 
ration; and 

(b) means for printing coded information on said blanks as 
they are maintained in said semi-rigid condition, said 
means including a circular code dater wheel having a 
printing font located on the periphery thereof, said wheel 
being eccentrically mounted at a point spaced from its 
center on said driven shaft, such that the portion of the 
periphery of said code dater wheel having said printing 
font thereon comes into contact with one side of said 
blanks one time for each revolution of said driven shaft, 
and with said code dater wheel being mounted in close 



78 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



proximity to and adjacent, said drive wheel, whereby said 
printing font thereon contacts with tray blanks at a point 
on said blanks which is maintained in said semi-rigid con- 
dition by said drive and idler wheels, in close proximity to 
and adjacent the apex of said bow-like configuration, and 
said machine being devoid of any support means for said 
coder dater wheel on said opposite side of said tray blanks 
whereby the semi-rigid condition and bow-like configura- 
tion of said blanks comprising the sole support surface for 
said code dater wheel. 



4,391,191 
REOPROCAL SUPPORTING ARRANGEMENT FOR 
CONTACTING CYLINDERS OF A PRINTING UNIT 
Hans-Bernhard Bolza-Schunemann, Wurzburg, Fed. Rep. of 
Germany, assignor to Koenig & Bauer AG, Wurzburg, Fed. 
Rep. of Germany 
Continuation of Ser. No. 94,540, Nov. 15, 1979, abandoned. This 
application Aug, 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,651 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 30, 
1979, 2926570 

Int. a.3 B41F lS/20 
U.S. a. 101—216 4 Qaims 



4,391,190 
PRE-SETTING OF PRINTING MACHINES 
Hans-Georg Metzler, Hochstadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as- 
signor to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of 

Germany 

Filed Jul. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,368 
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 26, 
1979 2930438 

Int. a.3 B41M 1/14: B41F 5/16; B65H 23/04 
VS. a. 101—211 13 Qaims 



T\imr\£ 




52 5 

/niN 




8. In a printing machine including a plurality of printing 
stations each having at least one printing cylinder which can be 
activated for printing independently of printing cylinders of 
other stations, means for determining the angular offset of the 
printing cylinders of an upstream and a downstream printing 
station comprising means disposed at a predetermined location 
on each of the Cylinders of the upstream and downstream 
printing stations for printing a reference mark on web or sheet 
material moved past the cylinders, optical scanning means 
disposed downstream of the printing cylinder of the down- 
stream station for detecting reference marks printed by the two 
cylinders and providing respective output signals in response 
thereto, first transducer means having an output signal propor- 
tional to the length of material moved past the Hrst transducer 
means, second transducer means having an output signal pro- 
portional to the angular rotation of a respective cylinder, first 
means coupled to receive the output signals of the scanning 
means and the second transducer means and in response 
thereto determining the relative angular position of the prede- 
termined location of the downstream printing cylinder when a 
reference mark printed by the downstream printing dylinder is 
detected and for providing an output signal each time the 
predetermined location of the upstream printing cylinder ro- 
tates past an angular position corresponding to the relative 
angular position of the predetermined location of the down- 
stream printing cylinder when the reference mark printed by 
the downstream printing cylinder was detected and second 
means coupled to receive the output signals of the first trans- 
ducer means, the scanning means and the first means and pro- 
viding a signal proportional to the distance travelled by the 
material between an output signal of the first means when the 
printing cylinder of the downstream printing station is not 
printing and when the printing cyhnder of the upstream print- 
ing station is printing and the next reference mark printed by 
the printing cylinder of the upstream printing station detected 
by the optical scanning means. 



1. An arrangement for the precise support and rotation of 
first and second cylinders which contact each other in a print- 
ing unit of a rotary printing press, the cylinders being carried 
on shafts which rotate in journals that are carried in spaced 
side frames, the cylinders being positioned between the spaced 
side frames, said support arrangement comprising: 

spaced pairs of non-rotating support rings carried by the 
shafts of the first and second cylinders, said support rings 
on the first cylinder shaft contacting said support rings on 
the second cylinder shaft to produce an initial stress force 
between said pairs of support rings to maintain the cylin- 
ders spaced an exact distance from each other and to 
maintain journal deflections constant, said support rings 
being positioned adjacent planar ends of the cylinders 
interiorly of the side frames, and being constrained from 
rotation with the shafts; 
at least a first pair of contacting rotatable cylinder rings, one 
of said rotatable cylinder rings being secured to the shaft 
of the first cylinder for rotation therewith, and another of 
said rotatable cylinder rings being secured to the shaft of 
the second cylinder for rotation therewith, said rotatable 
cylinder rings being sized to provide a selected peripheral 
contact force between said cylinder rings to ensure a 
precise rolling drive for the cylinders and to dampen 
vibrations, said cylinder rings contacting each other exte- 
riorly of the side frames; and, 
drive means to rotate the first and second cylinders. 



4 391 192 
BEARING ARRANGEMENT FOR AN INK FOUNTAIN IN 

A ROTARY PRINTING MACHINE 
Erich G. Wieland, Wurzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to 
Koenig & Bauer AG, Wurzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300,850 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 10, 
1980, 3033998 

Int. a.3 B41F 31/06; B41L 27/08 
U.S. a. 101—350 8 Qaims 

1. A bearing arrangement for a pivotable ink fountain in a 
rotary printing machine having a driven ink fountain roller 
plunging into said ink fountain, wherein a supporting ring is 
supported on either side of said fountain roller on a roller 
journal, each of said supporting rings carrying a securement 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



79 



means which wraps on a periphery of said supporting ring, a 
first end of said securement means being secured to said ink 
fountain, a second end of said securement means being con- 




4 391 193 

PLATE HOLDING DEVICE FOR OFFSET DUPLICATOR 
Koji Ishii; Takahiko Shinmoto, both of Fuchu, and Kenso Ma- 
ehara, Hiroshima, all of Japan, assignors to Ryobi Ltd., Hiro- 
shima, Japan 

Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,450 

Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 17, 1980, 55-52663 

Int. Q.' B41F 27/00 

U.S. Q. 101-415.1 9 Qaims 




H 



1. A printing plate holding device for an offset duplicator, 
said holding device being positioned in a grooved portion of a 
plate cylinder and confronting a tail clamp device, said holding 
device comprising: a base positioned along one side of said 
grooved portion and slidably secured thereto in a horizontal 
plane; a clamp plate pivotally secured to said base and pro- 
vided with a first pin; a clamp lever fixed to said clamp plate 
and provided with a second pin; a latch loosely secured to said 
second pin of said clamp lever and connected to a spring so as 
to provide a plate clamping force to said clamp plate, said latch 
being engageable with a bracket of said base so as to maintain 
said clamp plate at an open position; a guide plate and a plate 
release preventing plate both fixed to an outer longitudinal side 
of said base; axial displacement control means positioned at one 
longitudinal end of said cylinder; circumferential displacement 
control means positioned at the other longitudinal end of said 
cylinder; said axial displacement control means comprising a 
first knob rotatably extending through a slot formed in a first 
bracket fixed to said base, said first knob being threadingly 
engaged with said plate cylinder; and said circumferential 
displacement control means comprising a second knob rotat- 
ably extending through a slot formed in a second bracket fixed 
to said cylinder, said second knob being threadingly engaged 
with a third bracket fixed to said base. 



4 391 194 
METHOD FOR ADDRESSING CARDS AND ENVELOPES 
Ronald A. Rogers, Appie Valley; Ansel J. Wright, Minneapolis, 

and William H. Wright, Hopkins, all of Minn., assignors to 

Master Addresser Company, Minneapolis, Minn. 

Continuation of Ser. No. 97,377, Nov. 21, 1979, abandoned, 
which is a division of Ser. No. 854,611, Nov. 25, 1977, Pat. No. 

4,186,659. This application Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,181 

Int. CI.' B41M 5/00 

U.S.Q. 101-471 18 Qaims 



nected to la tensioning device which is secured to said ink 
fountain so that said ink fountain is capable of being pivoted off 
said ink fountain roller. 




1. A method of reproducing material imprinted on a master 
element having indicia of heat conducting material thereon, 
comprising: 

(a) feeding the master element through a printing zone in 
which a heating element is disposed; 

(b) feeding a print receiving member through the printing 
zone outwardly of the master element relative to the 
heating element and in the same direction as the master 
element; 

(c) supporting a length of flexible sheet material provided 
with a heat transferable printing medium under predeter- 
mined tension between the master element and the print 
receiving member; ; 

(d) intermittently advancing a predetermined length of the 
flexible sheet material through the printing zone against its 
supporting tension in the same direction as the master 
element; 

(e) and pressing the master element, flexible sheet material 
and printing receiving member together during movement 
thereof through the printing zone. 



4 391 195 

DETONATION OF EXPLOSIVE CHARGES AND 

EQUIPMENT THEREFOR 

Peter C. Shann, 4, Orchard Way, Dringhouses, York, England 

Filed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No, 179,153 

Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 21, 1979, 

7929128; Aug. 21, 1979, 7929129; Oct. 20, 1979, 7936504 

Int. Q.J F42B 3/10 
U.S. Q. 102—201 36 Qaims 

1. A system for connecting a set of explosive charges with a 
laser for detonation by optical energy from the laser which 
comprises an input for optical energy produced by the laser, a 
set of optical fibres for connection one with each of the charges 
and distributor means for distributing optical energy from the 
input to the fibres of said set, said fibres having longitudinal 
axes and said distributor means being operable to receive en- 
ergy from the laser and to direct a part of the received energy 
into the fibres and to direct the remainder of the received 



80 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



energy to waste, at least a substantial proportion of the part 
directed into the fibres being directed non-axially so that the 




4,391,197 

SMOKE CARTRIDGE 

Kjell O. Jacobsen, Raufoss, and Gudmund Engen, Jonsvatnet, 

both of Norway, assignors to A/S Raufoss Ammunisjonsfab- 

rikker, Raufoss, Norway 

Continuation of Ser. No. 16,379, Mar. 1, 1979, abandoned. This 

application Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,954 

Claims priority, application Norway, Mar. 8, 1978, 780819 

Int. a.3 F42B 13/44 

U.S. a. 102—334 3 Claims 



COK^SOL ONIT 



»(\0%iy/t CMKIQE.S ■ 



propagation of said at least a substantial proportion through 
the fibres is by zigzag paths. 



4,391,196 
ADD-ON IGNITER FOR PYROGEN TYPE IGNITER 

Robert E. Betts, Huntsville, Ala., assignor to The United States 
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army, 
Washington, D.C. 

I Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,906 

' Int. a.3 F02K 9/95 

U.S. a. 102—202 2 Qaims 




1. In a solid propellant rocket motor having a solid propel- 
lant perforated grain contained in a case, an exhaust nozzle at 
the aft end of said case and a pyrogen igniter at the forward 
end of said case, said pyrogen igniter including: 

(i) an exhaust nozzle for exhausting hot gases; 

(ii) an add-on pyrotechnic package secured to said pyrogen 
exhaust nozzle, said add-on pyrotechnic package compris- 
ing a suitable container for containing pyrotechnic pellets; 
and, 

(iii) pyrotechnic pellets contained in said container which 
are ignitable by hot pyrogen exhaust gases when said hot 
pyrogen exhaust gases impinge upon said pellets and pro- 
duces rapid burning of said pellets that are subsequently 
discharged in the form of hot gases and hot particles along 
with said hot pyrogen exhaust gases to perform the func- 
tions of rapidly sweeping away any undesirable solid 
propellant perforated grain constituents that have mi- 
grated to the surface of said solid propellant perforated 
grain or reaction products that have formed on said sur- 
face from chemical reactions, rapidly igniting said solid 
propellant, perforated grain, and maintaining a high pres- 
sure rate rise in said solid propellant rocket motor which 
achieves improved ignition and performance of said pro- 
pellant rocket motor. 




1. A smoke cartridge for producing instantaneous smoke, 
comprising: 

a casing, 

a first compartment within said casing comprising a stack of 
annular disc shaped smoke elements piled one on top of 
the other, and a hole passing longitudinally through each 
smoke element such that the holes through all of the 
smoke elements form a central passageway passing longi- 
tudinally of the casing through the entire first compart- 
ment, the forward end of the casing having a releasable 
cover, 

at least some of the smoke producing material of every 
smoke element being directly exposed to the central pas- 
sageway, the smoke elements being free of connection to 
each other, such that immediately upon leaving the casing, 
each smoke element is separate from the other smoke 
elements, 

a second compartment separated axially from the first com- 
partment and axially adjacent the rearward end of the first 
compartment and containing a discharge composition and 
a means for igniting the discharge composition, said dis- 
charge composition comprising substantially the complete 
ignition composition for igniting all the disc shaped smoke 
elements, such that upon ignition of the discharge com- 
positon a jet of flames passes into one end of and then 
through the passageway to ignite all of the smoke ele- 
ments directly exposed thereto as this same discharge 
composition expels all of the smoke elements out of the 
casing, whereupon, immediately upon discharge, each 
smoke element is free to scatter independently of the other 
smoke elements, 

a third compartment adjacent the second compartment on 
the side thereof opposite the first compartment, a second 
discharge composition in said third compartment for pro- 
pelling the casing itself, and including a delay means be- 
tween the second and third compartment such that igni- 
tion of the second discharge composition is delayed until 
after the smoke elements have been discharged from the 
first compartment. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



4 391 198 

BIDIRECnONAL DISPERSIBLE SHAPED-CHARGE 

MINE 
Gaude Auge, Bourges, France, assignor to Etat Francais, Paris, 
France 

Filed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,496 
Qaims priority, application France, Feb. 11, 1980, 80 02907 
Int. a.3 F42B 23/24 
U.S. a. 102-401 I 7 Qaims 




1. A shaped charge mine with action directed along one of 
the two opposite directions of the axis of revolution perpendic- 
ular to the central plane of the mine which is of generally 
flattened shape, including a substantially cylindrical housing 
containing the charge to the ends of which housing there are 
fastened two metal coverings, an igniter provided with a cock- 
ing rod extracted by a spring, said mine being characterized by 
the fact that it comprises a damping means surrounding the 
housing and imparting to the mine a ratio of height h to outside 
diameter d which is less than 0.5 in order to assure laying along 
.one or the other of the preferred directions, wherein the damp- 
ing means consists of a layer of damping material surrounding 
the housing, on which layer flexible tongues are fastened on 
opposite sides of the central plane and at a given distance from 
it, said flexible tongues having free ends which extend away 
from the axis of revolution and which are substantially ori- 
ented in the median plane of the mine. 



4,391,199 
SAFE AMMUNITION FOR EXHIBITION AND TARGET 

SHOOTING 

Lionel Morin, 20, avenue Gambetta, 19200 Ussel, France 
1 1 Filed Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,261 
I ! Int. a.3 F42B J/22, 9/20 

U.S. CI. 102-444 17 Qaims 



' ^n^^ 



81 



closed, generally conical nose, said closed generally coni- 
cal nose having an enlarged, constant diameter and gener- 
ally cylindrical portion, a median small collar and a tail 
provided with an enlarged portion having a uniform diam- 
eter which is substantially the same as the enlarged nose 
portion, said charge carrier being generally hollow and 
having a narrow, circular groove positioned adjacent to 
said small collar, said groove comprising a fracture line; 

(b) a hollow plastic projectile coupled with said charge 
carrier, said projectile including an interior opening 
adapted to receive either the tail or the nose of said charge 
carrier, said charge carrier and projectile including means 
for assembling them into a single unit having two different 
positions, a safety position in which said projectile open- 
ing receives said charge carrier tail, and a firing position in 
which said projectile opening receives said charge carrier 
nose; and 

(c) a holder coupled to said charge carrier and said projec- 
tile. 



4,391,200 

MEDIUM DISTANCE TRANSPORT DEVICE 

Roger Bajuiaz, Chemin William Barbey 22, 1292 Chambesy, 

Geneva, Switzerland 
per No. PCr/CH80/00049, § 371 Date Dec. 16, 1980, § 102(e) 
Date Dec. 16, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02403, PCT Pub. 
Date Nov. 13, 1980 

PCT Filed Apr. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 220,069 
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, May 4, 1979, 
4200/79 

Int. Q.3 B61K 1/00 
U.S. Q. 104-20 9 Qaims 




1. Safety ammunition adapted for shooting at a reduced level 
in order to minimize noise, range and physical danger, said 
ammunition adapted to be used with various weapons, includ- 
ing both muzzle loading and breech loading weapons, said 
ammunition comprising: 

(a) a plastic charge carrier, said charge carrier comprising a 
small, tubular container having an interior opening and a 



1. Transport device for persons, comprising at least one 
passenger loading and unloading platform, track means extend- 
ing along said platform an^ extending a distance away from 
said platform, a plurality of passenger cabins movable on said 
track means into and out of adjacency with said platform, each 
cabin having a fixed floor and an upright wall extending up- 
wardly from said fixed floor, each cabin having a vertically 
movable floor that extends laterally outwardly from said fixed 
floor, means mounting sa,id movable floor for vertical move- 
ment relative to said fixed floor, means to raise said vertically 
movable floor when the cabin is adjacent said platform to bring 
said movable floor adjacent a level position with the platform, 
means thereafter to lower said movable floor relative to said 
fixed floor to permit said movable floor to pass beneath said 
platform, and a door to close the cabin. 



82 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4^91,201 
AQUATIC TOBOGGAN SLIDE 
Kenneth I. Bailey, R.R. #2, Whitby, Ontario, Canada 

Continuation of Ser. No. 174,757, Aug. 4, 1980, abandoned, 

which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 25,795, Apr. 2, 1979, 

abandoned. This application Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,703 

Int. a.J B62B 13/06: A63G 21/18 

U.S. a. 104—70 10 Qaims 




1. In an aquatic toboggan slide comprising the combination 
of a steeply downwardly inclined chute, a plurality of tobog- 
gans dischargable down the chute, and a body of water adja- 
cent the lower end of the chute, the improvement wherein: 
the chute is in the shape of a trough with continuous side 
walls and a load bearing bottom surface free of dangerous 
projections and formed by a plurality of parallel horizon- 
tal rollers extending laterally between the side walls, said 
chute providing a vertical drop of at least about 20 feet 
and the side walls extending higher than side walls of a 
toboggan so that a toboggan and rider discharged down 
the chute will be confined between the chute side walls, 
the lower portion of the chute being curved so that its 
discharge end is level and about 12 to about 20 inches 
above the surface of the body of water, and the curvature 
of the lower end of the chute being at least about 16 feet 
in radius, with the rollers being closely spaced at least in 
the curved lower portion of the chute; 
the body of water extends a distance in feet beyond the bottom 
of the chute which is at least about three times the velocity 
in feet per second at which a toboggan will leave the chute; 
and 
each toboggan is moulded from synthetic plastics material, has 
a continuous bottom wall defining the longitudinally ribbed 
under surfaces inclined upwardly at its front end to a prow, 
raised side walls, a resilient backless seat member at the rear 
of the toboggan extending between the side walls and main- 
tained spaced from the bottom wall by a filling of foamed 
plastic material, a leg space extending forwardly of the seat 
to, and including a foot rest near the prow of the toboggan, 
and individual hand grips extending from the toboggan 
structure and located inwardly of the side walls to either side 
of the leg space, and between the seat and the foot rest 
whereby to constrain a rider to assume a position with the 
rider's hands within the walls and the rider's legs between 
the rider's arms. 



paperboard and each of said runners including a plurality 
of spaced, parallel corrugation sections; 
each of said corrugation sections including a fiat section A 
attached to said deck, two leg sections B each connected 
to opposite ends of said flat section, and radius of curva- 
ture sections C each having a transverse axis; and 




said paperboard runners having a main grain direction in 
which a majority of the paperboard fibers extend in said 
longitudinal direction and perpendicular to said transverse 
axes to provide substantially improved structural rigidity 
to said runners. 



4,391,203 

SECURITY APPARATUS 

Frederick W. Millar, 3 Fenton Crescent, Frankston 3199, 

Victoria, Australia 
PCT No. PCr/AU80/00025, § 371 Date Feb. 26, 1981, § 102(e) 
Date Feb. 26, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00043, PCT Pub. 
Date Jan. 22, 1981 

PCT Filed Jun. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 243,910 
Qaims priority, application Australia, Jun. 2, 1979, PD9421 
Int. a.^ E05G 1/12; G08B 13/20 
U.S. CI. 109—25 12 Claims 




4,391,202 
PAPERBOARD LOAD-SUPPORTING PALLET 
Leewood C. Carter, 18 Upper Warren Way, Warren, N.J. 07060, 
and Robin P. Neary, 53 Castle Way, Basking Ridge, N.J. 
07920 

Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 231,930 

Int. a.3 B65D 19/34 

U.S. a. 108—51.3 28 Qaims 

1. A paperboard load-supporting pallet, comprising: 

a flat deck formed of a plurality of layers of paperboard; 

a plurality of runners extending in a longitudinal direction 

and attached to the bottom surface of said deck; 
each of said runners being formed of a plurality of layers of 



1. A transportable security container comprising: a hollow 
receptacle for receiving valuables; an enclosure surrounding 
the hollow receptacle such as to form between the enclosure 
and the receptacle a chamber enveloping the receptacle; a 
chute extending from an opening in the enclosure and through 
the chamber and into the interior of the receptacle through 
which to deposit valuables into the receptacle; a flexible dia- 
phragm incorporated in the wall of the receptacle and movable 
in response to changes of pressure within the chamber; a pack 
of dye disposed within the receptacle; and means to cause 
discharge of the dye in response to movement of the dia- 
phragm on change of pressure within the chamber. 

4,391,204 
SECURITY CABINETS FOR HOTEL ROOMS 
Ernst K, Mitchell, Mt. Qemens, and Richard H. Terry, Bloom- 
field Hills, both of Mich., assignors to Safekeepcr Systems, 
Inc., Troy, Mich. 

Filed Sep. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 185,653 

Int. a.3 E05G 3/00, 1/04 

U.S. a. 109—39 ♦ Claims 

1. A security cabinet including a door frame and a door 

hingedly mounted thereon, 

said door having front and rear panels in spaced relation, 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



83 



a latch keeper in said door frame, 

a tamper detector alarm mounted inside said door, 

a latch mechanism mounted in the door and having a mov- 
able latch plate and a bolt movable therewith adapted to 
engage said latch keeper when the door is closed and the 
latch plate is moved from a retracted position to an ex- 
tended position, 

a key-lock mounted in said latch mechanism and having a 
cylinder adapted to receive a user's key through the front 
panel of said door, 

said key-lock including a cam coacting with said latch bolt 
and adapted to moveMt between said retracted and ex- 
tended positions, 



r 


\t^^"^ 


7 


' \. 








) --g 


\ 


dw-^-^-=^ 



^/e 



1^. 



Ml 



10} 



a coin detector mounted in the door and including a detain- 
ing lever adapted to engage said latch plate for blocking 
movement thereof to the extended position unless a valid 
coin is deposited in said coin detector, whereby said latch 
plate may be actuated to the fully extended position by 
rotation of the user's key only when a valid coin is depos- 
ited, 

a coin box mounted in the door and adapted to receive coins 
from said coin detector, 

said rear panel of said door being movably mounted on said 
front panel for movement between closed and open posi- 
tions whereby said rear panel may be opened for servicing 
of said latch mechanism, coin box and coin detector, 

a lock means for said rear panel. 



4,391,205 

METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BURNING GREEN 

WOOD CHIPS 

Noryal K. Morey, Box 97, Winn, Mich. 48896 

1 1 Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 231,947 
1 1 Int. a.3 F23G 5/04 

U.S. a. 110-224 5 Qaims 




1. Apparatus for burning wood chips comprising a wood 
chips combusting furnace with an exhaust conduit communi- 
cating therewith and leading out of said furnace, a top vented 
vertically extending silo, separate from said furnace to prevent 



combustion of its contents but adjacent thereto, filled with a 
stack of porous cellular wood chips to provide a silo-encased 
continuous vertical chip column of substantial height, feed 
means for feeding wood chips from the lower end of said stack 
to said furnace, supply means for supplying moisture laden 
wood chips to the upper end of said silo to replenish chips 
withdrawn from said silo by said feed means, and manifold 
means on said silo to which said exhaust conduit leads commu- 
nicating with the exhaust conduit of said furnace for peripher- 
ally discharging combustion gases from said furnace into the 
periphery of the stack of chips in said silo at a location below 
the top of said stack of chips contained therein to dry the chips 
in the upper portion of said stack as said gases pass upwardly 
therethrough to be vented from the top of said silo and to filter 
contaminants from said gases, said manifold means comprising 
a manifold band substantially surrounding said silo above the 
said feed means and substantially below and remote from the 
said wood chips supply means, there being perforations in the 
wall of said silo at said band placing the interior of said silo in 
communication with said manifold whereby combustion gases 
pass from said manifold into said stack perimetrally through 
said perforations. 



4,391,206 

TUBULAR ROTARY FURNACE FOR INCINERATING 

REFUSE AND THE LIKE, WITH INNER 

DEMOUNTABLE GRID 

Silvano Matteini, Via Bellosgu^do 4A, Florence, Italy 

Continuation of Ser. No. 3,906, Jan. 16, 1979, abandoned. This 

application Oct. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 202,897 

Claims priority, application Italy, Jan. 18, 1978, 11535/78[U] 

Int. Q.' F23G 5/06 

U.S. Q. 110-246 5 Qaims 




1. A rotary cylindrical furnace for incinerating refuse and 
the like comprising: , 

an outer wall; ' 

grid means mounted about the inner periphery of said outer 
wall; 

with respect to the direction of rotation of said furnace, the 
forward edge of said grid means being spaced a greater 
distance apart from said outer wall than the rearward edge 
of said grid means so that said grid means are inclined with 
respect to said wall; and 

said grid means not extending into the central area of said 

. furnace. 



84 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4,391,207 
METHOD OF CONDITIONING EXHAUST GASES FROM 

COAL nRING 
Helge H, Petersen, Copenhagen, Denmark, assignor to F. L. 

Smidth & Co., Cresskill, N.J. 
Continuation of Ser. No. 60,598, Jul. 25, 1979, abandoned. This 
application Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,795 
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 25, 1979, 
31061/78 

Int. CI.3 F23B 7/00 
U.S. a. 110—342 10 Qaims 

1. A method of conditioning exhaust gases, containing sub- 
stantial amounts of dust and lesser amounts of fly ash, from 
burnmg processes in a kiln plant, with an electrostatic precipi- 
tator, for the treatment of mineral materials which produce the 
substantial amounts of dust during treatment comprising: 

(a) taking a solid fuel; 

(b) adding to said fuel at least one alkali-metal compound; 

(c) grinding said solid fuel and alkali-metal compound such 
that at least a portion of the fuel assumes a solid pulverized 
condition; 

(d) feeding into a rotary kiln mineral materials which, upon 
burning, produce substantial amounts of dust; 

(e) introducing said fuel into the rotary kiln in its ground 
condition; 

(0 firing the treated, solid ground fuel in the kiln to bum the 
mineral materials thereby producing a mineral product 
and exhaust gases containing the substantial amounts of 
dust and lesser amounts of fly ash which now contain 
alkali-metal to reduce resistance; 

(g) separating the exhaust gases and the alkali-metal and dust 
and fly ash by precipitation in the electrostatic precipita- 
tor; and 

(h) recovering the conditioned exhaust gases. 



high enough to maintain the temperature of the afterburner 
within preselected limits to remove malodorous exhaust gases, 
and (11) controlling the temperatures of the combustion 
hearths by supplying air to the individual hearths in amounts 
sufficient to control the temperatures of said individual hearths 
at temperatures at or below preselected maximum tempera- 
tures, which temperatures are below that which would cause 
thermal stress in the furnace parts. 

18. In a method of incinerating combustible waste in a multi- 
ple hearth furnace containing a series of superimposed hearths 
which comprises feeding the combustible waste at the upper 
end of the furnace and passing the waste downward through a 
series of combustion hearths, supplying air to the combustion 
hearths to combust the waste material and discharging the 
inert solid products of combustion at the lower end of the 
furnace, while the gaseous products of combustion flow up- 
ward countercurrent to the flow of waste material through the 



SJ-UDGE 



4,391,208 

METHOD FOR CONTROLLING TEMPERATURES IN 

THE AFTERBURNER AND COMBUSTION HEARTHS OF 

A MULTIPLE HEARTH FURNACE 
Frederick M. Lewis, Mountain View, Calif., assignor to Sterling 
Drug, Inc., New York, N.Y. 

Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 192,021 
Int. a.J F23G 5/04 
U.S. a. 110—346 23 Claims 

1. In a method of incinerating combustible waste in a multi- 
ple hearth furnace containing a series of superimposed hearths 
which comprises feeding the combustible waste at the upper 
end of the furnace and passing the waste downward through a 
series of combustion hearths, supplying air to the combustion 
hearths to combust the waste material, and discharging the 
inert solid products of combustion at the lower end of the 
furnace, while the gaseous products of combustion flow up- 
ward countercurrent to the flow of waste material through the 
hearths and into an afterburner to remove the malodorous 
gases and/or pollutants, said afterburner being located after 
the uppermost waste handling hearth, the improvement 
wherein the temperatures of the afterburner and individual 
combustion hearths of the multiple hearth furnace are simulta- 
neously controlled by: 

(A) splitting the waste feed between (1) the uppermost waste 
handling hearth and (2) the hearth directly below the 
uppermost waste handling hearth in such proportions as to 
control the temperature of the afterburner to a tempera- 
ture within preselected limits; and 

(B) controlling the supply of combustion air to the individual 
combustion hearths in sufficient quantities so as to o|jerate 
the combustion hearths at a temperature at or below a 
preselected maximum temperature; 

wherein said steps (A) and (B) are synchronized in response to 
the temperature of the afterburner and also in response to the 
temperatures in the individual combustion hearths by (1) con- 
trolling the temperature of the uppermost waste handling 
hearth below temperatures which would result in thermal 
stress of the furnace parts beyond safe operating limits and yet 




/ / // /i> / // 7 / //^ /^ 




hearths and into an afterburner to remove the malodorous 
gases and/or pollutants, said afterburner being located after 
the uppermost waste handling hearth, the improvement com- 
prising directing high velocity jets of small amounts of air into 
the respective individual combustion hearths at constant air 
flow rates in amounts sufficient to promote a cyclonic gas flow 
and create turbulence to ensure uniform mixing of the air and 
combustion gases so that the temperature in an individual 
hearth accurately represents the combustion conditions therein 
and directing large cross-section low velocity streams of air 
from main air combustion jets into the respective individual 
combustion hearths for supplying the bulk of the combustion 
air to control the combustion in the hearths, said air flow rates 
from the main combustion jets being varied in accordance with 
the amount of air needed to control the temperatures of the 
individual hearths in response to the respective temperature of 
the individual hearths. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



85 



4,391,209 

EXOTHERMIC CUTTING ELECTRODE 
Paul E. Moore, Lancaster, Ohio, assignor to Arcair Company, 
Lancaster, Ohio 

Filed Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,118 

Int. C1.3 F23B 7/00 

U.S. a. 110—349 16 Claims 




distance said transport means moves said tag from said 
tag supply; and 
gauge means coupled to said distance controlling means 
and adjustable to accommodate the width of said tag, 
adjustment of said gauge means causing proportional 
adjustment of said distance controlling means such that 
the distance said transport means moves said tag is 
precisely that required to bring the same to said tag 
attaching station. 



1. An exothermic cutting electrode for use on land or under- 
water of the type comprising a metal tube within which are 
disposed a plurality of elongated metallic rods or wires the 
electrode adapted to be held by a torch for conducting electri- 
cal current to said electrode and a gaseous oxidant through 
said electrode for ignition and continuation of combustion of 
the free end of said electrode producing a high temperature 
flame whereby said electrode and said flame can be brought 
into contact with a workpiece for performing a cutting opera- 
tion thereon the improvement comprising: 
an inner tube of a metal of the same general type as said outer 
tube, said inner tube disposed within and spaced apart 
from said outer tube thus defining an annulus between said 
tubes; 
a mass of metal disposed in said annulus said metal being of 
the same general type of metal as said inner and outer 
tubes said electrode constructed to cause flow of gaseous 
oxidant through said inner tube to produce a jet of oxygen 
and flame at the free end of said electrode. 



4,391,210 
TAG ATTACHING MACHINE 

Michitoshi Watanabe, Nagoya, Japan, assignor to Tomoe Spe- 
cial Machine Co., Ltd., Nagoya, Japan 

Filed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,613 

Int. CV D05B 3/20 

U.S. O. 112—104 18 Qaims 




1. A tag attaching machine comprising: 

a feed assembly for feeding tags one at a time from a tag 

supply to a tag attaching station; 
a tag attaching assembly for attaching a tag to an article at 

the tag attaching station; and 
a control network for controlling the sequence of operations 

performed by the feed assembly and the tag attaching 

assembly; 
said feed assembly comprising: 

transport means for moving a tag from the tag supply 
toward the tag attaching station; 

means coupled to said transport means for controlling the 



4,391,211 
AUTOMATIC SEWING MACHINE 
Yoshikazu Yamamoto, and Toshiaki Yanagi, both of Nagoya, 
Japan, assignors to Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Na- 
goya, Japan 

Filed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 204,993 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 28, 1979, 54-154055 
Int. OX? D05B 21/00 
U.S. Q. 112—121.12 9 Qaims 



/^^5H^^- 




1. In an automatic sewing machine having 

stitch forming instrumentalities including an endwise recip- 
rocatory needle, the combination comprising 

a drive motor for reciprocating the needle to produce 
stitches in a workpiece, 

drive means operative to vary the relative position between 
the needle and the workpiece, 

stitch instruction storage means for storing stitch instruc- 
tions capable of influencing the relative positions to form 
a stitch pattern, 

means operative synchronously with reciprocation of the 
needle for extracting the stitch instruction from the stitch 
instruction storage means in a predetermined sequence, 

position control means responsive to the extracted stitch 
instruction for controlling operation of the drive means 
between successive stitches in the stitch pattern, 

processing means for scanning all of said stitch instructions 
in said stitch instruction storage means to determine a 
maximum permissible speed of said drive motor depend- 
ing on the variation of said relative position between 
successive stitches in said stitch pattern and for starting 
said drive motor to form said stitch pattern after determi- 
nation of the maximum permissible speed, and 

speed control means for limiting the actual speed of said 
drive motor to no more than said maximum permissible 
sr>eed during formation of said stitch pattern. 



4391,212 
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SEWING MACHINE 
Yoshimichi Tamiya, Narita-Higashi; Yasukata Eguchi, Kunita- 
chi, and Hachiro Makabe, Fussa, all of Japan, assignors to 
Janome Sewing Machine Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,289 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 5, 1979, 54/128660 
Int. Q.3 D05B 3/02 
U.S. Q. 112—158 E 3 Qaims 

1. A sewing machine having electronically controlled means 
to change the lateral position of the needle relative to the fabric 
to be sewn, comprising 



1032 O.G. 



86 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



a first memory (ROMl) for storing control data for produc- 
ing different patterns of stitches including data for produc- 
ing straight stitches, said first memory having input termi- 
nals for receiving address signals and output terminals for 
releasing control signals for lateral swing of the needle 
and fabric feed control signals; 

stitch pattern selecting means coupled to the input terminals 
of said first memory to release at the output terminals of 
the same a set of selected control signals; 

a second memory (ROM2) for storing automatic setting data 
specific to individual stitch patterns stored in the first 
memory, said second memory having input terminals 
connected to said pattern selecting means and output 



feeder for moving said hook eye in an ascending path 
having an upper reversal point and a descending path; 




- A8 



Hs-sa 





AND ORi 


GbJ 










I 


AUI 






"-(l 


zz: 


BO 


'§){^-"^ 


ANO'ORa 


AU2 


- 


"^m 


Gf{ 


-- 


^ 


FO 













terminals for releasing automatic setting data for the lat- 
eral swing of the needle and fabric feed automatic setting 
data; 

operator controlled setting means (VRl, VR2) for releasing 
optional needle swing setting data and fabric feed setting 
data for the selected stitch patterns independently from 
the automatic setting data in the second memory; and 

calculating means (AUI, AU2) having input terminals for 
receiving the corTtrol signals from the first memory 
(ROMl), the automatic setting data from the second mem- 
ory (ROM2) or the setting data from the setting means 
(VRl, VR2) to calculate the stich coordinates for each of 
the stitches of the selected pattern, and output terminals 
connected to said electronically controlled means. 




said thread catcher including a hook eye being aligned in an 
operative position with the hook eye of said thread feeder 
at said upper reversal point of said ascending path for 
catching a thread loop being fed by said thread feeder. 



4,391,214 

METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FORMING AN OVERCAST 

SEAM BY MEANS OF A ZIGZAG SEWING MACHINE 

Helmar Holl, and Rolf Kessler, both of Karlsruhe, Fed. Rep. of 
Germany, assignors to Dorina Nahmaschinen GmbH, Fed. 
Rep. of Germany 

Filed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,415 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 19, 
1980, 80105642[U] 

Int. CI.' D05B 1/20, 3/02 
U.S. a. 112—269.1 7 Claims 




4,391,213 
NEEDLE THREAD GUIDE DEVICE 

Ernst Dreier, Steckbom, and Kurt Spring, Kreuzlingen, both of 
Switzerland, assignors to Fritz Gegauf Aktiengesellschaft 
Bemina-Naehmaschinenfabrik, Steckborn, Switzerland 
Filed Nov. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,281 
Int. a.3 D05B 49/02 
U.S. a. 112—246 8 Qaims 

1. A needle thread guide device for use with a sewing ma- 
chine provided with a skip stitch mechanism operating at 
intervals to form stitches of varying lengths comprising: 
a thread feeder being operatively, articulated mounted to 

oscillate in a vertical plane; 
drive means operatively connected to said thread feeder for 

imparting oscillating motion thereto; 
a thread catcher operatively mounted adjacent to said thread 

feeder; 
lever means operatively connected to said thread catcher for 
engaging and disengaging said thread catcher in synchro- 
nism with the skip stitch mechanism; 
said thread feeder including a hook eye disposed at one end 

thereof; 
oscillating means operatively connected to said thread 




1. In a method for the formation of an overcast seam using a 
zigzag sewing machine of the type having a fabric presser, a 
needle bar carrying a needle with a needle thread movable into 
first and second overstitch positions, the needle being movable 
in axial reciprocating motions and pendulum motions selec- 
tively oriented transverse thereto between the first and second 
overstitch positions, a looper carrying a looper thread and a 
fabric feeder for feeding a fabric in a feed direction, the method 
being of the type having the steps of forming a first intertwin- 
ing of the needle thread and the looper thread in the first 
overstitch position, then moving the needle bar with the needle 



July 5, 1983 



if 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



87 



thread into the second overstitch position thereby slackening 
the needle thread, then forming a second intertwining needle 
thread and looper thread in the second overstitch position 
whereby the slackened needle thread leading from the first to 
the second thread loop is pulled into the first overstitch posi- 
tion to form an overstitch loop into which the needle is in- 
serted to form a subsequent loop and then released, the im- 
provement, in combination therewith, comprising the steps of 
moving the needle bar into the second overstitch position and 
concurrently feeding the fabric being sewn by one stitch length 
in the feed direction. 

2. In a zigzag sewing machine of the type having a fabric 
presser, a needle bar carrying a needle with a needle thread 
movable into first and second overstitch positions, the needle 
being movable in axial reciprocating motions and pendulum 
motions selectively oriented transverse thereto between the 
first and second overstitch positions, A looper carrying a 
looper thread, and a fabric feeder for feeding a fabric in a feed 
direction, an improved device for forming an overcast seam, 
the device being of the type having an oversew mandrel with 
first and second means for respectively moving the mandrel 
into two successive positions responsive to rotary and axial 
movement of the needle to form an overstitch loop in the 
needle path, and a loop stripper for disengaging the overstitch 
loop from the oversew mandrel, comprising the improvement 
wherein the loop stripper is movably mounted to the oversew 
mandrel for movement responsive to the axial movement of 
the needle bar in the first overstitch position, the loop stripper 
including a first arm portion adjacent to the oversew mandrel 
to supplement the formation of an overstitch loop. 



4,391,215 
SELF COMPENSATING OPTOELECTRONIC PLY AND 

EDGE DETECTOR FOR SEWING MACHINE 
Eugene A. Sansone, Belle Meade, N.J., assignor to The Singer 
Company, Stamford, Conn. 

Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,660 

Int. a.^ D05B 69/26. 69/20 

U.S. a. 112—275 12 Qaims 



1' 



'■*!- 










5:-n 



; titff-^ti^ »^»i>«mi.- 






/■ _ 



y 






. 1. 









STOP 

- -5CT ^ 



-I .-i 



^o<.iC lurOlFACK. 



1. A self compensating fabric ply and edge detector for a 
sewing machine having a frame including a work supporting 
bed, said frame supporting a needle bar for endwise reciproca- 
tion, a sewing needle fastened to one end of said needle bar, a 
throat plate, a needle accommodating orifice extending 
through said throat plate, a loop taker supported beneath said 
throat plate for cooperation with said sewing needle extending 
through said needle accommodating orifice in the formation of 
stitches, means for feeding a work fabric through said sewing 
machine beneath said sewing needle, said fabric ply and edge 



detector comprising: a light sensing device, means for support- 
ing said light sensing device in said work supporting bed before 
said needle accommodating orifice in the direction of feed of 
said work fabric, a source of light for said light sensing device, 
means for establishing a DC level related to average light 
reaching said light sensing device, means for passing an AC 
component of a change in incident light reaching said light 
sensing device, means for variably diverting current in re- 
sponse lo said AC component from said passing means, means 
for supplying current related to said average light for diversion 
by said diverting means, and means for initiating a selected 
response on diversion of current by said diverting means sub- 
stantially greater than that related to said average light. 



4,391,216 
FEED MECHANISM FOR SEWING MACHINES 

James C. Hsiao, Morton Grove, III., assignor to Union Special 
Corporation, Chicago, III. 

Filed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,410 

Int. Cl.^ D05B 27/02. 27/22 

U.S. O. 112—316 27 Qaims 



.r<>--^ 







a* 
so 






143 
,142 



, < . I '143 



,<^ 







W ^100 



9. A sewing machine having a frame, work support means, 
revoluble shaft means arranged in the frame beneath the work 
support means, eccentric means arranged on said shaft means 
and a work feeding mechanism capable of forward and reverse 
feeding comprising: 

elongated feed bar means having feed dog means arranged at 
the distal end thereof for movement in a generally orbital 
path, said feed dog means being adapted to engage and 
convey a workpiece over said support means; 

drive mechanism means including a series of interconnected 
linkages ojseratively associated with said eccentric means 
and said feed bar means; 

operator actuated shiftable means associated with said drive 
mechanism means for translating movement between said 
eccentric and the feed bar means and capable of selec- 
tively varying the direction and amount of workpiece 
movement as a function of its disposition; and 

feed regulating means including an aligned spaced pair of 
limit means provided with a singular adjustment member 
for independently controlling both limit means whereby 
controlling the degree of movement and disposition of 
said shiftable means and thereby the direction and amount 
of workpiece movement. 



88 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4,391^17 
SIZE PRESS WITH COATING POOL SUPPRESSING 
ARRANGEMENT 
Erkki Koski, Jyviiskyla, Finland, assignor to Valmet OY, Fin- 
land 

Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,426 

Claims priority, application Finland, Not. 28, 1980, 803708 

Int a.3 B05C 3/12 

U.S. a. 118—405 10 Oaims 




4,391,218 

METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORMING 

CORROSION-RESISTANT LAYER AND SURFACE 

ELECTRICALLY CONDUCHVE LAYER ON CABLE AND 

APPARATUS FOR PRACTIONG SAME 

Takahiro Horikawa; Yutaka Hibino, and Seiichi Maki, all of 

Osaka, Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Electric Industries, 

Ltd., Osaka, Japan 

Division of Ser. No. 152,959, May 23, 1980, Pat. No. 4,315,883. 

This application Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,457 

Claims priority, application Japan, May 25, 1979, 54-65147 

Int. a.3 B05D 3/12. 1/24 

U.S. CI. 118—621 6 Claims 




4 3 



1. Apparatus for forming an electrically conductive layer on 
a corrosion-resistant surface of a cable comprising: 

a powder accumulating tank having an inlet and outlet for 
passing a cable through said tank through a layer formed 
by accumulating electrically conductive powder therein 
to allow said p>owder to adhere to the surface of said cable, 
and a cloth pipe in said outlet for pressing said powder 
against said cable at the cable outlet of said powder accu- 
mulating tank; 

powder applying means for pressing said powder against 
said cable with a powder applying belt to cause said pow- 
der to more firmly adhere to said cable, said power apply- 

^ ing means comprising a rotary unit rotated at a speed in 
proportion to the sp>eed of passage of said cable through 
said powder applying means and an endless powder apply- 
ing belt arranged in said rotary unit in such a manner that 



said endless powder applying belt is tensioned and presses 
against at least a portion of the surface of said cable; 

heating means for heating without surface contact the sur- 
face of said cable to melt binder powder mixed with said 
electrically conductive powder; and 

cooling means for blowing air onto the surface of said cable 
for cooling said cable; 

said powder accumulating tank, said powder applying 
means, said heating means and said cooling means being 
arranged in the stated order. 



4,391,219 

IONIC STRIP COATER 

Edward J. Schaming, P.O. Box 1070, Butler, Pa. 16001 

Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,643 

Int. a.3 B05B 5/04, 7/08 

U.S. a. 118—630 5 Oaims 



1. A size press having at least two coating rollers forming 
with each other at least one coating nip through which the web 
to be treated is arranged to run and coating pools at the en- 
trance of the nip between the coating rollers and the web 
entering said nip, said size press comprising 
coating supply apparatus for supplying a coating agent to 
said coating pools, said coating supply apparatus including 
filling pieces at said entrance of said nip placed in said 
coating pools in operation, said filling pieces consisting of 
one of a liquid permeable porous, and perforated material 
and suppressing said coating pools and substantially de- 
creasing and preventing splashing of the coating agent. 






'^ 



1. An apparatus for coating a high speed moving strip with 
a liquid comprising liquid header delivery means for position- 
ing on at least one side of the strip in spaced relation thereto so 
as to deliver multiple streams of liquid onto the strip, and 
simultaneously operable pressurized air spray delivery means 
directing an air spray onto said streams and dispersing the 
streams into a multitude of much finer liquid streams in a 
crossing pattern to completely and uniformly coat said strip, 
the air spray delivery means substantially surrounding the 
liquid header and having an outlet substantially in registration 
with the outlet of the header, and the liquid header and air 
spray delivery means comprising eccentrically interfitting 
cylindrical bodies, and means to adjust the eccentric relation- 
ship of the bodies one with respect to the other. 



4,391,220 
APPARATUS FOR APPLYING FLUID TO ARTICLES 
William C. Kent, Garland, Tex., assignor to Western Electric 
Company, Inc., New York, N.Y. 

Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,875 
Int. a.3 B05C 3/10. 11/00. 13/02 
U.S. a. 118—707 10 Oaims 

1. An apparatus for applying liquid to an article, which 
comprises: 
an enclosure having an entry door movable from an open to 

a closed position; 
a tank within the enclosure for receiving a quantity of liquid; 
a holder for supporting an article with a section extending 

downwardly toward said tank; 
an elevator mechanism for lowering the holder from a load 
position toward said tank to move the extending section of 
the article within said tank, aod then return said holder to 
the load position; 
means responsive to the closure of said entry door for oper- 
ating said elevator mechanism; 



July 5, 1^83 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



89 



means responsive to the closure of said entry door for filling 
said tank with liquid; and 



4,391,222 




h& 



MILK METER FOR MEASURING THE TOTAL AMOUNT 

OF MILK FROM A COW IN THE COURSE OF A 

MILKING 

Friedrich Icking, Oelde, and Friedrich Stolte, Halle, both of 

Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Westfalia Separator AG, 

Oelde, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,646 
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 4, 
1981, 3103669 

Int. 0.3 AOIJ 7/00 



U.S. O. 119—14.17 



11 Oaims 



means rendered effective during the return of said elevator 
mechanism to the load position for draining the liquid 
from said tank. 




4,391,221 

METHOD FOR MECHANICAL MILK REMOVAL 
Tilman Hoefelmayr, Niederteufen, Switzerland, and Jakob 
Maier, Tiirkheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bi- 
omelktedinik Hoefelmayr & Co., Niederteufen, Switzerland 

Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 225,938 
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 21, 
1980, 3001963; Dec. 17, 1980, 3047579 

Int. CV AOIJ 5/16 
U.S. O. 119—14.08 35 Oaims 




1. In a milk meter for milking installations, for the direct 
measurment of the amount of milk given by a cow during 
milking, having a separating chamber including a floor, a roof 
and an outside wall, means for creating a partial vacuum in the 
separating chamber to effect the separation of the air from the 
milked milk-air mixture, a measuring chamber, means provid- 
ing fluid communication between the measuring chamber and 
the separating chamber including a permanently open inlet 
aperture in the measuring chamber, two sensors situated at 
difl"erent levels, one above the other, in the measuring chamber 
for effecting discrete quantity measurements while milk is* 
constantly being fed to the separating chamber, an outlet open- 
ing in the separating chamber adjacent the floor thereof and an 
actuatable valve for opening and closing the outlet opening, 
the improvement wherein: 
the inlet aperture of the measuring chamber is disposed 
adjacent the floor of the separating chamber and the fluid 
communication means comprises means forming a weir 
extending from the floor of the separating chamber up- 
wardly into the separating chamber with the upper edge 
— thereof disposed at a higher level than the inlet aperture, 
terminating at the outside wall of the separating chamber 
and having means defining at least one drain hole there- 
through. 



4,391,223 
CARDBOARD HOUSE FOR PETS 
Gwendolyn B. Holland, and John W. Holland, both of 97 Gay 
Bower Rd., Monroe, Conn. 06468 

Filed Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,345 

Int. 0.5 AOIK 1/00 

U.S. O. 119—19 10 Oaims 



1. In a method for mechanical milk removal in which a 
predetermined underpressure is applied to the interior of a 
milking cup applied to a teat to remove the milk and a pulsation 
of a teat rubber is effected at a predetermined frequency and 
intensity, and while the milking cup is in place the teat is stimu- 
lated during a stimulation phase for a predetermined interval 
prior to the principal milking operation, the improvement 
comprising wherein no milk is removed for an interval in the 
range of 40 to 90 seconds after commencement of the stimula- 
tion phase and only immediately subsequently thereto is milk 1. A one-piece cardboard house for an animal or pet, com- 
removal begun and wherein the pulsation frequency during the prising in combination: 
stimulation phase is higher than in the milk removal phase. (a) a bottom panel constituting a floor. 




90 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



(b) front and rear panels, and two side panels, each of said 
panels having two substantially vertical edge portions and 
being integral with the bottom panel, thereby being 
adapted to form the four walls of the house, 

(c) a pair of roof panels having free edge portions, said roof 
panels being integral with each other and with one of the 
side panels of the house, and being hingedly connected 
with each other and adapted to form a peaked roof, 

(d) means releasably joining one free edge portion of one 
roof panel to the other of said side panels, 

(e) means releasably holding the vertical edge portions of the 
front and rear panels adjacent to corresponding edge 
portions of the side panels of the house, and 

(0 means providing an entrance passage at the front of the 
house, said entrance passage being defined by edge por- 
tions of the front panel and by adjacent front edge por- 
tions of the said roof panels, 

(g) said front panel having a deep and wide notch in its top 
edge portion, outlining the bottom of said entrance pas- 
sage. 



4,39U24 
ANIMAL AMUSEMENT APPARATUS 
Harold A. Adler, 1457 Eastwind Cir., Westlake Village, Calif. 
91361 

Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,191 

Int. a.3 AOIK 29/00 

U.S. a. 119— 29 aaaims 




1 



-10 



-12 







V 



1. Animal attraction apparatus comprising: 

motor means for operating only when actuated; 

transmitter means for transmitting a signal; 

receiver means having an output coupled in actuation rela- 
tionship to said motor means, said receiver means being 
for receiving said signal and, when said signal as received 
is of predetermined power, for causing actuation of said 
motor means; 

attachment means for carrying said transmitter means and 
for mounting on a domesticated animal of the predator 
type; and 

simulated prey means which is normally unmoving and 
which, when in motion, tends to attract such animal, said 
prey means being for carrying said motor means and 
coupled to said motor means so that said motor means, 
when actuated, operates to cause said prey means to 
move; 

said transmitter means and receiver means having a signal 
transmitting and receiving power relationship such that, 
when said transmitter means is carried by such animal to 
within a predetermined distance of said prey means, said 
* receiver means actuates said motor means to cause said 
prey means to move. 



(1) one end having means for attaching said valve to a 
source of fluid supply; 

(2) a fluid conducting passageway; 

(3) a valve seat located in said passageway; and 

(4) an opposite end having a cut away portion to expose a 
portion of said passageway; 

(b) a valve member positioned in said passageway and hav- 
ing a valve head and valve stem that extends through said 
valve seat and has a free end that projects into said ex- 
posed portion of said passageway; 

(c) a resilient seal member positioned between said valve 
head and said valve seat; 




(d) an abutment member secured in said one end of said 
passageway and having at least one fluid conducting 
throughbore and a cone shaped apex end in engagement 
with the head of said valve member to normally bias said 
head in sealing contact against said sealing member pre- 
venting fluid flow through said valve but permitting said 
valve head to pivot about said apex; 

(e) said valve being actuable by an animal pressing on the 
free end of said valve stem to pivot said valve head from 
sealing contact with said sealing member by compressing 
a portion of said seal member, to thereby permit fluid flow 
through said valve. 



4,391,226 

DOG LEASH 

Richard A. Guthrie, 652 N. 94th PI., Mesa, Ariz. 85207 

Continuation of Ser. No. 63,661, Sep. 10, 1979, abandoned, and 

Ser. No. 199,439, Oct. 22, 1980, abandoned. This application 

Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,186 

Int. a.3 AOIK 27/00 

U.S. a. 119—109 10 Oaims 




431,225 
SPRINGLESS NIPPLE WATERER VALVE 
Jacob D. Sparks, 1005 W. Third, Indianola, Iowa 50125 
Filed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 350,052 
Int. C\? AOIK 7/00 
U.S. a. 119—72.5 4 Qaims 

1. A springless nipple waterer valve that is actuable by an 
animal to provide fluids thereto, comprising: 
(a) A valve body having 



1. In a leash device: 

(a) a leash line having an entrance end and an exit end; 

(b) a housing constructed and arranged to lodge in the palm 
of a user's first hand; 

(c) said housing comprising a leash line entrance opening 
situate in a first surface of said housing facing away from 
the palm of a user's first hand, a leash line exit opening 
situate in a second surface of said housing facing away 
from the user, and a leash line passageway between said 
entrance opening and said exit opening, said leash line 
passageway comprising a bearing surface for said leash 
line; 

(d) within said housing, adjacent said bearing surface, vari- 
able mechanical compression means for compressing said 
leash line against said bearing surface; 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



91 



(e) outside said housing and adjacent thereto, mechanical 
control means for controlling the compression of said 
variable mechanical compression means; 

(0 said leash line being constructed and arranged to pass 
through said housing in either direction by passing 
through said entrance opening, then through said passage- 
way adjacent said bearing surface and said variable me- 
chanical compression means, then out of said housing 
through said exit opening; and 

(g) said leash device being constructed and arranged so that 
a user's second hand, by controlling said entrance end of 
said leash line, will control an animal connected to said 
exit end of said leash line when said mechanical control 
means is in a non-compression position. 



4,391,227 
FLUID-HEATING APPARATUS 
Siegfried FSrster, Alsdorf; Peter Quell, Aachen-Haaren, and 
Huber Jaegers, Jiilich-Welldorf, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, 
assignors to Kernforschungsanlage Jiilich GmbH, Jiilich, Fed. 
Rep. of Germany 

Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,258 
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 14, 
1980, 3014245 

Int. CI.3 F22B 5/00 
U.S.a. 122— 16 13 Claims 



?i 



I %I10 12' 15 12 ,2 




4.391,228 
FALLING SHOT HEATING METHOD AND APPARATUS 
A. Joe Reinert, Ponca City, Okla., assignor to Conoco Inc., 
Ponca City, Okla. 

Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,652 

Int. a.3 F22B 1/02 

U.S. a. 122—28 15 Claims 



1. A heating unit comprising: 

a ceramic burner body formed with a plurality of parallel 
slit-like passages at least some of which open at a side of 
said body; 

means for supplying a fuel to alternate ones of said passages 
of said burner body and for supplying a combustion-sus- 
taining gas to the remainder of said passages whereby a 
combustible gas mixture is formed at said side of said 
body; 

means defining a combustion chamber at said side of said 
body and into which said some of said openings discharge 
whereby hot combustion gases are formed in said combus- 
tion chamber; 

a ceramic recuperator body constituting a unitary ceramic 
structure with said ceramic burner body and said means 
defining said combustion chamber, said recuperator body 
being formed with mutually parallel slit-like channels, 
alternate ones of said channels communicating with said 
combustion chamber for conducting said hot combustion 
gases therefrom; and 

means for passing a fluid to be heated through others of said 
channels in a direction counter to the flow of said combus- 
tion gases for heat exchange between said fluid and said 
combustion gases through walls of said recuperator body 
between said channels. 







j-JJ-- 







1. A process for the heating of an aqueous fluid comprising: 

(a) circulating an aqueous fluid into a heating zone; 

(b) heating a heat-transfer medium to a temperature above its 
melting point to produce molten heat-transfer medium at 
an elevation above said heatmg zone and establishing a 
reservoir of said molten heat-transfer medium above said 
heating zone; 

(c) sparging said molten medium downwardly through said 
heating zone whereby the sparged molten medium solidi- 
fies to form shot particles and said fluid is heated by said 
medium as it is cooled and solidified; 

(d) recovering hot aqueous fluid from said heating zone; 

(e) recovering cooled shot particles from said heating zone; 
and 

(0 recirculating said shot particles and heating said shot 
particles to produce molten heat-trasfer medium in accor- 
dance with step (b). 



4,391,229 
STEAM INJECTION APPARATUS 
Larry G. Turner, 1005 Vine St., Collinsville, III. 62234 
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,739 
Int. C1.3 F02D 79/00 
U.S. a. 123—25 B 4 Qaims 

1. A steam injection apparatus for an internal combustion 
engine having an exhaust system, and a vacuum line communi- 
cating with the engine, comprising: 

(a) a reservoir of liquid water, 

(b) conduit means communicating with the reservoir, 

(c) heater means, including a coil of metallic tubing having 
an inlet communicating with the conduit means, and an 
outlet communicating with the vacuum line, the coil being 
placed in heat-receiving relation to the engine exhaust 
system for heating water in the coil, and 

(d) metering means including an air inlet connected in the 
conduit means for mixing air with water from the reser- 
voir, and means carried by the air inlet for selectively 



92 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



controlling the amount of air entering the conduit means 
at a predetermined engine vacuum and thereby solely and 




selectively regulating the amount of water flow through 
the conduit means. 



4,391,230 
WATER-ALCOHOL INJECTION APPARATUS FOR I.C.E. 
Eugene B. Pesce, 1724 S. Quince St., Escondido, Calif. 92025, 
and James A. Krikava, 1110 Lancer La., West, Tarpon 
Springs, Fla. 33589 

Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 242,021 

Int. a.3 F02D 19/00; F02M 25/02 

U.S. a. 123—25 E 5 Qaims 




1. An injection apparatus for injecting a fluid mixture of 
water and alcohol into a fuel distribution system for an internal 
combustion engine, the fuel distribution system including 
a carburetor having a throttle valve, the carburetor being 

connected to the intake manifold of an internal combus- 
tion engine which includes a crankcase, 
said apparatus comprising a reservoir for said fluid mixture, 
first conduit means connected to said manifold downstream 

from said throttle valve, 

second conduit means connected to said manifold upstream 

from said throttle valve, 
main passage means connecting said first and second conduit 

means to said reservoir, 
one way flow control means in said main passage means for 

controlling the flow of fluid mixture to the manifold, 
and a third conduit means connected between said first 

conduit means and the crankcase of the engine, 
said third conduit means including a pressure-compensating 

valve positioned to vent crankcase emissions to said first 

conduit means. 



4,391,231 
CYLINDER HEAD FOR AIR-COOLED ENGINES 
Yoshikazu TateBe; Masafumi Egami, and Toshimitsu 
Miyawaki, all of Nagoya, Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi 
Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan 

Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,593 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 4, 1980, 55-27882[U] 
Int. C1.3 FOIP 1/02 
U.S. a. 123—41.69 2 Claims 



1^ 31213 



X' 



-w 




1. A cylinder head with a head body for an overhead valve, \ 
air-cooled engine having a rocker arm chamber (c), a suction 
port (21) and an exhaust port (7), comprising a part of a top 
wall of the cylinder head being depressed downwardly to form 
said rocker arm chamber (c) and deflning a top of a first cool- 
ing wind passage (H) which extends over an upper part (15) of 
said suction portion, said part of the top wall of the cylinder 
head extending from a side of said exhaust port (7), said first 
passage (H) formed between a bottom wall (14) of said rocker 
arm chamber (c) and an upper wall of a cylinder fitting surface 
(10) of said head, said suction port (21) extending from a top of 
said upper wall of said cylinder fitting surface, a fin (17) ex- 
tending around said first passage on a side thereof opposite said 
exhaust port (7), and a cooling wind guide (19) for guiding a 
cooling wind to a spark plug side of head, formed integrally 
with said cylinder head body on a side thereof opposite said 
cooling first cooling wind passage (H) and near said exhaust 
port (7) to form a second cooling wind passage (K), said first 
and second passages passing on opposite sides of said exhaust 
port. 



4,391,232 
INTERNAL-COMBUSTION ENGINE WITH OPPOSED 

PISTONS 
Marcel J. Geirnaert, Assesteenweg 360, B-1741, Wambeek-Ter- 
nat, Belgium 

FUed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,317 
Oaims priority, application Belgium, Mar. 27, 1980, 199984 
Int. a.3 F02B 75/28 
U.S. a. 123—51 BA 3 Qaims 




1. An internal-combustion engine comprising a housing 
including at least one cylinder unit comprising a cylinder bore 
with two opposed pistons each having two working faces 
slidably mounted therein and with fuel admission means, first, 
second, third and fourth annular channels extending around 
and adjacent the wall of the cylinder bore over a portion of the 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



93 



length thereof, each of said annular channels being in commu- 
nication with the interior volume of the cylinder bore through 
spaced apart openings, the first and fourth annular channels 
being located at one end of the cylinder bore and the second 
and third annular channels being located at the opposite end of 
the cylinder bore; transfer channel means having a length 
extending lengthwise of the cylinder bore and extending 
around and adjacent a portion of the wall of the cylinder bore, 
said transfer channel means being in direct communication 
with said first second and third annular channels; air intake 
pipe means extending lengthwise adjacent and along the length 
of said transfer channel means, a common partition between 
the air intake pipe means and the transfer channel means along 
the length of said transfer channel means, said common parti- 
tion having a plurality of spaced apart apertures therethrough 
distributed lengthwise of the transfer channel means, said 
apertures having one-way low-inertia gate means allowing a 
high rate of air flow from the air intake pipe means through the 
transfer channel into the cylinder bore and substantially no air 
flow back from the cylinder bore through the transfer channel 
means into the air intake pipe means; and an exhaust pipe 
connected to said fourth annular channel for discharge of the 
spent products of combustion. 



4,391,233 

IIVTERNALCOMBUSTION ENGINE 

Rudolph Jackisch, 3927 N. Elston Ave., Chicago, 111. 60618 

1 1 Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,874 

Int. a.3 F02B 75/16 

U.S. a. 123—61 R 13 Claims 







^^^^^"rf^^n 




^^. 



volume ratio of approximately 6:1 to approximately 12:1 
as to each other; 

said working piston being provided with an engaging piece 
with which a stop on the piston rod of said auxiliary piston 
coacts so that during at least part of the decompression 
phase thereof, said working piston drives said auxiliary 
piston; 

an intermediate space connecting each auxiliary chamber 
with an associated combustion chamber in which said 
intermediate space widens out from said auxiliary cham- 
ber toward said combustion chamber like a Venturi tube, 
each auxiliary chamber being in constant open communi- 
cation with its associated combustion chamber via said 
intermediate space during the entire working cycle of said 
engine; 

an inlet nozzle for each of said combustion chambers for 
supplying fuel thereto, each inlet nozzle opening into an 
associated intermediate space and being controlled in the 
working cycle of said auxiliary piston, and 

wherein during the return in the decompression phase, said 
auxiliary piston is forcibly controlled by said working 
piston and, during the compression stroke, is moved by 
means of action of a spring acting on said auxiliary piston 
which is greater than the maximum compression pressure. 



4,391,234 

INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE COMPRISING 

MEANS FOR CONTROLLING THE AXIAL EXTENT OF A 

PORT IN A CYLINDER 

Johann Holzleitner, Gunskirchen, Austria, assignor to Bombar- 
dier-Rotax G.m.b.H., Gunskirchen, Austria 

Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,939 
Qaims priority, application Austria, Dec. 18, 1980, 6172/80 
Int. Q.' F02D 9/06. F02B 75/02 
U.S. Q. 123—65 V 4 Qaims 



1. An internal combustion engine, having an entire working 
cycle including combustion air therewith capable of being 
brought to a compression pressure and being suitable for vari- 
ous types of fuel and for single and dual piston operation, 
comprising in combination: 
at least one working cylinder, which includes a shell pro- 
vided with a combustion chamber and a working piston 
having a working cycle including bottom and top dead 
center therewith; 
a crankshaft to which said working piston is operatively 
connected, said crankshaft including a bent section, which 
includes a crank bearing rotatably mounted on said bent 
section, and a crank arm connected to said working piston 
and to said crank bearing; 
at least one auxiliary cylinder associated with each working 
cylinder and provided with a wall, each of said auxiliary 
cylinders including an auxiliary chamber and an auxiliary 
piston which has a piston rod and a working cycle includ- 
ing a decompression phase and a compression stroke as 
well as having bottom and top dead center p>ositions in 
which said top and bottom dead center positions of said 
auxiliary piston are determined by at least one stop device 
and which moves back and forth and is forcibly controlled 
in the working cycle of said working piston in which the 
compression stroke takes place up to approximately 45' 
after top dead center of said working piston wherein said 
auxiliary piston compresses the combustion air to the 
compression pressure necessary for spontaneous ignition 
just prior to completion of the compression stroke, the 
combustion chamber and the auxiliary chamber having a 




1. In a two-stroke-cycle internal combustion engine compris- 



mg 



cylinder structure having an inside peripheral surface which 
defines a cylinder bore and is formed with a port which 
has an axial extent along the axis of said cylinder bore, said 
cylinder structure being formed with a flow passage 
which at one end adjoins said port and has a boundary 
surface poriion which adjoins said pori at one end of said 
axial extent, 

a piston, which is axially reciprocable in said cylinder bore 
and adapted to open and close said port, and 

a pivoted restricting member which defines said flow pas- 
sage on one side thereof adjacent to said pori and has a 
restricting edge which faces said port and extends gener- 
ally in the peripheral direction of the adjacent portion of 
said inside peripheral surface, said restricting member 
being angularly movable between a full-flow position, in 
which said restricting edge is clear of said port, and a 
restricting position, in which said restricting edge extends 



94 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



across said port intermediate said axial extent and is sub- 
stantially flush with said inside peripheral surface, 

the improvement residing in that 

said restricting member constitutes a hinged member, which 
is formed with said restricting edge at one end and is 
pivoted at its end that is opposite to said restricting edge. 



4,391,235 
VEHICLE EXHAUST GAS WARM-UP HEATER SYSTEM 
David S. Majkrzak, 345 Cherry Ct., West Fargo, N. Dak. 58078 

Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,797 
! Int. a.^ F02N n/02 

U.S. a. 123—142.5 R 11 Qaims 



ing said charge capacitor and said ignition SCR in series rela- 
tionship with said primary winding and operative for selec- 
tively preventing full discharge of said capacitor through said 
primary winding for a predetermined period of time after said 
ignition SCR is rendered conductive, thereby providing for 
automatic spark retard at higher engine rpm. 





^ff 



L^hfcb^J 



4,391,237 
APPARATUS FOR USE IN STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE 

Yoshiaki Abe, Higashimatsuyama; Yutaka Kubota, Kawagoe, 
and Hitoshi Sugimoto, Higashimatsuyama, all of Japan, as- 
signors to Diesel Kiki Co., Ltd., Japan 

Filed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,384 
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 12, 1980, 55/31049 
Int. a.3 F02N 77/00 
U.S. a. 123—179 H 13 Qaims 



1. A motor vehicle exhaust gas warm-up system in combina- 
tion with a motor vehicle, the motor vehicle having an engine 
with a single cooling system having a liquid coolant for cooling 
the engine and a conventional exhaust system with a plurality 
of exhaust pipes and a muffler for conveying hot exhaust gases 
from the engine, the system comprising: 
heat exchanger means for transferring heat from the hot 

exhaust gases to the coolant; 
means for conveying only a portion of the coolant from the 
engine to the heat exchanger means and back to the en- 
gine, the portion being of an amount that substantial inter- 
ruption of normal coolant flow in the cooling system is 
avoided; 
means for conveying the exhaust gases from the exhaust 

system to the heat exchanger means; 
a diverter valve for diverting the exhaust gases from the 

exhaust system to the heat exchanger means; and 
means for sensing the temperature of the coolant and for 
actuating the diverter valve at a predetermined coolant 
temperature to control the flow of exhaust gases to the 
heat exchanger means. 

I 



4,391,236 
CD IGNITION WITH AUTOMATIC SPARK RETARD 
Philip A. Anderson, Waukegan, III., assignor to Outboard Ma- 
rine Corporation, Waukegan, 111. 

Filed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,699 

Int. CI.5 F02D 5/04; F02P 1/00. 3/06. 1/08 

U.S. a. 123—149 C 22 Qaims 



1. A capacitor discharge ignition circuit adapted for use with 
an internal combustion engine and for connection to an ignition 
coil primary winding, said circuit comprising a charge capaci- 
tor, an ignition SCR, and spark retard circuit means connect- 



! 2«r .9» I S . _^^ r ~l I I I 




^1 




1. An apparatus for use in starting a diesel engine having at 
least one glow plug energized by actuation of an ignition 
switch having an OFF position, an ON position for connecting 
said apparatus to a voltage source and an ST position for 
starting the diesel engine, said apparatus comprising: 
means including a first switch for connecting each said glow 
plug to the voltage source to supply a first level of current 
to each said glow plug; 
means including a second switch for connecting each said 
glow plug to the voltage source through a resistance 
adapted to limit the current from the voltage source to 
supply a second level of current below said first level to 
each said glow plug; 
preheating means for activating said first switch for a first 
predetermined time period beginning from switching of 
said ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON 
position; 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



95 



afterglow means for activating said second switch for a 
second predetermined time period beginning from the 
switching of said ignition switch from the ST position to 
the ON position; and 

controlling means for periodically activating and de-activat- 
ing said first switch to periodically supply said first level 
of current and maintain the temperature of each glow plug 
within a predetermined range during a period of time 
occurring when said ignition switch is in the ST position. 



4,391,238 

AIR-COOLED INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE 
Josef Greier, and Colin T. Pomfret, both of Graz, Austria, as- 
signors to Hans List, Graz, Austria 

Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,745 
Oaims priority, application Austria, Mar. 31, 1980, 1747/80 
Int. CI.' F02F 1/02 
U.S. a. 123—193 C 6 Qaims 




1. An air-cooled internal combustion engine which com- 
prises a crankcase which defines an inner space and an outer 
space, said crankcase including at least one opening therein 
which communicates between the inner space and the outer 
space; a cylinder barrel fitted in each opening to extend from 
the inner space to the outer space, each cylinder barrel includ- 
ing a first external threaded portion located along the length 
thereof in the region of- the associated opening and a second 
external threaded portion located along the length thereof in 
the outer space; a bearing ring positioned between each cylin- 
der barrel and the associated opening in which it fits, each 
bearing ring extending from the inner space to the outer space 
and including a flange portion located in the inner space which 
is abuttabte against the portion of the crankcase forming the 
associated opening, an internal threaded portion which is co- 
operable with at least said first external threaded portion of the 
associated cylinder barrel, and an outer threaded portion lo- 
cated on a portion thereof which is in the outer space; a ring 
nut screwed on said outer threaded portion of each bearing 
ring to brace the bearing ring to the portion of the crankcase 
forming the associated opening; and a lock nut screwed on said 
second external threaded portion of each cylinder barrel to 
brace the cylinder barrel to the associated bearing ring. 



more watertight boxes fitted inside the casing, the casing itself 
being open to ingress of water and protecting all other water 



Fa o 



T^-F 



-^-1 









.J3 



sensitive engine regions from ingress of water upon inversion 
of the engine. 



4,391,240 
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE 

Fukashi Sugasawa, Yokohama, and Haruhiko lizuka, Yokosuka, 
both of Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Company, Limited, 
Yokohama, Japan 

Filed Mar. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 134,314 
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1979, 54-35015 
Int. CI.3F02D 17/03 
U.S. a. 123—198 F 26 Qaims 




4,391,239 

INVERSION PROTECTION OF OUTBOARD MARINE 

ENGINES 

Michael B. J. Brinton, East Cowes; John Barnes, and Peter D. 

Chandler, both of Newtown, all of England, assignors to 

R.N.L.I. (Trading) Limited, Dorset, England 

1 1 Filed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 174,766 
1 1 Int. Q.3 F02B 77/00 

U.S. Q. 123—198 E 10 Qaims 

1. A method of inversion-protecting an outboard marine 
engine having a starter motor, spindle, and solenoid and engine 
power pack including a c^il and terminal blocks located in a 
main engine casing, whereiiii all of the water-sensitive electrical 
equipment within the main engine casing is enclosed in one or 



1. An internal combustion engine comprising: 

(a) first and second cylinder units each including at least one 
cylinder; 

(b) an intake passage provided therein with a throttle valve 
and divided downstream of said throttle valve into first 
and second branches leading to said first and second cylin- 
der units, respectively, said second intake passage branch 
having therein a first valve means which is normally open; 

(c) an exhaust passage divided into first and second branches 
leading from said first and second cylinder units, respec- 
tively; 

(d) a first passage having one end opening into said second 
exhaust passage branch and another end opening into said 
second intake passage branch, said first passage having 
therein a second valve means which is normally closed; 

(e) fuel supply means for supplying an optimum amount of 
fuel to said first and second cylinder units under varying 
conditions; 

(0 a load detector responsive to engine load for providing a 
low load indicative signal when the engine load is below 
a predetermined value; 



96 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



(g) means responsive to the low load indicative signal to 
inactivate said second cylinder unit; 

(h) delay means responsive to the low load indicative signal 
from said load detector for providing a drive signal a 
predetermined time after the arrival of the low load indic- 
ative signal thereto; and 

(i) first valve drive means responsive to the drive signal from 
said delay means for closing said first valve means and 
opening said second valve means. 

* , 

4,391^1 

STOPPING DEVICE FOR ENGINE SUPPLIED WITH 

FUEL BY FUEL INJECTION PUMP 

Hidetoshi Dohshita, Okazaki; Yoshiya Ishii, Toyota, and 

Nobuyuki Fujitani, Kariya, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon- 

denso Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan 

Filed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,415 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 21, 1979, 54-166333 
Int. a.3 P02D 77/00 
U.S. a. 123—198 DB 7 Qaims 




iary device to ^suspend operation of the auxiliary device 
for the time period from when the acceleration rate of the 




load on the driving system of the vehicle exceeds a prede- 
termined level until the time the load of the driving system 
of the vehicle returns to the predetermined level. 



4,391,243 

METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SUPPLYING FUEL IN 

ELECTRONIC CONTROL FUEL INJECTION ENGINE 

Hironori Bessho, Susono, Japan, assignor to Toyota Jidosha 

Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota, Japan 

Filed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,179 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 11, 1981, 56-142535 
Int. Q.3 F02D 5/02 
U.S. Q. 123—325 6 Qaims 



1. A stopping device for an engine which has a key switch 
and which is supplied with fuel by a fuel injection pump con- 
nected to a fuel tank by a fuel supply pump driven by the 
engine, comprising: 

a change-over valve movable between a first position and a 
second position, 

said change-over valve connecting said fuel tank with an 
inlet of said fuel supply pump and connecting an outlet of 
said fuel supply pump with an inlet of said fuel injection 
pump when disposed in the first position, and 

said change-over valve connecting the inlet of said fuel 
injection pump with the inlet of said fuel supply pump and 
connecting the outlet of said fuel supply pump with said 
fuel tank when disposed in the second position; and 

an electromagnetic actuator for electromagnetically actuat- 
ing said change-over valve in response to the position of 
said engine key switch so that said change-over valve is 
held in the first and second positions during engine opera- 
tion and engine shutdown, respectively. 



|elECIronic~1 :. - — ^ 

4 OONTBOL - 1 ' , 



-1'! 



4,391,242 
CONTROL DEVICE FOR AUXILIARY MEMBERS OF A 

VEHICLE 

Sakae Mashio, Tatebayashi, Japan, assignor to Tama Manufac- 
turing Co., Limited, Gumma, Japan 

FUed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,359 
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 23, 1980, 55-68758 
Int. Q.^ F02D J 1/08; B60H 3/04; F02B 77/00 
U.S. Q. 123—198 R 9 Qaims 

1. A control apparatus for a vehicle-mounted auxiliary de- 
vice to be driven by an engine, comprising: 
a pair of pressure switches to detect the load through the 

negative pressure intake of the engine; 
means to detect the rate of acceleration of the load by the 
difference in operation time between the pressure 
switches; 
control means to control the driving of said auxiliary device, 

and 
means to transmit a signal to the control means of said auxil- 




1. A fuel supply method for an electronic control fuel injec- 
tion engine in which a fuel injection valve is operated by 
electric signals to control an amount of fuel supply from the 
fuel injection valve to an intake system, characterized in that, 
when a brake device is operated or vehicle speed is higher than 
a predetermined value, the rotational speed of the engine with 
the fuel cut-off being completed in the deceleration of the 
vehicle and the fuel supply being resumed is set to a value 
smaller than that otherwise set. 

4. An apparatus for supplying fuel to an electronic control 
fuel injection engine in which a fuel injection valve is operated 
by electric signals to control an amount of fuel supply from the 
fuel injection valve to an intake system, characterized in that 
said apparatus comprises a first detecting means for detecting 
the operation of a brake device, a second detecting means for 
detecting vehicle speed, a comparator means for comparing 
the rotational sf)eed of the engine with a reference value to 
allow the fuel injection valve to be operated when the rota- 
tional speed of the engine is lower than the reference value and 
a control means for receiving detecting signals from the first 
and second detecting means to set thereby the reference value 
of the comparator means lower than that set otherwise when 
the brake device is operated or the vehicle speed is higher than 
a predetermined value. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



97 



4,391,244 

DEVICE OF CONTROLLING THE IDLING SPEED OF AN 

ENGINE 

Mamoru Kobashi, Aichi; Shinichiro Tanaka, Susono, and Hideo 
Saji, Aichi, all of Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo 
Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota and Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Kariya, 
both of, Japan 

Filed Jun. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 387,755 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 22, 1981, 56-95213 
Int. Q.3 F02D 11/10 
,U.S. Q. 123—339 10 Qaims 




moved toward a closed position, said abutment means when in 
a first position being operatively engagable by said throttle 
valve means when said throttle valve means is moved to a" 
normal idle throttle position, said abutment means being effec- 
tive when in said first position to hold open said throttle valve 
means a relatively small first amount, pressure responsive 
movable wall means efiective upon being exposed to a first 
vacuunji generated by said engine for moving said abutment 
means to a second position whereat said throttle valve means 
when moved toward said closed position operatively engages 
said abutment means to thereby be held open a relatively larger 
second' amount, said pressure responsiv)e movable wall means 



H« ^ 



^^J_] r^ 






1 r 




i ! ill 


r^ 


11 '^62 


(- - 


Sea 


67 





■t] 



1. A device of controlling the idling speed of an engine 
comprising a main intake passage, a throttle valve arranged in 
the main intake passage, a bypass passage branched off from 
the main intake passage upstream of the throttle valve and 
connected to the main intake passage downstream of the throt- 
tle valve, and a control valve arranged in the bypass passage, 
said device comprising: 
a step motor actuating the control valve for controlling the 

amount of air flowing within the bypass passage; 
first means for detecting the engine speed to produce an 

output signal indicating the engine speed, 
second means for detecting the operating condition of the 
engine to produce an output signal indicating that the 
engine is operating in an idling state, 
electronic control means operated in response to the output 
signal of said first means and the output signal of said 
second means and producing continuous control pulse 
signals at predetermined first time intervals for rotating 
the step motor in a stepping manner at a first speed in a 
direction wherein the engine speed approaches a desired 
engine speed when the engine is operating in an idling 
state, and; 
power supply control means including an ignition switch 
and inserted between said electronic control means and a 
power source, said electronic control means producing 
continuous control pulse signals at predetermined second 
time intervals which are longer than said first time inter- 
vals for rotating the step motor in a predetermined direc- 
tion at a second speed which is lower than said first speed 
when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. 



^- ^ 







■X 






a* 



being effective upon being exposed to a second vacuum gener- 
ated by said engine for moving said abutment means to a third 
position whereat said throttle valve means is held open a rela- 
tively greatest third amount, and resilient means, said resilient 
means being the only resistive means effective to operatively 
resiliently resist the movement of said abutment means from 
said first position to said second position and from said second 
position to said third position, said resilient means exhibiting 
only a single spring rate and being devoid of abrupt changes in 
the spring rate thereof during the entire distance of movement 
of said abutment means from said first position to said third 
position. 



4,391,246 
THROTTLE OPENER DEVICE FOR VEHICLE ENGINES 
Etsuo Kawabata, Wakoh; Masahiko Ogura, Sakado; Akinobu 
Takagi, Yokohama, and Akira Fujimura, Niiza, all of Japan, 
assignors to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, 
Japan 
Continuation of Ser. No. 144,325, Apr. 28, 1980, abandoned. 

This application Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385,488 
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 7, 1979, 54-54705; 
Nov. 20, 1979, 54-151264 

Int. CV F02S U/10; F02D 1/04; F02M 19/12 
U.S. CI. 123—391 7 Qaims 



4,391,245 
PRESSURE OPERATED THREE-POSITION THROTTLE 

STOP ASSEMBLY 
William C. Larson, Rochester, Mich., assignor to Colt Industries 
Operating Corp., New York, N.Y, 

Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,392 
Int. Q.5 F02M i/00 
U.S. Q. 123—339 18 Qaims 

1. Apparatus for variably stopping the closing movement of 
throttle valve means controlling the flow of motive fluid to an 
associated combustion engine, comprising variably position- 
able abutment means effective for operative engagement with 
said throttle valve means when said throttle valve means is 




1. For use with an internal combustion engine for driving a 
vehicle, the engine having an intake passage provided with a 



98 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



throttle valve and a throttle valve opener, the improvement 
comprising, in combination: a suction passage connecting said 
throttle valve opener with a vacuum port on the intake passage 
downstream from said throttle valve, a vacuum responsive 
throttle opener control valve in said suction passage which 
transmits a controlled vacuum pressure into said throttle valve 
opener when the vehicle speed is above a predetermined speed, 
vacuum pressure regulating means positioned in said suction 
passage between said vacuum port and said throttle opener 
control valve, said vacuum pressure regulating means includ- 
ing restriction means and including atmospheric intake valve 
means, said vacuum pressure regulating means acting to reduce 
vacuum pressure transmitted from said vacuum port to said 
throttle opener control valve in response to an operative state 
of the engine. 

4,391,247 
AIR FLOW DETECTION ARRANGEMENT 

Giichi Shioyama, Yokosuka; Yoshitaka Hata, Fujisawa, and 
Masao Nakajima, Atsugi, all of Japan, assignors to Nissan 
Motor Company, Limited, Yokohama, Japan 

Filed Oct. 14, 1980. Ser. No. 196,524 
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 15, 1979, 54-132624 
Int. aj F02D 9/08 
U.S. a. 123—403 9 Claims 







- R, 


R, 












- - Tl 






30 


I 


1 

Rm 


34 






34/ 


V. 




14 
-Rt 


Rm 


f 




32 

34B 



- R. . -f- R, --* 



1. In an internal combustion engine, having a cylinder and an 
induction passage leading from the ambient atmosphere to said 
cylinder, an air flow sensor comprising: 

a manually controlled butterfly valve operatively disposed 
in said induction passage and rotatable for controlling the 
amount of air inducted through said induction passage; 

a position sensor operatively connected to said butterfly 
valve for sensing the angular position thereof and produc- 
ing an output signal indicative of said sensed position; and 

means defming a curved wall on one of said butterfly valves 
and said induction passage for restricting the air flow past 
said butterfly valve as it opens from a closed position and 
for causing said air flow to be essentially proportional to 
the opening degree of said butterfly valve whereby said 
signal outputted by said sensor accurately indicates said 
air flow. 



4,391,248 

METHOD FOR CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL OF THE 

IGNITION ANGLE OR THE COMPOSITION OF THE 

OPERATIONAL MIXTURE FURNISHED AN INTERNAL 

COMBUSTION ENGINE 
Reinhard Latsch, Vaihingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to 
Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,743 
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 29, 
1979, 2939590 

Int. a.5 P02D 33/00; F02P 5/10 
U.S. a. 123—425 6 Oaims 

l.*A method of closed-loop control for the composition of an 
operational mixture furnished to an internal combustion engine 
for combustion therein, comprising the steps of: 
ascertaining the occurrence of the top dead center in sequen- 
tial work cycles of at least one combustion chamber of the 
engine; 
measuring the magnitude of the combustion chamber pres- 
sure of said at least one combusting chamber with a pres- 
sure probe; 



ascertaining the occurrence of the peak combustion chamber 
pressure from the measured magnitude of the combustion 
chamber pressure, relative to the ascertained top dead 
center occurrence in sequential work cycles of said at least 
one combustion chamber; 

generating a control signal as a function of the difference 
between two successive occurrences of the peak combus- 
tion chamber pressure relative to the occurrence of the 
top dead center in sequential work cycles of said at least 
one combustion chamber; 



mmm- ^^T.-mi .DutHmtm 

■'• MJUSIttW 
DEVICE 



i^m»u- 




«fflOI 



generating a set-point value for the control signal; 
comparing the generated control signal to the generated 

set-point value and generating a difference signal; and 
adjusting the proportion of at least one component of the 

operational mixture in accordance with the generated 

difference signal. 



4,391,249 
METHOD OF OPERATING A COMBUSTIBLE MIXTURE 

GENERATOR OF AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION 
ENGINE AND APPARATUS FOR CARRYING OUT THE 

METHOD 
Valerio Bianchi, Neuss-Hoisten; Franz-Josef Ehrentraut, 
Monchengladbach, and Peter Wcbky, Dormagen, all of Fed. 
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bosch und Pierburg System 
oHG, Neuss, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 163,992 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 11, 
1979, 2927881 

Int. a.3 F02M 7/06 
U.S. a. 123—438 17 Qaims 




EhGlNE 

TtMPERATuBC 

SENSOR 



SENSOR 

FOR TEMPERATURE 
«T *AlL 0* 
INLET MlNlFOtO 



1. In a method of operating a combustible mixture generator 
of an internal combustion engine to produce a transition mix- 
ture enrichment during acceleration of said engine, said mix- 
ture generator including means defming a mixing chamber, a 
main throttle downstream of said chamber, a choke valve 
upstream of said chamber, an electric drive for operating said 
choke valve, means for sensing at least one operating parame- 
ter of said engine, and a control device which is controlled by 
said sensing means and controls said electric drive to move said 
choke valve into positions for cold starting, running-up and 
hot-running mixture enrichment, said method comprising the 
steps of holding said choke valve open in steady operation of 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



99 



said engine, sensing the instantaneous degree of opening of said 
main throttle valve with the sensing means, and when the 
speed of opening said main throttle exceeds a predetermined 
threshold value conveying respective signals from the sensing 
means to the control device and from the control device to the 
electric drive for temporarily abruptly at least partly closing 
said choke valve by a predetermined magnitude by means of 
said electric drive and measuring at least one of a plurality of 
operating parameters of said engine and making said predeter- 
mined magnitude and the duration of said closing of said choke 
valve dependent upon the measurements of said at least one 
parameter. 



4,391,250 
SYSTEM FOR DETECTING THE OPERATION OF THE 

THROTTLE VALVE 
Fujio Matsui, Mitaka, Japan, assignor to Fuji Jukogyo Kabu- 
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo and Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, 
both of, Japan 

Filed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,373 

Claims priority, application J^an, Aug. 2, 1979, 54-98918 

Int. CI.' F02D 35/00 

U.S. a. 123—438 11 Claims 






:^ 



IsSm 



I 



■SO 



40 



, ,( 26 

!s.TTX*-rtn(11 ■> ■ —^"^ f-f* 

holCMCuill T ;» ' ■*• "-T^*-^ I 



I pulse J-\C 



27 
29 



25, r 

UsamOe-andL ^ £<^__ 



-UU. 

H , 41 , 32 

31 * 



' |r»erlB| 'i^i 



1. A system for detecting the operation of a throttle valve of 
an internal combustion engine, comprising 

means comprising a transducer for converting a physical 
parameter of the operation of the throttle valve into an 
electrical signal constituting an output voltage of said 
transducer, 

holding circuit means for periodically operatively receiving 
the output voltage of said transducer with respect to time 
and holding constant a value proportional to the periodi- 
cally received output voltage of said transducer, 

an output circuit means for continuously producing a result- 
ing voltage corresponding to the change of said value, at 
every periodic time interval of the operation of said hold- 
ing circuit means, from said value at the respective prior 
time interval and proportional to angular velocity of the 
throttle valve respectively. 



a clock signal generator providing synchronous signals and a 
clock signal at the electrovalve cycle frequency; 

a closed loop digital circuit of the proportional integral type 
with variable gain, said closed loop being connected be- 
tween said EGO sensor and said electrovalve and including 
a digital integrator having a gain control input receiving a 
digital signal representative of the rotation speed of the 







motor, a digital time duration modulator having a control 
input connected to the EGO sensor, and a multiplexer for 
opening said closed loop, said multiplexer having a com- 
mand input connected to a logic circuit sensitive to operat- 
ing conditions of said motor and at least a second input 
receiving a command signal sensitive to a motor physical 
parameter such as the temperature or the rotation speed of 
the motor. 



4,391,252 
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM 
Giinther Jaggle, Stuttgart; Klaus-Jiirgen Peters, Affalterbach, 
and Klaus Riel, Moglingen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, 
assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of 
Germany 

Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,210 
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 7, 
1980, 3021561 

Int. CI.' F02M 39/00 
U.S. CI. 123—454 — 5 Qaims 



4,391,251 

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER FOR CONTROLLING THE 
AIR/FUEL RATIO OF THE MIXTURE SUPPLIED TO AN 

INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE 
Pierre Planteline, and Roger Machetel, both of Paris, France, 
assignors to Groupement d'Interet Economique de Re- 
cherche et de Developpement PSA, Paris, France 

1 1 Filed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,604 
Qaims' t»riority, application France, Oct. 19, 1979, 79 26045 
Int. CI.' F02B 3/00 
U.S. a. 123—440 10 Qaims 

1. A digital electronic controller for regulating the air/fuel 
ratio of the mixture supplied to the cylinders of an internal 
combustion engine, having an EGO sensor situated on the 
exhaust path of the burned gases, at least one fuel supply de- 
vice, such as a carburetor, whose fuel flow rate can be modi- 
fied by an electrovalve controlled on the basis of an opening/- 
closing cycle and a plurality of sensors for measuring operating 
conditions of this engine, said electronic controller comprising: 




1. A fuel injection system for compressor-equipped internal 
combustion engines having injection into an intake tube, in 
which a flow rate member and an arbitrarily actuatable throttle 
valve are disposed in sequence downstream of a compressor, 
the flow rate member being movable counter to a restoring 
force in accordance with a quantity of air flowing there- 
through, and a valve disposed in a fuel supply line having a 
movable element for metering a fuel quantity corresponding to 
the quantity of air, characterized in that said restoring force is 
generated by means of pressure fluid, which is exerted continu- 
ously upon a control slide under a constant but arbitrarily 
variable pressure supplied by a control pressure line, said re- 
storing force, and the variation of the pressure of the pressure 
fluid being effected by means of at least one pressure control 



100 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



valve controllable in accordance with engine characteristics, 
further wherein said pressure control valve includes a movable 
valve element upon which a compression spring acts in the 
closing direction of the pressure control valve, the force of said 
spring exerted upon the movable valve element being capable 
of reduction with increasing intake tube pressure downstream 
of said compressor. 



4,391,254 
ATOMIZATION COMPENSATION FOR ELECTRONIC 

FUEL INJECTION 
Richard E. Staerzl, Fond du Lac, Wis., assignor to Brunswick 
Corporation, Skokie, III. 

Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,993 

Int. a.3 F02M 51/00 

U.S. a. 123—478 6 Qaims 



4,391,253 

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLING, FUEL INJECHON 

METHOD 

Sumio Ito, Gotenba, Japan, assignor to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo 
Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota, Japan 

Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,132 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 29, 1980, 55-150627; 
Oct. 30, 1980, 55-151390 

Int. a.3 F02D 37/02 
U.S. a. 123—478 11 Oaims 




33l> 

_1 



ENGlNt nJWtlNG SPEED 
FLOW HATE Of INTAKE AH 



7 



16b 



BASIC AflOUNT Of FUEL BEING 
INJECTED IS CALCULATED. 



450 



I BASIC IGNITION TIHING 
I IS CALCULATED. 



-^ 



38 D 



ACTUAL AHOUNI uF FUEL BEING 
INJECTED IS DETERWINED. 



I 



4eb 

I 
; 



BASIC IGNITION TmiKG 
IS CORRECTED. 



47b 



IIUECTOR IS OPERATED. 



T- 



/IGNITION SIGNAL 
/IS PRODUCED. 



7 




IL 






-HL 



MOOULA7EO 



'^ttoo 



-^IMjfcroK en vf* 

■rMuecTor cvc f^e 
^-^iMjecToe at *?/ 



1. In an electronic fuel-injection control circuit for an inter- 
nal-combustion engine having an intake air manifold wherein a 
square-wave pulse generator provides output signals of vari- 
able duration, said output signals controlling the fuel flow rate 
to the internal combustion engine with an output signal of a 
first duration providing an increased fuel flow rate and an 
output signal of a second duration providing a decreased fuel 
flow rate, said first duration being greater than said second 
duration, the improvement comprising, means for sensing the 
air temperature within said intake air manifold, means for 
detecting the instantaneous speed of said internal combustion 
engine, means responsive to a decrease in manifold air temper- 
ature for increasing the duration of said output signals and 
responsive to an increase in manifold air temperature for de- 
creasing the duration of said output signals, and means respon- 
sive to a decrease in engine speed for increasing the duration of 
said output signals and responsive to an increase in engine 
speed for decreasing the duration of said output signals, said 
detecting means including a linear inverting operational ampli- 
fier, a first input of said operational amplifier having applied 
thereto a signal linearly related to engine speed, a second input 
of said operational amplifier having applied thereto a predeter- 
mined bias voltage, and the output of said operational amplifier 
being at a maximum value when said engine speed is minimum 
and being at a minimum value when said engine speed reaches 
a predetermined value in excess of said minimum engine speed. 



1. In an electronically controlling, fuel injection method, 
wherein a gasoline fuel containing alcohol is supplied via an 
electromagnetic fuel injection valve into an intake system of an 
engine; comprising the steps of: 
storing in a storage means a comparison value representing a 
comparison of a basic amount of fuel being injected and an 
actual amount of fuel being injected, in closed loop con- 
trolling, said basic amount of fuel being injected calcu- 
lated on the basis of operational parameters of the engine, 
and said actual amount of fuel being injected being deter- 
mined by correcting said basic amount of fuel being in- 
jected on the basis of air-fuel-ratio feedback signals, and 
wherein a basic ignition timing is calculated on the basis of 
operational parameters of the engine, and said basic igni- 
tion timing is corrected on the basis of said comparison 
value, whereby an actual ignition timing is obtained; and 
correcting said biisic amount of fuel being injected on the 
basis of said comparison value, in open loop controlling, in 
order to determine an actual amount of fuel being in- 
jected. 



4,391,255 
PROGRAMMED SEQUENTIAL FUEL INJECTION IN AN 

INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE 
Richard E. Staerzl, Fond du Lac, Wis., assignor to Brunswick 
Corporation, Skokie, III. 

Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,374 
Int. C\? F02D 17/00 
U.S. a. 123—481 6 Claims 

1. A fuel-injection control circuit for an internal-combustion 
engine, said internal-combustion engine having a variable 
position throttle and a plurality of engine cylinders with each 
cylinder having associated therewith individually controllable 
fuel injection apparatus, the fuel injection control circuit com- 
prising, 
means for generating a throttle position control signal whose 
voltage level is dependent upon the movement of said 
variable position throttle from a closed position to an open 
position and from an open position to a closed position, 
means for comparing the voltage level of said throttle posi- 
tion control signal with a fixed reference level and for 
generating a predetermined pattern of logic signals in 
response to said comparison. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



101 



a bistable device which changes state once per crankshaft 
revolution of said internal combustion engine and 

means responsive to said predetermined pattern of logic 
signals and to the state of said bistable device for applying 
enabling signals to a minimum number of said individually 
controllable fuel injection apparatus at an essentially 
closed throttle position, for progressively applying said 




' ' 4,391,256 

AIR-FUEL RATIO CONTROL APPARATUS 
Hiroshi Sawada, and Takayuki Demura, both of Susono, Japan, 
assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Aichi, 
Japan 
Continuation of Ser. No. 153,521, May 27, 1980, abandoned. 

This application Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,574 

Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 4, 1979, 54-68804 

Int. Q.3 F02B 3/08 

U.S. Q. 123—489 3 Qaims 



2! 



WR- FUEL 

RATIO 

SENSOR 

1 

|4 



vaTAGE 
FOLLCWER 



HC0Mf^4- 
FWTOR 



23 



•D 



24 



\fiRlABLE 
VOLTAGE r 
PIVIDER 



y27 



L MAX 
I DETECT 
CIRdilT 



LlaSTABLElfi, 



CI RCUIT 

r- 

25 



INTEGRA- 
TOR 



a 



2ft 



1. An air-fuel ratio control apparatus for an internal combus- 
tion engine having an exhaust system and means for supplying 
secondary air to the exhaust system, said apparatus comprising: 
sensor means disposed in the exhaust system, for detecting the 
concentration value of a predetermined constituent in the 
exhaust gas of the engine, said sensor means generating a 
first signal which indicates the concentration value of the 
predetermined constituent in the exhaust gas; 
first circuit means for calculating the average value of the first 
signal from said sensor means, said first circuit means gener- 
ating a second signal indicative of the calculated average 
value that represents the closed loop air-fuel ratio in the 
exhaust system to which the secondary air is supplied; 
second circuit means for generating a reference signal based 
upon the first signal and the second signal, comprising means 
for detecting the maximum v^ue of the first signal and 
means for dividing the signal derived from said maximum 
value detecting means by a variable division factor, to gener- 



ate the reference signal, said variable division factor being 

continuously changed responding to said second signal; 
third circuit means for making a comparison between the 

values of said first signal and said reference signal, said third 

circuit means generating a control signal which indicates the 

result of said comparison; and 
means for adjusting the amount of secondary air supplied to 

the exhaust system in response to said control signal from the 

third circuit means. 



4,391,257 

FUEL INJECTION PUMP FOR INTERNAr 

COMBUSTION ENGINES 

Franz Eheim, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to 

Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep, of Germany 

Filed Feb. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 121,867 
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 10, 
1979, 2909556 

Int. Q.^ F02D ///*. 5/00 
U.S. Q. 123-503 1 Qaim 



enab ing signals to a greater number of said individually 
controllable fuel injection apparatus as said variable posi- 
tion throttle moves from an essentially closed position to 
nearer said open position and for applying said enabling 
signals to all of said individually controllable fuel injection 
apparatus when said variable position throttle reaches said 
open position. 



" « :i7ii: 






1. A fuel injection pump having a housing for internal com- 
bustion engines having a control member for a fuel injection 
quantity actuatable by means of an adjusting member of an rpm 
governor via a governor lever and a drag spring which stresses 
said governor lever counter to a shut off direction which 
permits a sufficient range of motion relative to said rpm gover- 
nor, and further having an electric servomotor, said servomo- 
tor including an electromagnet, an armature and a force spring 
which drives against said armature for adjusting the control 
member into a stop position in which a fuel supplied by the 
pump is diverted and not used, characterized in that said arma- 
ture of said servomotor engages said governor lever and there- 
through is connected in a force-locking manner with said 
control member so that upon the adjustment effected by means 
of said servomotor, the position of said adjusting member of 
the rpm governor remains unchanged, and said force spring 
acts upon said armature so that a fuel diversion, when the 
electromagnet is switched off, is triggered via said force spring 
and said armature. 



4,391,258 
ARRANGEMENT FOR DRIVING A MECHANISM IN AN 

INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE 
Dick V. Claesson, Sodertalje, Sweden, assignor to Saab-Scania 
Aktiebolag, Sodertalje, Sweden 

Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,654 
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Mar. 6, 1980, 8001778 
Int. Q,' F02M 37/04 
U.S. Q. 123—508 7 Qaims 

1. In apparatus for mechanically driving a mechanism associ- 
ated with an internal combustion engine: a driven rotatable 
shaft having a rotation axis, said shaft having a peripheral 
groove which has side walls and a bottom wall forming a 
continuously curved cam surface which is eccentric to the 
rotation axis of said shaft; a push rod having a first end driv- 
ingly connected to said mechanism and a second end having a 



102 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



fork configuration including two extensions which are ori- chamber in order to additionally agitate the fuel through ex- 

ented radially on either side of the cam surface and, between pansion and to lower the flow velocity of same as the fuel 

said extensions, a curved surface engaging said cam surface so flows through said first agitating screen means into the heating 

that rotation of said shaft imparts oscillating axial motion to chamber, said lowering of said flow velocity allows the fuel to 

said push rod and swinging movement to said second end of j,pg„jj adequate time in said heating chamber to be heated by 

said push rod, said two extensions residing in said groove and jj,g heating coil; said point of communication opening of the 



being engageable with the side walls of said groove whereby 
said swinging movement of said second end of said push rod is 
accommodated, whereby said second end of said push rod is 



/r^,-' 




fuel exit conduit has a diameter smaller than the diameter of the 
generally cylindrical heating chamber in order to increase the 
velocity of the heated fuel as it passes through the second 
agitating screen means into the exit conduit of the shell body; 
an overmold means circumscribing the shell body, said electri- 
cal conduit means passing through said overmold means; and 
said overmold means circumscribes the structural portion of 
said shell body that defines the heating chamber. 



guided by said side walls in the longitudinal direction of said 
shaft and whereby no extra guidance is needed in the axial 
direction of said push rod, wherein said push rod comprising 
first and second longitudinal portions and means connecting 
said first and second portions in end-to-end relationship in a 
manner to accommodate angular play during said transverse 
movements of said first end, said first longitudinal portion 
incorporating said first end and said second longitudinal por- 
tion incorporating said second end. 



4,391,260 
FLUID PRESSURE RESPONSIVE VALVE DEVICE 

Kiyonobu Asahi, Anjo, Japan, assignor to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki 
Kaisba, Kariya, Japan 

Filed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,786 
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 17, 1979, 54-164322 
Int. a.3 F02M 25/06 
U.S. a. 123—568 8 Qaims 



4,391,259 

FUEL CONDITIONER AND METHOD OF 

CONDITIONING FUEL TO AN INTERNAL 

COMBUSTION ENGINE THEREWITH 

Milfred W. Urban, 1819 N. Edwards, Wichita, Kans. 67203 

Filed May 22. 1981, Ser. No. 266,332 

Int. CI.' F02M 15/00 



U.S. CI. 123—557 



3 Claims 




1. A fuel conditioner comprising a conduit shell body having 
a pair of compression connection ends; said shell body having 
a structure defining a fuel entrance conduit, a fuel exit conduit 
and a heating chamber interposed between the entrance con- 
duit and the exit conduit and in communication with each; a 
first agitating screen means and a second agitating screen 
» means respectively covering the point of communication open- 
ing of the entrance conduit and the exit conduit with the heat- 
ing chamber; a pair of electrical conduit means passing through 
said shell body into said heating chamber; a heating coil means 
electrically attached in series to the ends of said pair of electri- 
cal conduits in said heating chamber; and electrical power 
means engaging the other ends of said electrical conduits for 
energizing the heating coil means, said fuel entrance conduit 
and said fuel exit conduit are essentially aligned in the same 
plane and directly opposed with respect to each other; said 
heating chamber is generally cylindrical, said point of commu- 
nication opening of said fuel entrance conduit has a diameter 
smaller than the diameter of said generally cylindrical heating 




1. A fiuid pressure responsive valve device including an 
exhaust gas recirculation device, said fluid pressure responsive 
valve device comprising: 

a body having an inlet port, at least one signal pressure port 
connected to an engine intake means and first and second 
outlet ports formed therein, 

means disposed within said body movable in response to 
fluid pressure communicated to said signal pressure port, 

a hollow rod secured to said movable means and comprising 
a part of a first passage member connecting said inlet port 
and said first outlet port, 

a second passage member for connecting said inlet port and 
said second outlet port, said second passage member in- 
cluding restriction means, said second outlet port being in 
fiuid communication with said exhaust gas recirculation 
device, and 

a plurality of first valve means arranged within said first and 
second passages, respectively, to thereby control fluid 
communication through said first and second passage 
members in response to movement of said movable means, 

wherein said exhaust gas recirculation device comprises a 
third passage member connected between an engine ex- 
haust manifold and said intake means, said third passage 
member including parallel flow portions, wherein said 
exhaust gas recirculation device further comprises second 
valve means connected to said intake means for selectively 
closing said third passage member and third valve means 
connected to said third passage member for selectively 
closing one of said parallel flow portions of said third 
passage member. 



July 5, 983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



103 



4,391,261 
CARBURETOR ACTUATING SYSTEM FOR V-ENGINES 

Yoshiaki Tomita, Hamakita, Japan, assignor to Yamaha Hat- 
sudoki Kabushiki Kalsha, Iwata, Japan 

Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,932 

Claims |Mriority, application Japan, Jul. 8, 1980, 55-107649 

Int. a.3 F02B 13/00 

U.S. a. 123—584 8 Qaims 




1. A dual carburetor system for a V-engine utilizing two 
carburetors, each having a throttle valve stem protruding 
through at least one side, the protruding valve stem of one 
having connected to it a drive arm, and the protruding valve 
stem of the other having connected to it a driven arm. charac- 
terized in that the carburetors are positioned side by side in the 
V-shaped space between two engine cylinders with said valve 
stems having said drive arm and driven arm fixed thereto 
protruding toward each other; said drive arm being connected 
to said driven arm by means of two connecting links hinged to 
the respective drive and driven arms at one end of each and 
hinged to each other at their other ends; and a slot in a plate 
between the carburetors to constrain motion of said hinge 
between the links along a perpendicular bisector of a line 
passing through the axes of the protruding valve stems of the 
two carburetors. 




1. Ignition system for an internal combustion engine having 

means (16) operating similarly to an a-c generator for gener- 
ating an ignition signal (\i\6)\ 

an ignition coil (5, 6); 

a controlled switch (7, 8) controlling current flow through 
the ignition coil; 

and a signal processing stage (32, 9) interconnecting the 



signal generating means (16) and the controlled switch (7, 
8) for rendering the controlled switch conductive, to store 
electromagnetic energy in the coil, at an instant of time 
during which the ignition signal changes in value in a first 
predetermined direction, and rendering the controlled 
switch non-conductive, and hence interrupting current 
flow through the coil and cause a high-voltage ignition 
pulse to appear thereacross, at an instant of time during 
which the ignition signal changes values, and in opposite 
direction, 

wherein, in accordance with the invention. 

the signal processing stage includes means (32) deriving a 
first control signal portion (Ua-Ub) occurring in advance 
of the peak value of the ignition signal, and having an at 
least approximately uniformly changing rate in said first 
direction during at least part of the time when the ignition 
signal changes level or value in the opposite direction; 

and means (33) combining said first control signal portion 
and the ignition signal at a time (Ub) when both the igni- 
tion signal and the first portion of the control signal are 
changing in said first direction, and said ignition signal is 
at a level below its peak value (Us), 

so that the differential, in a voltage-time diagram of the 
control signal portion (Ua-Ub) and the ignition signal 
portion below the peak thereof (Ub-Us) will have the 
same sign. 



i 



4,391,263 
BOWSTRING RELEASE DE\ ICE 
Paul A. Dodge, Rte. 3, Menomonie, Wis. 54751 

Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,355 
Int. CI,' F41B 5/00 
U.S. CI. 124—35 A 



27 Claims 



4,391,262 

IGNITION SYSTEM FOR AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION 

ENGINE 

Richard Schleupen, Ingersheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor 
to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313,358 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 28, 
1980, 3040509 

Int. a.3 F02P 1/00 
U.S. a. 123—618 8 Qaims 




1. A bowstring release device useable by an archer in con- 
junction with an arrow and a bowstring mounted on a bow to 
effect release of the bowstring to discharge the arrow along an 
intended forward longitudinal path of travel, said device com- 
prising: 

^ a housing having interior walls defining an interior cavity 
with a latch opening and a trigger opening; 
a latch member having a generally fiat central base located 
in the cavity for rotation about an axis generally perpen- 
dicular to the intended longitudinal path of travel of the 
arrow and having a generally segmented circular arcuate 
rib portion outwardly extended from both sides of the 
base in a direction parallel to said axis of rotation; 
said interior walls defining said cavity shaped to closely 
conform to the latch member and having generally seg- 
mented circular arcuate groove means on both sides of the 
base located to define the path of travel of the rib portion 
of the latch member upon rotation of the latch member in 
the cavity, said rib portion of the latch member being 
movably located in said groove means to support the latch 
member and to guide rotation of the latch member about 
said axis generally perpendicular to the intended- longitu- 
dinal path of travel of the arrow; 
said latch member having a generally rearwardly facing 
shoulder accessible through the latch opening defining a 
cord retaining seat rotatable between a cord retaining 



104 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



position and a cord release position upon rotation of the 
latch member; 

trigger means in said cavity having a trigger finger extended 
through the trigger opening for engagement and move- 
ment by an archer, said trigger means operatively con- 
nected to the latch member for rotation of the latch mem- 
ber from the cord retaining position to the cord release 
position upon movement of the trigger finger; and 

handle means connected to the housing. 



4,391,264 

BALL PITCHING APPARATUS 

Jeffrey L. Abraham, 218 Maplewood, San Antonio, Tex. 78216, 

and Gary D. Banse, 546 Gilbert, San Antonio, Tex. 78213 

Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,660 

Int. a.3 F41B 7/00 

U.S. a. 124—50 4 aaims 




1. A ball feeding apparatus for an automatic ball pitching 
machine, comprising: 

a power drive means for driving the machine; 

a ball de-jammer means operated by the power drive means 
for preventing the clogging of balls being delivered to a 
ball throwing arm, 

a ball container having a stationary sloping floor member for 
holding a plurality of balls for delivery to said ball de-jam- 
mer means which is adjacent said container; 

said ball de-jammer means having a ball de-jammer operated 
by the drive means to engage balls for preventing jam- 
ming of balls to a ball feed channel to allow at least one 
ball to be supplied from the ball container at predeter- 
mined intervals; 

said de-jammer means having a tilting floor member mov- 
able between horizontal rest and inclined positions to 
selectively roll balls to a ball feed channel; 

said de-jammer means having a horizontally reciprocating 
member to engage and remove balls so as to prevent a 
plurality of balls in the ball container from engaging and 
jamming a ball which is to be released by the tilting action 
of said tilting floor member upon operation of the de-jam- 
mer means by the power drive means. 



4,391,265 
KEY-(TOUCH-) CONTROLLED GAS RANGE 

Si-Yu Chen, 37 Kueiyang St. Sec. 1, Taipei, Taiwan 
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,181 
Int. a.3 F24C i/OO 
U.S. a. 126—39 E 3 Qaims 

1. A controlled gas range comprising: 

means for adjusting the flame intensity in a controlled man- 
ner; 

a continuous electronic ignition circuit; 

a valve; and 

a burner, 

characterized in that said valve includes a rotor defining a 
plurality of channels therein, a housing and a servo-motor 
connected to said rotor, a gas inlet and a gas outlet said gas 
outlet having a diameter slightly greater or equal to that of 
the largest channel within the rotor, said gas inlet and said 
gas outlet being respectively provided on said housing in 



an opposing relationship to each other, said gas inlet fur- 
ther being connected to a gas source and said gas outlet 
further being directed to the burner; 

said housing further including an upper face defining a small 
orifice with a diameter sufficient to supply the amount of 
gas for a base fire, said orofice being connected to and 
adjacent to said electronic ignition circuit of said burner 
by a tube; 

said plurality of channels including communicating channels 
and at least one blocked channel at symmetrical positions 
in said rotor, the size of said communicating channels 
being different for each symmetrical position, said com- 



^«H, 



r^.-s^-T^n 



U' 



i 4;- 



' hi ' 

B- ac E tr 









->s. 



il 



±- 




20 



municating channels communicating with the center of 
said rotor so that there are channels with different sizes 
connected between said gas inlet and outlet under differ- 
ent rotating angles of said rotor thereby directing various 
amounts of gas to said burner, said gas inlet and said outlet 
both being blocked by said rotor when said rotor is ro- 
tated with an angle for said blocked channel to cut off the 
gas supply, said channels including one base fire channel 
which is blocked at one end so that the base fire channel 
is only connected between said gas inlet and said orifice 
when said rotor is rotated with an angle for said base fire 
channel. 



4,391,266 
STOVE APPARATUS 
Arthur J. Leffers, 13004 Tonkel Rd., Fort Wayne, Ind. 46825 
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,431 
Int. a.3 F24B 7/00 
U.S. CI. 126—123 16 Qaims 

1. Stove apparatus comprising a firebox, a heat-exchange 
housing enclosing said firebox and spaced therefrom to pro- 
vide air circulating passages, said firebox having a top, lateral 
sides and a rear end, said housing also having a bottom, top, 
lateral sides and a rear end respectively spaced in substantial 
parallelism from the corresponding parts of said firebox, a 
front closure on said firebox having an access door, said spaced 
lateral sides of said firebox and housing defining air inlet pas- 
sages having at the front ends thereof air inlet ports, said 
spaced tops defining an air outlet passage in communication 
with said inlet passages and having at the front end thereof an 
air outlet port, means connected to said inlet ports for supply- 
ing a flow of air to said inlet passages, means for admitting 
combustion air to said firebox, and means for venting smoke 
from said firebox in by-passing relation to said housing and said 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



105 



top air outlet passage, said firebox projecting beyond the front 4,391,268 

portion of said housing, said top of said firebox being in the SOLAR WATER HEATER CONTROL AND PROTECTION 
form of a plate having a flat horizontal portion which projects SYSTEM 

forwardly of said housing and is exposed thereby providing a Donovan B. Mathes; Floyd B. Hamilton, and Douglas C. Spreng, 

all of Lake Havasu City, Ariz., assignors to Solar Dynamics 




> 



stove top, said top plate of said firebox engaging at the lateral 
edges thereof said housing sides thereby further defining said 
inlet passages, the space between said housing and firebox rear 
ends serving to connect said inlet passages to said outlet pas- 
sage. 



4,391,267 
HEAT STORAGE MATERIAL 
Gustaf O. Arrhenius, La Jolla, Calif., assignor to Kay Laborato- 
ries, Inc., San Diego, Calif. 

Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,547 

Int. a.3 F24H 7/00; C09K 3/18: F28D 77/00 

U.S. a. 126—400 15 Claims 





1. In combination, 

a melt formed from at least one of sodium thiosulfate penta- 
hydrate and sodium sulfate decahydrate and having prop- 
erties of crystallizing into a monolithic mass when nucle- 
ated, and 

an additive material having properties of dissolving stably in 
the melt and metastably in the growing crystals and ex- 
solving to separate the resulting crystallites and limit their 
size and having properties of providing the solution of the 
additive material in the melt with chemically basic proper- 
ties, 

the additive material consisting of at least one of disodium 
hydrogen phosphate, trisodium phosphate and their potas- 
sium and ammonium analogs. 



Inc., Lake Havasu, Ariz. 

Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 238,108 
Int. a.i F24J 3/02 
U.S. a. 126—437 




2 Qaims 



O ^e 



1. A solar water heater system wherein a collector receives 
a liquid from a tank through a feed conduit and provides said 
liquid to said tank through a return conduit, and first and 
second drain down valves connected to said first and second 
conduits, respectively, are operable to drain said liquid from 
said system, comprising: 

first and second isolating valves resjjectively situated in said 
feed and return conduits that isolate said tank from said 
conduits when said fluid is being drained; 
a venting valve connected to said collector and to the atmo- 
sphere that allows a flow of air therethrough into said 
conduits and said collector in response to said system 
being drained; 
a reversible gear motor; and 

linkage means for sealing said isolating valves prior to open- 
ing said drain down valves and for closing said drain 
down valves prior to opening said isolating valves. 



4,391,269 

CONTROLLED SOLAR HEATING AND HEAT 

RETENTION OF LIQUID 

W. Keith R. Watson, P.O. Box 1537, Rancho Santa Fe, Calif. 

92067 

Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 305,970 

Int. CV F24J 3/02: G02B 5/08 

U.S. Q. 126—437 11 Qaims 



JO 




> ^i; ^- f .2 



r \ 








1. In solar heating apparatus: 

(a) a generally horizontally elongated tank to contain liquid, 
the tank being solar radiation absorbing, 

(b) a generally longitudinally extending horizontally elon- 
gated container extending about said tank, the container 
defining glazing facing one side of the tank and top por- 
tion of the tank, adapted to received impingement of solar 
radiation, the glazing spaced from the tank, and being 
insulative, 

(c) and solar radiation auxiliary reflecting panels including at 
least one panel projecting generally away from a region 
below the level of the lower extent of the tank and exteri- 
orly of the container to reflect solar radiation toward and 
through said glazing for impingement on the tank, said 



106 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



panels being hinge supported and having alternate posi- 
tions in which they have been swung to extend adjacent 
the glazing facing the side and top portion of the tank to 
block heat loss from the tank at night, 
(d) the container being polygonal in lateral upright planes, 
and having planar generally rectangular sections of said 
glazing, the panels sized in correspondence to said glazing 
sections to which they extend respectively adjacent, in 
said alternate positions. 



4,391,270 

MAGNETIC MEDICAL TREATMENT MEMBER 

Hideaki Uragami, 12-12, Mefugaoka, Takarazuka-shi, Hyogo 

665, Japan 
per No. PCr/JP80/00115, § 371 Date Apr. 6, 1981, § 102(e) 
Date Feb. 17, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00357, PCT Pub. 
Date Feb. 19, 1981 

PCT Filed May 28, 1980, Ser. No. 237,165 
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 6, 1979, 54-100519; 
Jan. 24, 1980, 55-7860[U] 

Int. Cl.^ A61N 1/42 
U.S. a. 128—1.3 13 Claims 




1. A magnetic treatment member comprising a generally flat 
magnetic press element mounted on a sticking surface of a 
sticking member, said magnetic press element having a gener- 
ally flat surface extending to an outer peripheral edge of said 
magnetic press element, said magnetic press element having an 
outer peripheral wall along said outer peripheral edge, and a 
plurality of projections protruding from said flat surface, said 
projections extending substantially to said outer peripheral 
edge such that said projections are substantially continuous 
with said outer peripheral wall, whereby the lines of magnetic 
force are concentrated on said projections. 




air or pure oxygen passing from the respirator into the first 
conduit tube; 

the drainage means disposed at a lowermost point of and 
extending longitudinally along the bottom portions of the 
first and second conduit tubes, said drainage means being 
in fluid communication with said first and second conduit 
tubes through a plurality of perforations opening into the 
drainage means from the first and second conduit tubes; 
and 

means to dispose of moisture passing through said perfora- 
tions into the drainage means from the first and second 
conduit tubes. 



4,391,272 
DISPOSABLE SYRINGE 

Jackie Staempfli, Paris, France, assignor to Tulcea, S.A., Vaduz, 
Liechtenstein 

Filed Mar. 9, 1979, Ser. No. 19,251 
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Mar. 10, 1978, 
2624/78 

Int. a.5 A61M 5/00 
U.S. a. 604—110 10 Oaims 



4,391,271 
RESPIRATOR CIRCUIT 
Albert Blanco, 3315 SW. 127th Ave., Miami, Fla. 33175 
j Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,358 

I Int. CI.' A61M 76/00 

U.S. a. 128—203.12 24 Qaims 






1. A respirator circuit comprising: 

first and second conduit tubes, the cross-section of which has 
opposed planar lower side portions that are angled oppo- 
sitely downwardly and inwardly toward drainage means 
connected thereto, said first and second conduit tubes in 
open connection respectively to first and second branches 
of a generally Y-shaped conduit tube portion, including a 
leg portion for open connection to a conventional endo- 
tracheal tube; 

a respirator connected to an end of the first conduit tube 
through a water cascade to humidify air, oxygen enriched 




1. A disposable syringe comprising: 

a cylinder, one end of which cylinder is formed with a 
nozzle whereby a syringe needle can be fixed to the cylin- 
der; 

an intake and delivery piston capable of sliding inside said 
cylinder comprising a body arranged so as to form a tight 
movable partition, said body having a circular groove or 
channel; 

a rod connected with the piston body so as to permit said 
body to be displaced by sliding movement in the cylinder; 

at least one resilient member provided in said piston body 
and having at least one peripheral rim or flange tending to 
be applied to the inside wall of said cylinder; 

at least one resilient sealing j'oint provided in said piston of 
which at least one peripheral part in the form of an O-ring 
is retained by a wedging action between the inside wall of 
the cylinder and said circular groove or channel of said 
piston body; 

at least a first circular groove, in the inside wall of said 
cylinder, perpendicular to the axis of the cylinder and 
having an edge capable of retaining the rim of the resilient 
member; and 

at least one second circular groove, in the inside wall of said 
cylinder, perpendicular to the axis of the cylinder and 
arranged in such a way as to receive the toroidal part of 
the sealing joint; 

whereby the said first groove and said second groove are so 
disposed as to cause, when the piston body is pulled in a 
rearward direction, the disconnection of the sealing joint 
from the piston body and the retention thereof in thf 
second groove, and then the locking of the rim or edge of 
the resilient member against the edge of the first groove 
opposite to that end of the cylinder which has the nozzle. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



107 



4,391,273 
NON-REUSABLE, DISPOSABLE SYRINGES 

Marcelo Chiquiar-Arias, Mexico City, Mexico, assignor to 
Mercantile & Technical Promotions Inc., New York, N.Y. 

Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,264 

Claims priority, application Mexico, Aug. 8, 1980, 183508 

Int. C\? A61M 5/00 

U.S. a. 604—110 9 Qaims 




4,391,274 

nLTERED HUB DEVICE FOR ASPIRATING AND 
INJECTING LIQUIDS 
Jonathan Kagan, Fairview, Pa., assignor to Becton, Dickinson 
and Company, Paramus, N.J. 

1 1 Filed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,475 
1 1 Int. a.3 A61M 5/00 

U.S. a. 604—190 1 Qaim 

1. A hub device for use in aspirating and injecting liquids 
comprising: 
a housing having a chamber therein, a first opening for 
aspirating liquid into the chamber and for injecting liquid 
out of the chamber and a second opening extending 
through a mouth portion which is adapted to connect to a 
mating portion of a liquid movement device which serves 
as a driving force for aspirating liquid into and injecting 
liquid out of said device, said openings being located on 
opposite sides of said housing in substantially axial align- 
ment with each other; 



a tubular valve in said chamber having a flexible, operable 
closure element on opposite ends thereof; and 

a filter in said chamber adapted to filter particulate matter 
from liquids passing therethrough, said filter also serving 
as a support member to maintain said valve in position in 
said chamber, said filter surrounding said valve including 
the first operable closure element thereof, said first ele- 
ment of said valve being positioned directly over said first 
opening and normally closing radially outwardly against 
said surrounding filter in an orientation substantially paral- 
lel to the axial alignment of said openings so that the 
interior of said tubular valve is in liquid communication 




1. A disposable syringe which renders itself non-reusable 
which comprises a rigid cylinder having a bottom wall at one 
end with an opening for the exit of the solution to be injected, 
and having the other end open, support flanges being affixed to 
said cylinder adjacent the open end and extending outwardly 
from the axis of the cylinder, an injection needle integrally 
attached to the bottom wall of the cylinder and extendmg 
outwardly beyond said bottom wall and communicating with 
said opening, and a plunger with a piston slidably positioned 
within the cylinder with the piston adjacent the closed end of 
the cylinder and the other end of said plunger being adapted 
for pressing to force the piston toward the bottom wall, the 
piston having puncturing means extending longitudinally 
therefrom and adapted to puncture the bottom wall of said 
cylinder so as to prevent reuse, and an annular protrusion 
extending beyond the bottom wall of the cylinder and integral 
therewith and having such dimensions as to prevent the user's 
fingers from being pricked by the puncturing means extending 
through the bottom wall of the cylinder, said needle extending 
a sufficient distance beyond said annular protrusion to permit 
insertion of said needle in said patient, and which includes a 
cover plate for the opening at the forward end of the annular 
protrusion, said cover plate having a centrally disposed open- 
ing, said injection needle having a diameter less than the inner 
diameter of said opening in said cover plate and passing 
through said opening. 



with said first opening whereby liquid flowing through 
said first opening during aspiration is directed through 
said tubular member, said first element adapted to flexibly 
move away from said filter to thereby open and place said 
first opening in liquid communication with the chamber 
exterior to said tubular valve during injection of liquid 
into the chamber through said second opening, said sec- 
ond element mcluding an operable slot adapted to open 
dunng aspiration of liquid inwardly through said first 
opening and normally close under static conditions and 
remain closed upon injection of liquid into said chamber 
through said second opening. 



4,391,275 
METHOD FOR THE SURGICAL TREATMENT OF THE 

EYE 
Franz Fankhauser; Eugen van der Zypen, both of Bern, and 
Philippe Roussel, Thun, all of Switzerland, assignors to Lasag 
AG, Thun, Switzerland 

Filed Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,202 
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Nov. 28, 1979, 
10570/79; France, Mar. 5, 1980, 80 04994 
Int. Q.' A61B 17/36 
U.S. CI. 128—303.1 13 Claims 




1. For a method of non-invasive surgical treatment of the 
eye which comprises the steps of 

forming a convergent treatment laser beam, 

directing the focus of the convergent treatment laser beam 

onto the structure to be treated, 
shifting the focus with respect to the structure to be a certain 

distance in front of or behind the structure, 
delivering the treatment laser beam into said focus where the 

radiation intensity performs the surgery, 
an improvement to prevent damage to the structure of the 

eye not being treated, the improvement comprising the 

steps of: 

generating visible ancillary lower power laser observation 



108 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



beams to sense the outside envelope of the treatment 
laser beam, 

rotating said laser observation beam's around the optical 
axis of said laser treatment beam, said laser observation 
beams intersecting in the focus position of the laser 
treatment beam, 

shifting the focus position of the treatment beam along the 
optical axis with respect to the intersection' point of said 
laser observation beams, 

directing the laser observation beams onto treatment point 
of the structure to be irradiated so that they intersect 
said structure and provide dots of light thereon for 
observation purposes, 

inspecting the path of the observation laser beams to 
determine if the treatment beam on its pass into the 
focus will touch eye structure not being treated, 

adjusting the treatment laser beam in accordance with the 
results of the inspection step to ensure that the treat- 
ment beam does not touch structures not to be treated, 
and 

delivering the treatment laser beam into the focus to cause 
the surgery. 



middle of the chest of the user for supporting the breast in a 
first mode when the breast is positioned there from gravity and 
said opposite end of the pleated portion being closed, and said 
middle pleated portion being adapted for expanding into a cup 



4,391,276 
PERITONEAL CATHETER 

Harrison Lazarus, 1474 Penrose Dr., Salt Lake City, Utah 
84103, and James A. Nelson, 1708 Forest Hills Dr., Salt Lake 
City, Utah 84106 
; Filed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 217,127 

Int. a.3 A61M 25/00 
U.S. tn. 604—266 - 5 Qaims 




13- 




\ 



at the other end away from said vertical chest wound for 
supporting the breast in a second mode when the breast is 
positioned there from gravity and said opposite end of said 
pleated portion being closed. 



4,391,278 

TAPE ELECTRODE 

Patrick T. Cahalan, Champlin, and Arthur J. Coury, St. Paul, 

both of Minn., assignors to Medtronic, Inc., Minneapolis, 

Minn. 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 968,489, Dec. 11, 1978, 

abandoned. This application Feb. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 121,387 

Int. CV A61B 5/04 

U.S. a. 128—640 15 Qaims 



1. A catheter comprising: 

a thin-walled, hollow-bore tubular member having an open- 
ing on an extraction end, said tubular member having a 
hollow-bore diameter of from about 1.0 to about 3.5 milli- 
meters and an external diameter of from about 2.0 to about 
4.0 millimeters; 

a plurality of sidewall openings in said tubular member, said 
openings having protrusions associated therewith pro- 
truding from the exterior sidewall, at least a substantial 
portion of said protrusions being longitudinally aligned 
with a substantial portion of said sidewall openings, said 
sidewall openings having a diameter of from about 0.01 to 
about 2.0 millimeters and said sidewall protrusions project 
from about 0.01 to about 1.0 millimeter from the exterior 
wall surface. 



4,391,277 
BREAST SUPPORT 
Marian L. Horvat, 3811 W. Pleasant Valley Rd., Parma, Ohio 
44134 

Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 238,880 
Int. a.3 A41C 3/00 
U.S. a. 128—492 4 Qaims 

1. A breast support comprising a long narrow cloth strip, 
said cloth strip having a middle pleated portion which is 
adapted for expanding open into a cup for automatically ad- 
justing to any breast size, and means for adjusting said strip to 
various lengths, said middle pleated portion adapted for ex- 
panding into a cup at one end near a vertical wound in the 




1. A skin electrode consisting g^entially of: 

an adhesive electrically conductive skin-contacting member 
consisting essentially of a polymer component selected 
from the group consisting of polymerized 2-acrylamido-2- 
methylpropanesulfonic acid, its salts, copolymers of the 
acid, copolymers of the salts of the acid, and mixtures 
thereof, and a second component selected from the group 
consisting of water, alcohols and mixtures thereof, suffi- 
cient relative amounts of the polymer component and the 
second component being included to provide adhesive- 
ness and flexibility to the member, and 

electrical contact means connected to the conductive mem- 
ber for establishing electrical contact therewith. 



4,391,279 
ELECTRODE BELT 
Israel M. Stein, Brookline, Mass., assignor to Oinical Data, 
Inc., Brookline, Mass. 

Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,646 
Int. aj A61B 5/04 
U.S. a. 128—643 8 Qaims 

1. An electrode belt which comprises a belt of soft pliable 
material, a sheet of conductive, flexible, compliant, impervious 
material providing an electrode pad having opposite surfaces, 
one of which is disposed upon said belt and the other against 
the wearer when the belt is on the wearer, a fastener of con- 
ductive material having opposed plates disposed in clamping 
relationship with said pad and belt therebetween to form a 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



109 



depression in said pad of cup shape to provide a suction area 
between the skin of the wearer, the pad and one of said plates. 




said fastener having means providing an attachment for an 
electrode lead. 



4,391,280 
ENEMA APPARATA IMPROVEMENTS RELATING TO 

DOUBLE CONTRAST STUDIES 
Roscoe E. Miller, 7400 W. 88th St., Indianapolis, Ind. 46278 
Division of Ser. No. 131,965, Apr. 4, 1980, Pat. No. 4,333,460, 
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 39,502, May 16, 1979, 
abandoned. This application Noy. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 326,015 
Int. Q.3 A61B 5/00 
U.S. Q, 128—654 i Qaim 




1. An enema-administering apparatus insertable into the 
rectum for delivery of a contrast medium to internal portions 
of a patient's anatomy, for the subsequent removal of said 
contrast medium, and for the delivery of air to said internal 
portions of the anatomy after the contrast medium has been 
removed, said enema-administering apparatus comprising: 
a generally tubular stem having a free end, an opposite insert- 
able end and a first contrast medium passageway extending 
therethrough from a contrast medium inject location adja- 
cent said free end to a contrast medium discharge location 
adjacent said insertable end, said tubular stem further having 
a first air passageway disposed completely external of said 
first contrast medium passageway, said first air passageway 
extending through said tubular stem from an air inject loca- 
tion adjacent said free end to an air discharge location adja- 
cent said insertable end; 
an enlarged hollow tip cooperatively arranged with said stem 
and disposed adjacent said insertable end, said hollow tip 
having a contrast medium exit aperture disposed therein and 
defining a second contrast medium passageway arranged in 
flow communication with and disposed between said first 
contrast medium passageway and said contrast medium exit 
aperture, said tip further having an air delivery outlet open- 
ing disposed therein and defining a second air passageway 
which is disposed completely external of said second con- 
trast medium passageway and arranged in flow communica- 
tion with and disposed between said first air passageway and 
said air delivery outlet opening; 
said air delivery outlet opening is spaced apart from said con- 
trast medium exit aperture so as to avoid the entry of said 
contrast medium into said second air passageway. 



4,391,281 
ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER SYSTEM AND METHOD 
Philip S. Green, Atherton, Calif., assignor to SRI International, 
Menio Park, Calif. 

Filed Jan. 6, 1977, Ser. No. 757,132 

Int. Q.^ A61B 10/00 

U.S. Q. 128-660 13 Qaims 




1. A medical ultrasonic system for the non-invasive examina- 
tion of a soft tissue region within a subject's body comprising, 

focusing transducer means, 

a container for said focusing transducer -means having a 
liquid tight acoustically transparent rigid diaphragm for 
acoustically coupling directly to the subject's skin, 

sonic coupling liquid within the container for acoustically 
coupling the focusing transducer means to said dia- 
phragm, 

pulse operated transmitter/receiver means connected to said 
transducer means for energization of said transducer 
means for producing ultrasonic waves which are coupled 
to the subject's skin through said coupling liquid and 
diaphragm and for processing electrical signals produced 
by said transducer means upon receipt of ultrasonic waves 
reflected from discontinuities within the tissue of the 
subject, and 

indicating means for the display of echo signals received 
from discontinuities within the subject's body, 

the material of said coupling liquid being selected so that the 
velocity of propagation of acoustic waves therein is sub- 
stantially less than the velocity of propagation of acoustic 
waves in said soft tissue, 

the acoustic path between the transducer means and dia- 
phragm being substantially less than the maximum dis- 
tance in soft tissue within the subject's body from which 
echo signals are received and displayed without interfer- 
ence by display of multiple reflections from the dia- 
phragm. 



4,3.91,282 
COELIAC CAVITY ULTRASONIC DIAGNOSIS 
APPARATUS 
Otaro Ando, Hino, and Toshitaka Suwaki, Hachioji, both of 
Japan, assignors to Olympus Optical Company Limited, To- 
kyo, Japan 

Filed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 198,246 
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 24, 1979, 54-136442; 
Oct. 24, 1979, 54-136443; Sep. 12, 1980, 55-126966 

Int. Q.3 A61B 5/02 
U.S. Q. 128-660 22 Qaims 

1. A coeliac cavity ultrasonic diagnosis apparatus including 
a scanner portion insertable into a physical body of a patient 
and operative to effect a B-mode sector scan of an ultrasonic 
wave to produce a tomographic image, comprising 

(a) an endoscope including at least an observation means and 
illumination means and provided at its side surface near 
the distal end portion thereof with an opening; 

(b) an ultrasonic signal transducer fixed to the distal end 
portion of the endoscope for generating and transmitting 
ultrasonic wave radiation in a direction substantially 



110 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



aligned with the axial direction of an insertable f)ortion of 
said endoscope; 

(c) a reflecting mirror opposed to and inclined at substan- 
tially a constant angle with respect to the ultrasonic wave 
radiation surface of the ultrasonic signal transducer and 
rotatably mounted at the opening provided at the distal 
end portion of said endoscope; 

(d) a power means provided in an operating portion located 
in the rear of said endoscope and operative to rotate said 

I reflecting mirror; 

(e) a flexible shaft extending through a flexible portion of 
said endoscope and transmitting the rotation of said power 

1 means to said reflecting mirror; 

(0 an initial pulse generating means rotatable together with 
said reflecting mirror at the distal end portion of said 
endoscope to generate a pulse just prior to the arrival of 
said reflecting mirror at a given position so as to define a 
display starting point at every ultrasonic scanning frame; 




(g) an angle detecting means arranged in said operating 
portion located in the rear of said endoscope and rotatable 
in synchronism with said rotary shaft of said power means 
to detect the rotary angle of said power means and gener- 
ate a pulse each time said rotary shaft rotates by a constant 
angle; 

(h) means for obtaining a reflecting signal for reproducing an 
ultrasonic image from a pulse delivered from said initial 
pulse generating means and from a pulse delivered from 
said angle detecting means; 

(i) a brightness modulating means operative to transmit the 
ultrasonic wave to said ultrasonic signal transducer and 
receive the ultrasonic wave therefrom to effect brightness 
modulation of the signal received; and 

h) means for displaying the ultrasonic image from said de- 
flecting signal and brightness modulating signal. 



a visually-perceptible incentive indication for the patient; 
and 




inhibiting means responsive to inhalation suction force 
above a predetermined force for inhibiting said incentive 
indication. 



4,391,284 
USE IN MODIFYING SMOKING TOBACCO AROMA 
AND FLAVOR OR MONO-OXOMETHYL SUBSTITUTED 
POLYHYDRODIMETHANONAPHTHALENE 
DERIVATIVES 
Mark A. Sprecker, Sea Bright; Marie R. Hanna, Hazlet; Rich- 
ard J. Tokarzewski, Keyport; Robert P. Belko, Woodbridge; 
Hugh Watkins, Lincroft, and Manfred H. Vock, Locust, all of 
N.J., assignors to International Flavors & Fragrances Inc., 
New York, N.Y. 

Filed Mar. 2. 1982, Ser. No. 354,387 

Int. a.3 A24B 3/12, 15/30 

U.S. a. 131—276 10 aaims 

GLC PROFILE FOR EXAMPLE I 



I , 4,391,283 

INCENTIVE SPIROMETER 

Edward N. Sharpless, Somerville; Marvin Gordon, East Winsor, 
and Joseph Lichtenstein, Colonia, all of N.J., assignors to 
Whitman Medical Corporation, Oark, N.J. 

I Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,097 

Int. a.3 A61B 5/08 

U.S. a. 128—725 29 Claims 

1. An incentive spirometer comprising: 
a flow path through which a patient can inhale air; 
means responsive to air flow in said flow path for providing 



•4 A 



1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma or taste 
of a consumable material selected from the group consisting of 
smoking tobacco compositions and smoking tobacco articles 
comprising the step of adding to said consumable material an 
aroma or taste augmenting or enhancing quantity of at least 
one compound defined according to the structure: 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



111 




wherein the dashed line represents a carbon-carbon double 
bond or a carbon-carbon single bond; wherein R|, R]', Rj", 
Rl' ", Ri"", R3, Rs, Rs', Rs", Rs"', Rs"" and Ra represent 
hydrogen or methyl; with the provisos: 
. (i) at least four of Ri, Ri', Ri", Ri"' and Ri"" represents 
hydrogen; and 
(ii) at least four of R5, R5', R5", R5'", R5"" represent hydro- 
gen; 
with Z being a moiety selected from the group consisting of: 



y 
X 



o 



H 



H 



\ 



PR7 

+ 
+ 
+ 
+ 
ORs 



4,391,286 

HAIR CONDITIONING AND COMPOSITION 

THEREFOR 

Du Y. Hsiung, Park Forest; Chester A. Davis, Berwyn, and 

Harold J. Nicholson. Roselle, all of III., assignors to Helene 

Curtis Industries, Chicago, III. 

Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 236,127 

Int. Cl.^ A45D 7/00 

U.S.a. 132-7 16aaims 

1. A composition for conditioning hair comprising water 
having dissolved therein about 0.05 to about 5 weight percent 
of a quaternary nitrogen-containing polymer having a molecu- 
lar weight between about 10,000 and about 10,000,000 and 
about 0.5 to about 10 weight percent of a water-soluble, disul- 
fide-containing polycarboxylic acid or salt thereof, said com- 
position having a pH value at 80° F. from about 4 to about 9. 

9. A process for treating hair whose configuration is to be 
altered including the steps of: 
applying the composition of claim 1 to the hair; 
distributing said composition substantially evenly throughout 

said hair; and 
altering the configuration of the hair while the hair is at least 

partially damp. 



H /K 

'C— o o 



-c— o 

H 



; and 



H-C— OH 



with the line 



■' [+ + + + ] 

representing a carbon-carbon single bond or no bond at all; and 
R7 and Rg being separately C1-C4 lower alkyl or, taken to- 
gether, being C2-C4 alkylene. 



4,391,285 
SMOKING ARTICLE 
George H. Burnett, Richmond; Warren E. Qaflin, Bon Air; 
Harry V. Lanzillotti, Midlothian; A. Qifton Lilly, Jr., Rich- 
mond; John F. Nienow, Midlothian; Thomas S. Osdene, and 
Alline R. Wayte, both of Richmond, all of Va., assignors to 
Philip Morris, Incorporated, New York, N.Y. 
Filed May 9, 1980, Ser. No. 148,124 
Int. C\? A24B 3/14; A24F 1/00. 5/00 
U.S. CI. 131—364 . 27 Qaims 



/a 

^ 



l*""^'"* 



»^s\S\S\'sSS\svx^:v';\^:^^.^tt: ^. ^ .> .. ■ ■ v>..v.. - . ^ 



1. A smoking article comprising a coherent mass of combus- 
tible tobacco-containing material, said mass having at least one 
through passage extending from a first opening in the surface 
of said mass to a second opening remote from the first, said 
mass having a porosity such as to support combustion of said 
mass when ignited, said mass being of a density and porosity 
such as to substantially occlude gas flow therethrough, thereby 
providing that puff induced air flow through the smoking 
article is through the passage and said mass further being of a 
density, porosity and cross-sectional surface area such as to 
produce frcan 0.1 mg to 0.3 mg of tar per puff. 



4,391,287 
CLEANING APPARATUS FOR ENDOSCOPE 

Katunaga Konoshima, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus 
Optical Company Ltd., Japan 

Filed Mar. S^ 1981, Ser. No. 240,951 

Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 11, 1980, 55-47862 

Int. a.' B08B 3/12 

U.S. a. 134—99 11 Claims 




1. A cleaning apparatus for an endoscope, comprising: 

a cleaning vessel; a cleaning liquid supply mechanism for 
supplying a cleaning liquid including liquid detergent or 
the like to the cleaning vessel in which an endoscope to be 
cleaned may be disposed; 

a drain pipe connected t9 the cleaning vessel and through 
which the cleaning liqu\(l may be drained after it has been 
supplied to the cleaning 'vessel; 

a liquid disinfectant circulating mechanism for supplying a 
liquid disinfectant including a. tank for containing the 
disinfectant and being connected to the cleaning vessel to 
supply disinfectant to disinfect the endoscope after the 
cleaning liquid has been drained from the cleaning vessel, 
and the drain pipe being connectable to the tank for re- 
turning the liquid disinfectant from the cleaning vessel to 
the tank via the drain pipe, whereby residue detergent is 
mixed with the disinfectant Jis the disinfectant passes 
through the drain pipe; and 

means disposed within the liquid disinfectant circulating 
mechanism for supplying an anti-foaming agent there- 
through which is effective to prevent a foaming from 
occurring in the presence of any residue of detergent 
which has mixed with the disinfectant. 



112 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



431.288 

METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR EFFECTING RINSING 

OF AN INVERTED SIPHON, WHICH FORMS PART OF A 

SEWER 
Gosta Nilsson, Aratorpsvagen 38, Fritsla, Sweden (510 20) 
PCT No. PCT/SE80/00163, § 371 Date Feb. 11, 1981, § 102(e) 
Date Feb. 9, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02855, PCT Pub. 
Date Dec. 24, 1980 

per Filed Jun. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 237,143 
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jun. 11, 1979, 7905094 
Int. a.^ E03D 1/00: B08B 3/02 
U.S. a. 137—15 10 Qaims 




4,391,289 

CHECK VALVE FOR ROD OUT 

Donald L. Adams, P.O. Box T, Tulia, Tex. 79088 

Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 2<S4,578 

Int. a.' B08B 1/02: F16K 51/00 

U.S. a. 137—15 




d. mounting a packing gland upon said rod, and 

e. attaching said packing gland to the check valve before 
inserting the rod through the check valve and before 
unseating the check valve. 



1. A method for effecting rinsing of an inverted siphon 
which forms part of a sewer by interconnecting two separated 
sections of a sewer line comprising, arranging upstream of the 
inverted siphon a fluid reservoir having a volume which at 
least corresponds to the volume of the siphon for the length 
thereof requiring rinsing, and at least once every twenty-four 
hours applying a jet force in said siphon to cause the fluid 
contents of the reservoir to flow through the inverted siphon 
with a flow velocity which at least corresponds to the rinsing 
velocity required for removing sludge which has accumulated 
in the inverted siphon. 



14 Oaims 



4,391,290 

ALTITUDE SENSING CONTROL APPARATUS FOR A 

GAS TURBINE ENGINE 

Raymond L. Williams, Evendale, Ohio, assignor to General 
Electric Company, Cincinnati, Ohio 

Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 200,221 

Int. a.3 F16K 31/12, 49/00. 37/00 

U.S. a. 137—81.1 6 Oaims 







1. The process involving an opening such as a nozzle with a 
duct extending to the opening with the duct being closed by a 
main valve, wherein the improved method comprises: 

a. cleaning debris from the duct and the opening below the 
main valve by 

b. inserting a rod through a check valve on the distal end of 
the duct, through the main valve while the main valve is 
closed and through the duct, 

c. opening and unseating the check valve with said rod. 



1. Altitude sensing control apparatus for a gas turbine engine 
of the type including a compressor section which receives an 
input airflow and develops a pressurized output airflow, which 
comprises: 

(a) means coupled to ambient air for developing a first pneu- 
matic signal representative of ambient air pressure; 

(b) means coupled to said compressor section for receiving a 
portion of said pressurized output airflow and developing 
a second pneumatic signal representative of said pressur- 
ized output airflow; and 

(c) pneumatic valve switching means for receiving said first 
and second pneumatic signals and developing a control 
apparatus pneumatic output signal in which said pneu- 
matic valve switching means includes a first stage having 
a poppet valve for driving a second stage, including a 
drive piston, said piston being driven in a first direction for 
ambient air pressures greater than said predetermined 
value and being driven in a second opposing direction for 
ambient air pressures less than said predetermined value, 
said piston second stage including an output port, said 
pneumatic output signal at said output port comprising 
said first pneumatic signal when said piston is driven in the 
first direction and comprising said second pneumatic 
signal when said piston is driven in the second direction, 
said poppet valve being coupled to a bellows through a 
medially pivotable connecting link, said piston including a 
pair of opposing head portions separated by a rod portion 
and being sealingly located in said housing, a first region 
being defined between one of the opposing head portions 
of said piston and said housing, a second region being 
defined between said opposing head portions of said hous- 
ing and a third region being defined between the other 
opposing head portion of said housing, wherein said sec- 
ond region is coupled to receive said second pneumatic 
signal, said first region is coupled to receive said first 
pneumatic signal, said third region is coupled through said 
poppet valve to a region in said housing at ambient air 
pressure, said one opposing head portion including a servo 
orifice therethrough coupling said second region to said 
third region with said third region developing a third 
pneumatic signal representative of a servo pressure for 
controlling the movement of said piston, wherein: 

(i) said pneumatic output signal comprises said first pneu- 
matic signal for ambient air pressures greater than a 
predetermined value which is representative of a prede- 
termined altitude, and 

(ii) said pneumatic output signal comprises said second 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



11^ 



pneumatic signal for ambient air pressures less than said 
predetermined value. 



4,391,291 

APPARATUS FOR RECONSTITUTING A 

CONCENTRATE 

Ronald W. Hume, 848 Harbor Island, Qearwater, Fla. 33515 

.Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,757 

Int. a.3 F16K 19/00 



U.S. a. 137—99 



8 Oaims 




1. An apparatus of the type designed to reconstitute a liquid 
concentrate, said apparatus including a first reservoir for stor- 
ing the concentrate and a second reservoir for storing the 
reconstituted concentrate, and said apparatus further compris- 
ing, in combination, 

a pumping means operable to transfer predetermined 
amounts of concentrate from said first reservoir to said 
second reservoir, 

said pumping means including a first piston means carried by 
a first piston rod means, 

a motor means operable to deliver predetermined amounts 
of a reconstituting fluid to said second reservoir, 

said motor means including a second piston means carried by 
a second piston rod means, 

a yoking means for interconnecting said motor means in 
driving relation to said pumping means, 

said first and second piston rod means disposed in axial 
alignment with one another and operably interconnected 
to one another through said yoking means, 

a pair of multi-port, bi-directional valve means for operably 
interconnecting an external source of fluid under pressure 
in driving relation to said motor means, 

said pair of valve means ojjerably jhterconnected to one 
another so that one of said pair is a driving valve and the 
other of said pair is a driven valve, 

said driving valve being operably interconnected to said 
yoking means so that the position of said yoking means 
determines the opening and closing of the ports of said 
driving valve, 

said first piston rod means having a reduced diameter por- 
tion to provide a shoulder means between the reduced and 
un-reduced portions of said first piston rod means, 

said yoking means provided with an aperture means for 
receiving only the reduced diameter portion of said first 
piston rod means so that travel of said first piston rod 
means in a first direction toward said yoking means dis- 
places and yoking means by abutting a leading portion of 
said yoking means, but travel of said first piston rod means 
in a second direction away from said yoking means does 
not displace said yoking means. , 



4,391,292 
FAST-RESPONSE THREE-WAY SOLENOID VALVE 

Robert W. Millar, San Diego, Calif., assignor to Orshansky 
Transmission Corporation, New York, N.Y. 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 159,469, Jun. 16, 1980, 

abandoned. This application Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 172,661 

Int. a.3 F15B 13/044 

U.S. O. 137—269 21 Oaims 






19. A fast-response three-way solenoid valve, comprising: 

a housing having a first opening, a secnd opening, and a third 
opening interconnected by a linear fluid pathway, 

a first chamber disposed in said pathway between said first 
opening and said second opening, each end of said first 
chamber forming a first valve seat, one an inner valve seat 
and one an outer valve seat, with respect to said second 
opening, 

a first ball in said first chamber movable toward and away 
from a said first valve seat to open and to close off the 
flow of fluid through the pathway at said first valve seat, 

a second chamber disposed in said pathway m line with said 
first chamber and between said second opening and said 
third opening, each end of said second chamber forming a 
second valve seat, one an inner valve seat and one an outer 
valve seat, with respect to said second opening, 

a second ball in said second chamber movable toward and 
away from a said second valve seat to open and to close 
off the flow of fluid through the pathway at that said 
second valve seatt 

a separator pin disposed, with clearance, within said linear 
pathway between said first and second chambers and 
bearing against both said first and second balls at substan- 
tially all times, said valve seats, balls, and separator pin 
being so related that when one said ball is seated against its 
said seat the other ball is not seated by said separator pin, 

a solenoid having a coil, a plunger which moves upon ener- 
gization of the solenoid, and a guide passage between said 
plunger and said first chamber, aligned with both said first 
and second chambers and said first and second balls, 

a plunger pin disposed in said guide passage, one end of said 
plunger pin bearing against said first ball on the side 
thereof opposite to said separator pin, the other end of said 
plunger pin bearing against said plunger when said sole- 
noid is energized, 

movement of said plunger upon the energization of said 
solenoid causing said plunger to contact and move said 
plunger pin, in turn moving said first ball, said separator 
pin, and said second ball so that one of said balls is seated 
against the said seat when the solenoid is energized and 
the other ball is seated against its said seat when the sole- 
noid is de-energized. 



114 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4,391^3 
PACKING FOR EQUALIZING RESERVOIR CUT-OUT 

VALVE 
John R. Keenan, Watertown, N.Y^ assignor to General Signal 
I Corp., Stamford, Conn. 

Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,872 
' Int. CiJ F16K 51/00. 31/122 

UJS. a. 137—312 15 Qaims 




a mounting plate affixed to the diaphragm operator in said 
output chamber, 

said wall structure deflning an input port for the input cham- 
ber, an output port for the output chamber, and an aper- 
ture to communijpate said third chamber to atmosphere, 

a stem positioned 'in the output chamber, which stem is 
affixed to said mounting plate and operable by the dia- 
phragm operator, 

a seal means affixed near one end of the stem and positioned 
to abut said separating plate port, and 

a bias spring with a known bias force, positioned in the 
output chamber to bias the diaphragm operator and stem 
to open the separating plate port when the pressure differ- 
ence between the output and third chambers is less than 
the bias force of the spring. ^ 



<2S i 



u2^:^^!J 



l?6 /« 



1. In a valve having a housing, a bore in said housing, a valve 
seat in said bore, a first packing means providing a seal be- 
tween said valve seat and said housing, said first packing means 
being subjected to differential pressure reversals across that 
packing means, the improvement comprising: 
a second, separate packing means spaced from said first 
packing means and adjacent thereto between said valve 
seat and said housing and providing a seal between said 
valve seat and said housing; and 
means for eliminating differential pressure reversals across 
said first and second packing means when said valve 
experiences differential pressure reversals therein by con- 
necting the space between said first and second packing 
means to a fixed value of pressure such that said first and 
second packing means do not oscillate in response to said 
differential pressure reversals. 



4,391,295 
HOT WATER SYSTEM AND VALVE 
Lester E. Stipe, Portland, Oreg., assignor to Precision Plumbing 
Products, Inc., Portland, Oreg. 

Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,263 

Int. a.3 F24H 1/00 

U.S. a. 137—522 3 Qaims 



4,391,294 
DUMP DELAY VALVE 

John A. Aubel, Decatur, III., assignor to Borg-Wamer Corpora- 
tion, Chicago, 111. 

Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 326,231 

Int. a.3 F16K 17/18: F02M 3/00 

U.S. a. 137—493.8 13 Qaims 



50 

_l 



SOURCE 



VACUUM 
OPERATED 
ELEMENT 



1^ 
52 




1. A dump delay valve, comprising: 

a wall structure defining an enclosure, 

a separating plate mounted in said enclosure, defining an 
input chamber and an output chamber, which separating 
plate defines a port, an aperture and an umbrella valve 
opening between the input and output chambers, 

an umbrella valve mounted in said input chamber on the 
separating plate, to cover said umbrella valve opening, 

a diaphragm operator, mounted in the output chamber defin- 
ing a third chamber, with the output chamber adjacent the 
separating plate, which diaphragm operator separates and 
seals the output and third chambers from each other. 




1. A gravity operated valve comprising: 

(a) a valve casing comprised of lower and upper sections 
secured together detachably, the lower section having an 
inlet fluid passage and the upper section having an outlet 
fluid passage and a vertically elongated communication 
passage communicating the outlet passage with the inlet 
passage, 

(b) a valve seat ring secured removably between the lower 
and upper valve casing sections and having an upwardly 
facing annular valve seat facing said communication pas- 
sage, 

(c) a hollow vertically elongated cylinder secured to said 
valve seat ring outwardly of the annular valve seat and 
extending vertically upward into said communication 
passage, the cylinder having a cylinder wall having an 
outer diameter substantially smaller than the diameter of 
the communication passagf , the cylinder having a closed 
top and an open bottom communicating with the valve 
seat ring opening, the cylinder wall having an opening 
therethrough adjacent the valve seat ring, 

(d) a weighted piston slidably fitted within said cylinder for 
vertical movement therein, said piston defining an upper 
cavity within said cylinder above said piston, said piston 
having a valve face on the bottom thereof for sealingly 
fitting on the upwardly facing valve seat on the valve seat 
ring when the fluid pressures at said inlet passage and said 
outlet passage are in substantial equilibrium, said piston 
being free to rise off said valve seat toward the closed top 
of said cylinder when the fluid pressure at said inlet pas- 
sage is greater than the fluid pressure at said outlet pas- 
sage, and 

(e) a flow limiting passage communicating the communica- 
tion passage in the upper valve casing section with said 
upper cavity in the cylinder for dampening the speed of 
movement of the piston in the cylinder. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



lis 



" 4,391,296 

BY-PASS PILOT OPERATED HYDRAULIC 
CHECK VALVE 
John D. Abbott, 26395 S. Corral Hollow Rd., Tracy, Calif. 
95395 

I jFiled May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,458 
' ! Int. a.3 F16K 17/32. 31/06 
U.S. a. 137—523 4 Claims 




4,391,297 
MONO-RAIL BOOM SUPPORTED ARTICULATED 
SERVICE LINE 
Houston W. Knight, Whittier, Calif., assignor to FMC Corpora- 
tion, Chicago, III. 

Filed Nov. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,767 

Int. aj F16L 3/00 

U.S. a. 137—615 20 Claims 



iZfe. 9 




24 "^1 



% 

130 



3Z 



■too' 



1. A mono-rail boom supported articulated well service line 

for use in well service operations to interconnect a supply of 

pressurized fluid to a wellhead, comprising: 

an extendible mono-rail boom having a plurality of boom 

sections with an inboard boom section mounted on a 

mobile transport means and with the other boom sections 

extendible outward from said inboard boom sections; 



means for supporting an outer portion of said boom when 
said boom is in an extended position; 

an articulated pipe well service line; 

a plurality of trolleys mounted for relative independent 
movement along the length of said boom with the move- 
ment of said trolleys independent of the extendible move- 
ment of said boom sections; 

means for connecting said service line to said trolleys for 
movement of said service line between a retracted position 
and an extended position when said boom is in an ex- 
tended position; and 

means for disconnecting said service line from said trolleys 
for supporting said service line on the ground when said 
service line is at least partially extended. 



4,391,298 
MULTILINE PIGGABLE FLUID SWIVEL 
John E. Ortloff, Houston, Tex., assignor to Exxon Production 
Research Co., Houston, Tex. 

Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,738 

Int. CI.3 F16L 27/06 

U.S. a. 137—615 13 Claims 



1. A valve comprising 

means defining a housing, 

means defining a main bore in said housing having a first end 
and a second end, 

means defining an inlet port in fluid communication with said 
first end of said main bore, 

means defining an outlet port in fluid communication with said 
first end of said main bore, 

a solenoid valve having a valve plug and a valve seat disposed 
in said main bore between said inlet port and said outlet port, 
said plug of said solenoid valve biased against said seat of 
said solenoid valve when said solenoid valve is unenergized, 

means defining a second fluid flow channel in fluid communi- 
cation with said second end of said main bore, 

a piston disposed in said main bore between said first and said 
second ends, 

means for applying hydraulic fluid pressure in said second 
channel whereby said piston moves toward and engages said 
solenoid valve plug and moves said plug away from said seat 
to permit the flow of fluid from said inlet port to said outlet 
port, and 

means for decelerating said piston when said piston moves 
away from said solenoid valve plug upon release of said 
hydraulic fluid pressure in said second channel. 




1. A piggable fluid swivel comprising: 
a first element having a first surface; 
a second element rotatably mounted on said first element so 
that said first and second elements rotate with respect to 
one another about a common axis, said second element 
having a second surface which rotatably mates with said 
first surface of said first element; 
a continuous fluid passage in said swivel defined by a first 
groove in said first surface and a second groove in said 
second surface which align opposite each other when said 
first and second elements are assembled; 
seal means for preventing flow from said fluid passage be- 
tween said first and second surfaces; 
a first opening through said first element into said first 
groove to provide fluid communication between the exte- 
rior of said swivel and said fluid passage; 
a second opening through said second element into said 
second groove to provide fluid communication between 
the exterior of said swivel and said fluid passage; and 
fluid barrier means mounted on one of said elements for 
substantially blocking fluid flow in said continuous flow 
passage at the point of said barrier means, said fluid barrier 
means comprising: 

a housing on said one of said elements having a recess 
therein which opens into said groove of said one of said 
elements; 
a baffle plate slidably positioned in said recess and being 
movable between (a) an open position wherein said 
baffle plate is sufficiently retracted within said recess so 
that substantially no part of said baffle plate extends into 
said groove on said one of said elements and (b) a closed 
position wherein said baffle plate sufficiently extends 
from said recess into said other groove on said other 
element to substantially block fluid flow through said 
continuous passage past said baffle plate, said baffle 
plate movement occurring substantially along a straight 
line coinciding with the longitudinal axis of said baffle 



i;: 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



plate, said baffle plate having a sealing edge conforming 
to a corresponding portion of said other groove on said 
other element, whereby in response to said baffle plate 
being in said closed position, said continuous fluid pas- 
sage is substantially completely sealed from fluid flow 
past said baffle plate; and 
means in said housing for moving said baffle plate back 
and forth between said open and closed positions. 



4,391,300 
PIPE PATCHING CLAMP 
Arthur D. Saylor, Covina, and Henry L. Habegger, Anaheim, 
both of Calif., assignors to Habegger International, Pasadena, 
Calif. 

Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 182,942 

Int. a.3 F16L 55/16 

U.S. a. 138—99 8 Qaims 



4,391,299 
ELECTRO FLUIDIC ACTUATOR 
ten B. Holmes, Rockville, M d., assignor to The United States 
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army, 
Washington, D.C. 

Filed Apr. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 142,547 

Int. a.3 GOIV 1/04 

VS. a. 137—831 5 Qaims 




1. An actuator for converting electrical signals into power 
pulses in a working fluid, comprising a sealed, fluid-tight enclo- 
sure, including: 
a housing having a plurality of openings therein, and 
a like plurality of lightweight, low inertia bellows having 
open end portions which adjoin the housing in intimate 
contact therewith and which are aligned respectively with 
the housing openings, opposite closed end portions having 
one side in contact with the working fluid,, and intermedi- 
ate side portions which are highly compliant to movement 
of the closed end portions relative to the opposite open 
. end portions and adjoining housing, the plurality of bel- 
lows including first and second working bellows and a 
pressure equalizing bellows; 
electromechanical means, connected within the sealed en- 
closure between the housing and the closed end of each 
working bellows, for moving the closed end of each work- 
ing bellows relative to the housing in accordance with the 
electrical signals to generate corresponding power pulses 
in the working fluid adjacent each working bellows, said 
electromechanical means comprising 
a movable shaft having one end connected to the closed 
end of the first bellows and an opposite end connected 
to the closed end of the second bellows, 
a coil for urging said shaft in a first direction, and 
a spring for urging said shaft in a second direction; and 
pressure equalizing means for equalizing pressure within the 
housing with pressure of the working fluid in contact with 
the pressure equalizing bellows, including 
an electrically non-conductive liquid which is disposed 

within and fills the sealed enclosure, and 
the pressure equalizing bellows, which serves as a freely 
movable interface between the non-conductive liquid 
within the housing and the working fluid in contact 
with the pressure equalizing bellows. 




?/^ ?7 



1. A pipe patching clamp for repairing fissures in pipes in 
situ, comprising: 

a one-piece non-metallic strap member formed into a cylin- 
der and having a pair of dogs forming the respective 
opposite ends, said member being sufficiently resilient to 
enable separation of the member ends and receipt of the 
member about a pipe with inherent resiliency urging the 
strap member ends toward one another; 

first and second longitudinally extending grooves on the 
member inner surface, the base of each groove and the 
groove opening at the strap member surface being of 
substantially same dimensions, said grooves being located 
at approximately 180 degrees to each other; 

threaded means for securing the strap member dogs together 
and hold the strap member about the pipe; and 

a sealing strip of a resilient material, one side of the strip 
curved to conform to the inner surface of said strap mem- 
ber and including at least one integral tongue of such 
geometry enabling fitting receipt within a groove, the 
other side of said strip extending outwardly of the inner 
surface of the strap member. 



4,391,301 

HOLE REINFORCEMENT 

Fred R. Pflederer, Wauwatosa, Wis., assignor to A. O. Smith 

Corporation, Milwaukee, Wis. - — 

Filed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296,809 

Int. a.^ B65D 90/02; F16L 9/16 

U.S. a. 138—103 2 Claims 




1. A structural article comprising: 

a cylindrical wall having a longitudinal axis and formed of a 
cured thermosetting resin reinforced by fibrous material, 
said wall having an opening therein; and 

a plurality of pairs of opening reinforcement bands, said 
bands comprising a series of continuous filaments encir- 
cling said wall and bonded to the outer surface of said 
wall, with said bands in each of said pairs being disposed 



JULY 5, 198: 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



117 



tangentially to the perimeter of said opening and on sub- end edges for holding the folded band around the cable, said 

stantially opposite sides of said opening, material of the band being a soft, extruded plastic, the configu- 
one of said pairs of bands disposed substantially normal to 

the longitudinal axis of said cylindrical wall and j 

at least one of said pairs of bands overlapping at least one ' , 

other of said pairs of bands in the vicinity of said opening. ri 



4,391,302 

COUPLED TUBULAR CASING FOR FOODSTUFFS 
Helmut Huhn, and Siegfried Kaiser, both of Walsrode, Fed. Rep. 
of Germany, assignors to Wolff Walsrode Aktiengesellschaft, 
Fed. Rep. of Germany 
I Filed Jan. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 114,655 

Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 27, 
1979,2903117,' 

1 1 Int. aj F16L 11/12 
U.S. a. 138—118.1 11 Qaims 



■i; 




■>, 



™^ 



ration of said grooves and said elevations being such to enable 
said band to be wound into a roll. 



A B 



A. A flexible shirrable coupled tubular casing for foodstuffs 
having a plurality of couplings the coupling seams of which are 
formed by adjacent ends of tubular casing portions to be cou- 
pled and a multilayered scalable foil, the adjacent ends of the 
tubular casing portions to be coupled each having a continuous 
circumferential edge portion which substantially lies in a plane 
extending at an oblique angle of 10° to 80° to the longitudinal 
axis of the tubular casing, and the foil placed in sealing engage- 
ment with and partially inside each of the adjacent ends of the 
tubular casing portions to be coupled and also extending at an 
oblique angle of 10° to 80° to the longitudinal axis of the tubu- 
lar casing. 



4,391,304 
WARP TENSION STRUCTURE 
Ray M. Taylor, 1000 Park Ave., Quakertown, Pa. 18951, as- 
signor to Ray A. Taylor, Quakertown, Pa. 

Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,881 

Int. a.^ D03D 49/04. 49/08; F16D 63/00 

U.S. a. 139—100 8 Qaims 



■^2 



4,391,303 

BAND-SHAPED DEVICE FOR FORMING A 

PIPE-SHAPED PROTECTION COVER 

Stig L. Holgersson, Bredaryd, Sweden, assignor to Telefonak- 

tiebolaget L M Ericsson, Stockholm, Sweden 
PCT No. PCT/SE80/00126, § 371 Date Jan. 3, 1981, § 102(e) 

Date Dec. 23, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02476, PCT Pub. 

Date Nov. 13, 1980 

PCT Filed Apr. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 227,066 

Qaims priority, application Sweden, May 3, 1979, 7903842 

Int. Q.3 F16L 57/00 

U.S. Q. 138—166 6 Qaims 

1. An article for forming a tubular, protective cover around 
a cable, said article comprising a generally flat band of material 
having opposite upper and lower surfaces and end edges, one 
of said surfaces being planar, the other surface being provided 
with a plurality of spaced grooves extending parallel to said 
end edges, each groove having inclined sides which intersect 
to form an apex proximate said one planar surface to form a 
hinge thereat where said band can be folded to enable the band 
to surround a cable, said other surface of said band being 
relatively flat between said grooves to define a continuous 
planar surface, said band including elevations projecting be- 
yond the plane of said other surface in continuation of said 
sides of said grooves on both sides of each groove such that 
with the band folded at the hinges, the elevations at the both 
sides of the respective grooves approach one another to pro- 
vide a stiffening effect for the folded band around the cable, 
and locking means on said band on said band proximate said 

I032O.G — S 




1. A tensioning mechanism for a loom warp beam wherein 
the beam includes at least one cylindrical head, said mechanism 
defining a band including a discontinuous inner gripping ply 
extending about said head and an outer tensioning ply secured 
to and extending about the inner ply and having adjacent 
opposite ends, one of said ends including roller means jour- 
naled therefrom for rotation about an axis disposed transverse 
to the longitudinal extent of said one end, an elongated flexible 
tension member having one end anchored relative to the other 
end of said tensioning ply and extending therefrom and about 
said rolfer means and thereafter generally tangentially of said 
roller means in a direction generally opposite to the direction 
in which said tension member extends from said tension ply 
one end toward said roller means, means non-yieldingly an- 
choring the other end of said tension member relative to the 
axis of rotation of said head, said one end of said outer tension- 
ing ply being anchored to the corresponding end of said inner 
play, the other end of said outer ply extending from the side of 
said head opposite from the head side from which the other 
end of said tension member extends toward its anchored posi- 
tion relative to the axis of rotation of said head, said outer ply 
other end generally paralleling said tension member other end 
and variable force means oppositely connected to said other 



118 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



end of said outer ply yieldingly biasing said other outer ply end 
in a direction in which it extends from said head. 



4^91,305 
WEFT PICKING DEVICE OF AIR JET TYPE WEAVING 

LOOM 

Takao Takahashi, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor 
Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan 

Filed May 12, 1980, Ser. No. 149,083 
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 18, 1979, 54-61767; 
Oct. 19, 1979, 54-134242; Jan. 14, 1980, 55-2121 

Int. a.5 D03D 47 /iO 
U.S. a. 139—435 15 Claims 




' li^J- ^. 




1. A weft picking device of an air jet type weaving loom, 
comprising: 

(a) a weft inserting nozzle for injecting a weft yam under the 
influence of an air jet therefrom to insert the weft yarn 
into the shed of warp yarns; 

(b) a plurality of air guide members each having a generally 
looped section defming at the inner peripheral surface 
thereof an air guide opening, said loop section having a slit 
through which the weft yarn can leave said air guide 
opening, said air guide openings forming an air guide 
channel through which the weft yarn is picked into the 
warp yam shed; 

(c) an auxiliary nozzle in the shape of a pipe and having a 
nozzle opening through which an auxiliary air jet is 
ejected to enhance an air stream produced by the air jet 
from said weft inserting nozzle so as to assist weft picking, 
said nozzle opening of said auxiliary nozzle being so 
formed that the extension of the axis thereof intersects the 
axis of said air guide channel at a predetermined angle and 
is {perpendicular to a tangent line of said air guide opening 
of one of said air guide members at a point on said inner 
peripheral surface of said loop section thereof; and 

(d) means for pushing aside the warp yams when said auxil- 
iary nozzle enters the array of warp yams, said pushing 
aside means being located in the vicinity of said auxiliary 
nozzle and the dents of a reed. 



4,391,306 
COIL WINDING APPARATUS 
Tokuhito Hamane, Hirakata; Toshio Kinoshita, Katano; 
Masafumi Kihira, Hyogo; Hitosi Hamada, Yawata, and Mikio 
Gotou, Neyagawa, all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Elec- 
tric Industrial Co., Ltd., Kadoma, Japan 

Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,403 
Int. C1.3 B21F i/00 
U.S. CI. 140^92.1 3 Oalms 

1. A coil winding apparatus comprising: 
a coil winding spool on which coils are to be wound; 
a flyer member for winding electric wire around said coil 

winding spool to form the coils; 
a coil inserting jig which is positioned adjacent said spool 
member for receiving thereon coils formed on said spool 
member and rotatably supported for rotation with respect 
to said coil winding spool for having portions moved past 



said winding spool for receiving respective coils on the 
different portions of said winding spool; 

coil depressing means movable past said winding spool 
toward said coil inserting jig for moving coils off said 
winding spool onto said coil receiving jig; and 

a stop disposed beside said coil inserting jig and being recip- 
rocally pivotable around an axis perpendicular to the 




direction of movement of said coil depressing means only 
between a position in which it extends directly toward 
said coil inserting jig and a position in which it is pivoted 
away from said coil depressing means to leave space be- 
tween said stop and said coil inserting jig for passage of a 
coil onto said coil inserting jig, whereby coils already 
accomodated on said coil inserting jig are prevented from 
moving past said stop toward said winding spool. 



4,391,307 

WIRE STRAIGHTENING AND CUTTING MECHANISM 

George W. Levi, Littleton, and Kalman Kanyo, Westminster, 

both of Colo., assignors, to G&D, Inc., Denver, Colo. 

Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,781 

Int. Q\? B21F 1/02 

U.S. a. 140—140 18 Qaims 




r~3^ 



1. In a wire straightening and cutting apparatus adapted to 
cut wire of varying lengths from a supply source having a 
continuous length of wire, wire feeding means for advancing 
said continuous length of wire in a lengthwise direction from 
said supply source, wire straightening means downstream of 
said feeding means through which said continuous length of 
wire is advanced, and guide means downstream of said wire 
straightening means to permit said continuous length of wire to 
float unrestrained from said wire straightening means, and a 
cutter mechanism including a cutter blade and rotary drive 
means for rotating said cutter blade in correlated relation to 
said wire feeding means including means to vary the speed of 
rotation of said cutter blade in relation to the rate of advance- 
ment of said wire as established by said feeding means in regu- 
lating the length of wire which is cut by said cutter blade. 



4,391,308 
SOAP DISPENSING SYSTEM 
Robert L. Steiner, Chicago, III., assignor to Steiner Corporation, 
Salt Lake City, Utah 

Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 255,034 
Int. a.J B65B i/04 
U.S. a. 141—18 49 Qaims 

1. A system for dispensing liquid soap comprising a closed 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



119 



wall structure deflning a container, partition means separating 
said container into a lower liquid soap reservoir and an upper 
refill compartment, dispensing means carried by said container 
for dispensing liquid soap from said reservoir, a refill well 
having a refill aperture therethrough providing communica- 
tion between said reservoir and said refill compartment and 
dimensioned to permit the free flow of liquid soap there- 
through, a pusher member disposed in said refill well extending 
upwardly toward said upper refill compartment, a refill car- 
tridge containing liquid soap and having an outlet, a tubular 
drain adaptor in said refill cartridge in sealing relation with 
said outlet providing communication through said tubular 



refill compartment in a refill configuration with the end of said 
refill cartridge outlet disposed for cooperation with said refill 




4,391,309 
SOAP DISPENSING SYSTEM 
Robert L. Steiner, Chicago, III., assignor to Steiner Corporation, 
Salt Lake Oty, Utah 

Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 255,035 
Int. C\? B65B i/04 
U.S. Q. 141—18 35 Qaims 

1. A system for dispensing liquid soap comprising a closed 
wall stmcture defining a container, partition means separating 
said container into a lower liquid soap reservoir and an upper 
refill compariraent, dispensing means carried by said container 
for dispensing liquid soap from said reservoir, a refill aperture 
in said partition means providing communication between said 
reservoir and said refill compartment, a refill cartridge contain- 
ing liquid soap and having an outlet, and slot and key mecha- 
nism carried by the end of said refill cartridge outlet and said 
container for maintaining said cartridge in a predetermined 
refill configuration and in communication with said refill aper- 
ture, said refill cartridge being removably enclosed within said 




aperture to permit fiow of liquid soap from said refill cartridge 
to said reservoir thereby to refill said reservoir. 



drain adaptor between the inside and outside of said cartridge, 
and a stopper in said tubular drain adaptor slidable between a 
sealed position thereof wherein liquid in said refill cartridge is 
sealed therein and an open position thereof wherein said stop- 
per is positioned away from said outlet to permit free flow of 
soap therefrom, said refill cartridge being removably enclosed 
within said refill compartment in a refill configuration with 
said outlet disposed for cooperation with said refill well, said 
pusher member sliding said stopper within said tubular drain 
adaptor to the open position thereof when said refill cartridge 
is in the refill configuration thereof to permit the free flow of 
liquid soap from said refill cartridge to said reservoir thereby 
to refill same. 



4,391,310 
BAG nLLER SPOUT 
J. George Lepisto, Middletown, Ohio, assignor to Champion 
International Corporation, Stamford, Conn. 

Filed Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,358 

Int. Q.3 B65B I /IS 

U.S. Q. 141—286 _ 3 Qaims 




12. u 30 



1. A filler spout for use in feeding a stream of flowable 
material into a closed end multi-wall bag to facilitate insertion 
of the spout into the bag without damaging the inner wall 
thereof, and to ensure a constant volume passage for exhaust 
from the bag as the bag is filled by the flowable material, said 
spout comprising: 

(a) an outer tubular shroud member having a blunt curvilin- 
ear closed end and an opposite open end, an exhaust port 
formed in the side wall of the shroud member, and a 
discharge opening formed in the side wall of said shroud 
member intermediate said blunt curvilinear closed end and 
said exhaust port; and 

(b) an open ended material delivery tube disposed within the 
bore of said shroud member and spaced from the wall 
thereof so as to define an exhaust passage, one end of said 
exhaust passage being in communication with said exhaust 
port and the other end of said exhaust passage opening to 
ambient surroundings through the open end of said shroud 
member, said delivery tube having an inlet end adapted 
for connection with a material impelling machine, and an 
outlet end disposed contiguous to said discharge opening 
of said shroud member, said inlet end of said delivery tube 
projecting outwardly beyond said open end of said shroud 
member, said delivery tube having a first straight line 
portion extending from said inlet end into said shroud 
member and a second curvilinear portion extending from 
said first portion to said outlet end, said delivery tube 
being operable to divert the direction of a stream of mate- 
rial impelled therethrough approximately 90° from said 
inlet end to said outlet end whereby said exhaust passage 



120 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



is maintained at a constant volume by said shroud member 4,391^13 

and whereby said closed curvilinear blunt end of said TIRE CHAIN 

shroud facilitates entry of the spout into the bag without Erhard A. Weidler, Aalen-Unterkochen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, 



damaging the inner wall thereof. 



assignor to RUD'Kettenfabrik Rieger & Dietz GmbH u. Co., 
Aalen, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Sep. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 416,153 
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 17, 
1981, 3137310 

Int. a J B60C 27/00 



4,391,311 
LOG SPLITTING DEVICE 

Warren Levercom, 3901 Main St. NE., Blaine, Minn. 55434 
FUed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,251 
Int. a.3 B27L 7/00 
VJS. CI. 144—193 D 9 Claims 



U.S. a. 152—171 



18 Oaims 





1. A log splitting device comprising: 

a pair of vertical rails spaced apart and parallel to one an- 
other, 

a splitting blade slideably connected between the rails, 

a wedge secured to the splitting blade and extending below 
the lower level thereof with its cutting surface facing 
downward, and 

a base plate adapted for securing the rails in vertical position 
with the splitting blade mounted thereon. 



1. Tire chain with a net configuration having nodal points, in 
which at least three chain links are mutually connected in the 
region of the nodal points via a component which is arranged 
horizontally, that is to say parallel to the tire surface, and is 
provided with hook-shaped holding arms and insertion slots 
for hanging the chain links in and with at least one closure 
element for the insertion slots, characterised in that the compo- 
nent (1;14;21;24;30;33;36;38;41;47;48) has at least one substan- 
tially T-shaped section, of which the transverse bar (3,4; 16) has 
curved legs which form holding arms (5; 17, 18) and the longitu- 
dinal bar (2; 15) is provided with a bore (7), the axis of which 
runs substantially in the centre plane of the holding arms 
(5; 17, 18) and which serves to receive the centre part of a 
bolt-shaped closure element 

(8;20;22;25;28;31;32;34;35;39;42;45;49;50), the mutually oppo- 
site ends of which form locking pins (9) for the chain links (6) 
hung into the holding arms (5;17,18) of the T-shaped section 
and into at least one further holding arm (19). 



4,391,312 4 391 314 

LOG SPLirnNG HEAD SNOW TIRE SPIKES 

Gerard J. Sakraida, Jr., R.D. #2, Douglas Rd., Beaver Falls, Pa. jjro Inamoto, Amagasaki, and Naohiro Hayata, Kakogawa, both 
1^1^ of Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd., 

Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,783 Osaka and Sumitomo Rubber Industries, Ltd., Kobe, both of, 

Int. a.3 B27L 7/00 japgn 

U.S. a. 144—193 E 16 Qaims Ried Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,302 

Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 7, 1980, 55-45423 

Int. a.3 B60C 11/00 

U.S. a. 152—210 6 Claims 

32 
36 

3a 
34 



24 




1. A log splitting head comprising: 

A. a baseplate; 

B. first and second vertical cutting plates opposed and 
spaced from each other and mounted to and perpendicular 
with the baseplate, each including a cutting edge; 

C. a horizontal cutting plate mounted to and supported by 
the first and second cutting plates, and also including a 
cutting edge; and 

D. means for securing the baseplate to the main frame of a 
log splitting machine. 




1. A snow tire spike which comprises: 

a single, integral spike body made of a ceramic material, said 
spike body having a flrst end, defmed by a first radially 
outer annular surface, for anchoring said spike in a tire, 
and a second end, defined by a second radially outer 
annular surface, for contacting the ground when said spike 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



121 



'i. 



is in use in the tire, said first end having a diameter larger 
than, but smaller than l.S times, the diameter of said sec- 
ond end, said first and second radially outer annular sur- 
faces being joined by a third radially outer annular surface 
to form a continuous smooth surface at least from said 
second end to said first surface; and 
a flange made of a plastic material coated directly on at least 
said first surface of said spike body, on the entirety of said 
first surface. 



lcH> 



4,391,315 

TIRE 'CHAIN WITH ATTACHING DEVICE 

Gerald D. Jacobson, 1816 113 Dr. SE., Everett, Wash. 98205 

FUed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,505 

Int. a.^ B60C 27/00 

U.S. a. 152—213 A 5 Qaims 



^Z4 


xf-x 


u 




-JE 






i» 




■fS 



;j fi :• St =. «; iJ-,: .-*5, ;4i: ;, * #^ , 



V 



V'* 



-le 



wardly from the second sidewall gripping member and 
being constructed from an elastic material, and being 
adapted to be extended across the tire and stretched, to 
engage the hook at its end onto the ring means adjacent 
the first tire gripping member, so that when stretched said 
elastic end portion will exert a drawing force on the two 
tire gripping members, in the direction of the tread, for 
forcing the sharply pointed members into gripping en- 
gagement with the sidewalls of the tire. 



4,391,316 
ANTI-SKID DEVICE FOR VEHICLE WHEELS 
Gianfiranco Seggio, Via Tracia 7, Milan, Italy 

Filed Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,770 
Qaims priority, application Italy, Sep. 17, 1980, 22768/80[U] 
Int. Q.' B60C 27/00 
U.S. Q. 152—213 A 10 Qaims 



' 1. An anti-skid tire appliance adapted to be installed onto and 
removed from a vehicle tire, comprising: 

a first elongated flexible side member adapted to extend 
circumferentially of the tire along the outer sidewall of the 
tire; 

a second elongated flexible side member adapted to extend 
circumferentially of the tire along the inner sidewall of the 
tire; 

a series of spaced apart cross members, connected at their 
ends to the side members and extending laterally across 
the tread of the tire, from one side member to the other; 

said appliance having first and second ends; 

each said side member having ring means at the first end of 
the appliance; 

each said side member having an end portion at the second 
end of the appliance which extends outwardly beyond the 
end-most cross member at the second end of the appli- 
ance; 

each said end portion having a hook at its outer end engage- 
able with the ring means at the first end of the appliance, 
for securing the two ends of the appliance together and 
the appliance on the tire; 

a first sidewall gripping member at the second end of the 
appliance, connected to the first side member adjacent 
said end-most cross member; 

a ring adjacent said first sidewall gripping member; 

a second sidewall gripping member at the second end of the 
appliance, connected to the second side member of the 
appliance adjacent said end-most cross member; 

each said sidewall gripping member comprising sharply 
pointed members adapted to dig into and grip a sidewall 
portion of the tire when placed against such sidewall 
portion and pulled on towards the tread; and 

said end portion of said second side member extending out- 




1. An anti-skid device or skid chain for vehicle tires mounted 
on wheels comprising: 

a plurality of U-shaped elements for radial mounting on said 
tires, each of said U-shaped elements including a base 
portion and first and second arm portions; 

a first series of connecting levers each disposed between and 
pivotally affixed on the ends thereof to adjacent ones of 
said first arm portions; 

a second series of connecting levers each disposed between 
and pivotally affixed on the ends thereof to adjacent ones 
of said second arm portions; 

interlocking means for selectively substantially interlocking 
said U-shaped elements to said levers of said first and 
second series of levers in a range of positions such that 
said first and second arms of said U-shaped elements are 
disposed within a preselected range of angles relative to 
said levers of said first and second series; and 

locking means for locking said levers of said first series to 
adjacent said levers of said first series within a preselected 
degree of movement, and for locking said levers of said 
second series to adjacent said levers of said second series 
within a preselected degree of movement. 



4,391,317 
BAND DEVICE FOR RETAINING A TIRE ON A WHEEL 

RIM 
Bernard J. Savage, 7 Seymour Mews, London W.l, England 
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,706 
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 15, 1980, 
8026636 

Int. Q.3 B60B 25/12, 21/10; B60C 29/00 
U.S. Q. 152—330 RF 6 Qaims 

I. A band device for retaining a tire on a wheel rim in the 
event that the tire should become deflated, which band device 
comprises a first band portion which is part circular for sub- 
stantially its entire length, a second band portion which is part 
circular for substantialy its entire length and which is subsUn- 
tially the same size as the first band portion, a link portion 
which is part circular for substantially its entire length and 
which is for joining the the first and second band portions 
together at one end, and fastener means for joining the first and 



122 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



second band portions together at their other ends whereby the 
band portions and the link portion are retainable in position 
vound a base of a wheel rim, the link portion having an aper- 
tured part for receiving a valve of a tube of a tire, the link 
portion being hooked at each end for connecting to inwardly 
directed ends of the first and second band portions whereby 
the link portion is positioned in use on the side of the band 
device that is adjacent the base of the wheel rim so that the 
inwardly directed pressure of the tire serves to bind the first 



4,391^19 

APPARATUS FOR INTRODUCTNG ELEMENTS INTO 

MOLTEN METAL STREAMS AND CASTING IN INERT 

ATMOSPHERE 
Lawrence J. Heaslip, Toronto, Canada; Alphia L. Hohulin, 
Tremont, and Joseph R. Mitchell, Peoria, both of 111., assign- 
ors to Keystone Consolidated Industries, Inc., Peoria, 111. 
Continuation of Ser. No. 70,347, Aug. 27, 1979, abandoned. This 
application Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,719 
Int. a.3 B22D 35/04, 11/10 
U.S. a. 164—259 4 Gaims 




and second portions and the link portion tighter around the 
base of the wheel rim with increasing pressure, and the band 
device including a plurality of legs which are secured at spaced 
apart intervals to the first and second band portions on the side 
of the band device that is adjacent the base of the wheel rim, 
the base of the wheel rim having a well with an open mouth, 
and the legs being locatable in the well such that they support 
the first and second band portions in a well-blocking position at 
the mouth of the well and such that they allow the first and 
second band portions to flex with the wheel rim. 



4,391,318 
COMPOSITE OF RUBBER AND METAL 
REINFORCEMENT THEREFOR 
Frank S. Maxey, deceased, late of Uniontown, Ohio (by Ger- 
trude Maxey, legal representative), and Syed K. Mowdood, 
Akron, Ohio, assignors to The Goodyear Tire & Rubber Com- 
pany, Akron, Ohio 

Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,163 
Int. C\? B60C 7/00; B32B 25/02 
U.S. a. 152—359 17 Qaims 

1. A composite of rubber composition containing zinc oxide, 
carbon black, optionally and/or mineral fillers, cure ac- 
celerator(s), fatty acid and/or metal salt thereof, and filament 
reinforcement therefor where said filament is selected from at 
least one of steel, organic and inorganic filaments, optionally as 
a multiple of filaments cabled together to form a cord, charac- 
terized in that (i) when said filament or cord thereof is steel, 
said rubber composition contains (A) about 0.05 to 8 phr of a 
compound selected from at least one of diallyl cyanurate, 
triallyl cyanurate, tris(2-hydroxyethyl) cyanurate, triphenyl 
cyanurate, diallyl isocyanurate, triallyl isocyanurate, and 4- 
ketobenz triazine and, optionally, (B) about O.OS to about 10 
phr of at least one borate as the product of (i) a metal selected 
from Groups lA, IIA, IIB, IVA, IVB, and VIII of the Periodic 
Table of the Elements, and (ii) an acid selected from the group 
consisting of boric, orthoboric, metaboric or polyboric acid; 
and when said filament or cord thereof is not steel the rubber 
composition contains both the (A) compound and the (B) 
borate. 




-*' 26 28 \ 




q f^' ' M / -_ J° C~^^"^ 




1. In a casting system including a casting moid and a tundish 
arranged above the casting mold, the improvement of appara- 
tus for adding an alloy material to a molten metal stream flow- 
ing form the tundish into the casting mold comprising in com- 
bination: 

a hollow tube generally extending in a horizontal direction, 
said tube having a closed end and an open end; means 
associated with the hollow tube for positioning the open 
end of the hollow tube between the tundish and the cast- 
ing mold and adapted to be in opposed relation to and on 
one side of a molten metal stream and for maintaining the 
tube generally transverse to a direction of travel of a 
molten metal stream from the tundish to the casting mold; 

means associated with the closed end of the hollow tube for 
supplying inert gas to said hollow tube for discharge from 
the open end toward and around a molten metal stream, 
said open end being unblocked to permit visual observa- 
tion of a molten metal stream on a side opposite the open 
end; 

means mounted in the hollow tube to reduce the velocity of 
the inert gas supplied to the hollow tube to produce a low 
velocity gas exciting the open end of the hollow tube; 

an alloy feed tube positioned within the hollow tube, said 
alloy feed tube including an inert gas inlet, and alloy inlet 
for receiving pellets of alloy material and a discharge 
nozzle arranged at the open end of the hollow tube and 
having an outlet directed toward the open end of the 
hollow tube; 

means associated with the alloy feed tube for supplying a 
mixture of alloy material and inert gas at a relatively 
higher velocity then the velocity of said low velocity gas 
to the alloy feed tube; 

a gas feed tube in the hollow tube having an outlet at the 
open end of the hollow tube, said outlet being arranged to 
direct inert gas toward said casting mold; and means in the 
alloy feed tube for directing the alloy pellets by flow of 
said relatively higher velocity inert gas into the molten 
metal stream simultaneous with the low velocity inert gas 
flow which envelopes the molten metal stream. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



123 



4,391,320 

METHOD AND AN APPARATUS FOR AIR 

CONDITIONING FOR VEHICLES BY CONTROLLING 

ORCULATION OF INSIDE AIR AND INTRODUCTION 

I OF OUTSIDE AIR 

Yozo Inoue, Chiryu; Yoji Ito; Kiyoshi Hara, both of Kariya; 
Kiyoshi Usami, Oobu, and Yasuhiro Iwata, Aichi, all of Ja- 
pan, assignors to Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan 

Filed Jul. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 171,030 

Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 24, 1979, 54-94769 

Int. a.3 F25B 29/00 

U.S. a. 165—2 3 Qaims 




4,391,321 

HEAT EXCHANGER IN PLANTS FOR VENTILATING 

ROOMS OR BUILDINGS 

Svante Thunberg, Obserratoriegatan 12, S-113 29 Stockholm, 

Sweden 
PCT No. PCr/SE80/00085, § 371 Date Nov. 20, 1980, § 102(e) 
Date Nov. 20, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02064, PCT Pub. 
Date Oct. 2, 1980 

PCT Filed Mar. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 217,019 
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Mar. 21, 1979, 7902549 
Int. Q.^ F24H 3/06 
U.S. Q. 165—54 2 Qaims 



^. 



i;^« nfj-,[^ 



>23 

n 29.- . 



-.0, 2% 



i 



^"*-Jt(^3'^!^''!--^^:- 



1-^2 




30- • 



32' Ul 



8 


4 







^ 



-fH 



:::prz^ 


:_;Lc:irr^ 


^'^ 


- 1 ■■f^.._■•^ 


^6 




1 


** 








, ROW RAW 

1 ' ^' ' 


CPU —CLK S 





1. A method for air conditioning for vehicles with passenger 
compartments by controlling circulation of inside air and intro- 
duction of outside air in which an inlet for inside air and an 
inlet for outside air are selectively opened and closed, and the 
circulation of inside air and the introduction of outside air are 
selectively effected, characterized in that said method com- 
prises: a step of detecting a temperature of a vehicle passenger 
compartment, atmospheric temperature and a preset tempera- 
ture in an initial period of air conditioning, a step of judging the 
results of comparisons between said temperatures, a step of 
switching between air conditioning by the circulation of inside 
air and air conditioning by the introduction of outside air, a 
step of producing an instruction for the introduction of outside 
air if either the passenger compartment temperature is higher 
than the atmospheric temperature and higher than a preset 
temperature or if the passenger compartment temperature is 
lower than the atmospheric temperature and lower than a 
preset temperature, and a step of producing an instruction for 
the circulation of inside air if one of the following conditions is 
established: 

(a) the passenger compartment temperature is higher than 
the atmospheric temperature and lower than a preset 
temperature, 

(b) the passenger compartment temperature is lower than 
the atmospheric temperature and higher than a preset 
temperature. 



1. In a ventilating system for a building: first and second duct 
systems separated by partition walls and arranged in heat- 
exchange relationship such that heat may be transmitted from 
air flowing through one duct system, through the partition 
walls, to air flowing through the other duct system; reversible 
fan means associated with each duct system for passing air 
through the two duct systems countercurrently; a first outside 
air duct placing one end of the first duct system in communica- 
tion with outside air and a first inside air duct placing the other 
end of the first duct system in communication with inside air; 
a second outside air duct placing one end of the second duct 
system in communication with outside air and a second inside 
air duct placing the other end of the second duct system in 
communication with inside air; and valve means for control- 
ling air flow including first and second branch ducts arranged 
in crossing relationship, each branch duct having a first end 
connected to said first inside air duct and a second end con- 
nected to said second inside air duct, a non-return valve in each 
said first and second inside air ducts at locations between the 
connections of the branch ducts to said first and second inside 
air ducts, and a non-return valve in each said branch duct, the 
arrangement being such that in one mode of fan operation 
outside air flows through said first outside air duct, said first 
duct system, said first branch duct and into said second inside 
air duct while inside air flows through said first inside air duct, 
said second branch duct, said second duct system into said 
second outside air duct, and in another mode of fan operation 
outside air flows through said second outside air duct, said 
second duct system into said second inside air duct while inside 
air flows through said first inside air duct, said first duct system 
into said first outside air duct. 



4,391,322 
WIRE GUIDE FOR USE WITH A HEAT EXCHANGE 

UNIT 
Joseph A. Ciarlei, Brewerton; Curtis L. Tobin, Chittenango, and 
William B. Jennings, Qay, all of N.Y., assignors to Carrier 
Corporation, Syracuse, N.Y. 

Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 202,980 
— Int. Q.' F28F 13/12 

U.S. Q. 165—125 6 Qaims 

1. A heat exchange unit comprising: 
support means for supporting the unit; 
a heat exchanger mounted to the support means and extend- 
ing about at least a portion of the periphery of the unit; 
a fan for circulating air in heat exchange relation with the 

heat exchanger; 
means defining a control area circumferentially spaced about 
the fan and adjacent the heat exchanger wherein at least 



124 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



one electrical component of the heat exchange unit may 
be mounted, said means additionally defining a wire guide 
opening; and 




a wire guide connected to extend through the wire guide 
opening and between the fan and the heat exchanger, said 
wire guide deFming a wire securing cavity and including 
means for connecting the wire guide to the means defining 
the control area. 



upper end that controls the flow of geothermal fluid from said 
well, said device capable of having solid deposited material 
scraf>ed from the interior surface thereof without shutting 
down said well, said device including: 

a. a first assembly that includes an elongate tubular body that 
has upper and lower ends and is vertically disposed; first 
means that effect communication between said lower end 
of said tubular body and said upper end of said casing; 
upper and lower longitudinally spaced sets of pins sup- 
ported on said tubular member that may be moved in- 
wardly and outwardly relative thereto, each of said upper 
and lower pins having an inner end portion; at least one 
tubular boss that projects outwardly from said tubular 
body below said lower set of pins; and a valve in commu- 
nication with said tubular boss for controlling the flow of 
geothermal fluid therefrom; 

b. a gate valve that includes an elongate valve body that 
when vertically disposed has upper and lower ends, a 
transversely movable valve member, and said valve body 
having a longitudinally extending interior passage of at 
least as great transverse cross section as that of the interior 
of said tubular body; 

c. second means for securing said lower end of said gate 
valve to said upper end of said tubular body; 

d. a hydraulic cylinder assembly that includes a hydraulic 
cylinder that has a top and bottom; a piston slidably 



4,391,323 
BAFFLE FOR HEATING PIPES 
Erhard Schnier, Roemerstr. 18, D-7143 Vaihingen/Enz 7 (Wiirt- 
temberg). Fed. Rep. of Germany 

FUed Jan. 7, 1981, Set. No. 223,097 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 10, 
1980, 8000478[U] 

Int. a.3 F28F 1/20: F24D 19/06 
U.S. a. 165—183 9 Qaims 





1. A reflector, particularly for mounting above a heating 
pipe to reflect heat radiated upwardly by the pipe, comprising 
an elongated sheet-material reflector body having at least three 
parallel longitudinally extending concave sections each of 
which is arcuately curved in transverse direction; each of said 
arcuately curved sections having a center of curvature, the 
center of curvature of a center one of said sections being lo- 
cated in a vertical longitudinal plane of symmetry of said 
reflector body; and the centers of curvature of the sections 
which flank said center section being laterally spaced from said 
vertical plane in mutually opposite direction and being spaced 
from the center of curvature of said center section in a direc- 
tion away from the center section. 



4,391,324 
GEOTHERMAL WELL HEAD AND ACTUATOR 
ASSEMBLY 
Lehman T. Reed, Bakersfield, Calif., assignor to Midway Fish- 
ing Tool Co., Long Beach, Calif. 

FUed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,377 

Int. a.3 E21B 37/04 

U.S. a. 166—70 8 Qaims 

1. In combination with a geothermal well that has a string of 

casing that extends to a producing zone, said string of casing 

having an upper end, a device in communication with said 







mounted in said cylinder; third means for discharging 
hydraulic fluid under pressure into and out of said cylin- 
der to move said piston upwardly and downwardly 
therein; fourth means for removably securing said bottom 
of said hydraulic cylinder to said upper end of said gate 
valve; a graduated rod that extends upwardly through a 
seal defining opening in said top of said hydraulic cylin- 
der; an actuating member that extends downwardly from 
said piston through a seal defining opening in said bottom 
of said hydraulic cylinder, downwardly through said gate 
valve body when said valve member is in an outwardly 
disposed position; a transverse pin on a lower portion of 
said actuating member, which pin has projecting end 
portions; and a force exerting member supported from 
said actuating member above said pin; 
a plug assembly that includes a rigid body that has a 
cylindrical sidewall, a top surface, and a bottom surface 
that may be disposed in said tubular body; a circular recess 
in said sidewall that extends downwardly from said top 
surface to terminate in a circular body shoulder; resilient 
packing means in said recess; a cavity that extends down- 
wardly from said top surface into rigid body to terminate 
in a bottom, said cavity having a pair of vertical grooves 
extending outwardly from the portion thereof adjacent 
said top, said pair of grooves that extend from intermedi- 
ate positions of said vertical grooves, said vertical and 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



125 



horizontal grooves being removably engageable by said 
projecting end portions of said transverse pin; a plurality 
of slots that extend upwardly in said cylindrical sidewall 
from said bottom surface that may be radially aligned with 
said lower pins; a rigid force receiving ring that has a 
downwardly extending first lej^ that abuts against said 
packing means and an inwardly extending second leg that 
may be contacted by said force exerting ring, said force 
receiving ring having a pluraliry of circumferentially 
spaced grooves therein that may be engaged by said upper 
pins when said packing means is compressed by down- 
ward movement of said first leg of said force receiving 
ring; spring means in said cavity that exert an upward 
force on said actuator member that tends to maintain said 
end portions of said. transverse pin above said horizontal 
slots when said end portions are in said vertical grooves; 
and fifth means that slidably connect said force receiving 
ring to said body of said plug assembly, with said force 
receiving ring only compressing said packing means into 
sealing contact with the interior surface of said tubular 
body of said first assembly until after said transverse pin 
end portions have moved downwardly in said vertical 
grooves below said horizontal grooves; with said gradu- 
ated rod visually indicating the position of said plug as- 
sembly in said tubular body; 

f. first and second insignias on said graduated rod and said 
top of said hydraulic cylinder which when in a predeter- 
mined position relative to one another indicate said slots 
and grooves are radially with said upper and lower pins; 
and 

g. sixth means for rotating said graduated rod together with 
said piston and actuating member, with said plug assembly 
being in a sealing position in said tubular body when said 
lower pins have said inner end portions in engagement 
with said slots and said inner end portions of said upper 
pins engage said grooves; with said plug scraping said 
foreign material from the interior of said tubular body of 
said first assembly when said graduated rod, piston and 
actuating member are rotated to dispose said transverse 
pin end portions in said horizontal slots, said lower pins 
are moved outwardly from disengagement from said slots, 
and said piston is caused to move said actuating member 
and plug assembly downwardly in said tubular member 
for said teeth to scrape said foreign material therefrom; 
said plug assembly being returned to a sealing position 
when said first and second insignia are aligned, said plug is 
moved upwardly in said tubular body to a position where 
said slots are above said lower pins, said lower pins are 
moved inwardly, said plug assembly is moved down- 
wardly for said inner end portions of said pins to engage 
said slots, said actuating member, piston and graduated 
rod are rotated to dispose said transverse pin end portions 
in said vertical grooves, said actuating member is moved 
downwardly to move said force exerting ring and force 
receiving ring downwardly until said grooves are below 
said upper pins, said upper pins are moved inwardly to 
engage said grooves to maintain said packing means in 
compressed sealing contact with the interior surface of 
said tubular body of said first assembly; and said plug 
assembly, actuator rod and hydraulic cylinder assembly 
capable of being removed from said first assembly by 
rotating said actuator rod to dispose said inner end i>or- 
tions of said transverse pins in said horizontal slots, mov- 
ing said upper pins outwardly from engagement with said 
grooves, moving said plug assembly upwardly in said 
elongate body of said gate valve above said transversely 
movable valve member, and moving said valve member to 
an inwardly disposed position whereupon said hydraulic 
cylinder assembly, actuator member and plug assembly 
may be removed from said gate valves without shutting 
down said well. 



4,391,325 

LINER AND HYDRAULIC LINER HANGER SETTING 

ARRANGEMENT 

Samuel F. Baker, Cooroe, and Ronald D. Arnold, Missouri City, 

both of Tex., assignors to Texas Iron Works, Inc, Houston, 

Tex. 

Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 201,309 

Int. a.3 E21B 2i/04 

U.S. Q. 166—208 10 Claiau 



1. In a hydraulic liner setting arrangement for setting a liner 
in a well bore casing wherein the setting arrangement includes 
a setting tool with a tubular mandrel forming part of a pipe 
string which is connected to, and extends into, the liner includ- 
ing a housing which surrounds and extends longitudinally of 
the liner so that the liner and housing form inner and wall 
portions defining an annular recess, the invention comprising: 

a. longitudinally extending piston means including seal 
means to sealably engage said piston means in the recess 
and said piston means having a cone shaped end; 

b. means to secure said piston means against premature 
upward movement into the recess; 

c. slip means; 

d. means releasably securing said slip means to the liner; 

e. port means in the liner for communicating fluid from the 
tubular mandrel to the recess to move said piston means 
downwardly in the recess and engage said cone shaped 
end with said slip means and thereby urge said slip means 
into engagement with the well bore casing for securing 
the liner to the casing; and 

r said seal means on said piston means including spaced seal 
means sealably engaging the inner wall of the recess, said 
piston means being retractable into th? recess by lowering 
the setting tool and liner relative to said piston means after 
said slip means engages the casing, said spaced seal means 
being located on said piston means so as to span the hous- 
ing port means to thereby seal off communication between 
the port means and recess. 



4,391,326 
STINGER ASSEMBLY FOR OIL WELL TOOL 
Donald R. Greenlee, Cedar Hill, Tex., assignor to Dresser Indus- 
tries, Inc., Dallas, Tex. ., 
FUed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,291 
Int. C\} E21B 2i/00 
U.S. a. 166—240 12 Claims 
2. A stinger assembly for use in releasably connecting an 
upper section of a tubing string to a tool in a well including a 
mandrel having a master cam slot therein defining upper and 
lower support shoulders, an indexable collar telescoped onto 



126 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



said mandrel, a follower connected to said collar and extending 
into said master cam slot, a collet joumaled on said collar and 
having a plurality of radially flexible spring-fingers connected 
thereto for latching said mandrel to the tool, said mandrel 
having an outer surface for blocking said fingers from deflect- 



proving the gas drainage characteristics of said coal seam; 
and 
(c) recovering injected material and naturally occurring gas 
from said coal seam. 




4,391^28 
DRILL STRING SAFETY VALVE 
James T. Aumann, Salt Lake City, Utah, assignor to Christen- 
sen, Inc., Salt Lake City, Utah 

Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,716 

Int. a,3 E21B 34/08 

U.S. a. 166—325 6 Claims 




ing inwardly and a recess wherein said fingers are free to 
deflect radially inwardly for connecting to and releasing from 
the tool, said upper support shoulder locating said spring-fin- 
gers vertically in registery with said recess when engaging said 
follower. 



! 4,391,327 

SOLVENT FOAM STIMULATION OF COAL 
DEGASIFICATION WELL 
Leonard J. De Carlo, Morgantown, W. Va., assignor to Conoco 
Inc., Ponca City, Okla. 

Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,575 
Int. a.3 E21B 43/26, 43/27 
U.S. a. 166—307 



5 Qaims 



^^ _J 




1. A method for improving the gas drainage characteristics 
of a coal seam comprising: 

(a) injecting into safe coal seam a foamed fluid comprised of 
a liquid solvent selected from the group consisting of 
toluene, pyridine, xylene, tetralin, anthracene, coal tar and 
mixtures thereof, a foam-producing surfactant and a high 
pressure gas, said foamed fluid containing an amount of 
said solvent effective to partially dissolve coal contacted 
by said foamed fluid; 

(b) maintaining said foamed fluid in contact with said coal 
seam for a period of time sufficient for said solvent to 
partially dissolve coal contacted therewith thereby im- 



1. A safety valve for allowing controlled normal flow and 

preventing uncontrolled abnormal back flow of fluid pressure 

through an internal passage of a drill string casing comprising: 

a valve seat situated in and around a portion of the internal 

passage in a portion of the drill string casing; 
a valve body retained within an adjoining portion of the 
internal passage in the drill string casing and adapted to 
allow fluid to pass around and through the internal pas- 
sage comprising 

a cylinder including an outer sidewall and an internal 
chamber within the outer side wall extending between 
opposite ends of the cylinder, and 
closure means attached to and closing off opposite ends of 
the cylinder and internal chamber; 
a movable valve stem including opposite end portions each 
slideably mounted in an aperature extending through each 
of the closure means of the valve body; 
a valve head attached to an opposite end portion of the valve 
stem, adapted for sealing engagement with the valve seat 
and normally maintained in a partially open position rela- 
tive to the valve seat sufiicient to allow passage of fluid 
and suspended cuttings during tripping of the drill string 
casing into and out of the borehole, but displacable to a 
wide open position in response to a predetermined normal 
amount of differential fluid pressure in the internal passage 
directed downstream against one side of the valve head 
and movable into sealing mating engagement with the 
valve seat in response to a predetermined abnormal 
amount of differential fluid back pressure in the internal 
passage directed back upstream against an opposite side of 
the valve head; and 
biasing means of predetermined opposing force comprising 
abutment means projecting from an intermediate portion 
of the movable valve stem within the internal chamber, 
and 
resilient means extending about each of the opposite end 
portions of the valve stem and compressible between 
each of the closure means and the abutment means on 
and movable with the valve stem for opposing move- 
ment of, returning and maintaining the valve stem in a 
predetermined normal position and the attached valve 
head in the partially open position in absence of and 
until the predetermined amount of differential fluid 
pressure directed against one side of the valve head is 
sufficiently greater than the opposing force of the resil- 
ient means and any fluid pressure directed against an 
opposite side of the valve head and thereby displace the 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



127 



valve head from the partially open position toward 
either the wide open position or a closed position. 



4,391,329 
USE OF MARKER FLUID IN CEMENTING OFFSHORE 

WELLS 
Julius P. Gallus, Anaheim, Calif., assignor to Union Oil Com- 
pany of California, Brea, Calif. 

Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,510 
Int. a.3 E21B 33/14 
U.S. a. 166—336 12 Qaims 

1. Method for cementing casing in an offshore well com- 
pleted under water comprising sequentially: 

(a) drilling a borehole, 

(b) positioning a drilling fluid in the borehole, 

(c) positioning one or more connected sections of casing in 
the borehole, 

(d) injecting into the casing, out the bottom thereof, up the 
annular space between the casing and the borehole and 
out into the surrounding water a slug of about 2 to 20 
barrels of a black colored marker fluid comprising: 

[1] 100 parts by weight cement; 

[2] about 35 to 56 parts by weight water, 

[3] about 5 to 8 parts by weight particulate carbon black, 

[4] about 4 to 6.4 parts by weight coal dust, and 

[5] about 0.52 to 0.84 parts by weight surface active agent, 

(e) injecting into the casing via the same route a cement 
slurry, 

(0 observing the displaced fluid emerging into the surround- 
ing water from the annular space, 

(g) observing when the black colored marker fluid begins to 
emerge from the annular space, 

(h) removing the cement slurry from the casing, and 

(i) shutting in the well for sufficient time to allow the cement 
slurry to set. 




of the bore through the suspension head, exhausting the clean- 
ing fluid from the contact region through the bore in the spool, 
fixing the suspension head in the bore, and sealing the contact 
region of the bore so as to exclude well fluid therefrom. 



4,391,330 

APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INSTALLING AND 

ENERGIZING SUBMERGIBLE PUMP IN UNDERWATER 

WELL 
Karl Kiefer, Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to TRW Inc., Cleve- 
land, Ohio 
Division of Ser. No. 78,907, Sep. 25, 1979, Pat. No. 4,304,452. 
This application Sep. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 298,503 
Int. a.3 E21B 33/043 
U.S. a. 166—341 5 Qaims 



1. A method of installing and energizing an electric sub- 
mergible pump in an underwater well, comprising providing at 
an underwater wellhead a spool having a bore aligned with the 
well and having a first set of electrical contacts at a contact 
region of the bore, suspending the pump from a suspension 
head having a second set of contacts adapted to engage corre- 
sponding contacts of the first set, lowering the suspension head 
and the pump into the bore with the pump passing through the 
bore into the well, and with the contacts of the second set 
f>ositioned for engagement with the corresponding contacts of 
the first set, introducing a cleaning fluid into the contact region 



4,391,331 
GUIDES FOR USE IN FORMING PIPE CONNECTHONS 
AND A PROCESS OF FORMING PIPE CONNECTIONS 
Keith Shotbolt, Gerrards Cross, England, assignor to Construc- 
tors John Brown Limited, London, England 

Filed Aug. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 176,293 
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 10, 1979, 
7928006 

Int. a.3 E21B 7/128 
U.S. Q. 166—342 8 Claims 




1. A guide for use in connecting a pipe to a connector of a 
sub sea wellhead, which guide comprises a guide post having a 
reversibly radially expandable portion to locate in and rigidly 
attach the guide post to the sub sea wellhead, and an elongate 
portion to be received in the pipe wherein the elongate portion 
comprises an elongate sleeve freely rotatable about the axis of 
the post for supporting the pipe for rotation to connect to the 
wellhead and suitable to constrain the pipe to an orientation in 
which it is concentric and coaxial with the wellhead connec- 
tor. 



4,391,332 
OFFSHORE FACTLITY FOR RECOVERY 

HYDROCARBON DEPOSITS FROM DEEP SEA BEDS 
Jose M. Fayren, Madrid, Spain, assignor to Astilleros y Talleres 

del Noroeste, S.A., Madrid, Spain 

Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,951 

Qaims priority, application Spain, May 20, 1980, 491.645 

Int. Q.3 E21B 43/00 

U.S. Q. 166—350 4 Qaims 

1. An improved facility, for the drilling and production of 
hydrocarbon deposits located in a deep sea bed, of the type 
having a submarine base secured to the deep sea bed, a bundle 
of tubular conduits connected to the submarine base and verti- 
cally extended therefrom to a moderate depth where the effect 
of surface sea waves is negligible, a subsea buoy connected to 
the top end of the bundle of tubular conduits at the moderate 
depth to thereby exert an ascensional force which places the 
tubular conduits under a vertical tension, well heads mounted 
on at least some of the tubular conduits, control means 
mounted on the subsea buoy for controlling the well heads for 
drilling and producing hydrocarbons, a floating plant adapted 
to float at sea level, and a top conductor connected to the 



128 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



subsea buoy and the floating plant, the improvement, in combi- 
nation therewith, wherein the bundle of tubular conduits com- 
prises a central structural column having a bottom end secured 
to the submarine base and a top end secured to the subsea buoy, 
a plurality of peripheral tubular conduits located around said 




casing lowering operation, has a weight greater than the 
load supporting capacity of said mast used in drilling; 

effecting the downward movement of said casing string, 
during at least said portion of the casing lowering opera- 
tion when the weight of the string exceeds the capacity of 
the mast, by relatively vertically actuating two casing 
supporting units of a jacking mechanism positioned in the 
rig, with the casing string being supported alternately by 
the two units respectively; and 

transmitting downward load forces resulting from the 
weight of said casing string from each of said supporting 
units to the earth without transmission of said forces 
through said mast, but while said mast used in drilling 
remains in said drilling position above the well. 



r 



r-5 



4,391,334 
HITCH ASSEMBLY 
Lawrence K. Carrick, Spokane, Wash., assignor to Calkins 
Manufacturing Company, Spokane, Wash. 

Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,127 

Int. a.3 AOIB 59/04 

U.S. a. 172—326 20 Oaims 



central structural column, guide means for securing said pe- 
ripheral tubular conduits to said central structural column at 
vertically spaced intervals, said peripheral tubular conduits 
being mounted to said guide means for sliding movement 
relative thereto and in a parallel position relative to said central 
structural column. 




4,391,333 
WELL CASING JACK MECHANISM 
George I. Boyadjieff, Anaheim, and Andrew B. Campbell, San 
Marino, both of Calif., assignors to Varco International, Inc., 
Orange, Calif. 

Filed Jul. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 169,718 

Int. C1.5 E21B 7/20 

UJS. a. 166—379 10 Qaims 




1. The method that comprises: 

drilling a well utilizing a rig which includes a mast project- 
ing upwardly above the well in a predetermined drilling 
position, and utilizing a drill string extending along a 
predetermined axis relative to said mast and downwardly 
into the well; 

removing said drill string from the rig after completion of 
the drilling operation; 

then lowering along said axis and into the well, while said 
mast remains in said drilling position above the well, a 
string of casing which, during at least a portion of the 



1. A ground- working tool for attachment to a towing vehi- 
cle, comprising: 

a first longitudinal hitch frame having a front end adapted 
for connection to the towing vehicle, and a rear end; 

a second longitudinal hitch frame; 

hinge means mounting the rear end of the first longitudinal 
hitch frame to the second hitch frame for relative pivotal 
movement about a horizontal transverse axis; 

a ground-working implement operatively mounted to the 
second hitch frame; 

lift means on the second hitch frame for moving the ground 
working implement between an elevated inoperative posi- 
tion above the ground-working surface and an operative 
position engaging the ground 

wherein the lift means is comprised of a ground-engaging 
wheel and hydraulic cylinder means on the second hitch 
frame, mounting the wheel to the second hitch frame and 
selectively operable to raise and lower the second hitch 
frame and attached implement between the operative and 
inopjerative positions; 

control means op)erably connected with the hydraulic cylin- 
der means to opjerate in conjunction with operation of the 
hydraulic cylinder means for alternately operating to (a) 
lock the first and second hitch frames together when the 
ground-working implement is in the elevated inop)erative 
position; (b) tip the second hitch frame and ground-work- 
ing implement downward and forwardly as the support 
means is operated to move the ground-working implement 
to its operative position engaging the ground; and (c) 
permit pivotal movement between the hitch frames rela- 
tive to one another about the hinge axis after the ground- 
working implement has been moved to its operative posi- 
tion; 
wheels movably holding the first hitch frame at a selected 

elevation; and 
suspension means between the wheels and first hitch frame 
mounting the wheels to the first hitch frame for pivotal 
movement about a longitudinal axis. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



129 



y 



4,391,335 
ROTARY HOE WHEEL 
Eugen J. Birkenbach, Kildeer, 111., assignor to International 
Harvester Co., Chicago, 111. 

Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,979 

Int. a.3 AOIB 21/04 

U.S. a. 172—540 8 Qaims 




1. A rotary hoe wheel adapted to be drawn over the soil and 
comprising a hub adapted to be rotationally connected to a 
sup>porting member, a plurality of spokes extending radially 
from said hub, a generally circular flange connected to said 
spokes outward of said hub and a plurality of radially extend- 
ing rearwardly curved to the direction of travel teeth con- 
nected to said flange and extending to a distal end adapted to 
work the soil, a tooth of said plurality having a rearward 
surface that is tap)ered at substantially 3° generally from one 
lateral surface rearwardly to the other from said distal end 
radially inwardly for the entire soil working portion of said 
tooth to engage, lift and move soil to one side of the wheel but 
rearwardly and the adjacent tooth rearward surface similarly 
and oppositely tap>ered at substantially 3° but also rearwardly 
to similarly move soil to the other side of the wheel but rear- 
wardly with the teeth alternating in this sequence around the 
flange. 



4,391,336 

ACOUSTIC SYSTEM TO GUIDE A COAL SEAM AUGER 
Julian B. Coon, Ponca City, Okla.; James C. Fowler, Burke, Va.; 
Charles £. Payton, Houston, Tex., and Kenneth H. Waters, 
Cape Town, South Africa, assignors to Conoco Inc., Ponca 
City, Okla. 
per No. PCrAJS80/01565, § 371 Date Aug. 21, 1981, § 102(e) 
Date Aug. 21, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO82/01908, PCT Pub. 
Date Jon. 10, 1982 

per FUed Not. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 301,993 
Int. a.J E21B 47/09 
VJS. a. 175—45 4 Oaims 

1. Method for boring a hole so that its axis is substantially 
parallel to the axis of a previously bored hole comprising: 
(a) positioning an acoustical transmitter and receiver in 
acoustical communication with the wall of the hole being 
bored so that their position on the said wall lies on a plane 



through the axis of said hole being bored and the axis of 
the previously bored hole; 

(b) transmitting a continuous frequency acoustical signal 
into the wall of said hole; 

(c) receiving the reflected signal from the adjacent wall 
along with other unwanted acoustical reflections; 




(d) determining the phase shift between said transmitted 
signal and said first received signal; and 

(e) determining the changes in the distance between the wall 
of said bored hole and said hole being bored. 



4,391,337 
HIGH-VELOCITY JET AND PROPELLANT FRACTURE 

DEVICE FOR GAS AND OIL WELL PRODUCTION 

Franklin C. Ford, 3459 Edison Way, Fremont, Calif. 94538; 

Gilmaa A. Hill, 6200 Plateau Dr., Englewood, Colo. 80110, 

and Coye T. Vincent, 1201 Eva Ave., Los Altos, Calif. 94022 

Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,322 

Int. a.3 E21B 43/] 17 

U.S. a. 175—4.6 I 9 Oaims 




1. An integrated jet p>erforation and controlled prop>ellant 

fracture device for use in combination with a conventional 

tamping means to enhance gas and liquid wells by p>erforating 

and fracturing well formation materials comprising: 

a housing having susp)ension means for locating said housing 

at a predetermined location in a well; 
at least one jet p>erforation unit contained in said housing 
having a launchable projectile jet and an explosive charge 
means for launching said projectile jet; 
a controlled-bum, gas prop>ellant material contained in said 

housing proximate said jet p)erforation unit; and 
firing means for igniting said prop>ellant material and deto- 
nating said charge means in a substantially simultaneous 
manner, said prop)ellant material having the characteristic 



130 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



on ignition of generating gases which instantaneously 
follow said jet, said gases having a pressure pulse to aug- 
ment and enhance fractures in a geological structure 
around the well which are initiated by said jet, wherein in 
use in a well having tamping means said device is con- 
structed and arranged to produce gases having a pressure 
pulse peak below the plastic flow limit of the well forma- 
tion materials. 



diameter of the outlet orifice; L is the distance between Do and 
Det, and D is the diameter of the chamber at any point between 



4,391,338 

MICROBALANCE AND METHOD FOR MEASURING 
THE MASS OF MATTER SUSPENDED WITHIN A FLUID 

r MEDIUM 

Harvey Patashnick, 27 Crow Ridge Rd., Voorheesville, N.Y. 
12186, and Georg Rupprecht, R.D. #3, Apartment 67, Al- 
tamont, N.Y. 12009 

Filed Apr. 4, 1980, Set. No. 137,424 

Int. a.3 GOIG 3/]4; GOIN 31/00 

UJS. a. 177—210 FP 14 Qaims 





Do and D^at a distance X from Do and wherein Do/L is 2 or 
greater; Dq/De is 3 or greater; and n is 2 or greater. 



4,391,340 

DITHER ASSISTED STEERING 

John Z. DeLorean, 280 Park Ave., New York, N.Y. 10017 

Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,399 

Int. a.3 B62D 3/00 

U.S. a. 180—79 12 Qaims 



'13 



1. Apparatus for measuring the mass of matter suspended in 

medium comprising: 

an elongate elastic element having a first end which is an- 
chored and a second end free to oscillate; 

filter means attached to the free end for receiving matter 
whose mass is to be measured; 

means for driving said element so that its second end with 
the filter means attached will oscillate at a resonant fre- 
quency; 

means for passing the medium containing the matter through 
the filter means as it oscillates in order to deposit the 
matter thereon; and 

means for sensing changes in the resonant frequency of 
oscillation of said element and filter as they oscillate. 



4,391,339 
CAVITATING LIQUID JET ASSISTED DRILL BIT AND 

METHOD FOR DEEP-HOLE DRILLING 
VirgO E. Johnson, Jr., Gaithersburg; T. R. Sundaram, Columbia, 

and Andrew F. Conn, Baltimore, all of Md., assignors to 

Hydronautics, Incorporated, Laurel, Md. 

Continuation of Ser. No. 931,244, Aug. 4, 1978, Pat. No. 

4,262,757. This appUcation Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,662 

Int a.3 E21B 10/60 

U.S. a. 175—393 4 Qaims 

1. A cavitating liquid jet nozzle for causing cavitational 
errosion of a solid surface comprising a housing for receiving 
a liquid and having an inlet end and an outlet end, said housing 
having an interior chamber tapering from the inlet end toward 
a narrower orifice at the outlet end and being shaped in accor- 
dance with the following formula: 



Do ~^ \^ Do )\^ L ^ Do ) 
wherein Do is the initial diameter of the chamber; Df is the 




3. In combination with a steering system linkage coupling a 
steering wheel to wheels having tires thereon, apparatus for 
reducing steering effort at low speeds by introducing a low 
amplitude dither into the steering linkage, comprising: 

(a) means including an oscillating system attached to the 
steering linkage; and 

(b) means to input energy to said oscillating system. 



4,391,341 
SUPPORTING CHASSIS FOR A WORKING MACHINE, 

SUCH AS A HYDRAULIC SHOVEL 
Daniel Taghon, Cinqueux, France, assignor to Poclain, Le Pies- 
sis Belleville, France 

Filed Oct. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 192,924 
Qaims priority, application France, Oct. 11, 1979, 79 25381 
Int. a.3 B62D 55/00 
U.S. a. 180—9.2 R 10 Qaims 




1. Supporting chassis for a working machine such as a hy- 
draulic shovel, comprising two longitudinal side-members, 
preferably two lateral side-members, each side member being 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



131 



essentially constituted by a metal sheet which is bent in such a 
way that its cross-section presents a downward oriented con- 
cavity, and by a plate closing off the bent metal sheet, the 
lower edges of said metal sheet being secured to said plate; the 
improvement wherein said plate is monobloc and obtained by 
rolling and comprises a central zone of predetermined thick- 
ness, which is flanked on each one of its sides with a monobloc 
rim of material of thickness between opposite lateral surfaces 
of each rim substantially greater than the predetermined thick- 
ness adequate to receive upwardly directed fixing screw 
screwed therein, and wherein the the lower edges of the said 
metal sheet are in contact with the upper faces of the thick rims 
bordering longitudinally the closing plate. 



an operative ground engaging position and a retracted 

position, relative to said platform; 
traction means for each side of said trailer and including a 

traction belt and belt supporting means; 
second means for selectively pivotally moving the traction 

means between a retracted position above said platform 

and an operative ground engaging position outboard of 

the adjacent road wheel; 



1 1 4,391,342 

STEERING MECHANISM FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED 

WITH POWER STEERING SYSTEM 
Masao Nishikawa, Tokyo; Yoshihiko Toshimitsu, Asaka; To- 
shihiko Aoyama, Saitama; Tokuro Takaoka, Tokyo; Takashi 
Aoki, and Yoichi Sato, both of Wako, all of Japan, assignors 
to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan 
j Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,492 

Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 10, 1980, 55- 
30729[U] 



U.S. Q. 180—143 



Int. a.3 B62D 5/06, 1/16 



7 Qaims 




-jTi^j^ " 



1. A steering mechanism for a vehicle equipped with a 
power steering unit producing an increased steering reactive 
force in proportion to vehicle speed and a resilient element 
interposed in a path of torque transmission between a steering 
wheel and said power steering unit, comprising: . 
a damper means provided between two relatively rotatable 
members operably associated with each other through 
said resilient element, whereby torsional vibrations of a 
first one of said members disposed on the side of said 
steering wheel, caused by the resiliency of said resilient 
element and the moment of inertia of said steering wheel, 
are attenuated; 
said damper means comprising two elements adapted to 
produce a frictional force when one of said elements 
rotates relative to the other of said elements; and 
said two elements of said damper means comprising a ring 
and a cover fitted on the outer periphery of said ring. 




means for locking said traction means and said road wheels 
in the r respective operative and retracted positions; and 

drive mieans in said platform, engageable by the vehicle 
drivp wheels, for driving said traction means when the 
vehicle is on the platform and the traction means are in 
their operative position. 



4,391,344 
LOADER OPERATOR RESTRAINT 
Henry J. Weber, Oaks; Lonnie D. Hoechst, Gwinner; James R. 
Christensen, and Verne C. Watts, both of Lisbon, all of N. 
Dak., assignors to Qark Equipment Company, Buchanan, 
Mich. 

Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,534 

Int. Q.' B60R 21/10. 25/06 

U.S. Q. 180—271 17 Qaims 



4,391,343 
' ' RETRACTABLE TRACTED CART 

Frederick A. Deare, 5 Kitchener Ave., Parry Sound, Ontario, 
Canada (P2A 1R7) 

Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 201,035 
Qaims priority, application Canada, Nov. 29, 1979, 3408% 
Int. Q.' B62D 55/08. 55/26 
U.S. Q. 180—198 12 Qaims 

1. A convertible traction device for use with a vehicle hav- 
ing at least two drive wheels, comprising: 
a trailer for towing behind said vehicle and having a plat- 
form sized to receive the vehicle, hitch means and a road 
wheel assembly; 
first means for selectively moving said road wheels between 




1. A loader including: 

a power operated working implement; 

control apparatus having a plurality of operative positions 
for supplying power to the working implement and at 
least one neutral position where power is not supplied to 
the working implement, the control apparatus capable of 
manipulation by the operator of the loader for placing the 
control apparatus in any one of the operative positions or 
the neutral position; 



132 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



an operator restraint member having an engaged position for 
securing the operator in the loader during operation and a 
disengaged position for releasing the operator to permit 
him to leave the loader; 

a lock assembly in operative cooperation with the control 
apparatus and the restraint member for locking the control 
apparatus in the neutral position when the restraint mem- 
ber is in its disengaged position, the locking assembly 
including a locking member connected with the restraint 
member, the locking member having a terminal end that is 
moved in a first direction when the restraint member is 
moved from its disengaged position to its engaged position 
and moved in a second direction when the restraint mem- 
ber is moved from its engaged position to its disengaged 
position, the locking assembly further including a locking 
device in operative association with the locking member 
for selective locking engagement with the control appara- 
tus, the locking device being pivotally movable to an 
unlock position with the control apparatus when the ter- 
minal end of the locking member is moved in its first 
direction, the locking device being pivotally movable to a 

. lock position spaced from the control apparatus when the 
terminal end of the locking member is moved in the sec- 

■ ond direction; 

a cab portion; 

a cab seat for the operator located in the cab portion; 

the restraint member including a generally U-shaped seat bar 
having two end portions and a bent center section, each of 
the end portions of the seat bar being pivotally connected 
to the cab portion at axially aligned pivot points, and the 
bent center section being radially displaced from an axis 
defined by the pivot points; 

a friction device operatively associated with one of the pivot 
points; 

said one pivot point including aligned openings in the cab 
portion and the seat bar and further including a pin in- 
serted through the aligned openings; 

the friction device including a spring mounted on the pin and 
a friction washer urged by the spring into engagement 
with the seat bar; 

the bar including a pair of mounting ears rigidly mounted to 
one end of the bar and one of said mounting ears having an 
opening therethrough; 

the cab portion including a rigidly attached bracket mounted 
on a side post of the cab portion; 

the bracket having first and second sections; 

the first section mounted on the side post and the second 
section disposed angularly from the first section and the 
side [>ost; 

said second section having an opening therethrough align- 
able with the opening in said one mounting ear; 

the pin being insertable through the aligned openings in said 
one mounting ear and the second section of the bracket; 
and 

the spring mounted on the pin biasing the second section and 
said one mounting ear together so that the bar remains in 
the rotative position selected by the operator until reposi- 

I tioned by the operator. 



16 Claims 



structural assemblies, one end of said cable being secured 
near the end of one of said structural assemblies; 

winch means mounted on said base and the other end of said 
cable wound thereon so that operation of said winch 
means may effect said elevating of said platform by further 
winding of said cable thereon; and 

means engageable by said cable when said lift assembly is in 
said collapsed position for providing a mechanical advan- 
tage in initiating the movement of said lift assembly 
toward said extended positions, comprising a sheave as- 
sembly mounted near the midpoint of one of the lower- 




most of said elongated structural assemblies and including 
at least first and second sheave members engageable by 
said cable between said winch means and one end of said 
one of the lowermost of said elongated structural assem- 
blies, forcing a portion of said cable to assume an inclined 
path from said first sheave member toward said one end of 
said one of the lowermost of said elongated structural 
assemblies for creating a vertical force, upon operation of 
said winch means, to initiate movement of said lift struc- 
ture from said collapsed position toward said extended 
positions. 



4,391,346 
LOUD-SPEAKER 
Naoyuki Murakami, 12-2-704, Kyuden 2-Chome, Setagaya-Ku, 
Tokyo-To, Japan, and Hiroshi Zyo, Tokyo, Japan, assignors 
to Naoyuki Murakami, Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,187 
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 4, 1979, 54-127325; 
Aug. 30, 1980, 55-120187 

Int. a.3 H05K 5/00 
U.S. a. 181—147 2 Claims 



I 4,391,345 

ELEVATABLE SCAFFOLD 
Jim N. Paul, 2737 S. Broadway, Tyler, Tex. 75701 
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,353 
Int. a.3 E04G 1/22; B66F 3/22 
MS. a. 182—141 

1. An elevatable scaffold including a base and a platform 
connected therebetween by a lift assembly movable between a 
collapsed position and extended positions for elevating said 
platform above said base, said lift assembly comprising: 
a series of elongated structural assemblies each pivoted at 
one end and the middle thereof to some other structural 
assembly in said series; 
a cable passing substantially parallel with some of said struc- 
tural assemblies and between the ends of mutually pivoted 



kUm Ak> ..I . II ,,,.,.,— 




■ ''^^'■'■^"^^■-'-^■■■■' ^^^s 



1. A loudspeaker, comprising: 

(a) a casing for accommodating therein speaker units, said 

casing being enclosed by walls on all four sides and back 

side, except for the front part; 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



133 



(b) a baffie board provided at the open front part of said 
casing, said baffle board having an opening formed therein 
opening into the ambient, said opening lying in a plane 
substantially parallel to the said back wall and being sym- 
metrical about a line perpendicular to said back wall; 

(c) a plurality of speaker fitting panels mounted around and 
behind said opening formed in said baffle board at an angle 
to said baffle board diverging in the direction of said 
opening, and a back fitting panel mounted on said speaker 
fitting panels parallel to said back wall; and 

(d) a plurality of speaker units intensively mounted on said 
speaker fitting panels around and behind said opening in 
said baffle board, and a back speaker unit mounted on the 
said back fitting panel, the total area of the entire dia- 
phragms of said speaker units being substantially equal to, 
or larger than, the area of said opening in said baffle board,- 
the sound wave radiating direction of said speaker units 
mounted on said speaker fitting panels being concentrated 
on a single imaginary point behind the plane of said open- 
ing in the baffle board, hence within the ambit of the space 
defined by said speaker fitting panels and on the said line 
perpendicular to the back about which the said opening is 
symmetrical, and the sound wave radiation direction of 
said back speaker unit being alone said line. , 



4,391,347 
SAFETY DEVICE FOR LADDER ACCESS OPENING TO 

AN ELEVATED PLATFORM 
John M. Cronan, Baton Rouge; Joseph M. Haynes, Baker, and 
Darrfell D. Jones, Brusly, all of La., assignors to The Dow 
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich. 

1 1 Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,878 
' ' Int. C\? E04G 9/10, 5/00 

U.S. a. 182—113 2 Qaims 




1. A safety device for that portion of an elevated platform, 
including a horizontal guard railing, to which an open access 
ladder is attached, comprising an elongated, rigid member 
adapted to form an extension of the horizontal portion of the 
guard railing, and means for connecting the elongated member 
to the platform railing including a pair of plates rigidly fas- 
tened to each end of the elongated member, and means for 
securely connecting each pair of plates at each end of the 
elongated member together below the guard railing at a point 
where the horizontal sections of the railing bend down to 
attach to the platform or where the vertical support posts 
converge together with the horizontal section of the railing, 
whereby the ends of the safety device can be locked to the 
railing above and on each side of the platform access opening 
of the p atform ladder. 



4,391,348 

SCAFFOLD SAFETY PIN 

Ronald L. Rieland, 963 S. Orient Ave., Fairmont, Minn. 56031 

FUed Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,843 

Int. a.3 E04G 5/08. 1/15 

U.S. CI. 182—119 9 Qaims 




1. Safety apparatus for scaffolds, comprising: 

(a) a scaffold having a platform and at least a pair of gener- 
ally horizontally extending support members beneath said 
platform spaced a first distance apart, said platform having 
opposing surfaces; 

(b) a pair of openings in said platform through one surface 
extending generally normal to said one surface; 

(c) safety pin means mounted within each said opening 
comprising a hollow cylinder having a pin freely mounted 
therein for limited movement between a retracted position 
with respect to said one surface and an operative position 
extending out of said opening beyond said one surface 
such that with said platform disposed with said one sur- 
face facing downwardly said pins are moved by gravity to 
said operative positions, and with said platform disposed 
with said one surface facing upwardly said pins are moved 
by gravity to said retracted positions; and 

(d) said openings being located a distance apart with respect 
to said first distance such that sliding movement of said 
platform in either direction will cause at least one of said 
pin means, in the operative position, to encounter a sup- 
port member to prevent further sliding movement thereof 



4,391,349 
TURBOMACHINE LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM 
Alexander A. Carroll, Greensburg, and William F. Hannan, III, 
Pittsburgh, both of Pa., assignors to Carrier Corporation, 
Syracuse, N.Y. 

Filed Mar. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 133,063 

Int. a.3 FOIM 7/00 

U.S. a. 184—6.26 2 Qaims 








1. A turbomachine lubricating oil system comprising: 

a casing defining a chamber having a plurality of apertures in 
the bottom; 

a relatively large diameter member mounted within said 
chamber and rotating therein with said member being 
cooled and lubricated via a spray of lubricating oil which 
drains from said casing via said plurality of apertures; 

structural support means for said casing including a gener- 
ally hollow member defining a plenum having inlet means 
communicating with the interior of said chamber via a 
plurality of apertures to receive the lubricant flowing 
therefrom and outlet means; 



134 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



a separate lubricating oil reservoir located in spaced relation 
to said structural support means, and 

means connecting said reservoir with said outlet means, the 
size of said plenum when compared to the size of said 
outlet means being such that lubricant flowing into said 
plenum will collect and form into a quiescent pool before 
draining therefrom. 



support assembly (35), said support tube (37,50) being 
axially rotatable relative to said jack shaft (18); and 
means (45,46) for converting axial rotation of said support 



4,39U50 

STRUCTURE FOR MOUNTING A BRAKE PAD 

ABRASION DETECTOR 

Michio Moriya, Hyogo, Japan, assignor to Sumitomo Electric 

Industries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan 

Filed Aug. 15, 1978, Ser. No. 933,941 
Gaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 20, 1977, 52- 
127282[U] 

Int. a.3 F16D 66/02 
U.S. Q. 188—1.11 10 Qaims 




1. A structure for mounting an electrical brake pad abrasion 
detector, of the type in which a through hole is formed in a 
backing plate in such a manner as to communicate with a blind 
hole formed in a brake pad, wherein the improvement com- 
prises: 
a cylindrical holding member fixedly secured in said through 
hole, said holding member having at least one no-retum 
pawl provided on the inner periphery thereof, said pawl 
having an end disf>osed within said cylindrical holding 
member; 
a substantially cylindrical probe having head and leg sec- 
tions meeting to form a shoulder at the intermediate por- 
tion of said probe, said probe being inserted into said 
holding member so as to allow the end of said at least one 
no-retum pawl to engage with said shoulder to thereby 
hold said probe; and 
the diameter of a portion of said holding member, extending 
from the vicinity of the end of said at least one no-return 
pawl to one end of said holding member adjacent said 
head section, being made larger than that of a remaining 
portion thereof. 



4,391,351 
PARKING DISC BRAKE ACTUATOR 

Norman F. Jirousek, Garfield Heights, and William M. 
Shipitalo, Novelty, both of Ohio, assignors to Towmotor Cor- 
poration, Mentor, Ohio 
PCT No. PCr/US80/01673, § 371 Date Dec. 12, 1980, § 102(e) 
Date Dec. 12, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO82/02077, PCT Pub. 
Date Jan. 24, 1982 

PCT FUed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 273,885 
Int. a.3 B60T 1/06 
U.S. a. 188—18 A 7 Claims 

1. In a power train subassembly (8) for a vehicle having a 
frame (9), a support assembly (35) rigidly affixed to the frame 
(9), a wheel drive assembly (22) rotatably mounted on the 
support assembly (35), a differential (11) having a jack shaft 
(18) extending therefrom and a brake (10) operatively associ- 
ated with said wheel assembly (22) and actuatable between an 
engaged and disengaged condition, comprising: 
a support tube (37,50) connecting said differential (11) to said 




tube (37,50) into lateral motion and mechanically actuat- 
ing the brake (10) between said engaged and disengaged 
condition, said means for converting (45,46) being con- 
nected to said support tube (37,50). 



4,391,352 

BRAKE SYSTEM AND APPARATUS AND METHOD 

THEREFOR 

Lawrence G. Brown, 1629 Kuhilani St., Honolulu, Hi. 96816 

Filed Feb. 2, 1977, Ser. No. 765,062 

Int. a.3 B62L 1/14 

U.S. a. 188—24.12 23 Qaims 




150 165 '62 



1. A brake system for a bicycle or the like, having frame 
means for supporting a bicycle rider and rotatable wheel means 
for enabling movement of frame means and bicycle rider, and 
comprising: 
brake pad means made from a substantially incompressible 
non-ferrous material having an effective coefficient of 
friction in both dry and wet operating conditions and 
having a friction surface engageable with the wheel means 
for generating a frictional braking force against the wheel 
means effective in both dry and wet operating conditions; 
a pair of brake pad support arm means of equal effective 
length and being pivotally movably mounted relative to 
the frame means and the wheel means in juxtaposition to 
the wheel means for uniform equal length movement 
relative thereto and for supporting said brake pad means 
for uniform equal length movement between a non-brak- 
ing position in maximum equally outwardly spaced rela- 
tionship to the wheel means with each friction surface 
spaced equally outwardly of the wheel means and an 
inwardly displaced braking pxjsition with each friction 
surface in frictional engagement with the wheel means to 
apply braking force thereto; 
hand operated braking force generating means mounted on 
the frame means and operably connected to said brake pad 
support arm means for operation of said brake pad support 
arm means and for generation of braking force by the 
bicycle rider; 
force increasing means operatively associated with said 
brake pad support arm means and said brake pad means 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



135 



■L 



for ihiformly equally increasing the brake force generated 
by the bicycle rider and for providing a relatively high 
uniform equal applied braking force on said brake pad 
means to generate sufficiently high effective braking force 
between said brake pad means and the rotatable wheel 
means in both dry and wet operating conditions; 

said force increasing means comprising: linkage means and 
connecting means and operating means arranged and 
connected to said support arm means for causing relative 
rapid initial movement of said support arm means and said 
brake pad means a relatively large distance from said 
non-braking position toward said braking position at rela- 
tively low mechanical advantage, and for causing rela- 
tively slow final movement of said support arm means and 
said brake pad means a relatively short distance toward 
the braking position at relatively high mechanical advan- 
tage and to generate relatively high uniform equal applied 
braking force in the braking position; and 

said force increasing means comprising formed spring wire 
means being operably connected to said hand operated 
force generating means and being operatively associated 
with said brake pad support arm means for movement 
between a non-braking position by application of braking 
force generated by the bicycle rider and for causing move- 
ment of said brake pad support arm means between the 
non-braking position and the braking position. 



4,391,353 

HAND OPERATED HYDRAULIC BICYCLE BRAKE 

William R. Mathauser, 3000 "B ' Ave., Anacortes, Wash. 98221 

Filed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,925 

Int. a.3 B62L 1/10, 3/02 

U.S. a. 188—24.12 17 Qaims 




1. A hand actuated hydraulic brake for a bicycle comprising: 
a hand actuated master cylinder mounted on the handlebars 

of a bicycle; 
a flexible fluid line connected to said master cylinder; and 
a brake pad holder unit mounted on the bicycle, said brake 
pad holder unit including a mounting fastener connected 
to such bicycle, a mounting clamp pivotably mounted on 
said mounting fastener, a bracket arm on said mounting 
clamp, first and second bicycle brake housings mounted 
on said bracket arm to be on opposite sides of a bicycle 
front wheel, said housings each being of a size commonly 
found on a bicycle, a lug mounted on said first housing, a 
fluid actuated brake arm moving means mounted on said 
first housing and a first brake pad mounted on said second 
housing, said brake arm moving means including a rolling 
diaphragm fluidly connected to said master cylinder by 
said flexible fluid line via said lug to exchange hydraulic 
fluid therewith, a movable brake pad holder having a 
projecting arm thereon, said arm being slidably mounted 
on said first housing and engaged against said rolling 
diaphragm for movement therewith, said rolling dia- 
phragm including a closed bottom portion contacting said 
brake pad holder arm, a side portion adjacent to said first 



housing and a connecting portion connecting said dia- 
phragm bottom and side portions so that said rolling dia- 
phragm can fold upon itself within said bicycle brake 
housing and a lip on an end of said side portion remote 
from said bottom, said lip being captured between said 
first housing and said lug, said sufficient flexibility to 
operate efficiently in a bicycle hydraulic brake unit, an 
arm return means engaged against said rolling diaphragm 
to bias said diaphragm against action of hydraulic fluid 
forced thereinto by said master cylinder, and a second 
brake pad mounted on said movable brake pad holder. 



I 4,391,354 

PISTON-AND-CYLINDER ASSEMBLY FOR HYDRAULIC 

DISK CLLTCH OR BRAKE 
Manfred Bucksch, Friedrichsbafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, 
assignor to Zahnradfabrik Friedrichsbafen AG, Friedrich- 
sbafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 250,025 
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 2, 
1980, 3012791 

Int. Q.^ F16D 55/40; POIB 7/20; F16D 79/00 
U.S. Q. 188—71.5 4 Qaims 




1. In a fluidically operated speed-changing assembly com- 
prising a cylinder with an annular working space, an annular 
piston axially slidable in said working space under pressure of 
an operating fluid, a stack of interleaved first and second annu- 
lar friction plates confronting said piston, said first friction 
plates being positively linked with said cylinder, said second 
friction plates being positively linked with a relatively rotat- 
able member to be coupled with said cylinder by fluid pressure 
forcing said piston against said stack, and spring means in said 
cylinder resisting a displacement of said piston toward said 
stack, 

the improvement wherein said piston occupies only part of 
said working space, leaving an annular clearance radially 
offset from said stack, and an ancillary ring is slidable 
independently of said piston in said clearance under pres- 
sure of said operating fluid while bearing only upon said 
spring means without coming into contact with said stack. 



4,391,355 
SLIDING CALIPER DISC BRAKE 
Anthony C. Evans, Norihville, Mich., assignor to Kelsey-Hayes 
Company, Romulus, Mich. 

FUed Dec. 3, 1979, Ser. No. 99,392 
Int. a.3 F16D 65/00 
U.S. Q. 188—73.44 6 Qaims 

1. An improved disc brake for engaging a rotatable disc 
having an axis of rotation and inboard and outboard frictional 
surfaces, said disc brake comprising two pins, means for affix- 
ing said pins to a stationary structure member inboard of said 
disc to extended parallel to and radially spaced from said axis 
with said pins spaced apart, a caliper extending over the pe- 
riphery of said disc and having inboard and outboard legs, 
means mounting said inboard caliper leg to slide axially on one 



136 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



of said pins, an outboard brake pad, means mounting said 
outboard brake pad on said outboard caliper leg, said outboard 
brake pad moving into and out of frictional engagement with 
said outboard frictional surface as said caliper moves axially on 
said one pin, an inboard brake pad, means mounting said in- 
board brake pad to slide axially on the other of said pins into 




and out of frictional engagement with said inboard frictional 
surface, said inboard calijier leg deflning a cylinder opening 
towards said inboard pad, and piston means located in said 
cylinder for moving said inboard pad against said inboard 
frictional surface when a fluid is introduced into a chamber 
defmed between said cylinder and said piston. 



I 4,391,356 

CLUTCH ENGAGEABLE/DISENGAGEABLE BY 
MOMENTARY ENERGIZATION OF SOLENOID MEANS 
Toji Takemura, and Kenzo Hirashima, both of Yokosuka, Japan, 
assignors to Nissan Motor Co. Ltd., Yokohama, Japan 

Filed Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,809 

Claims priority, application Japan, May 21, 1981, 56-76860 

Int a.3 F16D 27/10 

U.S. O. 192—84 C 4 Claims 




1. A clutch comprising: 

an input element operatively connected to a prime mover for 
being driven thereby; 

a first rotatable clutch element; 

a second rotatable clutch element movable with respect to 
the first clutch element and engageable therewith, said 
second clutch element being connected to said input ele- 
ment for synchronous rotation therewith; 

first biasing means for biasing said second clutch element 
away from said first clutch element when in a first state 
thereof, and for biasing said first and second clutch ele- 
ments together when in a second state thereof; 

an electromagnet associated with said first clutch element 
for attracting said second clutch element to said first 
clutch element and inducing said first biasing means to 



assume said first state when energized with a first prede- 
termined current; and 
means responsive to the energization of said electromagnet 
with a second predetermined current which is higher than 
said first predetermined current for reversing the state of 
said first biasing means from said second state to said first 
state and for causing said first and second clutch elements 
to separate. 



4,391,357 
COUPLINGS 
Ali Bindemagel, Wermelskirchen; Helmut Holthoff, Diisseldorf, 
and Hartmut Diel, Monchen-Gladbach, all of Fed. Rep. of 
Germany, assignors to Friedrich Kocks GmbH & Company, 
Hilden, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

FUed Jan. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 114,114 
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 14, 
1979, 2905560 

Int. Q\? F16D 79/00 
U.S. a. 192—94 22 Qaims 



1i : .15 



\ 








^^ 18 12 ^ ■ <JtS 1 <-*— ' '=" 




19 



1. An engageable and releasable rotary coupling for the 
non-relatively rotatable interconnection of two rotary machine 
parts the coupling comprising two coupling halves, one said 
coupling half including a screw-threaded member having an 
external taper thread, the other of said coupling half including 
a sleeve having a complementary internal taper thread screwa- 
bly receiving the external tap>er thread of said one half to act as 
a coupling means for transmitting torque from one machine 
part to the other, the screw-threaded member and the screw- 
threaded sleeve being axially movable towards and away from 
one another, means associated with one of said machine parts 
axially moving one of said coupling halves generally axially 
relatively to the other thereby enabling a drive for one of the 
two machine parts and a brake device for the other machine 
part to be used in conjunction for engaging and releasing and 
coupling, said coupling having means by which the screw- 
threaded member and the screw-threaded sleeve can be pushed 
axially one into the other before the commencement of the 
rotary movement for the purpose of the coupling operation, 
one of said member and sleeve being connected to its rotary 
machine part so as to be non-rotatable relative thereto and 
being displaceable to a limited extent in an axial direction 
relative to its rotary machine part against the force of a spring, 
and the other abutting against an alignment stop on its con- 
nected rotary machine part, whereupon the displaceable 
screw-threaded member or the screw-threaded sleeve is screw- 
ably engaged with the respective counten..ember upon com- 
mencement of the rotary movement. 



4,391,358 

HARDWARE PRESS AND PUNCH APPARATUS 

VirgU J. Haeger, 1144 Post Rd., Oakdale, Calif. 95361 

FUed Not. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,200 

Int. Q\? B23Q 77/00 

U.S. a. 192—130 7 Qaims 

1. A hardware press for assembling fastenening devices or 

punching holes in sheetmetal hardware devices and incorpo- 



JULY 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



137 



rating safety provisions to prevent injury to the operator, 
comprising: 

(a) a base structure; 

(b) a pedestal assembly on the base structure and including a 
cantilever arm portion projecting laterally therefrom; 

(c) a pressure-exerting ram assembly mounted on said canti- 
lever arm adjacent the free end thereof and including a 
hydraulic cylinder and a double-acting ram operatively 
associated therewith and selectively movable through a 
predetermined excursion along its longitudinal axis, said 
ram assembly being electrically insulated from said canti- 
lever arm on which it is mounted; 

(d) an anvil mounted on said pedestal and underlying said 
ram assembly; 

(e) an upper tool holder slidably mounted on said ram in 
electrically conductive interrelation therewith and 
adapted to removably support a selected upper tool 
thereon; 




side walls being slopped upwardly in a manner such that the 
material forming said sample moves with a rolling or sliding 
action in a zig zag path on said chute and without significant 
bouncing of the material down said chute as said chute is 



4,391,359 
SAMPLE SPLITTER 
Joseph A. Lapointe, 223 Sprindale Ave., Pointe Qaire, Quebec, 
Canada 

FUed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,268 
Int. C\} B65G 7i/00 
U.S. a. »3— 23 7 Qaims 

1. A sample splitter for particulates or small elements com- 
prising at least one chute slopped downwardly from a rear end 
towards a discharge end, means for oscillating said chute on a 
substantially horizontal path substantially perpendicular to the 
axial center line of said chute, said chute being substantially 
symmetrical on opposite sides of said axial centre line, side 
walls on said chute on opposite sides of said centre line, said 



t^'/ 




oscillated, an elongated V-shaped plow at the discharge end of 
said chute to intercept material issuing from said chute, the line 
forming the apex of said V-shaped plow being substantially in 
alignment with axial centre line of said chute when said chute 
is at the mid-point of its oscillation. 



4,391,360 
MACHINE FOR HANK DRAWING AND DOITING 

Federico Minnetti, Pieve A Nievole, Italy, assignor to Officine 
Minnetti Di Ornella Raveggi & C.S.a.s., Pieve A Nievole, 
Italy 

Filed Sep. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 187,638 
Qaims priority, application Italy, Mar. 14, 1980, 20669 A/80 
Int. Q.' B65G 47/24 
U.S. Q. 198—412 31 Qaims 



(0 a lower tool holder mounted on said anvil in electrically 
conductive interrelation therewith and adapted to remov- 
ably support a selected lower tool thereon in cooperative 
relation to said upper tool; and 

(g) control means for normally selectively advancing said 
ram under a predetermined high hydraulic pressure to 
bring said upper and lower tools together into a predeter- 
mined pressure exerting relationship upon a workpiece 
interposed therebetween with a pressure injurious to the 
operator if imposed on the operator's hand while automat- 
ically stopping advance of the ram if the operator's hand 
is encountered between the upper and lower tool holders; 

(h) said control means including a normally-open safety 
switch operatively interposed between said ram and said 
upper tool holder and operable to close a circuit to stop 
the advance of the ram when a non-conductive element, 
such as the operator's hand, is encountered with sufficient 
force to slidably displace said upper tool holder to close 
said normally-open switch. 




1. A machine for removing yam hanks from hank carriers 
and for unloading the removed hanks onto container means, 
said machine comprising: 

plier means for removing yam hanks from hank carriers, said 
plier means including a fixed center rod and two side rods, 
the side rods being movable towards the center rod at the 
two opposite sides thereof for simultaneous gripping of 
two hanks and being movable away from said center rod 
for releasing gripped hanks; and 

pliers operating means for controlling said gripping and said 
releasing movements. 



4,391,361 

HOLD-DOWN APPARATUS FOR CABLE CONVEYORS 

Beigamin O. Hall, and Thomas W. Amdt, both of Oskaloosa, 

Iowa, assignors to Intraco, Inc., Oskaloosa, Iowa 

FUed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No, 270,629 

Int. Q.3 B65G 19/28 

U.S. Q. 198—735 6 Claims 

1. In a conveying apparatus of a type including a flexible 

endless member, material engaging means disposed on said 

flexible endless member for catching material and moving the 



138 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



material in response to movement of the flexible endless mem- 
ber and said material engaging means, channel means disposed 
at least partially around said flexible endless member and said 
material engaging means for conflning material for transporta- 
tion from place to place, said channel means having a pair of 
opposed sidewalls, and means for selectively causing said 
flexible endless member to be pulled through said channel 
meaiK, an improvement comprising: 



.3. 'i 




means for resiliently engaging said material engaging means 
to bias said material means into said channel means, said 
resilient engaging means being secured to an upper por- 
tion of said pair of opposed sidewalls and comprising a 
mounting bracket attached to said opposed sidewalls and 
a loop shaped spring member secured to said mounting 
bracket; said spring member extending into said channel 
means for resiliently pushing against said material engag- 
ing means. 



-4,391,362 
SPEED CONTROLLED INFEED CONVEYOR SYSTEM 
Louis A. Spinelli, West Milford, N.J., assignor to Nabisco 
Brands, Inc., Parsippany, N.J. 

1 Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,680 

I Int. Q\} B65G 43/08 

U.S. a. 198—855 3 Qaims 



mm ait 




iitm sotmi ,* p 



^ 






\i^^ 



mffie 



"\. 



men p«[ssmt 



electrical signal proportional to the speed of the input con- 
veyor, and means for summing said first and second signals and 
producing a third signal proportional to the difference between 
a reference voltage and the sum of said first and second signals. 



4,391,363 
AUTOMATIC LATCH FOR UNLOADING AUGER 

T. William Waldrop, New Holland, Pa., assignor to Sperry 
Corporation, New Holland, Pa. 

Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,395 

Int. a.3 B65G 21/10 

U.S. a. 198—865 7 Qaims 




1. In combination with a container having a movable unload- 
ing auger, the improvement comprising: 

means for supporting said auger, said means being a support 
member connected to said container and extending there- 
from; 

a latch arm pivotally mounted on said auger; 

a latch pin connected to said latch arm; 

means for guiding said latch pin to a first obstruction posi- 
tion relative to said support member; 

means connected for raising and lowering said auger, said 
means including a cable operably connected to pivot said 
latch arm to move said latch pin between said first posi- 
tion, and a second obstruction free position relative to said 
support member; 

resilient means for urging said latch pin from said second to 
said first position; 

means for limiting movement of said latch pin to said second 
position; 

said latch pin being moved from said first position to said 
second position when the tension in said cable overcomes 
the force of said resilient means; and 

said latch pin being moved from said second position to said 
first position when the force of said resilient means over- 
comes the tension in said cable. 



1. A speed controlled conveyor system for transporting a 
continuous column of abutting articles, said system comprising 
a generally horizontal infeed conveyor having an output end, a 
curved chute aligned with said output end and extending in a 
downward arc, a product handling device removing articles 
from the lower end of the chute, said chute being open on the 
side thereof facing upward and forward to permit the curved 
column of articles on the chute to bow outwardly when axial 
pressure within the column builds due to the infeed rate ex- 
ceeding the removal rate, means for measuring the outward 
displacement of the curved column on the chute and produc- 
ing a first electrical signal proportional to that displacement, a 
motor driving said infeed conveyor and speed control means 
responsive to the first signal for adjusting the speed of said 
motor, said means for measuring the displacement of said 
curved column including a light source directing a light beam 
so as to be progressively intercepted by the column as it bows 
outwardly, and a photocell for detecting the degree to which 
said light beam is intercepted by said column, said speed con- 
trol means including a variable output magnetic clutch having 
an electromagnetic control coil, means producing a second 



4,391,364 
AUTOMATIC LATCH FOR UNLOADING AUGER 
Terry A. Young, Lititz, and Aquila D. Mast, Lancaster, both of 
Pa., assignors to Sperry Corporation, New Holland, Pa. 
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,396 
Int. a.3 B65G 21/10 
U.S. a. 198—865 11 Qaims 

1. In combination with a container having a movable unload- 
ing auger, the improvement comprising: 

means for supporting said auger, said means being a support 
member connected to said container and extending there- 
from; 
a latch arm movably mounted on said auger; 
a latch arm receiver connected to said container; 
means connected for raising and lowering said auger relative 
to said support, said means including a cable operably 
connected to move said latch arm between a first position, 
in engagement with said receiver, and a second position, 
out of engagement with said receiver; 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



139 



J 



resilieit means for urging said latch arm from said second 
position to said first position; 

means for guiding said latch arm and for limiting movement 
of said latch arm in said second position, said means being 
a guide plate having a latch arm receiving slot formed 
therein, said latch arm extending through said slot and 
terminating adjacent said receiver; 




said latch arm being moved from said first position to said 
second position when the tension in said cable overcomes 
the force of said resilient means; and 

said latch arm being moved from said second position to said 
first position when the force of said resilient means over- 
comes the tension in said cable. 



4,391,365 
SINGLE DISPENSING MULTIPLE SUTURE PACKAGE 

Jay A. Batchelor, Bethel, Conn., assignor to American Cyana- 
mid Company, Stamford, Conn. 

^ I i Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,159 
" Int. Q.5 A61L 77/02 

U.S. Q. 206—63.3 9 Qaims 




4,391,366. 
FOLDABLE CUP 

Isao Hirata, Sagamihara, Japan, assignor to Tokai Metals Com- 
pany Limited, Yokohama, Japan 

Filed May 5, 1981, Ser. No. 260,843 

Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 9, 1981, 56-16847 

Int. Q.' B65D 5/46. 5/54. 5/56. 85/72 

U.S. Q. 206—218 7 Qaims 



1. A surgical suture package comprising a center panel; at 
least one foam receptacle affixed to said panel; a plurality of 
cards placed onto said panel adjacent to said receptacle; a 
plurality of sutures each singly contained in a non-tangling 
configuration over a major portion of each card wherein the 
area surrounded by said configuration comprises an area larger 
than the remaining portion of the card; a first flap placed onto 
said cards; means for attaching said first flap to said cards and 
to said panel; and a second flap foldably attached to said panel 
and placed onto said receptacle and said first flap, whereby 
said sutures can be contained with at least one end of each 
suture contained by said receptacle. 



^—1 






'" 


... - - 


*- 


! " 




« 


w 


IC 


<5 


,5 « 

i 


<5 45 

46 


44 


^e 




1 " 








5T 


w • 


1 1^— 

- « 


^^'» 


'i 

'5 


P7„ jH^' ' -1 *? 





L± 



1-4—'^ 



1. A foldable cup comprising: 

a substantially tubular outer shell made of a stiff material and 
having longitudinally spaced opposite ends and two over- 
lapping lateral edges extending between said ends, said 
shell being foldable along longitudinal fold lines parallel to 
said lateral edges to collapse said shell to a substantially 
flat condition, said cup including a pouch made of a flexi- 
ble material disposed within said outer shell for accommo- 
dating contents, said pouch comprising a pair of opp)osing 
body walls bonded to the inside of said outer shell and 
having bottom wall portions foldable to lie between said 
body walls when said pouch is collapsed to a flat condi- 
tion, said bottom wall portions having bottom edges flexi- 
bly connected to bottom edges of said body walls, respec- 
tively, and each bottom wall portion having a common 
edge flexibly joining said bottom wall portions together, 
said body walls and said bottom wall portions each being 
connected along lines extending obliquely from upper 
portion thereof with respect to said longitudinal fold lines 
toward the bottom edges of said respective body walls, 
said pouch including longitudinal lateral edges along 
which said body walls are flexibly connected, said lateral 
edges of said pouch extending from the upper edges of 
said body walls to a point intersecting the obliquely ex- 
tending lines, the distance between said lateral edges of 
said pouch being substantially equal to the distance be- 
tween said lateral edges of said outer shell, the distance 
between the upper and bottom edges of said pouch when 
folded being substantially equal to the distance between 
the upper and bottom edges of said outer shell, the dis- 
tance between said common and bottom edges of said 
bottom wall portions of said pouch and the length of said 
obliquely extending lines being such that when said outer 
shell and pouch are unfolded, said bottom wall portions lie 
within the bottom edge of said outer shell, said lateral 
edges of said body walls of said pouch having opposing 
inner surfaces which are bonded together and folded 
exteriorly over onto one of said body walls of said pouch, 
the resulting folded portion of said lateral edges of said 
pouch being bonded to the adjacent body wall in the 
vicinity of said upper edge of said body wall of said pouch 



4,391,367 

PACKING CONTAINER 

Lucio C. Perego, 4835 Campbell Q., Fort Wayne, Ind. 46804 

Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,876 

Int. C\? B65D 5/50. 85/00 

U.S. Q. 206—315 R 23 Qaims 

1. A packing device comprising a packing container having 

one or more wall portions, an auxiliary packing receptacle 

within the volume of said packing container mounted adjacent 

to one of said wall portions and having a first access opening 



140 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



registrable with a second access ojjening in said one wall por- 
tion, said receptacle includes means for retaining one or more 
articles therein, said one wall portion having a manipulable 
closure for the second opening therein, said one wall portion 



^a 




3~u 



'32 



including a first sheet-like element, a second sheet-like element 
overlying said first element and having a third opening therein, 
said receptacle being received by and carried within said third 
opening and having a laterally extending flange-like portion 
interposed between said elements. 



accommodating the vertical nesting of one of said containers 
within another like container in a fully nested storage relation- 
ship, and bale means on said end walls selectively locatable in 
any of a plurality of positions relative to said end walls to 
selectively establish different depths to which said another like 
container may be nested within said one container; 
the improvement wherein said bale member comprises an 
elongate rod-like bale member extending parallel to each 
end wall, crank means fixed at one end to each end of said 
bale member, aligned pivot means for establishing a piv- 
otal axis parallel to and offset from said bale member at the 
opposite end of said crank means from said bale member, 
coupling means on said end walls receiving said pivot 
means for pivotal movement of said bale member about 
said axis relative to the associated end wall and for sliding 
movement wherein said bale member is movable relative 
to said end walls in directions normal to said axis, said 
coupling means including means defining at least two 
spaced stable rest positions of said pivot means relative to 



4,391,368 
PACKAGING AND DISPENSING SYSTEM 
Leroy Washington, Jr., 143 Ironwood Cir., Sierra Vista, Ariz. 
85635 

Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,301 
I Int. a? B65D 8i/00, 33/00 

U.S. a. 206—484 1 Qaim 




1. A system for packaging and distributing predetermined 
increments of flowable material, comprising: a web, a plurality 
of discrete containers on said web in a predetermined pattern, 
means for opening each container individually, means provid- 
ing for separation of one or more containers with a part of said 
web from the remainder of said containers and web, said means 
for opening providing for opening to either one of two prede- 
termined sizes of opening depending on direction of opening 
by said means for opening, said means for opening including a 
tapered side with widening and narrowing portions on said 
container, and a pull-tab affixed across said tapered side at a 
location intermediate the length of said tapered side in position 
for being pulled in a direction producing a widening opening 
by breaking free said widening portion of said tapered side 
when pulled toward said widening portion of said tapered side, 
and alternatively for being pulled in a direction producing a 
narrowing opening by breaking free said narrowing portion of 
said tapered side when pulled toward said narrowing portion 
of said tapered side. 



431^9 
FOUR-LEVEL STACKING CONTAINER 
Edward L. Stahl, Brighton, and Elsmer W. Kreeger, Allegan, 
both of Mich., assignors to Pinckney Molded Plastics, Inc., 
Pinckney, Mich. 

FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,063 
Int. a.^B6SD 21/06 
VJS. a. 206—506 3 Claims 

1. In an open topped, stackable container including a bot- 
tom, a pair of end walls projecting upwardly from said bottom 
at oj^xKite ends thereof, said end walls having means thereon 




said end wall, means on said end wall selectively engage- 
able with said bale member when said pivot means is in 
any one of said stable rest positions to establish two alter- 
native rest positions of said bale member at different levels 
relative to said end wall for each of the two stable rest 
positions of said pivot means and 
wherein one of said rest positions of said bale member lo- 
cates said bale member outwardly of vertical alignment 
with the bottom of said container whereby a like container 
may be lowered downwardly past said bale member into 
said fully nested storage relationship, said bale member 
when located in any of its three other rest positions being 
located in overlying relationship with said bottom of said 
container, and means defining a series of three spaced bale 
member receiving notches in the bottom of said container 
respectively located in vertical alignment with said three 
other bale member rest positions, whereby a like container 
may be stacked upon said container at any of four different 
levels as determined by the rest position occupied by said 
bale member. 



4,391,370 
EMBROIDERY PROJECT ACCESSORY CARRYING 

CASE 
Lorraine E. Dalbo, Atlanta, Ga., assignor to Dal-Craft, Inc., 
Tucker, Ga. 

FUed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,895 
Int. aJ A45C 15/00. 7/00 
U.S. a. 206—574 7 Claims 

1. A carrying case for needlework materials including a 
backing sheet having an inside surface and an outside surface, 
said backing sheet comprising a flexible center section, a first 
end section at one side of said flexible center section and con- 
tiguous with said flexible center section, a second end section 
at the opposite side of said flexible center section and contigu- 
ous with said flexible center section, a first storage pocket 
carried by said inside surface of said first end section, and a 
second storage pocket carried by said inside surface of said 
second end section, said flexible center section being foldjd)le 
adjacent to said storage pockets, said second end section being 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



141 



foldable towards said inside surface along a line adjacent to 
said second storage pocket after said first end section is folded 
towards said inside surface along a line adjacent to said first 
storage pocket so that said second end section is disposed with 
said inside surface of said second end section overlying said 
outside surface of said first end section, and fastening means to 



panels maintain a fixed spacing between said top and 
bottom trays, thereby enclosing and protecting the article. 




4,391,371 

HBERBOARD SHIPPING CONTAINER HAVING 

LAMINATED SPAONG MEMBERS 

William G. Sieffert, Joliet, III., assignor to Champion Interna- 
tional Corporation, Stamford, Conn. 

I Filed May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 377,695 
Int. a.3 B65D 85/42 
U.S. a. ,206—597 6 Qaims 








5/ 



ss 



^^-^ 



1. A fiberboard container for enclosing and protecting at 
least one ariicle, said container comprising: 

opposed top and bottom trays disposed in spaced parallel 
relationship, each said tray comprising rectangular base 
and article receiving pads defined by front, rear and op- 
posed side edges, said pads being of substantially identical 
dimensions and being disposed in spaced parallel relation- 
ship such that the respective front, rear and side edges 
thereof are in register, said article receiving pads being 
further defined by at least one opening corresponding to 
the shape of the article, said trays being disposed such that 
the article receiving pads thereof face each other, and 
spacers extending between and connected to said pads in 
each said tray; and 

an octagonal sleeve extending between and separating said 
top and bottom trays, said sleeve including substantially 
rectangular front, rear and opposed side panels extending 
between the front, rear and opposed side edges respec- 
tively of the base pads, four substantially rectangular 
connecting panels extending between said article receiv- 
ing pads and angularly aligned with respect to the front, 
rear and opposed side edges thereof, two said connecting 
panels foldably connecting said front panel to said side 
panels, and the remaining two connecting panels foldably 
connecting said rear panel to said side panels, whereby the 
front, rear and opposed side panels of said sleeve maintain 
said top and bottom trays in register while said connecting 



4,391,372. 

VACUUM STARWHEEL 

Fredrick L. Calhoun, Rolling Hills, Calif., assignor to Industrial 

Dynamics Company, Ltd., Torrance, Calif. 

Continuation of Ser. No. 738,824, Nov. 4, 1976, abandoned. This 

application Apr. 3, 1978, Ser. No. 893,243 

Int. CI.3 B07C 5/00 

U.S. a. 209—523 23 Qaims 



selectively retain said second end section in position over said 
first end section, said flexible center section having suflicient 
length to provide storage space between said inside surface of 
saidjiexible center section and said first storage pocket, said 
storage space being continuous with the inside of said second 
storage pocket. 




1. A mechanism for transferring individual containers from 
one input position to one of at least two output positions, 
including: 

a first member continuously movable in a particular path 
including at least one port and including means extending 
from the member and communicating with the port and 
constructed to retain one of the individual containers for 
movement with the first member when a vacuum is ap- 
plied to the part, 

a second stationary member including at least first and sec- 
ond parts disposed in the path of movement of the first 
member for movement of the first port in the first member 
into sequential communication with the first and second 
ports in the second member, 

means defining a source of vacuum, 

means operatively coupled to the vacuum source and to the 
first and second ports in the second stationary member for 
producing vacuum in the first and second ports, 

the first and second ports in the second member being elon- 
gated in the path of movement of the first member and the 
length of the port in the first member being less than the 
length of the first and second ports in the second member 
to provide a vacuum with the retaining means in the first 
member for holding the container during the communica- 
tion of the port in the first member with the ports in the 
first and second members, 

means for providing a source of at least atmospheric fluid 
pressure, 

the second stationary member including at least third and 
fourth ports dis|K>sed in the path of movement of the port 
in the first member for communication with the port in the 
first member at least a portion of the time during the 
movement of the first member, the third port being inter- 
mediate the first and second ports and the fourth port 
being positioned after the second port in the direction of 
movement of the port in the first member, the third port 
communicating with either the vacuum means or the 
pressure means, the fourth port communicating with the 
pressure means, the movable member providing a transfer 
of the individual container for release at the position of the 



142 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



third port when the third port communicates with the 
pressure means or for release at the position of the fourth 
port when the third port communicates with the vacuum 
means, 

the size of the first port in the first member in the path of 
movement of the first member being greater than the 
shortest distance between the second and third ports but 
less than the respective distance between the first or sec- 
ond ports and the side of the third port on the far side of 
the first and second ports in the path of movement of the 
first member, 

means for providing a continuous movement of the first 
member in the particular path, 

means for testing particular parameters on the container for 
particular characteristics during movement of the first 
member with the first port on the first member in commu- 
nication with the first port on the second member at an 
intermediate position along the length of the first part, and 

means for providing a communication of the third port on 
the second member with a particular one of the vacuum 
means and the pressure means, in accordance with the 
characteristics of the particular parameters tested on the 
container by the testing means, during the communication 
of the first port on the first member only with the third 
port on the second member. 



update the stored signal values for signal drift compensa- 
tion. 



4,39U73 
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR COMPENSATING 

SIGNAL DRIFT DURING CONTAINER INSPECTION 
Edmund C. Wiggins, Pinellas County, Fla., assignor to Barry- 
Wehmiller Company, St. Louis, Mo. 

Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,600 

Int. a.^ GOIN 21/i2; G06M 7/00: HOIJ 39/12 

U.S. a. 209—526 .-. 4 Qaims 




431,374 

METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR SEPARATING 

ELONGATED ARTICLES BY LENGTH 

Robert A. Krynock, Indiana, Pa., assignor to FMC Corporation, 

Chicago, 111. 

Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,297 

Int. C\? B07C 5/02 

U.S. a. 209—540 10 Qaims 




1. A separator comprising a vibratory surface for conveying 
elongated articles longitudinally thereon, said surface having a 
slot with upstream and downstream edges extending trans- 
versely of the direction of articles travel, a plate projecting 
within the slot near the upstream edge to form a surface over 
which articles slide, said plate having a downstream edge that 
together with the downstream edge of the slot defines a grad- 
ing gap through which articles of short length drop, and means 
mounting the plate independently of the vibratory surface 
whereby articles conveyed by the surface decelerate when 
sliding across the plate before reaching the grading gap. 



4,391,375 
DISPLAY CARD AND ASSEMBLY HANGER 
Robert D. Joyce, Greenville, R.I., assignor to Joyce Card & 
Display Co., Providence, R.I. 

Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,908 

Int. a.3 A47F 7/00 

UA a. 211—13 9 aaims 



1. In apparatus for the inspection of containers movable 
through an inspection zone, said apparatus having a plurality 
of radiant energy beam emitters and detectors oriented on the 
container passage in the inspection zone, such that said emitters 
and detectors are aligned in cooperating pairs to produce 
output signals from said detectors corresponding to container 
insp>ection values and to values during intervals between con- 
tainer movement through the inspection zone, the improve- 
ment of processing circuit means connected to said emitters 
and detectors including: 

(1) subcircuit means for storing the signal values generted 
each time during intervals between container movement 
in the inspection zone and means for adjusting the stored 
signal values to generate threshold signal values, said 
subcircuit means comprising an analog to digital signal 
converter, a memory circuit means connected to said 
analog to digital output, and a digital to analog signal 
converter, and 

(2) subcircuit means for comparing the output signal values 
from said detectors during each container inspection di- 
rectly with said adjusted threshold signal values, whereby 
each output of the analog to digital signal converter is 
compared with the value of the signal previously stored in 
said memory circuit means for determining the need to 




1. A display assembly for jewelry and the like comprising: 

a. a substantially vertically disposed card having a main 
portion and an outwardly biased flap hingedly attached to 
the top edge thereof extending downwardly and out- 
wardly therefrom; and 

b. a hanger for suspending said card comprising; 

i. support means engageable with the bottom edge of said 
flap to support said card; 

ii retaining means engageable with the side of said card 
opposite from said flap to retain the bottom edge of said 
flap in engagement with said support means; and 

iii fulcrum means engageable with said flap at an interme- 
diate point in its extension causing said flap to be hinged 
inwardly toward said card when said flap is pressed 
against said fulcrum means. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



143 



4,391,376 
RESILIENT CLAMP FOR SUPPORTING ARTICLES 
Charles C. Finnegan, Ei^ondido, Calif., assignor to LeLasso 
Corporation, San Diego, Calif. 

1 1 FUed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,620 
1 1 Int. a.3 A47F 7/00: E21B 19/14 



U.S. a. 211—60 SK 



8 Claims 




1. Apparatus for clampably supporting ariicles, comprising: 

a mounting base for being secured to a supporting structure 
incorporating a pair spaced inwardly directed opposed 
projections, 

said mounting base comprising a strap member, having a flat 
central mounting section and end sections that are spaced 
from said central mounting section and comprising in their 
terminal portions said opposed projections; 

a clamping member for removable mounting on said mount- 
ing base, 

said clamping member comprising a resilient mounting sec- 
tion incorporating opposed outwardly directed openings 
sized to receive said projections, 

said outwardly opposed openings comprising a channel 
through said mounting section, 

said channel being elongated in a plane that is parallel, in the 
mounted position, to the plane of said central mounting 
section; 

said resilient mounting section being compressible to a 
length permitting said section to pass between said op- 
posed projections and expandable to engage said opposed 
projections, 

a pair of opposed clamping elements extending from said 
mounting section for receiving an article therebetween, 

an elastic cord having end connectors for encircling said 
clamping elements and an article received between said 
clamping elements to resiliently urge said clamping mem- 
bers toward one another, 

said elastic cord being received through the channel in said 
mounting section, 

said end connectors comprising a hook member, 

said hook member comprising at least one deformable 
clamping strap means for being compressed onto an end of 
said cord, and having a hook section extending from said 
strap clamping means; 

said cord and strap clamping means being receivable in said 
channel in said mounting section, 

said hook section having a cross section larger than said 
channel and protruding therefrom when said cord and 
strap are received in said channel. 



4,391,377 
KNOCK-DOWN ASSEMBLY FOR SUPPORTING 
1 1 OXYGEN TANKS 

Theodore Ziaylek, Jr., P.O. Box 292, Yardley, Pa. 19067 
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,408 
Int. a.3 A47F 7/28 
U.S. a. 211—71 8 Qaims 

1. A rack assembly for supporting oxygen tanks and like 
cylindrical objects, comprising: 
(a) a plurality of box sections each of which is of rectangular, 
three-sided form with one open side and includes a web 
portion and a pair of sidewall portions extending there- 



from, said sections being adapted to be disposed in longi- 
tudinally contacting relation; 
(b) at least one cradle mounted in each section and adapted 
to supportably engage an oxygen tank, the web portions of 
some of the sections closing the open side of adjacent 
sections; 



M f 



Wr- 



it 30 






3! »~J~« 3? 



h- rJ^ 



32 



J, 




(c) a cover plate closing the open side of the remaining 
sections; and 

(d) connecting means extendingbetween and fixedly secured 
together those sections disposed in longitudinally contact- 
ing relation. 



4,391,378 
SHELVING CONSOLE FURNITURE 
Edward Secon, Trumbull, Conn., assignor to The Sherwood 
Corporation, Spring City, Tenn. 

Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,218 

Int. Q\? A47F 5/01 

U.S. a. 211—187 8 Qaims 




1. A shelving console furniture unit comprising a pair of 
laterally spaced side frame support standards for supporting 
the ends of at least one shelf member therebetween, each stan- 
dard comprising a pair of wire frame members each frame 
member being identical and having spaced vertical and spaced 
horizontal portions interconnected to define a border about an 
opening, a multiplicity of rungs of finite thickness secured to 
and between each pair of frame members at substantially 
equally spaced similarly disposed locations about the border 
and extending into said opening, said shelf member comprising 
a substantially rectangular frame, a hook outstanding at each 
comer of said shelf frame having a downwardly disposed 
portion, each said hook being positionable upon a rung with 
the downwardly disposed portion projecting between the rung 
and the adjacent frame members. 



144 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4^91^79 
LIFTING APPARATUS ADAPTED FOR MOUNTING IN A 

VEHICLE TRUNK 
Edgar C. Paffrath, Birch Run, Mich., assignor to Amigo Sales, 
Inc., Bridgeport, Mich. 

FUed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,411 
I Int. a.3 B66C 23/44 

U.S. a. 212—187 3 Qaims 




cooperating with said knuckle movable between knuckle lock- 
ing and knuckle unlocking positions, manual means selectively 
translating said locking member between knuckle locking and 
knuckle unlocking positions, the improvement comprising, 
safety means mounted upon the body selectively engaging the 
locking member to control movement of the locking member 
from the locking position to the unlocking position, said safety 
means comprising an expansible chamber motor mounted upon 
the coupler body, a piston within said motor having a pressure 
face and a rod face, a rod affixed to said piston extending from 
said rod face and having an outer end projecting from said 



1. Lifting apparatus adapted to be mounted in an automobile 
trunk or the like comprising a base plate, adapted to be 
mounted on a fixed frame, a vertical post fixedly mounted at its 
lower end on said base plate, a sleeve rotatably supported on 
said post for free rotation about a vertical axis, an elongate 
boom, pivot means mounting said boom upon said sleeve for 
pivotal movement about a horizontal axis located adjacent one 
end of said boom, power driven lift means mounted on the 
opposite end of said boom, extensible gas spring means 
mounted between said sleeve and an intermediate location on 
said boom gravitationally counterbalancing said boom about 
said horizontal axis, and releasable lock means mounted on said 
sleeve and engageable with said gas spring means to positively 
maintain said gas spring means at a predetermined extended 
position constituting an elevated lifting position of said boom; 
said post projecting upwardly beyond the upper end of said 
sleeve, and brace means for fixedly securing the upper end of 
said post to said fixed frame; said boom comprising an elongate 
boom member, a mounting bracket including a pair of spaced 
plates fixedly mounted on and projecting from said boom 
member at said one end thereof to receive said sleeve therebe- 
tween, said pivot means being coupled to said sleeve and said 
bracket at the side of said sleeve remote from said boom mem- 
ber, said gas spring comprising a cylinder pivotally mounted at 
its upper end between said bracket plates at the side of said 
sleeve opposite said pivot means and a rod projecting from the 
lower end of said cylinder, said lock means comprising a rigid 
prop member, second pivot means commonly mounting the 
lower ends of said rod and said prop member on said sleeve, 
and a cylinder seat on the upper end of said prop member 
supportingly engageable with the lower end of said cylinder to 
maintain a predetermined extension of said rod from said cylin- 
der. 




motor toward the locking member, an air supply conduit com- 
municating with said motor and piston pressure face, a com- 
pression spring within said motor engaging said piston rod 
face, valve means within the compressed air brake system 
controlling air flow therethrough positionable between open 
and closed positions and in communication with said air supply 
conduit whereby closing of said valve means depressurizes said 
motor permitting said spring to retract said rod and opening of 
said valve means pressurizes said motor to extend said rod, and 
a rod receiving recess defined upon the locking member and 
aligning with said rod upon the locking member being in the 
knuckle locking position to receive said rod outer end. 



4,391,381 

PAINT-COATED BOTTLE 

Akiho Ota, and Fumio Negishi, both of Tokyo, Japan, assignors 

to Yoshino Kogyosbo Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 253,635, filed as PCT 

JP79/00206, Aug. 3, 1979, published as WO8I/0039!, Feb. 

19, 1981 § 102(e) date Mar. 3, 1980, abandoned. This 

application Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,393 

Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 2, 1978, 53-12368 

Int. a.3 B65D 2i/(X) 

U.S. a. 215—1 C 3 Qaims 



4,391,380 
RAIL CAR COUPLER INTERLOCK 
Demetrius H. Hoose, 404 Broad St., Michigan Center, Mich. 
49254 

FUed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,879 
Int. a.3 B61G i/04. 3/28. 5/08 
Ui». a. 213— 76 3 Claims 

1. In a railroad coupler system for railroad cars utilizing a 
compressed air brake system wherein the coupler includes a 
body having a recess defined therein for receiving a coupler 
knuckle head, a knuckle pivotally mounted upon said body 
pivotal between open and closed positions with respect to said 
recess, a locking member mounted upon said body selectively 




1. A paint-coated bottle formed of a saturated polyester 
resin, comprising: a chlorinated primer layer applied to the 
exterior surface of the bottle; an acrylic undercoat layer ap- 
plied to said primer layer; and a decorative paint layer applied 
to said undercoat layer, said paint layer being prepared by 
adding a pigment to titanium nitride. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL] 



145 



1 1 431,382 

CONTAINER HAVING A SAFETY CLOSURE 
Werner Emich, Bensheim-Langwaden, Fed. Rep. of Germany, 
assignor to Friedrich Sanner GmbH & Co. KG, Bensheim, 
Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Mar. 17, 1982, Ser, No. 359,072 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 18, 
1981, 3110514 

Int. a.3 B65D 55/02 
U.S. a. 215—213 20 Qaims 




4,391,383 I 

OVERSEALING CAPS 
Pierre Babiol, Villefranche sur Saone, France, assignor to So- 
ciete Nouvelle de Bouchons Plastiques S.N.B.P., Anse, France 
per No. PCr/FR79/00105, § 371 Date Jul. 7, 1981, § 102(e) 
Date Jul. 7, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01399, PCT Pub. 
Date May 28, 1981 

per FUed Nov. 13, 1979, Ser. No. 280,001 

Int. a.3 B65D 41/48 

U.S. a. 215—256 4 Qaims 




1. A capping capsule with a thin wall comprising a closed 



end and an axially extending skirt including a circumferential 
tear-off guarantee strip which is joined at its upper and lower 
edges to the skirt at two rupture lines defined by two circum- 
ferential grooves extending around the inside of the skirt and 
separated by the height of the guarantee strip, and the guaran- 
tee strip including on its inner face multiple circumferentially 
spaced axially extending ribs, the thickness of each rib decreas- 
ing abruptly near its ends and blending into the rupture lines 

4,391,384 
AUTOMOBILE BODY PANEL HOLE CLOSURE 
Dan T. Moore, III, and Michael F. Fischer, both of Oeveland 
Heights, Ohio, assignors to Dan T. Moore Co., Geveland, 
Ohio 

Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,483 

Int. a.3 B65D 41/00 

U.S. a. 220—359 11 Claims 



1. In combination: a container, especially a container of 
glass, metal or plastic material for pharmaceutical preparations 
or chemicals, said container having a tubular neck and an open 
mouth surrounded by an end face, a stopper adapted to be 
pushed into the mouth of the container neck and having a grip 
plate with a bottom surface limiting the extent to which the 
stopper can be inserted into the neck and also having a circum- 
ferential surface permitting grasping of the stopper by a per- 
son, and a safety sleeve projecting above the end face of the 
container neck, being disposed externally on the container 
neck and having a projecting portion conformingly receiving 
the circumferential surface of the grip plate of the stopper in 
the closed position of the container, the bottom surface of the 
grip plate resting upon an annular circumferential radial sur- 
face of the safety sleeve, screw-threaded sections on said sleeve 
and said container neck in the complementary engagement 
with one another over a limited distance wfien looking in the 
opening direction of the stopper and being secured against 
axial separation from one another, the safety sleeve having at 
least one projection directed radially inwardly from an inside 
surface thereof, said projection being snapped over a first 
annular bead on the outside surface of the container neck, said 
first annular bead being directed radially outwardly and situ- 
ated ahead of the projection when looking in the opening 
direction of the stopper. 



btzr^n^ m 



Hi. 



rtt/t/i t//tft'r/i ff/ 't/fftk^r^rttt rrrm^f 



1. A closure for a hole in a panel such as a body panel in an 
automotive vehicle, comprising a plate having dimensions 
complementary to and somewhat larger than the hole, means 
for attaching the plate to the panel, a gasket having dimensions 
at least as large as the hole, the gasket being of an elastomeric 
material responsive to the application of heat to expand to a 
relatively high degree, means attaching the gasket to the plate 
prior to assembly with the panel hole, the heat expansion 
capacity of the gasket being sufficient to ensure that any gaps 
existing between the plate and the opposed areas of the panel 
surrounding the hole permitted by the plate attaching means 
and resulting from manufacturing tolerances in the fabrication 
of the panel hole and plate are closed. 



4,391,385 
CLOSING ARRANGEMENT 

Hans Rausing, Lund, Sweden, assignor to Tetra Pak Developpe- 
ment SA, Pully, Switzerland 

FUed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,440 
Claims priority, application Sweden, Aug. 20, 1980, 8005840 
Int. a.J B65D 39/00 
U.S. a. 220—307 15 Claims 




1. A closing arrangement for containers which have at least 
one plane end wall and an aperture therein, comprising: 
a unitary closing body insertable into the aperture, said 
closing body including: 

flange means for retaining said closing body in the aper- 
ture, 
a container-emptying channel in said closing body, and 
cover means sealed to said closing body for closing said 
channel in said body; and a separate 
seal means located on an outer periphery of said closing 
body for sealing against an edge of the aperture, said seal 
means including an annular layer of a material softer than 



146 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



said body in which material said edge of the aperture 
becomes embedded. 



through said second and third orifices to move a ticket 
from the top of the stack of tickets out of the container 
through said slot; and 



4^9136 
HANDLING CASE WITH INCORPORATED FOLDABLE 

LID 

Michel Moret, Ennont, France, assignor to Allibert S.A., France 

Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340,926 

Claims priority, application France, Jan. 21, 1981, 81 01034 

Int. CIJ B65D 43/14. 51/04 

U.S. a. 220— 343 7 Claims 




1. A handling case entailing a lid hinged to the body of the 
case along one of its edges along a hinge formed toward the 
upper edge of the case, characterized in that the said lid (3) is 
divided into two parts (4, 5) hinged one to the other about a 
second hinge (6) parallel to the first hinge (9), respectively 
forming a rear part (4) articulated around the said first hinge 
(9) on the said edge of the case, and a front part (5) hinged to 
the said rear part (4) of the lid about the said second hinge (6), 
the said front part (5) including, in the vicinity of the ends of 
the said second hinge (6), hook-shaped or similar parts (12) 
which in the tipped position of the lid are locked into slots (13) 
formed in corresponding positions along the edge (14) of the 
case, the said front part (5) also including conventional locking 
mechanisms (21, 22) to lock the lid onto the case. 




controller means for electronically timing and sequencing 
the air under pressure from said air jet orifices. 



4,391,388 

CONTROL SYSTEM FOR INCREASING THE 

VERSATILITY OF AN ALL PURPOSE MERCHANDISER 

Merrill Krakauer, 1 Deer Path, Short Hills, N.J. 07078 

Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 258,937 

Int. CI.5 G07F 11/54 

U.S. a. 221—76 8 Qaims 



I 4,391,387 

MAGNETIC TICKET DISPENSER 
Robert T. Bayne, Carmel, and Phillip E. Shireman, Martinsville, 
both of Ind., assignors to Standard Change-Makers, Inc., 
Indianapolis, Ind. 

Continuation of Ser. No. 71,921, Sep. 4, 1979, Pat. No. 
4,326,643. This application Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,741 
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 27, 
I 1999, has been disclaimed. 

I Int. a.5 B65H 3/14 

U.S. a. 221—13 2 Qaims 

1. Apparatus for dispensing rectangular tickets or the like 
comprising: 
a container having a vertically extending opening therin 
with a rectangular horizontal cross section adapted to 
loosely receive a stack of tickets, said container having a 
top and a ticket passage slot adjacent thereto and leading 
from said opening to the outside of said container; 
an elevator mounted for vertical movement in said container 

and adapted to support the stack of said tickets; 
means for operating said elevator to position the uppermost 

ticket thereon slightly below said top; 
said container having air jet orifices therein, a first of which 
is located in the container side wall on the opposite side of 
said container from said slot, said first orifice extending 
toward the side of the stack of tickets below the upper- 
most tickets, a second of said orifices being located in said 
container top on the opposite side of said container from 
said slot, and a third of said orifices being located in said 
continer top above said slot; 
means for providing a blast of air under pressure through 
said first orifice to break apart the tickets in the stack and 




1. In a merchandising machine, apparatus including a cabinet 
formed with a plurality of vertically aligned access openings 
leading into the interior of said cabinet, a plurality of normally 
locked doors associated with said openings, a merchandise 
carrier comprising a plurality of levels of compartments each 
adapted to receive merchandise, means mounting said mer- 
chandise carrier for movement as a unit around a vertical axis 
with said merchandise levels respectively at the heights of said 
openings, drive means adapted to be energized to move said 
carrier, a plurality of selecting means corresponding respec- 
tively with said levels, respective first control means associated 
with said selecting means and adapted to be set to energize said 
drive means in response to actuation of associated selecting 
means for a period of time to move said carrier to position the 
next full compartment of the level corresponding to the actu- 
ated selecting means behind its associated opening and to stop 
said carrier in said position, respective second control means 
associated with said selecting means and adapted to be set to 
energize said drive means in response to actuation of the asso- 
ciated selecting means to permit the customer stationarily to 
position any compartment of the corresponding level behind 
the level opening, means for selectively setting one of said first 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



147 



and second control means of each level to cause the level to 
operate in a first-in first-out mode or in a shopper mode, and 
means including said control means and coin responsive means 
for releasing a door behind which a compartment containing 
selected merchandise has been positioned. 



4,391,389 
ADJUSTIBLE ACTUATOR FOR PLURAL DISPENSING 

DEVICES 

Giuseppe Catalfamo, Via Sanvito, 14, Varese, Italy 

Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,392 

Claims priority, application Italy, Apr. 8, 1980, 21240 A/80 

Int. a.3 B67D 5/52 

U.S. a. 222—135 18 Qaims 




1. In a dispensing device, a combination comprising: 

first means for holding containers for at least two substances 
to be dispensed at a preselected ratio to one another, said 
containers each being of the type having one end provided 
with a stationary end wall and a second end provided with 
a movable end wall which is slidable toward said one end 
to effect expulsion of the substance of the container; 

second means for effecting the dispensing of said substances, 
said second means comprising a plurality of linearly mov- 
able pusher members, one for each container, each pusher 
member having a leading end portion adapted to press 
against and effect movement of one of said movable end 
walls and further comprising for each of said pusher mem- 
bers an element of rigid strip material having a hole 
through which the respective pusher member extends, an 
abutment portion engaging said element spaced from and 
at one axial side of the pusher member, a spring engaging 
the element adjacent said pusher member at the opposite 
axial side and urging the element towards said one side so 
that the element tilts on the pusher member and the edge 
portions bounding said hole entrainingly engage the 
pusher member; and 

third means connected with said second means and opera- 
tive for changing said preselected ratio to a different ratio. 



4,391,390 
CHEMICAL-MIXING AND DISPENSING APPARATUS 
Arthur G. Howard, 7711 Newport Way, Apt. D., Indianapolis, 
Ind. 46250 

FUed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,894 
I Int. a.3 B05B 7/26 

U.S. Q. 222— 136 12 Qaims 

1. A chemical-mixing and dispensing apparatus for provid- 
ing a volume of a chemical mixture to a dispensing location, 
said chemical-mixing and dispensing apparatus comprising: 
a first chemical container having an inlet port and an outlet 

port; 
a first chemical disposed within said first chemical container; 
a source of a second chemical; 

flow conduit in flow communication with the outlet port of 
said first chemical container and with said source of a 



second chemical, said flow conduit allowing simultaneous 
passage therethrough of said first and second chemicals; 
a fixed-volume chemical mixture holding tank having an 
outlet port in flow communication with said dispensing 
location and having an inlet port in flow communication 
with said flow conduit; 




a fixed-volume control tank in flow communication with and 

between said flow conduit and the inlet port of said first 

chemical container; and 
flow control means for periodically releasing a portion of 

the contents of said chemical mixture holding tank to said 

dispensing location. 



4,391,391 
SYRINGE FOR APPLYING ADHESIVE RESIN TO THE 

JUNCTIONS OF TENNIS RACKET NETTING 
Aldo M. Robaldo, Corso Francia 33, Turin, Italy 
Filed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,586 
Qaims priority, application Italy, Jan. 11, 1980, 52825/80[U]; 
Mar. 7, 1980, 53010/80[U] 

Int. Q.5 B67D 5/00 
U.S. Q. 222—478 14 Qaims 



': 22 



1. A syringe for applying adhesive resin to the junctions of 
racket netting, comprising a reservoir cylinder to contain such 
adhesive resin and an injecting piston to expel adhesive resin 
from such reservoir cylinder and at least two separate adjacent 
parallel tubular spray nozzles fluidically coupled with and 
extending from the end of the reservoir cylinder to provide 
simultaneous, substantially identical doses of adhesive resin 
therethrough to such junctions. 



4,391,392 
SLIDING CLOSURE UNIT 
Peter Jeschke, Walluf, and Jiirgen Plath, Wiesbaden, both of 
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Didier-Werke A.G., Wies- 
baden, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,188 
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 20, 
1980, 3031377 

Int. a? B22D 41/08 
U.S. Q. 222—598 6 Qaims 

1. In a sliding closure unit for selectively discharging liquid 
melt from a liquid melt container of the type including an outer 
jacket, an inner refractory lining and a pouring opening ex- 
tending through the lining, said sliding closure unit cooperat- 



14S 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



ing with the container for selectively blocking and unblocking 
the pouring opening and including a stationary refractory plate 
having therethrough a flow passage for communication with 
the pouring opening, a sliding refractory plate in abutting 
contact with said stationary refractory plate and having there- 
through at least one flow passage to be selectively moved into 
and out of alignment with said flow passage of said stationary 
refractory plate, said stationary and sliding refractory plates 
having complementary, abutting relative sliding surfaces, the 
improvement wherein: 




receiver means to initiate the operation of the first timer and 
second radio transmitter and receiver means to initiate opera- 
tion of the second timer; the improvement comprising 
a third timer connected in parallel to and being adapted to 
override the said second timer, the third timer including 
an electrically timed operation cycle and a manual timer 
adjustment knob, the adjustment knob being connected in 
the timer to vary the duration of the timed operation 
cycle, and 
manual means connected into the electrical control circuit to 
bypass the first and second radio transmitter and receiver 
means, the manual means comprising a flexible electrical 
cord and a switch, the manual means being adapted to 
manually function the up and down pivotal movements of 
the wetting arm and the spray cycle through the spray 
nozzle from a location remote from the electrical control 
circuit; 
whereby the timed period of brine flow can be manually ad- 
justed without requiring tools. 



said stationary refractory plate consists essentially of a sub- 
stantially non-wettable material having a Mohs' hardness 
of from 1 to 2, a thermal conductivity of greater than 40 
WAm at 700° C. and a crushing strength of not greater 
than 25 N/mm^ at about room temperature; and 

said sliding refractory plate consists essentially of a substan- 
tially non-porous material having a Mohs' hardness of 
from 6 to 7, a thermal conductivity of less than 3 WAm at 
700° C. and a crushing strength of greater than 300 
N/mm2 at about room temperature. 



4 391 393 
WETTED SALT SYSTEM INCLUDING ADJUSTABLE 
I TIMER 

Wm. G. Filmyer, Philadelphia, Pa., assignor to Pioneer De-Icing 

Services, Inc., Philadelphia, Pa. 

Continuation of Ser. No. 67,304, Aug. 17, 1979, abandoned. This 

application Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,572 

Int. C1.5 B67D 5/02 

U.S. a. 222—642 1 Claim 



4,391,394 
METHOD FOR LAYING SHIRTS, ESPEOALLY MEN'S 

SHIRTS, FOR PURPOSES OF WRAPPING 
Rolf Hoffmann, Monchen-Gladbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, 
assignor to van Laack, Schmitz & Eltschig GmbH u. Co., 
Monchen-Gladbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,100 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 26, 
1980, 3036277 

Int. a.3 A41H 33/00 
U.S. a. 223—37 6 Qalnis 





1. In a wetted salt system suitable to extend the melting 
range of highway salt of the type including a liquid storage 
tank, a wetting arm pivotally connected at one end to a station- 
ary support and having an unconnected end, the wetting arm 
comprising an enlongated bar and at least one nozzle supported 
near the unconnected end of the bar, and means to pivotally 
function the wetting arm relative to the support between an 
elevated position and a spray position; a brine pump taking its 
suction from the storage tank and delivering liquid under 
pressure to the spray nozzle; a hydraulic circuit to control the 
operation of the means to pivotally function the arm; an electri- 
cal control circuit including a first timer to control the time 
period the wetting arm remains in the said spray position and 
a second timer to control the time period of the flow of brine 
from the pump to the spray nozzle, first radio transmitter and 



1. A procedure for laying a shirt, in particular a men's shirt, 
for purposes of wrapping, wherein the shirt yokes are folded- 
over along mutually parallel folding lines on the back of the 
shirt and the folded-over yokes lying on each other are fas- 
tened by a slipped-on clamp in the area of a beak formed be- 
tween them, whereupon the shirt sleeves are layed on the 
folded-over yokes and then the torso end consisting of the 
front and rear sides and away from the collar is turned-over 
together with folded-over parts along a folding line extending 
transversely to the lengthwise direction of the shirt and is 
further fastened to the front side or to the folded-over parts 
joining same, characterized in that the folded-over yokes (2, 
10, 11) are merely joined together by the clamp (15), in that the 
folded-over torso end (18) of the shirt (1) that is away from the 
collar is fastened by at least two pins (22, 23) to the folded-over 
parts (10, 11), and in that torso end (18) is folded-over so much 
that a tuck-in end (20) projecting above the upper border (13. 
14) is folded about this border (13, 14) of the yokes (2) and is 
tucked-in behind the yokes (2, 10, 11). 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



149 



4,391,395 

CLOTHES HANGER 

Franz Kamer, Lidkoping, Sweden, assignor to Kamer & Co AB, 

Lidkoping, Sweden 

Continuation of Ser. No. 37,955, May 9, 1979, abandoned. This 

qiplication Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 315,303 

Claims iniority, application Sweden, May 11, 1978, 7805391 

Int. a.3 A41D 27/22 

U.S. CI. 223—94 5 Qainis 



other at an acute angle in the direction that said web is offset 
from said bag when said bags occupy a common plane so that 




1. A clothes-hanger comprising a hollow central portion 
having an outer end and having a slot in the lower region 
thereof, the slot having a defining edge adjacent to the outer 
end thereof, said edge being spaced inwardly from the outer 
end of the central portion, a suspension member disposed on 
the central portion, said central portion having abutment 
means centrally therein, two end pieces, at least one said end 
piece being telescopically in the central portion in order to be 
movable between an inner and an outer position in the central 
portion, the outer ends of said end pieces having gripping 
portions for engagement with an article of clothing which is to 
be hung up, said one end piece at its inner end having a trans- 
verse abutment face, a compression spring disposed between 
and abutting said abutment means in the central portion and 
the abutment face of the end piece telescopically disposed in 
the central portion, recess means in the bottom of said movable 
end piece adjacent to and spaced from the transverse abutment 
face thereof, and a locking device resiliently connected at the 
inner end thereof to said one end piece with its inner end at the William D, 
inner end of the one movable end piece and having a free outer 
end remote from said inner ends, said outer end of said locking 
piece having end surface means for engaging said defining 
edge of said slot in said central portion, said locking device 
extending from its inner end towards said gripping portion of 
the one end piece and underlying said recess means, said recess 
means being devoid of any obstruction to movement thereinto 
of said locking means, the locking device having a lower sur- 
face inclined downwardly toward the outer end thereof, said 
locking device positioned when said inner end of said one end 
piece is partially inserted into said central portion for engage- 
ment of the lower surface thereof with the outer end of the 
central portion whereby resiliently to move said locking de- 
vice into said recess means in the said one end piece upon initial 
insertion thereof and whereby after further insertion said lock- 
ing device will be caused to snap down into said slot formed in 
said central portion lower region by the resilient connection, 
the end surface means at the free outer end of said locking 
device engaging the defining edge of said slot and being urged 
thereagainst by said compression spring. 




said bags are level when they are carried, with said web resting 
on the shoulder of said user. 



U.S. 



4,391,397 

HREWOOD CARRIER 

Taylor, Jr., P.O. Box 142, King George, Va. 22485 

Filed Jan. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,153 

Int. a.' A45C 11/00 

a. 224—265 1 Qaim 




4,391,396 
CLOTHING TRAVEL BAG 
Reginald D. Brady, 2524 Boyer Ave. East, Apt. 446, Seattle, 
Wash. 98102 

FUed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,132 
Int. a.3 A45F 3/02 
U.S. a. 224—205 9 Qaims 

1. A travel bag for carrying objects, comprising first and 
second bags interconnected by a relatively thin, flexible web, 
said web being offset from the center of at least one of said bags 
to provide clearance for the neck of a user when said travel bag 
is carried with said web over one shoulder and the first and 
second bags extend downwardly along the back and chest of 
the user, said web being secured to said bags in a manner that 
causes the respective center axes of said bags to intersect each 

1032O.G.— 6 



1. A device for carrying wood, particularly firewood, com- 
prising a front-carried frame formed of a pair of rigid, gener- 
ally S-shaped, tubular elements formed of conventional electri- 
cal conduit, spaced apart in parallel planes by a plurality of 
rigidly attached cross members, the upper curvatures of the 
S-elements being configured in downwardly-concave C-por- 
tions, padded with conventional hot water pipe insulation to 
rest on the shoulders of the wearer of the device, the lower 
curvatures of the S-elements being configured in upwardly- 
concave C-portions to form a receptacle for the transportation 
of firewood, and the lower curvatures and two cross-members 
being covered with canvas sleeves attaching to them a canvas 
sheet which forms a part of the receptacle. 



150 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4,391,398 

METHOD OF TENSIONING A TAPE 
Heinrich Cap, St. Georgen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to 
Papst Motoren GmbH A Co. KG, St. Georgen, Fed. Rep. of 
Germany 

Filed Feb. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 122,684 
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 26, 1979, 
1886/79 

Int. a.3 B65H 23/22 
U.S. a. 226—4 5 Oaims 




1. A method of tensioning a tape in a tape recording device, 
comprising the steps of passing a tape between a braking roller, 
a first sound shaft, a second sound shaft, and a pulling roller 
located one after the other so that the tape runs with counter- 
acting pulling forces and slips over the sound shafts; and ad- 
justing the pulling forces of the rollers and the slip of the tape 
on the sound shafts so that one pulling force of the tape be- 
tween the braking roller and the first sound shaft, and another 
pulling force of the tape between the first and second sound 
shafts act in a direction toward the braking roller, whereas a 
further pulling force of the tape between the second sound 
shaft and the pulling roller acts opposite to said direction, and 
also so that the first sound shaft reduces the one pulling force 
between the braking roller and the first sound shaft and 
thereby the other pulling force between the first and second 
sound shafts is smaller than said one pulling force, and the 
second sound shaft reduces the other pulling force between the 
first and second shafts so that the further pulling force between 
the second sound shaft and the pulling roller is smaller than 
said other pulUng force. 



4,391,399 
MANUALLY ASSEMBLABLE SHEET-FEED TRACTOR 

Alan F. Seitz, New Hartford, Conn., assignor to Data Motion, 
Incorporated, Torrington, Conn. 

FUed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,492 

Int. a.3 B65H 17/38 

VJS. a. 226—74 26 Qaims 




1. A sheet-feed tractor adapted to be slidably mounted on 
spaced apart and substantially parallel extending elongated 
support and drive shafts comprising: 

a. a first frame member having a support-shaft opening 
therein; 

b. a second frame member assembled on said first frame 
member to form a tractor frame therewith; 

c. a drive sprocket mounted on said tractor frame for rota- 
tion about the axis of said drive sprocket and having an 



aperture therethrough adapted to receive the drive shaft 
for sliding therealong and for driving thereby upon rota- 
tion of the drive shaft about its longitudinal axis; 

d. an endless belt disposed about said tractor frame in en- 
gagement with said drive sprocket to be driven thereby 
upon driving movement of said sprocket by the drive 
shaft, said drive belt including sheet engagement teeth 
adapted to engage in the perforations of sheet material 
perforated against the side margins thereof for advance- 
ment thereof upon driving of said belt by said sprocket; 

e. clamp means, having an aperture therethrough adapted to 
receive the support shaft therein, for clamping the support 
shaft received therein, said clamp means including a first 
clamp part on said second frame member and extending 
through said support-shaft opening in said first frame 
member to the side of said first frame member opposite 
that on which said second frame member is disposed, said 
clamp means also including a second clamp part disen- 
gageably mounted on said first clamp part and movable 
relative thereto to clamp a support shaft received in said 
aperture in said clamp means, said second clamp part 
bearing against the side of said first frame member oppo- 
site said second frame member to retain said first and 
second frame members in assembly, said frame members 
being held in assembly by said clamp parts, removal of 
said second clamp part from said first clamp part permit- 
ting ready disassembly of said frame members from each 
other. 



4,391,400 
APPARATUS FOR STORING A VARIABLE LENGTH OF 

STRIP 
Daniel Sylvain, Saint Etienne, France, assignor to Oesid, St. 
Chamond, France 

FUed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,642 

Claims priority, application France, May 7, 1980, 80 10215 

Int. a.5 B65H 17/42 

U.S. a. 226—113 5 Qaims 



n « » 9 10 ♦ 




1. A strip accumulator system of the horizontal type, com- 

a cart having means for engaging a strip in a fashion to form 
a horizontal loop, and constructed and arranged to be 
motivated along a path of travel to increase or decrease 
the length of said loop, 

a number of roller assemblies for supporting and separating 
an upper portion from a lower portion of said strip of said 
formed loop, 

said cart including means for storing said roller assemblies 

thereon, 

a number of stationary cooperative sets of frames trans- 
versely opposed relative to said strip and spaced at se- 
lected locations parallel to and on opposite sides of said 
path of travel in a manner to permit free movement of said 
cart therealong, and 

means activated by said motion of said cart, for the succes- 
sive removal of said roller assemblies off of said cart and 
placement thereof onto a different one of said sets of 
transversely opposed frames and into a working position 
to support said upper portion of said strip upon said in- 
crease of said loop and for successive removal of said 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



151 



roller assemblies from said sets of frames onto said cart 
upon said decrease of said loop. 



1 1 4,391,401 

SURGICAL STAPLERS AND STAPLE 

Jerome F. Moshofsky, Portland, Oreg., assignor to Lawrence 

M. Smith, Lake Oswego, Oreg. 

Continuation of Ser. No. 26,071, Apr. 3, 1979, Pat. No. 

4,256,251, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 899,350, 

Apr. 24, 1978, abandoned. This application Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. 

No. 228,620 

The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 17, 

1998, has been disclaimed. 

Int. Q.3 A61B77/(W 

U.S. Q. 227— 19 * 2 Qaims 



L, 




1. A surgical stapler comprising: 

an elongate body having forward and rearward ends, and 
having a longitudinally extending guideway opening 
through its forward end; 

a ram having a forming end portion and being mounted in 
said guideway with said forming end portion adjacent the 
forward end of the body for sliding movement along the 
guideway between a forward position with its forming 
end portion at said forward end and a retracted position 
with its forming end portion spaced from said forward 
end; 

staple-holding means attached to said body for feeding a 
staple into said guideway when said ram is in its retracted 
position; 

at least one toggle-joint linkage, said toggle-joint linkage 
comprising first and second arms of generally equal 
length, said arms having adjacent ends pivotally attached 
together with the end of said first arm opposite said adja- 
cent ends being pivotally attached to said body adjacent 
its rearward end and the end of said second arm opposite 
said adjacent ends projecting toward the forward end of 
said body and being pivotally attached to said ram, the 
adjacent ends of the arms of said toggle-joint linkage being 
opposed and projecting away from said body when said 
ram is in its retracted position so that pressing the adjacent 
ends of the arms of said toggle-joint linkage in a direction 
transverse of said guideway will move said ram from its 
retracted to its forward position; and 

an anvil fixed to the forward end of said body and projecting 
across said guideway, said anvil and the forming end 
portion of said ram being shaped to close a staple therebe- 
tween upon movement of said ram to its forward position. 



' ' 4,391,402 

SURGICAL STAPLING CONTROL MEANS 
Jay E. Campbell, Upper Black Eddy; Richard H. Reichmann, 
Churchville, both of Pa., and Lehmann K. Lehmann, Fair- 
field, Conn., assignors to American Cyanamid Company, 
Stamford, Conn. 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 153,229, May 27, 1980, 

abandoned. This application Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,653 

Int. a.^ A61B 17/04 

U.S. Q. 227—121 6 Qaims 

1. A surgical stapling control means comprising a handle; a 

trigger pivotally attached and compressible into said handle; a 

staple forming means contained in the forward portion of said 



handle; a flexible arm mounted on the rearward portion of said 
trigger; a pawl and at least one guide pin attached to one end 
of said arm; a multi-toothed ratchet attached to the rearward 
portion of said handle; and guide means having upper and 
lower portions, said guide means positioned adjacent the rear- 
ward portion of said handle so as to coordinate with and pro- 
vide tension to said guide pin, such that on partially compress- 




ing said trigger the lower portion of said guide means provides 
tension on said guide pin and flexes said arm such that the pawl 
engages said ratchet and such that on complete compression of 
said trigger, the upper portion of said guide means releases 
tension from said guide pin allowing said arm to relax and 
allowing said guide pin to cross over said guide means, thus 
causing said pawl to be disengaged from said ratchet. 



4,391,403 

METHOD OF EXPLOSION-WELDING ROLLING 

BILLETS INTENDED FOR PACKAGE ROLLING 

Ingemar P. Persson, Striberg, Sweden, assignor to Nitro Nobel 

AB, Gyttorp, Sweden 

Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,822 
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Apr. 23, 1980, 8003071 
Int. Q.3 B23K 20/08 ^ 
U.S. Q. 228—107 5 Qaims 



ti' 



m 




\ VN \ <; VN 



'^ 



1. A method of manufacturing a compound plate by explo- 
iion-welding, said compound plate being intended for subse- 
quent package-rolling, characterised in that the plating mate- 
rial is smaller in area than the base material so that an edge is 
left around the periphery of the base material without any 
plating, that this free edge surface of the base material is pro- 
tected by the attachment of metal strips, that an explosive 
charge is placed on top of the plating material, said charge 
having an area at least as great as that of the base material, after 
which the explosive charge is detonated. 



4,391,404 
SLEEVE VALVE FOR FLEXIBLE BAGS 

Albert Welter, Franklin, Ohio, assignor to Champion Interna- 
tional Corporation, Stamford, Conn. 

Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,622 
Int. Q.' B65D 30/24 
U.S. Q. 229—62.5 11 Qaims 

1. A flexible bag comprising side walls, a top wall and a 
bottom wall, an open mouth in the comer of said top wall 
comprising an end flap, a sleeve valve mounted in said open 
mouth, said sleeve valve comprising a tubular sleeve and a 
backing panel, the upper front portion of the tubular sleeve 
oeing adhered to the backing panel by an adhesive are^ and the 



152 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



lower front portion of the sleeve adhered to the end flap of said 
open mouth of the bag, the upper and lower rear portions of 
said sleeve being unattached to the backing panel and to said 
end flap and being adapted to hang within the bag, and a 
longitudinal slit located exclusively in the upper rear portion of 




f/ 



said sleeve, said slit terminating short of said adhesive area to 
form an unslit area of said upper rear portion unadhered to said 
backing panel whereby the said unslit area together with the 
lower rear portion of said sleeve folds over the open mouth to 
seal the open mouth in the two-ply region of the sleeve. 







I i^ i? 



-te4? s_. 



y^/ . Ipy 



:^ -40 J^ 



by a diagonal score line extending from the juncture of 
said hinged score line of said comer panel 

each of said gusset panels having a locking tab extending 
outwardly from its upper edge, said locking tabs of each 
pair of said gusset panels being alignable in the erect 
container body, 

a locking panel extending outwardly from each of said side 
panels, said locking panel being separated from said side 
panel by a cut line along a portion of the width of said 
locking panel and said side panel, said cut line separation 
being alignable with said locking tabs in said erect con- 
tainer body, 

said locking panel and said side panel being further separated 
along at least part of the remainder of their width by a pair 
of shoulder panels, each said shoulder panel being defined 
by a pair of parallel score lines which form the hinged 
joint between said shoulder panel and said side panel and 
said shoulder panel and said locking panel, 

said score line between said side panel and said shoulder 
panel being aligned substantially with the upper edge of 
said gusset panel, 

the width of said shoulder panel being substantially equal to 
the combined thickness of a pair of gusset panels. 



4,391,406 

POWER SAVING SYSTEM WHICH ASSURES ROOM 

SECURITY 

Morton Fried, 706 Bolton Rd„ Far Rockaway, N.Y. 11691 
Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,701 
Int. C1.3 E05B 65/00; G05D 2i/00 
U.S. a. 236—47 8 Qaims 



4,391,405 
CONTAINER 
Alva C. Drinon, Portland, Me., assignor to Weyerhaeuser Com- 
pany, Tacoma, Wash. 

I Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,262 

I Int. Q\} B65D 5/24. 5/34 

U.S. a. 229—31 R 20 Oaims 



^■1 2S 



r'^ 






COOL. 



■ t-Oct^O, ^COCM^V 






cOCn 



1^3' 






• T/M^'f 






rse 




^//wr 
















'»', 








/f^ti^Ay 

















.^-2f_. 



/ 



1. A blank for a container body comprising: 

a rectangular base panel, 

front and rear panels hingedly attached along score lines to 

said base panel, 
side panels hingedly attached along score lines to said base 

panel, 
four comer panels each hingedly attached by score lines 

along two adjacent sides to said adjacent side panel and 

said adjacent one of said front and rear panels, 
said comer panels being divided into a pair of gusset panels 



1. A power saving system for conserving energy consump- 
tion by electric loads in a room having a dt)or with a locking 
system, and which system also assures room security, compris- 
ing: 
closure switch means for coupling to the door and produc- 
ing a control signal only throughout the time the door is 
opened; 
lock switch means for coupling to the door locking system 
and producing a control signal only throughout the time 
of proper locking of the door, both said control signals 
being the same; 
control means associated with an electric load in the room, 

and 
wire means coupling said closure switch means and said lock 

switch means in parallel to said control means, 
said control means comprising timing means responsive to 
the termination of a control signal on said wire means for 
producing a control signal for a preset limited interval of 
time, and for ceasing operations upon the presence of a 
control signal on said wire means, and control switch 
means responsive to any of the aforesaid control signals 
for controlling the energization of the electric load during 
the time that a control signal is present. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



153 



4,391,407 
VEHICLE CABIN HEATER 
Sadahani Nakazawa, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor 
Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan , 

Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,843 
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 22, 1980, 55- 
69494[U] 1 1 

1 1 Int. a.3 B60H 1/02 

U.S. a. 237—12.3 B 4 Qaims 




1. A water circuit arrangement of an engine having a water 
jacket therein, comprising: 

an enjgine cooling circuit including a thermostat valve, a 

radiator and a water pump connected in series by means 

. having one end connected to an outlet of said water jacket 

and the other end connected to an inlet of said water 

jacket; 

a bypass passage bypassing both said thermostat valve and 
said radiator; 

a vehicle cabin heating circuit including a passage having 
one end connected to the outlet of said water jacket and 
the other end connected to the passage of said engine 
cooling circuit at a position just upstream of said water 
pump, and a heater core unit arranged in the passage of 
said vehicle cabin heating circuit to receive water from 
the outlet of the water jacket flowing through said heater 
core unit before reaching said water pump; 

valve means arranged in said bypass passage for selectively 
opening and closing said bypass passage; 

temperature sensing means for measuring the temperature of 
water circulating through said vehicle cabin heating cir- 
cuit; and 

control means for actuating said valve means to close the 
bypass passage when said temperature sensing means 
senses a water temperature in the vehicle cabin heating 
circuit below a predetermined level, and to open said 
bypass passage when said temperature sensing means 
senses a water temperature in the vehicle cabin heating 
circuit above the predetermined level. 



4,391,408 
LOW INSERTION FORCE CONNECTOR 
Richard J. Hanlon, Attleboro, Mass., and Rudi O. H. Vetter, 
Pawtucket, R.I., assignors to Augat Inc., Attleboro, Mass. 
1 1 Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,216 
' ' Int. a.3 HOIR B/6i9 

U.S. a. 339—75 M 14 Qaims 

1. A low insertion force connector for an integrated circuit 
package having a plurality of terminals arranged in spaced 
parallel rows, said connector comprising: 
a rectangular base member formed with a plurality of aper- 
tures along opposite edges thereof; 
a spring loaded electrically-conductive contact member 
mounted in each of said apertures, said contact member 
having only one bearing surface adapted to move without 
flexure of the bearing surface to coact with an electrically 
non-conductive surface of a cover to make a single-sided 
contact with an inserted terminal, said bearing surface 
having a normal ON position and an OFF position; 
a slide member on said base, said slide member being longitu- 
dinally movable and having a plurality of upstanding pins 
on its top surface; 
a pair of actuator members on said slide member, each actua- 



tor member associated with a different plurality of said 
apertures, said actuator members having a plurality of 
elongated first slots arranged at an angle with respect to 
the direction of longitudinal movement of said slide mem- 
ber, each of said first slots engaging a corresponding pin, 
said actuators being laterally movable with respect to said 
base member and said slide member; and 

an electrically non-conductive cover engaging said base and 
enclosing said slide, actuators and a portion of said contact 
members including said bearing surfaces, said cover being 
formed with a plurality of openings aligned with said 
apertures and said contact members in said apertures, 
said cover being further formed with electrically non- 
conductive surfaces confronting said contact members 
and said apertures in said base: 

said actuators each having a plurality of second slots ar- 
ranged in a row along one edge thereof, each of said 




contact members being formed with a hook portion en- 
gaging a corresponding one of said second slots; 

whereby longitudinal movement of said slide member in one 
direction moves said actuators away from each other to 
the normal or ON position whereby said bearing surfaces 
of said contact members are closely adjacent said con- 
fronting surfaces of said cover, and longitudinal move- 
ment of said slide in a second direction moves said actua- 
tors toward each other to the OFF position whereby said 
bearing surfaces are moved laterally away from said con- 
fronting surfaces of said cover; and 

whereby the terminals of said integrated circuit package 
may be easily inserted through said openings and between 
said bearing surfaces and said confronting surfaces when 
said connector is in the OFF condition and the terminals 
are positively confined between said bearing surfaces and 
said confronting surfaces when said connector is in the 
ON condition. 



4,391,409 
POSITIONING AND CONTROL SYSTEM FOR FAN 
THRUST REVERSER COWLS IN A TURBOFAN ENGINE 
Klaus H. Scholz, Renton, Wash., assignor to The Boeing Com- 
pany, Seattle, Wash. 

Filed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,247 
f Int. Q.3 F02K 1/60 

U.S. Q. 239—265.29 5 Qaims 

1. A pressurized hydraulic fiuid positioning and control 
system for moving first and second fan thrust reverser cowls in 
a turbofan engine, said fan thrust reverser cowls being movable 
in retraction and deployment between a retracted position and 
a deployed position, respectively, comprising: 

first and second hydraulic actuator means coupled respec- 
tively to said first and said second reverser cowls for 
moving said cowls between said retracted and deployed 
positions, each of said first and second hydraulic actuator 
means including at least one double-acting hydraulic actu- 
ator having cooperative piston and cylinder members and 
a movable piston rod, said piston rod of said hydraulic 



154 



OFPICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



actuator of said first hydraulic actuator means being cou- 
pled to said first reverser cowl, and said piston rod of said 
hydraulic actuator of said second hydraulic actuator 
means being coupled to said second reverser cowl, each 
said cylinder member being affixed to said turbofan engine 
and having a rod end pressurizable to retract said cowls 
and a head end pressurizable to deploy said cowls; 

means for supplying pressurized hydraulic fluid to said first 
and said second hydraulic actuator means; 

directional control valve means for selectively controlling 
flow of said pressurized hydraulic fluid to and from said 
first and second hydraulic actuator means to retract or 
deploy said thrust reverser cowls; and. 



the splash plate along the track to carry said impact point along 
a path substantially intersecting said axis, and means for inter- 
locking the splash plate and the arm in fixed position relative to 
each other when said impact point is in substantial coincidence 
with said axis. 





4,391,411 
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PULVERIZING 
MATERIALS BY VACUUM COMMINUTION 
William A. Colbum, Denver, Colo., assignor to Process Develop- 
ment Corporation, Denver, Colo. 

Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,679 

Int. C1.3 B02C 19/18 

U.S. a. 241—1 10 aaims 



first and second flow regulator means respectively coupled 
to said first and second actuator means for regulating flow 
of said pressurized hydraulic fluid to and from said first 
and second actuator means during deployment and retrac- 
tion of said first and second reverser cowls, said first and 
second flow regulator means being operable to regulate 
the respective rates of flow of hydraulic fluid to and from 
said first and second hydraulic actuator means to provide 
substantially synchronous and independent movement of 
said first and second reverser cowls during retraction and 
deployment. 



431,410 

SPRINKLER WITH TRANSVERSELY MOUNTED 

SPLASH PLATE 

Allan L. Smith, 26591 Road 196, Exeter, Calif. 93221 

FUed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,959 

Int. a.3 B05B 1/26 

U.S. Q. 239—498 12 Qaims 



1. A sprinkler comprising a body having a fluid passage 
extending therethrough and communicating with the exterior 
thereof for the release of a fluid stream therefrom substantially 
along a predetermined axis, an arm mounted on the body 
having a portion defining a track disf>osed in substantially right 
angular relation to said axis, a splash plate having a predeter- 
mined impact point for contact by said fluid stream when the 
splash plate is in an operating position and a mount engageable 
with the portion of the arm defining the track for movement of 



\7 




1. In a vacuum system for effecting the comminution of 
minerals and other frangible substances, the method for in- 
creasing the rate of pulverization and the fineness of the prod- 
uct which comprises: 
producing a low-pressure zone and a continuous flow of air 

into the zone and a discharge of air from the zone; 
providing a mass of material to be pulverized; and 
injecting the material into the low-pressure zone at a signifi- 
cant initial velocity produced by a force independent of 
the force utilized for producing said low-pressure zone, 
whereby the material is subjected to a sudden correspond- 
ing increased rate of change of pressure upon entering said 
low-pressure zone. 



4,391,412 

APPARATUS FOR LIMITING nLLING HEIGHT OF 

CONTAINERS 

Albert Goldhanuner, Zum Hecht 46, 7770 Uberlingen, Fed. Rep. 

of Germany 

FUed Oct. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 195,767 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 18, 
1979, 2942241 

Int. a.5 B02C 23/00 
U.S. a. 241—36 7 aaims 

1. An apparatus for limiting the filling height of a container 
for a cutting or shredding machine for the destruction of docu- 
ments and microfilms, a container pivotally mounted in a 
housing and having a base, a rear end and a front end, the 
housing supporting the rear end of the container on a horizon- 
tal portion of an inclined support extending upwards from the 



II 



July 5, 1983 



tr 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



155 



base of the housing, an upper end of the front end of the con- falls downwardly away from said impact member and through 
tamer being supported by a spnng catch actuating switch said generally annular space. 




means to stop a cutting or shredding machine when a predeter- 
mined height is sensed and reached. 



4,391,413 
APPARATUS FOR BREAKING ARTICLES 
Ernest A. Pack, Uxbridge, England, assignor to B.H.F. (Engi- 
neering) Limited, Middlesex, England 

Filed Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 197,237 
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 16, 1979, 
7935961 I j 

Int. a.3 B02C 19/14 



U.S. a. 241—99 




5 Claims 



I 

1. Apparatus for fracturing glassware into cullet comprising: 
an upwardly and inwardly tapering impact member of noncir- 
cular horizontal cross-section mounted for rotation in a given 
direction about a vertical axis, said impact member including 
generally vertically extending ribs which have side surfaces 
facing generally in said given direction; a housing having a side 
wall with a generally smooth inner surface, said side wall 
surrounding and horizontally spaced from said impact member 
and extending downwardly beyond the lower edge of said 
impact member whereby a generally annular space is formed 
between said side wall and the lower edge of said impact 
member; means for rotating said impact member about said 
vertical axis in said given direction; and glassware feed means 
including a guide chute having a guide surface inclined down- 
wardly and inwardly toward the side of said impact member 
for directing glassware issuing from the chute onto the side of 
said impact member, the arrangement of impact member, hous- 
ing side wall and chute being such that the glassware is frac- 
tured into cullet upon contact with said impact member and 



4,391,414 
CONE CRUSHER 
Rudolf Reiter, Via Fratelli Cervi, 7 - Vimercate (Province of 
Milan), Italy 

Filed Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,409 
Oaims priority, application Italy, Jul. 10, 1979, 24224 A/79 
Int. a.J B02C 2/06 
U.S. a. 241-213 1 Qaim 




1. A cone crusher for crushing stones and the like, compris- 
ing an outer shroud enclosing a space, a substantially vertical 
shaft within said space and driven with a conical swinging 
motion, said shaft having a downwardly diverging crushing 
cone at a middle portion thereof, on said shroud a conical ring 
spacingly arranged around said crushing cone and having a 
smaller taper than said crushing cone to define an upwardly 
widening space therebetween, a rotatory bushing member 
surrounding said shaft below said crushing cone and rotatably 
supported on said outer shroud, said bushing member having a 
circular outer periphery defining an axis of rotation and a 
cylindrical inner cavity having an axis eccentric with respect 
to said axis of rotation, said cavity receiving a lower end por- 
tion of said shaft and having a closed bottom, a piston axially 
slidable within said inner cavity and arranged below said shaft, 
bearing means between said shaft and said piston for routably 
supporting said shaft on said piston on one side thereof facing 
said shaft, said piston having another side thereof opposite to 
said one side and forming a cylinder chamber with said closed 
bottom, a hydraulic system for supplying pressure fluid into 
said cylinder chamber thereby to hydraulically support said 
piston and said shaft thereon, transmission means on said rotary 
bushing member for imparting rotation thereto thereby to 
impart rotation to said bushing member about said axis of 
rotation thereof and to impart an eccentric rotatory movement 
(fr*said piston and said shaft thereon, said hydraulic system 
including a rotary joint connected to said rotary bushing mem- 
ber, said rotary joint having a mounting flange for connection 
to said closed bottom of said cavity, a fixed channel extending 
through said mounting flange for the passage of pressure fluid 
from said hydraulic system into said cylinder chamber of said 
cavity, a seat in said mounting flange, rotary seals in said seats 
and interposed between said fixed channel and said mounting 
flange, a plate member surrounding said fixed channel and 
providing a clearance therebetween for bleeding off pressure 
fluid therethrough. 



156 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4391,415 

FAaLITATING THE EXCHANGE OF A HNISHED 

PACKAGE WITH A NEW CORE 

Joseph H. Hollier, Jr., Pearcy, Ark., assignor to Sutco, Inc., Hot 

Springs, Ark. 

FUed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,847 

Int. a.3 B65H 19/04 

U.S. a. 242—56.9 1 Claim 




reel hub engaging member, said rotating member having a 
circumferential surface; 

a rotatable driving member having a circumferential surface 
facing said circumferential surface of said rotating mem- 
ber and being capable of rotating concentrically with said 
reel hub engaging member, said driving member being 
adapted to be selectively rotated in either of two direc- 
tions by a rotary power supply means; 

a plurality of rolling members having axes about which they 
are rotatable, said rolling member being disposed between 
said circumferential surface of said rotating member and 
said facing circumferential surface of said driving member 
so as to be rotatable about their own axes; 

a cam member disposed on one of the respective circumfer- 
ential surfaces of said rotating member and said driving 
member, said cam member holding said plurality of rolling 
members in coop>eration with the other of the respective 
circumferential surfaces of said rotating member and said 
driving member to rotate said rotating member together 
with said driving member in one direction when said 
driving member rotates in said one direction, and releasing 



1. In a device for winding a plurality of endless webs of stock 
material on individual cores on a driven cantilevered support 
shaft to prepare finished packages of the stock material, the 
improvement therein for facilitating the exchange of finished 
packages on the driven cantilevered support shaft with new 
cores up)on completion of a winding operation; the improve- 
ment comprising: 

(a) a secondary, non-driven cantilevered support shaft lo- 
cated in a first positon in proximity to, but spaced from the 
driven support shaft, the secondary support shaft having a 
diameter which is substantially equal to the diameter of 
the driven support shaft, the secondary support shaft 
mounted for movement from the first j)osition thereof to a 
second position thereof wherein the secondary support 

j shaft and the driven support shaft are in a longitudinal, 
end-to-end alignment, and are contiguous; 

(b) means for loading a plurality of unused cores onto the 
1 secondary support shaft during the winding operation, 

while the secondary support shaft is located in the first 
position thereof; 

(c) means for removing the finished packages from the 
driven support shaft upon conclusion of the winding oper- 
ation, while the secondary support shaft is located in the 
first position thereof; 

(d) means for moving the secondary support shaft from the 
first position thereof to the second position thereof; 

(e) means for conveying the unused cores from the second- 
ary support shaft onto the driven support shaft and secur- 
ing the cores on the shaft; and 

(0 means for moving the secondary support shaft from the 
second position thereof to the first position thereof, 
whereupon a new winding operation is allowed to com- 
mence. 




said hold on said plurality of rolling members to allow said 
rotating member to rotate independently of said driving 
member when said driving member rotates in the other 
direction; and 

a variable rotation transmitting means for transmitting rota- 
tion between said reel hub engaging member and said 
rotating member such that the rotation transmissibility 
between said reel hub engaging member and said rotating 
member increases substantially in inverse proportion to a 
decrease of the magnitude of a torque applied to said reel 
hub engaging member; 

said rotating member having a sliding surface touching and 
in sliding contact with said reel hub engaging member 
along the rotating axis of said reel hub engaging member 
and along the circumferential direction, respectively; 
and 

said plurality of rolling members being held within the same 
plane with said sliding surface by the other of said circum- 
ferential surface of said rotating member and said circum- 
ferential surface of said driving member and said cam 
member when said driving member rotates in said one 
direction. 



4,391,416 
REEL SHAFT DEVICE OF A MAGNETIC RECORDING 

TAPE RUNNING APPARATUS 
Akira Osanai, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical 
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,602 
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 21, 1980, 55-35826; 
Mar. 21, 1980, 55-36990[U]; Mar. 21, 1980, 55-36991[U]; Mar. 
21, 1980, 55-36992[U] 

Int. C\? B65H 17/02 
U.S. a. 242—68.1 17 Qaims 

1. A reel shaft device of a magnetic recording tape running 
apparatus comprising: 
a rotatable reel hub engaging member to be engaged with a 

reel hub to rotate therewith; 
a rotating member capable of rotating with respect to said 



4,391,417 
UNCOILER FOR METALLIC STRIP MATERIAL 
Robert W. Gronbech, Sheffield, England, assignor to Davy- 
Loewy Limited, Sheffield, England 

Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,866 
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 10, 1980, 
8011895 

Int. C\? B21C 47/16; B65H 75/00 
U.S. a. 242—78.6 6 Claims 

1. An uncoiler for metallic strip material, comprising: 
mandrel means; 
a coil of strip material, which is characterized by some degree 

of eccentricity, disposed upon said mandrel means; 
means for moving said strip material so as to uncoil said strip 
material from said mandrel means; and 



\ 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



157 



means interacting with at least one of said eccentrically 
mounted coil of strip material disposed upon said mandrel 
means, or said mandrel means, for detecting said degree of 
eccentricity of said coil of strip material disposed upon said 
mandrel means, or the rotational effects of said eccentrically 





1. In a spin cast type reel having a longitudinally-movable 
center shaft (15) operable to control operation of the reel and 
a control spring (54) surrounding said shaft for yieldably hold- 
ing the center shaft in one position, a selectively-operable 
anti-reverse device (40), an actuator (50) associated with said 
center shaft for rotation about the rotation axis of the center 
shaft for actuating said anti-reverse device in response to rota- 
tion of the center shaft, the improvement comprising: means 
(70,80,90,65,66) for yieldably holding said actuator in rotatable 
association with said center shaft with a force which is inde- 
pendent of the force of said control spring (54). 



thereof and projecting into said cylinder through the the bot- 
tom end of said cylinder; a braking member comprising a 
washer fitting said spool slide shaft within said cylinder and 
rotatable as a unit with said spool slide shaft and a non-rotata- 
ble washer fitting said spool slide shaft and engaging said 
groove of said cylinder; an adjusting sleeve screwed to the 
outer end opening of said cylinder so as to be able to move 
back and forth relatively to the latter; a spring acting between 
the inner bottom surface of said adjusting sleeve and the rear 
end surface of said braking member and adapted to press said 
braking member to provide a drag braking force, a handle 
sleeve coaxially positioned about said adjusting sleeve, said 
adjusting sleeve and said handle sleeve together defining two 
cooperating members which are circumferentially adjustable 
relative to each other to provide a plurality of different ranges 
of drag braking force, said adjusting sleeve having a range of 



mounted coil of strip material, respectively, as said coil of 
strip material and said mandrel means are rotated by said 
moving means, and for controlling the speed of said moving 
means in response to said degree of eccentricity, or rota- 
tional effects, detected. 



4,391,418 

SILENT, ANTI-REVERSE ACTUATOR MECHANISM 
John W. Puryear, Tulsa, Okla., assignor to Brunswick Corpora- 
tion, Skokie, III. 

Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 333,118 

Int. a.3 AOIK 89/01 

U.S. a. 242—84.2 A 14 Qaims 



4,391,419 
SPINNING REEL BRAKE 
Shinichi Iwama, and Takashi Egasaki, both of Higashikurume, 
Japan, assignors to Daiwa Seiko Inc., Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,641 

Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 29, 1980, 55-122524 

Int. a.3 AOIK 89/02 

U.S. a. 242—84.5 A 4 Qaims 

1. A drag adjusting device for a spinning reel comprising: a 

cylinder rearwardly projecting from a housing of a spinning 

reel and provided at its inner peripheral surface with an axial 

groove; a spool slide shaft having a spool fixed to the end 




^y- 'g)-'^ 




movement relative to said cylinder corresponding to each of 
said plurality of ranges of drag braking force, one of said 
cooperating members being provided with projection means 
and the other of said cooperating members being provided 
with a plurality of circumferentially spaced recess means, 
whereby to permit said adjusting sleeve to be detached from 
said handle sleeve when in one circumferential position rela- 
tive to said handle sleeve and to be re-attached to said handle 
sleeve when in another circumferential position relative to said 
handle sleeve, and thus whereby to position said adjusting 
sleeve relative to said cylinder and to said spring to provide a 
different desired range of drag braking force in said another 
circumferential position than in said one circumferential posi- 
tion, and cooperating means carried by said cylinder and by 
said handle sleeve to limit the rotation of said handle sleeve to 
not more than one rotation of said handle sleeve in any one of 
said ranges. 



4,391,420 

EMERGENCY LOCKING MEANS FOR DUAL SPOOL 

SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR 

Munir J. Ahad, Newhall; William Hollowell, Pacific Palisades; 
Akira Tanaka, Norihridge, and Avraham Ziv, Sepulveda, all of 
Calif., assignors to American Safety Equipment Corporation, 
San Fernando, Calif. 

Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,531 
Int. Q.3 A62B 35/02: B65H 75/48 
U.S. Q. 242—107.4 A 15 Qaims 

1. An improved dual locking pawl emergency locking means 
for a dual spool safety belt retractor having first and second 
belt storage spools, said spools having first and second ratchet 
means respectively for preventing spool rotation when en- 
gaged by the locking means comprising the provision of: 
an action pawl means for engaging only said first ratchet 

means of said first spool; 
inertia sensing means for moving said action pawl means into 
engagement with said first ratchet wheel in response to 



158 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



changes in vehicle inertia of more than a predetermined 
amount; 
reaction pawl means separate from said action pawl means 
and so provided as to react in response to movement of 
said action pawl means to engage said second ratchet 
wheel of said second spool in response to spool locking 
action of said action pawl means; and 




connecting means interposed between said action pawl 
means and said reaction pawl means for urging said reac- 
tion pawl means into engagement with said second ratchet 
wheel whereby spool locking movement of said action 
pawl means urges said reaction pawl means into locking 
engagement with said second ratchet wheel. 




position short of said engaged position upon take-up of the 
webbing with said latch member remaining disengaged 
from said portion integral with said gear train and for 
holding said latch member in said disengaged position, 
said second guide portion being turned back from a termi- 
nal end of said First guide portion and extending generally 
circumferentially beyond a starting end of said first guide 
portion, and a third guide p)ortion for guiding said latch 
member held in said second guide portion to said engaged 
position upon draw-out of the webbing, said third guide 
portion extending from the terminal end of said second 
guide portion to the starting end of said first guide portion. 



4^91,422 

WEIGHT BALANCED SPOOL CARRIER 

Colin McDonald, 20241 SE. 232 St., Maple VaUey, Wash. 98038 

Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,257 

Int. a.3 B65H 49/00, 17/46 

U.S. CI. 242—129.6 14 Qaims 



4,391,421 
RETRACTOR FOR SEAT BELT WITH AN AELEVIATING 

DEVICE 
Katsumi Naitoh, and Hideo Yanagihara, both of Fujisawa, Ja- 
pan, assignors to NSK- Warner K. K., Tokyo, Japan 

FUed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,535 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 21, 1980, 
55/35772[U] 

Int. a.3 A62B 35/00; B65H 75/48 
U.S. a. 242—107.7 6 Qaims 





7 2Sy^' 




/fC />\ 














>v 


Ljz 



lt,A retractor for a seat belt which is provided with a tension 
alleviating device, comprising a webbing take-up shaft biased 
in webbing take-up direction and rotatably supported on a 
base, a gear train consisting of a first gear member mounted on 
said take-up shaft for rotation therewith and a second gear 
member meshing with said first gear member and rotatably 
provided on said base, the second gear member having a 
greater number of teeth than the first gear member, a disc with 
a cam portion provided for rotation with said second gear 
member by frictional engagement therebetween, and a latch 
member movable between an engaged position in which it is 
engaged with a portion integral with said gear train and pre- 
vents rotation of said take-up shaft in the webbing take-up 
direction and a non-engaged position in which it is disengaged 
from said portion integral with said gear train, said latch mem- 
ber being biased toward said engaged position, 

said disc with a cam portion having a generally circumferien- 
tially extending first guide portion for guiding said latch 
member from said engaged position to said disengaged 
position upon draw-out of webbing, a second guide por- 
tion for guiding said latch member to said disengaged 



1. A carrier for a plurality of spools of wire or the like, 
adapted to receive and support the ends of a plurality of spool 
support shafts which extend laterally across the carrier, 
through center openings in the spools, and on which the spools 
rotate, said carrier comprising: 
a rectangular main frame having first and second ends and 
comprising a pair of spaced apart elongated side members, 
a cross member at said first end connecting the two side 
members together, said first end presenting a first ground 
contacting support; 
a support stand frame at second end, connecting the two side 
members together at such end and extending downwardly 
from the main frame to function as a stand at such second 
end, and presenting at the its lower end a second ground 
contacting support; 
a wheel supporting frame depending from a midportion of 
the main frame and including ground contacting wheels at 
its lower end; 
handle means at the second end of the main frame; 
journal means carried by the side members of the main 
frame, for detachably securing the ends of the spool sup- 
port shafts to said side members; 
wherein the journal means for at least one of the spool sup- 
port shafts is spaced towards the first end of the main 
frame from the wheels and the journal means for at least 
one other of the spool support shafts is spaced from the 
wheels toward the second end of the main frame; and 
wherein said carrier has a first dispense position wherein the 
first ground contacting support and the wheels contact the 
ground and the main frame slopes upwardly from its first 
end to its second end, and a second dispense position in 
which the second ground contacting support and the 
wheels contact the ground and the main frame slopes 
downwardly from its first end to its second end. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



159 . 



4,391,423 
SATELLITE RETRIEVAL SYSTEM 

Edwin C. Ptuett; Kem B. Robertson, and Tomas E. Loughead, all 
of Huntsville, Ala., assignors to The United States of America 
as represented by the Administrator of the National Aeronau- 
tics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C. i 

I FUed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,745 ' 

I I Int. Q.3 B64G 1/64 

U.S. Q. 244—161 5 Qaims 





4,391,424 

METHOD AND STRUCTURE FOR AIRFOIL THRUST 

AND LIFT CONTROL 

Otto E. Bartoe, Jr., Boulder, Colo., assignor to Ball Brothers, 

Boulder, Colo. 

FUed Aug. 3^, 1976, Ser. No. 718,739 

Int.\a.3 B64C 21 /OS 

U.S. Q. 244—207 3 Qaims 




surface of each airfoil and extending span wise across the major 
portion of the airfoil, a gate positioned in each outlet and 
spanwise pivoted at the middle of the gate for movement to 
selectively define rearward and forward oriented apertures 
between the edge of the gate and the outlet, means for moving 
each gate to define the apertures, and a portion of each said 
gate is independently pivoted relative to the remainder of the 
gate and a second means for moving each independent portion 
of the gate is provided. 






1. A satellite retrieval system for employment with a space- 
craft comprising: 

a cubical first frame adapted to be fixedly attached to a 
spacecraft; 

a rectangular second frame positioned around said cubical 
first frame and including support means for movably 
supporting said second frame on said cubical first frame; 

a first pair of parallel bars movably mounted on said cubical 
first frame for balanced relative movement with respect to 
a center line through said cubical first frame and normal to 
a plane of said second frame, being movable across said 
first frame; 

a second pair of parallel bars, orthogonal to said first pair of 
parallel bars, movably mounted on said second frame for 
balanced relative movement with respect to said center 
line, and positioned within said cubical first frame; 

first operating means for selectively moving bars of said first 
pair of parallel bars toward and away from each other; 

second operating means for selectively moving bars of said 
second pair of parallel bars toward and away from each 
other; and 

retracting means including drive means coupled between 
said cubical first frame and said second frame for selec- 
tively moving said second frame along said center line and 

' between extended and retracted positions. 



4,391,425 
RAILROAD SWITCH HEATER 
Henry Keep, Jr., 88 E. Warf Rd., Madison, Conn. 06443 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 107,398, Dec. 26, 1979, 

abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 890,637, 

Mar. 20, 1978, Pat. No. 4,195,805. This application May 28, 

1981, Ser. No. 267,791 

Int. Q.3 EOIB 7/24 

y.S. Q. 246—428 8 Claims 



2. An aircraft comprising: a power source adapted to pro- 
duce gases under pressure through a power source exhaust, 
airfoUs, plenum chambers defined spanwise through the air- 
foUs, ducting means to connect the plenum chambers to at least 
a portion of the exhaust of the f>ower source, an outlet commu- 
nicating with the plenum chamber defined in the upper leading 



JbI^^'i i ' I ' - i ^_L. 




iMi^KMK^Li- '\X 



^HL 
M 



Wi^r-^^j.^J 



5. A gauge plate unit for heating a rail positioning gauge 
plate fastened onto a tie of a railroad switch, said unit compris- 
ing a rigid plate member having a substantially fiat base wall to 
overlie a surface of the gauge plate adjacent to a displaceable 
switch rail end poriion and having depending side walls fasten- 
able to opposite sides of said tie under the gauge plate, a layer 
of heat insulating material fixed beneath said base wall, and a 
sinuously bent length of an electrical heating cable arranged on 
and held to said insulating layer so as to be held by said plate 
member directly against said surface for heat conduction into 
the gauge plate. 



4,391,426 

SUPPORT STRIP WITH U-SHAPED CROSS-SECHON OF 

PLASTIC MATERIAL FOR SUPPORTING CONDUITS, 

CABLES AND THE LIKE 

Owe Gothberg, Alsatravagen 176, 127 36 Skarholmen, Sweden 

Filed Jan. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 337,260 

Claims priority, application Sweden, Jan. 8, 1981, 8100077 

Int. Q.3 F16L i/00 

U.S. Q. 248—49 ' 3 Qaims 



3 5 8 16 



e 

21 
104 





~~?fr— ^' 


r^l- 




\-^ 


■n 


X 


16 . 


"wx 


Ir? 



.:- 10 

■10 



5 8 15 



1. A suppori strip of plastic material with substantially U- 
shaped cross-section for supporting conduits, cables etc. and 
comprising a substantially plane bottom (2) and side walls (3), 



160 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



characterized in that th6 support strip (1,15) in its bottom 
surface at each of its longitudinal outer portions is provided 
with a groove (5), which extends along the entire support strip 
(1,15) and along its entire length is formed with opposed grip 
edges (6,7), that the free outer edge of each side wall (3,16) 
along its entire length is formed with a bead (8) constituting in 
cross-section almost a whole circle area, the diameter of which 
is slightly smaller than the width of the groove (5) and slightly 
greater than the distance between the grip edges (6,7), and that 
the beads (8) of the support strip (1,15) are located at equal 
distance from the bottom (2) of the support strip and in a plane 
(x) extending perpendicularly to the bottom (2) and in the 
central longitudinal line of the groove (5). 



4,391,427 
HOLDER FOR A BAR OF SOAP 

Samuel U. Foresman, 672 92nd Ave., North, Naples, Fla. 33940 

Filed Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 212,819 

Int. a.3 F16M 11/00 

U.S. a. 248—176 4 Qaims 




4,391,428 
LANCE-TYPE nXTURE SUPPORT AND METHOD OF 

I - USE 

Fred K. Grimes, Tallahassee, Fla., assignor to Lance Austin 

Enterprises, Inc., Tallahassee, Fla. 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 321,630, Not. 16, 1981, 

abandoned. This application Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,008 

Int. a.3 F16M 13/00 

U.S. a. 248—546 17 Qaims 




1. A support for mounting a fixture between a pair of spaced 
structural members comprising: 

a pair of elongated lances slidably interconnected for rela- 
tive longitudinal sliding movement, each of said lances 
being shorter than the distance between said structural 
members and together forming an adjustable length sup- 



port adapted to span the space between said structural 
members; 

member engaging means at the distal end of each of said 
lances for engaging said structural members and support- 
ing said lances thereon when said lances are independently 
driven longitudinally in opposite directions against said 
structural members; 

at least one tool-strikable striking element adapted to receive 
a longitudinally directed blow from a striking tool; and 

striking element coupling means on each of said lances for 
coupling said striking element to each lance at a fixed 
location intermediate the ends thereof to enable said 
lances to be independently driven in opjwsite directions 
when said striking element is coupled to each of said 
lances independently of the other and is struck with said 
tool, whereby said member engaging means are indepen- 
dently driven into engagement with said structural mem- 
bers. 



4,391,429 

FORM TIE 

John M. Powell, P.O. Box 3200, San Jose, Calif. 95156 

Filed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,799 

Int. a.3E04G; 7/0« 

U.S. a. 249—84 3 Qaims 



1. A holder for a bar of soap which permits rapid drying of 
the entire surface of a wet bar of soap comprising a base, 

four supports mounted on said base, each support having a 
notch at its upper extremity, said four notches forming the 
four comers of a horizontal rectangle, and a flexible end- 
less cord passing around and supported by said four 
notches, 

said endless cord extending along the bottom and the top of 
the rectangle between the bottom and the top, said endless 
cord thereby forming a horizontal soap bar supporting 
member of small surface area, which enables grasping of 
the soap from the sides of the rectangle without interfer- 
ence with the cord and which provides substantial support 
at the center for the soap as it becomes smaller with use. 



104 '04 KO 

' 10 ^-^ 




1. A form tie for use in fixing a pair of form sides in a prese- 
lected spaced position with respect to each other at a given 
location against shear and transverse forces acting on said form 
sides at said given location and for locating, supporting and 
maintaining at least one reinforcing rod at a preselected loca- 
tion intermediate said form sides, said form tie comprising: 
a unitary elongate member of a generally Z-shaped configu- 
ration including a pair of generally parallel elongate mem- 
bers having first and second end portions, the first end 
portion of each parallel, elongate member being posi- 
tioned in an opposed, spaced apart relationship with re- 
spect to the second end portion of the other parallel elon- 
gate member and having a bight formed therein terminat- 
ing in a rectilinear brace extending substantially normal to 
said parallel, elongate members, and 
means for locating, supporting and maintaining at least one 
reinforcing rod at said preselected location intermediate 
said form sides comprising a second unitary elongate 
member formed integrally with said rectilinear tab of said 
bight of one of said second end portions and lying substan- 
tially in the plane of said generally planar structure, said 
second unitary elongate member having a first portion 
extending obliquely from said rectilinear tab to said prese- 
lected location and terminating in an L-shaped member 
adapted to receive said at least one reinforcing rod and 
maintain said rod at said preselected location. 



July 5, 19M 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



161 



I 4,391,430 

" HYDRAULIC SERVO CONTROL SPOOL VALVE 
Donald M. Miller, Sunnyside, Wash., assignor to Battelle Me- 
morial Institute, Richland, Wash. 
I Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,146 

I I Int Q.3 F16K 47/04. 3/32 

U.S. Q. 251—205 10 Qaims 




1. A valve for extremely precise variable control of high 
pressure, low volume fluid flow of hydraulic liquids, compris- 
ing: 

a solid sleeve having an inner surface surrounding an open 
cavity; 

a long narrow slot extending through the sleeve from an 
entrance defined by a pair of elongated straight sharp 
comer edges formed at the intersection between the 
sleeve inner surface and the slot; 

said comer edges of the slot being progressively spaced 
apart from one another along its length in a linear fashion 
from a first closed slot end at which they intersect one 
another to a second open slot end; 

said slot being formed by a pair of elongated opposed walls 
extending through the sleeve and diverging radially out- 
wardly from its inner surface; 

a spool within the open cavity of the sleeve, said spool 
having an outer surface complementary in size and shape 
to the inner surface of the sleeve; 

a fluid path on the spool, the fluid path extending from an 
inlet along the spool to an end wall forming a sharp corner 
edge at its intersection with the spool outer surface, said 
end wall being transversely positioned across the entrance 
of said slot; 

and means slidably mounting said spool and sleeve relative 
to one another for adjustably locating the position of said 
end wall along the entrance of said slot. 



connection member having a threaded member protruding 
from an opening in one of the connectable pieces, said device 
comprising a pressure element positionable so as to thrust 
against said one of the connectable pieces, a tension element 
positionable on the threaded member and having a wedge 
groove, a power wedge accommodated in the wedge groove 
and acting against the pressure element thereby producing 
tension in the threaded member, a screw drive for the power 
wedge disposed on the presure element, the pressure element 
being in the form of a hollow body provided with through 
grooves arranged coaxially with the wedge groove and ac- 
commodating the tension element, the tension element carry- 
ing an axially rotatable connecting piece having an axial 
threaded bore for fixing the connecting piece on the threaded 
member, the pressure element being provided in an area ad- 
joining the connecting piece with apertures, walls of the 
through grooves arranged coaxially with the wedge groove of 
the tension element defining a guide receiving a straight work- 
ing surface of the power wedge. 



4,391,431 

DEVICE FOR TIGHTENING COARSE THREAD 

CONNECTIONS 

July S. Maximov, ulitsa Lesnaya, 52, kv. 8, Moskovskaya oblast, 

poselok Pravda, U.S.S.R. 
PCT No. PCT/SU79/00102, § 371 Date Feb. 23, 1981, § 102(e) 
Date Feb. 23, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00075, PCT Pub. 
Date Jan. 22, 1981 

PCT Filed Oct. 29, 1979, Ser. No. 243,901 
Qaims priority, application U.S.S.R., Jun. 27, 1979, 2785072 
Int. Q.' E21B 19/00 
U.S. Q. 254—29 A 16 Qaims 




1. A device for tightening a connection member extending 
between and interconnec ;ing two connectable pieces, said 



4,391,432 
WINCH OPERATING HANDLE 
Jean F. Baud, 1295, Tannay Vaud, Switzerland 

Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,521 
Int. Q.^ B66D 1/14 
U.S. Q. 254—365 



8 Qaims 




-ri- 




1. An improved winch of the type which is useful in tighten- 
ing and adjusting ropes, rigging, lines and sheets comprising; a 
winch mounting post having a hollow interior and a through 
aperture from end to end, means for mounting said post to a 
fixed support, a winch member having a through passageway 
and being rotatably mounted on the post with the post extend- 
ing into the passageway of the winch member, a portion of the 
winch member extending beyond the post and having the 
surfaces thereof forming part of the passageway with a non- 
circular cross-section, the outer surface of the winch member 
overlying the non-circular cross-section portion and the post 
extending within the passageway, the outer surface of the 
winch forming the operable bearing surface for adjusting of 
the ropes, riggings, lines and sheets, a crank member having a 
shaft portion which has a non-circular cross-section comple- 
mentary with the shape of the non-circular portion of the 
passageway and interengageable therewith so that meshing of 
the shaft with the surfaces forming the non-circular portion of 
the passageway and rotation of the shaft causes rotation of the 
winch member, a handle member hinged to the upper end of 
the shaft portion so as to pivot between an operating position 
at right angles with the shaft portion to facilitate rotation of the 
shaft portion and winch member and an inoperative stowable 



162 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



position projecting from the end of the shaft portion in align- 
ment with the axis thereof, said handle portion having a size 
and configuration so as to fit through the passageway in the 
winch member so that when it is in an inoperative stowed 
position the crank member including the handle portion ex- 
tends downwardly through the passageway in the winch mem- 
ber, the through aperture in the post, and a communicating 
opening in the support to its stowed position with only a mini- 
mum projection thereabove. 



431.435 
SUSPENSION DEVICE 
Anh T. Pham, Elancourt, France, assignor to Chrysler France, 
France 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 53,305, Jun. 29, 1979, 
abandoned. This appUcation Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 236,295 
Oaims priority, application France, Jul. 3, 1978, 78 19797; 
May 23, 1979, 79 13128 

Int. a.3 F16F 1/54. 13/00 
U.S. a. 267—140.1 2 Claims 



I 4,391,433 

EXTENDABLE TORCH GUIDE 

Robert L. Doan, 10362 Vic PL, Garden Grove, Calif. 92642 

FUed Jun. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 386,954 

Int. a? B23K 7/70 

U.S. CW 266—77 17 Qaims 




1. A guide for a torch for use in cutting metal plate compris- 
ing: 

a base member, said base member having a longtudinal 
channel therein and magnetic means on one side thereof 
for removably attaching said base member to a metal 
plate; 

an elongate cutting rail at least partially mounted within said 
channel in said base member for slidable movement rela- 
tive thereto, the ends of said cutting rail being extendable 
beyond the ends of said base member; 

means for locking said cutting rail relative to said base mem- 
I ber to prevent relative movement therebetween; and 

an end support member connectable to said ends of said 
cutting rail, said end support member having magnetic 
means on oiy^side thereof for removable attachment 
thereof to sajfd metal plate. 

4,391,434 

CERAMIC INSERT 

Micheal D. LaBate, 115 Hazen Ave., Ellwood City, Pa. 16117 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 123,369, Feb. 21, 1980, Pat. No. 

4,262,885. This application Apr, 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,319 

The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 21, 

1 1998, has been disclaimed. 

I Int. aj C21B 7/14 

U.S. a. 266—1% 5 Qaims 




1. The combination of a preformed hot metal runner formed 
of refractory material and at least one U-shaped ceramic insert 
embedded therein with the ends of the U-shaped insert flush 
with the upj)er surfaces of said hot metal runner, a threaded 
socket formed in each end of said U-shaped ceramic insert 
airanged to receive a threaded fastener therein. 




1. In a device for mounting a carried element on a carrying 
element in an automotive vehicle or the like and comprising a 
first frame member affixed to said carried element, a second 
frame member affixed to said carrying element, at least one 
resiliently deformable support arranged between said members 
so as to define a fluid-tight chamber with said frame members, 
said chamber containing an incompressible fluid and being 
divided into two portions by a separating partition formed of a 
resilient portion affixed to said first frame member and carry- 
ing a block member immersed in said fluid which is provided 
with at least one orifice through which the fluid is adapted to 
pass from one chamber portion of the other chamber portion, 
the improvements comprising: said block member carried by 
said resilient portion has a certain substantial inertial mass such 
that said block member constitutes means for causing said 
resilient portion to oscillate substantially following the dis- 
placement of said carried element when said carried element 
vibrates at a frequency less than a particular frequency result- 
ing in a first normal fluid flow pattern through said orifice 
between said chamber portions relative to the displacement of 
said carried element, and for causing said resilient portion to 
oscillate differently from the displacement of said carried 
element when said carried element vibrates at a frequency 
greater than said particular frequency resulting in a second 
fluid flow pattern through said orifice between said chamber 
portions relative to the displacement of said carried element 
which is substantially inverted relative to said first normal fluid 
flow pattern, and wherein a deformable cover is directly se- 
cured on said block member for movement therewith to seal- 
ingly close the fluid tight chamber and isolate the fluid from 
the surrounding medium, and wherein said block member 
forms a part of a block assembly which includes a tubular 
member which is affixed to said resilient partition so as to 
extend centrally therethrough so that end regions thereof 
project beyond the surface of said resilient portion, one end 
region of said tubular member having said orifice provided 
therein, said block member being affixed to an upper end re- 
gion of said tubular member, whereby said block member is 
supported by said resilient portion through said tubular mem- 
ber. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



163 



4,391,436 base, each of said clamp members including a body having 

RESILIENT MOUNTING portions underlying said flanges, each of said clamp members 

Byron L. Ftshbaugh, St. Marys, Ohio, assignor to The Goodyear having a post fixed to said body and extending upwardly be- 



Tire A Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio 
I Filed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,399 

Int. C1.3 F16F 3/08 
U.S. CI. 267—141.1 



8 Oaims 



tween said flanges of said base, spring means connecting said 
clamp members and urging said posts toward abutting relation- 
ship, an upstanding support plate means mounted on said base 
adjacent to one end, lever means rotatably mounted on said 
support plate means, a first link connecting one of said clamp 




1. A resilient mounting comprising: 

(a) a spacer including an elongated cylindrical portion; 

(b) an annular first insulator of elastomeric material includ- 
ing an upper and lower portion and having a central bore 
extending axially through said upper and lower portions, 
the upper portion including a generally cylindrical inner 
wall and a generally planar lower end wall, the lower 
portion including generally cylindrical outer and inner 
walls, the overall diameter of the upper portion being 
greater than that of the lower portion, the diameter of the 
bore in the upper portion being greater than the diameter 
of the bore in the lower portion; 

(c) a metallic annulus including a tubular portion joined at 
one end to the inner annular edge of a perpendicularly 
extending flat disc having a central bore therethrough, the 
flat disc of said metallic annulus being bonded to the lower 
end wall of the upper portion of the first insulator, the 
tubular portion of the metallic annulus being bonded to 
the outer cylindrical wall of the lower portion; 

(d) a second insulator of elastomeric material of a generally 
cylindrical configuration having a central bore extending 
axially therethrough, said bore diameter corresponding 
approximately to the outside diameter of the tubular por- 
tion of the metallic annulus; 

(e) a flat disc having a central bore therethrough coaxially 
aligned with and bonded to one axial end face of said 
second rubber insulator; 

(0 the cylindrical portion of said spacer having an outside 
diameter greater than the bore diameter of the lower 
portion of the first insulator, said cylindrical portion 
adapted to be forcibly fitted into the bore of said first 
insulator thereby radially compressing the lower portion 
of said first insulator between the cylindrical portion of 
said spacer and the tubular portion of said metallic annulus 
at least 10 percent; 

(g) said first and second insulators adapted to be drawn 
axially toward one another thereby placing the elasto- 
meric material of said first and second insulators in axial 
compression during installation of the mount, the amount 
of axial compression being limited to a predetermined 
amount by the respective overall axial dimensions of the 
spacer and undeformed insulators. 



4,391,437 
DOOR HOLDING CLAMP 
William T. Collins, Rte. 4, Box 340, Lillington, N.C. 27546 
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,231 
Int. a.3 B25B 1/00 
U.S. a. 269—254 CS 6 Qaims 

1. Apparatus for clamping a workpiece in a position so that 
work may be performed thereon comprising an elongated 
hollow base having a pair of opposed flanges at the top, said 
flanges extending inwardly toward each other and defining an 
opening, a pair of clamp members slidably mounted on said 




members to one side of said lever means, a second link connect- 
ing the other clamp member to the other side of said lever 
means, and means for rotating said lever means, whereby 
movement of said lever means in one direction causes said first 
and second link means to move said clamp members in oppo- 
site directions against the tension of said spring means and 
when said movement of said lever means is relieved said spring 
means moves said clamp members toward each other. 



4,391,438 
PATIENT SUPPORT ATTACHMENT FOR SURGICAL 

TABLES 
Charles A. Heffington, Jr., 123 E. College St., Murfreesboro, 
Tenn. 37130 

Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,210 

Int. a.^ A61G 13/00 

U.S. a. 269—328 5 Claims 




1. A patient support attachment for an operating table to 
facilitate surgery of the spine, the operating table having an 
end support portion for the arms, head and shoulders of a 
patient in a prone position and having an adjustable generally 
level support platform for the legs of a prone patient in a 
kneeling position with the support platform and legs spaced 
from the adjacent end of the operating table at an elevation 
below the level of said end support portion of the table, and the 
end support portion of the operating table carrying a pair of 
opposite side adjustable swivel clamps, said attachment com- 
prising a pair of spaced substantially parallel longitudinally 
extending elongated support rods adjustably held in said oppo- 
site side swivel clamps of the table and extending for a substan- 
tial distance beyond the end support portion of the table in 
cantilevered relationship to the table, said support rods being 
longitudinally adjustable forwardly and rearwardly in said side 
swivel clamps of the table and being swingable upwardly and 
downwardly vertically around the transverse axes of the side 
swivel clamps and being lockable by such clamps in selected 
adjusted positions, a support panel for the buttocks and thighs 
of a patient disposed between said support rods in spaced 
relationship to said end support portion of the table and above 
the level of said support platform for the legs, and another pair 



1^ 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



of opposite side adjustable swivel clamps carried by said sup- 
port panel for the buttocks and thighs and being adjustably 
engaged with and bodily supported by said support rods and 
also being adjustably engaged with said support panel, 
whereby the support panel for the buttocks and thighs may be 
moved forwardly or rearwardly along the longitudinal axes of 
the support rods, may be rotated in either direction around the 
transverse axes of the last-named pair of swivel clamps and 
may be shifted in opposite directions on a linear path across the 
rotational axis of said support panel as defmed by the last- 
named swivel clamps and locked securely in a selected ad- 
justed position on the support rods by the last-named swivel 
clamps, the body of a patient utilizing the attachment being 
substantially unsupported between the end support portion of 
the table and the support panel for the buttocks and thighs. 



including an individually driven variable air suction 
source (19); and 
means coupled to said sensor (24) for controlling said vari- 
able air suction source (19) responsive to the output signal 
from said sensor (24) such that said air suction source 
produces increased suction if said sensor output signal 
corresponds to no sheet of material picked up or de- 
creased suction if said sensor output signal corresponds to 
more than one sheet of material picked up. 



4,391,439 
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CALIBRATION AND 4 391 440 

ADJUSTMENT OF INSERTER FOR SHEETED PORTABLE EXERaSING APPARATUS 

I MATERIAL Isaac Berger, c/o Ike Berger Enter., 263 W. 38th St., New York, 

Lars G. Edstrom, Stockholm, Sweden, assignor to Malmohus J^.Y. 10018 

Invest AB, Malmo, Sweden Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,955 

Division of Ser. No. 9,953, Feb. 6, 1979, Pat. No. 4,349,189. This int. Q.^ A63B 21/06 

application Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,862 us, a. 272—118 

Claims priority, application Sweden, Feb. 7, 1978, 7801396; 
Feb. 7, 1978, 7801397; Feb. 7, 1978, 7801398; Feb. 7, 1978, /^ 

7801399; Jun. 15, 1978, 7806910 "j/ 

Int. a.3 B65H 7/14. 7/12 ^ 

U.S. a. 271—90 



12 Claims 



7 Oaims 








1. A portable, body-anchored exercising apparatus, compris- 



ing: 



1. Method for calibration and adjustment of an inserter 
working with air suction for picking up a sheeted or folded 
material one at a time from a bundle for insertion in a machine, 
comprising: 

sensing how many sheets of said material have been picked 
up by means of a sensor which transmits different output 
signals which correspond respectively to no sheet of the 
material picked up, one sheet of material picked up or 
several sheets of material picked up; 

controlling the suction of the inserier such that the suction is 
increased a specific amount if the output signal issued by 
the sensor corresponds to no sheet of material picked up, 
or the suction is descreased a specific amount if the output 
signal issued by the sensor corresponds to more than one 
sheet of material picked up; and 

adjusting the suction in the inserter after each pick up of the 
material until the output signal issued by the sensor corre- 
sponds to one sheet of material in the machine. 

2. Apparatus for calibration and adjustment of an inserter 
working with air suction for picking up a sheeted or folded 
material one at a time from a bundle for insertion in a machine, 
comprising: 

an inserter (5) including means for producing air suction to 
pick up a sheeted or folded material one at a time from a 
bundle for insertion of the picked up sheeted or folded 
materia] into a machine; 

a sensor (24) positioned adjacent said inserter (5) and ar- 
ranged for transmitting different output signals which 
correspond respectively to no sheet of material picked up, 
one sheet of material picked up or several sheets of mate- 
rial picked up; 

said means for producing air suction in said inserter (5) 



(a) an erect vertically elongated rigid frame; 

(b) a pair of separate elongated, flexible ropes mounted on 
and being axially movable along their axes of elongation in 
relation to the frame at opposite sides thereof, said ropes 
being capable of being pulled by a user for exercise pur- 
poses, and said ropes generating a substantially upward 
force on the frame when so pulled, each rope of said pair 
of ropes having a grasp end which when idle is situated at 
approximately mid-body level of an adult user; 

(c) separate means for resisting the pulling forces on the 
ropes generated by the user; 

(a) a pair of separate pulley systems, each pulley system 
being operatively interposed between a different resis- 
tance means and an associated rope, each pulley system 
including at least two vertically spaced pulleys about 
which the associated rope is trained, the upper pulley 
being rotatably supported by the rigid frame and the 
lower pulley being rotatably supported by the associated 
rope, the lower pulley supporting the associated resistance 
means, whereby the apparatus is provided with a mechan- 
ical advantage greater than 1 to 1 in favor of the grasp 
ends, the mechanical advantage allowing the user to move 
the grasp ends through a distance greater than the distance 
through which the associated resistance means moves; and 

(e) a base connected to the frame and on which the user rests 
his body weight while exercising on the same, said base 
exerting a force opposing the force of the pulled ropes, 
when the user's weight is applied to said base, said base 
being operative for permitting the user to hold the appara- 
tus down using his own body weight in any desired posi- 
tion while exercising. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



165 



4,391,441 
EXERCISE APPARATUS I 

Luther G. Simjian, 1750 S. Ocean La., Fort Lauderdale, Fla. 

33316 
Division of Ser. No. 196,849, Oct. 14, 1980, Pat. No. 4,313,603. 
This application Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,173 
Int. C\? A63B 23/02 



U.S. a. 272—126 



5 Claims 




powered plungers provided in said guide tubes for propel- 
ling said ball through said guide tubes; 

selector means for randomly activating either of said pow- 
ered plungers; and 

means for randomly adjusting the propelling force of said 
powered plungers, each of said guide tubes communicat- 
ing with said track by way of a respective bore formed in 
said rim and blocked by a pivotable arcuate flap biased 
into a closed position and displaceable into an open posi- 
tion by said ball propelled through said bore. 



4,391,442 

GAMING APPARATUS 

David Levy, 360 W. 55th St., New York, N.Y. 10019 

Division of Ser. No. 132,085, Mar. 20, 1980, Pat. No. 4,337,945. 

This application Feb. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 345,024 

Int. a.3 A63E 5/04 

U.S. a. 273—142 E 3 Claims 



lit 

A 



i_ 

ON 
VAlVf 



12<t 



/2S 



ior7\ I ««<ooHn r 



RAWOOn 

swircMtNfr 

VALVC 




ftr 



1. A gaming apparatus comprising: 

a roulette wheel having a circular rim, a downwardly con- 
verging frustoconical bowl contained within said rim and 
joined thereto below the upper surface of said rim to form 
therewith a track for a roulette ball, a rotatable wheel 
head centered within said bowl at the bottom thereof and 
formed with a plurality of numbered compartments for 
receiving said roulette ball; 

an automatic roulette ball spinner having a pair of guide 
tubes directed oppositely to one another and positioned 
along said rim for directing said ball tangentially onto said 
track, said guide tubes having a roulette ball magazine 
communicating therewith and means including respective 



' 4,391,443 

EXERCISE APPARATUS 
Julian B. Beecroft, Box 57, Port Hope, OnUrio, Canada (L!A 
3V9) 

Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Set. No. 277,123 

Int. a.3 A63B 23/02 

U.S. a. 272-145 21 Oaims 



1. An exercise apparatus comprising: 

a stationary support; 

a platform mounted upon said support for oscillating rotat- 
ing motion about a centrally disposed axis and adapted to 
support a person in standing position; 

a pair of upstanding posts mounted forward of the perimeter 
of said platform and pivotally supported for enabling the 
upper end of each post to undergo oscillating motion in a 
direction generally toward and away from said platform, 
and 

means coupling said platform to said posts for causing the 
upper ends of said posts to move in opposition relative to 
each other toward and away from said platform respon- 
sive to oscillating motion imparted to said platform. 



-1'i 



3. An exercise apparatus for use by a human being, which 
comprises: 

a ring shaped cushion member, having an axis, dimensioned 
and configured to support one side of a human torso in 
generally axially aligned relationship with said cushion 
member and in shaped relationship to any other side of the 
associated human torso; 

means for supporting said cushion member in a generally 
horizontal position for free rotational movement about the 
axis thereof, said cushion member being adapted to be 

^ moved rotationally only in lesponse to forces imposed by 
the user; and 

means for receiving and securing the feet of a user disposed 
in axially spaced relationship from said ring shaped cush- 
ion member. 



4,391,444 

ELECTRONIC GAME PROVIDING FORMATION 

CHANGES AND METHOD 

Eric Bromley, West Simsbury, Conn., assignor to Coleco Indus- 
tries, Inc., Hartford, Conn. 

Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,808 
Int. CI.' A63F 9/00 
U.S. a. 273—94 32 Claims 

27. In a method of simulating a sports-action team game, the 
steps of: 

a. providing a housing; 

b. providing a display panel on the upper surface of said 
housing that provides a visual simulation of a playing field 
of the type on which a ball-type game is played and is 
adapted to display symbols in and between side and end 
boundary positions on said field in response to electrical 
signals applied thereto; 

c. providing operational-circuit means in said housing opera- 
tively connected to said display panel for generation and 
transmission of electrical signals to said display panel to 
produce offensive and defensive play symbols on said 
simulated playing field, one of said offensive play symbols 



166 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



at a time simulating the position of the ball, said operation- 
al-circuit means step including: 

(i) moving a multiplicity of said offensive play symbols, 
including said ball-position symbol, along said playing 
field, said multiplicity of offensive play symbols includ- 
ing a concurrently movable plurality thereof; 
(ii) moving a multiplicity of said defensive play symbols 
along said playing field toward said ball-position sym- 
bol, movement of said offensive and defensive play 
symbols providing play action simulating the action of 
said sports-action team game; 
(iii) detecting the coincidence of said ball-position symbol 
with at least a selected one of said defensive play sym- 
bols during at least a portion of a play and terminating 
play action upon such detection; and 
(iv) monitoring play action to record information con- 
cerning the status of said simulated game and for pro- 
ducing signals indicative of said status information, said 
signals conveying the recorded information to an opera- 
tor of said game; 
d. providing a control board on said housing that includes a 
multiplicity of manually operable control elements con- 
necting said control board to said operational-circuit 
means for transmission of signals thereto through opera- 
tion of said control elements, effecting movement of said 
ball-position symbol by said offensive-play-symbol-move- 
ment means in response to operation of said control ele- 
ments by an operator to effect movement of said ball-posi- 
tion symbol through said defensive play symbols to simu- 
late advance of the ball, terminating play action by said 




detecting means upon the occurrence of said game termi- 
nating coincidence; 

e. monitoring the position of at least one of said concurrently 
movable plurality of offensive play symbols and assigning 
prohibited moves thereto based on its monitored position 
on said playing field; 

f. operating at least one of said manually operable control 
elements to transmit signals to said operational-circuit 
means to direct the same move to each of said concur- 
rently movable plurality of offensive play symbols, includ- 
ing a prohibited move to at least one of said concurrently 
movable plurality; 

g. effecting all of the directed moves of said concurrently 
movable plurality except said at least one prohibited 
move, thereby changing the formation defined by the 
relative positions of said concurrently movable plurality; 

h. operating at least one of said manually operable control 
elements to transmit signals to said operational-circuit 
means to direct a move of said concurrently movable 
plurality of offensive play symbols that is not prohibited to 
any of them; and 

i. effecting said last-mentioned directed moves of all of said 
concurrently movable plurality, thereby maintaining the 
new formation resulting from said first-mentioned effected 
moves. 

30. In an electronic apparatus for simulating a sports-action 
team game, the combination comprising: 

a. a housing; 

b. a display panel on the upper surface of said housing pro- 
viding a visual simulation of a playing field of the type on 



which a game between opposing teams is played, said 
display panel having a multiplicity of discrete visual- 
image-producing devices arranged along x- and y-axes of 
said simulated playing field and adapted to display sym- 
bols representing players of opposing teams at a multiplic- 
ity of discrete positions along said x- and y-axes on said 
playing field in response to electrical signals transmitted 
thereto; 

c. operational-circuit means in said housing operatively 
connected to said display panel for generation and trans- 
mission of electrical signals thereto to produce symbols of 
said opposing teams on said simulated playing field, at 
least one of said teams including at least first and second 
symbols; 

(i) means for moving a multiplicity of said symbols of said 
one team along said playing field, said multiplicity of 
symbols including said first and second symbols; 

(ii) means for moving a multiplicity of the symbols of the 
other team along said playing field toward one of said 
symbols of said first team, movement of said symbols of 
said two teams providing play action simulating the 
action of said sports-action team game; and 

(iii) means for monitoring the position of at least one of 
said symbols of said first team, means assigning prohib- 
ited moves thereto based on its monitored position on 
said playing field, and means for preventing said prohib- 
ited moves of said at least one symbol by said first team 
symbol movement means; 

d. a control board on said housing including a multiplicity of 
manually operable control elements, said control board 
being electrically connected to said operational-circuit 
means for transmission of signals to said operational-cir- 
cuit means through operation of said control elements, 
said control elements including first and second elongated 
levers, respectively, associated with said first and second 
symbols, said levers being pivotally mounted in said con- 
trol board for pivoting from rest positions in which the 
longitudinal axes of said levers extend generally perpen- 
dicularly to the upper surface of said housing, said pivot- 
ing being along two pivotal axes extending generally 
perpendicularly to the longitudinal axes of said levers, said 
control board further including at least three switches 
associated with each of said levers along said pivotal axes 
thereof and electrically connected to said operational-cir- 
cuit means for transmission of electrical signals thereto to 
direct movements of said symbol associated with each of 
said levers, pivoting of each of said levers along one piv- 
otal axis in first and second directions operating the associ- 
ated first and second switches to direct motion of the 
associated symbol in first and second directions, respec- 
tively, along one axis of said simulated playing field, pivot- 
ing of each of said levers in a first direction along the 
second pivotal axis thereof operating the associated third 
switch to direct motion of the associated symbol in a first 
direction along the other of said axes of said playing field, 
each actuation of a switch causing only one step of motion 
of the associated symbol, each lever and its associated 
switches being cooperatively configured and dimensioned 
and each lever being pivotally mounted to permit opera- 
tion of only one switch at a time by each lever. 



4^91,445 

LOGICAL SKILL TOY 

Gabor Vizeiyi, Pakozdi ter 3., Budapest 1148, Hungary 

FUed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,528 

Claims priority, application Hungary, Apr. 3, 1980, 802/80 

Int. a.3 A63F 9/08 

U.S. a. 273—158 4 Claims 

1. A logical toy comprising a series of hooks with legs fixed 

about the perimeter of a disc, the legs of each of said hooks 

being fixed and connected to said disc so that the annular 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



167 



closed part of each hook except the first in the series encloses ing head to the ball dispensing position when said tee striking 
the legs of the preceding hook adjacent to it to thereby form a portion engages said tee. 



I. 




4,391,446 
GOLF BALL DISPENSER 
John Eberle, 2027 - 28th Ave. SW., Calgary, Alberta, Canada 
(T2T 1K4) 

Filed Aug. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 176,116 

Claims priority, application Canada, Sep. 25, 1979, 336457 

Int. a.3 A63B 57/00 

U.S. a. 273—201 28 Qaims 




1. A golf ball dispenser for use with a fixed tee comprising in 
combination a base, a feed tube component mounted upon said 
base for pivotal movement in a horizontal plane from a ball 
dispensing position adjacent the tee, to a position clear of the 
tee and vipe versa, said feed tube component sloping down- 
wardly towards the outboard end thereof to feed golf balls by 
gravity towards said outboard end, a dispensing head pivotally 
secured to said outboard end and being movable from a ball 
detent pxisition to a ball dispensing position and vice versa, 
means normally urging said head to said ball detent position, 
said outboard end of said feed tube component being apertured 
in the base thereof to provide a ball dispensing aperture, said 
dispensing head being pivotally supported for fore and aft 
tipping movement, within said feed tube component adjacent 
said ball dispensing aperture, said head including a front wall 
and rear wall, said rear wall acting as a ball detent when in said 
ball detent position and preventing a ball from passing from 
said feed tube component to said aperture, said detent releasing 
the front ball in said feed tube component to a position in said 
aperture, when said head is moved to said ball dispensing 
position, said front wall holding said ball in said ball dispensing 
position, said detent engaging between said front ball and the 
ball immediately therebehind and thereby releasing said front 
ball through said aperture, when said head is moved back to 
the ball detent position, means to activate said head including 
means spanning said aperture and engaging the associated tee 
when said dispenser is moved to the dispensing position, said 
last mentioned means including a tee striking portion pivoted 
for movement to said front wall of the feed tube and extending 
into said aperture, and a dispensing head engaging portion 
connected to said tee striking portion, for moving said dispens- 



431,447 
ELECTRONIC CHESS GAME 
Raymond Dudley, 833 S. Cedros, Apt. 24, Solana Beach, Calif. 
92075 

Filed Not. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,781 

Int. a.3 G09B 19/22 

U.S. a. 273—238 25 Qaims 



trap with said hook; and a closed cord arranged around th^ 
legs of one of said hooks. 




1. An electronic game comprising a playing board defining a 
plurality of playing positions, a plurality of playing pieces, at 
least some of which are of different types, each piece being 
movable between playing positions in accordance with a pre- 
determined pattern dependent upon its type, said predeter- 
mined pattern being influenced by the locations of other ones 
of said pieces, means for encoding each piece according to its 
type, means at each position responsive to the encoding means 
for detecting the presence and type of a piece located at that 
position, and means responsive to the detecting means for 
illuminating each position on the board to which such piece 
can be moved, the illuminating means being responsive to the 
locations of other ones of said pieces. 



4,391,448 
METHOD OF FLAYING A TWO-PLAYER BOARD GAME 
Conrad Hermann, 3rd, 1551 East Walnut La., Philadelphia, Pa. 

19138 

Division of Ser. No. 967,223, Dec. 17, 1978, abandoned. This 

application Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,431 

Int. CI.3 A63F 3/00 

U.S. a. 273—243 4 Claims 



^rdj 




4,4 S-J-,..-^. .,,,.. ^♦-,-._ 
i . i +.»...-., .4 4 i-l 4-- 






-^^-t-rti 1 M I 1^^- • 



- ♦ T H-| t 



ill 




1. A method of playing a game for two players which com- 
prises the steps of 

(A) providing three sets of playing pieces including means 
for distinguishing each of these sets from the other two 
and providing an equal number of pieces in each set; 

(B) providing between the players a rectangular board 
marked off into a plurality of equal-sized squares, wherein 
(Bi) the two rows of squares half-way between the play- 
ers, identifiable as the MID-ZONE have placed 



168 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



thereon, beforecommenceinent of play, all the pieces of 
one of the three sets, identifiable as the initial or 
BOARD set of pieces, one BOARD piece being on 
each square of said MID-ZONE, the said equal number 
of pieces in each set thus being equal to the number of 
squares in the MID-ZONE, and 
(B2) in the middle of each player's end of said board there 
is a relatively small rectangle of squares, including 
several squares in the first line of said player's side, 
marked off as a respective HOME BASE accessible 
only to said repective player, the remaining squares on 
the entire board being accessible at all times to any 
playing piece of either player, once said piece has been 
placed on the board by means hereinafter set forth; 

(C) providing chance means manipulatable by said players 
for placing and moving said pieces on said board, said 
chance means comprising a device for indicating at ran- 
dom a number selected from zero, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5; 

(D) each of said players being provided with one of the 
remaining sets of playing pieces, identifiable as his OWN 
playing pieces in contrast to the BOARD pieces which 
are never possessible by either player; 

(E) selecting one of said two players as the one to commence 
play, this play being identifiable as the FIRST PLAYER; 

(F) manipulating said chance means to determine the num- 
I ber of spaces which the FIRST PLAYER may move any 
I of the BOARD pieces toward his own HOME Base; 

(G) manipulating said chance means to determine the num- 
ber of spaces which the SECOND PLAYER may move 

I any of the BOARD pieces to his own HOME BASE; 

(H) manipulating said chance means to determine the succes- 
sive alternate moves of the players who may use the indi- 
cium number to (i) move the same or other BOARD 
pieces, removing from the Board any BOARD piece 
which reaches his HOME BASE and replacing it with 
one of his OWN pieces, or (ii) move one of his thus-placed 
OWN pieces from his HOME BASE on to the open 
board, or (iii) move either a BOARD piece or one of his 
OWN pieces in such a manner as to have said two pieces 
occupy an identical otherwise unoccupied square, replac- 
ing the BOARD piece by another of his off-the-board 
OWN pieces (leaving two identical pieces temporarily on 
the same square) and removing the BOARD piece from 
the board, or (iv) move one of the player's OWN pieces to 
the same space already occupied by an opponent's OWN 
piece or pieces, removing said opponent's piece or pieces 
from the board and placing anywhere in the MID-ZONE 
a BOARD piece (From off the board) for each opponent's 
thus removed OWN piece, — all of such possible moves 
being such that the total number of pieces on the board 
remains constant; 

(I) and repeating the alternating steps set forth in (H) until 
one of the players has the complete set of his OWN pieces 
on the board. 



4,391,449 



,449 

(Ta 



BOARD GAME 
Robert L. Johnson, 3655 Pruneridge, Apt. 261, Santa Clara, 

Calif. 95051 

I Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,626 

' Int. a.3 A63F 3/02 

U.S. a. 273—260 11 Qaims 

\. A board game comprising: 

a playing surface provided with indicia including: 

(A) a first plurality of spaced apart parallel lines; 

(B) a second plurality of spaced apart parallel lines sub- 
stantially perpendicular to said first plurality of lines, 
whereby said playing surface is divided into a number 
of four-sided spaces; 

(C) a plurality of positioning marks located, one each, 
within each of said spaces; 

(D) a plurality of directive lines located, eight each, 
within each of said spaces such that, within each space, 
four of said directive lines extend from said positioning 



mark to the comers of said space, and the other four of 
said directive lines extend from said positioning mark to 
the four sides of said space; 
(E) directive Une distinguishing means wherein a first 
group of said plurality of directive lines have a first 
visual appearance, and a second group of said plurality 
of directive lines have a second visual appearance; 




(F) a plurality of first player pieces, each of which has a 
first side having a first distinguishing characteristic, and 
a second side having a second distinguishing character- 
istic; and 

(G) a plurality of second player pieces, each of which has 
a first side having a first distinguishing characteristic, 
and a second side having a second distinguishing char- 
acteristic. 



4,391,450 

SHAFT SEAL RESISTANT TO ELECTROKINETIC 

CORROSION 

Theodore R. Beck, Seattle, Wash., assignor to Electrochemical 
Technology Corp., Seattle, Wash. 

Filed Aug. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 412,709 

Int. Q\? F16J 15/16, 15/34 

U.S. a. 277—1 15 Qaims 




1. In combination with a shaft, a housing, and means mount- 
ing said shaft for rotation within said housing, a shaft seal for 
preventing the leakage of liquid between said shaft and said 
housing, said shaft seal comprising: 
a stationary first annular seal element associated with said shaft 

housing; 
said shaft extending through said first annular seal element; 
a second annular seal element; 
means mounting said second seal element on said shaft for 

rotation therewith; 
each of said seal elements having a respective mating surface; 
it^eans for urging said mating surfaces together to provide 

rubbing engagement between said mating surfaces during 

said rotation; 
one of said two seal elements being composed of a material 

having a relatively high hardness; 
the other of said two seal elements being composed of a mate- 
rial having a relatively low hardness which allows the 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



169 



harder of the two seal elements to conform the softer seal 
element to the harder one; 

both of said seal elements being composed of a material which 
will not support an electrochemical reaction; 

said mounting means for said seal elements and said respective 
compositions of the seal elements comprising means for 
conforming the mating surface of said other seal element to 
the mating surface of said one seal element, on a macro scale, 
when said mating surfaces undergo said rubbing engage- 
ment, during said rotation; 

and means, including the respective composition of each seal 
element, for substantially eliminating electrokinetic corro- 
sion at said mating surface thereof when the shaft seal is used 
to prevent leakage of an electrolytic liquid. 



4,391,451 

EXPANSIBLE CHUCK ASSEMBLY 
Arthur D. Secor, and Jerome G, Secor, both of Toledo, Ohio, 
assignors to Great Lakes Industries, Inc., Toledo, Ohio 
1 1 Filed Sep. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 188,109 
' ' Int. a.3 B23B 31/40. 5/34. 31/10 
MS. a. 279-2 A 14 Qaims 



m*ff*ff!rrfv^^m 




1. A rotatable expansible chuck assembly for use in web 
winding and unwinding operations which comprises a body, a 
hermetically sealed chamber in said body, a piston in said 
chamber dividing said chamber into two hermetically sealed 
spaces, fluid pressure check and bleed valves mounted on said 
body connected to said chamber through said body on oppo- 
site sides of said piston into respective said spaces, a piston rod 
connected to said piston extending therefrom through an aper- 
ture in said body, a plurality of inclined plane wedge surfaces 
provided on said piston rod where it extends out of said aper- 
ture, a plurality of gripping means, each said gripping means 
having an inner surface engaging a corresponding said wedge 
surface and an outer surface to receive a core for a roll of web 
material to be wound or unwound, and a slidable connection 
between each said gripping means and said body whereby each 
said gripping means is movable generally radially relative to 
said body in response to movement of said piston rod, resilient 
means retaining said gripping means in said body which is so 
arranged and constructed that said gripping means are readily 
removable from said body and replaceable by other gripping 
means, said valves, said chamber, said piston and said piston 
rod being so constructed and arranged that when the outer 
surface of said gripping means is engaging a core of material 
being wound or unwound under a predetermined tension the 
fluid under pressure in said space on the side of said piston 
urging said gripping means into engagement with said core is 
isolated from any other fluid pressure sources, the fluid in the 
other said space is in communication via its bleed valve with 
the atmosphere and said engagement due to the net pressure 
against said piston is continually sufficient to maintain said 
tension irrespective of minor distortions due to movement or 
stretching of said core. 



4,391,452 
CONTROL QRCUIT FOR VEHICLE LEVELING SYSTEM 
Taiji Ohmori, Kawagoe, Japan, assignor to Honda Giken Kogyo 
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,777 

Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 17, 1980, 55-3965 

Int. Q.3 B60G 11/26 

U.S. Q. 280-6.1 8 Qaims 



DETECTIHG 
DEVICE 



'Sd 



iMPLIFIER 



?SSl=l>Q^ 




monostable"' '* 

MULTlvieR4T0R 



1. A control circuit for a vehicle leveling system to restore a 
vehicle height to be within a reference vehicle height range by 
operating either a first drive means to raise a vehicle body or 
a second drive means to lower the vehicle body when said 
vehicle height is out of said reference vehicle height range, 
comprising: 
a first detecting means for generating a directional signal of 
vehicle height change in the form of either a HIGH signal 
or a LOW signal; 
a second detecting means for generating a command signal 
of vehicle height adjustment in the form of either an OFF 
signal or an ON signal; 
main circuit means for selecting for operation either said first 
drive means to raise said vehicle height or said second 
drive means to lower said vehicle height in response to 
said directional signal, and for determining whether or not 
said drive means is to be actuated; 
holding circuit means, connected between said second de- 
tecting means and said main circuit means, for increasing 
the duration of said OFF signal for a predetermined 
length of time when said OFF signal appears instanta- 
neously, and for transmitting said OFF signal with said 
duration to said main circuit means; and 
said holding circuit means comprising a monostable multivi- 
brator connected so as to receive said command signal 
from said second detecting means, and an OR gate con- 
nected so as to receive said command signal from said 
second detecting means dnd an output from said monosta- 
ble multivibrator. 



4,391,453 
CHILD STROLLER 
Dieter Gliiser, Dachau, Fed. Rep, of Germany, assignor to PEG 
Perego-Pines Deutschland GmbH, Dachau, Fed. Rep. of Ger- 
many 

Filed Oct. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 192,920 
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 4, 
1979, 2940302; Apr. 16, 1980, 3014674 

Int. Q.^ B62B 9/10 
U.S. Q. 280-47.4 25 Qaims 

1. A child stroller having a frame (5), a seat (1) formed by at 
least one seating surface member (2, 2'), a back rest (3), a 
footrest (4), supporting means (17, 18, 19) for disposing said 
one seating surface member on said frame relative to said back 
rest to support a child in a seated position, adjustment means 
(9) for moving said one seating surface member longitudinally 
relative to said back rest to provide a usable portion of said seat 



170 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



of variable length corresponding to the length of the child's ^^j . ^^p VFH ATpROVIDED WITH A 

thigh, and locking means (8. 10) for holding said one seating n^-WHEEL i^^ 

Nils Fagerstcdt, Espoo, Finland, assignor to Oy Sisu-Auto Ab, 
Helsinki, Finland 

Filed Noy. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 210,444 

Qaims priority, application Finland, Dec. 14, 1979, 793931 

Int. a.3 B62D 53/08 

U.S. a. 280—407 9 Qaims 




surface member in its adjusted position relative to said back 
rest. 




I 4 391 454 

UTILITY CART WITH DETACHABLE AND REVERSIBLE 

SHELVES 
Douglas D. Marsh, 1212 Mark Dr.; Arthur E. Feldman, 108 Iwo 
St, and John C. Newlin, R.R. #3, all of Auburn, Ind. 46706 
I FUed Apr. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 137,388 

' Int. d? B62B U/OO 

MS. CL 280— 47 J5 ♦ Chums 



7 6 e ^ ^ 

1. A tractor vehicle provided with a fifth-wheel plate, com- 
prising a chassis, a beam mounted on said chassis vertically 
pivotably on two fulcrums spaced-apart in the transverse di- 
rection of said vehicle, and a fifth-wheel plate supported by 
said beam, in which the improvement comprises said fulcrums 
of said beam being independently displaceable in the longitudi- 
nal direction of said vehicle. 




I. A utility cart having reversible shelves comprising a pair 
of end frames, each having a pair of elongated rigidly con- 
nected upright hollow supports which are parallel and spaced 
apart, each end frame having an end panel secured to said 
upright supports, an orthogonal shelf device detachably se- 
cured at the comers to said upright supports: said shelf device 
including two parallel flanges on opposite side edges and being 
essentially open at the opposite ends thereof, one mounting 
bracket secured to each end of each flange and having an 
attaching portion projecting angularly inwardly, each attach- 
ing portion engaging the respective upright support at a point 
within the angle defined by the shelf comers; each support 
having at said engagement point a threaded opening through 
one side thereof, and one fastener received by an opening in 
each attaching portion and being threaded into said threaded 
opening for securing said shelf device to said upright supports, 
said flanges extending between said pair of end frames and said 
panels being juxtaposed with the opposite ends of said shelf 
device thereby serving as end closures therefor, said shelf 
device also having a bottom formed with two portions angling 
downwardly from said two flanges, respectively, and an up- 
standing inverted V-shaped wall portion connected at the 
lower edges to the inner facing edges of said two bottom 
portions, respectively, said wall portion including two back 
panels and being provided at each end of one back panel 
thereof with an elongated plate like bracket which generally 
lies in a plane at right angles to said one back panel, each said 
bracket extending into the apex portion of said wall portion 
and having an opening for receiving a fastener, and a fastener 
extending through an opening in each end panel and into each 
said bracket opening for supporting said wall portion with 
respect to said end frame. 



4,391,456 
SKI STICK GRIP 
Beat Moor, Meiringen Halteli CH3860, Switzerland 
per No. PCr/CH80/00058, § 371 Date Feb. 7, 1981, § 102(e) 
Date Jan. 22, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02649, PCT Pub. 
Date Dec. 11, 1980 

per Filed May 13, 1980, Ser. No. 233,605 
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jun. 7, 1979, 
5292/79 

Int. C\? A63C 11/22 
U.S. CI. 280—821 * Claims 




1. A ski stick grip attached to a ski stick having a center 
portion, two side portions of substantially equal length extend- 
ing from the said center portion at right angles to the longitudi- 
nal axis of the ski stick, an upper surface and a lower surface in 
which the force of the hand is applied substantially in the 
direction of the longitudinal axis of said ski stick, permitting 
the movement of the wrist joint substantially parallel to the 
movement of the hand and at right angles of the forearm to 
increase the force applied by the arm and. the wrist to said 
stick; 

said ski stick grip enabling the placing of the palm of the 
hand on said upper surface; 

said lower surface arranged for accommodating the thumb 
of the hand, allowing the hand to surround said grip by 
forming substantially a fist; 

said upper surface being extended outwardly and upwardly; 

said lower surface of said ski stick grip curved downwardly; 

and 
a pommel formed, extending upwardly substantially from 
the center portion of said grip; 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



171 



allowing the force on the ski stick grip to be exerted substan- 
tially parallel to the longitudinal axis of the ski stick. 



4,391,457 

COMBINATION POCKET PAD AND WRITING 

INSTRUMENT HOLDER 

Paul B. Gassner, 0405 SW. Texas St., Portland, Oreg. 97219 

1 1 FUed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,470 

Int. C\? B42D 3/06. 3/12 

U.S.a.2«l-31 6 Qaims 



sions in the end region of the inner wall surfaces of the 
two opposing housing segments; 
radially outwardly projecting lugs on said gasket means 
adjacent to and co-extensive with the enlarged free ends, 
wherein the lugs interact with the recess to position the 
gasket means within the coupling housing in the closed 
position of the housing segments so that the radially outer 
side of said sealing line is spaced circumferentially from 
the opposed ends of said housing segments and is in 
contact with the inner wall surface of one of said seg- 
ments; 




1. A book-type combination pocket pad and writing instru- 
ment holder comprising: 

a cover foldable into front and back cover sections along a 
hinge portion, 

retention means along an inside face of one said cover sec- 
tion for retaining a pad of paper sheets, 

slip inhibiting means on the outside face of said one cover 
section for frictional contact with the material of an open 
pocket for resisting gravity-induced sliding movement of 
said cover from said pocket yet allowing easy manual 
"^ r^"?°.^*' °^ ^''^ cover from said open pocket, said slip 
inhibiting means comprising a high friction surface, 

spacer means projecting from an inside face of the other said 
cover section toward the inside face of the one said cover 
section when said sections are folded together to space the 
cover sections one from the other, said spacer means 
comprising a pair of laterally spaced apart relatively rigid 
parallel ribs integral with said other cover section and 
spaced inwardly of opposite side edge portions of said 
other cover section in positions overlying said pad when 
said cover sections are folded together, 

said ribs being positioned laterally on opposite sides of a 
center portion of said other cover section so as to define 
with the inside faces of said cover sections a rigid pocket 
therebetween when said cover sections are folded to- 
gether for receiving writing instruments clipped to said 
other cover section and extending along the inside face 
thereof. 




a sealing lip formed at axially opposite ends of the interior of 
the gasket means, said sealing lip comprising a radially 
inwardly extending portion terminating at at least one 
enlarged free end of the gasket means in a projection 
extending circumferentially from and beyond the gener- 
ally planar surface of said enlarged free end, whereby 
circumferential retraction of said sealing lip is compen- 
sated for to maintain a complete circumferential surface to 
seal under internal pressure; and 

releasable locking means cooperating with the housing seg- 
ments for locking the segments together in the closed 
position. 



4 391 459 
INSTANT hot' WATER DISPENSER 

Charles A. Wicke, and Wayne C. Riley, both of Racine, Wis., 

assignors to Emerson Electric Company, St. Louis, Mo. 

Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 233,221 

Int. Q.' F16L 47/00 

U.S. Q. 285-238 6 Claims 



II 



4 391 458 
PIPE COUPLING WITH GASKET LOCATING MEANS 
James Blakeley, Thomhill, Canada, assignor to Blakeley Engi- 
neering Limited, Thomhill, Canada 

I jFiled Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,921 

I I Int. Q.3 F16L 21/06. 41/00 

U.S. Q. 285-112 5 ciiams 

1. A pipe coupling device comprising 

two arcuate housing segments, each having opposable ends 
and a continuous inner wall surface, said housing segments 
being movable from an open position to a closed position 
in which said opposable ends are brought into opposition, 
said housing segments thereby defining a generally cylin- 
drical coupling housing which is adapted to engage the 
pipes to be coupled; 

arcuate gasket means of generally C-shaped cross-section 
within the coupling housing, said gasket means having 
radially enlarged free ends defining substantially planar 
surfaces adapted to abut along an axially extending sealing 
line; 

a recess defined in the closed position of said housing seg- 
ments by adjacent radially outwardly extending depres- 




1. In a hot water dispenser having an upper tank with a 
lower end and a lower tank with an upper end, the improve- 
ment wherein: 

a. the lower end of the upper tank is formed with a plurality 
of outtumed flanges and an external circumferential 
groove for receiving an O-ring; 

b. the upper end of the lower Unk is formed with a shoulder 
for receiving and supporting the lower end of the upper 
tank and for forming a seal with the O-ring, a plurality of 
gaps for receiving the outtumed flanges of the upper tank, 
and a plurality of outtumed flanges between the gaps, one 
of the outtumed flanges having at least one small notch 
therein; and 

c. a retaining ring inserted between the outtumed flanges of 



172 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



the upper and lower tanks, the retaining ring having at 
least one upturned locking portion that protrudes into the 
small notch in the notched flange of the lower tank, 
so that the notched flange will deform under internal pres- 
sure in the dispenser to release the retaining ring and 
release the pressure. 



4 391,460 

ADJUSTABLE MULTIPLE BOLT LOCKING SYSTEM 

Jose D. Bonet, Martin el Humano, 12-6° Valencia, Spain 

Filed May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,691 

Claims priority, application Spain, May 25, 1980, 480.950 

Int. a.3 E05C 1/06 

U.S. a. 292—37 4 Qaims 




i_^ 



A security lock system comprising a plurality of bolts 
operated by a common key and a corresponding multiple strike 
for accommodating said bolts; a main carrier including a single 
box section forming a lock covering the entire vertical dimen- 
sion of the door; said main carrier having at at least one of the 
epds thereof means for adjustment in length to the vertical 
dimension of the door; means for common operation of the 
plurality of bolts; said bolts including bolts in at least one cross 
bar, said cross bar being adjustably locatable at any height on 
said door; said cross bar and said multiple strike having adjust- 
ment means therein for adjusting the lengths thereof. 



4,391,461 
QUARTER-TURN FASTENER 
Florian C. Deibele, Tigard, Oreg., assignor to Tektronix, Inc., 
Beaverton, Oreg. 

Filed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,438 

Int. a.3 E05C 3/12 

U.S. a. 292—204 5 Oaims 



positioning boss comprising a projection engagable with a 
detent in said panel for establishing a stable position of said 
fastener. 



4,391,462 

ANTI-THEFT LOCKING DEVICE ADAPTABLE TO 

CONTAINERS 

Guy Loreal, Teteghem, France, assignor to Societe Navale Char- 

geurs Delmas-VieUeux, France 

Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,831 

Gaims priority, application France, Aug. 8, 1980, 80 17553 

Int. C\? E05C 3/04 

U.S. CI. 292—207 4 Qaims 



6 5,« /> 




36 V47 

24^ 26 



^-Ov* ^ 30/1 



v% 



34 




1. In a container presenting hingedly mounted doors main- 
tained in tight-sealing closure position by at least one rotating 
vertical rod provided at its ends with locking members engag- 
ing fixed stops of the door frame, an anti-theft locking device 
which comprises: 
a rain-strap opening provided in a front extension of the 
container roof in the vicinity of the upper end of said 
rotating vertical rod, 
a lug-shaped upper extension of the rotating vertical rod 
being placed in front of an upper portion of the door frame 
and providing, in the closure position of the rotating 
vertical rod, a free space in relation with said door frame, 
and 
a vertically movable plate engaging said rain-strap opening 
and moving downwards by gravity to lodge into the free 
space between said upper extension of the rotating vertical 
rod and said supper portion of the door frame, 
whereby the rotating vertical rod can be released to open the 
doors only when said movable plate has been raised suffi- 
ciently, this upward movement of the movable plate being 
normally prevented in any container supporting another, 
stacked container, by this other container. 



: . A fastener for releasably latching a panel to a cabinet, 
comprising: 

a generally disc-like one-piece body; 

means integrally formed with said body for rotatably mount- 
ing said body to said panel; 

a lip integrally formed with said body and extending radially 
therefrom, said lip being rotatable into latching engage- 

I ment with said cabinet; and 

a positioning boss integrally formed with said body, said 



4,391,463 

DOOR CATCH 

Enrique Costa Bastart, Calle Mayor de Gracia, 213, Barcelona 

13, Spain 

Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,948 

Oaims priority, aoplication Spain, Jun. 16, 1980, 251422[U] 
Int. C\? E05C 17/32 
U.S. a. 292—263 8 Claims 

1. A catch for holding a door closed, comprising two com- 
plementary mutually engageable latching means, and respec- 
tive mounting means for mounting said latching means to 
respective ones of a door and an element adjacent the door so 
that the latching means are mutually engageable when the 
door is closed; a first one of said mounting means comprising 
an extendible link and means for articulating said link to the 
door or element, whereby in use the door is partially inwardly 
openable to a predetermined extent with the latching means 
mutually engaged; the link being displaceable between releas- 
able and locked configurations in which the latching means 
respectively are and are not mutually disengageable by open- 
ing the door; said first mounting means also including an actu- 
ating element which is displaceable between actuating and 
non-actuating configurations, in the former of which it is actu- 
able to displace the link to its releasable configuration, said 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



173 



actuating 
placeable 



element being constructed and arranged to be dis- 4,391,465 

in use to its actuating configuration from outside the ASSEMBLY SEPARATING A PASSENGER 

COMPARTMENT FROM AN ENGINE COMPARTMENT 
Renzo Piano, Paris, France, assignor to Fiat Auto S.p.A., Turin, 
Italy 

Filed May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,136 
Qaims priority, application Italy, May 20, 1980, 67794 A/80 
Int. C\? B62D 25/08 







U.S. a. 296—208 



4,391,464 

BUMPER FOR MOTOR-VEHICLES AND THE LIKE, 

MADE OF PLASTIC MATERIALS, AND HAVING ITS 

CROSS SECTION CLOSED BY A REAR REINFORaNG 

PART 
Maurizio Masotti, Saronno; Antonio Zentile, Paderno Dugnano, 
and Pasqualino Cau, Oggiono, all of Italy, assignors to Mon- 
tedison S.p.A., Milan, Italy 

Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,299 
Oaims priority, application Italy, Mar. 6, 1980, 20385 A/80 
Int. a.3 B60R 79/00 
U.S. a. 293—120 6 Qaims 







1. A bumper for a motor-vehicle having a box-shaped cross- 
section, comprising an elongated bumper member made of 
plastics material and having an open cross-section substantially 
shaped like a "C", said bumper member being closed in the rear 
by one removable reinforcing wall comprising a substantially 
rectilinear lamina having at each end one enlargement radiused 
to the plane of the lamina by means of a slanting plane and 
provided with transversal holes for a stable anchoring of the 
reinforcing wall to the bumper member and to the motor-vehi- 
cle, said reinforcing wall having along its longitudinal borders 
first coupling means which are engageable with corresponding 
second coupling means provided along the opposite longitudi- 
1 nal borders of the bumper member, said first and second cou- 
pling means providing a solid joining of the bumper member 
and reinforcing wall. 



8 Qaims 



N-i 




partially open door, and to be actuated by closure of the door, 
whereby the door is freely inwardly openable with disengage- 
ment of the latching means. 



8. An assembly of elements having the function of separating 
the passenger compartment from the engine compartment of a 
motor vehicle, characterized in comprising: 

a first panel-shaped element made of a first plastic material, 
having a width and a height which are substantially equal 
to the width of the bbdywork and to the distance between 
the floor and windshield of the passenger compartment, 
respectively, the said first element being provided with 
fastening means for connecting the said assembly to the 
said bodywork, 

a second element made of a second plastic material having 
mechanical characteristics different from those of the said 
first element, the said second element having a width 
substantially equal to that of the said bodywork, being 
provided with housings for the indicator and control 
instruments of the motor vehicle and being arranged to be 
fixed to the said first element in a stage prior to the stage 
of fastening of the complete assembly on the said body- 
work; and 

a third element, having U-shaped cross-sections and ar- 
ranged to be fixed to the said first element and to form 
together with this latter a closed channel communicating 
with at least one of the said chambers or channels formed 
by the union of the said first element with the said second 
element. 



4,391,466 
WATER CHAIR 
Peter A. Smith, 102 Evelyn St., Sylvania 2224, N.S.W., Austra- 
lia 

Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 231,970 

Int. Q.3 A47C 7/02. 7/36 

U.S. Q. 297-452 7 Qaims 




1. A chair for one or more persons, comprising a frame, a 
seating portion and a back supporting portion being defined by 



174 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



the frame, the chair back comprising a plurality of cushions 
arranged to be partially filled with water, a corresponding 
plurality of slings, each sling being attached along an upper 
margin of the back supporting portion; each cushion compris- 
ing a water impermeable bag carried within a sling, the bag 
being partially filled with water, the plurality of cushions being 
mounted one above the other to the back supporting portion of 
the frame, with the lowermost part of one cushion resting on 
the uppermost part of the cushion below it, whereby in use of 
the chair said cushion supports and adapts itself to the shape of 
the back of said one or more persons. 



4^91,467 
SYSTEM FOR PRODUONG A UNIFORM RUBBLE BED 

FOR IN SITU PROCESSES 
Terry R. Galloway, Berkeley, Calif., assignor to The United 
States of America as represented by the United States Depart- 
ment of Energy, Washington, D.C. 

FUed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 253,125 

Int. C1.3 E21C 41/10 

U.S. a. 299—2 14 Claims 




'-\7 



]. A method of producing in an underground formation a 
cavity filled with a bed of uniform rubblized material, compris- 
ing: 
forming a substantially vertical pilot hole in the underground 

formation; 
reaming the pilot hole into a cavity, thereby forming fines and 

rubblized material; and 
drawing a flushing fluid out of the cavity to carry away the 

fipes, leaving a bed of rubblized material in the cavity. 



I 4,391,468 

METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECOVERING 
MINERAL NODULES FROM THE OCEAN FLOOR 
Erwin D. Funk, Glen Fails, N.Y., assignor to Kamyr, Inc., Glen 
Falls, N.Y. 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 894,433, Apr. 7, 1978, 
abandoned. This application Sep. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 72,778 
Int C1.3 E02F 5/00 
U.S. a. 299—8 19 Qaims 

1. A method of recovering mineral nodules of a size range up 
to 8" nominal diameter deposited on the ocean floor which 
comprises the steps of 
pumping a continuous flow of ocean water along a first 
confined path extending through an exchange position 
within the vicinity of the ocean floor where the mineral 
nodules to be recovered are deposited from an ocean 
water inlet position out of said ocean vicinity and then 
upwardly to a discharge position on a surface vessel, 
confining ocean water within a second path within the afore- 
said ocean vicinity, 
continuously flowing ocean water in said second path by 



pumping the same at a pumping position spaced down- 
stream from an exchange position therein, 

continuously moving from the ocean floor to a separating 
position within said ocean vicinity a mixture containing 
deposited mineral nodules of up to 8" nominal diameter 
and smaller particles forming a part of the ocean floor on 
which the mineral nodules were deposited, 

continuously separating at said separating position said mix- 
ture so as to obtain a supply of separated mineral nodules 
up to 8" nominal diameter within ocean water separate 
from the remainder of said mixture which contains said 
smaller particles, 

returning said smaller particles in the remainder of said 
mixture to the ocean at a position within said ocean vicin- 
ity, 







js 



continuously feeding the supply of separated mineral nod- 
ules to said second path at a feeding position upstream 
from the exchange position therein, and 

continuously exchanging between the exchange positions 
within said first and second paths successive incremental 
volumes of ocean water and mineral nodules from said 
second path to said first path with comparable successive 
incremental volumes of ocean water from said first path to 
said second path whereby the mineral nodules within said 
second path are removed therefrom upstream of the 
pumping position in said second path and moved into said 
first path downstream from the pumping position in said 
first path for movement in said first path to said discharge 
position. 



431,469 
MINERAL MINING INSTALLATION 
Yavier Arsuaga, Madrid, Spain, assignor to Gewerkschaft Eisen- 
hutte Westfalia, Lunen, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

FUed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 313,010 
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 31, 
1980, 3041101 

Int. a.5 E21C 29/02: E21D 2i/04 
U.S. a. 299—11 31 Claims 

1. A mineral mining installation for use in a steeply-inclined 
longwall working, the installation comprising a ladder-shaped 
support frame and a plurality of roof support units, the support 
frame extending along the longwall working and having a pair 
of generally parallel longitudinal beams interconnected by a 
plurality of transverse beams, the roof support units being 
positioned between the longitudinal beams and being sup- 
ported on the transverse beams, each of the longitudinal beams 
comprising a plurality of beam sections pivotably connected 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



175 



together end-to-end, wherein the support frame comprises a 4,391,471 

plurality of detachably connected sub-frames, each of which GUIDES FOR MINERAL MINING MACHINES 

Alois Hauscbopp, Weme; Hans-Dieter Schneider, and Christoph 
Rassmann, both of Lunen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign- 
ors to Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte Westfalia, Lunen, Fed. Rep. 
of Germany 

FUed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,315 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 2. 
1980,3012884 

Int. C1.3 E21C i5/0% 
U.S. a. 299-43 31 Qaims 



11 


s ?o 




f 


. s 


' 


^^ 


' 20 


"-"" 




5 
~ 20 


16 


■^ 


15 


17 -' ' . 


'T 




n - . 

17 '■ ' 


T 


13 




^•^ 




' ..■ '151 « ** 


11 _ . 

17 . 


-^ 


n 
f 


^ 


■ 21 


23 — 




. 20 




A IV - " 


10 





comprises a respective transverse beam and a respective beam 
section of each of the longitudinal beams. 



4,391,470 

METHOD OF, AND APPARATUS FOR, WINNING 
MINERAL MATERIAL 
Hehnut Langenberg, Lunen; Hans-Theodor Grisebach, Unna, 
and Heinz Weinhold, Gelsenkirchen, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger- 
many, assignors to Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte Westfalia, 
Lunen, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,483 
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 14, 
1980,3009923 

Int. C1.3 E21C 27/24. 35/16 
U.S. a. 299-11 22 Claims 



U W 13 



? ' » It 13 II 13 , 




1. A method of winning mineral material from pillars left 
between laterally spaced roadways or galleries by the bord- 
and-pUlar mining process, the method comprising the steps of 
forming an arcuate longwall face which extends between the 
roadways across a plurality of pUlars, and of winning mineral 
material in a non-uniform manner from said pUlars using me- 
chanical winning means. 




3. A guide for mineral mining; said guide comprising means 
defining upper and lower chain passages for receiving a chain 
used to drive a plough, the defining means including spacers 
separating the upper and lower passages, angle plates with 
surfaces which form a lower support for the plough and covers 
which close off the upper passage and which are pivotable 
outwardly from the upper passage to permit across thereto, 
wherein the covers have flat upper surfaces which serve to 
contact and support a machine and a guide rail for the plough 
or machine is formed by projections on the covers delimiting 
the upper surfaces. 



4 391 472 
CORE ELIMINATOR FOR MINING, ROAD WORKING 

OR EARTH MOVING MACHINERY 
Claude B. Krekeler, Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to The Cincinnati 
Mine Machinery Company, Cincinnati, Ohio 

FUed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 197,892 

Int a.3 E21C 27/24. 35/18 

U.S. a. 299—86 21 Oaims 



Mt /7 




1. A core eliminator for mining, road working or earth 
moving machinery comprising at least a pair of rotatable, 
driven drums having a plurality of cutter bits disposed thereon, 
said drums being rotatably mounted on a boom strut located 
between said drums and between the kerfs formed by said 
drums and cutter bits as the machinery operates on the material 
being worked by it; at least one bit holder atUched to one of 
said drums and having a bit therein normally within the con- 
fmes of the kerf formed Iby that drum, said bit holder being 
movable on that drum to an extended position so ai to bring 
said bit therein beyond the kerf formed by that drum and 



176 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



towards the kerf formed by the other drum whereby to destroy 
the core which would otherwise form between said kerfs; and 
additional means to move said bit holder and bit therein to said 
extended position between said kerfs and to retract said bit 
holder and bit therein from said extended position, said addi- 
tional means comprising a cam. 



4^91,473 
LINEAR BEARING UNIT 

Hiroshi Teramachi, 34-8, Higashi-Tamagawa 2-chome, Seta- 
gay a-ku, Tokyo, Japan (158) 

FUed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,662 

Int. a.3 F16C 29/06 

U.S. Q. 308—6 C 8 Claims 




38 5? 



and extending into the counterbore, said seal housing 
having an interior dynamic O-ring sealing the housing to 




the bearing sleeve and an exterior static O-ring sealing the 
housing to the counterbore. 



1. A linear bearing unit essentially comprising a bearing case 
having a lower open end and four non-loading ball holes hav- 
ing the substantially same inner diameter as the ball diameter, 
side covers firmly secured to both end faces of said bearing 
case, a track table inserted through a cylindrical inner recess of 
the bearing case and a number of balls arranged in line one 
after another through four longitudinally extending circular 
hollow space between semi-circular concave track grooves on 
the cylindrical inner recess of the bearing case and another 
corresponding concave track grooves on the track table as 
well as through the four non-loading ball holes in the bearing 
case, said longitudinally extending circular hollow spaces 
being in communication with the non-loading ball holes via 
U-shaped concave portions formed on both the side covers, 
wherein the bearing case has annular projections at both the 
end faces thereof which are located between the non-loading 
ball holes and the concave track grooves on the cylindrical 
inner recess and further it has a longitudinally extending deep 
slit at one side thereof so as to prestress or preload some of the 
concave track grooves on the cylindrical inner recess, while 
the side covers contain annular grooves corresponding to said 
annular projection, U-shaped concave portions and ball guide 
tongue portions in communication with the longitudinally 
extending circular hollow space at the innermost end of said 
U-shaijed concave portions. 



4,391,475 
COLUMN INSERT BEARING HOUSING 
Arthur C. Reph, Cherryville, Pa., assignor to IngersoU-Rand 
Company, Woodcliff Lake, N.J. 

FUed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,964 

Int. CI.3 F16C 23/02 

U.S. a. 384—226 7 Qaims 






4,391,474 

THRUST SHAFT SEAL WITH SLIDABLY MOUNTED 

BEARING SLEEVE 

Leonard J. Martini, 2801 Ocean Front Walk, F, San Diego, 

Calif. 92109 

FUed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,334 
Int. a.3 F16J 15/26. 15/56; F16C 33/74 
U.S. a. 384—152 8 Oaims 

1. A seal for a thrust shaft in a body wherein the body has a 
bore and a counterbore, comprising: 
a bearing sleeve slidably mounted on the shaft, said bearing 
sleeve having a static O-ring which seals the interior of the 
sleeve to the shaft and a flange which extends into the 
counterbore; 
means radially flxing the bearing sleeve to the shaft; 
a ring-shaped seal housing mounted about the bearing sleeve 




1. A column and bearing assembly comprising: 

a. a column having a side with an opening and an inside 
surface; 

b. a shaft in the column; and 

c. a guide bearing means disposed in the column to support 
the shaft, the guide bearing means comprising: 

(1) a removable housing having a size enabling insertion 
through the opening in the column and extending into 
the column, the housing having a first surface contact- 
ing the inside surface of the column; 

(2) a wear surface for enclosing and supporting the shaft; 
and 

(3) a locking means for attaching and receiving the guide 
bearing means within the opening to the column. 



JULY 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



177 



ir 43M76 

ROLLER BEARING 
Richard Negele, Esslingen, and Dieter Pfeifle, FUderstadt, both 
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to SKF KugeUagerfab- 
riken GmbH, Schweinfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

FUed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,641 
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 9, 
1979, 2932290 

Int. C1.3 F16C 33/46 
U.S. a. 308—207 R 5 Qaims 




-13 




ally supported by the inner bearing race by ball bearings so that 
as the pinion gear rotates it causes the upper works to rotate 
along with the outer race relative to the inner race, an arcuate 
beam slidably mounted on the rotatable bed for engagement 
with the outer bearing race, means for moving the arcuate 
beam into and out of engagement with the outer race, a clamp- 
ing latch pivotably mounted on the rotatable bed so that its one 
end engages the outer bearing race on the side of the outer race 
diametrically opposite the arcuate beam, said arcuate beam and 
clamping latch providing engagement with the outer race to 
counteract tipping moments of the upper works w^iile at the 
same time providing for quick engagement and disengagement 
with the outer race. i i 



4,391,477 
QUICK RELEASE MOUNTING FOR A TURNTABLE 
BEARING 
James G. Morrow, Sr., Manitowoc, Wis., assignor to The Mani- 
towoc Company, Inc., Manitowoc, Wis. 

Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,883 

Int. Q.J F16C 19/10 

U.S. Q. 308—221 9 Qaims 



1. A quick release mounting for a turntable bearing of a load 
handling device or the like comprising, in combination, upper 
works carried by a rotatable bed, arcuate plates fixedly secured 
to the bottom of the rotatable bed, a rotatable outer bearing 
race in engagement with the arcuate plates and providing 
support fcM- the rotatable bed and upper works, a stationary 
inner bearing race fixed to a lower works and having gear teeth 
along its iimer circumference, a rotatable pinion gear which 
engages said gear teeth, said outer bearing race being rotation- 



4,391,478 
DRAWER SEAL 
Hans C. Grunert, Adelberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to 
Sybron Corporation, Rochester, N.Y. 

Filed May 14, 1980, Ser. No. 149,573 

Int. Q.' A47B 77/00, 87/00, 88/00 

U.S. Q. 312—320 5 Qaims 



1. In a rolling bearing with rolling means guided in a cage 
between inner and outer bearing rings, wherein the cage has a 
radially extending annular projection on a lateral ring, the 
projection extending into a first annular groove of one of the 
bearing rings for restraining the cage in one axial direction, the 
improvement comprising a second annular groove on the side 
of said one bearing ring opposite to said first annular groove, 
said first groove receiving said radial projection of said cage, 
and a separately formed restraining element inserted in said 
groove, said restraining ring being positioned to axially restrain 
said cage with respect to said one of said bearing rings in the 
axial direction opposite said one axial direction, said one bear- 
ing ring having a partial conical shape over which said projec- 
tion may be pushed to enable insertion of said cage therein to 
facilitate assembly of said cage in said one bearing ring. 




15-^3' 14 32 



1. In a storage unit comprising a case, a plurality of drawers 
arranged in the case in a vertically stacked array, each drawer 
having a handle for moving the drawer into and out of the case 
including a first handle attached to a first drawer and a second 
handle attached to a second drawer stacked immediately 
below the first, an improved system for sealing between and 
about the vertically stacked drawers comprising: 

(a) each of said handles extending substantially across the 
full width of its associated drawer and each handle having 
an upper portion with a relatively fiat upper surface and a 
lower portion; 

(b) a flexible seal member carried by and depending from the 
lower f>ortion of said first handle, said sealing member 
being adapted to contact the flat upper surface of said 
second handle along substantially the full width of said 
second handle when the drawers associated with said first 
and second handles are closed; and 

(c) sealing means on said cabinet extending about the periph- 
ery of said vertically stacked array of drawers, said sealing 
means contacting the upper portion of the upper-most 
handle in said drawer array, the lower portion of the 
lower-most handle in said drawer array and the side edges 
of each handle in said drawer array. 



4,391,479 
MINIATURE MATRIX PROGRAMMING BOARD 
Kenneth R. Wessel, White Plains, N.Y., assignor to Sealectro 
Corporation, Mamaroneck, N.Y. 

Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,429 - 
Int. Q.3 HOIR 29/00 
U.S. Q. 339—18 C 15 Qaims 

1. A matrix connector for selectively connecting a cross bar 
in a first series of parallel bars with a similar cross bar in a 
second series of parallel bars comprising: 
(a) an insulator block for supporting both series of parallel 
bars, formed with a plurality of spaced cylindrical aper- 



178 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



tures connecting two planar surfaces and arranged in two 
orthogonal lines; 

(b) a first series of elongated conductive bars in parallel 
array, each bar in the first series including a strip of con- 
ductive material formed with alternate ridges and grooves 
along its longitudinal axis and including a plurality of 
depending cylindrical sockets having resilient clamping 
walls, said sockets positioned in one end of the cylindrical 
apertures in the insulator block; 

(c) a second series of elongated conductive bars also in 
parallel array but perpendicular to the first series, each bar 
in the second series including a strip of conductive mate- 

I rial formed with alternate ridges and grooves along its 
longitudinal axis and including a plurality of depending 
cylindrical sockets having resilient clamping walls, said 
sockets positioned in the other end of the cylindrical 

I apertures in the insulator block; 

(d) a first cover plate secured to one side of the insulator 
block for covering one series of cross bars, said cover 
plate formed with a plurality of apertures positioned in 
alignment with the apertures in the insulator block for the 

' insertion of connecting pins; 

(e) a second cover plate secured to the other side of the 
I insulator block for covering the second series of cross 

bars, said second cover plate formed with a plurality of 
apertures positioned in alignment with the apertures in the 



4^91,480 
ELECTRICAL TERMINAL 
NabU L. Mina, RoseUe, U., assignor to Appleton Electric Com- 
pany, Chicago, ni. 

FUed Not. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,884 

Int a.J HOIR n/QO 

U.S. a. 339—32 R 1 Claim 





;iM^^' 



-60A 



'64 



1. In combination with an explosionproof electrical recepta- 
cle and switch, said receptacle and switch including a faceplate 
with a first slot and a second slot therein, one of said slots 
arranged to receive a male blade contact in either of two 
mutually perpendicular orientations; an improved terminal 
block subassembly behind said faceplate and said one slot, 
comprising: 
a terminal block having a front side and a rear side, an elon- 
gate and essentially singular piece of electrically conduc- 
tive metal captivated partially within said terminal block 
and having a first end protruding from said terminal block 
front side and a second end protruding from said terminal 
block rear side, 
said first end being slotted longitudinally in two mutually 
perpendicular planes for receiving said male blade contact 
in either of said two orientations, 
said second end being a switch contact, 
and means between said first end and said second end for 
holding said terminal in said terminal block. 



insulator block for the insertion of connecting pins, said 
second cover plate further including termination holes, 
disposed adjacent the side edges thereof, said termination 
holes being aligned with apertures in said insulator block 
having only one socket of a single conductive bar therein, 
said termination holes for the insertion of termination pins, 
with the outer surface of said second cover plate further 
including a plurality of grooves, each groove being associ- 
ated with a termination hole and being contiguous there- 
with, each said groove extending away from the associ- 
ated termination hole to the side edge of said second cover 
plate; 

(0 a plurality of conducting connecting pins for insertion 
through the apertures in either cover plate to make 
contact with a socket in the first series of bars and a socket 
in the second series of bars; and 

(g) a plurality of termination pins being generally L-shaped 
in configuration having first and second legs disposed in 
perpendicular relationship, with the diameter of said L- 
shaped termination pins substantially conforming to the 
depth of said grooves in said second cover plate wherein 
one leg of said L-shaped termination pin is receivable in a 
termination hole making electrical contact with one 
socket of a single conductive bar and with the other leg of 
said termination pin being receivable in the associated 
groove in such a manner to be flush with the planar outer 
surface of said second cover plate. 



4,391,481 
CHILD-PROOF ELECTRICAL PLUG SHEATH 
Theodore A. Golden, 755 W. Big Beaver Rd., Suite 211, Troy, 
Mich. 48084 

FUed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,198 

Int. Q\? HOIR li/44 

U.S. a. 339—42 1 Claim 




1. A child-proof protective sheath for a conventional electri- 
cal plug of the type having a plug body with an electrical wire 
extending into and connected within the body, and having 
electrical contact prongs extending from the body for insertion 
within corresponding openings formed in a wall-type recepta- 
cle, comprising: 

a thin wall, generally tubular shaped member, formed of a 
resilient, rubber-like material, and being of a size to closely 
surround and engage the plug body adjacent the prongs 
for mounting upon the plug body, and for axially extend- 
ing from the plug body for substantially the full length of 
the prongs to a free end, so as to encircle the prongs and 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



179 



I 



form a protective wall which is spaced radially outwardly 
of the prongs; 

said member being resiliently collapsable and extendable in 
its axial direction up>on endwise pressure and release of 
endwise pressure, respectively, so that during the time 
that the plug prongs are inserted within and removed from 
the receptacle openings, the member completely encircles 
the space between the plug and receptacle to prevent 
child access to exposed portions of the prongs, and simul- 
taneously the axial pressure between the contacting por- 
tion of the receptacle and the free end of the member 
results in endwise collapsing of the member during inser- 
tion of the prongs and the release of said pressure, during 
removal of the prongs from the openings, results in the 
member resiliently extending to its normal length, and the 
free end portion of said member at the prongs, being 
sufficiently resilient to spread radially outwardly in re- 
sponse to the pressure of contacting the receptacle during 
insertion of the prongs within the openings for thereby 
producing the axial collapse in length in the member; 

said member including a roughly bell-shaped end to com- 
pletely receive the plug body, and said bell-shaped end 
having a central opening through which the plug electri- 
cal wire extends, and said bell-shaped end tightly fits 
around and against the plug body for frictionally securing 
the member upon the plug body; and 

said member including a plurality of separate, petal-like 
sections each having opposed generally straight edges 
connected by a curved end, the edges of each petal-like 
section overlapping the edges of adjacent sections, and 
said petal-like sections radially bending and spreading 
during contact with the receptacle for forming a closed 
wall. 



4,391,482 

SPRING STRIPS FOR CONNECTIONS BETWEEN 
PRINTED aRCUTT BOARD 
Franz Czeschka, Talstrasse 7, Rechberghausen, Fed. Rep. of 
Germany (D7324) 

FUed Apr. 23, 1979, Ser. No. 32,126 
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Apr. 21, 1978, 
4318/78 

I Int. a.3 HOIR 11/22 

U.S. a. 339—59 M 3 Qaims 




said insulating retention strip (6) between each of the 
contact springs (1), forming chambers (11). 



4,391,483 

SEALING SLEEVE FOR USE WTTH ELECTRICAL 

CONNECTORS 

Dominique E. Desourteaux, Epemon, France, assignor to So- 

ciete Anonyme Francelco, Suresnes, France 

FUed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,493 
Claims priority, application France, Mar. 28, 1980, 80 06963 
Int. a.3 HOIR 4/00 
U.S. a. 339—94 R 3 Qaims 




1. An improved sealing system for use with cooperating 
electrical connectors for placing two cables in contact, each of 
said cables having an insulator sheath and being inserted in a 
lodging in one of said connectors with a resulting space be- 
tween the outer diameter of said insulator sheath and the inner 
diameter of said electrical connector, said sealing system com- 
prising: 

(a) an electrical contact having a contact element and a tail 
portion, said tail portion being adapted to be crimped onto 
one of said cables; 

(b) a flexible sealing sleeve molded onto the tail portion of 
said electrical contact, said flexible sealing sleeve being in 
the form of a cylindrical grommet with a concentric ori- 
fice therein, the outer diameter of said grommet being 
slightly less than the inner diameter of said lodging, and 
the diameter of said orifice being slightly greater than the 
outer diameter of said insulator sheath, wherein annular 
grooves encircle the outer peripheral surfaces of said 
grommet and said orifice, said sealing sleeve being 
adapted to seal the said space; 

(c) said tail portion comprising means for further securing 
said sealing sleeve thereon. 



4,391,484 
BOX CONNECTOR 
WUhelmus T. M. Foederer, Best, Netherlands, assignor to E. I. 
Du Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del. 

Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,881 
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Jun. 26, 1980, 
8003708 

Int. a.3 HOIR U/i8 
U.S. a. 339— 97 P 6 Qaims 



1. A spring strip for making electrically conducting, vibra- 
tion-stable and gasproof connections between the printed back 
wall wiring of through-contacted printed circuit boards, and 
the actual contact springs, the latter being combined via an 
insulating mount with mutual spacing to strips of at least one 
row, and these in turn being surrounded by a housing (10) 
placed thereon, characterized in that the individual strips con- 
sisting of contact springs (1) and insulating retention strip (6) 
clad together; 
said insulating strip (6) having lines of weakness formed 
between pairs of adjacent contact springs, whereby the 
strip can be broken off at any desired number of contact 
springs; 
said housing (10) having cross pieces (14) that bear against 




1. A box connector having insulation piercing contacts, 
characterized by a four side wall box made of electrically 
conductive sheet material, two corresponding pairs of slots in 
opposite side walls containing insulation piercing contacts said 
slots extending from the top of the box over a predetermined 



180 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



length towards the bottom of said box, each pair of slots termi- 
nating in a same level but at a different level with respect to the 
other pair of slots, a pair of connecting strips formed adjacent 
the bottom edge of said box in opposite side walls, each said 
strip initially converging and subsequently extending down- 
wardly and adjacent to each other to form a means for mount- 
ing in a printed circuit board hole. 



function of a control voltage, wherein the intensity of the 
modulating electrical field created by the electrodes increases 
along said adjacent portions on moving away from the centres 



' 4,391,485 

IN-LINE FUSE HOLDER FOR MINIATURE PLUG-IN 
I FUSE 

Aagelo Urani, St. Louis, Mo., assignor to McGraw-Edison Com- 
pany, Rolling Meadows, III. 

FUed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,893 

Int. a.3 HOIR 13/115. 19/48 

U,S. a. 339—191 S 10 Claims 




4,391,486 

ELECTRICALLY CONTROLLED ELECTRO-OPTICAL 

SWITCH AND INTEGRATED OPTICAL CIRCUTT 

INCORPORATING SUCH A SWITCH 

Michel Papuchon, and Claude Puech, both of Paris, France, 

assignors to Thomson-CSF, Paris, France 

Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,616 
Qaims priority, application France, Sep. 6, 1979, 79 22297 
Int a.3 G02B 5/14 
U^. a. 350— %.14 8 Qaims 

1. An electrically controlled electro-optical switch incorpo- 
rating two wave guides formed in an electro-optical material 
and electrodes producing an electrical field for modulating the 
velocity of the optical radiation propagated by said guides into 
adjacent portions in order to effect an energy transfer as a 




BIAS SOURCE 3 



thereof, the electrical field orientations on either side of said 
centres being the same in one switching state and reversed in 
the other switching state. 



4,391,487 
OPTICAL HBER CENTERING DEVICE 
Paul Melman, Newton, and W. John Carlsen, Boston, both of 
Mass., assignors to GTE Laboratories Incorporated, Wal- 
tham, Mass. 

FUed Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 223,192 

Int. C\? G02B 5/14 

U.S. a. 350—96.20 11 Qaims 



1. An in-line fuse holder for receiving a miniature, plug-in 
fuse having a fusible element coupled between a pair of juxta- 
posed, laterally spaced co-planar, parallel generally flat fuse 
terminals, said in-line fuse holder including in combination: 
a casing of insulative material having rigid wall surfaces, two 
clip assemblies mounted within said casing, each for en- 
gaging one of said flat fuse terminals of said plug-in fuse, 
each said clip assembly including first clip means of elec- 
trically conductive material, said first clip means being 
generally U shaped with legs of the U forming blades 
between which said flat fuse terminals are to be received, 
second clip means of resilient material, said second clip 
means being generally U shap)ed with the legs of the U 
forming blades and dimensioned for cooperating engage- 
ment with said first clip means in a tightly fitting overlying 
relationship with respect thereto, said second clip means 
including a tang extending outwardly from the surface of 
each of said blades of said second clip means for engage- 
ment with said rigid wall surfaces of said insulative casing, 
said tang and said rigid wall surfaces cooperating to in- 
crease the gripping force provided by said blades of said 
second clip means against the blades of said first clip 
means thereby to urge said blades of said first clip means 
into low electrical resistance contacting engagement with 
said fuse terminals and means extending from said first clip 
means for permanent external in-line electrical connection 
of said fuse holder. 




1. An optical fiber centering device comprising 

(a) fiber receiving means having three sections, wherein each 
of said three sections is substantially identical to each other, 
and wherein each of said sections has a uniform cross-sec- 
tional configuration at right angles along a major portion of 
its length forming a boundary of fixed perimeter, and 

(b) a receiving member having an axial centrosymmetric sur- 
face of revolution with respect to a fixed axis, said member 
having a cylindrical, concentric recess therewithin for hold- 
ing said sections in assembled relationship, wherein said 
boundary of one of said sections includes a first portion 
adapted to mate with a matable portion of said boundary of 
a second of said sections, said boundary of said one of said 
sections includes a second portion adapted to mate with a 
matable portion of said boundary of a third of said sections, 
said boundary of said one of said sections includes a third 
portion contiguous to said first portion and said second 
portion for engaging an optical fiber along said length, and 
said boundary of said one of said sections includes a fourth 
portion contiguous to said first portion and said second 
portion but not to said third portion for engaging the cylin- 
drical wall defined by said concentric recess, wherein said 
recess terminates with a planar wall perpendicular to said 
axis, and wherein said fourth portion engages said cylindri- 
cal wall along a fraction of said fourth portion, 

said device being adapted to hold an optical fiber along said 
axis. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



181 



II 4,391,488 

MOUNT DEVICE OF AN INTERCHANGEABLE LENS 
Sunao Ishizaka, and Toshiaki Hozumi, both of Tokyo, Japan, 
assignors to Nippon Kogaku K.K., Tokyo, Japan 
Filed Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 177,356 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 11, 1979, 54/115752 
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 9, 1999, 
has been disclaimed. 
Int. a.3 G02B 7/02; G03B 7/20 
U.S. Q. 350—257 9 Qaims 




1 1 4,391,489 

LIQUID CRYSTAL MATERIALS CONTAINING 
PLEOCHROIC ANTHRAQUINONE DYES 
Kenneth J. Harrison, Malvern Link; Edward P. Raynes, Mal- 
vern; Frances C. Saunders, Malvern Wells, and David J. 
Thompson, Whitefield, all of England, assignors to The Secre- 
tary of State for Defence in Her Britannic Majesty's Govern- 
ment of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern 
Ireland, London, England 

Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,123 
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 29, 1980, 
8024761 

Int. Q.3 G02F 1/13; C09K 3/U 
U.S. Q. 350—349 25 Qaims 

1. A material suitable for a guest-host liquid crystal device 
comprising a solution of a liquid crystal material and a pleo- 
chroic dye wherein the pleochroic dye comprises at least one 
compound having a formula: 




NHR 



wherein R is H or lower alkyl; and each of Ri and R2 indepen- 
dently represents alkyl containing between 1 and 10 carbon 
atoms. 



4,391,490 
INTERFACE FOR PROXIMITY COUPLED 
ELEp'RO-OPTIC DEVICES 
David H. Hartke, Los Angeles, Calif., assignor to Xerox Corpo- 
ration, Stamford, Conn. 

Filed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,478 

Int. Q.3 G02F 1/03 

U.S. Q. 350—356 6 Qaims 



1. In a lens system comprising an interchangeable lens hav- 
ing a mount mountable on a camera having an electric circuit 
associated with exposure control and a displaceable actuating 
member for correcting said electric circuit so as to be accom- 
modated to the focal length of the interchangeable lens 
mounted, and a conversion lens having an optical system for 
converting the focal length of said interchangeable lens and 
mountable between said interchangeable lens and the camera, 
the improvement comprising: 
a signal member provided on said interchangeable lens pro- 
jectedly from one end of said mount and engageable with 
said actuating member so as to close said displacement 
when said interchangeable lens is mounted on the camera 
through said mount, said signal member having an engag- 
ing end portion engageable with said actuating member, 
said engaging end portion lying at a position determined 
relative to said mount for displacing said actuating mem- 
ber by an amount proportional to the logarithm of the 
focal length of said interchangeable lens; and 
a transmission member provided on said conversion lens and 
positioned between said signal member and said actuating 
member when said conversion lens is mounted, said trans- 
mission member being slidable by said signal member by 
an amount corresponding to the position of said engaging 
end portion and displacing said actuating member by an 
amount proportional to the logarithm of said focal length 
converted in response to said sliding and the mounting of 
said conversion lens onto the camera. 




/ 



1. In an electro-optic device including an electro-optic ele- 
ment, a plurality of electrodes for applying encoded data sam- 
ples, and means for urging the plurality of electrodes toward a 
surface of the electro-optic element, the improvement compris- 
ing: 
a plurality of conductors applied to said surface of said 
electro-optic element, said conductors being aligned in 
substantially the same direction as said electrodes. 



4,391,491 
PASSIVE ELECTRO-OPTIC DISPLAY CELL AND 
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING THEREOF 
William G. Freer, Saint-Blaise, Switzerland; John C. Vamey, 
Staines, England, and John H. Williamson, Neuchatel, Swit- 
zerland, assignors to Ebauches Electroniques, S.A., Canton of 
Neuchatel, Switzerland 

Filed Jun. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 160,748 

Int. Q.3 G02F 1/13 

U.S. Q. 350—341 10 Qaims 




1. A passive electro-optic display cell comprising two glass 
plates, a frame positioned between the plates and by which the 
plates are maintained at a fixed spacing one from the other to 
provide an enclosed space surrounded by said frame, a liquid 



Km q.G.— 7 



182 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



crystal imprisoned within said space, control electrodes re- 
spectively carried by said plates on the facing inner sides 
thereof and, on the inner side of each electrode, an alignment 
layer for alignment of the molecules of an active constituent of 
said liquid crystal, said frame and said alignment layers being 
composed of polymerizable substances said substances having 
been polymerized simultaneously to produce interpolymeriza- 
tion thereof resulting in close chemical bonding between said 
frame and said alignment layers which thus together form a 
wall which completely encloses the liquid crystal and shelters 
it from external influences. 



4,391,492 

THERMALLY ADDRESSED CHOLESTERIC-SMECTIC 

LIQUID CRYSTAL DEVICE 

Sun Lu, San Jose, and David B. Chung, Santa Clara, both of 
Calif., assignors to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing 
Company, St. Paul, Minn. 

I Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,247 

I Int. a.3 G02F 1/13 

MS. a. 350—351 134 Claims 



COLUMN ELECTRODES 



TOPSUBSTR/ffE 12 1 



LC MATERIAL 1 1 




X BOTTOM 
7 SUBSTRATE 13 



•ROW HEATING ELECTRODES 



the second focusing means while maintaining the first 
focusing means at a standstill; and 
(c) the third step of providing an attachment lens having 
length fA in front of said zoom lens system having a lateral 
magnification y3, and making the lateral magnification of 
the composite lens system of said attachment lens and the 




m 



17 



di6 de dzo d22 dK d26 ds dx 

diS dl7,dl9'd21(*3(d25<d21(d29 rf,, 



dii 




ne rn no ^2 



zoom lens zero without moving a lens group in the zoom 

lens system, 
whereby the product fAx/3 of said lateral magnification (i and 
the focal length fA of the attachment lens is longer than the 
focal length at the telephotographic end of the zoom lens 
system. 



4,391,494 

APPARATUS FOR PROJECTING A SERIES OF IMAGES 

ONTO DIES OF A SEMICONDUCTOR WAFER 

Ronald S. Hershel, Albany, Oreg., assignor to General Signal 
Corporation, Stamford, Conn. 

Continuation of Ser. No. 264,171, May 15, 1981, abandoned. 

This application Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,536 

Int. a.3 G02B 17/08 

U.S. a. 350—442 16 Qaims 



1. A thermally addressed visual device which provides a 
dark image against a lighter background comprising: 

A liquid crystal medium including at least one liquid crystal 
I cholesteric compound mixed with at least one pleochroic 
dye of high order parameter and having dielectric anisot- 
ropy, said medium being thermally sensitive and having a 
transition between at least two thermal phases, an upper 
thermal phase being a cholesteric phase and a lower ther- 
mal phase being a smectic phase, said medium having two 
possible light modulating states in said smectic phase, a 
first light state being normally substantially light absorb- 
ing and a second light state being substantially transpar- 
ent; and means to apply a sensitizing voltage to address 
portions of said medium to develop said second light 
transparent state when said medium passes rapidly into 
said smectic phase, the remaining portions of said medium 
developing said first substantially light absorbing state. 





4,391,493 

METHOD TO INCREASE FOCAL DISTANCE AT 

TELEPHOTOGRAPHIC SIDE OF A ZOOM LENS 

SYSTEM 

Akira Tajima, Kawasaki, and Sadahiko Tsuji, Yokohama, both 

of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan 

Filed NoY. 15, 1976, Ser. No. 741,789 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 18, 1975, 50/138500 
Int. C\? G02B 15/02, 15/16 
U.S. a. 350—422 10 Qaims 

1. A method of increasing the focal length at the telephoto- 
graphic end of a zoom lens sytem, having first focusing means 
and second focusing means, and comprising the following 
steps: 

(a) the step of making the lateral magnification of a zoom 
lens system zero with said first focusing means; 

(b) the second step of bringing the lateral magnification of 
the zoom lens from zero to a definite value j3 by activating 



1. A unit magnification, achromatic, anastigmatic optical 
projection system of the catadioptric type particularly suited 
for use in microlithography, said projection system compris- 
ing: 

a concave, spherical reflecting surface having an optical axis 
and a first center of curvature; 

an achromatic lens positioned between said reflecting sur- 
face and said first center of curvature, said achromatic 
lens comprising a meniscus lens made from a light flint 
glass, said meniscus lens having a first convex surface 
facing said reflecting surface, said first convex surface 
having a second center of curvature on the opposite side 
of said first center of curvature from said meniscus lens, 
said meniscus lens also having a concave surface facing 
away from said reflecting surface, said concave surface 
having a third center of curvature on the same side of said 
first center of curvature as said meniscus lens; 

said achromatic lens also comprising a plano-convex lens 
made from a dense flint glass, said plano-convex lens 
having a second convex surface facing said concave sur- 
face, said second convex surface having a fourth center of 
curvature on the same side of said first center of curvature 
as said plano-convex lens, said plano-convex lens also 
having a first flat surface away from said reflecting sur- 
face, said first flat surface being positioned closer to said 
second convex surface than either of said third and fourth 
centers of curvature; and 



JULY 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



183 



said a chromatic lens further comprising first and second 
prisms for coupling light to and from separate fields on 
said first flat surface, said prisms being made from a dense 
crown glass and having an optical path length such that 
the image and object planes of the projection system are 
on the opposite side of said second center -of curvature 
from said first flat surface, each of said prisms also com- 
prising a second flat surface facing one of said image and 
object planes, said second flat surfaces being positioned 
closer to said first center of curvature than either of said 
third and fourth centers of curvature. 



4,391,496 

ADJUSTMENT DEVICE FOR A PANCRATIC OBJECTIVE 

OF A STEREOMICROSCOPE 

Albert Schilling, Aalen, and Wolfgang Schob, Oberkochen, both 
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Carl Zeiss-Stiftung, 
Oberkochen, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,194 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 12, 
1980, 8003643[U] 

Int. a.3 G02B 15/16 
U.S. a. 350—519 4 Qaims 



4,391,495 
IMAGE DISPLAY SYSTEM 
Anthony R. Mazurkewitz, Middlevillage, N.Y., assignor to The 
Austin Company, Qeveland, Ohio 

Filed Jun. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,622 

Int. a.3 G02B 3/08 

U.S. Q. 350—452 10 Qaims 







1. An optical system for a visual display comprising: 

means for projecting a visual image along a central axis; 

a first fresnel lens for receiving said visual image, said first 
fresnel lens having fresnel grooves facing said means for 
projecting; 

second and third fresnel lenses forming a liquid doublet first 
fresnel lens pair disposed in front of said first fresnel lens, 
said first fresnel lens pair having fresnel grooves facing 
each other and a liquid disposed therebetween, said liquid 
having predetermined indexes of refraction and dispersion 
for color correcting the system; 

fourth and fifth fresnel lenses forming a second fresnel lens 
pair disposed in front of said first fresnel lens pair, said 
second fresnel lens pair having fresnel grooves facing each 
other; 

said first, second, third, fourth and fifth fresnel lens being 
centered on said central axis and extending perpendicular 
thereto; 

said fresnel grooves being comprised of annular facets hav- 
ing a slope determined by dz/dr where: 



2 = 



cA 



1 -h N 1 - (/: -I- 1) cV 



-I- £>/^ -I- £/* -I- Fr* -I- Gr^^ 



and C equals the curvature of said annular facets; r equals the 
radical position of said facets; K equals a conic constant 
determined by the physical characteristics of said lenses; 
and D, E, F and G are aspheric terms which determine the 
aspheric characteristics of said lenses. 




1. An adjustment device for pancratic objectives, particu- 
larly for stereomicroscopes, comprising: 

first and second lens group holders, said first and second 
holders being displaceable differing amounts in the same 
direction along the optical axis of said objectives; 

a variable-length connecting element coupling said first and 
second holders, said connecting element including a first 
arm pivotally joined to said first holder, a second arm 
pivotally joined to said second holder, said first and sec- 
ond arms being pivotally joined to each other to form a 
pivot point; 

cam follower means disposed at said pivot point of said arms; 

external cam means disposed for engagement with said cam 
follower means; 

means for biasing said first and second holders together and 
to bias said cam follower means into engagement with said 
cam means; and 

means for displacing at least one of said first and second 
holders along said optical axis. 



4,391,497 
APERTURE STOP FOR MICROSCOPE CONDENSERS 

Michio Imada, Kodaira, and Masayuki Naito, Mitaka, both of 
Japan, assignors to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,949 
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 7, 1979, 54- 
168762[U] 

Int. Q.3 G02B 21/08 
U.S. Q. 350—523 2 Qaii;|p 




1. A microscope assembly including a plurality of objectives 
of different magnification, a condensor, and an aperture stop 
mounted to a lower part of said miqroscope condensor and 
comprising a fixed member having an index mark on the outer 
surface thereof and having a rotatable stop ring, each of said 
plurality of objectives having a unique color marking thereon, 
each different from the other and indicative of the respective 



184 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



magnifications thereof, said rotatable stop ring of said aperture 
stop being provided with a plurality of unique color markings 
thereon equal in number to the number of the plurality of 
objectives and fixed in predetermined locations on said stop 
ring one of each of the unique color markings on said stop ring 
being identical in color marking to the unique color marking of 
one of the objectives, whereby when a particular objective 
having a particular unique color marking is in use, and said 
stop ring is positioned such that an identical one of said unique 
color markings on said stop ring is opposite the index mark, 
that the aperture diameter of said aperture stop corresponds to 
the numerical aperture of the particular objective in use. 



three-dimensional directions relative to the other of said mod- 
ules, said modules having walls constructed of unidirectional 



4,391,498 
SPECTACLE FRAME 
Roy H. Rengstorff, 4844 Austin Rd., Aberdeen Proving Ground, 
Md. 21010 

Filed Jul. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 59,923 
Int. a.3 G02C 5/14. 5/22 
U.S. a. 351—121 




29 



4 



y ,N^ 'v^. A^ 



X 



26 



26 




__K<i^ 



light-transmitting material and selectively illuminating certain 
46 Claims °^ ^^'*^ modules to thereby form a three-dimensional image. 




4,391,500 
CAMERA WITH EXPOSURE MEASURING SYSTEM 
Tokuichi Tsunekawa, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Canon 
Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan 

Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,428 
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 25, 1980, 55-165550; 
Nov. 25, 1980, 55-165551; Nov. 25, 1980, 55-165552; Nov. 25, 
1980, 55-165559; Nov. 25, 1980, 55-165560; Feb. 9, 1981, 
56-17819 

Int. a.3 G03B 7/081, 17/20 
U.S. a. 354—31 13 Qaims 



1. An eye protective frame comprising: 

a. rim means defining a pair of spaced, side-by-side viewing 
windows and a bridge therebetween, said bridge adapted 
to engage the face of a wearer; 

b. temple yoke support means attached to said rim means 
both above and below said viewing windows and inboard 
of the outer extremities of said rim means opposite said 
bridge a distance sufficient to provide for close proximity 
to the temple contour of the wearer's head upon support 
of said rim means in position on the wearer's face; and 

c. securing means connected to said temple yoke support 
means for securing the frame to the wearer with said 
temple yoke support means in close proximity to the 
temple contour of the wearer's head. 



I 4,391,499 

IMAGE PROJECTOR 
William C. Whitlock, III, 1119 Grayland St., Greensboro, N.C. 

27408 

Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,235 

Int. a.i G03B 21/00 

U.S. a. 353—122 18 Qaims 

1. An image projector for displaying three-dimensional 
forms comprising: a plurality of three-dimensional modules, at 
least one of said modules aligned in each of the three-dimen- 
sional directions relative to the other of said modules, said 
modules being constructed of unidirectional light-transmitting 
material, illuminating means, said illuminating means being 
positioned within said modules, transmission means, said trans- 
mission means for directing energy to said illuminating means, 
and energy input means, said energy input means communicat- 
ing with said transmission means whereby illuminating certain 
of said modules provides a three-dimensional form. 

13. A method of forming a three-dimensional image com- 
prising the steps of: providing a plurality of three-dimensional 
modules having at least one module aligned in each of the 




1. A light measuring system for a camera including: 

(a) 1st light measuring means for measuring the brightness of 
an object to be photographed in a predetermined area, said 
means producing an electrical signal representing the 
brightness of the predetermined area of the object; 

(b) 2nd light measuring means for measuring the brightness 
of the object in a different area from that for said 1st light 
measuring means, 

said means producing an electrical signal representing the 
brightness of the different area of the object from that 
for said 1st light measuring means; 

(c) measuring pattern setting means; 

(d) computing means responsive to the outputs of said 1st 
and said 2nd light measuring means, 

said means producing a 1st output representing a combina- 
tion of the outputs of said 1st and said 2nd light measur- 
ing means in a certain adjusted relationship by said light 
measuring patterii setting means, and a 2nd output 
representing a combination of the outputs of said 1st and 
said 2nd light measuring means in a fixed relationship; 

(e) comparing means for comparing said 1st and said 2nd 
outputs of said computing means with each other, 

said means producing a 1st signal when the difference 
between the computed outputs is smaller than a prede- 
termined value, and a 2nd signal when the difference 



July 5, 1^83 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



185 



tWe 



between the computed outputs is larger than the prede- 
termined value; 

(f) exposure control means for controlling exposure in accor- 
dance with either one of said 1st and 2nd computed out- 
puts; and 

(g) control means for applying either one of said 1st and said 
2nd computed outputs to said exposure control means, 
said means responsive to said 1st signal from said compar- 
ing means applying said 1st computed output to said 
exposure control means, and responsive to said 2nd 
signal from said comprising means applying said 2nd 
computed output to said exposure control means. 



and transfer to form a plurality of duplicated copies from the 
electrostatic latent image formed on the electrostatic charge 
retentive member, means for adjusting the development bias 
voltage including a manually operable means accessible exter- 
nally of the apparatus to enable thef*development bias voltage 
to be adjusted during the repeated development and transfer 
after the formation of the electrostatic charge latent image to 
change the density of the duplicated copies, while the electro- 
static charge latent image once formed remains on the charge 
retentive member, and means for adjusting the amount of 
exposure light before the formation of the electrostatic latent 
image, said exposure amount adjusting means and said devel- 



4,391,501 
CAMERA WITH ATTACHABLE FLASH DEVICE 
Karl-Heinz Lange, Bunde, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to 
Balda-Werke Photographishe Gerate und Kunststoff GmbH & 
Co., KG, Bunde, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,455 
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 5, 
1980, 3033463 

Int. C1.3 G03B 15/03 
U.S. a. 354—149 16 Qaims 



Si 




1. A camera and attachable flash device in combination, 



comprismg: 

a camera body including a lens and shutter assembly; 

camera on-off means for placing the camera in an opera- 
tional or non-operational condition; 

a flash device adapted to be mounted on the camera body 
and coupled to the lens and shutter assembly, the flash 
device including an on-off switch for placing the flash 
device in an operational or non-operational condition; and 

transfer means coupling said lens and shutter assembly to the 
on-off switch of the flash device for operatively setting 
the lens and shutter assembly at an appropriate flash set- 
ting and for placing the flash device into the off position in 
response to the camera on-off means being placed in a 
non-operational position. 





opment bias voltage adjusting means being coupled to a com- 
mon handling member such that, when said common handling 
member is operated in one direction, the exposure amount is 
decreased and the development bias voltage is decreased and, 
when said common handling member is operated in another 
direction, the exposure amount is increased and the develop- 
ment bias voltage is increased, said common handling member 
comprising a common dial rotatably arranged on said housing 
and said development bias voltage adjusting means comprising 
a variable resistor having a rotating axis coupled to said com- 
mon dial by means of a rotating shaft secured to the common 
dial. 



' 4,391,503 

MAGNETIC BRUSH DEVELOPER UNIT FOR 
PHOTOCOPIER 
Robert J. Pugh, London, England, assignor to Gestetner Manu- 
facturing Limited, London, England 

Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,309 
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 2, 1980, 
8011042 

Int. aJ G03G 15/09 
U.S. a. 355—3 DD 9 Qaims 



4,391,502 
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS HAVING 
MEANS FOR ADJUSTING THE REPRODUCTION 
PROPERTIES OF SUBSEQUENT COPIES AFTER A 
HRST COPY HAS BEEN PRODUCED 
Masiyi Nishikawa, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus Opti- 
cal Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan 
Continuation of Ser. No. 940,657, Sep. 8, 1978, abandoned. This 
application Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,356 
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 12, 1977, 52-108909 
Int. a.^ G03G 15/00 
U.S. a. 355— 3 DD 2 Qaims 

1. An electrophotographic apparatus comprising a housing, 
an electrostatic charge retentive member, means for forming 
on the charge retentive member an electrostatic charge latent 
image, means for developing the electrostatic latent image 
while applying a development bias voltage to form a toner 
image, means for transferring the toner image to a record 
medium, means for successively repeating said development 




1. In a magnetic brush developer unit for a photocopier, 
comprising: 

(a) a developer shell for supporting a magnetic brush of 
single component toner in use of the developer unit; 

(b) a housing defining a sump below the level of said devel- 
oper shell to contain toner for forming a magnetic brush of 
toner on said shell; 

(c) aperture means to said housing defining a development 
zone at which the magnetic brush can project from the 
housing; 



186 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



(d) a magnetic roller within the develoj)er shell, setting up a 
magnetic field around the developer shell; 

(e) means operable to drive at least one of the developer shell 
and the roller for rotation about a longitudinal axis; 

(0 a scraper blade positioned in said housing and directed so 
as to remove toner from said developer shell after the 
toner has been carried past said development zone on the 
developer shell; 

(g) a rotatable magnetic member positioned within the hous- 
ing below the level of said developer shell; and 

(h) means for driving said rotatable magnetic member in use 
of the developer unit, for rotation to entrain toner re- 
ceived from said scraper blade; the improvement wherein: 

(i) said rotatable magnetic member includes magnet means 
for magnetically attracting and holding toner on a surface 
of said rotatable magnetic member so that a clump of 
loosely held toner is formed on the surface of said mag- 
netic member, the clump being movable through said 
sump along a circular path in contact with the toner in 
said sump, to carry said toner upwardly to join a stream of 
toner being applied to said developer shell, said toner 
being conveyed to a location wherein the magnetic field 
around said developer shell magnetically attracts toner 
from exterior portions of the clump, thereby avoiding 
mechanical agitation and coagulation of said toner. 



4,391,504 
RECIRCULATING COPY DOCUMENT 

Thomas Acquaviva, Penfleld, N.Y., assignor to Xerox Corpora- 
tion, Stamford, Conn. 

Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,861 

Int. CIJ G03G 21/00 

U.S. a. 355—3 SH 7 Oaims 



ooa I 




1. In a precollation copier with a recirculating document 
handler in which a set of plural original document sheets is 
placed and normally plurally recirculated and copied once per 
circulation at the copier imaging station to produce a selected 
plural number of precollated copy sheet sets therefrom in a 
normal copy sheet output path with a copy fuser, the improve- 
ment comprising: 
a selectable alternative copy sheet path for feeding copy 
sheets from said normal copy sheet output path of said 
copier into an input station of said recirculating document 
handler; 
selectably actuatable copy sheet output path deflector means 
for diverting only a first set of copy sheets made from 
original document sheets from said normal copy sheet 
output path into said alternative copy sheet path to said 
recirculating document handler; in which said alternative 
copy sheet path extends directly from the fuser of said 
copier into said recirculating document handler upon the 
actuation of said copy sheet output path deflector means; 
selectable non-circulating means in said recirculating docu- 
ment handler for automatically ejecting the original docu- 
ment sheets from said recirculating document handler 
after said original document sheets have been copied only 
once, and before said original document sheets are recir- 
culated, even though plural copy sets have been selected 
to be made therefrom; 
and means for automatically plurally recirculating said first 



set of copy sheets in said recirculating document handler 
in lieu of and as if they were said original document sheets 
to copy the remainder of the selected number of plural 
copy sets from said first set of copy sheets rather than said 
original document sheets. 



4,391,505 

OVER-PLATEN DOCUMENT REGISTRATION 

APPARATUS 

Morton Silverberg, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Xerox Corpora- 
tion, Stamford, Conn. 

Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,461 

Int. a.3 G03G 15/04 

U.S. a. 355—3 R 12 Qaims 




,xj, '^■^np—T/: 



'' /«PV a — 




1. In an original document sheet feeding and registration 
apparatus for a copier, in which a document sheet is fed with 
a document feeding belt having a diffusely light reflective 
surface over a transparent platen imaging station of the copier, 
said imaging station having a document illumination exposure 
system and a copying lens system under the platen, the im- 
provement comprising: 
at least one minor spectrally reflective patch on said other- 
wise diffusely light reflective surface of said document 
belt, 
means for feeding the document sheets onto said belt in 
synchronism with said spectral patches such that at least 
one edge of the document sheet only partially overlies said 
patch and a portion of said spectral patch is exposed, 
and a photosensor system for detecting an edge of the docu- 
ment sheet while the document sheet is over said platen 
and within said imaging station and within the field of 
view of said lens system, said photosensor system being 
optically invisible to said copier, 
said photosensor system comprising sensor illumination 
means distinct from said exposure illumination system and 
photosensor means aimed at a registration ]X)sition on said 
platen for detecting changes in the light level from said 
sensor illumination means reflected from said spectral 
patch, 
and wherein said photosensor system detects the arrival of a 
document sheet edge at said registration position by sens- 
ing the transition in intensity of the reflected illumination 
from a spectral patch at said registration position versus 
the reflected illumination from a document sheet partially 
overlying said spectral patch at said registration position. 



4,391,506 

DRIVING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR 

ILLUMINATION TYPE IMAGING SYSTEM 

Hiroshi Koide, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Ricoh Company, Ltd., 

Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,309 
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 26, 1980, 55-166341 
Int. a.3 G03G 15/00 
U.S. a. 355—8 9 aalms 

1. A method of driving a movable imaging system which is 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



187 



driven by a first drive source in synchronism with a movable 
photoconductive member which is driven by a second drive 
source, said method comprising the steps of: 

(a) measuring a time period necessary for the photoconduc- 
tive member to move a given distance; 

(b) comparing the measured time period with a predeter- 
mined reference time period to thereby estimate a fluctua- 
tion component in the time period of movement of the 
photoconductive member in accordance with a result of 
the comparison; 



2a ?0 





(c) presetting or determining a buildup target speed and a 
constant target speed during a buildup scanning speed 
motion and a constant scanning speed motion of the imag- 
ing system in accordance with the estimated fluctuation 
component respectively; and 

(d) moving the imaging system at the preset buildup and 
constant target speeds during buildup and constant scan- 
ning speed motions thereof, respectively; 

whereby the imaging system is moved in synchronism with 
the photoconductive member. 



the counter means when the count in the counter means 
has a second value, said counter means being constructed 
to change its count from the first value to a third value in 
response to the first output signal and to change its count 
from the second value to a fourth value in response to the 
second output signal from the coder means; 



30- 



ao- 




the decoder means being further constructed to produce 

control output signals in response to predetermined counts 

in the counter means; and 
copy operation control means for controlling an operation of 

the apparatus in response to the control output signals 

from the decoder means. 



4,391,508 
COUNTER AND TIMING MECHANISM FOR COPYING 

APPARATUS 

Mitsuo Shibusawa, and Toshiyuki Ogawa, both of Tokyo, Japan, 

assignors to Ricoh Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,980 

Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 18, 1980, 55-178083 

Int. a.' G03G 15/00 

U.S. CI. 355—14 CU 6 Qaims 




i^n 



4,391,507 
COPYING MACHINE CONTROL APPARATUS 
COMPRISING VARIABLE LENGTH PROGRAM 
CONTROL 
Goro Mori, and Masaaki Ogura, both of Tokyo, Japan, assign- 
ors to Ricoh Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,658 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 13, 1980, 55-31764 
Int. Q.3 G03G 15/00 
U.S. Q. 355—14 R 8 Qaims 

1. A copying machine control apparatus comprising: 
a moving photoconductive member; 

pulse generator means for producing pulses in response to 
incremental movements of the photoconductive member; 
presettable counter means for counting the pulses; 
decoder means for producing set output signals in response 

to counts in the counter means; 
coder means responsive to the set output signals produced 
by the decoder means constructed to apply a first output 
signal to the counter means when the count in the counter 
means has a first value and apply a second output signal to 



1. Electrophotographic copying apparatus comprising: 

copy number input means for the desired number of copies 
of an original document; 

first display means for indicating the set number; 

second display means for indicating a copy ready condition 
in which the apparatus is ready to perform a copying 
operation; 

copy starter means for commanding a start of the copying 
operation; 

timer means for controlling the first display means to auto- 
matically return the set number of copies to one if the 
copy starter means fails to command the start of a copying 
operation during a predetermined period of time after the 
number of copies is set by the copy number input means; 
and 

control means for controlling the copy number input means 
to permit the same to set the number of copies even during 
a period for which the apparatus stands ready to perform 
the copying operation. 



188 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4^91,509 
ROLLER FUSER APPARATUS IN WHICH COPY SHEET 

JAMS ARE MINIMIZED 
WiUiani A. Cavagnaro, Fairport, N.Y., assignor to Eastman 
Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y. 

Filed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,438 

Int. a.5 G03G 15/20 

VJS. a. 355—14 FU 7 Qaims 








sheets from a source into said paper path, the improvement 
comprising: 

a pair of normally spaced apart memt)ers; 

means for attracting magnetically said members toward one 
another so that said pair of members contact and advance 
the sheets therebetween along the path with precise con- 
trol of the sheets; 

dual registration means adapted to stop the sheets forwarded 
by said feeder thereby registering and deskewing the 
sheets, said dual registration means including immediate 
response voice coil actuators with plungers of said actua- 
tors acting as registration stops, said members and said 
dual registration means being actuated simultaneously 
based upon the location of images on said photoreceptor, 
said members serving to positively drive the sheets past 
the now retracted plungers in synchronism with the im- 
ages on said photoreceptor. 



7. Apparatus for fusing unfused toner images on copy sheets, 
comprising: 

first and second rotatable fuser rollers; 

drive means for rotating one of said rollers; 

expandable bladder means for moving said second roller 
between (i) a first position out of engagement with said 
first roller, and (ii) a second position in engagement with 
said first roller to form a sheet engaging nip for fusing 
toner images on copy sheets advanced through said nip; 

means for applying pressurized fluid to said bladder means to 
expand said bladder means and move said second roller 
from said first position to said second position; 

means adjacent to said nip for detecting a copy sheet jam in 
said nip and for producing a signal when such jam is 
detected; and 

means responsive to said signal for deflating said bladder 
means so as to move said second roller from said second 
position to said first position to prevent further driving of 
a jammed copy sheet in said nip, said deflating means 
including a vacuum source for accelerating the deflation 
of said bladder means. 



4,391,511 
LIGHT EXPOSURE DEVICE AND METHOD 
Nobuyuki Akiyama; Yukio Kembo; Yasuo Nakagawa; Susumu 
Aiuchi, and Mineo Nomoto, all of Yokohama, Japan, assign- 
ors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 245,193 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 19, 1980, 55-33882; 
Aug. 11, 1980, 55-109275; Sep. 26, 1980, 55-132914; Oct. 23, 
1980, 55-147539 

Int. a.3 G03B 27/52 
U.S. a. 355—40 23 Qaims 



4,391,510 
VOICE COIL ACTUATOR REGISTRATION SYSTEM 

Abraham Cberian, Webster, N.Y., assignor to Xerox Corpora- 
tion, Stamford, Conn. 
I FUed Jul. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 173,572 

I Int. a.3 G03G 15/14. 21/00 

U.S. a. 355—3 SH 4 Qaims 




1. In a high speed copier having a photoreceptor, an imaging 
system for forming images of documents on said photorecep- 
tor, a predetermined paper path, and a feeder for forwarding 



59c' Cpbocesshg 

UNIT 



57(17) 



57^57, 57L, 5^^ 



17) 



56»- 



56h- 



56q 



56(16) 



AIR 
SUPPLY 



AIR 
SUPPLY 




■59a 



-59b 



58d 



58e 



1. A device for exposing and printing a predetermined pat- 
tern on an exposure surface of a substrate, the device compris- 
ing: 

measuring means for measuring a curvature of the exposed 
surface of said substrate, 

a chuck including a suction and holding means having a 
deformable member for drawing and holding a back sur- 
face of said substrate opposite to said exposure surface of 
said substrate, and deforming means for imparting a force 
to said deformable member and said back surface of said 
substrate to deform said substrate, 

control means for controlling said deforming means of said 
chuck in accordance with the curvature of said exposure 
surface of said substrate measured by said measuring 
means such that said exposure surface of said substrate 
conforms to an image surface of said pattern over an entire 
exposure area within a predetermined allowable error, 
and 

means for carrying and transporting said chuck in a substan- 
tially horizontal direction from a substrate deformation 
correcting station to an exposure station. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



189 



4,391,512 

DEVELOPING DEVICE USING MAGNETIC 

DEVELOPER 

Shunji Nakamura, Kawasaki, and Kozo Arao, Yokohama, both 
of Japaa, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Dec. 28, 1979, Ser. No. 108,058 
Gaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 6, 1979, 54-890; Jan. 
9, 1979, 54-1634 

Int. a.3 G03G 15/09 
U.S. a. 355— 3 DD v ^ 9 Qaims 




1. A developing device for forming a developed image on an 
image bearing member, comprising in combination: 

(a) developer holding means having P developer holding 
surface adapted to oppose the image bearing member; 

(b) means for supplying magnetic developer onto said devel- 
oper holding surface; 

(c) fixed magnetic field generating means disposed on the 
side of said developer holding means opposite to said 
developer holding surface; and 

(d) magnetic thickness regulating means disposed on the 
opposite side of said developer holding means from said 
magnetic field generating means and within the influence 
of the magnetic field of a magnetic pole of said magnetic 
field generating means, said magnetic thickness regulating 
means being provided with a tip facing said developer 
holding surface and having a width which is smaller than 
the width of said magnetic pole of said magnetic field 
generating means, said magnetic thickness regulating 
means being opposed to said magnetic pole of said mag- 
netic field generating means across said developer holding 
means to concentrate the magnetic lines of force extend- 
ing from said magnetic pole and thereby regulate the 
developer layer to a thickness smaller than the gap be- 
tween said magnetic thickness regulating means and said 
developer holding means. 



4,391,513 
RANGE nNDING OPTICAL MECHANISM 

Makoto Fujiki, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki 
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,823 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 25, 1979, 54- 
179517[U]; Dec. 25, 1979, 54-179518[U]; Dec. 25, 1979, 54- 
179519[U] 

Int. Q.3 GOIC 3/10; G03B 7/08 
U.S. Q. 356—1 6 Qaims 

1. A range finding optical mechanism including: 

(a) a pair of fixed range finding optical systems each having 
an entrance window for introducing therethrough the 
light from the subject of range finding, said entrance 
windows being spaced a predetermined distance from 
each other, said range finding optical systems being 
adapted to form object images separately on a predeter- 
mined imaging plane, the spacing between said formed 
images being variable in accordance with the distance 
from said optical systems to the subject; 

(b) photoelectric converter means including a plurality of 
photosensitive elements arranged in the form of a row on 
said imaging plane, said photosensitive elements compris- 
ing two sections which together define said row, each of 
said sections corresponding to one of said pair of range 



finding optical systems, each of said optical systems being 
arranged to form an image of the subject on one of said 
two sections and said photoelectric converter means gen- 
erating electrical signals corresponding to the illumination 
distributions of the images so formed; and 
(c) a regulating device for said photoelectric converter 
means, said regulating device including first regulating 
means for displacing said photoelectric converter means 
in a plane generally perpendicular to the optical axes of 
said pair of range finding optical systems and in a direc- 




tion parallel to a line passing through the optical axes of 
said pair of range finding optical systems, and second reg- 
ulating means for rotatively displacing said photi>electric 
converter means in a plane perpendicular to the optical 
axes of said pair of range finding optical systems and about 
a pivot axis substantially coincident with the center of the 
area of one said section of said photosensitive elements of 
said photoelectric converter means on which the image of 
the subject is formed by one of said range finding optical 
systems. 



4,391,514 
SIDELOOKING LASER ALTIMETER FOR A FLIGHT 
SIMULATOR 
Larry D. Webster, San Jose, Calif., assignor to The United 
States of America as represented by the Administrator of the 
National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington, 
D.C. 

Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,224 

Int. Q.^ GOIC 3/10; G09B 9/08 

U.S. Q. 356—1 11 Qaims 



I.V.MOMIOR ?'•, 




COMPUTER 



1. In a method for determining the altitude of a flight simula- 
tor probe moving relative to and above the terrain of a flight 
simulator model wherein the imaginary line extending from the 
probe in a direction normal to the model is characterized as the 
probe plumb line, the steps of: 
directing a pencil-like beam of radiation from said probe 
onto the model keeping said beam within a plane contain- 
ing said probe plumb line to produce a beam spot on said 
model; 
detecting the location of said beam spot relative to two 
orthogonal coordinates with a detector situated remote 
from said probe plumb line and having a linear sensitivity 
zone optically aligned with said probe plumb line; 
varying the angular orientation of the beam within said 



190 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



probe plumb line plane and relative to a reference plane so 

as to cause said beam spot to impinge on the model site 

intersected by said probe plumb line; 
determining the angular orientation of the beam relative to 

said reference plane; and 
utilizing the determined angular orientation of said beam to 

determine the altitude of said probe over the terrain of the 

model. 



4,391,515 
OPTICAL TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER APPARATUS 
SHARING COMMON OPTICS 
Howard M. Forrester, Ridgecrest, and John R. Crisler, China 
Lake, both of Calif., assignors to The United States of Amer- 
ica as represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Washington, 
D.C. 

1 Filed May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,341 - 

I Int. aJ GOIC 3/08 

U.S. a. 356—5 1 Claim 



M 






— •_— . » ' ^ 22 20 



1. Optical detection apparatus comprising: 

means for generating a beam of coherent light; 

a discrete optical polarizing component including a plurality 
of wedge shaped light transmissive plates arranged in two 
groups each group being arranged in a spaced apart stack, 

one surface of one of said wedge shaped plates from one of 
said groups being positioned to intercept the light from 
said coherent light generating means at a predetermined 
angle of incidence, 

another surface of another of said wedge shaped plates being 
arranged to receive incoming light reflected from an 
object in an ambiant environment having particular polar- 
ization characteristics; 

a light detection element; 

a lens positioned between said discrete optical component 
upon said light detection element; and 

means for transmitting light from said coherent light gener- 
ating means to said light detecting element, whereby it is 
mixed with the coherent light from said discrete optical 
component to produce a data signal. 



radially through the fiber core and that of the fiber clad- 
ding; 
(b) measuring the interferogram fringe line shift at a plurality 
of points along a fringe line corresponding to a series of 
mutually parallel ray chord paths extending through the 
core at mutually diverse minimum radial distances from 
the core axis; and 




(c) sequentially calculating from core peripheral region 
inwardly towards the core center that portion of the 
measured fringe line shift attributable to discrete differ- 
ences in indices of refraction of cylindrical core ring 
portions of thicknesses defined by successive minimum 
radial distances in the series of ray paths and that of the 
cladding. 



4,391,517 
METHOD OF MEASURING SPLICE LOSS IN OPTICAL 

FIBERS 
Joseph Zucker, Foster City, and Arthur H. Fitch, Redwood City, 
both of Calif., assignors to GTE Automatic Electric Laborato- 
ries, Inc., Northlake, 111. 
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 205,844, Nov. 10, 1980, Pat. 
No. 4,360,268. This application Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,697 
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 23, 
1999, has been disclaimed. 
Int. a.3 GOIN 21/84 
U.S. a. 356—73.1 13 Qaims 




!•> 26 

53 , 2bA 



35 ' *^^ ' 32B ♦^ ^ 



4,391,516 
METHOD OF DETERMINING AN INDEX OF 
REFRACTION PROnLE OF AN OPTICAL FIBER 
Luther M. Boggs, Dunwoody, and William B. Gardner, Cham- 
blee, both of Ga., assignors to Western Electric Co., Inc., New 
York, N.Y. and Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated, 
Murray Hill, N.J. 

Filed Sep. 11, 1978, Ser. No. 941,824 
Int. aj GOIN 21/45 
U.S. a. 356—73.1 7 Qaims 

1. The method of determinig an index of refraction profile of 
the core of an optical fiber having a substantially cylindrical 
core encased within a surrounding cladding comprising the 
steps of: 

(a) forming an interferogram with a beam of radiant energy 
passing transversely through the optical fiber with the 
interferogram having a pattern of mutually spaced inter- 
ference fringe lines shifted from a reference line distances 
determined by differences between indices of refraction 



RADiOMETESi 
MEANS 1 30 



1. The method of measuring the insertion loss of a splice 
between adjacent one ends of first and second optical fibers 
comprising the steps of 

transmitting reference light in the first fiber; 

producing a first measurement Pq of the radiant power of 
the light in the first fiber, 

producing a second measurement P/j of the radiant power of 
only light radiated generally transversely out of the cir- 
cumference of only the second fiber in a significant por- 
tion of the length thereof that is downstream of the splice 
and exhibiting substantial leaky mode radiation as a result 
of the occurrence of the splice, for reference light of the 
radiant power Pq in the first fiber and incident on the 
splice, and 

producing an indication of the splice loss from the ratio of 
the two measurements. 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



191 



4,391,518 
DUAL LASER OPTICAL SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR 

STUDYING FLUID FLOW 
Robert B. Owen, and William K. Witherow, both of Huntsviile, 
Ala., assignors to The United States of America as represented 
by the Administrator of the National Aeronautics and Space 
Administration, Washington, D.C. 

I Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,232 

I I Int. C1.3 GOirS 27/47 

U.S. a. 356—129 6 Oaims 



ring-shaped mirror out of the laser oscillator means in such a 
manner that the axis of the laser beam and axis of the light are 




' ' 4,391,519 

AXIS-MONITORING APPARATUS FOR A LASER BEAM 
Kouji Kuwabara; Hiroyuki Sugawara, both of Hitachi; To- 

shiharu Shirakura, Tokai; Kouji Sasaki, and Satoshi 

Takemori, both of Hitachi, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, 

Ltd., Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,731 

Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 12, 1979, 54-116195 
Int. a.5 GOIB 11/27 
U.S. a. 356—153 11 Gaims 

1. A laser beam axis-monitoring apparatus, the apparatus 
comprising a laser oscillating means for generating a laser 
beam, and a light generator means for generating a light for 
monitoring an axis of the laser beam, characterized in that 
directing means are arranged between the laser oscillator 
means and the light generator means for directing the light 
from the generator means into the laser oscillator means, said 
directing means includes a ring-shaped mirror having an open- 
ing at a center thereof, and concave mirror means are disposed 
in the laser oscillator means for reflecting the light from the 



,1 '^ 2' B '° 



22 



coincident with both the light and said laser beam from said 
laser oscillator means passing through said opening of said 
ring-shaped mirror. 



1. A method of producing and visualizing simultaneous 
images of perpendicular components of refractive index gradi- 
ents in transparent substances comprising the steps of: 

providing two laser beams, each said beam having a different 
wave length; 

combining and coUimating said two laser beams into a single 
beam containing said two different wave length compo- 
nents; 

providing a test volume which includes said transparent 
substance; 

passing said collimated beam through said test volume; 

separating said collimated beam into two separate beams 
having said different wave lengths; 

providing two separate knife edges arranged mutually per- 
pendicular to one another; 

focusing a first of said separated beams on one of said knife 
edges and a second of said beams on the other of said knife 
edges; 

projecting light allowed to be passed by said knife edges 
onto a viewing means; and 

producing visual images of mutually perpendicular refrac- 
tive index gradients passed by said knife edges on said 
viewing means for simultaneous viewing. 



4,391,520 
TECHNIQUE FOR OPTICAL ALIGNMENT OF A 
WORKPIECE 
Douglas H. Ziegel, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to RCA Corpora- 
tion, New York, N.Y. 

Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,350 

Int. a.3 GOIB 77/26 

U.S. CI. 356—154 21 Qaims 




1. A method of aligning a surface of a workpiece with re- 
spect to a positioning ring attached to a holder supporting said 
workpiece, said holder adapted to rotate said surface, with 
respect to said positioning ring, about a first axis, comprising 
the steps of: 

mounting said holder on an alignment platform adjacent a 
positioning block attached thereto for holding said posi- 
tioning ring in a predetermined position, said alignment 
platform being supported by a table, 

exposing said surface to an incident light beam, whereby said 
incident beam is reflected from said surface, as a refiected 
beam, onto a screen along a path of alignment marks 
disposed thereon, 

revolving said positioning block, with respect to said align- 
ment platform, about said first axis, whereby the point on 
said surface where said beam strikes remains substantially 
fixed in space, and 

rotating said surface about said first axis to change the loca- 
tion where said reflected beam strikes said screen, 
whereby said surface is properly aligned with respect to 
said positioning ring when said refiected beam strikes a 
particular location on said screen. 



192 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4,391,521 

PHOTOMETER HAVING ASYMMETRICAL APERTURE 

AND WITH COMPENSATION FOR DIRECTION OF 

INaDENCE 

Toshihiro Imai, Hachioji, and Toyotaka Yamada, Hino, both of 
Japan, assignors to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan 
[ Filed Sep. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 188,146 

Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 18, 1979, 54-119832 
Int. aj GOIJ J/04 

US. a. 356—225 6 Qaims 




(34), for guiding a portion of the radiation of said at least one 
light source from said input terminals to said radiation mea- 
suring means (15), said input terminals being disposed for 
receiving radiation from said at least one light source com- 
parable with the radiation incident on portions of said at 
least one sample respectively adjacent to said input termi- 
nals, 

wherein, in accordance with the invention, said radiation mea- 
suring means (15) comprises, 

means (12) for producing a spectral dispersion of radiation 
received from said light guiding means and thereby making 
spectrally dispersed radiation incident on said radiation 
detection means (14), and 

means (16) for adjusting said radiation detection means so as to 
selectively detect radiation in at least one of a plurality of 
spectral regions. 



VI - 





4,391,523 

SCANNABLE DETECTOR SYSTEM FOR ECHELLE 

GRATING SPECTROMETERS 

Karl J. Hildebrand, Tyngsboro, and John Leeman, Andover, 

both of Mass., assignors to Leeman Labs Inc., Tewksbury, 

Mass. 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 206,445, Nov. 13, 1980, 
abandoned. This application Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,716 

Int. CV GOIJ 3/34, 3/38 
U.S. a. 356—328 4 Qaims 



1. A photometer comprising a photodetector, a mask having 
asymmetrical apertures and arranged before said photodetec- 
tor, and a compensation prism arranged in the path of the light 
to be incident on said photodetector to compensate for the 
asymmetry of the light pencil which passes through said mask 
and is incident on said photodetector. 



4,391,522 
TEST APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING RESISTANCE 

TO LIGHT AND WEATHER INFLUENCES 
Helmut Schmid, Krefeld; Martin Bock, Duisburg, and Giinther 
Kampf, Krefeld, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to 
Original Hanau Heraeus GmbH, Hanau, Fed. Rep. of Ger- 
many 

Filed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,465 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 4, 
1979 2940325 

Int. a.3 GOIN 77/00; GOIJ 3/38 
U.S. a. 356—326 5 Qaims 




1. Apparatus for determining resistance to light and weather 
influences of sample surfaces, said apparatus including, < in 
combination, with at least one source of light disposed for 
irradiation of said sample surfaces: 

fastening means (34) for fastening at least one sample for a 
period of time during which radiation from said source is 
incident on at least a portion of the surface of said sample, 
i radiation measuring means (15) comprising radiation detec- 
tion means (14) and radiation indicating means (24; 27,28), 
and 
light guiding means (1, 2. 3; 29; 8; 9), having a plurality of input 
terminals, each in the vicinity of one of said fastening means 



1. A scannable detector system for echelle grating spectro- 
metric comprising in combination: 

a. an echelle diffraction grating for separating radiation 
input energy into a spectrum of mixed orders; 

b. optical dispersing means for further separating said orders 
into a spectral array of discrete monochromatic wave- 
length segments; 

c. imaging means to image said spectral array in a focal 
plane; 

d. a first aperture plate positioned in said focal plane, said 
plate having a plurality of apertures corresponding to 
focal positions of said segments of said array; 

e. at least one scannable photodetector positioned behind 
said plate to receive and sense any of said wavelength 
segments transmitted by said plate; 

f means to scan said detector from aperture to aperture to 
measure individual wavelength segments in a selected 
sequence; 

g. a photodetector array mounted behind said first aperture 

plate; 
h. means to remove said scannable detector from the field of 

said plate; 
i. a second masking aperture plate having fewer apertures 

than said first aperture plate; and 
j. mounting means for mounting said second ajjerture plate 

between said photodetector array and said first aperture 

plate, said mounting means arranged such that said aper- 



JULY 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



193 



tures in said second plate align with said apertures in said 
first plate. 



' ' 4,391,524 

METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE QUALITY OF 
LIGHT SCATTERING MATERIAL 
Edgar F. Steigmeier, Hedingen, and Heinrich Auderset, Horgen, 
both of Switzerland, assignors to RCA Corporation, New 
York, N.Y. 

Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,060 

Int. a.3 COIN 21/01 

U.S. a. 356—338 12 Oaims 




U SO 



1. The method for determining the quality of a material 
having a property of absorbing light to a given penetration 
depth comprising the steps of: 

(a) exposing one or more regions of said material to a beam 
of light of a selected wavelength; 

(b) detecting scattered light having an intensity greater than 
a threshold intensity from the exposed material to provide 
an electrical signal proportional to the intensity of de- 
tected scattered light above said threshold intensity; 

(c) applying the electrical signal to a visual display device to 
control the intensity of a display beam of the device; and 

(d) varying said threshold intensity to thereby vary the 
intensity of the display beam so as to provide the minimum 
intensity of display beam which yields a full display of the 
exposed material, wherein the value of the threshold 
intensity is a direct measure of the crystalline quality of 
the material. 



U.S. a. 3! 



/Kff/sf ^.f**' : 



46 







.S4 



1. An interferometer comprising: 

a beamsplitter member including a surface; 

a beamsplitting coating disposed on a first portion of said 



beamsplitter member surface for splitting incident light 
into a transmitted beam and a reflected beam, said trans- 
mitted beam propagating along a first optical path of said 
interferometer and said reflected beam propagating along 
a second optical path of said interferometer; 

a compensator positioned in said first optical path; 

a first reflector for reflecting light transmitted by said beam- 
splitter; 

a second reflector formed by a coating positioned upon a 
second portion of said surface of said beamsplitter mem- 
ber, such that said second reflector and said beamsplitting 
coating are substantially coplanar, said second reflector 
for reflecting light from said first reflector; 

a retro-reflector for reflecting light transmitted thereto from 
said second reflector back toward said second reflector, 
said light retracing its optical path back to said beamsplit- 
ter; 

a third reflector for reflecting light reflected by said beam- 
splitter; 

a fourth reflector for reflecting light reflected by said third 
reflector back to said third reflector and then to said 
retroreflector, said retroreflector reflecting light back 
toward said third reflector, said light retracing its optical 
path back to said beamsplitting coating along said second 
optical path, said transmitted beam and said reflected 
beam being recombined at said beamsplitting coating. 



4,391,526 

INTERFEROMETRIC SURFACE CONTOUR 

MEASURING ARRANGEMENT 

Joseph L. McLaughlin, Marblehead, Mass., assignor to Itek 

Corporation, Lexington, Mass. 

Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,426 

Int. Q.3 GOIB 11/24 

U.S. a. 356—359 23 Qaims 



4,391,525 
INTERFEROMETER 
Robert A. Woodruff, Goleta, Calif., assignor to Ball Corpora- 
tion, Muncie, Ind. 

Filed Oct. 10, 1979, Ser. No. 83,315 
Int. a.3 GOIB 9/02; G02B 27/10 
156—346 31 Qaims 




1. A method of interferometrically measuring the contour of 
a reflective surface, comprising the steps of: 

a. projecting a light wave onto the reflective surface such that 
a wave is reflected therefrom; 

b. interfering the reflected wave with a reference wave to form 
a resultant interference pattern; 

c. projecting a portion of the resultant interference pattern 
onto a recording medium; 

d. scanning the reflective surface with the projected wave by 
relatively moving the projected wave relative to the reflec- 
tive surface; and 

e. moving the projected interference pattern relative to the 
recording medium synchronously with the scanning of the 
reflective surface, whereby the information recorded on the 
recording medium is a development of the contour of the 
reflective surface. 



194 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4,391,527 
PROCESS AND DEVICE FOR THE POSITIONING OF AN 

OPTICAL MEASURING INSTRUMENT AND A 
SPECTACLE FRAME IN RELATION TO EACH OTHER 
Jean-Claude Hennequin, Neuilly, France, assignor to Essilor 
International, Neuilly, France 

Filed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 225,035 
Qaims priority, application France, Jan. 23, 1980, 80 01428 
Int. a.3 GOIB 11/14: A61B 3/00 
US. a. 356—375 11 Oaims 




1. A process for positioning an optical measuring instrument 
comprising a positioning device and a spectacle frame in rela- 
tion to each other, wherein two positioning marks on the 
device are arranged in such a way as to define a reference 
plane, and that the positioning device and spectacle frame are 
moved into a position in which the reference plane and mean 
plane of the frame are in a given position in relation to each 
other, and by the fact that a semi-transparent mirror is placed 
between the frame and each of the positioning marks, each 
such mirror, separated from the other mirror, being placed 
symmetrically in relation to a median plane of symmetry at 
right angles to the reference plane, and forming a plane bisect- 
ing the angle formed by the mirrors, and by the fact that the 
positioning marks are observed from a point on this bisecting 
plane, and that the device and frame are moved in relation to 
each other until the reflection of the side outline of the frame 
in each of the mirrors coincides with the relevant positioning 
mark visible through each mirror. 



J42 - 5K - 

224 



i 



230./.. T_: ;_ : 

2»„:tti- - -^- X I 



h: 



i 



:rtrci:^tT l 






f^ 



244 

250 . 



2K ^14 ** 






US: 

»2 - 



■:^ 



: □ 



'" m 



a ^ 




■1 



^Q^ 



1. A silo system for mixing stored material, comprising: 
a mixing silo having a plurality of discharge apertures; 



conduit means for conveying material from the discharge 
apertures to the receptacle; 

a plurality of valve means for controlling material flow, each 
of the valve means controlling material flow through a 
corresponding one of the discharge apertures; 

level sensor means for generating level sensor signals indica- 
tive of the material level in the receptacle; and 

first means responsive to the level sensor signals for tempo- 
rarily opening valve means in a predetermined sequence 
when the material level in the receptacle is rising to a first 
predetermined point and thereafter keeping all of the 
valve means closed until the material level in the recepta- 
cle falls to a second predetermined point below the first 
predetermined point, said first means additionally com- 
prising means for reducing the rate of flow through tem- 

. porarily opened valve means when the material level in 
the receptacle rises to a third predetermined point be- 
tween the first and second predetermined points. 



4,391,529 

APPARATUS FOR MIXING AND DEGASSING 

COMPONENTS OF SYNTHETIC RESINS, 

PARTICULARLY THERMO-SETTING SYNTHETIC 

RESINS 
Wilhelm Hedrich, Ehringshausen; Heinz Krumm, Sinn, and 
Erhard Haeuser, Schoeffengrund, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger- 
many, assignors to Wilhelm Hedrich Vakuumanlagen GmbH 
& Co. KG, Ehringshausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,524 
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 12, 
1980, 3026492 

Int. a.3 BOIF 5/12 
U.S. a. 366—266 13 Qaims 






I 4,391,528 

SILO SYSTEM FOR MIXING STORED MATERIAL 

Heinrich Klein-Albenhausen, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, 

assignor to Ibau Hamburg Ingenieurgisillschaft Endustreibau 

mbH, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 811,618, Jun. 30, 1977. This 

application Sep. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 190,662 

Int. a.3 B28C 5/00, 7/04 

U.S. a. 366—15 34 Qaims 




1. In an apparatus for mixing and degassing components of 
synthetic resins, comprising an evacuatable, chamber means 
having a top wall, a cylindrical wall structure and a down- 
wardly and inwardly tapered conical wall structure and a 
bottom wall structure at the lower end thereof, means defining 
an opening into said chamber means for facilitating an evacua- 
tion of said chamber means, a rotatable worm conveyor cen- 
trally arranged in said chamber means and closely surrounded 
by an elongated vertically upstanding guide tube, the ends of 
which are spaced from the top and bottom walls of said cham- 
ber means, securement means for fixedly securing said guide 
tube to said chamber means, said guide tube having at its top 
end a discharge plate, and including between the lower end of 
said guide tube and said conical wall structure of said container 
at least one radially extending agitating arm secured to said 
worm conveyor at the lower end thereof, the improvement 
comprising wherein at least one collecting arm is secured to 
and projects radially from said guide tube, said collecting arm 
extending above said agitating arm, is spaced a small distance 
from said wall structures of said chamber means, and has 
means defining a collecting opening which faces in a direction 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



195 



opposite the direction of rotation of said agitating arm, and 
means defining an opening connecting an interior cavity in said 
collecting arm to the interior of said guide tube. 

/ 

4,391,530 
ELECTRONIC TIMEPIECE 
Takuo Wakabayashi, deceased, late of Saitama, Japan; by 
Shigemasa Wakabayashi, legal representative, Nagano, Japan; 
Iwao Tahara, Higashiyamato, Japan; Toshiharu Aihara, 
Kodaira, Japan; Naoki Takahashi, Fussa, Japan, and Yushin 
Matsuo, Chofii, Japan, assignors to Casio Computer Co., Ltd., 
Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Sep. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 188,515 
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 27, 1979, 54-126264; 
Dec. 6, 1979, 54-158983; Dec. 6, 1979, 54-158986; Dec. 11, 1979, 
54-161292; Dec. 11, 1979, 54-161293; Dec. 11, 1979, 54-161294; 
Dec. 12, 1979, 54-161813 

Int. Q.3 G04B 21/08: GllC 13/00 
U.S. Q. 368—63 18 Qaims 



4,391,531 
ELECTROOPTICAL DISPLAY/LEAD FRAME 
SUBASSEMBLY AND TIMEPIECE MODULE 
INCLUDING SAME 
Dick Yokota, Los Gatos; I>aTid Kuty, Felton, and Malcolm 
Kinter, Sunnyvale, all of Calif., assignors to Timex Corpora- 
tion, Waterbury, Conn. 

Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,136 

Int. d? H05K 5/06 

UJS. Q. 368—239 28 Qaims 




/ 



1. An electronic timepiece comprising: 

time counter means for counting a reference frequency 
signal to form time data; 

time display means coupled to said time counter means for 
displaying said time data; 

first converting means for converting an externally provided 
voice sound into voice data; 

a semiconductor memory coupled to said first converting 
means for storing said voice data; 

address assigning means coupled to said semiconductor 
memory for sequentially assigning addresses of said semi- 
conductor memory; 

second converting means coupled to said semiconductor 
memory for converting said voice data stored in said 
semiconductor memory into a voice signal; 

voice reproducing means coupled to said second converting 
means for generating a voice sound in accordance with 
said voice signal; 

externally operable switch means for enabling said semicon- 
ductor memory to store said voice data; 

voice data writing instructing means coupled to said exter- 
nally operable switch means and to said address assigning 
means for supplying a writing instruction signal, gener- 
ated by operating said externally operable switch means, 
to said address assigning means and to said first converting 
means to enable storing of said voice data from said first 
converting means in said semiconductor memory; 

alarm signal generating means coupled to said time counter 
means for generating an alarm signal when said time data 
coincides with a predetermined alarm time; and 

voice readout control means coupled to said alarm signal 
generating means for supplying said alarm signal as a 
readout instruction signal to said address assigning means 
and to said second converting means to enable said second 
converting means to convert said voice data stored in said 
semiconductor memory into said voice signal so that said 
voice reproducing means generates a voice sound corre- 
sponding to said voice signal. 



«?w., 




1. 

ing: 

a. 



A subassembly for an electronic display device, compris- 

a conductive lead frame carrying an integrated circuit 
chip and having a plurality of spaced conductor members 
each with an inner end connected electrically to said chip 
and each with an outer end formed into a resilient contact 
finger, the contact fingers being arranged in a preselected 
pattern to define an enclosure, and 
an electrooptical display having longitudinal edges posi- 
tioned within said enclosure, said display having display 
electrodes and a plurality of contact terminals connected 
to said electrodes and spaced along its edges in such a 
pattern that each resilient contact finger of the lead frame 
frictionally engages a respective one of the contact termi- 
nals when the display is positioned in said enclosure, 
thereby establishing electrical connection therebetween 
and releasably holding the display between said contact 
fingers. 



4,391,532 
ELECTROMAGNETIC ACOUSTIC TRANSDUCER 
Yosbiaki Hara, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha 
Daini Seikosha, Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,161 

Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 22, 1980, 55-53189 

Int. Q.' G04C 21/16 

U.S. Q. 368—250 11 Qaims 




1. In an alarm electronic wristwatch having a watchcase: an 
electromagnetic acoustic transducer comprising a base plate 
having an upper surface and an undersurface and having a 



96 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



plurality of upstanding projections projecting upwardly from 
the upper surface, a magnetic core, an excitation coil surround- 
ing the magnetic core, a set of permanent magnets, the core, 
coil and permanent magnets all being supported by the base 
plate, a vibratory plate mounted in spaced relation from the 
magnetic core to undergo vibfation in response to the applica- 
tion of a drive signal to the excitation coil, a support frame of 
generally circular shape extending around the base plate and 
having an opening therethrough, a lead substrate comprised of 
flexible material mounted on the upper surface of the base plate 
and having a lead substrate extension projecting through the 
support frame opening and having a plurality of openings 
receiving therein respective ones of the base plate projections, 
the base plate projections cooperating with the lead substrate 
openings to position the lead substrate on the base plate at a 
predetermined position, an electrode pattern on the lead sub- 
strate, and means electrically connecting at least one of the 
terminals of the excitation coil to the electrode pattern for 
applying drive signals to the excitation coil; means mounting 
the electromagnetic acoustic transducer within the watchcase 
with the undersurface of the base plate disposed opposite an 
inner surface of the watchcase; and a circuit block connected 
to the lead substrate extension projecting through the opening 
of the support frame for generating drive signals at pre- 
selected alarm times and applying the drive signals to the 
electrode pattern to thereby activate the transducer. 



thereof, a first packing disposed between said watch case and 
bezel, and a second packing disposed between said bezel and 
glass, said watch case having an upper receiving portion, an 
axially extending inside engaging portion, an annular groove 
provided in a lower portion of said axially extending inside 
engaging portion, and a lower receiving portion laterally ex- 
tending from a lower portion of said annular groove, said bezel 
having a peripheral engaging portion for engaging said first 
packing, a lower portion opposite said annular groove, a bev- 
eled guiding portion at the lower end of said peripheral engag- 
ing portion which is positioned lower than the upper edge of 
said annular groove, an underside portion laterally extending 
from the upper end of said engaging portion which overlaps 
and contacts said upper receiving portion of said watch case. 



20e 



20g 




4,391,533 
BACK COVER nXING STRUCTURE FOR WRISTWATCH 

M asahiko Waki, Tanashi, Japan, assignor to Citizen Watch Co. 
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,167 

Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 17, 1981, 56-21049 

Int. CV G04B 37/00 

U.S. a. 368—281 5 Qaims 



r30d 



i^^^D^] 



30D 30t) 

30a 30a 

30D 
30b 



3ua 



30 



30c 



1. A back cover fixing structure for a wristwatch compris- 
ing: 

a case band having an inner wall and an outer wall and 
having a plurality of projecting portions on said inner 
wall, in which said projecting portions project inwardly 
toward a center of said case band, each of said inwardly 
projecting portions having a screw hole; 

a back cover having a plurality of throughholes provided at 
positions corresponding to the screw holes of said in- 
wardly projecting portions; and 

a plurality of screws set in the screw holes of said inwardly 
projecting portions through the throughholes of said back 
cover for fixing said back cover to said case band. 



and an inside annular groove for receiving said second pack- 
ing, the upper boundary of said annular groove for receiving 
said second packing being spaced from said glass at all times so 
as not to contact the upper edge beveled portion, the lower 
boundary of said annular groove for said second packing being 
extended to the underside of said glass, said bezel being in- 
serted from the upper edge of said first packing thereinto, so 
that a lower portion of said first packing is expanded into said 
annular groove of the watch case, whereby when said bezel is 
removed from said watch case, said first packing is held in said 
watch case, said glass being downwardly inserted into the 
second packing, so that a periphery of the glass dents in said 
second packing and that the upper portion of said second 
packing presses down on the beveled portion of said upper 
edge. 

4,391,535 

METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE 

AREA OF A THERMAL PRINT MEDIUM THAT IS 

EXPOSED BY A THERMAL PRINTER 

Roger C. Palmer, Edmonds, Wash., assignor to Intermec Corpo- 
ration, Lynnwood, Wash. 

Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,625 

Int. a.3 B41J 3/20 

U.S. a. 400—120 10 Claims 






fUBfrMTF 42 



'^^- $l/SS7X4r£ 42 

— vv<^^ — 



Of swat; 40 



mro 






T 



3frwf£/l/ fi/lSrMZ 42 
AA/D&ae4^40 

/ 

'W^ 



4 391 534 
GLASS MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR WATCHES 

Osamu Matsumura, and Masataka Matsumoto, both of Tanashi, 

Japan, assignors to Citizen Watch Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan 

Continuation of Ser. No. 114,743, Jan. 24, 1980. This application 

Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 289,840 

Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 27, 1979, 54-9027[U] 

Int. Q\? G04B 39/02 

U.S. a. 368—294 7 Oaims 

1. A glass mounting structure comprising a watch case, a 

bezel, a glass having beveled portions at upper and lower edges 






/^£)ir/LOSS 



ro /jftrve /a 



1. An apparatus for controlling the area of a thermal print 
medium that is exposed by a thermal printer, the thermal print 
medium being such that any portion thereof is exposed when 
its temperature equals or exceeds a predetermined threshold 
temperature, the thermal printer including an electrically-resis- 
tive thermal print element having a surface that is in good 
thermal contact with the thermal print medium and that has an 
area equal to the desired exposure area of the thermal print 



July 5, 1983 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



197 



medium, the thermal printer further including driver means for 
applying an electrical signal having a substantially constant 
amplitude to the thermal print element, said apparatus com- 
prising: 

electrical energy storage means representing the thermal mass 
of the thermal print element, said electrical energy storage 
means being adapted to provide a first signal whose ampli- 
tude is proportional to the instantaneous amount of electrical 
energy stored in said electrical energy storage means; 
first means for transferring electrical energy into said electrical 
energy storage means at a rate proportional to the power 
being supplied to the thermal print element by the applica- 
tion of said substantially constant amplitude electrical signal 
thereto; 
second means transferring electrical energy to and from said 
electrical energy storage means in relation to the heat trans- 
ferred between the thermal print element and the environ- 
ment in heat transfer relationship with the thermal print 
element, whereby the amplitude of said first signal is propor- 
tional to the instantaneous temperature of the thermal print 
element; 
third means providing a second signal whose amplitude is 
related to the threshold temperature of the thermal print 
medium; and, 
fourth means concurrently enabling the driver means of the 
thermal printer and said first means, and concurrently dis- 
abling the driver means of the thermal printer and said first 
means whenever the amplitude of said first signal exceeds 
that of said second signal. 



to said layer, said reservoir containing a porous material 
impregnated with said coloring material. 



' ! 4,391,537 

SELECTIVELY ALtERING THE BULK PROPERTIES OF 

POLYMER STRUCTURES 
William M. Prest, Jr., and Frederick J. Roberts, Jr., both of 
Webster, N.Y., assignors to Xerox Corporation, Stamford, 
Conn. 

Filed Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 327,147 

Int. a.3 B41J 1/30: B05D 3/06 

U.S. a. 400—144.2 18 Qaims 



4,391,536 
WORD PROCESSOR PRINT WHEEL ASSEMBLY 

Michael Miiller, Wadenswil; Herbert Scherrer, Uster, and 
Erwin Kagi, Volketswil, all of Switzerland, assignors to Franz 
Buttner AG, Zurich, Switzerland 

Filed Sep. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 298,307 
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 2, 1980, 
6608/80 , 

Int. a.3 B41J 1/30. 27/04 I 

U.S. a. 400—144.2 10 Claims 






1. A method for selectively hardening and toughening the 
bulk mass of the character fonts on a polymeric print wheel 
without adversely affecting the fiexibility and strength of the 
remaining portions of the print wheel which comprises con- 
tacting the character fonts of the print wheel with a multifunc- 
tional monomer for a time sufficient to diffuse said monomer 
into said fonts and irradiating the character fonts with activat- 
ing radiation to cause the bulk of the fonts to be hardened and 
toughened. 



I 4,391,538 
SERIAL PRINTER 
Hiroshi Miyano, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Alps Electric 
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,299 
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 22, 1980, 55-100409 
Int. a.' B41J 1/30 
U.S. a. 400—145.1 12 Qaims 



1. A print wheel assembly for a printer of a word processing 
machine or the like, comprising: 

a type disk formed unitarily with a hub and a peripheral 
array of laterally deflectible typefaces connected to said 
hub; 

an annular color-transfer layer connected to said disk and 
overlying said typefaces for juxtaposition with a paper 
onto which images of said typefaces are to be transferred 
by impact, said transfer layer being provided on a carrier 
rotatably mounted on said hub and angularly shiftable 
relative to said disk upon rotation thereof to offset succes- 
sive points of conuct between said typefaces and the 
layer; and 

an annular reservoir on said carrier and rotatably mounted 

thereby on said disk containing flowable coloring material 

I and connected to said layer for transferring said material 




1. A type wheel for a serial printer including a disc -shaped 
member having a plurality of ap)ertures spaced circumferen- 
tially around the outer portion thereof, a plurality of dome 
members each covering a respective aperture and formed of a 
resilient material enabling each dome member to be deflected 
inwardly toward the respective aperture by a snap action 
substantially instantaneously upon application of a sufficient 
pressing force and then to be returned to its initial position by 
its resilience, and a plurality of type elements each connected 
with the inner surface of a respective dome member and mov- 
able out of the plane of said disc-shaped member upon inner 
defiection of the respective dome member. 



198 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



July 5, 1983 



4,391,539 
TAPE-RIBBON PRINTING CARTRIDGE 
Thomas P. Connoy, Lino Lakes, Minn., assignor to Kroy Inc., 
St. Paul, Minn. 

Filed May 23, 1980, Ser. No. 152,709 

Int. a.^ B41J 33/14 

U.S. O. 400—208 9 Qaims 




1. A printing cartridge for supplying image carrying tape 
and printing ribbon to a printing station in a printing apparatus 
comprising: 

a substantially closed cartridge housing having a pair of side 
walls and an edge wall extending about the periphery of 
said side walls, said cartridge housing including a tape and 
ribbon supply section and an elongated guide section, 
rigidly and integrally joined with, and extending out- 
wardly from, said tape and ribbon supply section for 
guiding said image carrying tape and printing ribbon, one 
above the other such that a first flat face of said printing 
ribbon is superimposed over a first flat face of said image 
carrying tape, from said tape and ribbon supply section 
toward the printing station of said printing apparatus; 

a supply of image carrying tape disposed within said tape 
and ribbon supply section; 

a supply of printing ribbon disposed within said tape and 
ribbon supply section; 

limit means for limiting movement of said image carrying 
tape from said tape and ribbon supply section in a gener- 
ally forward direction and preventing movement of said 
image carrying tape in a rearward direction, said limit 
means including a bias resisting member disposed between 
and at right angles to said side walls and between a portion 
of said image carrying tape and said printing ribbon and 
bias means for biasing said image carrying tape against 
said bias resisting member, said bias means including a leaf 
spring having one end engaging and biasing said image 
carrying tape against said bias resisting member. 



4,391,540 
WFTHIN-LINE COLOR CHANGE PRINTING 
Edward C. Dougherty, Dracut, Mass., assignor to Centronics 
Data Computer Corporation, Hudson, N.H. 

FUed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,483 

Int. a.3 B41J 35/14. 35/16 

U.S. a. 400—212 8 Qaims 



-C 



£ 



d 



-ctQ-. 



E 



h- 



^^ 



printhead is traversed on stationary guide means along a paper- 
supporting platen to form characters by driving a printing 
element against an inked ribbon interposed between the print- 
head and the pap)er, apparatus for shifting the ribbon to bring 
different colored portions into alignment with the printing 
head, said apparatus comprising: 

means for effecting a change of color within a single line 
from at least four colors of a multi-color ribbon during 
carriage traverse and printing of that line entirely indepen- 
dent of the position of the carriage along the line includ- 
ing; 
a cable extending generally from one end of the platen to the 

other; 
mounted on said carriage, at least a pair of pulleys over 
which said cable passes, at least one of said pulleys being 
mounted so as to be movable with respect to the other as 
a function of the free length of said cable; 
an electromagnetically controlled attachment means for one 
end of said cable having first and second states, a change 
between said first and second states providing a predeter- 
mined change of a first value in the free length of said 
cable, said attachment means being fixedly mounted with 
respect to said guide means; 
a second electromagnetically controlled attachment means 
for the other end of said cable also having first and second 
states, a change between said first and second states of said 
second attachment means providing a predetermined 
change of a second value in the free length of said cable, 
said second value being different from said first value so 
that four different combinations of free length of said 
cable can be realized, said second attachment means also 
being fixedly mounted with respect to said guide means; 
means for variably positioning to at least four positions said 
multi-color ribbon of at least four colors between said 
printing element and said platen, said multi-color ribbon 
being contained in a changeable cassette; and 
means coupling said p